ignore binary and reference

1 files changed, 0 insertions, 33445 deletions

@@ -1,33445 +0,0 @@
-Xlib - C Language X Interface
-
-X Consortium Standard
-
-James Gettys
-
-   Digital Equipment Corporation
-   Cambridge Research Laboratory
-
-Robert W. Scheifler
-
-   Massachusetts Institute of Technology
-   Laboratory for Computer Science
-
-Chuck Adams
-
-   Tektronix, Inc.
-
-Vania Joloboff
-
-   Open Software Foundation
-
-Hideki Hiura
-
-   Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-
-Bill McMahon
-
-   Hewlett-Packard Company
-
-Ron Newman
-
-   Massachusetts Institute of Technology
-
-Al Tabayoyon
-
-   Tektronix, Inc.
-
-Glenn Widener
-
-   Tektronix, Inc.
-
-Shigeru Yamada
-
-   Fujitsu OSSI
-
-   X Version 11, Release 7.7
-
-   Copyright © 1985, 1986, 1987, 1988, 1989, 1991, 1994, 1996,
-   2002 The Open Group
-
-   Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person
-   obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation
-   files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without
-   restriction, including without limitation the rights to use,
-   copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
-   sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the
-   Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following
-   conditions:
-
-   The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
-   included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
-
-   THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-   EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
-   OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
-   NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OPEN GROUP BE LIABLE FOR
-   ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
-   CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
-   CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN
-   THE SOFTWARE.
-
-   Except as contained in this notice, the name of The Open Group
-   shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the
-   sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior
-   written authorization from The Open Group.
-
-   Copyright © 1985, 1986, 1987, 1988, 1989, 1991 Digital
-   Equipment Corporation
-
-   Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this
-   documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
-   granted, provided that the above copyright notice appears in
-   all copies and that both that copyright notice and this
-   permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that
-   the names of Digital and Tetronix not be used in in advertising
-   or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without
-   specific, written prior permission. Digital and Tetronix make
-   no representations about the suitability of the software
-   described herein for any purpose. It is provided "as is"
-   without express or implied warranty.
-
-   TekHVC is a trademark of Tektronix, Inc.
-     __________________________________________________________
-
-   Table of Contents
-
-   Acknowledgments
-   1. Introduction to Xlib
-
-        Overview of the X Window System
-        Errors
-        Standard Header Files
-        Generic Values and Types
-        Naming and Argument Conventions within Xlib
-        Programming Considerations
-        Character Sets and Encodings
-        Formatting Conventions
-
-   2. Display Functions
-
-        Opening the Display
-        Obtaining Information about the Display, Image Formats, or
-                Screens
-
-              Display Macros
-              Image Format Functions and Macros
-              Screen Information Macros
-
-        Generating a NoOperation Protocol Request
-        Freeing Client-Created Data
-        Closing the Display
-        Using X Server Connection Close Operations
-        Using Xlib with Threads
-        Using Internal Connections
-
-   3. Window Functions
-
-        Visual Types
-        Window Attributes
-
-              Background Attribute
-              Border Attribute
-              Gravity Attributes
-              Backing Store Attribute
-              Save Under Flag
-              Backing Planes and Backing Pixel Attributes
-              Event Mask and Do Not Propagate Mask Attributes
-              Override Redirect Flag
-              Colormap Attribute
-              Cursor Attribute
-
-        Creating Windows
-        Destroying Windows
-        Mapping Windows
-        Unmapping Windows
-        Configuring Windows
-        Changing Window Stacking Order
-        Changing Window Attributes
-
-   4. Window Information Functions
-
-        Obtaining Window Information
-        Translating Screen Coordinates
-        Properties and Atoms
-        Obtaining and Changing Window Properties
-        Selections
-
-   5. Pixmap and Cursor Functions
-
-        Creating and Freeing Pixmaps
-        Creating, Recoloring, and Freeing Cursors
-
-   6. Color Management Functions
-
-        Color Structures
-        Color Strings
-
-              RGB Device String Specification
-              RGB Intensity String Specification
-              Device-Independent String Specifications
-
-        Color Conversion Contexts and Gamut Mapping
-        Creating, Copying, and Destroying Colormaps
-        Mapping Color Names to Values
-        Allocating and Freeing Color Cells
-        Modifying and Querying Colormap Cells
-        Color Conversion Context Functions
-
-              Getting and Setting the Color Conversion Context of
-                      a Colormap
-
-              Obtaining the Default Color Conversion Context
-              Color Conversion Context Macros
-              Modifying Attributes of a Color Conversion Context
-              Creating and Freeing a Color Conversion Context
-
-        Converting between Color Spaces
-        Callback Functions
-
-              Prototype Gamut Compression Procedure
-              Supplied Gamut Compression Procedures
-              Prototype White Point Adjustment Procedure
-              Supplied White Point Adjustment Procedures
-
-        Gamut Querying Functions
-
-              Red, Green, and Blue Queries
-              CIELab Queries
-              CIELuv Queries
-              TekHVC Queries
-
-        Color Management Extensions
-
-              Color Spaces
-              Adding Device-Independent Color Spaces
-              Querying Color Space Format and Prefix
-              Creating Additional Color Spaces
-              Parse String Callback
-              Color Specification Conversion Callback
-              Function Sets
-              Adding Function Sets
-              Creating Additional Function Sets
-
-   7. Graphics Context Functions
-
-        Manipulating Graphics Context/State
-        Using Graphics Context Convenience Routines
-
-              Setting the Foreground, Background, Function, or
-                      Plane Mask
-
-              Setting the Line Attributes and Dashes
-              Setting the Fill Style and Fill Rule
-              Setting the Fill Tile and Stipple
-              Setting the Current Font
-              Setting the Clip Region
-              Setting the Arc Mode, Subwindow Mode, and Graphics
-                      Exposure
-
-   8. Graphics Functions
-
-        Clearing Areas
-        Copying Areas
-        Drawing Points, Lines, Rectangles, and Arcs
-
-              Drawing Single and Multiple Points
-              Drawing Single and Multiple Lines
-              Drawing Single and Multiple Rectangles
-              Drawing Single and Multiple Arcs
-
-        Filling Areas
-
-              Filling Single and Multiple Rectangles
-              Filling a Single Polygon
-              Filling Single and Multiple Arcs
-
-        Font Metrics
-
-              Loading and Freeing Fonts
-              Obtaining and Freeing Font Names and Information
-              Computing Character String Sizes
-              Computing Logical Extents
-              Querying Character String Sizes
-
-        Drawing Text
-
-              Drawing Complex Text
-              Drawing Text Characters
-              Drawing Image Text Characters
-
-        Transferring Images between Client and Server
-
-   9. Window and Session Manager Functions
-
-        Changing the Parent of a Window
-        Controlling the Lifetime of a Window
-        Managing Installed Colormaps
-        Setting and Retrieving the Font Search Path
-        Grabbing the Server
-        Killing Clients
-        Controlling the Screen Saver
-        Controlling Host Access
-
-              Adding, Getting, or Removing Hosts
-              Changing, Enabling, or Disabling Access Control
-
-   10. Events
-
-        Event Types
-        Event Structures
-        Event Masks
-        Event Processing Overview
-        Keyboard and Pointer Events
-
-              Pointer Button Events
-              Keyboard and Pointer Events
-
-        Window Entry/Exit Events
-
-              Normal Entry/Exit Events
-              Grab and Ungrab Entry/Exit Events
-
-        Input Focus Events
-
-              Normal Focus Events and Focus Events While Grabbed
-              Focus Events Generated by Grabs
-
-        Key Map State Notification Events
-        Exposure Events
-
-              Expose Events
-              GraphicsExpose and NoExpose Events
-
-        Window State Change Events
-
-              CirculateNotify Events
-              ConfigureNotify Events
-              CreateNotify Events
-              DestroyNotify Events
-              GravityNotify Events
-              MapNotify Events
-              MappingNotify Events
-              ReparentNotify Events
-              UnmapNotify Events
-              VisibilityNotify Events
-
-        Structure Control Events
-
-              CirculateRequest Events
-              ConfigureRequest Events
-              MapRequest Events
-              ResizeRequest Events
-
-        Colormap State Change Events
-        Client Communication Events
-
-              ClientMessage Events
-              PropertyNotify Events
-              SelectionClear Events
-              SelectionRequest Events
-              SelectionNotify Events
-
-   11. Event Handling Functions
-
-        Selecting Events
-        Handling the Output Buffer
-        Event Queue Management
-        Manipulating the Event Queue
-
-              Returning the Next Event
-              Selecting Events Using a Predicate Procedure
-              Selecting Events Using a Window or Event Mask
-
-        Putting an Event Back into the Queue
-        Sending Events to Other Applications
-        Getting Pointer Motion History
-        Handling Protocol Errors
-
-              Enabling or Disabling Synchronization
-              Using the Default Error Handlers
-
-   12. Input Device Functions
-
-        Pointer Grabbing
-        Keyboard Grabbing
-        Resuming Event Processing
-        Moving the Pointer
-        Controlling Input Focus
-        Manipulating the Keyboard and Pointer Settings
-        Manipulating the Keyboard Encoding
-
-   13. Locales and Internationalized Text Functions
-
-        X Locale Management
-        Locale and Modifier Dependencies
-        Variable Argument Lists
-        Output Methods
-
-              Output Method Overview
-              Output Method Functions
-              X Output Method Values
-              Output Context Functions
-              Output Context Values
-              Creating and Freeing a Font Set
-              Obtaining Font Set Metrics
-              Drawing Text Using Font Sets
-
-        Input Methods
-
-              Input Method Overview
-              Input Method Management
-              Input Method Functions
-              Input Method Values
-              Input Context Functions
-              Input Context Values
-              Input Method Callback Semantics
-              Event Filtering
-              Getting Keyboard Input
-              Input Method Conventions
-
-        String Constants
-
-   14. Inter-Client Communication Functions
-
-        Client to Window Manager Communication
-
-              Manipulating Top-Level Windows
-              Converting String Lists
-              Setting and Reading Text Properties
-              Setting and Reading the WM_NAME Property
-              Setting and Reading the WM_ICON_NAME Property
-              Setting and Reading the WM_HINTS Property
-              Setting and Reading the WM_NORMAL_HINTS Property
-              Setting and Reading the WM_CLASS Property
-              Setting and Reading the WM_TRANSIENT_FOR Property
-              Setting and Reading the WM_PROTOCOLS Property
-              Setting and Reading the WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS Property
-              Setting and Reading the WM_ICON_SIZE Property
-              Using Window Manager Convenience Functions
-
-        Client to Session Manager Communication
-
-              Setting and Reading the WM_COMMAND Property
-              Setting and Reading the WM_CLIENT_MACHINE Property
-
-        Standard Colormaps
-
-              Standard Colormap Properties and Atoms
-              Setting and Obtaining Standard Colormaps
-
-   15. Resource Manager Functions
-
-        Resource File Syntax
-        Resource Manager Matching Rules
-        Quarks
-        Creating and Storing Databases
-        Merging Resource Databases
-        Looking Up Resources
-        Storing into a Resource Database
-        Enumerating Database Entries
-        Parsing Command Line Options
-
-   16. Application Utility Functions
-
-        Using Keyboard Utility Functions
-
-              KeySym Classification Macros
-
-        Using Latin-1 Keyboard Event Functions
-        Allocating Permanent Storage
-        Parsing the Window Geometry
-        Manipulating Regions
-
-              Creating, Copying, or Destroying Regions
-              Moving or Shrinking Regions
-              Computing with Regions
-              Determining if Regions Are Empty or Equal
-              Locating a Point or a Rectangle in a Region
-
-        Using Cut Buffers
-        Determining the Appropriate Visual Type
-        Manipulating Images
-        Manipulating Bitmaps
-        Using the Context Manager
-
-   A. Xlib Functions and Protocol Requests
-   B. X Font Cursors
-   C. Extensions
-
-        Basic Protocol Support Routines
-        Hooking into Xlib
-
-              Hooks into the Library
-              Hooks onto Xlib Data Structures
-
-        GC Caching
-        Graphics Batching
-        Writing Extension Stubs
-
-              Requests, Replies, and Xproto.h
-              Request Format
-              Starting to Write a Stub Procedure
-              Locking Data Structures
-              Sending the Protocol Request and Arguments
-              Variable Length Arguments
-              Replies
-              Synchronous Calling
-              Allocating and Deallocating Memory
-              Portability Considerations
-              Deriving the Correct Extension Opcode
-
-   D. Compatibility Functions
-
-        X Version 11 Compatibility Functions
-
-              Setting Standard Properties
-              Setting and Getting Window Sizing Hints
-              Getting and Setting an XStandardColormap Structure
-              Parsing Window Geometry
-              Getting the X Environment Defaults
-
-        X Version 10 Compatibility Functions
-
-              Drawing and Filling Polygons and Curves
-              Associating User Data with a Value
-
-   Glossary
-   Index
-
-   List of Tables
-
-   A.1. Protocol requests made by each Xlib function
-   A.2. Xlib functions which use each Protocol Request
-
-Acknowledgments
-
-   The design and implementation of the first 10 versions of X
-   were primarily the work of three individuals: Robert Scheifler
-   of the MIT Laboratory for Computer Science and Jim Gettys of
-   Digital Equipment Corporation and Ron Newman of MIT, both at
-   MIT Project Athena. X version 11, however, is the result of the
-   efforts of dozens of individuals at almost as many locations
-   and organizations. At the risk of offending some of the players
-   by exclusion, we would like to acknowledge some of the people
-   who deserve special credit and recognition for their work on
-   Xlib. Our apologies to anyone inadvertently overlooked.
-
-Release 1
-
-   Our thanks does to Ron Newman (MIT Project Athena), who
-   contributed substantially to the design and implementation of
-   the Version 11 Xlib interface.
-
-   Our thanks also goes to Ralph Swick (Project Athena and
-   Digital) who kept it all together for us during the early
-   releases. He handled literally thousands of requests from
-   people everywhere and saved the sanity of at least one of us.
-   His calm good cheer was a foundation on which we could build.
-
-   Our thanks also goes to Todd Brunhoff (Tektronix) who was
-   ``loaned'' to Project Athena at exactly the right moment to
-   provide very capable and much-needed assistance during the
-   alpha and beta releases. He was responsible for the successful
-   integration of sources from multiple sites; we would not have
-   had a release without him.
-
-   Our thanks also goes to Al Mento and Al Wojtas of Digital's
-   ULTRIX Documentation Group. With good humor and cheer, they
-   took a rough draft and made it an infinitely better and more
-   useful document. The work they have done will help many
-   everywhere. We also would like to thank Hal Murray (Digital
-   SRC) and Peter George (Digital VMS) who contributed much by
-   proofreading the early drafts of this document.
-
-   Our thanks also goes to Jeff Dike (Digital UEG), Tom Benson,
-   Jackie Granfield, and Vince Orgovan (Digital VMS) who helped
-   with the library utilities implementation; to Hania Gajewska
-   (Digital UEG-WSL) who, along with Ellis Cohen (CMU and
-   Siemens), was instrumental in the semantic design of the window
-   manager properties; and to Dave Rosenthal (Sun Microsystems)
-   who also contributed to the protocol and provided the sample
-   generic color frame buffer device-dependent code.
-
-   The alpha and beta test participants deserve special
-   recognition and thanks as well. It is significant that the bug
-   reports (and many fixes) during alpha and beta test came almost
-   exclusively from just a few of the alpha testers, mostly
-   hardware vendors working on product implementations of X. The
-   continued public contribution of vendors and universities is
-   certainly to the benefit of the entire X community.
-
-   Our special thanks must go to Sam Fuller, Vice-President of
-   Corporate Research at Digital, who has remained committed to
-   the widest public availability of X and who made it possible to
-   greatly supplement MIT's resources with the Digital staff in
-   order to make version 11 a reality. Many of the people
-   mentioned here are part of the Western Software Laboratory
-   (Digital UEG-WSL) of the ULTRIX Engineering group and work for
-   Smokey Wallace, who has been vital to the project's success.
-   Others not mentioned here worked on the toolkit and are
-   acknowledged in the X Toolkit documentation.
-
-   Of course, we must particularly thank Paul Asente, formerly of
-   Stanford University and now of Digital UEG-WSL, who wrote W,
-   the predecessor to X, and Brian Reid, formerly of Stanford
-   University and now of Digital WRL, who had much to do with W's
-   design.
-
-   Finally, our thanks goes to MIT, Digital Equipment Corporation,
-   and IBM for providing the environment where it could happen.
-
-Release 4
-
-   Our thanks go to Jim Fulton (MIT X Consortium) for designing
-   and specifying the new Xlib functions for Inter-Client
-   Communication Conventions (ICCCM) support.
-
-   We also thank Al Mento of Digital for his continued effort in
-   maintaining this document and Jim Fulton and Donna Converse
-   (MIT X Consortium) for their much-appreciated efforts in
-   reviewing the changes.
-
-Release 5
-
-   The principal authors of the Input Method facilities are Vania
-   Joloboff (Open Software Foundation) and Bill McMahon
-   (Hewlett-Packard). The principal author of the rest of the
-   internationalization facilities is Glenn Widener (Tektronix).
-   Our thanks to them for keeping their sense of humor through a
-   long and sometimes difficult design process. Although the words
-   and much of the design are due to them, many others have
-   contributed substantially to the design and implementation. Tom
-   McFarland (HP) and Frank Rojas (IBM) deserve particular
-   recognition for their contributions. Other contributors were:
-   Tim Anderson (Motorola), Alka Badshah (OSF), Gabe Beged-Dov
-   (HP), Chih-Chung Ko (III), Vera Cheng (III), Michael Collins
-   (Digital), Walt Daniels (IBM), Noritoshi Demizu (OMRON),
-   Keisuke Fukui (Fujitsu), Hitoshoi Fukumoto (Nihon Sun), Tim
-   Greenwood (Digital), John Harvey (IBM), Hideki Hiura (Sun),
-   Fred Horman (AT&T), Norikazu Kaiya (Fujitsu), Yuji Kamata
-   (IBM), Yutaka Kataoka (Waseda University), Ranee Khubchandani
-   (Sun), Akira Kon (NEC), Hiroshi Kuribayashi (OMRON), Teruhiko
-   Kurosaka (Sun), Seiji Kuwari (OMRON), Sandra Martin (OSF),
-   Narita Masahiko (Fujitsu), Masato Morisaki (NTT), Nelson Ng
-   (Sun), Takashi Nishimura (NTT America), Makato Nishino (IBM),
-   Akira Ohsone (Nihon Sun), Chris Peterson (MIT), Sam Shteingart
-   (AT&T), Manish Sheth (AT&T), Muneiyoshi Suzuki (NTT), Cori
-   Mehring (Digital), Shoji Sugiyama (IBM), and Eiji Tosa (IBM).
-
-   We are deeply indebted to Tatsuya Kato (NTT), Hiroshi
-   Kuribayashi (OMRON), Seiji Kuwari (OMRON), Muneiyoshi Suzuki
-   (NTT), and Li Yuhong (OMRON) for producing one of the first
-   complete sample implementation of the internationalization
-   facilities, and Hiromu Inukai (Nihon Sun), Takashi Fujiwara
-   (Fujitsu), Hideki Hiura (Sun), Yasuhiro Kawai (Oki
-   Technosystems Laboratory), Kazunori Nishihara (Fuji Xerox),
-   Masaki Takeuchi (Sony), Katsuhisa Yano (Toshiba), Makoto
-   Wakamatsu (Sony Corporation) for producing the another complete
-   sample implementation of the internationalization facilities.
-
-   The principal authors (design and implementation) of the Xcms
-   color management facilities are Al Tabayoyon (Tektronix) and
-   Chuck Adams (Tektronix). Joann Taylor (Tektronix), Bob Toole
-   (Tektronix), and Keith Packard (MIT X Consortium) also
-   contributed significantly to the design. Others who contributed
-   are: Harold Boll (Kodak), Ken Bronstein (HP), Nancy Cam (SGI),
-   Donna Converse (MIT X Consortium), Elias Israel (ISC), Deron
-   Johnson (Sun), Jim King (Adobe), Ricardo Motta (HP), Chuck Peek
-   (IBM), Wil Plouffe (IBM), Dave Sternlicht (MIT X Consortium),
-   Kumar Talluri (AT&T), and Richard Verberg (IBM).
-
-   We also once again thank Al Mento of Digital for his work in
-   formatting and reformatting text for this manual, and for
-   producing man pages. Thanks also to Clive Feather (IXI) for
-   proof-reading and finding a number of small errors.
-
-Release 6
-
-   Stephen Gildea (X Consortium) authored the threads support.
-   Ovais Ashraf (Sun) and Greg Olsen (Sun) contributed
-   substantially by testing the facilities and reporting bugs in a
-   timely fashion.
-
-   The principal authors of the internationalization facilities,
-   including Input and Output Methods, are Hideki Hiura (SunSoft)
-   and Shigeru Yamada (Fujitsu OSSI). Although the words and much
-   of the design are due to them, many others have contributed
-   substantially to the design and implementation. They are:
-   Takashi Fujiwara (Fujitsu), Yoshio Horiuchi (IBM), Makoto Inada
-   (Digital), Hiromu Inukai (Nihon SunSoft), Song JaeKyung
-   (KAIST), Franky Ling (Digital), Tom McFarland (HP), Hiroyuki
-   Miyamoto (Digital), Masahiko Narita (Fujitsu), Frank Rojas
-   (IBM), Hidetoshi Tajima (HP), Masaki Takeuchi (Sony), Makoto
-   Wakamatsu (Sony), Masaki Wakao (IBM), Katsuhisa Yano(Toshiba)
-   and Jinsoo Yoon (KAIST).
-
-   The principal producers of the sample implementation of the
-   internationalization facilities are: Jeffrey Bloomfield
-   (Fujitsu OSSI), Takashi Fujiwara (Fujitsu), Hideki Hiura
-   (SunSoft), Yoshio Horiuchi (IBM), Makoto Inada (Digital),
-   Hiromu Inukai (Nihon SunSoft), Song JaeKyung (KAIST), Riki
-   Kawaguchi (Fujitsu), Franky Ling (Digital), Hiroyuki Miyamoto
-   (Digital), Hidetoshi Tajima (HP), Toshimitsu Terazono
-   (Fujitsu), Makoto Wakamatsu (Sony), Masaki Wakao (IBM), Shigeru
-   Yamada (Fujitsu OSSI) and Katsuhisa Yano (Toshiba).
-
-   The coordinators of the integration, testing, and release of
-   this implementation of the internationalization facilities are
-   Nobuyuki Tanaka (Sony) and Makoto Wakamatsu (Sony).
-
-   Others who have contributed to the architectural design or
-   testing of the sample implementation of the
-   internationalization facilities are: Hector Chan (Digital),
-   Michael Kung (IBM), Joseph Kwok (Digital), Hiroyuki Machida
-   (Sony), Nelson Ng (SunSoft), Frank Rojas (IBM), Yoshiyuki
-   Segawa (Fujitsu OSSI), Makiko Shimamura (Fujitsu), Shoji
-   Sugiyama (IBM), Lining Sun (SGI), Masaki Takeuchi (Sony),
-   Jinsoo Yoon (KAIST) and Akiyasu Zen (HP).
-
-   Jim Gettys
-   Cambridge Research Laboratory
-   Digital Equipment Corporation
-   Robert W. Scheifler
-   Laboratory for Computer Science
-   Massachusetts Institute of Technology
-
-Release 7
-
-   This document is made available to you in modern formats such
-   as HTML and PDF thanks to the efforts of Matt Dew, who
-   converted the original troff sources to DocBook/XML and edited
-   them into shape; along with Gaetan Nadon and Alan Coopersmith,
-   who set up the formatting machinery in the libX11 builds and
-   performed further editing of the DocBook markup.
-
-Chapter 1. Introduction to Xlib
-
-   Table of Contents
-
-   Overview of the X Window System
-   Errors
-   Standard Header Files
-   Generic Values and Types
-   Naming and Argument Conventions within Xlib
-   Programming Considerations
-   Character Sets and Encodings
-   Formatting Conventions
-
-   The X Window System is a network-transparent window system that
-   was designed at MIT. X display servers run on computers with
-   either monochrome or color bitmap display hardware. The server
-   distributes user input to and accepts output requests from
-   various client programs located either on the same machine or
-   elsewhere in the network. Xlib is a C subroutine library that
-   application programs (clients) use to interface with the window
-   system by means of a stream connection. Although a client
-   usually runs on the same machine as the X server it is talking
-   to, this need not be the case.
-
-   Xlib - C Language X Interface is a reference guide to the
-   low-level C language interface to the X Window System protocol.
-   It is neither a tutorial nor a user's guide to programming the
-   X Window System. Rather, it provides a detailed description of
-   each function in the library as well as a discussion of the
-   related background information. Xlib - C Language X Interface
-   assumes a basic understanding of a graphics window system and
-   of the C programming language. Other higher-level abstractions
-   (for example, those provided by the toolkits for X) are built
-   on top of the Xlib library. For further information about these
-   higher-level libraries, see the appropriate toolkit
-   documentation. The X Window System Protocol provides the
-   definitive word on the behavior of X. Although additional
-   information appears here, the protocol document is the ruling
-   document.
-
-   To provide an introduction to X programming, this chapter
-   discusses:
-     * Overview of the X Window System
-     * Errors
-     * Standard header files
-     * Generic values and types
-     * Naming and argument conventions within Xlib
-     * Programming considerations
-     * Character sets and encodings
-     * Formatting conventions
-
-Overview of the X Window System
-
-   Some of the terms used in this book are unique to X, and other
-   terms that are common to other window systems have different
-   meanings in X. You may find it helpful to refer to the
-   glossary, which is located at the end of the book.
-
-   The X Window System supports one or more screens containing
-   overlapping windows or subwindows. A screen is a physical
-   monitor and hardware that can be color, grayscale, or
-   monochrome. There can be multiple screens for each display or
-   workstation. A single X server can provide display services for
-   any number of screens. A set of screens for a single user with
-   one keyboard and one pointer (usually a mouse) is called a
-   display.
-
-   All the windows in an X server are arranged in strict
-   hierarchies. At the top of each hierarchy is a root window,
-   which covers each of the display screens. Each root window is
-   partially or completely covered by child windows. All windows,
-   except for root windows, have parents. There is usually at
-   least one window for each application program. Child windows
-   may in turn have their own children. In this way, an
-   application program can create an arbitrarily deep tree on each
-   screen. X provides graphics, text, and raster operations for
-   windows.
-
-   A child window can be larger than its parent. That is, part or
-   all of the child window can extend beyond the boundaries of the
-   parent, but all output to a window is clipped by its parent. If
-   several children of a window have overlapping locations, one of
-   the children is considered to be on top of or raised over the
-   others, thus obscuring them. Output to areas covered by other
-   windows is suppressed by the window system unless the window
-   has backing store. If a window is obscured by a second window,
-   the second window obscures only those ancestors of the second
-   window that are also ancestors of the first window.
-
-   A window has a border zero or more pixels in width, which can
-   be any pattern (pixmap) or solid color you like. A window
-   usually but not always has a background pattern, which will be
-   repainted by the window system when uncovered. Child windows
-   obscure their parents, and graphic operations in the parent
-   window usually are clipped by the children.
-
-   Each window and pixmap has its own coordinate system. The
-   coordinate system has the X axis horizontal and the Y axis
-   vertical with the origin [0, 0] at the upper-left corner.
-   Coordinates are integral, in terms of pixels, and coincide with
-   pixel centers. For a window, the origin is inside the border at
-   the inside, upper-left corner.
-
-   X does not guarantee to preserve the contents of windows. When
-   part or all of a window is hidden and then brought back onto
-   the screen, its contents may be lost. The server then sends the
-   client program an Expose event to notify it that part or all of
-   the window needs to be repainted. Programs must be prepared to
-   regenerate the contents of windows on demand.
-
-   X also provides off-screen storage of graphics objects, called
-   pixmaps. Single plane (depth 1) pixmaps are sometimes referred
-   to as bitmaps. Pixmaps can be used in most graphics functions
-   interchangeably with windows and are used in various graphics
-   operations to define patterns or tiles. Windows and pixmaps
-   together are referred to as drawables.
-
-   Most of the functions in Xlib just add requests to an output
-   buffer. These requests later execute asynchronously on the X
-   server. Functions that return values of information stored in
-   the server do not return (that is, they block) until an
-   explicit reply is received or an error occurs. You can provide
-   an error handler, which will be called when the error is
-   reported.
-
-   If a client does not want a request to execute asynchronously,
-   it can follow the request with a call to XSync, which blocks
-   until all previously buffered asynchronous events have been
-   sent and acted on. As an important side effect, the output
-   buffer in Xlib is always flushed by a call to any function that
-   returns a value from the server or waits for input.
-
-   Many Xlib functions will return an integer resource ID, which
-   allows you to refer to objects stored on the X server. These
-   can be of type Window, Font, Pixmap, Colormap, Cursor, and
-   GContext, as defined in the file <X11/X.h>. These resources are
-   created by requests and are destroyed (or freed) by requests or
-   when connections are closed. Most of these resources are
-   potentially sharable between applications, and in fact, windows
-   are manipulated explicitly by window manager programs. Fonts
-   and cursors are shared automatically across multiple screens.
-   Fonts are loaded and unloaded as needed and are shared by
-   multiple clients. Fonts are often cached in the server. Xlib
-   provides no support for sharing graphics contexts between
-   applications.
-
-   Client programs are informed of events. Events may either be
-   side effects of a request (for example, restacking windows
-   generates Expose events) or completely asynchronous (for
-   example, from the keyboard). A client program asks to be
-   informed of events. Because other applications can send events
-   to your application, programs must be prepared to handle (or
-   ignore) events of all types.
-
-   Input events (for example, a key pressed or the pointer moved)
-   arrive asynchronously from the server and are queued until they
-   are requested by an explicit call (for example, XNextEvent or
-   XWindowEvent). In addition, some library functions (for
-   example, XRaiseWindow) generate Expose and ConfigureRequest
-   events. These events also arrive asynchronously, but the client
-   may wish to explicitly wait for them by calling XSync after
-   calling a function that can cause the server to generate
-   events.
-
-Errors
-
-   Some functions return Status, an integer error indication. If
-   the function fails, it returns a zero. If the function returns
-   a status of zero, it has not updated the return arguments.
-   Because C does not provide multiple return values, many
-   functions must return their results by writing into
-   client-passed storage. By default, errors are handled either by
-   a standard library function or by one that you provide.
-   Functions that return pointers to strings return NULL pointers
-   if the string does not exist.
-
-   The X server reports protocol errors at the time that it
-   detects them. If more than one error could be generated for a
-   given request, the server can report any of them.
-
-   Because Xlib usually does not transmit requests to the server
-   immediately (that is, it buffers them), errors can be reported
-   much later than they actually occur. For debugging purposes,
-   however, Xlib provides a mechanism for forcing synchronous
-   behavior (see section 11.8.1). When synchronization is enabled,
-   errors are reported as they are generated.
-
-   When Xlib detects an error, it calls an error handler, which
-   your program can provide. If you do not provide an error
-   handler, the error is printed, and your program terminates.
-
-Standard Header Files
-
-   The following include files are part of the Xlib standard:
-
-   <X11/Xlib.h>
-
-   This is the main header file for Xlib. The majority of all Xlib
-   symbols are declared by including this file. This file also
-   contains the preprocessor symbol XlibSpecificationRelease. This
-   symbol is defined to have the 6 in this release of the
-   standard. (Release 5 of Xlib was the first release to have this
-   symbol.)
-
-   <X11/X.h>
-
-   This file declares types and constants for the X protocol that
-   are to be used by applications. It is included automatically
-   from <X11/Xlib.h> so application code should never need to
-   reference this file directly.
-
-   <X11/Xcms.h>
-
-   This file contains symbols for much of the color management
-   facilities described in chapter 6. All functions, types, and
-   symbols with the prefix "Xcms", plus the Color Conversion
-   Contexts macros, are declared in this file. <X11/Xlib.h> must
-   be included before including this file.
-
-   <X11/Xutil.h>
-
-   This file declares various functions, types, and symbols used
-   for inter-client communication and application utility
-   functions, which are described in chapters 14 and 16.
-   <X11/Xlib.h> must be included before including this file.
-
-   <X11/Xresource.h>
-
-   This file declares all functions, types, and symbols for the
-   resource manager facilities, which are described in chapter 15.
-   <X11/Xlib.h> must be included before including this file.
-
-   <X11/Xatom.h>
-
-   This file declares all predefined atoms, which are symbols with
-   the prefix "XA_".
-
-   <X11/cursorfont.h>
-
-   This file declares the cursor symbols for the standard cursor
-   font, which are listed in Appendix B. All cursor symbols have
-   the prefix "XC_".
-
-   <X11/keysymdef.h>
-
-   This file declares all standard KeySym values, which are
-   symbols with the prefix "XK_". The KeySyms are arranged in
-   groups, and a preprocessor symbol controls inclusion of each
-   group. The preprocessor symbol must be defined prior to
-   inclusion of the file to obtain the associated values. The
-   preprocessor symbols are XK_MISCELLANY, XK_XKB_KEYS, XK_3270,
-   XK_LATIN1, XK_LATIN2, XK_LATIN3, XK_LATIN4, XK_KATAKANA,
-   XK_ARABIC, XK_CYRILLIC, XK_GREEK, XK_TECHNICAL, XK_SPECIAL,
-   XK_PUBLISHING, XK_APL, XK_HEBREW, XK_THAI, and XK_KOREAN.
-
-   <X11/keysym.h>
-
-   This file defines the preprocessor symbols XK_MISCELLANY,
-   XK_XKB_KEYS, XK_LATIN1, XK_LATIN2, XK_LATIN3, XK_LATIN4, and
-   XK_GREEK and then includes <X11/keysymdef.h>.
-
-   <X11/Xlibint.h>
-
-   This file declares all the functions, types, and symbols used
-   for extensions, which are described in Appendix C. This file
-   automatically includes <X11/Xlib.h>.
-
-   <X11/Xproto.h>
-
-   This file declares types and symbols for the basic X protocol,
-   for use in implementing extensions. It is included
-   automatically from <X11/Xlibint.h>, so application and
-   extension code should never need to reference this file
-   directly.
-
-   <X11/Xprotostr.h>
-
-   This file declares types and symbols for the basic X protocol,
-   for use in implementing extensions. It is included
-   automatically from <X11/Xproto.h>, so application and extension
-   code should never need to reference this file directly.
-
-   <X11/X10.h>
-
-   This file declares all the functions, types, and symbols used
-   for the X10 compatibility functions, which are described in
-   Appendix D.
-
-Generic Values and Types
-
-   The following symbols are defined by Xlib and used throughout
-   the manual:
-     * Xlib defines the type Bool and the Boolean values True and
-       False.
-     * None is the universal null resource ID or atom.
-     * The type XID is used for generic resource IDs.
-     * The type XPointer is defined to be char* and is used as a
-       generic opaque pointer to data.
-
-Naming and Argument Conventions within Xlib
-
-   Xlib follows a number of conventions for the naming and syntax
-   of the functions. Given that you remember what information the
-   function requires, these conventions are intended to make the
-   syntax of the functions more predictable.
-
-   The major naming conventions are:
-     * To differentiate the X symbols from the other symbols, the
-       library uses mixed case for external symbols. It leaves
-       lowercase for variables and all uppercase for user macros,
-       as per existing convention.
-     * All Xlib functions begin with a capital X.
-     * The beginnings of all function names and symbols are
-       capitalized.
-     * All user-visible data structures begin with a capital X.
-       More generally, anything that a user might dereference
-       begins with a capital X.
-     * Macros and other symbols do not begin with a capital X. To
-       distinguish them from all user symbols, each word in the
-       macro is capitalized.
-     * All elements of or variables in a data structure are in
-       lowercase. Compound words, where needed, are constructed
-       with underscores (_).
-     * The display argument, where used, is always first in the
-       argument list.
-     * All resource objects, where used, occur at the beginning of
-       the argument list immediately after the display argument.
-     * When a graphics context is present together with another
-       type of resource (most commonly, a drawable), the graphics
-       context occurs in the argument list after the other
-       resource. Drawables outrank all other resources.
-     * Source arguments always precede the destination arguments
-       in the argument list.
-     * The x argument always precedes the y argument in the
-       argument list.
-     * The width argument always precedes the height argument in
-       the argument list.
-     * Where the x, y, width, and height arguments are used
-       together, the x and y arguments always precede the width
-       and height arguments.
-     * Where a mask is accompanied with a structure, the mask
-       always precedes the pointer to the structure in the
-       argument list.
-
-Programming Considerations
-
-   The major programming considerations are:
-     * Coordinates and sizes in X are actually 16-bit quantities.
-       This decision was made to minimize the bandwidth required
-       for a given level of performance. Coordinates usually are
-       declared as an int in the interface. Values larger than 16
-       bits are truncated silently. Sizes (width and height) are
-       declared as unsigned quantities.
-     * Keyboards are the greatest variable between different
-       manufacturers' workstations. If you want your program to be
-       portable, you should be particularly conservative here.
-     * Many display systems have limited amounts of off-screen
-       memory. If you can, you should minimize use of pixmaps and
-       backing store.
-     * The user should have control of their screen real estate.
-       Therefore, you should write your applications to react to
-       window management rather than presume control of the entire
-       screen. What you do inside of your top-level window,
-       however, is up to your application. For further
-       information, see chapter 14 and the Inter-Client
-       Communication Conventions Manual.
-
-Character Sets and Encodings
-
-   Some of the Xlib functions make reference to specific character
-   sets and character encodings. The following are the most
-   common:
-
-   X Portable Character Set
-
-   A basic set of 97 characters, which are assumed to exist in all
-   locales supported by Xlib. This set contains the following
-   characters:
-
-   a..z A..Z 0..9 !"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\\]^_`{|}~ <space>, <tab>
-   , and <newline>
-
-   This set is the left/lower half of the graphic character set of
-   ISO8859-1 plus space, tab, and newline. It is also the set of
-   graphic characters in 7-bit ASCII plus the same three control
-   characters. The actual encoding of these characters on the host
-   is system dependent.
-
-   Host Portable Character Encoding
-
-   The encoding of the X Portable Character Set on the host. The
-   encoding itself is not defined by this standard, but the
-   encoding must be the same in all locales supported by Xlib on
-   the host. If a string is said to be in the Host Portable
-   Character Encoding, then it only contains characters from the X
-   Portable Character Set, in the host encoding.
-
-   Latin-1
-
-   The coded character set defined by the ISO8859-1 standard.
-
-   Latin Portable Character Encoding
-
-   The encoding of the X Portable Character Set using the Latin-1
-   codepoints plus ASCII control characters. If a string is said
-   to be in the Latin Portable Character Encoding, then it only
-   contains characters from the X Portable Character Set, not all
-   of Latin-1.
-
-   STRING Encoding
-
-   Latin-1, plus tab and newline.
-
-   POSIX Portable Filename Character Set
-
-   The set of 65 characters, which can be used in naming files on
-   a POSIX-compliant host, that are correctly processed in all
-   locales. The set is:
-
-   a..z A..Z 0..9 ._-
-
-Formatting Conventions
-
-   Xlib - C Language X Interface uses the following conventions:
-     * Global symbols are printed in this special font. These can
-       be either function names, symbols defined in include files,
-       or structure names. When declared and defined, function
-       arguments are printed in italics. In the explanatory text
-       that follows, they usually are printed in regular type.
-     * Each function is introduced by a general discussion that
-       distinguishes it from other functions. The function
-       declaration itself follows, and each argument is
-       specifically explained. Although ANSI C function prototype
-       syntax is not used, Xlib header files normally declare
-       functions using function prototypes in ANSI C environments.
-       General discussion of the function, if any is required,
-       follows the arguments. Where applicable, the last paragraph
-       of the explanation lists the possible Xlib error codes that
-       the function can generate. For a complete discussion of the
-       Xlib error codes, see section 11.8.2.
-     * To eliminate any ambiguity between those arguments that you
-       pass and those that a function returns to you, the
-       explanations for all arguments that you pass start with the
-       word specifies or, in the case of multiple arguments, the
-       word specify. The explanations for all arguments that are
-       returned to you start with the word returns or, in the case
-       of multiple arguments, the word return. The explanations
-       for all arguments that you can pass and are returned start
-       with the words specifies and returns.
-     * Any pointer to a structure that is used to return a value
-       is designated as such by the _return suffix as part of its
-       name. All other pointers passed to these functions are used
-       for reading only. A few arguments use pointers to
-       structures that are used for both input and output and are
-       indicated by using the _in_out suffix.
-
-Chapter 2. Display Functions
-
-   Table of Contents
-
-   Opening the Display
-   Obtaining Information about the Display, Image Formats, or
-          Screens
-
-        Display Macros
-        Image Format Functions and Macros
-        Screen Information Macros
-
-   Generating a NoOperation Protocol Request
-   Freeing Client-Created Data
-   Closing the Display
-   Using X Server Connection Close Operations
-   Using Xlib with Threads
-   Using Internal Connections
-
-   Before your program can use a display, you must establish a
-   connection to the X server. Once you have established a
-   connection, you then can use the Xlib macros and functions
-   discussed in this chapter to return information about the
-   display. This chapter discusses how to:
-     * Open (connect to) the display
-     * Obtain information about the display, image formats, or
-       screens
-     * Generate a NoOperation protocol request
-     * Free client-created data
-     * Close (disconnect from) a display
-     * Use X Server connection close operations
-     * Use Xlib with threads
-     * Use internal connections
-
-Opening the Display
-
-   To open a connection to the X server that controls a display,
-   use XOpenDisplay.
-
-   Display *XOpenDisplay(char *display_name);
-
-   display_name
-
-   Specifies the hardware display name, which determines the
-   display and communications domain to be used. On a
-   POSIX-conformant system, if the display_name is NULL, it
-   defaults to the value of the DISPLAY environment variable.
-
-   The encoding and interpretation of the display name are
-   implementation-dependent. Strings in the Host Portable
-   Character Encoding are supported; support for other characters
-   is implementation-dependent. On POSIX-conformant systems, the
-   display name or DISPLAY environment variable can be a string in
-   the format:
-
-
-        protocol/hostname:number.screen_number
-
-   protocol
-
-   Specifies a protocol family or an alias for a protocol family.
-   Supported protocol families are implementation dependent. The
-   protocol entry is optional. If protocol is not specified, the /
-   separating protocol and hostname must also not be specified.
-
-   hostname
-
-   Specifies the name of the host machine on which the display is
-   physically attached. You follow the hostname with either a
-   single colon (:) or a double colon (::).
-
-   number
-
-   Specifies the number of the display server on that host
-   machine. You may optionally follow this display number with a
-   period (.). A single CPU can have more than one display.
-   Multiple displays are usually numbered starting with zero.
-
-   screen_number
-
-   Specifies the screen to be used on that server. Multiple
-   screens can be controlled by a single X server. The
-   screen_number sets an internal variable that can be accessed by
-   using the DefaultScreen macro or the XDefaultScreen function if
-   you are using languages other than C (see section 2.2.1).
-
-   For example, the following would specify screen 1 of display 0
-   on the machine named ``dual-headed'':
-
-dual-headed:0.1
-
-   The XOpenDisplay function returns a Display structure that
-   serves as the connection to the X server and that contains all
-   the information about that X server. XOpenDisplay connects your
-   application to the X server through TCP or DECnet
-   communications protocols, or through some local inter-process
-   communication protocol. If the protocol is specified as "tcp",
-   "inet", or "inet6", or if no protocol is specified and the
-   hostname is a host machine name and a single colon (:)
-   separates the hostname and display number, XOpenDisplay
-   connects using TCP streams. (If the protocol is specified as
-   "inet", TCP over IPv4 is used. If the protocol is specified as
-   "inet6", TCP over IPv6 is used. Otherwise, the implementation
-   determines which IP version is used.) If the hostname and
-   protocol are both not specified, Xlib uses whatever it believes
-   is the fastest transport. If the hostname is a host machine
-   name and a double colon (::) separates the hostname and display
-   number, XOpenDisplay connects using DECnet. A single X server
-   can support any or all of these transport mechanisms
-   simultaneously. A particular Xlib implementation can support
-   many more of these transport mechanisms.
-
-   If successful, XOpenDisplay returns a pointer to a Display
-   structure, which is defined in <X11/Xlib.h>. If XOpenDisplay
-   does not succeed, it returns NULL. After a successful call to
-   XOpenDisplay, all of the screens in the display can be used by
-   the client. The screen number specified in the display_name
-   argument is returned by the DefaultScreen macro (or the
-   XDefaultScreen function). You can access elements of the
-   Display and Screen structures only by using the information
-   macros or functions. For information about using macros and
-   functions to obtain information from the Display structure, see
-   section 2.2.1.
-
-   X servers may implement various types of access control
-   mechanisms (see section 9.8).
-
-Obtaining Information about the Display, Image Formats, or Screens
-
-   The Xlib library provides a number of useful macros and
-   corresponding functions that return data from the Display
-   structure. The macros are used for C programming, and their
-   corresponding function equivalents are for other language
-   bindings. This section discusses the:
-     * Display macros
-     * Image format functions and macros
-     * Screen information macros
-
-   All other members of the Display structure (that is, those for
-   which no macros are defined) are private to Xlib and must not
-   be used. Applications must never directly modify or inspect
-   these private members of the Display structure. The
-   XDisplayWidth, XDisplayHeight, XDisplayCells, XDisplayPlanes,
-   XDisplayWidthMM, and XDisplayHeightMM functions in the next
-   sections are misnamed. These functions really should be named
-   Screenwhatever and XScreenwhatever, not Displaywhatever or
-   XDisplaywhatever. Our apologies for the resulting confusion.
-
-Display Macros
-
-   Applications should not directly modify any part of the Display
-   and Screen structures. The members should be considered
-   read-only, although they may change as the result of other
-   operations on the display.
-
-   The following lists the C language macros, their corresponding
-   function equivalents that are for other language bindings, and
-   what data both can return.
-AllPlanes
-
-   unsigned long XAllPlanes(void);
-
-   Both return a value with all bits set to 1 suitable for use in
-   a plane argument to a procedure.
-
-   Both BlackPixel and WhitePixel can be used in implementing a
-   monochrome application. These pixel values are for permanently
-   allocated entries in the default colormap. The actual RGB (red,
-   green, and blue) values are settable on some screens and, in
-   any case, may not actually be black or white. The names are
-   intended to convey the expected relative intensity of the
-   colors.
-
-   BlackPixel(display, screen_number);
-
-   unsigned long XBlackPixel(Display *display, int screen_number);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   screen_number
-
-   Specifies the appropriate screen number on the host server.
-
-   Both return the black pixel value for the specified screen.
-
-   WhitePixel(display, screen_number);
-
-   unsigned long XWhitePixel(Display *display, int screen_number);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   screen_number
-
-   Specifies the appropriate screen number on the host server.
-
-   Both return the white pixel value for the specified screen.
-
-   ConnectionNumber(display);
-
-   int XConnectionNumber(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   Both return a connection number for the specified display. On a
-   POSIX-conformant system, this is the file descriptor of the
-   connection.
-
-   DefaultColormap(display, screen_number);
-
-   Colormap XDefaultColormap(Display *display, int screen_number);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   screen_number
-
-   Specifies the appropriate screen number on the host server.
-
-   Both return the default colormap ID for allocation on the
-   specified screen. Most routine allocations of color should be
-   made out of this colormap.
-
-   DefaultDepth(display, screen_number);
-
-   int XDefaultDepth(Display *display, int screen_number);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   screen_number
-
-   Specifies the appropriate screen number on the host server.
-
-   Both return the depth (number of planes) of the default root
-   window for the specified screen. Other depths may also be
-   supported on this screen (see XMatchVisualInfo).
-
-   To determine the number of depths that are available on a given
-   screen, use XListDepths.
-
-   int *XListDepths(Display *display, int screen_number, int
-   *count_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   screen_number
-
-   Specifies the appropriate screen number on the host server.
-
-   count_return
-
-   Returns the number of depths.
-
-   The XListDepths function returns the array of depths that are
-   available on the specified screen. If the specified
-   screen_number is valid and sufficient memory for the array can
-   be allocated, XListDepths sets count_return to the number of
-   available depths. Otherwise, it does not set count_return and
-   returns NULL. To release the memory allocated for the array of
-   depths, use XFree.
-
-   DefaultGC(display, screen_number);
-
-   GC XDefaultGC(Display *display, int screen_number);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   screen_number
-
-   Specifies the appropriate screen number on the host server.
-
-   Both return the default graphics context for the root window of
-   the specified screen. This GC is created for the convenience of
-   simple applications and contains the default GC components with
-   the foreground and background pixel values initialized to the
-   black and white pixels for the screen, respectively. You can
-   modify its contents freely because it is not used in any Xlib
-   function. This GC should never be freed.
-
-   DefaultRootWindow(display);
-
-   Window XDefaultRootWindow(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   Both return the root window for the default screen.
-
-   DefaultScreenOfDisplay(display);
-
-   Screen *XDefaultScreenOfDisplay(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   Both return a pointer to the default screen.
-
-   ScreenOfDisplay(display, screen_number);
-
-   Screen *XScreenOfDisplay(Display *display, int screen_number);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   screen_number
-
-   Specifies the appropriate screen number on the host server.
-
-   Both return a pointer to the indicated screen.
-
-   DefaultScreen(display);
-
-   int XDefaultScreen(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   Both return the default screen number referenced by the
-   XOpenDisplay function. This macro or function should be used to
-   retrieve the screen number in applications that will use only a
-   single screen.
-
-   DefaultVisual(display, screen_number);
-
-   Visual *XDefaultVisual(Display *display, int screen_number);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   screen_number
-
-   Specifies the appropriate screen number on the host server.
-
-   Both return the default visual type for the specified screen.
-   For further information about visual types, see section 3.1.
-
-   DisplayCells(display, screen_number);
-
-   int XDisplayCells(Display *display, int screen_number);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   screen_number
-
-   Specifies the appropriate screen number on the host server.
-
-   Both return the number of entries in the default colormap.
-
-   DisplayPlanes(display, screen_number);
-
-   int XDisplayPlanes(Display *display, int screen_number);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   screen_number
-
-   Specifies the appropriate screen number on the host server.
-
-   Both return the depth of the root window of the specified
-   screen. For an explanation of depth, see the glossary.
-
-   DisplayString(display);
-
-   char *XDisplayString(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   Both return the string that was passed to XOpenDisplay when the
-   current display was opened. On POSIX-conformant systems, if the
-   passed string was NULL, these return the value of the DISPLAY
-   environment variable when the current display was opened. These
-   are useful to applications that invoke the fork system call and
-   want to open a new connection to the same display from the
-   child process as well as for printing error messages.
-
-   long XExtendedMaxRequestSize(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   The XExtendedMaxRequestSize function returns zero if the
-   specified display does not support an extended-length protocol
-   encoding; otherwise, it returns the maximum request size (in
-   4-byte units) supported by the server using the extended-length
-   encoding. The Xlib functions XDrawLines, XDrawArcs,
-   XFillPolygon, XChangeProperty, XSetClipRectangles, and
-   XSetRegion will use the extended-length encoding as necessary,
-   if supported by the server. Use of the extended-length encoding
-   in other Xlib functions (for example, XDrawPoints,
-   XDrawRectangles, XDrawSegments, XFillArcs, XFillRectangles,
-   XPutImage) is permitted but not required; an Xlib
-   implementation may choose to split the data across multiple
-   smaller requests instead.
-
-   long XMaxRequestSize(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   The XMaxRequestSize function returns the maximum request size
-   (in 4-byte units) supported by the server without using an
-   extended-length protocol encoding. Single protocol requests to
-   the server can be no larger than this size unless an
-   extended-length protocol encoding is supported by the server.
-   The protocol guarantees the size to be no smaller than 4096
-   units (16384 bytes). Xlib automatically breaks data up into
-   multiple protocol requests as necessary for the following
-   functions: XDrawPoints, XDrawRectangles, XDrawSegments,
-   XFillArcs, XFillRectangles, and XPutImage.
-
-   LastKnownRequestProcessed(display);
-
-   unsigned long XLastKnownRequestProcessed(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   Both extract the full serial number of the last request known
-   by Xlib to have been processed by the X server. Xlib
-   automatically sets this number when replies, events, and errors
-   are received.
-
-   NextRequest(display);
-
-   unsigned long XNextRequest(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   Both extract the full serial number that is to be used for the
-   next request. Serial numbers are maintained separately for each
-   display connection.
-
-   ProtocolVersion(display);
-
-   int XProtocolVersion(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   Both return the major version number (11) of the X protocol
-   associated with the connected display.
-
-   ProtocolRevision(display);
-
-   int XProtocolRevision(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   Both return the minor protocol revision number of the X server.
-
-   QLength(display);
-
-   int XQLength(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   Both return the length of the event queue for the connected
-   display. Note that there may be more events that have not been
-   read into the queue yet (see XEventsQueued).
-
-   RootWindow(display, screen_number);
-
-   Window XRootWindow(Display *display, int screen_number);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   screen_number
-
-   Specifies the appropriate screen number on the host server.
-
-   Both return the root window. These are useful with functions
-   that need a drawable of a particular screen and for creating
-   top-level windows.
-
-   ScreenCount(display);
-
-   int XScreenCount(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   Both return the number of available screens.
-
-   ServerVendor(display);
-
-   char *XServerVendor(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   Both return a pointer to a null-terminated string that provides
-   some identification of the owner of the X server
-   implementation. If the data returned by the server is in the
-   Latin Portable Character Encoding, then the string is in the
-   Host Portable Character Encoding. Otherwise, the contents of
-   the string are implementation-dependent.
-
-   VendorRelease(display);
-
-   int XVendorRelease(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   Both return a number related to a vendor's release of the X
-   server.
-
-Image Format Functions and Macros
-
-   Applications are required to present data to the X server in a
-   format that the server demands. To help simplify applications,
-   most of the work required to convert the data is provided by
-   Xlib (see sections 8.7 and 16.8).
-
-   The XPixmapFormatValues structure provides an interface to the
-   pixmap format information that is returned at the time of a
-   connection setup. It contains:
-typedef struct {
-        int depth;
-        int bits_per_pixel;
-        int scanline_pad;
-} XPixmapFormatValues;
-
-   To obtain the pixmap format information for a given display,
-   use XListPixmapFormats.
-
-   XPixmapFormatValues *XListPixmapFormats(Display *display, int
-   *count_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   count_return
-
-   Returns the number of pixmap formats that are supported by the
-   display.
-
-   The XListPixmapFormats function returns an array of
-   XPixmapFormatValues structures that describe the types of Z
-   format images supported by the specified display. If
-   insufficient memory is available, XListPixmapFormats returns
-   NULL. To free the allocated storage for the XPixmapFormatValues
-   structures, use XFree.
-
-   The following lists the C language macros, their corresponding
-   function equivalents that are for other language bindings, and
-   what data they both return for the specified server and screen.
-   These are often used by toolkits as well as by simple
-   applications.
-
-   ImageByteOrder(display);
-
-   int XImageByteOrder(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   Both specify the required byte order for images for each
-   scanline unit in XY format (bitmap) or for each pixel value in
-   Z format. The macro or function can return either LSBFirst or
-   MSBFirst.
-
-   XBitmapUnit(display);
-
-   int XBitmapUnit(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   Both return the size of a bitmap's scanline unit in bits. The
-   scanline is calculated in multiples of this value.
-
-   BitmapBitOrder(display);
-
-   int XBitmapBitOrder(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   Within each bitmap unit, the left-most bit in the bitmap as
-   displayed on the screen is either the least significant or most
-   significant bit in the unit. This macro or function can return
-   LSBFirst or MSBFirst.
-
-   BitmapPad(display);
-
-   int XBitmapPad(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   Each scanline must be padded to a multiple of bits returned by
-   this macro or function.
-
-   DisplayHeight(display, screen_number);
-
-   int XDisplayHeight(Display *display, int screen_number);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   screen_number
-
-   Specifies the appropriate screen number on the host server.
-
-   Both return an integer that describes the height of the screen
-   in pixels.
-
-   DisplayHeightMM(display, screen_number);
-
-   int XDisplayHeightMM(Display *display, int screen_number);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   screen_number
-
-   Specifies the appropriate screen number on the host server.
-
-   Both return the height of the specified screen in millimeters.
-
-   DisplayWidth(display, screen_number);
-
-   int XDisplayWidth(Display *display, int screen_number);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   screen_number
-
-   Specifies the appropriate screen number on the host server.
-
-   Both return the width of the screen in pixels.
-
-   DisplayWidthMM(display, screen_number);
-
-   int XDisplayWidthMM(Display *display, int screen_number);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   screen_number
-
-   Specifies the appropriate screen number on the host server.
-
-   Both return the width of the specified screen in millimeters.
-
-Screen Information Macros
-
-   The following lists the C language macros, their corresponding
-   function equivalents that are for other language bindings, and
-   what data they both can return. These macros or functions all
-   take a pointer to the appropriate screen structure.
-
-   BlackPixelOfScreen(screen);
-
-   unsigned long XBlackPixelOfScreen(Screen *screen);
-
-   screen
-
-   Specifies the appropriate Screen structure.
-
-   Both return the black pixel value of the specified screen.
-
-   XWhitePixelOfScreen(screen);
-
-   unsigned long XWhitePixelOfScreen(Screen *screen);
-
-   screen
-
-   Specifies the appropriate Screen structure.
-
-   Both return the white pixel value of the specified screen.
-
-   CellsOfScreen(screen);
-
-   int XCellsOfScreen(Screen *screen);
-
-   screen
-
-   Specifies the appropriate Screen structure.
-
-   Both return the number of colormap cells in the default
-   colormap of the specified screen.
-
-   DefaultColormapOfScreen(screen);
-
-   Colormap XDefaultColormapOfScreen(Screen *screen);
-
-   screen
-
-   Specifies the appropriate Screen structure.
-
-   Both return the default colormap of the specified screen.
-
-   DefaultDepthOfScreen(screen);
-
-   int XDefaultDepthOfScreen(Screen *screen);
-
-   screen
-
-   Specifies the appropriate Screen structure.
-
-   Both return the depth of the root window.
-
-   DefaultGCOfScreen(screen);
-
-   GC XDefaultGCOfScreen(Screen *screen);
-
-   screen
-
-   Specifies the appropriate Screen structure.
-
-   Both return a default graphics context (GC) of the specified
-   screen, which has the same depth as the root window of the
-   screen. The GC must never be freed.
-
-   XDefaultVisualOfScreen(screen);
-
-   Visual *XDefaultVisualOfScreen(Screen *screen);
-
-   screen
-
-   Specifies the appropriate Screen structure.
-
-   Both return the default visual of the specified screen. For
-   information on visual types, see section 3.1.
-
-   DoesBackingStore(screen);
-
-   int XDoesBackingStore(Screen *screen);
-
-   screen
-
-   Specifies the appropriate Screen structure.
-
-   Both return a value indicating whether the screen supports
-   backing stores. The value returned can be one of WhenMapped,
-   NotUseful, or Always (see section 3.2.4).
-
-   DoesSaveUnders(screen);
-
-   Bool XDoesSaveUnders(Screen *screen);
-
-   screen
-
-   Specifies the appropriate Screen structure.
-
-   Both return a Boolean value indicating whether the screen
-   supports save unders. If True, the screen supports save unders.
-   If False, the screen does not support save unders (see section
-   3.2.5).
-
-   DisplayOfScreen(screen);
-
-   Display *XDisplayOfScreen(Screen *screen);
-
-   screen
-
-   Specifies the appropriate Screen structure.
-
-   Both return the display of the specified screen.
-
-   ScreenNumberOfScreen(screen);
-
-   long XScreenNumberOfScreen(Screen *screen);
-
-   screen
-
-   Specifies the appropriate Screen structure.
-
-   The XScreenNumberOfScreen function returns the screen index
-   number of the specified screen.
-
-   EventMaskOfScreen(screen);
-
-   long XEventMaskOfScreen(Screen *screen);
-
-   screen
-
-   Specifies the appropriate Screen structure.
-
-   Both return the event mask of the root window for the specified
-   screen at connection setup time.
-
-   WidthOfScreen(screen);
-
-   int XWidthOfScreen(Screen *screen);
-
-   screen
-
-   Specifies the appropriate Screen structure.
-
-   Both return the width of the specified screen in pixels.
-
-   HeightOfScreen(screen);
-
-   int XHeightOfScreen(Screen *screen);
-
-   screen
-
-   Specifies the appropriate Screen structure.
-
-   Both return the height of the specified screen in pixels.
-
-   WidthMMOfScreen(screen);
-
-   int XWidthMMOfScreen(Screen *screen);
-
-   screen
-
-   Specifies the appropriate Screen structure.
-
-   Both return the width of the specified screen in millimeters.
-
-   HeightMMOfScreen(screen);
-
-   int XHeightMMOfScreen(Screen *screen);
-
-   screen
-
-   Specifies the appropriate Screen structure.
-
-   Both return the height of the specified screen in millimeters.
-
-   MaxCmapsOfScreen(screen);
-
-   int XMaxCmapsOfScreen(Screen *screen);
-
-   screen
-
-   Specifies the appropriate Screen structure.
-
-   Both return the maximum number of installed colormaps supported
-   by the specified screen (see section 9.3).
-
-   MinCmapsOfScreen(screen);
-
-   int XMinCmapsOfScreen(Screen *screen);
-
-   screen
-
-   Specifies the appropriate Screen structure.
-
-   Both return the minimum number of installed colormaps supported
-   by the specified screen (see section 9.3).
-
-   PlanesOfScreen(screen);
-
-   int XPlanesOfScreen(Screen *screen);
-
-   screen
-
-   Specifies the appropriate Screen structure.
-
-   Both return the depth of the root window.
-
-   RootWindowOfScreen(screen);
-
-   Window XRootWindowOfScreen(Screen *screen);
-
-   screen
-
-   Specifies the appropriate Screen structure.
-
-   Both return the root window of the specified screen.
-
-Generating a NoOperation Protocol Request
-
-   To execute a NoOperation protocol request, use XNoOp.
-
-   XNoOp(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   The XNoOp function sends a NoOperation protocol request to the
-   X server, thereby exercising the connection.
-
-Freeing Client-Created Data
-
-   To free in-memory data that was created by an Xlib function,
-   use XFree.
-
-   XFree(void *data);
-
-   data
-
-   Specifies the data that is to be freed.
-
-   The XFree function is a general-purpose Xlib routine that frees
-   the specified data. You must use it to free any objects that
-   were allocated by Xlib, unless an alternate function is
-   explicitly specified for the object. A NULL pointer cannot be
-   passed to this function.
-
-Closing the Display
-
-   To close a display or disconnect from the X server, use
-   XCloseDisplay.
-
-   XCloseDisplay(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   The XCloseDisplay function closes the connection to the X
-   server for the display specified in the Display structure and
-   destroys all windows, resource IDs (Window, Font, Pixmap,
-   Colormap, Cursor, and GContext), or other resources that the
-   client has created on this display, unless the close-down mode
-   of the client has been changed (see XSetCloseDownMode).
-   Therefore, these windows, resource IDs, and other resources
-   should never be referenced again or an error will be generated.
-   Before exiting, you should call XCloseDisplay explicitly so
-   that any pending errors are reported as XCloseDisplay performs
-   a final XSync operation.
-
-   XCloseDisplay can generate a BadGC error.
-
-   Xlib provides a function to permit the resources owned by a
-   client to survive after the client's connection is closed. To
-   change a client's close-down mode, use XSetCloseDownMode.
-
-   XSetCloseDownMode(Display *display, int close_mode);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   close_mode
-
-   Specifies the client close-down mode. You can pass DestroyAll,
-   RetainPermanent, or RetainTemporary.
-
-   The XSetCloseDownMode function defines what will happen to the
-   client's resources at connection close. A connection starts in
-   DestroyAll mode. For information on what happens to the
-   client's resources when the close_mode argument is
-   RetainPermanent or RetainTemporary, see section 2.6.
-
-   XSetCloseDownMode can generate a BadValue error.
-
-Using X Server Connection Close Operations
-
-   When the X server's connection to a client is closed either by
-   an explicit call to XCloseDisplay or by a process that exits,
-   the X server performs the following automatic operations:
-     * It disowns all selections owned by the client (see
-       XSetSelectionOwner).
-     * It performs an XUngrabPointer and XUngrabKeyboard if the
-       client has actively grabbed the pointer or the keyboard.
-     * It performs an XUngrabServer if the client has grabbed the
-       server.
-     * It releases all passive grabs made by the client.
-     * It marks all resources (including colormap entries)
-       allocated by the client either as permanent or temporary,
-       depending on whether the close-down mode is RetainPermanent
-       or RetainTemporary. However, this does not prevent other
-       client applications from explicitly destroying the
-       resources (see XSetCloseDownMode).
-
-   When the close-down mode is DestroyAll, the X server destroys
-   all of a client's resources as follows:
-     * It examines each window in the client's save-set to
-       determine if it is an inferior (subwindow) of a window
-       created by the client. (The save-set is a list of other
-       clients' windows that are referred to as save-set windows.)
-       If so, the X server reparents the save-set window to the
-       closest ancestor so that the save-set window is not an
-       inferior of a window created by the client. The reparenting
-       leaves unchanged the absolute coordinates (with respect to
-       the root window) of the upper-left outer corner of the
-       save-set window.
-     * It performs a MapWindow request on the save-set window if
-       the save-set window is unmapped. The X server does this
-       even if the save-set window was not an inferior of a window
-       created by the client.
-     * It destroys all windows created by the client.
-     * It performs the appropriate free request on each nonwindow
-       resource created by the client in the server (for example,
-       Font, Pixmap, Cursor, Colormap, and GContext).
-     * It frees all colors and colormap entries allocated by a
-       client application.
-
-   Additional processing occurs when the last connection to the X
-   server closes. An X server goes through a cycle of having no
-   connections and having some connections. When the last
-   connection to the X server closes as a result of a connection
-   closing with the close_mode of DestroyAll, the X server does
-   the following:
-     * It resets its state as if it had just been started. The X
-       server begins by destroying all lingering resources from
-       clients that have terminated in RetainPermanent or
-       RetainTemporary mode.
-     * It deletes all but the predefined atom identifiers.
-     * It deletes all properties on all root windows (see section
-       4.3).
-     * It resets all device maps and attributes (for example, key
-       click, bell volume, and acceleration) as well as the access
-       control list.
-     * It restores the standard root tiles and cursors.
-     * It restores the default font path.
-     * It restores the input focus to state PointerRoot.
-
-   However, the X server does not reset if you close a connection
-   with a close-down mode set to RetainPermanent or
-   RetainTemporary.
-
-Using Xlib with Threads
-
-   On systems that have threads, support may be provided to permit
-   multiple threads to use Xlib concurrently.
-
-   To initialize support for concurrent threads, use XInitThreads.
-
-   Status XInitThreads(void);
-
-   The XInitThreads function initializes Xlib support for
-   concurrent threads. This function must be the first Xlib
-   function a multi-threaded program calls, and it must complete
-   before any other Xlib call is made. This function returns a
-   nonzero status if initialization was successful; otherwise, it
-   returns zero. On systems that do not support threads, this
-   function always returns zero.
-
-   It is only necessary to call this function if multiple threads
-   might use Xlib concurrently. If all calls to Xlib functions are
-   protected by some other access mechanism (for example, a mutual
-   exclusion lock in a toolkit or through explicit client
-   programming), Xlib thread initialization is not required. It is
-   recommended that single-threaded programs not call this
-   function.
-
-   To lock a display across several Xlib calls, use XLockDisplay.
-
-   XLockDisplay(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   The XLockDisplay function locks out all other threads from
-   using the specified display. Other threads attempting to use
-   the display will block until the display is unlocked by this
-   thread. Nested calls to XLockDisplay work correctly; the
-   display will not actually be unlocked until XUnlockDisplay has
-   been called the same number of times as XLockDisplay. This
-   function has no effect unless Xlib was successfully initialized
-   for threads using XInitThreads.
-
-   To unlock a display, use XUnlockDisplay.
-
-   XUnlockDisplay(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   The XUnlockDisplay function allows other threads to use the
-   specified display again. Any threads that have blocked on the
-   display are allowed to continue. Nested locking works
-   correctly; if XLockDisplay has been called multiple times by a
-   thread, then XUnlockDisplay must be called an equal number of
-   times before the display is actually unlocked. This function
-   has no effect unless Xlib was successfully initialized for
-   threads using XInitThreads.
-
-Using Internal Connections
-
-   In addition to the connection to the X server, an Xlib
-   implementation may require connections to other kinds of
-   servers (for example, to input method servers as described in
-   chapter 13). Toolkits and clients that use multiple displays,
-   or that use displays in combination with other inputs, need to
-   obtain these additional connections to correctly block until
-   input is available and need to process that input when it is
-   available. Simple clients that use a single display and block
-   for input in an Xlib event function do not need to use these
-   facilities.
-
-   To track internal connections for a display, use
-   XAddConnectionWatch.
-
-   typedef void (*XConnectionWatchProc)(Display *display, XPointer
-   client_data, int fd, Bool opening, XPointer *watch_data);
-
-   Status XAddConnectionWatch(Display *display,
-   XConnectionWatchProc procedure, XPointer client_data);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   procedure
-
-   Specifies the procedure to be called.
-
-   client_data
-
-   Specifies the additional client data.
-
-   The XAddConnectionWatch function registers a procedure to be
-   called each time Xlib opens or closes an internal connection
-   for the specified display. The procedure is passed the display,
-   the specified client_data, the file descriptor for the
-   connection, a Boolean indicating whether the connection is
-   being opened or closed, and a pointer to a location for private
-   watch data. If opening is True, the procedure can store a
-   pointer to private data in the location pointed to by
-   watch_data; when the procedure is later called for this same
-   connection and opening is False, the location pointed to by
-   watch_data will hold this same private data pointer.
-
-   This function can be called at any time after a display is
-   opened. If internal connections already exist, the registered
-   procedure will immediately be called for each of them, before
-   XAddConnectionWatch returns. XAddConnectionWatch returns a
-   nonzero status if the procedure is successfully registered;
-   otherwise, it returns zero.
-
-   The registered procedure should not call any Xlib functions. If
-   the procedure directly or indirectly causes the state of
-   internal connections or watch procedures to change, the result
-   is not defined. If Xlib has been initialized for threads, the
-   procedure is called with the display locked and the result of a
-   call by the procedure to any Xlib function that locks the
-   display is not defined unless the executing thread has
-   externally locked the display using XLockDisplay.
-
-   To stop tracking internal connections for a display, use
-   XRemoveConnectionWatch.
-
-   Status XRemoveConnectionWatch(Display *display,
-   XConnectionWatchProc procedure, XPointer client_data);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   procedure
-
-   Specifies the procedure to be called.
-
-   client_data
-
-   Specifies the additional client data.
-
-   The XRemoveConnectionWatch function removes a previously
-   registered connection watch procedure. The client_data must
-   match the client_data used when the procedure was initially
-   registered.
-
-   To process input on an internal connection, use
-   XProcessInternalConnection.
-
-   void XProcessInternalConnection(Display *display, int fd);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   fd
-
-   Specifies the file descriptor.
-
-   The XProcessInternalConnection function processes input
-   available on an internal connection. This function should be
-   called for an internal connection only after an operating
-   system facility (for example, select or poll) has indicated
-   that input is available; otherwise, the effect is not defined.
-
-   To obtain all of the current internal connections for a
-   display, use XInternalConnectionNumbers.
-
-   Status XInternalConnectionNumbers(Display *display, int ** fd,
-   int * count_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   fd_return
-
-   Returns the file descriptors.
-
-   count_return
-
-   Returns the number of file descriptors.
-
-   The XInternalConnectionNumbers function returns a list of the
-   file descriptors for all internal connections currently open
-   for the specified display. When the allocated list is no longer
-   needed, free it by using XFree. This functions returns a
-   nonzero status if the list is successfully allocated;
-   otherwise, it returns zero.
-
-Chapter 3. Window Functions
-
-   Table of Contents
-
-   Visual Types
-   Window Attributes
-
-        Background Attribute
-        Border Attribute
-        Gravity Attributes
-        Backing Store Attribute
-        Save Under Flag
-        Backing Planes and Backing Pixel Attributes
-        Event Mask and Do Not Propagate Mask Attributes
-        Override Redirect Flag
-        Colormap Attribute
-        Cursor Attribute
-
-   Creating Windows
-   Destroying Windows
-   Mapping Windows
-   Unmapping Windows
-   Configuring Windows
-   Changing Window Stacking Order
-   Changing Window Attributes
-
-Visual Types
-
-   On some display hardware, it may be possible to deal with color
-   resources in more than one way. For example, you may be able to
-   deal with a screen of either 12-bit depth with arbitrary
-   mapping of pixel to color (pseudo-color) or 24-bit depth with 8
-   bits of the pixel dedicated to each of red, green, and blue.
-   These different ways of dealing with the visual aspects of the
-   screen are called visuals. For each screen of the display,
-   there may be a list of valid visual types supported at
-   different depths of the screen. Because default windows and
-   visual types are defined for each screen, most simple
-   applications need not deal with this complexity. Xlib provides
-   macros and functions that return the default root window, the
-   default depth of the default root window, and the default
-   visual type (see sections 2.2.1 and 16.7).
-
-   Xlib uses an opaque Visual structure that contains information
-   about the possible color mapping. The visual utility functions
-   (see section 16.7) use an XVisualInfo structure to return this
-   information to an application. The members of this structure
-   pertinent to this discussion are class, red_mask, green_mask,
-   blue_mask, bits_per_rgb, and colormap_size. The class member
-   specifies one of the possible visual classes of the screen and
-   can be StaticGray, StaticColor, TrueColor, GrayScale,
-   PseudoColor, or DirectColor.
-
-   The following concepts may serve to make the explanation of
-   visual types clearer. The screen can be color or grayscale, can
-   have a colormap that is writable or read-only, and can also
-   have a colormap whose indices are decomposed into separate RGB
-   pieces, provided one is not on a grayscale screen. This leads
-   to the following diagram:
-                      Color        Gray-Scale
-                   R/O    R/W      R/O   R/W
-----------------------------------------------
- Undecomposed    Static  Pseudo   Static  Gray
-   Colormap      Color   Color    Gray    Scale
-
- Decomposed       True   Direct
-   Colormap       Color  Color
-----------------------------------------------
-
-   Conceptually, as each pixel is read out of video memory for
-   display on the screen, it goes through a look-up stage by
-   indexing into a colormap. Colormaps can be manipulated
-   arbitrarily on some hardware, in limited ways on other
-   hardware, and not at all on other hardware. The visual types
-   affect the colormap and the RGB values in the following ways:
-
-     * For PseudoColor, a pixel value indexes a colormap to
-       produce independent RGB values, and the RGB values can be
-       changed dynamically.
-     * GrayScale is treated the same way as PseudoColor except
-       that the primary that drives the screen is undefined. Thus,
-       the client should always store the same value for red,
-       green, and blue in the colormaps.
-     * For DirectColor, a pixel value is decomposed into separate
-       RGB subfields, and each subfield separately indexes the
-       colormap for the corresponding value. The RGB values can be
-       changed dynamically.
-     * TrueColor is treated the same way as DirectColor except
-       that the colormap has predefined, read-only RGB values.
-       These RGB values are server dependent but provide linear or
-       near-linear ramps in each primary.
-     * StaticColor is treated the same way as PseudoColor except
-       that the colormap has predefined, read-only,
-       server-dependent RGB values.
-     * StaticGray is treated the same way as StaticColor except
-       that the RGB values are equal for any single pixel value,
-       thus resulting in shades of gray. StaticGray with a
-       two-entry colormap can be thought of as monochrome.
-
-   The red_mask, green_mask, and blue_mask members are only
-   defined for DirectColor and TrueColor. Each has one contiguous
-   set of bits with no intersections. The bits_per_rgb member
-   specifies the log base 2 of the number of distinct color values
-   (individually) of red, green, and blue. Actual RGB values are
-   unsigned 16-bit numbers. The colormap_size member defines the
-   number of available colormap entries in a newly created
-   colormap. For DirectColor and TrueColor, this is the size of an
-   individual pixel subfield.
-
-   To obtain the visual ID from a Visual, use XVisualIDFromVisual.
-
-   VisualID XVisualIDFromVisual(Visual *visual);
-
-   visual
-
-   Specifies the visual type.
-
-   The XVisualIDFromVisual function returns the visual ID for the
-   specified visual type.
-
-Window Attributes
-
-   All InputOutput windows have a border width of zero or more
-   pixels, an optional background, an event suppression mask
-   (which suppresses propagation of events from children), and a
-   property list (see section 4.3). The window border and
-   background can be a solid color or a pattern, called a tile.
-   All windows except the root have a parent and are clipped by
-   their parent. If a window is stacked on top of another window,
-   it obscures that other window for the purpose of input. If a
-   window has a background (almost all do), it obscures the other
-   window for purposes of output. Attempts to output to the
-   obscured area do nothing, and no input events (for example,
-   pointer motion) are generated for the obscured area.
-
-   Windows also have associated property lists (see section 4.3).
-
-   Both InputOutput and InputOnly windows have the following
-   common attributes, which are the only attributes of an
-   InputOnly window:
-     * win-gravity
-     * event-mask
-     * do-not-propagate-mask
-     * override-redirect
-     * cursor
-
-   If you specify any other attributes for an InputOnly window, a
-   BadMatch error results.
-
-   InputOnly windows are used for controlling input events in
-   situations where InputOutput windows are unnecessary. InputOnly
-   windows are invisible; can only be used to control such things
-   as cursors, input event generation, and grabbing; and cannot be
-   used in any graphics requests. Note that InputOnly windows
-   cannot have InputOutput windows as inferiors.
-
-   Windows have borders of a programmable width and pattern as
-   well as a background pattern or tile. Pixel values can be used
-   for solid colors. The background and border pixmaps can be
-   destroyed immediately after creating the window if no further
-   explicit references to them are to be made. The pattern can
-   either be relative to the parent or absolute. If
-   ParentRelative, the parent's background is used.
-
-   When windows are first created, they are not visible (not
-   mapped) on the screen. Any output to a window that is not
-   visible on the screen and that does not have backing store will
-   be discarded. An application may wish to create a window long
-   before it is mapped to the screen. When a window is eventually
-   mapped to the screen (using XMapWindow), the X server generates
-   an Expose event for the window if backing store has not been
-   maintained.
-
-   A window manager can override your choice of size, border
-   width, and position for a top-level window. Your program must
-   be prepared to use the actual size and position of the top
-   window. It is not acceptable for a client application to resize
-   itself unless in direct response to a human command to do so.
-   Instead, either your program should use the space given to it,
-   or if the space is too small for any useful work, your program
-   might ask the user to resize the window. The border of your
-   top-level window is considered fair game for window managers.
-
-   To set an attribute of a window, set the appropriate member of
-   the XSetWindowAttributes structure and OR in the corresponding
-   value bitmask in your subsequent calls to XCreateWindow and
-   XChangeWindowAttributes, or use one of the other convenience
-   functions that set the appropriate attribute. The symbols for
-   the value mask bits and the XSetWindowAttributes structure are:
-
-   /* Window attribute value mask bits */
-/* Window attribute value mask bits */
-#define    CWBackPixmap                    (1L<<0)
-#define    CWBackPixel                     (1L<<1)
-#define    CWBorderPixmap                  (1L<<2)
-#define    CWBorderPixel                   (1L<<3)
-#define    CWBitGravity                    (1L<<4)
-#define    CWWinGravity                    (1L<<5)
-#define    CWBackingStore                  (1L<<6)
-#define    CWBackingPlanes                 (1L<<7)
-#define    CWBackingPixel                  (1L<<8)
-#define    CWOverrideRedirect              (1L<<9)
-#define    CWSaveUnder                     (1L<<10)
-#define    CWEventMask                     (1L<<11)
-#define    CWDontPropagate                 (1L<<12)
-#define    CWColormap                      (1L<<13)
-#define    CWCursor                        (1L<<14)
-
-
-
-/* Values */
-
-typedef struct {
-     Pixmap background_pixmap;     /* background, None, or ParentRelativ
-e */
-     unsigned long background_pixel;     /* background pixel */
-     Pixmap border_pixmap;          /* border of the window or CopyFromP
-arent */
-     unsigned long border_pixel;     /* border pixel value */
-     int bit_gravity;     /* one of bit gravity values */
-     int win_gravity;     /* one of the window gravity values */
-     int backing_store;     /* NotUseful, WhenMapped, Always */
-     unsigned long backing_planes;     /* planes to be preserved if poss
-ible */
-     unsigned long backing_pixel;     /* value to use in restoring plane
-s */
-     Bool save_under;     /* should bits under be saved? (popups) */
-     long event_mask;     /* set of events that should be saved */
-     long do_not_propagate_mask;     /* set of events that should not pr
-opagate */
-     Bool override_redirect;     /* boolean value for override_redirect
-*/
-     Colormap colormap;     /* color map to be associated with window */
-     Cursor cursor;          /* cursor to be displayed (or None) */
-} XSetWindowAttributes;
-
-   The following lists the defaults for each window attribute and
-   indicates whether the attribute is applicable to InputOutput
-   and InputOnly windows:
-   Attribute             Default          InputOutput InputOnly
-   background-pixmap     None             Yes         No
-   background-pixel      Undefined        Yes         No
-   border-pixmap         CopyFromParent   Yes         No
-   border-pixel          Undefined        Yes         No
-   bit-gravity           ForgetGravity    Yes         No
-   win-gravity           NorthWestGravity Yes         Yes
-   backing-store         NotUseful        Yes         No
-   backing-planes        All ones         Yes         No
-   backing-pixel         zero             Yes         No
-   save-under            False            Yes         No
-   event-mask            empty set        Yes         Yes
-   do-not-propagate-mask empty set        Yes         Yes
-   override-redirect     False            Yes         Yes
-   colormap              CopyFromParent   Yes         No
-   cursor                None             Yes         Yes
-
-Background Attribute
-
-   Only InputOutput windows can have a background. You can set the
-   background of an InputOutput window by using a pixel or a
-   pixmap.
-
-   The background-pixmap attribute of a window specifies the
-   pixmap to be used for a window's background. This pixmap can be
-   of any size, although some sizes may be faster than others. The
-   background-pixel attribute of a window specifies a pixel value
-   used to paint a window's background in a single color.
-
-   You can set the background-pixmap to a pixmap, None (default),
-   or ParentRelative. You can set the background-pixel of a window
-   to any pixel value (no default). If you specify a
-   background-pixel, it overrides either the default
-   background-pixmap or any value you may have set in the
-   background-pixmap. A pixmap of an undefined size that is filled
-   with the background-pixel is used for the background. Range
-   checking is not performed on the background pixel; it simply is
-   truncated to the appropriate number of bits.
-
-   If you set the background-pixmap, it overrides the default. The
-   background-pixmap and the window must have the same depth, or a
-   BadMatch error results. If you set background-pixmap to None,
-   the window has no defined background. If you set the
-   background-pixmap to ParentRelative:
-     * The parent window's background-pixmap is used. The child
-       window, however, must have the same depth as its parent, or
-       a BadMatch error results.
-     * If the parent window has a background-pixmap of None, the
-       window also has a background-pixmap of None.
-     * A copy of the parent window's background-pixmap is not
-       made. The parent's background-pixmap is examined each time
-       the child window's background-pixmap is required.
-     * The background tile origin always aligns with the parent
-       window's background tile origin. If the background-pixmap
-       is not ParentRelative, the background tile origin is the
-       child window's origin.
-
-   Setting a new background, whether by setting background-pixmap
-   or background-pixel, overrides any previous background. The
-   background-pixmap can be freed immediately if no further
-   explicit reference is made to it (the X server will keep a copy
-   to use when needed). If you later draw into the pixmap used for
-   the background, what happens is undefined because the X
-   implementation is free to make a copy of the pixmap or to use
-   the same pixmap.
-
-   When no valid contents are available for regions of a window
-   and either the regions are visible or the server is maintaining
-   backing store, the server automatically tiles the regions with
-   the window's background unless the window has a background of
-   None. If the background is None, the previous screen contents
-   from other windows of the same depth as the window are simply
-   left in place as long as the contents come from the parent of
-   the window or an inferior of the parent. Otherwise, the initial
-   contents of the exposed regions are undefined. Expose events
-   are then generated for the regions, even if the
-   background-pixmap is None (see section 10.9).
-
-Border Attribute
-
-   Only InputOutput windows can have a border. You can set the
-   border of an InputOutput window by using a pixel or a pixmap.
-
-   The border-pixmap attribute of a window specifies the pixmap to
-   be used for a window's border. The border-pixel attribute of a
-   window specifies a pixmap of undefined size filled with that
-   pixel be used for a window's border. Range checking is not
-   performed on the background pixel; it simply is truncated to
-   the appropriate number of bits. The border tile origin is
-   always the same as the background tile origin.
-
-   You can also set the border-pixmap to a pixmap of any size
-   (some may be faster than others) or to CopyFromParent
-   (default). You can set the border-pixel to any pixel value (no
-   default).
-
-   If you set a border-pixmap, it overrides the default. The
-   border-pixmap and the window must have the same depth, or a
-   BadMatch error results. If you set the border-pixmap to
-   CopyFromParent, the parent window's border-pixmap is copied.
-   Subsequent changes to the parent window's border attribute do
-   not affect the child window. However, the child window must
-   have the same depth as the parent window, or a BadMatch error
-   results.
-
-   The border-pixmap can be freed immediately if no further
-   explicit reference is made to it. If you later draw into the
-   pixmap used for the border, what happens is undefined because
-   the X implementation is free either to make a copy of the
-   pixmap or to use the same pixmap. If you specify a
-   border-pixel, it overrides either the default border-pixmap or
-   any value you may have set in the border-pixmap. All pixels in
-   the window's border will be set to the border-pixel. Setting a
-   new border, whether by setting border-pixel or by setting
-   border-pixmap, overrides any previous border.
-
-   Output to a window is always clipped to the inside of the
-   window. Therefore, graphics operations never affect the window
-   border.
-
-Gravity Attributes
-
-   The bit gravity of a window defines which region of the window
-   should be retained when an InputOutput window is resized. The
-   default value for the bit-gravity attribute is ForgetGravity.
-   The window gravity of a window allows you to define how the
-   InputOutput or InputOnly window should be repositioned if its
-   parent is resized. The default value for the win-gravity
-   attribute is NorthWestGravity.
-
-   If the inside width or height of a window is not changed and if
-   the window is moved or its border is changed, then the contents
-   of the window are not lost but move with the window. Changing
-   the inside width or height of the window causes its contents to
-   be moved or lost (depending on the bit-gravity of the window)
-   and causes children to be reconfigured (depending on their
-   win-gravity). For a change of width and height, the (x, y)
-   pairs are defined:
-
-   Gravity Direction Coordinates
-   NorthWestGravity  (0, 0)
-   NorthGravity      (Width/2, 0)
-   NorthEastGravity  (Width, 0)
-   WestGravity       (0, Height/2)
-   CenterGravity     (Width/2, Height/2)
-   EastGravity       (Width, Height/2)
-   SouthWestGravity  (0, Height)
-   SouthGravity      (Width/2, Height)
-   SouthEastGravity  (Width, Height)
-
-   When a window with one of these bit-gravity values is resized,
-   the corresponding pair defines the change in position of each
-   pixel in the window. When a window with one of these
-   win-gravities has its parent window resized, the corresponding
-   pair defines the change in position of the window within the
-   parent. When a window is so repositioned, a GravityNotify event
-   is generated (see section 10.10.5).
-
-   A bit-gravity of StaticGravity indicates that the contents or
-   origin should not move relative to the origin of the root
-   window. If the change in size of the window is coupled with a
-   change in position (x, y), then for bit-gravity the change in
-   position of each pixel is (-x, -y), and for win-gravity the
-   change in position of a child when its parent is so resized is
-   (-x, -y). Note that StaticGravity still only takes effect when
-   the width or height of the window is changed, not when the
-   window is moved.
-
-   A bit-gravity of ForgetGravity indicates that the window's
-   contents are always discarded after a size change, even if a
-   backing store or save under has been requested. The window is
-   tiled with its background and zero or more Expose events are
-   generated. If no background is defined, the existing screen
-   contents are not altered. Some X servers may also ignore the
-   specified bit-gravity and always generate Expose events.
-
-   The contents and borders of inferiors are not affected by their
-   parent's bit-gravity. A server is permitted to ignore the
-   specified bit-gravity and use Forget instead.
-
-   A win-gravity of UnmapGravity is like NorthWestGravity (the
-   window is not moved), except the child is also unmapped when
-   the parent is resized, and an UnmapNotify event is generated.
-
-Backing Store Attribute
-
-   Some implementations of the X server may choose to maintain the
-   contents of InputOutput windows. If the X server maintains the
-   contents of a window, the off-screen saved pixels are known as
-   backing store. The backing store advises the X server on what
-   to do with the contents of a window. The backing-store
-   attribute can be set to NotUseful (default), WhenMapped, or
-   Always.
-
-   A backing-store attribute of NotUseful advises the X server
-   that maintaining contents is unnecessary, although some X
-   implementations may still choose to maintain contents and,
-   therefore, not generate Expose events. A backing-store
-   attribute of WhenMapped advises the X server that maintaining
-   contents of obscured regions when the window is mapped would be
-   beneficial. In this case, the server may generate an Expose
-   event when the window is created. A backing-store attribute of
-   Always advises the X server that maintaining contents even when
-   the window is unmapped would be beneficial. Even if the window
-   is larger than its parent, this is a request to the X server to
-   maintain complete contents, not just the region within the
-   parent window boundaries. While the X server maintains the
-   window's contents, Expose events normally are not generated,
-   but the X server may stop maintaining contents at any time.
-
-   When the contents of obscured regions of a window are being
-   maintained, regions obscured by noninferior windows are
-   included in the destination of graphics requests (and source,
-   when the window is the source). However, regions obscured by
-   inferior windows are not included.
-
-Save Under Flag
-
-   Some server implementations may preserve contents of
-   InputOutput windows under other InputOutput windows. This is
-   not the same as preserving the contents of a window for you.
-   You may get better visual appeal if transient windows (for
-   example, pop-up menus) request that the system preserve the
-   screen contents under them, so the temporarily obscured
-   applications do not have to repaint.
-
-   You can set the save-under flag to True or False (default). If
-   save-under is True, the X server is advised that, when this
-   window is mapped, saving the contents of windows it obscures
-   would be beneficial.
-
-Backing Planes and Backing Pixel Attributes
-
-   You can set backing planes to indicate (with bits set to 1)
-   which bit planes of an InputOutput window hold dynamic data
-   that must be preserved in backing store and during save unders.
-   The default value for the backing-planes attribute is all bits
-   set to 1. You can set backing pixel to specify what bits to use
-   in planes not covered by backing planes. The default value for
-   the backing-pixel attribute is all bits set to 0. The X server
-   is free to save only the specified bit planes in the backing
-   store or the save under and is free to regenerate the remaining
-   planes with the specified pixel value. Any extraneous bits in
-   these values (that is, those bits beyond the specified depth of
-   the window) may be simply ignored. If you request backing store
-   or save unders, you should use these members to minimize the
-   amount of off-screen memory required to store your window.
-
-Event Mask and Do Not Propagate Mask Attributes
-
-   The event mask defines which events the client is interested in
-   for this InputOutput or InputOnly window (or, for some event
-   types, inferiors of this window). The event mask is the bitwise
-   inclusive OR of zero or more of the valid event mask bits. You
-   can specify that no maskable events are reported by setting
-   NoEventMask (default).
-
-   The do-not-propagate-mask attribute defines which events should
-   not be propagated to ancestor windows when no client has the
-   event type selected in this InputOutput or InputOnly window.
-   The do-not-propagate-mask is the bitwise inclusive OR of zero
-   or more of the following masks: KeyPress, KeyRelease,
-   ButtonPress, ButtonRelease, PointerMotion, Button1Motion,
-   Button2Motion, Button3Motion, Button4Motion, Button5Motion, and
-   ButtonMotion. You can specify that all events are propagated by
-   setting NoEventMask (default).
-
-Override Redirect Flag
-
-   To control window placement or to add decoration, a window
-   manager often needs to intercept (redirect) any map or
-   configure request. Pop-up windows, however, often need to be
-   mapped without a window manager getting in the way. To control
-   whether an InputOutput or InputOnly window is to ignore these
-   structure control facilities, use the override-redirect flag.
-
-   The override-redirect flag specifies whether map and configure
-   requests on this window should override a
-   SubstructureRedirectMask on the parent. You can set the
-   override-redirect flag to True or False (default). Window
-   managers use this information to avoid tampering with pop-up
-   windows (see also chapter 14).
-
-Colormap Attribute
-
-   The colormap attribute specifies which colormap best reflects
-   the true colors of the InputOutput window. The colormap must
-   have the same visual type as the window, or a BadMatch error
-   results. X servers capable of supporting multiple hardware
-   colormaps can use this information, and window managers can use
-   it for calls to XInstallColormap. You can set the colormap
-   attribute to a colormap or to CopyFromParent (default).
-
-   If you set the colormap to CopyFromParent, the parent window's
-   colormap is copied and used by its child. However, the child
-   window must have the same visual type as the parent, or a
-   BadMatch error results. The parent window must not have a
-   colormap of None, or a BadMatch error results. The colormap is
-   copied by sharing the colormap object between the child and
-   parent, not by making a complete copy of the colormap contents.
-   Subsequent changes to the parent window's colormap attribute do
-   not affect the child window.
-
-Cursor Attribute
-
-   The cursor attribute specifies which cursor is to be used when
-   the pointer is in the InputOutput or InputOnly window. You can
-   set the cursor to a cursor or None (default).
-
-   If you set the cursor to None, the parent's cursor is used when
-   the pointer is in the InputOutput or InputOnly window, and any
-   change in the parent's cursor will cause an immediate change in
-   the displayed cursor. By calling XFreeCursor, the cursor can be
-   freed immediately as long as no further explicit reference to
-   it is made.
-
-Creating Windows
-
-   Xlib provides basic ways for creating windows, and toolkits
-   often supply higher-level functions specifically for creating
-   and placing top-level windows, which are discussed in the
-   appropriate toolkit documentation. If you do not use a toolkit,
-   however, you must provide some standard information or hints
-   for the window manager by using the Xlib inter-client
-   communication functions (see chapter 14).
-
-   If you use Xlib to create your own top-level windows (direct
-   children of the root window), you must observe the following
-   rules so that all applications interact reasonably across the
-   different styles of window management:
-     * You must never fight with the window manager for the size
-       or placement of your top-level window.
-     * You must be able to deal with whatever size window you get,
-       even if this means that your application just prints a
-       message like ``Please make me bigger'' in its window.
-     * You should only attempt to resize or move top-level windows
-       in direct response to a user request. If a request to
-       change the size of a top-level window fails, you must be
-       prepared to live with what you get. You are free to resize
-       or move the children of top-level windows as necessary.
-       (Toolkits often have facilities for automatic relayout.)
-     * If you do not use a toolkit that automatically sets
-       standard window properties, you should set these properties
-       for top-level windows before mapping them.
-
-   For further information, see chapter 14 and the Inter-Client
-   Communication Conventions Manual.
-
-   XCreateWindow is the more general function that allows you to
-   set specific window attributes when you create a window.
-   XCreateSimpleWindow creates a window that inherits its
-   attributes from its parent window.
-
-   The X server acts as if InputOnly windows do not exist for the
-   purposes of graphics requests, exposure processing, and
-   VisibilityNotify events. An InputOnly window cannot be used as
-   a drawable (that is, as a source or destination for graphics
-   requests). InputOnly and InputOutput windows act identically in
-   other respects (properties, grabs, input control, and so on).
-   Extension packages can define other classes of windows.
-
-   To create an unmapped window and set its window attributes, use
-   XCreateWindow.
-
-   Window XCreateWindow(Display *display, Window parent, int x,
-   int y, unsigned int width, unsigned int height, unsigned int
-   border_width, int depth, unsigned int class, Visual *visual,
-   unsigned long valuemask, XSetWindowAttributes *attributes);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   parent
-
-   Specifies the parent window.
-
-   x
-
-   y
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates, which are the top-left outside
-   corner of the created window's borders and are relative to the
-   inside of the parent window's borders.
-
-   width
-
-   height
-
-   Specify the width and height, which are the created window's
-   inside dimensions and do not include the created window's
-   borders. The dimensions must be nonzero, or a BadValue error
-   results.
-
-   border_width
-
-   Specifies the width of the created window's border in pixels.
-
-   depth
-
-   Specifies the window's depth. A depth of CopyFromParent means
-   the depth is taken from the parent.
-
-   class
-
-   Specifies the created window's class. You can pass InputOutput,
-   InputOnly, or CopyFromParent. A class of CopyFromParent means
-   the class is taken from the parent.
-
-   visual
-
-   Specifies the visual type. A visual of CopyFromParent means the
-   visual type is taken from the parent.
-
-   valuemask
-
-   Specifies which window attributes are defined in the attributes
-   argument. This mask is the bitwise inclusive OR of the valid
-   attribute mask bits. If valuemask is zero, the attributes are
-   ignored and are not referenced.
-
-   attributes
-
-   Specifies the structure from which the values (as specified by
-   the value mask) are to be taken. The value mask should have the
-   appropriate bits set to indicate which attributes have been set
-   in the structure.
-
-   The XCreateWindow function creates an unmapped subwindow for a
-   specified parent window, returns the window ID of the created
-   window, and causes the X server to generate a CreateNotify
-   event. The created window is placed on top in the stacking
-   order with respect to siblings.
-
-   The coordinate system has the X axis horizontal and the Y axis
-   vertical with the origin [0, 0] at the upper-left corner.
-   Coordinates are integral, in terms of pixels, and coincide with
-   pixel centers. Each window and pixmap has its own coordinate
-   system. For a window, the origin is inside the border at the
-   inside, upper-left corner.
-
-   The border_width for an InputOnly window must be zero, or a
-   BadMatch error results. For class InputOutput, the visual type
-   and depth must be a combination supported for the screen, or a
-   BadMatch error results. The depth need not be the same as the
-   parent, but the parent must not be a window of class InputOnly,
-   or a BadMatch error results. For an InputOnly window, the depth
-   must be zero, and the visual must be one supported by the
-   screen. If either condition is not met, a BadMatch error
-   results. The parent window, however, may have any depth and
-   class. If you specify any invalid window attribute for a
-   window, a BadMatch error results.
-
-   The created window is not yet displayed (mapped) on the user's
-   display. To display the window, call XMapWindow. The new window
-   initially uses the same cursor as its parent. A new cursor can
-   be defined for the new window by calling XDefineCursor. The
-   window will not be visible on the screen unless it and all of
-   its ancestors are mapped and it is not obscured by any of its
-   ancestors.
-
-   XCreateWindow can generate BadAlloc, BadColor, BadCursor,
-   BadMatch, BadPixmap, BadValue, and BadWindow errors.
-
-   To create an unmapped InputOutput subwindow of a given parent
-   window, use XCreateSimpleWindow.
-
-   Window XCreateSimpleWindow(Display *display, Window parent, int
-   x, int y, unsigned int width, unsigned int height, unsigned int
-   border_width, unsigned long border, unsigned long background);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   parent
-
-   Specifies the parent window.
-
-   x
-
-   y
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates, which are the top-left outside
-   corner of the new window's borders and are relative to the
-   inside of the parent window's borders.
-
-   width
-
-   height
-
-   Specify the width and height, which are the created window's
-   inside dimensions and do not include the created window's
-   borders. The dimensions must be nonzero, or a BadValue error
-   results.
-
-   border_width
-
-   Specifies the width of the created window's border in pixels.
-
-   border
-
-   Specifies the border pixel value of the window.
-
-   background
-
-   Specifies the background pixel value of the window.
-
-   The XCreateSimpleWindow function creates an unmapped
-   InputOutput subwindow for a specified parent window, returns
-   the window ID of the created window, and causes the X server to
-   generate a CreateNotify event. The created window is placed on
-   top in the stacking order with respect to siblings. Any part of
-   the window that extends outside its parent window is clipped.
-   The border_width for an InputOnly window must be zero, or a
-   BadMatch error results. XCreateSimpleWindow inherits its depth,
-   class, and visual from its parent. All other window attributes,
-   except background and border, have their default values.
-
-   XCreateSimpleWindow can generate BadAlloc, BadMatch, BadValue,
-   and BadWindow errors.
-
-Destroying Windows
-
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to destroy a window or
-   destroy all subwindows of a window.
-
-   To destroy a window and all of its subwindows, use
-   XDestroyWindow.
-
-   XDestroyWindow(Display *display, Window w);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   The XDestroyWindow function destroys the specified window as
-   well as all of its subwindows and causes the X server to
-   generate a DestroyNotify event for each window. The window
-   should never be referenced again. If the window specified by
-   the w argument is mapped, it is unmapped automatically. The
-   ordering of the DestroyNotify events is such that for any given
-   window being destroyed, DestroyNotify is generated on any
-   inferiors of the window before being generated on the window
-   itself. The ordering among siblings and across subhierarchies
-   is not otherwise constrained. If the window you specified is a
-   root window, no windows are destroyed. Destroying a mapped
-   window will generate Expose events on other windows that were
-   obscured by the window being destroyed.
-
-   XDestroyWindow can generate a BadWindow error.
-
-   To destroy all subwindows of a specified window, use
-   XDestroySubwindows.
-
-   XDestroySubwindows(Display *display, Window w);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   The XDestroySubwindows function destroys all inferior windows
-   of the specified window, in bottom-to-top stacking order. It
-   causes the X server to generate a DestroyNotify event for each
-   window. If any mapped subwindows were actually destroyed,
-   XDestroySubwindows causes the X server to generate Expose
-   events on the specified window. This is much more efficient
-   than deleting many windows one at a time because much of the
-   work need be performed only once for all of the windows, rather
-   than for each window. The subwindows should never be referenced
-   again.
-
-   XDestroySubwindows can generate a BadWindow error.
-
-Mapping Windows
-
-   A window is considered mapped if an XMapWindow call has been
-   made on it. It may not be visible on the screen for one of the
-   following reasons:
-     * It is obscured by another opaque window.
-     * One of its ancestors is not mapped.
-     * It is entirely clipped by an ancestor.
-
-   Expose events are generated for the window when part or all of
-   it becomes visible on the screen. A client receives the Expose
-   events only if it has asked for them. Windows retain their
-   position in the stacking order when they are unmapped.
-
-   A window manager may want to control the placement of
-   subwindows. If SubstructureRedirectMask has been selected by a
-   window manager on a parent window (usually a root window), a
-   map request initiated by other clients on a child window is not
-   performed, and the window manager is sent a MapRequest event.
-   However, if the override-redirect flag on the child had been
-   set to True (usually only on pop-up menus), the map request is
-   performed.
-
-   A tiling window manager might decide to reposition and resize
-   other clients' windows and then decide to map the window to its
-   final location. A window manager that wants to provide
-   decoration might reparent the child into a frame first. For
-   further information, see sections 3.2.8 and 10.10. Only a
-   single client at a time can select for
-   SubstructureRedirectMask.
-
-   Similarly, a single client can select for ResizeRedirectMask on
-   a parent window. Then, any attempt to resize the window by
-   another client is suppressed, and the client receives a
-   ResizeRequest event.
-
-   To map a given window, use XMapWindow.
-
-   XMapWindow(Display *display, Window w);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   The XMapWindow function maps the window and all of its
-   subwindows that have had map requests. Mapping a window that
-   has an unmapped ancestor does not display the window but marks
-   it as eligible for display when the ancestor becomes mapped.
-   Such a window is called unviewable. When all its ancestors are
-   mapped, the window becomes viewable and will be visible on the
-   screen if it is not obscured by another window. This function
-   has no effect if the window is already mapped.
-
-   If the override-redirect of the window is False and if some
-   other client has selected SubstructureRedirectMask on the
-   parent window, then the X server generates a MapRequest event,
-   and the XMapWindow function does not map the window. Otherwise,
-   the window is mapped, and the X server generates a MapNotify
-   event.
-
-   If the window becomes viewable and no earlier contents for it
-   are remembered, the X server tiles the window with its
-   background. If the window's background is undefined, the
-   existing screen contents are not altered, and the X server
-   generates zero or more Expose events. If backing-store was
-   maintained while the window was unmapped, no Expose events are
-   generated. If backing-store will now be maintained, a
-   full-window exposure is always generated. Otherwise, only
-   visible regions may be reported. Similar tiling and exposure
-   take place for any newly viewable inferiors.
-
-   If the window is an InputOutput window, XMapWindow generates
-   Expose events on each InputOutput window that it causes to be
-   displayed. If the client maps and paints the window and if the
-   client begins processing events, the window is painted twice.
-   To avoid this, first ask for Expose events and then map the
-   window, so the client processes input events as usual. The
-   event list will include Expose for each window that has
-   appeared on the screen. The client's normal response to an
-   Expose event should be to repaint the window. This method
-   usually leads to simpler programs and to proper interaction
-   with window managers.
-
-   XMapWindow can generate a BadWindow error.
-
-   To map and raise a window, use XMapRaised.
-
-   XMapRaised(Display *display, Window w);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   The XMapRaised function essentially is similar to XMapWindow in
-   that it maps the window and all of its subwindows that have had
-   map requests. However, it also raises the specified window to
-   the top of the stack. For additional information, see
-   XMapWindow.
-
-   XMapRaised can generate multiple BadWindow errors.
-
-   To map all subwindows for a specified window, use
-   XMapSubwindows.
-
-   XMapSubwindows(Display *display, Window w);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   The XMapSubwindows function maps all subwindows for a specified
-   window in top-to-bottom stacking order. The X server generates
-   Expose events on each newly displayed window. This may be much
-   more efficient than mapping many windows one at a time because
-   the server needs to perform much of the work only once, for all
-   of the windows, rather than for each window.
-
-   XMapSubwindows can generate a BadWindow error.
-
-Unmapping Windows
-
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to unmap a window or
-   all subwindows.
-
-   To unmap a window, use XUnmapWindow.
-
-   XUnmapWindow(Display *display, Window w);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   The XUnmapWindow function unmaps the specified window and
-   causes the X server to generate an UnmapNotify event. If the
-   specified window is already unmapped, XUnmapWindow has no
-   effect. Normal exposure processing on formerly obscured windows
-   is performed. Any child window will no longer be visible until
-   another map call is made on the parent. In other words, the
-   subwindows are still mapped but are not visible until the
-   parent is mapped. Unmapping a window will generate Expose
-   events on windows that were formerly obscured by it.
-
-   XUnmapWindow can generate a BadWindow error.
-
-   To unmap all subwindows for a specified window, use
-   XUnmapSubwindows.
-
-   XUnmapSubwindows(Display *display, Window w);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   The XUnmapSubwindows function unmaps all subwindows for the
-   specified window in bottom-to-top stacking order. It causes the
-   X server to generate an UnmapNotify event on each subwindow and
-   Expose events on formerly obscured windows. Using this function
-   is much more efficient than unmapping multiple windows one at a
-   time because the server needs to perform much of the work only
-   once, for all of the windows, rather than for each window.
-
-   XUnmapSubwindows can generate a BadWindow error.
-
-Configuring Windows
-
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to move a window,
-   resize a window, move and resize a window, or change a window's
-   border width. To change one of these parameters, set the
-   appropriate member of the XWindowChanges structure and OR in
-   the corresponding value mask in subsequent calls to
-   XConfigureWindow. The symbols for the value mask bits and the
-   XWindowChanges structure are:
-
-/* Configure window value mask bits */
-#define      CWX              (1<<0)
-#define      CWY              (1<<1)
-#define      CWWidth          (1<<2)
-#define      CWHeight         (1<<3)
-#define      CWBorderWidth    (1<<4)
-#define      CWSibling        (1<<5)
-#define      CWStackMode      (1<<6)
-
-/* Values */
-
-typedef struct {
-     int x, y;
-     int width, height;
-     int border_width;
-     Window sibling;
-     int stack_mode;
-} XWindowChanges;
-
-   The x and y members are used to set the window's x and y
-   coordinates, which are relative to the parent's origin and
-   indicate the position of the upper-left outer corner of the
-   window. The width and height members are used to set the inside
-   size of the window, not including the border, and must be
-   nonzero, or a BadValue error results. Attempts to configure a
-   root window have no effect.
-
-   The border_width member is used to set the width of the border
-   in pixels. Note that setting just the border width leaves the
-   outer-left corner of the window in a fixed position but moves
-   the absolute position of the window's origin. If you attempt to
-   set the border-width attribute of an InputOnly window nonzero,
-   a BadMatch error results.
-
-   The sibling member is used to set the sibling window for
-   stacking operations. The stack_mode member is used to set how
-   the window is to be restacked and can be set to Above, Below,
-   TopIf, BottomIf, or Opposite.
-
-   If the override-redirect flag of the window is False and if
-   some other client has selected SubstructureRedirectMask on the
-   parent, the X server generates a ConfigureRequest event, and no
-   further processing is performed. Otherwise, if some other
-   client has selected ResizeRedirectMask on the window and the
-   inside width or height of the window is being changed, a
-   ResizeRequest event is generated, and the current inside width
-   and height are used instead. Note that the override-redirect
-   flag of the window has no effect on ResizeRedirectMask and that
-   SubstructureRedirectMask on the parent has precedence over
-   ResizeRedirectMask on the window.
-
-   When the geometry of the window is changed as specified, the
-   window is restacked among siblings, and a ConfigureNotify event
-   is generated if the state of the window actually changes.
-   GravityNotify events are generated after ConfigureNotify
-   events. If the inside width or height of the window has
-   actually changed, children of the window are affected as
-   specified.
-
-   If a window's size actually changes, the window's subwindows
-   move according to their window gravity. Depending on the
-   window's bit gravity, the contents of the window also may be
-   moved (see section 3.2.3).
-
-   If regions of the window were obscured but now are not,
-   exposure processing is performed on these formerly obscured
-   windows, including the window itself and its inferiors. As a
-   result of increasing the width or height, exposure processing
-   is also performed on any new regions of the window and any
-   regions where window contents are lost.
-
-   The restack check (specifically, the computation for BottomIf,
-   TopIf, and Opposite) is performed with respect to the window's
-   final size and position (as controlled by the other arguments
-   of the request), not its initial position. If a sibling is
-   specified without a stack_mode, a BadMatch error results.
-
-   If a sibling and a stack_mode are specified, the window is
-   restacked as follows:
-   Above The window is placed just above the sibling.
-   Below The window is placed just below the sibling.
-   TopIf If the sibling occludes the window, the window is placed
-   at the top of the stack.
-   BottomIf If the window occludes the sibling, the window is
-   placed at the bottom of the stack.
-   Opposite If the sibling occludes the window, the window is
-   placed at the top of the stack. If the window occludes the
-   sibling, the window is placed at the bottom of the stack.
-
-   If a stack_mode is specified but no sibling is specified, the
-   window is restacked as follows:
-   Above The window is placed at the top of the stack.
-   Below The window is placed at the bottom of the stack.
-   TopIf If any sibling occludes the window, the window is placed
-   at the top of the stack.
-   BottomIf If the window occludes any sibling, the window is
-   placed at the bottom of the stack.
-   Opposite If any sibling occludes the window, the window is
-   placed at the top of the stack. If the window occludes any
-   sibling, the window is placed at the bottom of the stack.
-
-   Attempts to configure a root window have no effect.
-
-   To configure a window's size, location, stacking, or border,
-   use XConfigureWindow.
-
-   XConfigureWindow(Display *display, Window w, unsigned int
-   value_mask, XWindowChanges *values);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window to be reconfigured.
-
-   value_mask
-
-   Specifies which values are to be set using information in the
-   values structure. This mask is the bitwise inclusive OR of the
-   valid configure window values bits.
-
-   values
-
-   Specifies the XWindowChanges structure.
-
-   The XConfigureWindow function uses the values specified in the
-   XWindowChanges structure to reconfigure a window's size,
-   position, border, and stacking order. Values not specified are
-   taken from the existing geometry of the window.
-
-   If a sibling is specified without a stack_mode or if the window
-   is not actually a sibling, a BadMatch error results. Note that
-   the computations for BottomIf, TopIf, and Opposite are
-   performed with respect to the window's final geometry (as
-   controlled by the other arguments passed to XConfigureWindow),
-   not its initial geometry. Any backing store contents of the
-   window, its inferiors, and other newly visible windows are
-   either discarded or changed to reflect the current screen
-   contents (depending on the implementation).
-
-   XConfigureWindow can generate BadMatch, BadValue, and BadWindow
-   errors.
-
-   To move a window without changing its size, use XMoveWindow.
-
-   XMoveWindow(Display *display, Window w, int x, int y);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window to be moved.
-
-   x
-
-   y
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates, which define the new location
-   of the top-left pixel of the window's border or the window
-   itself if it has no border.
-
-   The XMoveWindow function moves the specified window to the
-   specified x and y coordinates, but it does not change the
-   window's size, raise the window, or change the mapping state of
-   the window. Moving a mapped window may or may not lose the
-   window's contents depending on if the window is obscured by
-   nonchildren and if no backing store exists. If the contents of
-   the window are lost, the X server generates Expose events.
-   Moving a mapped window generates Expose events on any formerly
-   obscured windows.
-
-   If the override-redirect flag of the window is False and some
-   other client has selected SubstructureRedirectMask on the
-   parent, the X server generates a ConfigureRequest event, and no
-   further processing is performed. Otherwise, the window is
-   moved.
-
-   XMoveWindow can generate a BadWindow error.
-
-   To change a window's size without changing the upper-left
-   coordinate, use XResizeWindow.
-
-   XResizeWindow(Display *display, Window w, unsigned int width,
-   unsigned int height);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   width
-
-   height
-
-   Specify the width and height, which are the interior dimensions
-   of the window after the call completes.
-
-   The XResizeWindow function changes the inside dimensions of the
-   specified window, not including its borders. This function does
-   not change the window's upper-left coordinate or the origin and
-   does not restack the window. Changing the size of a mapped
-   window may lose its contents and generate Expose events. If a
-   mapped window is made smaller, changing its size generates
-   Expose events on windows that the mapped window formerly
-   obscured.
-
-   If the override-redirect flag of the window is False and some
-   other client has selected SubstructureRedirectMask on the
-   parent, the X server generates a ConfigureRequest event, and no
-   further processing is performed. If either width or height is
-   zero, a BadValue error results.
-
-   XResizeWindow can generate BadValue and BadWindow errors.
-
-   To change the size and location of a window, use
-   XMoveResizeWindow.
-
-   XMoveResizeWindow(Display *display, Window w, int x, int y,
-   unsigned int width, unsigned int height);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window to be reconfigured.
-
-   x
-
-   y
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates, which define the new position
-   of the window relative to its parent.
-
-   width
-
-   height
-
-   Specify the width and height, which define the interior size of
-   the window.
-
-   The XMoveResizeWindow function changes the size and location of
-   the specified window without raising it. Moving and resizing a
-   mapped window may generate an Expose event on the window.
-   Depending on the new size and location parameters, moving and
-   resizing a window may generate Expose events on windows that
-   the window formerly obscured.
-
-   If the override-redirect flag of the window is False and some
-   other client has selected SubstructureRedirectMask on the
-   parent, the X server generates a ConfigureRequest event, and no
-   further processing is performed. Otherwise, the window size and
-   location are changed.
-
-   XMoveResizeWindow can generate BadValue and BadWindow errors.
-
-   To change the border width of a given window, use
-   XSetWindowBorderWidth.
-
-   XSetWindowBorderWidth(Display *display, Window w, unsigned int
-   width);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   width
-
-   Specifies the width of the window border.
-
-   The XSetWindowBorderWidth function sets the specified window's
-   border width to the specified width.
-
-   XSetWindowBorderWidth can generate a BadWindow error.
-
-Changing Window Stacking Order
-
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to raise, lower,
-   circulate, or restack windows.
-
-   To raise a window so that no sibling window obscures it, use
-   XRaiseWindow.
-
-   XRaiseWindow(Display *display, Window w);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   The XRaiseWindow function raises the specified window to the
-   top of the stack so that no sibling window obscures it. If the
-   windows are regarded as overlapping sheets of paper stacked on
-   a desk, then raising a window is analogous to moving the sheet
-   to the top of the stack but leaving its x and y location on the
-   desk constant. Raising a mapped window may generate Expose
-   events for the window and any mapped subwindows that were
-   formerly obscured.
-
-   If the override-redirect attribute of the window is False and
-   some other client has selected SubstructureRedirectMask on the
-   parent, the X server generates a ConfigureRequest event, and no
-   processing is performed. Otherwise, the window is raised.
-
-   XRaiseWindow can generate a BadWindow error.
-
-   To lower a window so that it does not obscure any sibling
-   windows, use XLowerWindow.
-
-   XLowerWindow(Display *display, Window w);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   The XLowerWindow function lowers the specified window to the
-   bottom of the stack so that it does not obscure any sibling
-   windows. If the windows are regarded as overlapping sheets of
-   paper stacked on a desk, then lowering a window is analogous to
-   moving the sheet to the bottom of the stack but leaving its x
-   and y location on the desk constant. Lowering a mapped window
-   will generate Expose events on any windows it formerly
-   obscured.
-
-   If the override-redirect attribute of the window is False and
-   some other client has selected SubstructureRedirectMask on the
-   parent, the X server generates a ConfigureRequest event, and no
-   processing is performed. Otherwise, the window is lowered to
-   the bottom of the stack.
-
-   XLowerWindow can generate a BadWindow error.
-
-   To circulate a subwindow up or down, use XCirculateSubwindows.
-
-   XCirculateSubwindows(Display *display, Window w, int
-   direction);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   direction
-
-   Specifies the direction (up or down) that you want to circulate
-   the window. You can pass RaiseLowest or LowerHighest.
-
-   The XCirculateSubwindows function circulates children of the
-   specified window in the specified direction. If you specify
-   RaiseLowest, XCirculateSubwindows raises the lowest mapped
-   child (if any) that is occluded by another child to the top of
-   the stack. If you specify LowerHighest, XCirculateSubwindows
-   lowers the highest mapped child (if any) that occludes another
-   child to the bottom of the stack. Exposure processing is then
-   performed on formerly obscured windows. If some other client
-   has selected SubstructureRedirectMask on the window, the X
-   server generates a CirculateRequest event, and no further
-   processing is performed. If a child is actually restacked, the
-   X server generates a CirculateNotify event.
-
-   XCirculateSubwindows can generate BadValue and BadWindow
-   errors.
-
-   To raise the lowest mapped child of a window that is partially
-   or completely occluded by another child, use
-   XCirculateSubwindowsUp.
-
-   XCirculateSubwindowsUp(Display *display, Window w);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   The XCirculateSubwindowsUp function raises the lowest mapped
-   child of the specified window that is partially or completely
-   occluded by another child. Completely unobscured children are
-   not affected. This is a convenience function equivalent to
-   XCirculateSubwindows with RaiseLowest specified.
-
-   XCirculateSubwindowsUp can generate a BadWindow error.
-
-   To lower the highest mapped child of a window that partially or
-   completely occludes another child, use
-   XCirculateSubwindowsDown.
-
-   XCirculateSubwindowsDown(Display *display, Window w);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   The XCirculateSubwindowsDown function lowers the highest mapped
-   child of the specified window that partially or completely
-   occludes another child. Completely unobscured children are not
-   affected. This is a convenience function equivalent to
-   XCirculateSubwindows with LowerHighest specified.
-
-   XCirculateSubwindowsDown can generate a BadWindow error.
-
-   To restack a set of windows from top to bottom, use
-   XRestackWindows.
-
-   XRestackWindows(Display *display, Window windows[], int
-   nwindows);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   windows
-
-   Specifies an array containing the windows to be restacked.
-
-   nwindows
-
-   Specifies the number of windows to be restacked.
-
-   The XRestackWindows function restacks the windows in the order
-   specified, from top to bottom. The stacking order of the first
-   window in the windows array is unaffected, but the other
-   windows in the array are stacked underneath the first window,
-   in the order of the array. The stacking order of the other
-   windows is not affected. For each window in the window array
-   that is not a child of the specified window, a BadMatch error
-   results.
-
-   If the override-redirect attribute of a window is False and
-   some other client has selected SubstructureRedirectMask on the
-   parent, the X server generates ConfigureRequest events for each
-   window whose override-redirect flag is not set, and no further
-   processing is performed. Otherwise, the windows will be
-   restacked in top-to-bottom order.
-
-   XRestackWindows can generate a BadWindow error.
-
-Changing Window Attributes
-
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to set window
-   attributes. XChangeWindowAttributes is the more general
-   function that allows you to set one or more window attributes
-   provided by the XSetWindowAttributes structure. The other
-   functions described in this section allow you to set one
-   specific window attribute, such as a window's background.
-
-   To change one or more attributes for a given window, use
-   XChangeWindowAttributes.
-
-   XChangeWindowAttributes(Display *display, Window w, unsigned
-   long valuemask, XSetWindowAttributes *attributes);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   valuemask
-
-   Specifies which window attributes are defined in the attributes
-   argument. This mask is the bitwise inclusive OR of the valid
-   attribute mask bits. If valuemask is zero, the attributes are
-   ignored and are not referenced. The values and restrictions are
-   the same as for XCreateWindow.
-
-   attributes
-
-   Specifies the structure from which the values (as specified by
-   the value mask) are to be taken. The value mask should have the
-   appropriate bits set to indicate which attributes have been set
-   in the structure (see section 3.2).
-
-   Depending on the valuemask, the XChangeWindowAttributes
-   function uses the window attributes in the XSetWindowAttributes
-   structure to change the specified window attributes. Changing
-   the background does not cause the window contents to be
-   changed. To repaint the window and its background, use
-   XClearWindow. Setting the border or changing the background
-   such that the border tile origin changes causes the border to
-   be repainted. Changing the background of a root window to None
-   or ParentRelative restores the default background pixmap.
-   Changing the border of a root window to CopyFromParent restores
-   the default border pixmap. Changing the win-gravity does not
-   affect the current position of the window. Changing the
-   backing-store of an obscured window to WhenMapped or Always, or
-   changing the backing-planes, backing-pixel, or save-under of a
-   mapped window may have no immediate effect. Changing the
-   colormap of a window (that is, defining a new map, not changing
-   the contents of the existing map) generates a ColormapNotify
-   event. Changing the colormap of a visible window may have no
-   immediate effect on the screen because the map may not be
-   installed (see XInstallColormap). Changing the cursor of a root
-   window to None restores the default cursor. Whenever possible,
-   you are encouraged to share colormaps.
-
-   Multiple clients can select input on the same window. Their
-   event masks are maintained separately. When an event is
-   generated, it is reported to all interested clients. However,
-   only one client at a time can select for
-   SubstructureRedirectMask, ResizeRedirectMask, and
-   ButtonPressMask. If a client attempts to select any of these
-   event masks and some other client has already selected one, a
-   BadAccess error results. There is only one
-   do-not-propagate-mask for a window, not one per client.
-
-   XChangeWindowAttributes can generate BadAccess, BadColor,
-   BadCursor, BadMatch, BadPixmap, BadValue, and BadWindow errors.
-
-   To set the background of a window to a given pixel, use
-   XSetWindowBackground.
-
-   XSetWindowBackground(Display *display, Window w, unsigned long
-   background_pixel);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   background_pixel
-
-   Specifies the pixel that is to be used for the background.
-
-   The XSetWindowBackground function sets the background of the
-   window to the specified pixel value. Changing the background
-   does not cause the window contents to be changed.
-   XSetWindowBackground uses a pixmap of undefined size filled
-   with the pixel value you passed. If you try to change the
-   background of an InputOnly window, a BadMatch error results.
-
-   XSetWindowBackground can generate BadMatch and BadWindow
-   errors.
-
-   To set the background of a window to a given pixmap, use
-   XSetWindowBackgroundPixmap.
-
-   XSetWindowBackgroundPixmap(Display *display, Window w, Pixmap
-   background_pixmap);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   background_pixmap
-
-   Specifies the background pixmap, ParentRelative, or None.
-
-   The XSetWindowBackgroundPixmap function sets the background
-   pixmap of the window to the specified pixmap. The background
-   pixmap can immediately be freed if no further explicit
-   references to it are to be made. If ParentRelative is
-   specified, the background pixmap of the window's parent is
-   used, or on the root window, the default background is
-   restored. If you try to change the background of an InputOnly
-   window, a BadMatch error results. If the background is set to
-   None, the window has no defined background.
-
-   XSetWindowBackgroundPixmap can generate BadMatch, BadPixmap,
-   and BadWindow errors. XSetWindowBackground and
-   XSetWindowBackgroundPixmap do not change the current contents
-   of the window.
-
-   To change and repaint a window's border to a given pixel, use
-   XSetWindowBorder.
-
-   XSetWindowBorder(Display *display, Window w, unsigned long
-   border_pixel);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   border_pixel
-
-   Specifies the entry in the colormap.
-
-   The XSetWindowBorder function sets the border of the window to
-   the pixel value you specify. If you attempt to perform this on
-   an InputOnly window, a BadMatch error results.
-
-   XSetWindowBorder can generate BadMatch and BadWindow errors.
-
-   To change and repaint the border tile of a given window, use
-   XSetWindowBorderPixmap.
-
-   XSetWindowBorderPixmap(Display *display, Window w, Pixmap
-   border_pixmap);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   border_pixmap
-
-   Specifies the border pixmap or CopyFromParent.
-
-   The XSetWindowBorderPixmap function sets the border pixmap of
-   the window to the pixmap you specify. The border pixmap can be
-   freed immediately if no further explicit references to it are
-   to be made. If you specify CopyFromParent, a copy of the parent
-   window's border pixmap is used. If you attempt to perform this
-   on an InputOnly window, a BadMatch error results.
-
-   XSetWindowBorderPixmap can generate BadMatch, BadPixmap, and
-   BadWindow errors.
-
-   To set the colormap of a given window, use XSetWindowColormap.
-
-   XSetWindowColormap(Display *display, Window w, Colormap
-   colormap);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   colormap
-
-   Specifies the colormap.
-
-   The XSetWindowColormap function sets the specified colormap of
-   the specified window. The colormap must have the same visual
-   type as the window, or a BadMatch error results.
-
-   XSetWindowColormap can generate BadColor, BadMatch, and
-   BadWindow errors.
-
-   To define which cursor will be used in a window, use
-   XDefineCursor.
-
-   XDefineCursor(Display *display, Window w, Cursor cursor);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   cursor
-
-   Specifies the cursor that is to be displayed or None.
-
-   If a cursor is set, it will be used when the pointer is in the
-   window. If the cursor is None, it is equivalent to
-   XUndefineCursor.
-
-   XDefineCursor can generate BadCursor and BadWindow errors.
-
-   To undefine the cursor in a given window, use XUndefineCursor.
-
-   XUndefineCursor(Display *display, Window w);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   The XUndefineCursor function undoes the effect of a previous
-   XDefineCursor for this window. When the pointer is in the
-   window, the parent's cursor will now be used. On the root
-   window, the default cursor is restored.
-
-   XUndefineCursor can generate a BadWindow error.
-
-Chapter 4. Window Information Functions
-
-   Table of Contents
-
-   Obtaining Window Information
-   Translating Screen Coordinates
-   Properties and Atoms
-   Obtaining and Changing Window Properties
-   Selections
-
-   After you connect the display to the X server and create a
-   window, you can use the Xlib window information functions to:
-     * Obtain information about a window
-     * Translate screen coordinates
-     * Manipulate property lists
-     * Obtain and change window properties
-     * Manipulate selections
-
-Obtaining Window Information
-
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to obtain information
-   about the window tree, the window's current attributes, the
-   window's current geometry, or the current pointer coordinates.
-   Because they are most frequently used by window managers, these
-   functions all return a status to indicate whether the window
-   still exists.
-
-   To obtain the parent, a list of children, and number of
-   children for a given window, use XQueryTree.
-
-   Status XQueryTree(Display *display, Window w, Window
-   *root_return, Window *parent_return, Window **children_return,
-   unsigned int *nchildren_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window whose list of children, root, parent, and
-   number of children you want to obtain.
-
-   root_return
-
-   Returns the root window.
-
-   parent_return
-
-   Returns the parent window.
-
-   children_return
-
-   Returns the list of children.
-
-   nchildren_return
-
-   Returns the number of children.
-
-   The XQueryTree function returns the root ID, the parent window
-   ID, a pointer to the list of children windows (NULL when there
-   are no children), and the number of children in the list for
-   the specified window. The children are listed in current
-   stacking order, from bottom-most (first) to top-most (last).
-   XQueryTree returns zero if it fails and nonzero if it succeeds.
-   To free a non-NULL children list when it is no longer needed,
-   use XFree.
-
-   XQueryTree can generate a BadWindow error.
-
-   To obtain the current attributes of a given window, use
-   XGetWindowAttributes.
-
-   Status XGetWindowAttributes(Display *display, Window w,
-   XWindowAttributes *window_attributes_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window whose current attributes you want to
-   obtain.
-
-   window_attributes_return
-
-   Returns the specified window's attributes in the
-   XWindowAttributes structure.
-
-   The XGetWindowAttributes function returns the current
-   attributes for the specified window to an XWindowAttributes
-   structure.
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     int x, y;                     /* location of window */
-     int width, height;            /* width and height of window */
-     int border_width;             /* border width of window */
-     int depth;                    /* depth of window */
-     Visual *visual;               /* the associated visual structure */
-     Window root;                  /* root of screen containing window *
-/
-     int class;                    /* InputOutput, InputOnly*/
-     int bit_gravity;              /* one of the bit gravity values */
-     int win_gravity;              /* one of the window gravity values *
-/
-     int backing_store;            /* NotUseful, WhenMapped, Always */
-     unsigned long backing_planes; /* planes to be preserved if possible
- */
-     unsigned long backing_pixel;  /* value to be used when restoring pl
-anes */
-     Bool save_under;              /* boolean, should bits under be save
-d? */
-     Colormap colormap;            /* color map to be associated with wi
-ndow */
-     Bool map_installed;           /* boolean, is color map currently in
-stalled*/
-     int map_state;                /* IsUnmapped, IsUnviewable, IsViewab
-le */
-     long all_event_masks;         /* set of events all people have inte
-rest in*/
-     long your_event_mask;         /* my event mask */
-     long do_not_propagate_mask;   /* set of events that should not prop
-agate */
-     Bool override_redirect;       /* boolean value for override-redirec
-t */
-     Screen *screen;               /* back pointer to correct screen */
-} XWindowAttributes;
-
-   The x and y members are set to the upper-left outer corner
-   relative to the parent window's origin. The width and height
-   members are set to the inside size of the window, not including
-   the border. The border_width member is set to the window's
-   border width in pixels. The depth member is set to the depth of
-   the window (that is, bits per pixel for the object). The visual
-   member is a pointer to the screen's associated Visual
-   structure. The root member is set to the root window of the
-   screen containing the window. The class member is set to the
-   window's class and can be either InputOutput or InputOnly.
-
-   The bit_gravity member is set to the window's bit gravity and
-   can be one of the following:
-   ForgetGravity    EastGravity
-   NorthWestGravity SouthWestGravity
-   NorthGravity     SouthGravity
-   NorthEastGravity SouthEastGravity
-   WestGravity      StaticGravity
-
-   The win_gravity member is set to the window's window gravity
-   and can be one of the following:
-   UnmapGravity     SouthWestGravity
-   NorthWestGravity SouthGravity
-   NorthGravity     SouthEastGravity
-   NorthEastGravity StaticGravity
-   WestGravity      CenterGravity
-   EastGravity
-
-   For additional information on gravity, see section 3.2.3.
-
-   The backing_store member is set to indicate how the X server
-   should maintain the contents of a window and can be WhenMapped,
-   Always, or NotUseful. The backing_planes member is set to
-   indicate (with bits set to 1) which bit planes of the window
-   hold dynamic data that must be preserved in backing_stores and
-   during save_unders. The backing_pixel member is set to indicate
-   what values to use for planes not set in backing_planes.
-
-   The save_under member is set to True or False. The colormap
-   member is set to the colormap for the specified window and can
-   be a colormap ID or None. The map_installed member is set to
-   indicate whether the colormap is currently installed and can be
-   True or False. The map_state member is set to indicate the
-   state of the window and can be IsUnmapped, IsUnviewable, or
-   IsViewable. IsUnviewable is used if the window is mapped but
-   some ancestor is unmapped.
-
-   The all_event_masks member is set to the bitwise inclusive OR
-   of all event masks selected on the window by all clients. The
-   your_event_mask member is set to the bitwise inclusive OR of
-   all event masks selected by the querying client. The
-   do_not_propagate_mask member is set to the bitwise inclusive OR
-   of the set of events that should not propagate.
-
-   The override_redirect member is set to indicate whether this
-   window overrides structure control facilities and can be True
-   or False. Window manager clients should ignore the window if
-   this member is True.
-
-   The screen member is set to a screen pointer that gives you a
-   back pointer to the correct screen. This makes it easier to
-   obtain the screen information without having to loop over the
-   root window fields to see which field matches.
-
-   XGetWindowAttributes can generate BadDrawable and BadWindow
-   errors.
-
-   To obtain the current geometry of a given drawable, use
-   XGetGeometry.
-
-   Status XGetGeometry(Display *display, Drawable d, Window
-   *root_return, int *x_return, int *y_return, unsigned int
-   *width_return, unsigned int *height_return, unsigned int
-   *border_width_return, unsigned int *depth_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   d
-
-   Specifies the drawable, which can be a window or a pixmap.
-
-   root_return
-
-   Returns the root window.
-
-   x_return
-
-   y_return
-
-   Return the x and y coordinates that define the location of the
-   drawable. For a window, these coordinates specify the
-   upper-left outer corner relative to its parent's origin. For
-   pixmaps, these coordinates are always zero.
-
-   width_return
-
-   height_return
-
-   Return the drawable's dimensions (width and height). For a
-   window, these dimensions specify the inside size, not including
-   the border.
-
-   border_width_return
-
-   Returns the border width in pixels. If the drawable is a
-   pixmap, it returns zero.
-
-   depth_return
-
-   Returns the depth of the drawable (bits per pixel for the
-   object).
-
-   The XGetGeometry function returns the root window and the
-   current geometry of the drawable. The geometry of the drawable
-   includes the x and y coordinates, width and height, border
-   width, and depth. These are described in the argument list. It
-   is legal to pass to this function a window whose class is
-   InputOnly.
-
-   XGetGeometry can generate a BadDrawable error.
-
-Translating Screen Coordinates
-
-   Applications sometimes need to perform a coordinate
-   transformation from the coordinate space of one window to
-   another window or need to determine which window the pointing
-   device is in. XTranslateCoordinates and XQueryPointer fulfill
-   these needs (and avoid any race conditions) by asking the X
-   server to perform these operations.
-
-   To translate a coordinate in one window to the coordinate space
-   of another window, use XTranslateCoordinates.
-
-   Bool XTranslateCoordinates(Display *display, Window src_w,
-   Window dest_w, int src_x, int src_y, int *dest_x_return, int
-   *dest_y_return, Window *child_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   src_w
-
-   Specifies the source window.
-
-   dest_w
-
-   Specifies the destination window.
-
-   src_x
-
-   src_y
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates within the source window.
-
-   dest_x_return
-
-   dest_y_return
-
-   Return the x and y coordinates within the destination window.
-
-   child_return
-
-   Returns the child if the coordinates are contained in a mapped
-   child of the destination window.
-
-   If XTranslateCoordinates returns True, it takes the src_x and
-   src_y coordinates relative to the source window's origin and
-   returns these coordinates to dest_x_return and dest_y_return
-   relative to the destination window's origin. If
-   XTranslateCoordinates returns False, src_w and dest_w are on
-   different screens, and dest_x_return and dest_y_return are
-   zero. If the coordinates are contained in a mapped child of
-   dest_w, that child is returned to child_return. Otherwise,
-   child_return is set to None.
-
-   XTranslateCoordinates can generate a BadWindow error.
-
-   To obtain the screen coordinates of the pointer or to determine
-   the pointer coordinates relative to a specified window, use
-   XQueryPointer.
-
-   Bool XQueryPointer(Display *display, Window w, Window
-   *root_return, Window *child_return, int *root_x_return, int
-   *root_y_return, int *win_x_return, int *win_y_return, unsigned
-   int *mask_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   root_return
-
-   Returns the root window that the pointer is in.
-
-   child_return
-
-   Returns the child window that the pointer is located in, if
-   any.
-
-   root_x_return
-
-   root_y_return
-
-   Return the pointer coordinates relative to the root window's
-   origin.
-
-   win_x_return
-
-   win_y_return
-
-   Return the pointer coordinates relative to the specified
-   window.
-
-   mask_return
-
-   Returns the current state of the modifier keys and pointer
-   buttons.
-
-   The XQueryPointer function returns the root window the pointer
-   is logically on and the pointer coordinates relative to the
-   root window's origin. If XQueryPointer returns False, the
-   pointer is not on the same screen as the specified window, and
-   XQueryPointer returns None to child_return and zero to
-   win_x_return and win_y_return. If XQueryPointer returns True,
-   the pointer coordinates returned to win_x_return and
-   win_y_return are relative to the origin of the specified
-   window. In this case, XQueryPointer returns the child that
-   contains the pointer, if any, or else None to child_return.
-
-   XQueryPointer returns the current logical state of the keyboard
-   buttons and the modifier keys in mask_return. It sets
-   mask_return to the bitwise inclusive OR of one or more of the
-   button or modifier key bitmasks to match the current state of
-   the mouse buttons and the modifier keys.
-
-   Note that the logical state of a device (as seen through Xlib)
-   may lag the physical state if device event processing is frozen
-   (see section 12.1).
-
-   XQueryPointer can generate a BadWindow error.
-
-Properties and Atoms
-
-   A property is a collection of named, typed data. The window
-   system has a set of predefined properties (for example, the
-   name of a window, size hints, and so on), and users can define
-   any other arbitrary information and associate it with windows.
-   Each property has a name, which is an ISO Latin-1 string. For
-   each named property, a unique identifier (atom) is associated
-   with it. A property also has a type, for example, string or
-   integer. These types are also indicated using atoms, so
-   arbitrary new types can be defined. Data of only one type may
-   be associated with a single property name. Clients can store
-   and retrieve properties associated with windows. For efficiency
-   reasons, an atom is used rather than a character string.
-   XInternAtom can be used to obtain the atom for property names.
-
-   A property is also stored in one of several possible formats.
-   The X server can store the information as 8-bit quantities,
-   16-bit quantities, or 32-bit quantities. This permits the X
-   server to present the data in the byte order that the client
-   expects. If you define further properties of complex type, you
-   must encode and decode them yourself. These functions must be
-   carefully written if they are to be portable. For further
-   information about how to write a library extension, see
-   appendix C. The type of a property is defined by an atom, which
-   allows for arbitrary extension in this type scheme.
-
-   Certain property names are predefined in the server for
-   commonly used functions. The atoms for these properties are
-   defined in <X11/Xatom.h>. To avoid name clashes with user
-   symbols, the #define name for each atom has the XA_ prefix. For
-   an explanation of the functions that let you get and set much
-   of the information stored in these predefined properties, see
-   chapter 14.
-
-   The core protocol imposes no semantics on these property names,
-   but semantics are specified in other X Consortium standards,
-   such as the Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual and
-   the X Logical Font Description Conventions.
-
-   You can use properties to communicate other information between
-   applications. The functions described in this section let you
-   define new properties and get the unique atom IDs in your
-   applications.
-
-   Although any particular atom can have some client
-   interpretation within each of the name spaces, atoms occur in
-   five distinct name spaces within the protocol:
-     * Selections
-     * Property names
-     * Property types
-     * Font properties
-     * Type of a ClientMessage event (none are built into the X
-       server)
-
-   The built-in selection property names are:
-   PRIMARY SECONDARY
-
-   The built-in property names are:
-   CUT_BUFFER0     RESOURCE_MANAGER
-   CUT_BUFFER1     WM_CLASS
-   CUT_BUFFER2     WM_CLIENT_MACHINE
-   CUT_BUFFER3     WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS
-   CUT_BUFFER4     WM_COMMAND
-   CUT_BUFFER5     WM_HINTS
-   CUT_BUFFER6     WM_ICON_NAME
-   CUT_BUFFER7     WM_ICON_SIZE
-   RGB_BEST_MAP    WM_NAME
-   RGB_BLUE_MAP    WM_NORMAL_HINTS
-   RGB_DEFAULT_MAP WM_PROTOCOLS
-   RGB_GRAY_MAP    WM_STATE
-   RGB_GREEN_MAP   WM_TRANSIENT_FOR
-   RGB_RED_MAP     WM_ZOOM_HINTS
-
-   The built-in property types are:
-   ARC      PIXMAP
-   ATOM     POINT
-   BITMAP   RGB_COLOR_MAP
-   CARDINAL RECTANGLE
-   COLORMAP STRING
-   CURSOR   VISUALID
-   DRAWABLE WINDOW
-   FONT     WM_HINTS
-   INTEGER  WM_SIZE_HINTS
-
-   The built-in font property names are:
-   MIN_SPACE           STRIKEOUT_DESCENT
-   NORM_SPACE          STRIKEOUT_ASCENT
-   MAX_SPACE           ITALIC_ANGLE
-   END_SPACE           X_HEIGHT
-   SUPERSCRIPT_X       QUAD_WIDTH
-   SUPERSCRIPT_Y       WEIGHT
-   SUBSCRIPT_X         POINT_SIZE
-   SUBSCRIPT_Y         RESOLUTION
-   UNDERLINE_POSITION  COPYRIGHT
-   UNDERLINE_THICKNESS NOTICE
-   FONT_NAME           FAMILY_NAME
-   FULL_NAME           CAP_HEIGHT
-
-   For further information about font properties, see section 8.5.
-
-   To return an atom for a given name, use XInternAtom.
-
-   Atom XInternAtom(Display *display, char *atom_name, Bool
-   only_if_exists);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   atom_name
-
-   Specifies the name associated with the atom you want returned.
-
-   only_if_exists
-
-   Specifies a Boolean value that indicates whether the atom must
-   be created.
-
-   The XInternAtom function returns the atom identifier associated
-   with the specified atom_name string. If only_if_exists is
-   False, the atom is created if it does not exist. Therefore,
-   XInternAtom can return None. If the atom name is not in the
-   Host Portable Character Encoding, the result is
-   implementation-dependent. Uppercase and lowercase matter; the
-   strings ``thing'', ``Thing'', and ``thinG'' all designate
-   different atoms. The atom will remain defined even after the
-   client's connection closes. It will become undefined only when
-   the last connection to the X server closes.
-
-   XInternAtom can generate BadAlloc and BadValue errors.
-
-   To return atoms for an array of names, use XInternAtoms.
-
-   Status XInternAtoms(Display *display, char **names, int count,
-   Bool only_if_exists, Atom *atoms_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   names
-
-   Specifies the array of atom names.
-
-   count
-
-   Specifies the number of atom names in the array.
-
-   only_if_exists
-
-   Specifies a Boolean value that indicates whether the atom must
-   be created.
-
-   atoms_return
-
-   Returns the atoms.
-
-   The XInternAtoms function returns the atom identifiers
-   associated with the specified names. The atoms are stored in
-   the atoms_return array supplied by the caller. Calling this
-   function is equivalent to calling XInternAtom for each of the
-   names in turn with the specified value of only_if_exists, but
-   this function minimizes the number of round-trip protocol
-   exchanges between the client and the X server.
-
-   This function returns a nonzero status if atoms are returned
-   for all of the names; otherwise, it returns zero.
-
-   XInternAtoms can generate BadAlloc and BadValue errors.
-
-   To return a name for a given atom identifier, use XGetAtomName.
-
-   char *XGetAtomName(Display *display, Atom atom);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   atom
-
-   Specifies the atom for the property name you want returned.
-
-   The XGetAtomName function returns the name associated with the
-   specified atom. If the data returned by the server is in the
-   Latin Portable Character Encoding, then the returned string is
-   in the Host Portable Character Encoding. Otherwise, the result
-   is implementation-dependent. To free the resulting string, call
-   XFree.
-
-   XGetAtomName can generate a BadAtom error.
-
-   To return the names for an array of atom identifiers, use
-   XGetAtomNames.
-
-   Status XGetAtomNames(Display *display, Atom *atoms, int count,
-   char **names_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   atoms
-
-   Specifies the array of atoms.
-
-   count
-
-   Specifies the number of atoms in the array.
-
-   names_return
-
-   Returns the atom names.
-
-   The XGetAtomNames function returns the names associated with
-   the specified atoms. The names are stored in the names_return
-   array supplied by the caller. Calling this function is
-   equivalent to calling XGetAtomName for each of the atoms in
-   turn, but this function minimizes the number of round-trip
-   protocol exchanges between the client and the X server.
-
-   This function returns a nonzero status if names are returned
-   for all of the atoms; otherwise, it returns zero.
-
-   XGetAtomNames can generate a BadAtom error.
-
-Obtaining and Changing Window Properties
-
-   You can attach a property list to every window. Each property
-   has a name, a type, and a value (see section 4.3). The value is
-   an array of 8-bit, 16-bit, or 32-bit quantities, whose
-   interpretation is left to the clients. The type char is used to
-   represent 8-bit quantities, the type short is used to represent
-   16-bit quantities, and the type long is used to represent
-   32-bit quantities.
-
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to obtain, change,
-   update, or interchange window properties. In addition, Xlib
-   provides other utility functions for inter-client communication
-   (see chapter 14).
-
-   To obtain the type, format, and value of a property of a given
-   window, use XGetWindowProperty.
-
-   int XGetWindowProperty(Display *display, Window w, Atom
-   property, long long_offset, long long_length, Bool delete, Atom
-   req_type, Atom *actual_type_return, int *actual_format_return,
-   unsigned long *nitems_return, unsigned long
-   *bytes_after_return, unsigned char **prop_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window whose property you want to obtain.
-
-   property
-
-   Specifies the property name.
-
-   long_offset
-
-   Specifies the offset in the specified property (in 32-bit
-   quantities) where the data is to be retrieved.
-
-   long_length
-
-   Specifies the length in 32-bit multiples of the data to be
-   retrieved.
-
-   delete
-
-   Specifies a Boolean value that determines whether the property
-   is deleted.
-
-   req_type
-
-   Specifies the atom identifier associated with the property type
-   or AnyPropertyType.
-
-   actual_type_return
-
-   Returns the atom identifier that defines the actual type of the
-   property.
-
-   actual_format_return
-
-   Returns the actual format of the property.
-
-   nitems_return
-
-   Returns the actual number of 8-bit, 16-bit, or 32-bit items
-   stored in the prop_return data.
-
-   bytes_after_return
-
-   Returns the number of bytes remaining to be read in the
-   property if a partial read was performed.
-
-   prop_return
-
-   Returns the data in the specified format.
-
-   The XGetWindowProperty function returns the actual type of the
-   property; the actual format of the property; the number of
-   8-bit, 16-bit, or 32-bit items transferred; the number of bytes
-   remaining to be read in the property; and a pointer to the data
-   actually returned. XGetWindowProperty sets the return arguments
-   as follows:
-     * If the specified property does not exist for the specified
-       window, XGetWindowProperty returns None to
-       actual_type_return and the value zero to
-       actual_format_return and bytes_after_return. The
-       nitems_return argument is empty. In this case, the delete
-       argument is ignored.
-     * If the specified property exists but its type does not
-       match the specified type, XGetWindowProperty returns the
-       actual property type to actual_type_return, the actual
-       property format (never zero) to actual_format_return, and
-       the property length in bytes (even if the
-       actual_format_return is 16 or 32) to bytes_after_return. It
-       also ignores the delete argument. The nitems_return
-       argument is empty.
-     * If the specified property exists and either you assign
-       AnyPropertyType to the req_type argument or the specified
-       type matches the actual property type, XGetWindowProperty
-       returns the actual property type to actual_type_return and
-       the actual property format (never zero) to
-       actual_format_return. It also returns a value to
-       bytes_after_return and nitems_return, by defining the
-       following values:
-     * N = actual length of the stored property in bytes (even if
-       the format is 16 or 32) I = 4 * long_offset T = N - I L =
-       MINIMUM(T, 4 * long_length) A = N - (I + L)
-     * The returned value starts at byte index I in the property
-       (indexing from zero), and its length in bytes is L. If the
-       value for long_offset causes L to be negative, a BadValue
-       error results. The value of bytes_after_return is A, giving
-       the number of trailing unread bytes in the stored property.
-
-   If the returned format is 8, the returned data is represented
-   as a char array. If the returned format is 16, the returned
-   data is represented as a short array and should be cast to that
-   type to obtain the elements. If the returned format is 32, the
-   returned data is represented as a long array and should be cast
-   to that type to obtain the elements.
-
-   XGetWindowProperty always allocates one extra byte in
-   prop_return (even if the property is zero length) and sets it
-   to zero so that simple properties consisting of characters do
-   not have to be copied into yet another string before use.
-
-   If delete is True and bytes_after_return is zero,
-   XGetWindowProperty deletes the property from the window and
-   generates a PropertyNotify event on the window.
-
-   The function returns Success if it executes successfully. To
-   free the resulting data, use XFree.
-
-   XGetWindowProperty can generate BadAtom, BadValue, and
-   BadWindow errors.
-
-   To obtain a given window's property list, use XListProperties.
-
-   Atom *XListProperties(Display *display, Window w, int
-   *num_prop_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window whose property list you want to obtain.
-
-   num_prop_return
-
-   Returns the length of the properties array.
-
-   The XListProperties function returns a pointer to an array of
-   atom properties that are defined for the specified window or
-   returns NULL if no properties were found. To free the memory
-   allocated by this function, use XFree.
-
-   XListProperties can generate a BadWindow error.
-
-   To change a property of a given window, use XChangeProperty.
-
-   XChangeProperty(Display *display, Window w, Atom property, Atom
-   type, int format, int mode, unsignedchar *data, int nelements);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window whose property you want to change.
-
-   property
-
-   Specifies the property name.
-
-   type
-
-   Specifies the type of the property. The X server does not
-   interpret the type but simply passes it back to an application
-   that later calls XGetWindowProperty.
-
-   format
-
-   Specifies whether the data should be viewed as a list of 8-bit,
-   16-bit, or 32-bit quantities. Possible values are 8, 16, and
-   32. This information allows the X server to correctly perform
-   byte-swap operations as necessary. If the format is 16-bit or
-   32-bit, you must explicitly cast your data pointer to an
-   (unsigned char *) in the call to XChangeProperty.
-
-   mode
-
-   Specifies the mode of the operation. You can pass
-   PropModeReplace, PropModePrepend, or PropModeAppend.
-
-   data
-
-   Specifies the property data.
-
-   nelements
-
-   Specifies the number of elements of the specified data format.
-
-   The XChangeProperty function alters the property for the
-   specified window and causes the X server to generate a
-   PropertyNotify event on that window. XChangeProperty performs
-   the following:
-     * If mode is PropModeReplace, XChangeProperty discards the
-       previous property value and stores the new data.
-     * If mode is PropModePrepend or PropModeAppend,
-       XChangeProperty inserts the specified data before the
-       beginning of the existing data or onto the end of the
-       existing data, respectively. The type and format must match
-       the existing property value, or a BadMatch error results.
-       If the property is undefined, it is treated as defined with
-       the correct type and format with zero-length data.
-
-   If the specified format is 8, the property data must be a char
-   array. If the specified format is 16, the property data must be
-   a short array. If the specified format is 32, the property data
-   must be a long array.
-
-   The lifetime of a property is not tied to the storing client.
-   Properties remain until explicitly deleted, until the window is
-   destroyed, or until the server resets. For a discussion of what
-   happens when the connection to the X server is closed, see
-   section 2.6. The maximum size of a property is server dependent
-   and can vary dynamically depending on the amount of memory the
-   server has available. (If there is insufficient space, a
-   BadAlloc error results.)
-
-   XChangeProperty can generate BadAlloc, BadAtom, BadMatch,
-   BadValue, and BadWindow errors.
-
-   To rotate a window's property list, use
-   XRotateWindowProperties.
-
-   XRotateWindowProperties(Display *display, Window w, Atom
-   properties[], int num_prop, int npositions);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   properties
-
-   Specifies the array of properties that are to be rotated.
-
-   num_prop
-
-   Specifies the length of the properties array.
-
-   npositions
-
-   Specifies the rotation amount.
-
-   The XRotateWindowProperties function allows you to rotate
-   properties on a window and causes the X server to generate
-   PropertyNotify events. If the property names in the properties
-   array are viewed as being numbered starting from zero and if
-   there are num_prop property names in the list, then the value
-   associated with property name I becomes the value associated
-   with property name (I + npositions) mod N for all I from zero
-   to N - 1. The effect is to rotate the states by npositions
-   places around the virtual ring of property names (right for
-   positive npositions, left for negative npositions). If
-   npositions mod N is nonzero, the X server generates a
-   PropertyNotify event for each property in the order that they
-   are listed in the array. If an atom occurs more than once in
-   the list or no property with that name is defined for the
-   window, a BadMatch error results. If a BadAtom or BadMatch
-   error results, no properties are changed.
-
-   XRotateWindowProperties can generate BadAtom, BadMatch, and
-   BadWindow errors.
-
-   To delete a property on a given window, use XDeleteProperty.
-
-   XDeleteProperty(Display *display, Window w, Atom property);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window whose property you want to delete.
-
-   property
-
-   Specifies the property name.
-
-   The XDeleteProperty function deletes the specified property
-   only if the property was defined on the specified window and
-   causes the X server to generate a PropertyNotify event on the
-   window unless the property does not exist.
-
-   XDeleteProperty can generate BadAtom and BadWindow errors.
-
-Selections
-
-   Selections are one method used by applications to exchange
-   data. By using the property mechanism, applications can
-   exchange data of arbitrary types and can negotiate the type of
-   the data. A selection can be thought of as an indirect property
-   with a dynamic type. That is, rather than having the property
-   stored in the X server, the property is maintained by some
-   client (the owner). A selection is global in nature (considered
-   to belong to the user but be maintained by clients) rather than
-   being private to a particular window subhierarchy or a
-   particular set of clients.
-
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to set, get, or
-   request conversion of selections. This allows applications to
-   implement the notion of current selection, which requires that
-   notification be sent to applications when they no longer own
-   the selection. Applications that support selection often
-   highlight the current selection and so must be informed when
-   another application has acquired the selection so that they can
-   unhighlight the selection.
-
-   When a client asks for the contents of a selection, it
-   specifies a selection target type. This target type can be used
-   to control the transmitted representation of the contents. For
-   example, if the selection is ``the last thing the user clicked
-   on'' and that is currently an image, then the target type might
-   specify whether the contents of the image should be sent in XY
-   format or Z format.
-
-   The target type can also be used to control the class of
-   contents transmitted, for example, asking for the ``looks''
-   (fonts, line spacing, indentation, and so forth) of a paragraph
-   selection, not the text of the paragraph. The target type can
-   also be used for other purposes. The protocol does not
-   constrain the semantics.
-
-   To set the selection owner, use XSetSelectionOwner.
-
-   XSetSelectionOwner(Display *display, Atom selection, Window
-   owner, Time time);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   selection
-
-   Specifies the selection atom.
-
-   owner
-
-   Specifies the owner of the specified selection atom. You can
-   pass a window or None.
-
-   time
-
-   Specifies the time. You can pass either a timestamp or
-   CurrentTime.
-
-   The XSetSelectionOwner function changes the owner and
-   last-change time for the specified selection and has no effect
-   if the specified time is earlier than the current last-change
-   time of the specified selection or is later than the current X
-   server time. Otherwise, the last-change time is set to the
-   specified time, with CurrentTime replaced by the current server
-   time. If the owner window is specified as None, then the owner
-   of the selection becomes None (that is, no owner). Otherwise,
-   the owner of the selection becomes the client executing the
-   request.
-
-   If the new owner (whether a client or None) is not the same as
-   the current owner of the selection and the current owner is not
-   None, the current owner is sent a SelectionClear event. If the
-   client that is the owner of a selection is later terminated
-   (that is, its connection is closed) or if the owner window it
-   has specified in the request is later destroyed, the owner of
-   the selection automatically reverts to None, but the
-   last-change time is not affected. The selection atom is
-   uninterpreted by the X server. XGetSelectionOwner returns the
-   owner window, which is reported in SelectionRequest and
-   SelectionClear events. Selections are global to the X server.
-
-   XSetSelectionOwner can generate BadAtom and BadWindow errors.
-
-   To return the selection owner, use XGetSelectionOwner.
-
-   Window XGetSelectionOwner(Display *display, Atom selection);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   selection
-
-   Specifies the selection atom whose owner you want returned.
-
-   The XGetSelectionOwner function returns the window ID
-   associated with the window that currently owns the specified
-   selection. If no selection was specified, the function returns
-   the constant None. If None is returned, there is no owner for
-   the selection.
-
-   XGetSelectionOwner can generate a BadAtom error.
-
-   To request conversion of a selection, use XConvertSelection.
-
-   XConvertSelection(Display *display, Atom selection, Atom
-   target, Atom property, Window requestor, Time time);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   selection
-
-   Specifies the selection atom.
-
-   target
-
-   Specifies the target atom.
-
-   property
-
-   Specifies the property name. You also can pass None.
-
-   requestor
-
-   Specifies the requestor.
-
-   time
-
-   Specifies the time. You can pass either a timestamp or
-   CurrentTime.
-
-   XConvertSelection requests that the specified selection be
-   converted to the specified target type:
-     * If the specified selection has an owner, the X server sends
-       a SelectionRequest event to that owner.
-     * If no owner for the specified selection exists, the X
-       server generates a SelectionNotify event to the requestor
-       with property None.
-
-   The arguments are passed on unchanged in either of the events.
-   There are two predefined selection atoms: PRIMARY and
-   SECONDARY.
-
-   XConvertSelection can generate BadAtom and BadWindow errors.
-
-Chapter 5. Pixmap and Cursor Functions
-
-   Table of Contents
-
-   Creating and Freeing Pixmaps
-   Creating, Recoloring, and Freeing Cursors
-
-Creating and Freeing Pixmaps
-
-   Pixmaps can only be used on the screen on which they were
-   created. Pixmaps are off-screen resources that are used for
-   various operations, such as defining cursors as tiling patterns
-   or as the source for certain raster operations. Most graphics
-   requests can operate either on a window or on a pixmap. A
-   bitmap is a single bit-plane pixmap.
-
-   To create a pixmap of a given size, use XCreatePixmap.
-
-   Pixmap XCreatePixmap(Display *display, Drawable d, unsigned int
-   width, unsigned int height, unsigned int depth);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   d
-
-   Specifies which screen the pixmap is created on.
-
-   width
-
-   height
-
-   Specify the width and height, which define the dimensions of
-   the pixmap.
-
-   depth
-
-   Specifies the depth of the pixmap.
-
-   The XCreatePixmap function creates a pixmap of the width,
-   height, and depth you specified and returns a pixmap ID that
-   identifies it. It is valid to pass an InputOnly window to the
-   drawable argument. The width and height arguments must be
-   nonzero, or a BadValue error results. The depth argument must
-   be one of the depths supported by the screen of the specified
-   drawable, or a BadValue error results.
-
-   The server uses the specified drawable to determine on which
-   screen to create the pixmap. The pixmap can be used only on
-   this screen and only with other drawables of the same depth
-   (see XCopyPlane for an exception to this rule). The initial
-   contents of the pixmap are undefined.
-
-   XCreatePixmap can generate BadAlloc, BadDrawable, and BadValue
-   errors.
-
-   To free all storage associated with a specified pixmap, use
-   XFreePixmap.
-
-   XFreePixmap(Display *display, Pixmap pixmap);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   pixmap
-
-   Specifies the pixmap.
-
-   The XFreePixmap function first deletes the association between
-   the pixmap ID and the pixmap. Then, the X server frees the
-   pixmap storage when there are no references to it. The pixmap
-   should never be referenced again.
-
-   XFreePixmap can generate a BadPixmap error.
-
-Creating, Recoloring, and Freeing Cursors
-
-   Each window can have a different cursor defined for it.
-   Whenever the pointer is in a visible window, it is set to the
-   cursor defined for that window. If no cursor was defined for
-   that window, the cursor is the one defined for the parent
-   window.
-
-   From X's perspective, a cursor consists of a cursor source,
-   mask, colors, and a hotspot. The mask pixmap determines the
-   shape of the cursor and must be a depth of one. The source
-   pixmap must have a depth of one, and the colors determine the
-   colors of the source. The hotspot defines the point on the
-   cursor that is reported when a pointer event occurs. There may
-   be limitations imposed by the hardware on cursors as to size
-   and whether a mask is implemented. XQueryBestCursor can be used
-   to find out what sizes are possible. There is a standard font
-   for creating cursors, but Xlib provides functions that you can
-   use to create cursors from an arbitrary font or from bitmaps.
-
-   To create a cursor from the standard cursor font, use
-   XCreateFontCursor.
-
-   #include <X11/cursorfont.h>
-
-   Cursor XCreateFontCursor(Display *display, unsigned int shape);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   shape
-
-   Specifies the shape of the cursor.
-
-   X provides a set of standard cursor shapes in a special font
-   named cursor. Applications are encouraged to use this interface
-   for their cursors because the font can be customized for the
-   individual display type. The shape argument specifies which
-   glyph of the standard fonts to use.
-
-   The hotspot comes from the information stored in the cursor
-   font. The initial colors of a cursor are a black foreground and
-   a white background (see XRecolorCursor). For further
-   information about cursor shapes, see appendix B.
-
-   XCreateFontCursor can generate BadAlloc and BadValue errors.
-
-   To create a cursor from font glyphs, use XCreateGlyphCursor.
-
-   Cursor XCreateGlyphCursor(Display *display, Font source_font,
-   Font mask_font, unsigned int source_char, unsigned int
-   mask_char, XColor *foreground_color, XColor *background_color);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   source_font
-
-   Specifies the font for the source glyph.
-
-   mask_font
-
-   Specifies the font for the mask glyph or None.
-
-   source_char
-
-   Specifies the character glyph for the source.
-
-   mask_char
-
-   Specifies the glyph character for the mask.
-
-   foreground_color
-
-   Specifies the RGB values for the foreground of the source.
-
-   background_color
-
-   Specifies the RGB values for the background of the source.
-
-   The XCreateGlyphCursor function is similar to
-   XCreatePixmapCursor except that the source and mask bitmaps are
-   obtained from the specified font glyphs. The source_char must
-   be a defined glyph in source_font, or a BadValue error results.
-   If mask_font is given, mask_char must be a defined glyph in
-   mask_font, or a BadValue error results. The mask_font and
-   character are optional. The origins of the source_char and
-   mask_char (if defined) glyphs are positioned coincidently and
-   define the hotspot. The source_char and mask_char need not have
-   the same bounding box metrics, and there is no restriction on
-   the placement of the hotspot relative to the bounding boxes. If
-   no mask_char is given, all pixels of the source are displayed.
-   You can free the fonts immediately by calling XFreeFont if no
-   further explicit references to them are to be made.
-
-   For 2-byte matrix fonts, the 16-bit value should be formed with
-   the byte1 member in the most significant byte and the byte2
-   member in the least significant byte.
-
-   XCreateGlyphCursor can generate BadAlloc, BadFont, and BadValue
-   errors.
-
-   To create a cursor from two bitmaps, use XCreatePixmapCursor.
-
-   Cursor XCreatePixmapCursor(Display *display, Pixmap source,
-   Pixmap mask, XColor *foreground_color, XColor
-   *background_color, unsigned int x, unsigned int y);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   source
-
-   Specifies the shape of the source cursor.
-
-   mask
-
-   Specifies the cursor's source bits to be displayed or None.
-
-   foreground_color
-
-   Specifies the RGB values for the foreground of the source.
-
-   background_color
-
-   Specifies the RGB values for the background of the source.
-
-   x
-
-   y
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates, which indicate the hotspot
-   relative to the source's origin.
-
-   The XCreatePixmapCursor function creates a cursor and returns
-   the cursor ID associated with it. The foreground and background
-   RGB values must be specified using foreground_color and
-   background_color, even if the X server only has a StaticGray or
-   GrayScale screen. The foreground color is used for the pixels
-   set to 1 in the source, and the background color is used for
-   the pixels set to 0. Both source and mask, if specified, must
-   have depth one (or a BadMatch error results) but can have any
-   root. The mask argument defines the shape of the cursor. The
-   pixels set to 1 in the mask define which source pixels are
-   displayed, and the pixels set to 0 define which pixels are
-   ignored. If no mask is given, all pixels of the source are
-   displayed. The mask, if present, must be the same size as the
-   pixmap defined by the source argument, or a BadMatch error
-   results. The hotspot must be a point within the source, or a
-   BadMatch error results.
-
-   The components of the cursor can be transformed arbitrarily to
-   meet display limitations. The pixmaps can be freed immediately
-   if no further explicit references to them are to be made.
-   Subsequent drawing in the source or mask pixmap has an
-   undefined effect on the cursor. The X server might or might not
-   make a copy of the pixmap.
-
-   XCreatePixmapCursor can generate BadAlloc and BadPixmap errors.
-
-   To determine useful cursor sizes, use XQueryBestCursor.
-
-   Status XQueryBestCursor(Display *display, Drawable d, unsigned
-   int width, unsigned int height, unsigned int *width_return,
-   unsigned int *height_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   d
-
-   Specifies the drawable, which indicates the screen.
-
-   width
-
-   height
-
-   Specify the width and height of the cursor that you want the
-   size information for.
-
-   width_return
-
-   height_return
-
-   Return the best width and height that is closest to the
-   specified width and height.
-
-   Some displays allow larger cursors than other displays. The
-   XQueryBestCursor function provides a way to find out what size
-   cursors are actually possible on the display. It returns the
-   largest size that can be displayed. Applications should be
-   prepared to use smaller cursors on displays that cannot support
-   large ones.
-
-   XQueryBestCursor can generate a BadDrawable error.
-
-   To change the color of a given cursor, use XRecolorCursor.
-
-   XRecolorCursor(Display *display, Cursor cursor, XColor
-   *foreground_color, XColor *background_color);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   cursor
-
-   Specifies the cursor.
-
-   foreground_color
-
-   Specifies the RGB values for the foreground of the source.
-
-   background_color
-
-   Specifies the RGB values for the background of the source.
-
-   The XRecolorCursor function changes the color of the specified
-   cursor, and if the cursor is being displayed on a screen, the
-   change is visible immediately. The pixel members of the XColor
-   structures are ignored; only the RGB values are used.
-
-   XRecolorCursor can generate a BadCursor error.
-
-   To free (destroy) a given cursor, use XFreeCursor.
-
-   XFreeCursor(Display *display, Cursor cursor);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   cursor
-
-   Specifies the cursor.
-
-   The XFreeCursor function deletes the association between the
-   cursor resource ID and the specified cursor. The cursor storage
-   is freed when no other resource references it. The specified
-   cursor ID should not be referred to again.
-
-   XFreeCursor can generate a BadCursor error.
-
-Chapter 6. Color Management Functions
-
-   Table of Contents
-
-   Color Structures
-   Color Strings
-
-        RGB Device String Specification
-        RGB Intensity String Specification
-        Device-Independent String Specifications
-
-   Color Conversion Contexts and Gamut Mapping
-   Creating, Copying, and Destroying Colormaps
-   Mapping Color Names to Values
-   Allocating and Freeing Color Cells
-   Modifying and Querying Colormap Cells
-   Color Conversion Context Functions
-
-        Getting and Setting the Color Conversion Context of a
-                Colormap
-
-        Obtaining the Default Color Conversion Context
-        Color Conversion Context Macros
-        Modifying Attributes of a Color Conversion Context
-        Creating and Freeing a Color Conversion Context
-
-   Converting between Color Spaces
-   Callback Functions
-
-        Prototype Gamut Compression Procedure
-        Supplied Gamut Compression Procedures
-        Prototype White Point Adjustment Procedure
-        Supplied White Point Adjustment Procedures
-
-   Gamut Querying Functions
-
-        Red, Green, and Blue Queries
-        CIELab Queries
-        CIELuv Queries
-        TekHVC Queries
-
-   Color Management Extensions
-
-        Color Spaces
-        Adding Device-Independent Color Spaces
-        Querying Color Space Format and Prefix
-        Creating Additional Color Spaces
-        Parse String Callback
-        Color Specification Conversion Callback
-        Function Sets
-        Adding Function Sets
-        Creating Additional Function Sets
-
-   Each X window always has an associated colormap that provides a
-   level of indirection between pixel values and colors displayed
-   on the screen. Xlib provides functions that you can use to
-   manipulate a colormap. The X protocol defines colors using
-   values in the RGB color space. The RGB color space is device
-   dependent; rendering an RGB value on differing output devices
-   typically results in different colors. Xlib also provides a
-   means for clients to specify color using device-independent
-   color spaces for consistent results across devices. Xlib
-   supports device-independent color spaces derivable from the CIE
-   XYZ color space. This includes the CIE XYZ, xyY, L*u*v*, and
-   L*a*b* color spaces as well as the TekHVC color space.
-
-   This chapter discusses how to:
-     * Create, copy, and destroy a colormap
-     * Specify colors by name or value
-     * Allocate, modify, and free color cells
-     * Read entries in a colormap
-     * Convert between color spaces
-     * Control aspects of color conversion
-     * Query the color gamut of a screen
-     * Add new color spaces
-
-   All functions, types, and symbols in this chapter with the
-   prefix ``Xcms'' are defined in <X11/Xcms.h>. The remaining
-   functions and types are defined in <X11/Xlib.h>.
-
-   Functions in this chapter manipulate the representation of
-   color on the screen. For each possible value that a pixel can
-   take in a window, there is a color cell in the colormap. For
-   example, if a window is 4 bits deep, pixel values 0 through 15
-   are defined. A colormap is a collection of color cells. A color
-   cell consists of a triple of red, green, and blue (RGB) values.
-   The hardware imposes limits on the number of significant bits
-   in these values. As each pixel is read out of display memory,
-   the pixel is looked up in a colormap. The RGB value of the cell
-   determines what color is displayed on the screen. On a
-   grayscale display with a black-and-white monitor, the values
-   are combined to determine the brightness on the screen.
-
-   Typically, an application allocates color cells or sets of
-   color cells to obtain the desired colors. The client can
-   allocate read-only cells. In which case, the pixel values for
-   these colors can be shared among multiple applications, and the
-   RGB value of the cell cannot be changed. If the client
-   allocates read/write cells, they are exclusively owned by the
-   client, and the color associated with the pixel value can be
-   changed at will. Cells must be allocated (and, if read/write,
-   initialized with an RGB value) by a client to obtain desired
-   colors. The use of pixel value for an unallocated cell results
-   in an undefined color.
-
-   Because colormaps are associated with windows, X supports
-   displays with multiple colormaps and, indeed, different types
-   of colormaps. If there are insufficient colormap resources in
-   the display, some windows will display in their true colors,
-   and others will display with incorrect colors. A window manager
-   usually controls which windows are displayed in their true
-   colors if more than one colormap is required for the color
-   resources the applications are using. At any time, there is a
-   set of installed colormaps for a screen. Windows using one of
-   the installed colormaps display with true colors, and windows
-   using other colormaps generally display with incorrect colors.
-   You can control the set of installed colormaps by using
-   XInstallColormap and XUninstallColormap.
-
-   Colormaps are local to a particular screen. Screens always have
-   a default colormap, and programs typically allocate cells out
-   of this colormap. Generally, you should not write applications
-   that monopolize color resources. Although some hardware
-   supports multiple colormaps installed at one time, many of the
-   hardware displays built today support only a single installed
-   colormap, so the primitives are written to encourage sharing of
-   colormap entries between applications.
-
-   The DefaultColormap macro returns the default colormap. The
-   DefaultVisual macro returns the default visual type for the
-   specified screen. Possible visual types are StaticGray,
-   GrayScale, StaticColor, PseudoColor, TrueColor, or DirectColor
-   (see section 3.1).
-
-Color Structures
-
-   Functions that operate only on RGB color space values use an
-   XColor structure, which contains:
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-        unsigned long pixel;    /* pixel value */
-        unsigned short red, green, blue;        /* rgb values */
-        char flags;     /* DoRed, DoGreen, DoBlue */
-        char pad;
-} XColor;
-
-   The red, green, and blue values are always in the range 0 to
-   65535 inclusive, independent of the number of bits actually
-   used in the display hardware. The server scales these values
-   down to the range used by the hardware. Black is represented by
-   (0,0,0), and white is represented by (65535,65535,65535). In
-   some functions, the flags member controls which of the red,
-   green, and blue members is used and can be the inclusive OR of
-   zero or more of DoRed, DoGreen, and DoBlue.
-
-   Functions that operate on all color space values use an
-   XcmsColor structure. This structure contains a union of
-   substructures, each supporting color specification encoding for
-   a particular color space. Like the XColor structure, the
-   XcmsColor structure contains pixel and color specification
-   information (the spec member in the XcmsColor structure).
-
-
-
-typedef unsigned long XcmsColorFormat;                  /* Color Specifi
-cation Format */
-
-typedef struct {
-        union {
-                XcmsRGB RGB;
-                XcmsRGBi RGBi;
-                XcmsCIEXYZ CIEXYZ;
-                XcmsCIEuvY CIEuvY;
-                XcmsCIExyY CIExyY;
-                XcmsCIELab CIELab;
-                XcmsCIELuv CIELuv;
-                XcmsTekHVC TekHVC;
-                XcmsPad Pad;
-        } spec;
-        unsigned long pixel;
-        XcmsColorFormat format;
-} XcmsColor;                    /* Xcms Color Structure */
-
-   Because the color specification can be encoded for the various
-   color spaces, encoding for the spec member is identified by the
-   format member, which is of type XcmsColorFormat. The following
-   macros define standard formats.
-#define          XcmsUndefinedFormat   0x00000000
-#define          XcmsCIEXYZFormat      0x00000001  /* CIE XYZ */
-#define          XcmsCIEuvYFormat      0x00000002  /* CIE u'v'Y */
-#define          XcmsCIExyYFormat      0x00000003  /* CIE xyY */
-#define          XcmsCIELabFormat      0x00000004  /* CIE L*a*b* */
-#define          XcmsCIELuvFormat      0x00000005  /* CIE L*u*v* */
-#define          XcmsTekHVCFormat      0x00000006  /* TekHVC */
-#define          XcmsRGBFormat         0x80000000  /* RGB Device */
-#define          XcmsRGBiFormat        0x80000001  /* RGB Intensity */
-
-   Formats for device-independent color spaces are distinguishable
-   from those for device-dependent spaces by the 32nd bit. If this
-   bit is set, it indicates that the color specification is in a
-   device-dependent form; otherwise, it is in a device-independent
-   form. If the 31st bit is set, this indicates that the color
-   space has been added to Xlib at run time (see section 6.12.4).
-   The format value for a color space added at run time may be
-   different each time the program is executed. If references to
-   such a color space must be made outside the client (for
-   example, storing a color specification in a file), then
-   reference should be made by color space string prefix (see
-   XcmsFormatOfPrefix and XcmsPrefixOfFormat).
-
-   Data types that describe the color specification encoding for
-   the various color spaces are defined as follows:
-
-
-
-typedef double XcmsFloat;
-
-typedef struct {
-        unsigned short red;     /* 0x0000 to 0xffff */
-        unsigned short green;   /* 0x0000 to 0xffff */
-        unsigned short blue;    /* 0x0000 to 0xffff */
-} XcmsRGB;              /* RGB Device */
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-        XcmsFloat red;  /* 0.0 to 1.0 */
-        XcmsFloat green;        /* 0.0 to 1.0 */
-        XcmsFloat blue; /* 0.0 to 1.0 */
-} XcmsRGBi;             /* RGB Intensity */
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-        XcmsFloat X;
-        XcmsFloat Y;    /* 0.0 to 1.0 */
-        XcmsFloat Z;
-} XcmsCIEXYZ;           /* CIE XYZ */
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-        XcmsFloat u_prime;      /* 0.0 to ~0.6 */
-        XcmsFloat v_prime;      /* 0.0 to ~0.6 */
-        XcmsFloat Y;    /* 0.0 to 1.0 */
-} XcmsCIEuvY;           /* CIE u'v'Y */
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-        XcmsFloat x;    /* 0.0 to ~.75 */
-        XcmsFloat y;    /* 0.0 to ~.85 */
-        XcmsFloat Y;    /* 0.0 to 1.0 */
-} XcmsCIExyY;           /* CIE xyY */
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-        XcmsFloat L_star;       /* 0.0 to 100.0 */
-        XcmsFloat a_star;
-        XcmsFloat b_star;
-} XcmsCIELab;           /* CIE L*a*b* */
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-        XcmsFloat L_star;       /* 0.0 to 100.0 */
-        XcmsFloat u_star;
-        XcmsFloat v_star;
-} XcmsCIELuv;           /* CIE L*u*v* */
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-        XcmsFloat H;    /* 0.0 to 360.0 */
-        XcmsFloat V;    /* 0.0 to 100.0 */
-        XcmsFloat C;    /* 0.0 to 100.0 */
-} XcmsTekHVC;           /* TekHVC */
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-        XcmsFloat pad0;
-        XcmsFloat pad1;
-        XcmsFloat pad2;
-        XcmsFloat pad3;
-} XcmsPad;              /* four doubles */
-
-   The device-dependent formats provided allow color specification
-   in:
-     * RGB Intensity (XcmsRGBi)
-     * Red, green, and blue linear intensity values,
-       floating-point values from 0.0 to 1.0, where 1.0 indicates
-       full intensity, 0.5 half intensity, and so on.
-     * RGB Device (XcmsRGB)
-     * Red, green, and blue values appropriate for the specified
-       output device. XcmsRGB values are of type unsigned short,
-       scaled from 0 to 65535 inclusive, and are interchangeable
-       with the red, green, and blue values in an XColor
-       structure.
-
-   It is important to note that RGB Intensity values are not gamma
-   corrected values. In contrast, RGB Device values generated as a
-   result of converting color specifications are always gamma
-   corrected, and RGB Device values acquired as a result of
-   querying a colormap or passed in by the client are assumed by
-   Xlib to be gamma corrected. The term RGB value in this manual
-   always refers to an RGB Device value.
-
-Color Strings
-
-   Xlib provides a mechanism for using string names for colors. A
-   color string may either contain an abstract color name or a
-   numerical color specification. Color strings are
-   case-insensitive.
-
-   Color strings are used in the following functions:
-     * XAllocNamedColor
-     * XcmsAllocNamedColor
-     * XLookupColor
-     * XcmsLookupColor
-     * XParseColor
-     * XStoreNamedColor
-
-   Xlib supports the use of abstract color names, for example, red
-   or blue. A value for this abstract name is obtained by
-   searching one or more color name databases. Xlib first searches
-   zero or more client-side databases; the number, location, and
-   content of these databases is implementation-dependent and
-   might depend on the current locale. If the name is not found,
-   Xlib then looks for the color in the X server's database. If
-   the color name is not in the Host Portable Character Encoding,
-   the result is implementation-dependent.
-
-   A numerical color specification consists of a color space name
-   and a set of values in the following syntax:
-
-<color_space_name>:<value>/.../<value>
-
-   The following are examples of valid color strings.
-
-"CIEXYZ:0.3227/0.28133/0.2493"
-"RGBi:1.0/0.0/0.0"
-"rgb:00/ff/00"
-"CIELuv:50.0/0.0/0.0"
-
-   The syntax and semantics of numerical specifications are given
-   for each standard color space in the following sections.
-
-RGB Device String Specification
-
-   An RGB Device specification is identified by the prefix
-   ``rgb:'' and conforms to the following syntax:
-
-rgb:<red>/<green>/<blue>
-
-    <red>, <green>, <blue> := h | hh | hhh | hhhh
-    h := single hexadecimal digits (case insignificant)
-
-   Note that h indicates the value scaled in 4 bits, hh the value
-   scaled in 8 bits, hhh the value scaled in 12 bits, and hhhh the
-   value scaled in 16 bits, respectively.
-
-   Typical examples are the strings ``rgb:ea/75/52'' and
-   ``rgb:ccc/320/320'', but mixed numbers of hexadecimal digit
-   strings (``rgb:ff/a5/0'' and ``rgb:ccc/32/0'') are also
-   allowed.
-
-   For backward compatibility, an older syntax for RGB Device is
-   supported, but its continued use is not encouraged. The syntax
-   is an initial sharp sign character followed by a numeric
-   specification, in one of the following formats:
-
-
-
-#RGB    (4 bits each)
-#RRGGBB (8 bits each)
-#RRRGGGBBB      (12 bits each)
-#RRRRGGGGBBBB   (16 bits each)
-
-   The R, G, and B represent single hexadecimal digits. When fewer
-   than 16 bits each are specified, they represent the most
-   significant bits of the value (unlike the ``rgb:'' syntax, in
-   which values are scaled). For example, the string ``#3a7'' is
-   the same as ``#3000a0007000''.
-
-RGB Intensity String Specification
-
-   An RGB intensity specification is identified by the prefix
-   ``rgbi:'' and conforms to the following syntax:
-
-rgbi:<red>/<green>/<blue>
-
-   Note that red, green, and blue are floating-point values
-   between 0.0 and 1.0, inclusive. The input format for these
-   values is an optional sign, a string of numbers possibly
-   containing a decimal point, and an optional exponent field
-   containing an E or e followed by a possibly signed integer
-   string.
-
-Device-Independent String Specifications
-
-   The standard device-independent string specifications have the
-   following syntax:
-
-CIEXYZ:<X>/<Y>/<Z>
-CIEuvY:<u>/<v>/<Y>
-CIExyY:<x>/<y>/<Y>
-CIELab:<L>/<a>/<b>
-CIELuv:<L>/<u>/<v>
-TekHVC:<H>/<V>/<C>
-
-   All of the values (C, H, V, X, Y, Z, a, b, u, v, y, x) are
-   floating-point values. The syntax for these values is an
-   optional plus or minus sign, a string of digits possibly
-   containing a decimal point, and an optional exponent field
-   consisting of an ``E'' or ``e'' followed by an optional plus or
-   minus followed by a string of digits.
-
-Color Conversion Contexts and Gamut Mapping
-
-   When Xlib converts device-independent color specifications into
-   device-dependent specifications and vice versa, it uses
-   knowledge about the color limitations of the screen hardware.
-   This information, typically called the device profile, is
-   available in a Color Conversion Context (CCC).
-
-   Because a specified color may be outside the color gamut of the
-   target screen and the white point associated with the color
-   specification may differ from the white point inherent to the
-   screen, Xlib applies gamut mapping when it encounters certain
-   conditions:
-     * Gamut compression occurs when conversion of
-       device-independent color specifications to device-dependent
-       color specifications results in a color out of the target
-       screen's gamut.
-     * White adjustment occurs when the inherent white point of
-       the screen differs from the white point assumed by the
-       client.
-
-   Gamut handling methods are stored as callbacks in the CCC,
-   which in turn are used by the color space conversion routines.
-   Client data is also stored in the CCC for each callback. The
-   CCC also contains the white point the client assumes to be
-   associated with color specifications (that is, the Client White
-   Point). The client can specify the gamut handling callbacks and
-   client data as well as the Client White Point. Xlib does not
-   preclude the X client from performing other forms of gamut
-   handling (for example, gamut expansion); however, Xlib does not
-   provide direct support for gamut handling other than white
-   adjustment and gamut compression.
-
-   Associated with each colormap is an initial CCC transparently
-   generated by Xlib. Therefore, when you specify a colormap as an
-   argument to an Xlib function, you are indirectly specifying a
-   CCC. There is a default CCC associated with each screen. Newly
-   created CCCs inherit attributes from the default CCC, so the
-   default CCC attributes can be modified to affect new CCCs.
-
-   Xcms functions in which gamut mapping can occur return Status
-   and have specific status values defined for them, as follows:
-     * XcmsFailure indicates that the function failed.
-     * XcmsSuccess indicates that the function succeeded. In
-       addition, if the function performed any color conversion,
-       the colors did not need to be compressed.
-     * XcmsSuccessWithCompression indicates the function performed
-       color conversion and at least one of the colors needed to
-       be compressed. The gamut compression method is determined
-       by the gamut compression procedure in the CCC that is
-       specified directly as a function argument or in the CCC
-       indirectly specified by means of the colormap argument.
-
-Creating, Copying, and Destroying Colormaps
-
-   To create a colormap for a screen, use XCreateColormap.
-
-   Colormap XCreateColormap(Display *display, Window w, Visual
-   *visual, int alloc);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window on whose screen you want to create a
-   colormap.
-
-   visual
-
-   Specifies a visual type supported on the screen. If the visual
-   type is not one supported by the screen, a BadMatch error
-   results.
-
-   alloc
-
-   Specifies the colormap entries to be allocated. You can pass
-   AllocNone or AllocAll.
-
-   The XCreateColormap function creates a colormap of the
-   specified visual type for the screen on which the specified
-   window resides and returns the colormap ID associated with it.
-   Note that the specified window is only used to determine the
-   screen.
-
-   The initial values of the colormap entries are undefined for
-   the visual classes GrayScale, PseudoColor, and DirectColor. For
-   StaticGray, StaticColor, and TrueColor, the entries have
-   defined values, but those values are specific to the visual and
-   are not defined by X. For StaticGray, StaticColor, and
-   TrueColor, alloc must be AllocNone, or a BadMatch error
-   results. For the other visual classes, if alloc is AllocNone,
-   the colormap initially has no allocated entries, and clients
-   can allocate them. For information about the visual types, see
-   section 3.1.
-
-   If alloc is AllocAll, the entire colormap is allocated
-   writable. The initial values of all allocated entries are
-   undefined. For GrayScale and PseudoColor, the effect is as if
-   an XAllocColorCells call returned all pixel values from zero to
-   N - 1, where N is the colormap entries value in the specified
-   visual. For DirectColor, the effect is as if an
-   XAllocColorPlanes call returned a pixel value of zero and
-   red_mask, green_mask, and blue_mask values containing the same
-   bits as the corresponding masks in the specified visual.
-   However, in all cases, none of these entries can be freed by
-   using XFreeColors.
-
-   XCreateColormap can generate BadAlloc, BadMatch, BadValue, and
-   BadWindow errors.
-
-   To create a new colormap when the allocation out of a
-   previously shared colormap has failed because of resource
-   exhaustion, use XCopyColormapAndFree.
-
-   Colormap XCopyColormapAndFree(Display *display, Colormap
-   colormap);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   colormap
-
-   Specifies the colormap.
-
-   The XCopyColormapAndFree function creates a colormap of the
-   same visual type and for the same screen as the specified
-   colormap and returns the new colormap ID. It also moves all of
-   the client's existing allocation from the specified colormap to
-   the new colormap with their color values intact and their
-   read-only or writable characteristics intact and frees those
-   entries in the specified colormap. Color values in other
-   entries in the new colormap are undefined. If the specified
-   colormap was created by the client with alloc set to AllocAll,
-   the new colormap is also created with AllocAll, all color
-   values for all entries are copied from the specified colormap,
-   and then all entries in the specified colormap are freed. If
-   the specified colormap was not created by the client with
-   AllocAll, the allocations to be moved are all those pixels and
-   planes that have been allocated by the client using
-   XAllocColor, XAllocNamedColor, XAllocColorCells, or
-   XAllocColorPlanes and that have not been freed since they were
-   allocated.
-
-   XCopyColormapAndFree can generate BadAlloc and BadColor errors.
-
-   To destroy a colormap, use XFreeColormap.
-
-   XFreeColormap(Display *display, Colormap colormap);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   colormap
-
-   Specifies the colormap that you want to destroy.
-
-   The XFreeColormap function deletes the association between the
-   colormap resource ID and the colormap and frees the colormap
-   storage. However, this function has no effect on the default
-   colormap for a screen. If the specified colormap is an
-   installed map for a screen, it is uninstalled (see
-   XUninstallColormap). If the specified colormap is defined as
-   the colormap for a window (by XCreateWindow,
-   XSetWindowColormap, or XChangeWindowAttributes), XFreeColormap
-   changes the colormap associated with the window to None and
-   generates a ColormapNotify event. X does not define the colors
-   displayed for a window with a colormap of None.
-
-   XFreeColormap can generate a BadColor error.
-
-Mapping Color Names to Values
-
-   To map a color name to an RGB value, use XLookupColor.
-
-   Status XLookupColor(Display *display, Colormap colormap, char
-   *color_name, XColor *exact_def_return, XColor
-   *screen_def_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   colormap
-
-   Specifies the colormap.
-
-   color_name
-
-   Specifies the color name string (for example, red) whose color
-   definition structure you want returned.
-
-   exact_def_return
-
-   Returns the exact RGB values.
-
-   screen_def_return
-
-   Returns the closest RGB values provided by the hardware.
-
-   The XLookupColor function looks up the string name of a color
-   with respect to the screen associated with the specified
-   colormap. It returns both the exact color values and the
-   closest values provided by the screen with respect to the
-   visual type of the specified colormap. If the color name is not
-   in the Host Portable Character Encoding, the result is
-   implementation-dependent. Use of uppercase or lowercase does
-   not matter. XLookupColor returns nonzero if the name is
-   resolved; otherwise, it returns zero.
-
-   XLookupColor can generate a BadColor error.
-
-   To map a color name to the exact RGB value, use XParseColor.
-
-   Status XParseColor(Display *display, Colormap colormap, char
-   *spec, XColor *exact_def_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   colormap
-
-   Specifies the colormap.
-
-   spec
-
-   Specifies the color name string; case is ignored.
-
-   exact_def_return
-
-   Returns the exact color value for later use and sets the DoRed,
-   DoGreen, and DoBlue flags.
-
-   The XParseColor function looks up the string name of a color
-   with respect to the screen associated with the specified
-   colormap. It returns the exact color value. If the color name
-   is not in the Host Portable Character Encoding, the result is
-   implementation-dependent. Use of uppercase or lowercase does
-   not matter. XParseColor returns nonzero if the name is
-   resolved; otherwise, it returns zero.
-
-   XParseColor can generate a BadColor error.
-
-   To map a color name to a value in an arbitrary color space, use
-   XcmsLookupColor.
-
-   Status XcmsLookupColor(Display *display, Colormap colormap,
-   char *color_string, XcmsColor *color_exact_return, XcmsColor
-   *color_screen_return, XcmsColorFormat result_format);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   colormap
-
-   Specifies the colormap.
-
-   color_string
-
-   Specifies the color string(St.
-
-   color_exact_return
-
-   Returns the color specification parsed from the color string or
-   parsed from the corresponding string found in a color-name
-   database.
-
-   color_screen_return
-
-   Returns the color that can be reproduced on the screen.
-
-   result_format
-
-   Specifies the color format for the returned color
-   specifications (color_screen_return and color_exact_return
-   arguments). If the format is XcmsUndefinedFormat and the color
-   string contains a numerical color specification, the
-   specification is returned in the format used in that numerical
-   color specification. If the format is XcmsUndefinedFormat and
-   the color string contains a color name, the specification is
-   returned in the format used to store the color in the database.
-
-   The XcmsLookupColor function looks up the string name of a
-   color with respect to the screen associated with the specified
-   colormap. It returns both the exact color values and the
-   closest values provided by the screen with respect to the
-   visual type of the specified colormap. The values are returned
-   in the format specified by result_format. If the color name is
-   not in the Host Portable Character Encoding, the result is
-   implementation-dependent. Use of uppercase or lowercase does
-   not matter. XcmsLookupColor returns XcmsSuccess or
-   XcmsSuccessWithCompression if the name is resolved; otherwise,
-   it returns XcmsFailure. If XcmsSuccessWithCompression is
-   returned, the color specification returned in
-   color_screen_return is the result of gamut compression.
-
-Allocating and Freeing Color Cells
-
-   There are two ways of allocating color cells: explicitly as
-   read-only entries, one pixel value at a time, or read/write,
-   where you can allocate a number of color cells and planes
-   simultaneously. A read-only cell has its RGB value set by the
-   server. Read/write cells do not have defined colors initially;
-   functions described in the next section must be used to store
-   values into them. Although it is possible for any client to
-   store values into a read/write cell allocated by another
-   client, read/write cells normally should be considered private
-   to the client that allocated them.
-
-   Read-only colormap cells are shared among clients. The server
-   counts each allocation and freeing of the cell by clients. When
-   the last client frees a shared cell, the cell is finally
-   deallocated. If a single client allocates the same read-only
-   cell multiple times, the server counts each such allocation,
-   not just the first one.
-
-   To allocate a read-only color cell with an RGB value, use
-   XAllocColor.
-
-   Status XAllocColor(Display *display, Colormap colormap, XColor
-   *screen_in_out);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   colormap
-
-   Specifies the colormap.
-
-   screen_in_out
-
-   Specifies and returns the values actually used in the colormap.
-
-   The XAllocColor function allocates a read-only colormap entry
-   corresponding to the closest RGB value supported by the
-   hardware. XAllocColor returns the pixel value of the color
-   closest to the specified RGB elements supported by the hardware
-   and returns the RGB value actually used. The corresponding
-   colormap cell is read-only. In addition, XAllocColor returns
-   nonzero if it succeeded or zero if it failed. Multiple clients
-   that request the same effective RGB value can be assigned the
-   same read-only entry, thus allowing entries to be shared. When
-   the last client deallocates a shared cell, it is deallocated.
-   XAllocColor does not use or affect the flags in the XColor
-   structure.
-
-   XAllocColor can generate a BadColor error. delim %%
-
-   To allocate a read-only color cell with a color in arbitrary
-   format, use XcmsAllocColor.
-
-   Status XcmsAllocColor(Display *display, Colormap colormap,
-   XcmsColor *color_in_out, XcmsColorFormat result_format);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   colormap
-
-   Specifies the colormap.
-
-   color_in_out
-
-   Specifies the color to allocate and returns the pixel and color
-   that is actually used in the colormap.
-
-   result_format
-
-   Specifies the color format for the returned color
-   specification.
-
-   The XcmsAllocColor function is similar to XAllocColor except
-   the color can be specified in any format. The XcmsAllocColor
-   function ultimately calls XAllocColor to allocate a read-only
-   color cell (colormap entry) with the specified color.
-   XcmsAllocColor first converts the color specified to an RGB
-   value and then passes this to XAllocColor. XcmsAllocColor
-   returns the pixel value of the color cell and the color
-   specification actually allocated. This returned color
-   specification is the result of converting the RGB value
-   returned by XAllocColor into the format specified with the
-   result_format argument. If there is no interest in a returned
-   color specification, unnecessary computation can be bypassed if
-   result_format is set to XcmsRGBFormat. The corresponding
-   colormap cell is read-only. If this routine returns
-   XcmsFailure, the color_in_out color specification is left
-   unchanged.
-
-   XcmsAllocColor can generate a BadColor error.
-
-   To allocate a read-only color cell using a color name and
-   return the closest color supported by the hardware in RGB
-   format, use XAllocNamedColor.
-
-   Status XAllocNamedColor(Display *display, Colormap colormap,
-   char *color_name, XColor *screen_def_return, XColor
-   *exact_def_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   colormap
-
-   Specifies the colormap.
-
-   color_name
-
-   Specifies the color name string (for example, red) whose color
-   definition structure you want returned.
-
-   screen_def_return
-
-   Returns the closest RGB values provided by the hardware.
-
-   exact_def_return
-
-   Returns the exact RGB values.
-
-   The XAllocNamedColor function looks up the named color with
-   respect to the screen that is associated with the specified
-   colormap. It returns both the exact database definition and the
-   closest color supported by the screen. The allocated color cell
-   is read-only. The pixel value is returned in screen_def_return.
-   If the color name is not in the Host Portable Character
-   Encoding, the result is implementation-dependent. Use of
-   uppercase or lowercase does not matter. If screen_def_return
-   and exact_def_return point to the same structure, the pixel
-   field will be set correctly, but the color values are
-   undefined. XAllocNamedColor returns nonzero if a cell is
-   allocated; otherwise, it returns zero.
-
-   XAllocNamedColor can generate a BadColor error.
-
-   To allocate a read-only color cell using a color name and
-   return the closest color supported by the hardware in an
-   arbitrary format, use XcmsAllocNamedColor.
-
-   Status XcmsAllocNamedColor(Display *display, Colormap colormap,
-   char *color_string, XcmsColor *color_screen_return, XcmsColor
-   *color_exact_return, XcmsColorFormat result_format);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   colormap
-
-   Specifies the colormap.
-
-   color_string
-
-   Specifies the color string whose color definition structure is
-   to be returned.
-
-   color_screen_return
-
-   Returns the pixel value of the color cell and color
-   specification that actually is stored for that cell.
-
-   color_exact_return
-
-   Returns the color specification parsed from the color string or
-   parsed from the corresponding string found in a color-name
-   database.
-
-   result_format
-
-   Specifies the color format for the returned color
-   specifications (color_screen_return and color_exact_return
-   arguments). If the format is XcmsUndefinedFormat and the color
-   string contains a numerical color specification, the
-   specification is returned in the format used in that numerical
-   color specification. If the format is XcmsUndefinedFormat and
-   the color string contains a color name, the specification is
-   returned in the format used to store the color in the database.
-
-   The XcmsAllocNamedColor function is similar to XAllocNamedColor
-   except that the color returned can be in any format specified.
-   This function ultimately calls XAllocColor to allocate a
-   read-only color cell with the color specified by a color
-   string. The color string is parsed into an XcmsColor structure
-   (see XcmsLookupColor), converted to an RGB value, and finally
-   passed to XAllocColor. If the color name is not in the Host
-   Portable Character Encoding, the result is
-   implementation-dependent. Use of uppercase or lowercase does
-   not matter.
-
-   This function returns both the color specification as a result
-   of parsing (exact specification) and the actual color
-   specification stored (screen specification). This screen
-   specification is the result of converting the RGB value
-   returned by XAllocColor into the format specified in
-   result_format. If there is no interest in a returned color
-   specification, unnecessary computation can be bypassed if
-   result_format is set to XcmsRGBFormat. If color_screen_return
-   and color_exact_return point to the same structure, the pixel
-   field will be set correctly, but the color values are
-   undefined.
-
-   XcmsAllocNamedColor can generate a BadColor error.
-
-   To allocate read/write color cell and color plane combinations
-   for a PseudoColor model, use XAllocColorCells.
-
-   Status XAllocColorCells(Display *display, Colormap colormap,
-   Bool contig, unsigned long plane_masks_return[], unsigned int
-   nplanes, unsigned long pixels_return[], unsigned int npixels);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   colormap
-
-   Specifies the colormap.
-
-   contig
-
-   Specifies a Boolean value that indicates whether the planes
-   must be contiguous.
-
-   plane_mask_return
-
-   Returns an array of plane masks.
-
-   nplanes
-
-   Specifies the number of plane masks that are to be returned in
-   the plane masks array.
-
-   pixels_return
-
-   Returns an array of pixel values.
-
-   npixels
-
-   Specifies the number of pixel values that are to be returned in
-   the pixels_return array.
-
-   The XAllocColorCells function allocates read/write color cells.
-   The number of colors must be positive and the number of planes
-   nonnegative, or a BadValue error results. If ncolors and
-   nplanes are requested, then ncolors pixels and nplane plane
-   masks are returned. No mask will have any bits set to 1 in
-   common with any other mask or with any of the pixels. By ORing
-   together each pixel with zero or more masks, ncolors ×
-   2^nplanes distinct pixels can be produced. All of these are
-   allocated writable by the request. For GrayScale or
-   PseudoColor, each mask has exactly one bit set to 1. For
-   DirectColor, each has exactly three bits set to 1. If contig is
-   True and if all masks are ORed together, a single contiguous
-   set of bits set to 1 will be formed for GrayScale or
-   PseudoColor and three contiguous sets of bits set to 1 (one
-   within each pixel subfield) for DirectColor. The RGB values of
-   the allocated entries are undefined. XAllocColorCells returns
-   nonzero if it succeeded or zero if it failed.
-
-   XAllocColorCells can generate BadColor and BadValue errors.
-
-   To allocate read/write color resources for a DirectColor model,
-   use XAllocColorPlanes.
-
-   Status XAllocColorPlanes(Display *display, Colormap colormap,
-   Bool contig, unsigned long pixels_return[], int ncolors, int
-   nreds, int ngreens, int nblues, unsigned long *rmask_return,
-   unsigned long *gmask_return, unsigned long *bmask_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   colormap
-
-   Specifies the colormap.
-
-   contig
-
-   Specifies a Boolean value that indicates whether the planes
-   must be contiguous.
-
-   pixels_return
-
-   Returns an array of pixel values. XAllocColorPlanes returns the
-   pixel values in this array.
-
-   ncolors
-
-   Specifies the number of pixel values that are to be returned in
-   the pixels_return array.
-
-   nreds
-
-   ngreens
-
-   nblues
-
-   Specify the number of red, green, and blue planes. The value
-   you pass must be nonnegative.
-
-   rmask_return
-
-   gmask_return
-
-   bmask_return
-
-   Return bit masks for the red, green, and blue planes.
-
-   The specified ncolors must be positive; and nreds, ngreens, and
-   nblues must be nonnegative, or a BadValue error results. If
-   ncolors colors, nreds reds, ngreens greens, and nblues blues
-   are requested, ncolors pixels are returned; and the masks have
-   nreds, ngreens, and nblues bits set to 1, respectively. If
-   contig is True, each mask will have a contiguous set of bits
-   set to 1. No mask will have any bits set to 1 in common with
-   any other mask or with any of the pixels. For DirectColor, each
-   mask will lie within the corresponding pixel subfield. By ORing
-   together subsets of masks with each pixel value, ncolors ×
-   2^(nreds+ngreens+nblues) distinct pixel values can be produced.
-   All of these are allocated by the request. However, in the
-   colormap, there are only ncolors × 2^nreds independent red
-   entries, ncolors × 2^ngreens independent green entries, and
-   ncolors × 2^nblues independent blue entries. This is true even
-   for PseudoColor. When the colormap entry of a pixel value is
-   changed (using XStoreColors, XStoreColor, or XStoreNamedColor),
-   the pixel is decomposed according to the masks, and the
-   corresponding independent entries are updated.
-   XAllocColorPlanes returns nonzero if it succeeded or zero if it
-   failed.
-
-   XAllocColorPlanes can generate BadColor and BadValue errors.
-
-   To free colormap cells, use XFreeColors.
-
-   XFreeColors(Display *display, Colormap colormap, unsigned long
-   pixels[], int npixels, unsigned long planes);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   colormap
-
-   Specifies the colormap.
-
-   pixels
-
-   Specifies an array of pixel values that map to the cells in the
-   specified colormap.
-
-   npixels
-
-   Specifies the number of pixels.
-
-   planes
-
-   Specifies the planes you want to free.
-
-   The XFreeColors function frees the cells represented by pixels
-   whose values are in the pixels array. The planes argument
-   should not have any bits set to 1 in common with any of the
-   pixels. The set of all pixels is produced by ORing together
-   subsets of the planes argument with the pixels. The request
-   frees all of these pixels that were allocated by the client
-   (using XAllocColor, XAllocNamedColor, XAllocColorCells, and
-   XAllocColorPlanes). Note that freeing an individual pixel
-   obtained from XAllocColorPlanes may not actually allow it to be
-   reused until all of its related pixels are also freed.
-   Similarly, a read-only entry is not actually freed until it has
-   been freed by all clients, and if a client allocates the same
-   read-only entry multiple times, it must free the entry that
-   many times before the entry is actually freed.
-
-   All specified pixels that are allocated by the client in the
-   colormap are freed, even if one or more pixels produce an
-   error. If a specified pixel is not a valid index into the
-   colormap, a BadValue error results. If a specified pixel is not
-   allocated by the client (that is, is unallocated or is only
-   allocated by another client) or if the colormap was created
-   with all entries writable (by passing AllocAll to
-   XCreateColormap), a BadAccess error results. If more than one
-   pixel is in error, the one that gets reported is arbitrary.
-
-   XFreeColors can generate BadAccess, BadColor, and BadValue
-   errors.
-
-Modifying and Querying Colormap Cells
-
-   To store an RGB value in a single colormap cell, use
-   XStoreColor.
-
-   XStoreColor(Display *display, Colormap colormap, XColor
-   *color);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   colormap
-
-   Specifies the colormap.
-
-   color
-
-   Specifies the pixel and RGB values.
-
-   The XStoreColor function changes the colormap entry of the
-   pixel value specified in the pixel member of the XColor
-   structure. You specified this value in the pixel member of the
-   XColor structure. This pixel value must be a read/write cell
-   and a valid index into the colormap. If a specified pixel is
-   not a valid index into the colormap, a BadValue error results.
-   XStoreColor also changes the red, green, and/or blue color
-   components. You specify which color components are to be
-   changed by setting DoRed, DoGreen, and/or DoBlue in the flags
-   member of the XColor structure. If the colormap is an installed
-   map for its screen, the changes are visible immediately.
-
-   XStoreColor can generate BadAccess, BadColor, and BadValue
-   errors.
-
-   To store multiple RGB values in multiple colormap cells, use
-   XStoreColors.
-
-   XStoreColors(Display *display, Colormap colormap, XColor
-   color[], int ncolors);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   colormap
-
-   Specifies the colormap.
-
-   color
-
-   Specifies an array of color definition structures to be stored.
-
-   ncolors
-
-   Specifies the number of XColor structures in the color
-   definition array.
-
-   The XStoreColors function changes the colormap entries of the
-   pixel values specified in the pixel members of the XColor
-   structures. You specify which color components are to be
-   changed by setting DoRed, DoGreen, and/or DoBlue in the flags
-   member of the XColor structures. If the colormap is an
-   installed map for its screen, the changes are visible
-   immediately. XStoreColors changes the specified pixels if they
-   are allocated writable in the colormap by any client, even if
-   one or more pixels generates an error. If a specified pixel is
-   not a valid index into the colormap, a BadValue error results.
-   If a specified pixel either is unallocated or is allocated
-   read-only, a BadAccess error results. If more than one pixel is
-   in error, the one that gets reported is arbitrary.
-
-   XStoreColors can generate BadAccess, BadColor, and BadValue
-   errors.
-
-   To store a color of arbitrary format in a single colormap cell,
-   use XcmsStoreColor.
-
-   Status XcmsStoreColor(Display *display, Colormap colormap,
-   XcmsColor *color);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   colormap
-
-   Specifies the colormap.
-
-   color
-
-   Specifies the color cell and the color to store. Values
-   specified in this XcmsColor structure remain unchanged on
-   return.
-
-   The XcmsStoreColor function converts the color specified in the
-   XcmsColor structure into RGB values. It then uses this RGB
-   specification in an XColor structure, whose three flags (DoRed,
-   DoGreen, and DoBlue) are set, in a call to XStoreColor to
-   change the color cell specified by the pixel member of the
-   XcmsColor structure. This pixel value must be a valid index for
-   the specified colormap, and the color cell specified by the
-   pixel value must be a read/write cell. If the pixel value is
-   not a valid index, a BadValue error results. If the color cell
-   is unallocated or is allocated read-only, a BadAccess error
-   results. If the colormap is an installed map for its screen,
-   the changes are visible immediately.
-
-   Note that XStoreColor has no return value; therefore, an
-   XcmsSuccess return value from this function indicates that the
-   conversion to RGB succeeded and the call to XStoreColor was
-   made. To obtain the actual color stored, use XcmsQueryColor.
-   Because of the screen's hardware limitations or gamut
-   compression, the color stored in the colormap may not be
-   identical to the color specified.
-
-   XcmsStoreColor can generate BadAccess, BadColor, and BadValue
-   errors.
-
-   To store multiple colors of arbitrary format in multiple
-   colormap cells, use XcmsStoreColors.
-
-   Status XcmsStoreColors(Display *display, Colormap colormap,
-   XcmsColor colors[], int ncolors, Bool
-   compression_flags_return[]);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   colormap
-
-   Specifies the colormap.
-
-   colors
-
-   Specifies the color specification array of XcmsColor
-   structures, each specifying a color cell and the color to store
-   in that cell. Values specified in the array remain unchanged
-   upon return.
-
-   ncolors
-
-   Specifies the number of XcmsColor structures in the
-   color-specification array.
-
-   compression_flags_return
-
-   Returns an array of Boolean values indicating compression
-   status. If a non-NULL pointer is supplied, each element of the
-   array is set to True if the corresponding color was compressed
-   and False otherwise. Pass NULL if the compression status is not
-   useful.
-
-   The XcmsStoreColors function converts the colors specified in
-   the array of XcmsColor structures into RGB values and then uses
-   these RGB specifications in XColor structures, whose three
-   flags (DoRed, DoGreen, and DoBlue) are set, in a call to
-   XStoreColors to change the color cells specified by the pixel
-   member of the corresponding XcmsColor structure. Each pixel
-   value must be a valid index for the specified colormap, and the
-   color cell specified by each pixel value must be a read/write
-   cell. If a pixel value is not a valid index, a BadValue error
-   results. If a color cell is unallocated or is allocated
-   read-only, a BadAccess error results. If more than one pixel is
-   in error, the one that gets reported is arbitrary. If the
-   colormap is an installed map for its screen, the changes are
-   visible immediately.
-
-   Note that XStoreColors has no return value; therefore, an
-   XcmsSuccess return value from this function indicates that
-   conversions to RGB succeeded and the call to XStoreColors was
-   made. To obtain the actual colors stored, use XcmsQueryColors.
-   Because of the screen's hardware limitations or gamut
-   compression, the colors stored in the colormap may not be
-   identical to the colors specified.
-
-   XcmsStoreColors can generate BadAccess, BadColor, and BadValue
-   errors.
-
-   To store a color specified by name in a single colormap cell,
-   use XStoreNamedColor.
-
-   XStoreNamedColor(Display *display, Colormap colormap, char
-   *color, unsigned long pixel, int flags);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   colormap
-
-   Specifies the colormap.
-
-   color
-
-   Specifies the color name string (for example, red).
-
-   pixel
-
-   Specifies the entry in the colormap.
-
-   flags
-
-   Specifies which red, green, and blue components are set.
-
-   The XStoreNamedColor function looks up the named color with
-   respect to the screen associated with the colormap and stores
-   the result in the specified colormap. The pixel argument
-   determines the entry in the colormap. The flags argument
-   determines which of the red, green, and blue components are
-   set. You can set this member to the bitwise inclusive OR of the
-   bits DoRed, DoGreen, and DoBlue. If the color name is not in
-   the Host Portable Character Encoding, the result is
-   implementation-dependent. Use of uppercase or lowercase does
-   not matter. If the specified pixel is not a valid index into
-   the colormap, a BadValue error results. If the specified pixel
-   either is unallocated or is allocated read-only, a BadAccess
-   error results.
-
-   XStoreNamedColor can generate BadAccess, BadColor, BadName, and
-   BadValue errors.
-
-   The XQueryColor and XQueryColors functions take pixel values in
-   the pixel member of XColor structures and store in the
-   structures the RGB values for those pixels from the specified
-   colormap. The values returned for an unallocated entry are
-   undefined. These functions also set the flags member in the
-   XColor structure to all three colors. If a pixel is not a valid
-   index into the specified colormap, a BadValue error results. If
-   more than one pixel is in error, the one that gets reported is
-   arbitrary.
-
-   To query the RGB value of a single colormap cell, use
-   XQueryColor.
-
-   XQueryColor(Display *display, Colormap colormap, XColor
-   *def_in_out);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   colormap
-
-   Specifies the colormap.
-
-   def_in_out
-
-   Specifies and returns the RGB values for the pixel specified in
-   the structure.
-
-   The XQueryColor function returns the current RGB value for the
-   pixel in the XColor structure and sets the DoRed, DoGreen, and
-   DoBlue flags.
-
-   XQueryColor can generate BadColor and BadValue errors.
-
-   To query the RGB values of multiple colormap cells, use
-   XQueryColors.
-
-   XQueryColors(Display *display, Colormap colormap, XColor
-   defs_in_out[], int ncolors);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   colormap
-
-   Specifies the colormap.
-
-   defs_in_out
-
-   Specifies and returns an array of color definition structures
-   for the pixel specified in the structure.
-
-   ncolors
-
-   Specifies the number of XColor structures in the color
-   definition array.
-
-   The XQueryColors function returns the RGB value for each pixel
-   in each XColor structure and sets the DoRed, DoGreen, and
-   DoBlue flags in each structure.
-
-   XQueryColors can generate BadColor and BadValue errors.
-
-   To query the color of a single colormap cell in an arbitrary
-   format, use XcmsQueryColor.
-
-   Status XcmsQueryColor(Display *display, Colormap colormap,
-   XcmsColor *color_in_out, XcmsColorFormat result_format);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   colormap
-
-   Specifies the colormap.
-
-   color_in_out
-
-   Specifies the pixel member that indicates the color cell to
-   query. The color specification stored for the color cell is
-   returned in this XcmsColor structure.
-
-   result_format
-
-   Specifies the color format for the returned color
-   specification.
-
-   The XcmsQueryColor function obtains the RGB value for the pixel
-   value in the pixel member of the specified XcmsColor structure
-   and then converts the value to the target format as specified
-   by the result_format argument. If the pixel is not a valid
-   index in the specified colormap, a BadValue error results.
-
-   XcmsQueryColor can generate BadColor and BadValue errors.
-
-   To query the color of multiple colormap cells in an arbitrary
-   format, use XcmsQueryColors.
-
-   Status XcmsQueryColors(Display *display, Colormap colormap,
-   XcmsColor colors_in_out[], unsigned int ncolors,
-   XcmsColorFormat result_format);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   colormap
-
-   Specifies the colormap.
-
-   colors_in_out
-
-   Specifies an array of XcmsColor structures, each pixel member
-   indicating the color cell to query. The color specifications
-   for the color cells are returned in these structures.
-
-   ncolors
-
-   Specifies the number of XcmsColor structures in the
-   color-specification array.
-
-   result_format
-
-   Specifies the color format for the returned color
-   specification.
-
-   The XcmsQueryColors function obtains the RGB values for pixel
-   values in the pixel members of XcmsColor structures and then
-   converts the values to the target format as specified by the
-   result_format argument. If a pixel is not a valid index into
-   the specified colormap, a BadValue error results. If more than
-   one pixel is in error, the one that gets reported is arbitrary.
-
-   XcmsQueryColors can generate BadColor and BadValue errors.
-
-Color Conversion Context Functions
-
-   This section describes functions to create, modify, and query
-   Color Conversion Contexts (CCCs).
-
-   Associated with each colormap is an initial CCC transparently
-   generated by Xlib. Therefore, when you specify a colormap as an
-   argument to a function, you are indirectly specifying a CCC.
-   The CCC attributes that can be modified by the X client are:
-     * Client White Point
-     * Gamut compression procedure and client data
-     * White point adjustment procedure and client data
-
-   The initial values for these attributes are implementation
-   specific. The CCC attributes for subsequently created CCCs can
-   be defined by changing the CCC attributes of the default CCC.
-   There is a default CCC associated with each screen.
-
-Getting and Setting the Color Conversion Context of a Colormap
-
-   To obtain the CCC associated with a colormap, use
-   XcmsCCCOfColormap.
-
-   XcmsCCC XcmsCCCOfColormap(Display *display, Colormap colormap);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   colormap
-
-   Specifies the colormap.
-
-   The XcmsCCCOfColormap function returns the CCC associated with
-   the specified colormap. Once obtained, the CCC attributes can
-   be queried or modified. Unless the CCC associated with the
-   specified colormap is changed with XcmsSetCCCOfColormap, this
-   CCC is used when the specified colormap is used as an argument
-   to color functions.
-
-   To change the CCC associated with a colormap, use
-   XcmsSetCCCOfColormap.
-
-   XcmsCCC XcmsSetCCCOfColormap(Display *display, Colormap
-   colormap, XcmsCCC ccc);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   colormap
-
-   Specifies the colormap.
-
-   ccc
-
-   Specifies the CCC.
-
-   The XcmsSetCCCOfColormap function changes the CCC associated
-   with the specified colormap. It returns the CCC previously
-   associated with the colormap. If they are not used again in the
-   application, CCCs should be freed by calling XcmsFreeCCC.
-   Several colormaps may share the same CCC without restriction;
-   this includes the CCCs generated by Xlib with each colormap.
-   Xlib, however, creates a new CCC with each new colormap.
-
-Obtaining the Default Color Conversion Context
-
-   You can change the default CCC attributes for subsequently
-   created CCCs by changing the CCC attributes of the default CCC.
-   A default CCC is associated with each screen.
-
-   To obtain the default CCC for a screen, use XcmsDefaultCCC.
-
-   XcmsCCC XcmsDefaultCCC(Display *display, int screen_number);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   screen_number
-
-   Specifies the appropriate screen number on the host server.
-
-   The XcmsDefaultCCC function returns the default CCC for the
-   specified screen. Its visual is the default visual of the
-   screen. Its initial gamut compression and white point
-   adjustment procedures as well as the associated client data are
-   implementation specific.
-
-Color Conversion Context Macros
-
-   Applications should not directly modify any part of the
-   XcmsCCC. The following lists the C language macros, their
-   corresponding function equivalents for other language bindings,
-   and what data they both can return.
-
-   DisplayOfCCC(XcmsCCC ccc);
-
-   Display *XcmsDisplayOfCCC(XcmsCCC ccc);
-
-   ccc
-
-   Specifies the CCC.
-
-   Both return the display associated with the specified CCC.
-
-   VisualOfCCC(XcmsCCC ccc);
-
-   Visual *XcmsVisualOfCCC(XcmsCCC ccc);
-
-   ccc
-
-   Specifies the CCC.
-
-   Both return the visual associated with the specified CCC.
-
-   ScreenNumberOfCCC(XcmsCCC ccc);
-
-   int XcmsScreenNumberOfCCC(XcmsCCC ccc);
-
-   ccc
-
-   Specifies the CCC.
-
-   Both return the number of the screen associated with the
-   specified CCC.
-
-   ScreenWhitePointOfCCC(XcmsCCC ccc);
-
-   XcmsColor XcmsScreenWhitePointOfCCC(XcmsCCC ccc);
-
-   ccc
-
-   Specifies the CCC.
-
-   Both return the white point of the screen associated with the
-   specified CCC.
-
-   ClientWhitePointOfCCC(XcmsCCC ccc);
-
-   XcmsColor *XcmsClientWhitePointOfCCC(XcmsCCC ccc);
-
-   ccc
-
-   Specifies the CCC.
-
-   Both return the Client White Point of the specified CCC.
-
-Modifying Attributes of a Color Conversion Context
-
-   To set the Client White Point in the CCC, use
-   XcmsSetWhitePoint.
-
-   Status XcmsSetWhitePoint(XcmsCCC ccc, XcmsColor *color);
-
-   ccc
-
-   Specifies the CCC.
-
-   color
-
-   Specifies the new Client White Point.
-
-   The XcmsSetWhitePoint function changes the Client White Point
-   in the specified CCC. Note that the pixel member is ignored and
-   that the color specification is left unchanged upon return. The
-   format for the new white point must be XcmsCIEXYZFormat,
-   XcmsCIEuvYFormat, XcmsCIExyYFormat, or XcmsUndefinedFormat. If
-   the color argument is NULL, this function sets the format
-   component of the Client White Point specification to
-   XcmsUndefinedFormat, indicating that the Client White Point is
-   assumed to be the same as the Screen White Point.
-
-   This function returns nonzero status if the format for the new
-   white point is valid; otherwise, it returns zero.
-
-   To set the gamut compression procedure and corresponding client
-   data in a specified CCC, use XcmsSetCompressionProc.
-
-   XcmsCompressionProc XcmsSetCompressionProc(XcmsCCC ccc,
-   XcmsCompressionProc compression_proc, XPointer client_data);
-
-   ccc
-
-   Specifies the CCC.
-
-   compression_proc
-
-   Specifies the gamut compression procedure that is to be applied
-   when a color lies outside the screen's color gamut. If NULL is
-   specified and a function using this CCC must convert a color
-   specification to a device-dependent format and encounters a
-   color that lies outside the screen's color gamut, that function
-   will return XcmsFailure.
-
-   client_data
-
-   Specifies client data for gamut compression procedure or NULL.
-
-   The XcmsSetCompressionProc function first sets the gamut
-   compression procedure and client data in the specified CCC with
-   the newly specified procedure and client data and then returns
-   the old procedure.
-
-   To set the white point adjustment procedure and corresponding
-   client data in a specified CCC, use XcmsSetWhiteAdjustProc.
-
-   XcmsWhiteAdjustProc XcmsSetWhiteAdjustProc(XcmsCCC ccc,
-   XcmsWhiteAdjustProc white_adjust_proc, XPointer client_data);
-
-   ccc
-
-   Specifies the CCC.
-
-   white_adjust_proc
-
-   Specifies the white point adjustment procedure.
-
-   client_data
-
-   Specifies client data for white point adjustment procedure or
-   NULL.
-
-   The XcmsSetWhiteAdjustProc function first sets the white point
-   adjustment procedure and client data in the specified CCC with
-   the newly specified procedure and client data and then returns
-   the old procedure.
-
-Creating and Freeing a Color Conversion Context
-
-   You can explicitly create a CCC within your application by
-   calling XcmsCreateCCC. These created CCCs can then be used by
-   those functions that explicitly call for a CCC argument. Old
-   CCCs that will not be used by the application should be freed
-   using XcmsFreeCCC.
-
-   To create a CCC, use XcmsCreateCCC.
-
-   XcmsCCC XcmsCreateCCC(Display *display, int screen_number,
-   Visual *visual, XcmsColor *client_white_point,
-   XcmsCompressionProc compression_proc, XPointer
-   compression_client_data, XcmsWhiteAdjustProc white_adjust_proc,
-   XPointer white_adjust_client_data);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   screen_number
-
-   Specifies the appropriate screen number on the host server.
-
-   visual
-
-   Specifies the visual type.
-
-   client_white_point
-
-   Specifies the Client White Point. If NULL is specified, the
-   Client White Point is to be assumed to be the same as the
-   Screen White Point. Note that the pixel member is ignored.
-
-   compression_proc
-
-   Specifies the gamut compression procedure that is to be applied
-   when a color lies outside the screen's color gamut. If NULL is
-   specified and a function using this CCC must convert a color
-   specification to a device-dependent format and encounters a
-   color that lies outside the screen's color gamut, that function
-   will return XcmsFailure.
-
-   compression_client_data
-
-   Specifies client data for use by the gamut compression
-   procedure or NULL.
-
-   white_adjust_proc
-
-   Specifies the white adjustment procedure that is to be applied
-   when the Client White Point differs from the Screen White
-   Point. NULL indicates that no white point adjustment is
-   desired.
-
-   white_adjust_client_data
-
-   Specifies client data for use with the white point adjustment
-   procedure or NULL.
-
-   The XcmsCreateCCC function creates a CCC for the specified
-   display, screen, and visual.
-
-   To free a CCC, use XcmsFreeCCC.
-
-   void XcmsFreeCCC(XcmsCCC ccc);
-
-   ccc
-
-   Specifies the CCC.
-
-   The XcmsFreeCCC function frees the memory used for the
-   specified CCC. Note that default CCCs and those currently
-   associated with colormaps are ignored.
-
-Converting between Color Spaces
-
-   To convert an array of color specifications in arbitrary color
-   formats to a single destination format, use XcmsConvertColors.
-
-   Status XcmsConvertColors(XcmsCCC ccc, XcmsColor
-   colors_in_out[], unsigned int ncolors, XcmsColorFormat
-   target_format, Bool compression_flags_return[]);
-
-   ccc
-
-   Specifies the CCC. If conversion is between device-independent
-   color spaces only (for example, TekHVC to CIELuv), the CCC is
-   necessary only to specify the Client White Point.
-
-   colors_in_out
-
-   Specifies an array of color specifications. Pixel members are
-   ignored and remain unchanged upon return.
-
-   ncolors
-
-   Specifies the number of XcmsColor structures in the
-   color-specification array.
-
-   target_format
-
-   Specifies the target color specification format.
-
-   compression_flags_return
-
-   Returns an array of Boolean values indicating compression
-   status. If a non-NULL pointer is supplied, each element of the
-   array is set to True if the corresponding color was compressed
-   and False otherwise. Pass NULL if the compression status is not
-   useful.
-
-   The XcmsConvertColors function converts the color
-   specifications in the specified array of XcmsColor structures
-   from their current format to a single target format, using the
-   specified CCC. When the return value is XcmsFailure, the
-   contents of the color specification array are left unchanged.
-
-   The array may contain a mixture of color specification formats
-   (for example, 3 CIE XYZ, 2 CIE Luv, and so on). When the array
-   contains both device-independent and device-dependent color
-   specifications and the target_format argument specifies a
-   device-dependent format (for example, XcmsRGBiFormat,
-   XcmsRGBFormat), all specifications are converted to CIE XYZ
-   format and then to the target device-dependent format.
-
-Callback Functions
-
-   This section describes the gamut compression and white point
-   adjustment callbacks.
-
-   The gamut compression procedure specified in the CCC is called
-   when an attempt to convert a color specification from
-   XcmsCIEXYZ to a device-dependent format (typically XcmsRGBi)
-   results in a color that lies outside the screen's color gamut.
-   If the gamut compression procedure requires client data, this
-   data is passed via the gamut compression client data in the
-   CCC.
-
-   During color specification conversion between
-   device-independent and device-dependent color spaces, if a
-   white point adjustment procedure is specified in the CCC, it is
-   triggered when the Client White Point and Screen White Point
-   differ. If required, the client data is obtained from the CCC.
-
-Prototype Gamut Compression Procedure
-
-   The gamut compression callback interface must adhere to the
-   following:
-
-   typedef Status(*XcmsCompressionProc)(XcmsCCC ccc, XcmsColor
-   colors_in_out[], unsigned int ncolors, unsigned int index, Bool
-   compression_flags_return[]);
-
-   ccc
-
-   Specifies the CCC.
-
-   colors_in_out
-
-   Specifies an array of color specifications. Pixel members
-   should be ignored and must remain unchanged upon return.
-
-   ncolors
-
-   Specifies the number of XcmsColor structures in the
-   color-specification array.
-
-   index
-
-   Specifies the index into the array of XcmsColor structures for
-   the encountered color specification that lies outside the
-   screen's color gamut. Valid values are 0 (for the first
-   element) to ncolors - 1.
-
-   compression_flags_return
-
-   Returns an array of Boolean values for indicating compression
-   status. If a non-NULL pointer is supplied and a color at a
-   given index is compressed, then True should be stored at the
-   corresponding index in this array; otherwise, the array should
-   not be modified.
-
-   When implementing a gamut compression procedure, consider the
-   following rules and assumptions:
-     * The gamut compression procedure can attempt to compress one
-       or multiple specifications at a time.
-     * When called, elements 0 to index - 1 in the color
-       specification array can be assumed to fall within the
-       screen's color gamut. In addition, these color
-       specifications are already in some device-dependent format
-       (typically XcmsRGBi). If any modifications are made to
-       these color specifications, they must be in their initial
-       device-dependent format upon return.
-     * When called, the element in the color specification array
-       specified by the index argument contains the color
-       specification outside the screen's color gamut encountered
-       by the calling routine. In addition, this color
-       specification can be assumed to be in XcmsCIEXYZ. Upon
-       return, this color specification must be in XcmsCIEXYZ.
-     * When called, elements from index to ncolors - 1 in the
-       color specification array may or may not fall within the
-       screen's color gamut. In addition, these color
-       specifications can be assumed to be in XcmsCIEXYZ. If any
-       modifications are made to these color specifications, they
-       must be in XcmsCIEXYZ upon return.
-     * The color specifications passed to the gamut compression
-       procedure have already been adjusted to the Screen White
-       Point. This means that at this point the color
-       specification's white point is the Screen White Point.
-     * If the gamut compression procedure uses a
-       device-independent color space not initially accessible for
-       use in the color management system, use XcmsAddColorSpace
-       to ensure that it is added.
-
-Supplied Gamut Compression Procedures
-
-   The following equations are useful in describing gamut
-   compression functions: delim %%
-
-%CIELab~Psychometric~Chroma ~=~ sqrt(a_star sup 2 ~+~ b_star sup 2 )%
-
-%CIELab~Psychometric~Hue ~=~ tan sup -1 left [ b_star over a_star right
-]%
-
-%CIELuv~Psychometric~Chroma ~=~ sqrt(u_star sup 2 ~+~ v_star sup 2 )%
-
-%CIELuv~Psychometric~Hue ~=~ tan sup -1 left [ v_star over u_star right
-]%
-
-   The gamut compression callback procedures provided by Xlib are
-   as follows:
-     * XcmsCIELabClipL
-     * This brings the encountered out-of-gamut color
-       specification into the screen's color gamut by reducing or
-       increasing CIE metric lightness (L*) in the CIE L*a*b*
-       color space until the color is within the gamut. If the
-       Psychometric Chroma of the color specification is beyond
-       maximum for the Psychometric Hue Angle, then while
-       maintaining the same Psychometric Hue Angle, the color will
-       be clipped to the CIE L*a*b* coordinates of maximum
-       Psychometric Chroma. See XcmsCIELabQueryMaxC. No client
-       data is necessary.
-     * XcmsCIELabClipab
-     * This brings the encountered out-of-gamut color
-       specification into the screen's color gamut by reducing
-       Psychometric Chroma, while maintaining Psychometric Hue
-       Angle, until the color is within the gamut. No client data
-       is necessary.
-     * XcmsCIELabClipLab
-     * This brings the encountered out-of-gamut color
-       specification into the screen's color gamut by replacing it
-       with CIE L*a*b* coordinates that fall within the color
-       gamut while maintaining the original Psychometric Hue Angle
-       and whose vector to the original coordinates is the
-       shortest attainable. No client data is necessary.
-     * XcmsCIELuvClipL
-     * This brings the encountered out-of-gamut color
-       specification into the screen's color gamut by reducing or
-       increasing CIE metric lightness (L*) in the CIE L*u*v*
-       color space until the color is within the gamut. If the
-       Psychometric Chroma of the color specification is beyond
-       maximum for the Psychometric Hue Angle, then, while
-       maintaining the same Psychometric Hue Angle, the color will
-       be clipped to the CIE L*u*v* coordinates of maximum
-       Psychometric Chroma. See XcmsCIELuvQueryMaxC. No client
-       data is necessary.
-     * XcmsCIELuvClipuv
-     * This brings the encountered out-of-gamut color
-       specification into the screen's color gamut by reducing
-       Psychometric Chroma, while maintaining Psychometric Hue
-       Angle, until the color is within the gamut. No client data
-       is necessary.
-     * XcmsCIELuvClipLuv
-     * This brings the encountered out-of-gamut color
-       specification into the screen's color gamut by replacing it
-       with CIE L*u*v* coordinates that fall within the color
-       gamut while maintaining the original Psychometric Hue Angle
-       and whose vector to the original coordinates is the
-       shortest attainable. No client data is necessary.
-     * XcmsTekHVCClipV
-     * This brings the encountered out-of-gamut color
-       specification into the screen's color gamut by reducing or
-       increasing the Value dimension in the TekHVC color space
-       until the color is within the gamut. If Chroma of the color
-       specification is beyond maximum for the particular Hue,
-       then, while maintaining the same Hue, the color will be
-       clipped to the Value and Chroma coordinates that represent
-       maximum Chroma for that particular Hue. No client data is
-       necessary.
-     * XcmsTekHVCClipC
-     * This brings the encountered out-of-gamut color
-       specification into the screen's color gamut by reducing the
-       Chroma dimension in the TekHVC color space until the color
-       is within the gamut. No client data is necessary.
-     * XcmsTekHVCClipVC
-     * This brings the encountered out-of-gamut color
-       specification into the screen's color gamut by replacing it
-       with TekHVC coordinates that fall within the color gamut
-       while maintaining the original Hue and whose vector to the
-       original coordinates is the shortest attainable. No client
-       data is necessary.
-
-Prototype White Point Adjustment Procedure
-
-   The white point adjustment procedure interface must adhere to
-   the following:
-
-   typedef Status (*XcmsWhiteAdjustProc)(XcmsCCC ccc, XcmsColor
-   *initial_white_point, XcmsColor *target_white_point,
-   XcmsColorFormat target_format, XcmsColor colors_in_out[],
-   unsigned int ncolors, Bool compression_flags_return[]);
-
-   ccc
-
-   Specifies the CCC.
-
-   initial_white_point
-
-   Specifies the initial white point.
-
-   target_white_point
-
-   Specifies the target white point.
-
-   target_format
-
-   Specifies the target color specification format.
-
-   colors_in_out
-
-   Specifies an array of color specifications. Pixel members
-   should be ignored and must remain unchanged upon return.
-
-   ncolors
-
-   Specifies the number of XcmsColor structures in the
-   color-specification array.
-
-   compression_flags_return
-
-   Returns an array of Boolean values for indicating compression
-   status. If a non-NULL pointer is supplied and a color at a
-   given index is compressed, then True should be stored at the
-   corresponding index in this array; otherwise, the array should
-   not be modified.
-
-Supplied White Point Adjustment Procedures
-
-   White point adjustment procedures provided by Xlib are as
-   follows:
-     * XcmsCIELabWhiteShiftColors
-     * This uses the CIE L*a*b* color space for adjusting the
-       chromatic character of colors to compensate for the
-       chromatic differences between the source and destination
-       white points. This procedure simply converts the color
-       specifications to XcmsCIELab using the source white point
-       and then converts to the target specification format using
-       the destination's white point. No client data is necessary.
-     * XcmsCIELuvWhiteShiftColors
-     * This uses the CIE L*u*v* color space for adjusting the
-       chromatic character of colors to compensate for the
-       chromatic differences between the source and destination
-       white points. This procedure simply converts the color
-       specifications to XcmsCIELuv using the source white point
-       and then converts to the target specification format using
-       the destination's white point. No client data is necessary.
-     * XcmsTekHVCWhiteShiftColors
-     * This uses the TekHVC color space for adjusting the
-       chromatic character of colors to compensate for the
-       chromatic differences between the source and destination
-       white points. This procedure simply converts the color
-       specifications to XcmsTekHVC using the source white point
-       and then converts to the target specification format using
-       the destination's white point. An advantage of this
-       procedure over those previously described is an attempt to
-       minimize hue shift. No client data is necessary.
-
-   From an implementation point of view, these white point
-   adjustment procedures convert the color specifications to a
-   device-independent but white-point-dependent color space (for
-   example, CIE L*u*v*, CIE L*a*b*, TekHVC) using one white point
-   and then converting those specifications to the target color
-   space using another white point. In other words, the
-   specification goes in the color space with one white point but
-   comes out with another white point, resulting in a chromatic
-   shift based on the chromatic displacement between the initial
-   white point and target white point. The CIE color spaces that
-   are assumed to be white-point-independent are CIE u'v'Y, CIE
-   XYZ, and CIE xyY. When developing a custom white point
-   adjustment procedure that uses a device-independent color space
-   not initially accessible for use in the color management
-   system, use XcmsAddColorSpace to ensure that it is added.
-
-   As an example, if the CCC specifies a white point adjustment
-   procedure and if the Client White Point and Screen White Point
-   differ, the XcmsAllocColor function will use the white point
-   adjustment procedure twice:
-     * Once to convert to XcmsRGB
-     * A second time to convert from XcmsRGB
-
-   For example, assume the specification is in XcmsCIEuvY and the
-   adjustment procedure is XcmsCIELuvWhiteShiftColors. During
-   conversion to XcmsRGB, the call to XcmsAllocColor results in
-   the following series of color specification conversions:
-     * From XcmsCIEuvY to XcmsCIELuv using the Client White Point
-     * From XcmsCIELuv to XcmsCIEuvY using the Screen White Point
-     * From XcmsCIEuvY to XcmsCIEXYZ (CIE u'v'Y and XYZ are
-       white-point-independent color spaces)
-     * From XcmsCIEXYZ to XcmsRGBi
-     * From XcmsRGBi to XcmsRGB
-
-   The resulting RGB specification is passed to XAllocColor, and
-   the RGB specification returned by XAllocColor is converted back
-   to XcmsCIEuvY by reversing the color conversion sequence.
-
-Gamut Querying Functions
-
-   This section describes the gamut querying functions that Xlib
-   provides. These functions allow the client to query the
-   boundary of the screen's color gamut in terms of the CIE
-   L*a*b*, CIE L*u*v*, and TekHVC color spaces. Functions are also
-   provided that allow you to query the color specification of:
-     * White (full-intensity red, green, and blue)
-     * Red (full-intensity red while green and blue are zero)
-     * Green (full-intensity green while red and blue are zero)
-     * Blue (full-intensity blue while red and green are zero)
-     * Black (zero-intensity red, green, and blue)
-
-   The white point associated with color specifications passed to
-   and returned from these gamut querying functions is assumed to
-   be the Screen White Point. This is a reasonable assumption,
-   because the client is trying to query the screen's color gamut.
-
-   The following naming convention is used for the Max and Min
-   functions:
-
-Xcms<color_space>QueryMax<dimensions>
-
-Xcms<color_space>QueryMin<dimensions>
-
-   The <dimensions> consists of a letter or letters that identify
-   the dimensions of the color space that are not fixed. For
-   example, XcmsTekHVCQueryMaxC is given a fixed Hue and Value for
-   which maximum Chroma is found.
-
-Red, Green, and Blue Queries
-
-   To obtain the color specification for black (zero-intensity
-   red, green, and blue), use XcmsQueryBlack.
-
-   Status XcmsQueryBlack(XcmsCCC ccc, XcmsColorFormat
-   target_format, XcmsColor *color_return);
-
-   ccc
-
-   Specifies the CCC. The CCC's Client White Point and white point
-   adjustment procedures are ignored.
-
-   target_format
-
-   Specifies the target color specification format.
-
-   color_return
-
-   Returns the color specification in the specified target format
-   for zero-intensity red, green, and blue. The white point
-   associated with the returned color specification is the Screen
-   White Point. The value returned in the pixel member is
-   undefined.
-
-   The XcmsQueryBlack function returns the color specification in
-   the specified target format for zero-intensity red, green, and
-   blue.
-
-   To obtain the color specification for blue (full-intensity blue
-   while red and green are zero), use XcmsQueryBlue.
-
-   Status XcmsQueryBlue(XcmsCCC ccc, XcmsColorFormat
-   target_format, XcmsColor *color_return);
-
-   ccc
-
-   Specifies the CCC. The CCC's Client White Point and white point
-   adjustment procedures are ignored.
-
-   target_format
-
-   Specifies the target color specification format.
-
-   color_return
-
-   Returns the color specification in the specified target format
-   for full-intensity blue while red and green are zero. The white
-   point associated with the returned color specification is the
-   Screen White Point. The value returned in the pixel member is
-   undefined.
-
-   The XcmsQueryBlue function returns the color specification in
-   the specified target format for full-intensity blue while red
-   and green are zero.
-
-   To obtain the color specification for green (full-intensity
-   green while red and blue are zero), use XcmsQueryGreen.
-
-   Status XcmsQueryGreen(XcmsCCC ccc, XcmsColorFormat
-   target_format, XcmsColor *color_return);
-
-   ccc
-
-   Specifies the CCC. The CCC's Client White Point and white point
-   adjustment procedures are ignored.
-
-   target_format
-
-   Specifies the target color specification format.
-
-   color_return
-
-   Returns the color specification in the specified target format
-   for full-intensity green while red and blue are zero. The white
-   point associated with the returned color specification is the
-   Screen White Point. The value returned in the pixel member is
-   undefined.
-
-   The XcmsQueryGreen function returns the color specification in
-   the specified target format for full-intensity green while red
-   and blue are zero.
-
-   To obtain the color specification for red (full-intensity red
-   while green and blue are zero), use XcmsQueryRed.
-
-   Status XcmsQueryRed(XcmsCCC ccc, XcmsColorFormat target_format,
-   XcmsColor *color_return);
-
-   ccc
-
-   Specifies the CCC. The CCC's Client White Point and white point
-   adjustment procedures are ignored.
-
-   target_format
-
-   Specifies the target color specification format.
-
-   color_return
-
-   Returns the color specification in the specified target format
-   for full-intensity red while green and blue are zero. The white
-   point associated with the returned color specification is the
-   Screen White Point. The value returned in the pixel member is
-   undefined.
-
-   The XcmsQueryRed function returns the color specification in
-   the specified target format for full-intensity red while green
-   and blue are zero.
-
-   To obtain the color specification for white (full-intensity
-   red, green, and blue), use XcmsQueryWhite.
-
-   Status XcmsQueryWhite(XcmsCCC ccc, XcmsColorFormat
-   target_format, XcmsColor *color_return);
-
-   ccc
-
-   Specifies the CCC. The CCC's Client White Point and white point
-   adjustment procedures are ignored.
-
-   target_format
-
-   Specifies the target color specification format.
-
-   color_return
-
-   Returns the color specification in the specified target format
-   for full-intensity red, green, and blue. The white point
-   associated with the returned color specification is the Screen
-   White Point. The value returned in the pixel member is
-   undefined.
-
-   The XcmsQueryWhite function returns the color specification in
-   the specified target format for full-intensity red, green, and
-   blue.
-
-CIELab Queries
-
-   The following equations are useful in describing the CIELab
-   query functions: delim %%
-
-%CIELab~Psychometric~Chroma ~=~ sqrt(a_star sup 2 ~+~ b_star sup 2 )%
-
-%CIELab~Psychometric~Hue ~=~ tan sup -1 left [ b_star over a_star right
-]%
-
-   To obtain the CIE L*a*b* coordinates of maximum Psychometric
-   Chroma for a given Psychometric Hue Angle and CIE metric
-   lightness (L*), use XcmsCIELabQueryMaxC.
-
-   Status XcmsCIELabQueryMaxC(XcmsCCC ccc, XcmsFloat hue_angle,
-   XcmsFloat L_star, XcmsColor *color_return);
-
-   ccc
-
-   Specifies the CCC. The CCC's Client White Point and white point
-   adjustment procedures are ignored.
-
-   hue_angle
-
-   Specifies the hue angle (in degrees) at which to find maximum
-   chroma.
-
-   L_star
-
-   Specifies the lightness (L*) at which to find maximum chroma.
-
-   color_return
-
-   Returns the CIE L*a*b* coordinates of maximum chroma
-   displayable by the screen for the given hue angle and
-   lightness. The white point associated with the returned color
-   specification is the Screen White Point. The value returned in
-   the pixel member is undefined.
-
-   The XcmsCIELabQueryMaxC function, given a hue angle and
-   lightness, finds the point of maximum chroma displayable by the
-   screen. It returns this point in CIE L*a*b* coordinates.
-
-   To obtain the CIE L*a*b* coordinates of maximum CIE metric
-   lightness (L*) for a given Psychometric Hue Angle and
-   Psychometric Chroma, use XcmsCIELabQueryMaxL.
-
-   Status XcmsCIELabQueryMaxL(XcmsCCC ccc, XcmsFloat hue_angle,
-   XcmsFloat chroma, XcmsColor *color_return);
-
-   ccc
-
-   Specifies the CCC. The CCC's Client White Point and white point
-   adjustment procedures are ignored.
-
-   hue_angle
-
-   Specifies the hue angle (in degrees) at which to find maximum
-   lightness.
-
-   chroma
-
-   Specifies the chroma at which to find maximum lightness.
-
-   color_return
-
-   Returns the CIE L*a*b* coordinates of maximum lightness
-   displayable by the screen for the given hue angle and chroma.
-   The white point associated with the returned color
-   specification is the Screen White Point. The value returned in
-   the pixel member is undefined.
-
-   The XcmsCIELabQueryMaxL function, given a hue angle and chroma,
-   finds the point in CIE L*a*b* color space of maximum lightness
-   (L*) displayable by the screen. It returns this point in CIE
-   L*a*b* coordinates. An XcmsFailure return value usually
-   indicates that the given chroma is beyond maximum for the given
-   hue angle.
-
-   To obtain the CIE L*a*b* coordinates of maximum Psychometric
-   Chroma for a given Psychometric Hue Angle, use
-   XcmsCIELabQueryMaxLC.
-
-   Status XcmsCIELabQueryMaxLC(XcmsCCC ccc, XcmsFloat hue_angle,
-   XcmsColor *color_return);
-
-   ccc
-
-   Specifies the CCC. The CCC's Client White Point and white point
-   adjustment procedures are ignored.
-
-   hue_angle
-
-   Specifies the hue angle (in degrees) at which to find maximum
-   chroma.
-
-   color_return
-
-   Returns the CIE L*a*b* coordinates of maximum chroma
-   displayable by the screen for the given hue angle. The white
-   point associated with the returned color specification is the
-   Screen White Point. The value returned in the pixel member is
-   undefined.
-
-   The XcmsCIELabQueryMaxLC function, given a hue angle, finds the
-   point of maximum chroma displayable by the screen. It returns
-   this point in CIE L*a*b* coordinates.
-
-   To obtain the CIE L*a*b* coordinates of minimum CIE metric
-   lightness (L*) for a given Psychometric Hue Angle and
-   Psychometric Chroma, use XcmsCIELabQueryMinL.
-
-   Status XcmsCIELabQueryMinL(XcmsCCC ccc, XcmsFloat hue_angle,
-   XcmsFloat chroma, XcmsColor *color_return);
-
-   ccc
-
-   Specifies the CCC. The CCC's Client White Point and white point
-   adjustment procedures are ignored.
-
-   hue_angle
-
-   Specifies the hue angle (in degrees) at which to find minimum
-   lightness.
-
-   chroma
-
-   Specifies the chroma at which to find minimum lightness.
-
-   color_return
-
-   Returns the CIE L*a*b* coordinates of minimum lightness
-   displayable by the screen for the given hue angle and chroma.
-   The white point associated with the returned color
-   specification is the Screen White Point. The value returned in
-   the pixel member is undefined.
-
-   The XcmsCIELabQueryMinL function, given a hue angle and chroma,
-   finds the point of minimum lightness (L*) displayable by the
-   screen. It returns this point in CIE L*a*b* coordinates. An
-   XcmsFailure return value usually indicates that the given
-   chroma is beyond maximum for the given hue angle.
-
-CIELuv Queries
-
-   The following equations are useful in describing the CIELuv
-   query functions: delim %%
-
-%CIELuv~Psychometric~Chroma ~=~ sqrt(u_star sup 2 ~+~ v_star sup 2 )%
-
-%CIELuv~Psychometric~Hue ~=~ tan sup -1 left [ v_star over u_star right
-]%
-
-   To obtain the CIE L*u*v* coordinates of maximum Psychometric
-   Chroma for a given Psychometric Hue Angle and CIE metric
-   lightness (L*), use XcmsCIELuvQueryMaxC.
-
-   Status XcmsCIELuvQueryMaxC(XcmsCCC ccc, XcmsFloat hue_angle,
-   XcmsFloat L_star, XcmsColor *color_return);
-
-   ccc
-
-   Specifies the CCC. The CCC's Client White Point and white point
-   adjustment procedures are ignored.
-
-   hue_angle
-
-   Specifies the hue angle (in degrees) at which to find maximum
-   chroma.
-
-   L_star
-
-   Specifies the lightness (L*) at which to find maximum chroma.
-
-   color_return
-
-   Returns the CIE L*u*v* coordinates of maximum chroma
-   displayable by the screen for the given hue angle and
-   lightness. The white point associated with the returned color
-   specification is the Screen White Point. The value returned in
-   the pixel member is undefined.
-
-   The XcmsCIELuvQueryMaxC function, given a hue angle and
-   lightness, finds the point of maximum chroma displayable by the
-   screen. It returns this point in CIE L*u*v* coordinates.
-
-   To obtain the CIE L*u*v* coordinates of maximum CIE metric
-   lightness (L*) for a given Psychometric Hue Angle and
-   Psychometric Chroma, use XcmsCIELuvQueryMaxL.
-
-   Status XcmsCIELuvQueryMaxL(XcmsCCC ccc, XcmsFloat hue_angle,
-   XcmsFloat chroma, XcmsColor *color_return);
-
-   ccc
-
-   Specifies the CCC. The CCC's Client White Point and white point
-   adjustment procedures are ignored.
-
-   hue_angle
-
-   Specifies the hue angle (in degrees) at which to find maximum
-   lightness.
-
-   L_star
-
-   Specifies the lightness (L*) at which to find maximum
-   lightness.
-
-   color_return
-
-   Returns the CIE L*u*v* coordinates of maximum lightness
-   displayable by the screen for the given hue angle and chroma.
-   The white point associated with the returned color
-   specification is the Screen White Point. The value returned in
-   the pixel member is undefined.
-
-   The XcmsCIELuvQueryMaxL function, given a hue angle and chroma,
-   finds the point in CIE L*u*v* color space of maximum lightness
-   (L*) displayable by the screen. It returns this point in CIE
-   L*u*v* coordinates. An XcmsFailure return value usually
-   indicates that the given chroma is beyond maximum for the given
-   hue angle.
-
-   To obtain the CIE L*u*v* coordinates of maximum Psychometric
-   Chroma for a given Psychometric Hue Angle, use
-   XcmsCIELuvQueryMaxLC.
-
-   Status XcmsCIELuvQueryMaxLC(XcmsCCC ccc, XcmsFloat hue_angle,
-   XcmsColor *color_return);
-
-   ccc
-
-   Specifies the CCC. The CCC's Client White Point and white point
-   adjustment procedures are ignored.
-
-   hue_angle
-
-   Specifies the hue angle (in degrees) at which to find maximum
-   chroma.
-
-   color_return
-
-   Returns the CIE L*u*v* coordinates of maximum chroma
-   displayable by the screen for the given hue angle. The white
-   point associated with the returned color specification is the
-   Screen White Point. The value returned in the pixel member is
-   undefined.
-
-   The XcmsCIELuvQueryMaxLC function, given a hue angle, finds the
-   point of maximum chroma displayable by the screen. It returns
-   this point in CIE L*u*v* coordinates.
-
-   To obtain the CIE L*u*v* coordinates of minimum CIE metric
-   lightness (L*) for a given Psychometric Hue Angle and
-   Psychometric Chroma, use XcmsCIELuvQueryMinL.
-
-   Status XcmsCIELuvQueryMinL(XcmsCCC ccc, XcmsFloat hue_angle,
-   XcmsFloat chroma, XcmsColor *color_return);
-
-   ccc
-
-   Specifies the CCC. The CCC's Client White Point and white point
-   adjustment procedures are ignored.
-
-   hue_angle
-
-   Specifies the hue angle (in degrees) at which to find minimum
-   lightness.
-
-   chroma
-
-   Specifies the chroma at which to find minimum lightness.
-
-   color_return
-
-   Returns the CIE L*u*v* coordinates of minimum lightness
-   displayable by the screen for the given hue angle and chroma.
-   The white point associated with the returned color
-   specification is the Screen White Point. The value returned in
-   the pixel member is undefined.
-
-   The XcmsCIELuvQueryMinL function, given a hue angle and chroma,
-   finds the point of minimum lightness (L*) displayable by the
-   screen. It returns this point in CIE L*u*v* coordinates. An
-   XcmsFailure return value usually indicates that the given
-   chroma is beyond maximum for the given hue angle.
-
-TekHVC Queries
-
-   To obtain the maximum Chroma for a given Hue and Value, use
-   XcmsTekHVCQueryMaxC.
-
-   Status XcmsTekHVCQueryMaxC(XcmsCCC ccc, XcmsFloat hue,
-   XcmsFloat value, XcmsColor *color_return);
-
-   ccc
-
-   Specifies the CCC. The CCC's Client White Point and white point
-   adjustment procedures are ignored.
-
-   hue
-
-   Specifies the Hue in which to find the maximum Chroma.
-
-   value
-
-   Specifies the Value in which to find the maximum Chroma.
-
-   color_return
-
-   Returns the maximum Chroma along with the actual Hue and Value
-   at which the maximum Chroma was found. The white point
-   associated with the returned color specification is the Screen
-   White Point. The value returned in the pixel member is
-   undefined.
-
-   The XcmsTekHVCQueryMaxC function, given a Hue and Value,
-   determines the maximum Chroma in TekHVC color space displayable
-   by the screen. It returns the maximum Chroma along with the
-   actual Hue and Value at which the maximum Chroma was found.
-
-   To obtain the maximum Value for a given Hue and Chroma, use
-   XcmsTekHVCQueryMaxV.
-
-   Status XcmsTekHVCQueryMaxV(XcmsCCC ccc, XcmsFloat hue,
-   XcmsFloat chroma, XcmsColor *color_return);
-
-   ccc
-
-   Specifies the CCC. The CCC's Client White Point and white point
-   adjustment procedures are ignored.
-
-   hue
-
-   Specifies the Hue in which to find the maximum Value.
-
-   chroma
-
-   Specifies the chroma at which to find maximum Value.
-
-   color_return
-
-   Returns the maximum Value along with the Hue and Chroma at
-   which the maximum Value was found. The white point associated
-   with the returned color specification is the Screen White
-   Point. The value returned in the pixel member is undefined.
-
-   The XcmsTekHVCQueryMaxV function, given a Hue and Chroma,
-   determines the maximum Value in TekHVC color space displayable
-   by the screen. It returns the maximum Value and the actual Hue
-   and Chroma at which the maximum Value was found.
-
-   To obtain the maximum Chroma and Value at which it is reached
-   for a specified Hue, use XcmsTekHVCQueryMaxVC.
-
-   Status XcmsTekHVCQueryMaxVC(XcmsCCC ccc, XcmsFloat hue,
-   XcmsColor *color_return);
-
-   ccc
-
-   Specifies the CCC. The CCC's Client White Point and white point
-   adjustment procedures are ignored.
-
-   hue
-
-   Specifies the Hue in which to find the maximum Chroma.
-
-   color_return
-
-   Returns the color specification in XcmsTekHVC for the maximum
-   Chroma, the Value at which that maximum Chroma is reached, and
-   the actual Hue at which the maximum Chroma was found. The white
-   point associated with the returned color specification is the
-   Screen White Point. The value returned in the pixel member is
-   undefined.
-
-   The XcmsTekHVCQueryMaxVC function, given a Hue, determines the
-   maximum Chroma in TekHVC color space displayable by the screen
-   and the Value at which that maximum Chroma is reached. It
-   returns the maximum Chroma, the Value at which that maximum
-   Chroma is reached, and the actual Hue for which the maximum
-   Chroma was found.
-
-   To obtain a specified number of TekHVC specifications such that
-   they contain maximum Values for a specified Hue and the Chroma
-   at which the maximum Values are reached, use
-   XcmsTekHVCQueryMaxVSamples.
-
-   Status XcmsTekHVCQueryMaxVSamples(XcmsCCC ccc, XcmsFloat hue,
-   XcmsColor colors_return[], unsigned int nsamples);
-
-   ccc
-
-   Specifies the CCC. The CCC's Client White Point and white point
-   adjustment procedures are ignored.
-
-   hue
-
-   Specifies the Hue for maximum Chroma/Value samples.
-
-   nsamples
-
-   Specifies the number of samples.
-
-   colors_return
-
-   Returns nsamples of color specifications in XcmsTekHVC such
-   that the Chroma is the maximum attainable for the Value and
-   Hue. The white point associated with the returned color
-   specification is the Screen White Point. The value returned in
-   the pixel member is undefined.
-
-   The XcmsTekHVCQueryMaxVSamples returns nsamples of maximum
-   Value, the Chroma at which that maximum Value is reached, and
-   the actual Hue for which the maximum Chroma was found. These
-   sample points may then be used to plot the maximum Value/Chroma
-   boundary of the screen's color gamut for the specified Hue in
-   TekHVC color space.
-
-   To obtain the minimum Value for a given Hue and Chroma, use
-   XcmsTekHVCQueryMinV.
-
-   Status XcmsTekHVCQueryMinV(XcmsCCC ccc, XcmsFloat hue,
-   XcmsFloat chroma, XcmsColor *color_return);
-
-   ccc
-
-   Specifies the CCC. The CCC's Client White Point and white point
-   adjustment procedures are ignored.
-
-   hue
-
-   Specifies the Hue in which to find the minimum Value.
-
-   value
-
-   Specifies the Value in which to find the minimum Value.
-
-   color_return
-
-   Returns the minimum Value and the actual Hue and Chroma at
-   which the minimum Value was found. The white point associated
-   with the returned color specification is the Screen White
-   Point. The value returned in the pixel member is undefined.
-
-   The XcmsTekHVCQueryMinV function, given a Hue and Chroma,
-   determines the minimum Value in TekHVC color space displayable
-   by the screen. It returns the minimum Value and the actual Hue
-   and Chroma at which the minimum Value was found.
-
-Color Management Extensions
-
-   The Xlib color management facilities can be extended in two
-   ways:
-     * Device-Independent Color Spaces
-     * Device-independent color spaces that are derivable to CIE
-       XYZ space can be added using the XcmsAddColorSpace
-       function.
-     * Color Characterization Function Set
-     * A Color Characterization Function Set consists of
-       device-dependent color spaces and their functions that
-       convert between these color spaces and the CIE XYZ color
-       space, bundled together for a specific class of output
-       devices. A function set can be added using the
-       XcmsAddFunctionSet function.
-
-Color Spaces
-
-   The CIE XYZ color space serves as the hub for all conversions
-   between device-independent and device-dependent color spaces.
-   Therefore, the knowledge to convert an XcmsColor structure to
-   and from CIE XYZ format is associated with each color space.
-   For example, conversion from CIE L*u*v* to RGB requires the
-   knowledge to convert from CIE L*u*v* to CIE XYZ and from CIE
-   XYZ to RGB. This knowledge is stored as an array of functions
-   that, when applied in series, will convert the XcmsColor
-   structure to or from CIE XYZ format. This color specification
-   conversion mechanism facilitates the addition of color spaces.
-
-   Of course, when converting between only device-independent
-   color spaces or only device-dependent color spaces, shortcuts
-   are taken whenever possible. For example, conversion from
-   TekHVC to CIE L*u*v* is performed by intermediate conversion to
-   CIE u*v*Y and then to CIE L*u*v*, thus bypassing conversion
-   between CIE u*v*Y and CIE XYZ.
-
-Adding Device-Independent Color Spaces
-
-   To add a device-independent color space, use XcmsAddColorSpace.
-
-   Status XcmsAddColorSpace(XcmsColorSpace *color_space);
-
-   color_space
-
-   Specifies the device-independent color space to add.
-
-   The XcmsAddColorSpace function makes a device-independent color
-   space (actually an XcmsColorSpace structure) accessible by the
-   color management system. Because format values for unregistered
-   color spaces are assigned at run time, they should be treated
-   as private to the client. If references to an unregistered
-   color space must be made outside the client (for example,
-   storing color specifications in a file using the unregistered
-   color space), then reference should be made by color space
-   prefix (see XcmsFormatOfPrefix and XcmsPrefixOfFormat).
-
-   If the XcmsColorSpace structure is already accessible in the
-   color management system, XcmsAddColorSpace returns XcmsSuccess.
-
-   Note that added XcmsColorSpaces must be retained for reference
-   by Xlib.
-
-Querying Color Space Format and Prefix
-
-   To obtain the format associated with the color space associated
-   with a specified color string prefix, use XcmsFormatOfPrefix.
-
-   XcmsColorFormat XcmsFormatOfPrefix(char *prefix);
-
-   prefix
-
-   Specifies the string that contains the color space prefix.
-
-   The XcmsFormatOfPrefix function returns the format for the
-   specified color space prefix (for example, the string
-   ``CIEXYZ''). The prefix is case-insensitive. If the color space
-   is not accessible in the color management system,
-   XcmsFormatOfPrefix returns XcmsUndefinedFormat.
-
-   To obtain the color string prefix associated with the color
-   space specified by a color format, use XcmsPrefixOfFormat.
-
-   char *XcmsPrefixOfFormat(XcmsColorFormat format);
-
-   format
-
-   Specifies the color specification format.
-
-   The XcmsPrefixOfFormat function returns the string prefix
-   associated with the color specification encoding specified by
-   the format argument. Otherwise, if no encoding is found, it
-   returns NULL. The returned string must be treated as read-only.
-
-Creating Additional Color Spaces
-
-   Color space specific information necessary for color space
-   conversion and color string parsing is stored in an
-   XcmsColorSpace structure. Therefore, a new structure containing
-   this information is required for each additional color space.
-   In the case of device-independent color spaces, a handle to
-   this new structure (that is, by means of a global variable) is
-   usually made accessible to the client program for use with the
-   XcmsAddColorSpace function.
-
-   If a new XcmsColorSpace structure specifies a color space not
-   registered with the X Consortium, they should be treated as
-   private to the client because format values for unregistered
-   color spaces are assigned at run time. If references to an
-   unregistered color space must be made outside the client (for
-   example, storing color specifications in a file using the
-   unregistered color space), then reference should be made by
-   color space prefix (see XcmsFormatOfPrefix and
-   XcmsPrefixOfFormat).
-
-
-
-typedef (*XcmsConversionProc)();
-typedef XcmsConversionProc *XcmsFuncListPtr;
-                /* A NULL terminated list of function pointers*/
-
-typedef struct _XcmsColorSpace {
-        char *prefix;
-        XcmsColorFormat format;
-        XcmsParseStringProc parseString;
-        XcmsFuncListPtr to_CIEXYZ;
-        XcmsFuncListPtr from_CIEXYZ;
-        int inverse_flag;
-} XcmsColorSpace;
-
-   The prefix member specifies the prefix that indicates a color
-   string is in this color space's string format. For example, the
-   strings ``ciexyz'' or ``CIEXYZ'' for CIE XYZ, and ``rgb'' or
-   ``RGB'' for RGB. The prefix is case insensitive. The format
-   member specifies the color specification format. Formats for
-   unregistered color spaces are assigned at run time. The
-   parseString member contains a pointer to the function that can
-   parse a color string into an XcmsColor structure. This function
-   returns an integer (int): nonzero if it succeeded and zero
-   otherwise. The to_CIEXYZ and from_CIEXYZ members contain
-   pointers, each to a NULL terminated list of function pointers.
-   When the list of functions is executed in series, it will
-   convert the color specified in an XcmsColor structure from/to
-   the current color space format to/from the CIE XYZ format. Each
-   function returns an integer (int): nonzero if it succeeded and
-   zero otherwise. The white point to be associated with the
-   colors is specified explicitly, even though white points can be
-   found in the CCC. The inverse_flag member, if nonzero,
-   specifies that for each function listed in to_CIEXYZ, its
-   inverse function can be found in from_CIEXYZ such that:
-
-Given:  n = number of functions in each list
-
-for each i, such that 0 <= i < n
-    from_CIEXYZ[n - i - 1] is the inverse of to_CIEXYZ[i].
-
-   This allows Xlib to use the shortest conversion path, thus
-   bypassing CIE XYZ if possible (for example, TekHVC to CIE
-   L*u*v*).
-
-Parse String Callback
-
-   The callback in the XcmsColorSpace structure for parsing a
-   color string for the particular color space must adhere to the
-   following software interface specification:
-
-   Status XcmsParseStringProc(char *color_string, XcmsColor
-   *color_return);
-
-   color_string
-
-   Specifies the color string to parse.
-
-   color_return
-
-   Returns the color specification in the color space's format.
-
-Color Specification Conversion Callback
-
-   Callback functions in the XcmsColorSpace structure for
-   converting a color specification between device-independent
-   spaces must adhere to the following software interface
-   specification:
-
-   Status ConversionProc(XcmsCCC ccc, XcmsColor *white_point,
-   XcmsColor *colors_in_out, unsigned int ncolors);
-
-   ccc
-
-   Specifies the CCC.
-
-   white_point
-
-   Specifies the white point associated with color specifications.
-   The pixel member should be ignored, and the entire structure
-   remain unchanged upon return.
-
-   colors_in_out
-
-   Specifies an array of color specifications. Pixel members
-   should be ignored and must remain unchanged upon return.
-
-   ncolors
-
-   Specifies the number of XcmsColor structures in the
-   color-specification array.
-
-   Callback functions in the XcmsColorSpace structure for
-   converting a color specification to or from a device-dependent
-   space must adhere to the following software interface
-   specification:
-
-   Status ConversionProc(XcmsCCC ccc, XcmsColor *colors_in_out,
-   unsigned int ncolors, Bool compression_flags_return[]);
-
-   ccc
-
-   Specifies the CCC.
-
-   colors_in_out
-
-   Specifies an array of color specifications. Pixel members
-   should be ignored and must remain unchanged upon return.
-
-   ncolors
-
-   Specifies the number of XcmsColor structures in the
-   color-specification array.
-
-   compression_flags_return
-
-   Returns an array of Boolean values for indicating compression
-   status. If a non-NULL pointer is supplied and a color at a
-   given index is compressed, then True should be stored at the
-   corresponding index in this array; otherwise, the array should
-   not be modified.
-
-   Conversion functions are available globally for use by other
-   color spaces. The conversion functions provided by Xlib are:
-   Function           Converts from    Converts to
-   XcmsCIELabToCIEXYZ XcmsCIELabFormat XcmsCIEXYZFormat
-   XcmsCIELuvToCIEuvY XcmsCIELuvFormat XcmsCIEuvYFormat
-   XcmsCIEXYZToCIELab XcmsCIEXYZFormat XcmsCIELabFormat
-   XcmsCIEXYZToCIEuvY XcmsCIEXYZFormat XcmsCIEuvYFormat
-   XcmsCIEXYZToCIExyY XcmsCIEXYZFormat XcmsCIExyYFormat
-   XcmsCIEXYZToRGBi   XcmsCIEXYZFormat XcmsRGBiFormat
-   XcmsCIEuvYToCIELuv XcmsCIEuvYFormat XcmsCIELabFormat
-   XcmsCIEuvYToCIEXYZ XcmsCIEuvYFormat XcmsCIEXYZFormat
-   XcmsCIEuvYToTekHVC XcmsCIEuvYFormat XcmsTekHVCFormat
-   XcmsCIExyYToCIEXYZ XcmsCIExyYFormat XcmsCIEXYZFormat
-   XcmsRGBToRGBi      XcmsRGBFormat    XcmsRGBiFormat
-   XcmsRGBiToCIEXYZ   XcmsRGBiFormat   XcmsCIEXYZFormat
-   XcmsRGBiToRGB      XcmsRGBiFormat   XcmsRGBFormat
-   XcmsTekHVCToCIEuvY XcmsTekHVCFormat XcmsCIEuvYFormat
-
-Function Sets
-
-   Functions to convert between device-dependent color spaces and
-   CIE XYZ may differ for different classes of output devices (for
-   example, color versus gray monitors). Therefore, the notion of
-   a Color Characterization Function Set has been developed. A
-   function set consists of device-dependent color spaces and the
-   functions that convert color specifications between these
-   device-dependent color spaces and the CIE XYZ color space
-   appropriate for a particular class of output devices. The
-   function set also contains a function that reads color
-   characterization data off root window properties. It is this
-   characterization data that will differ between devices within a
-   class of output devices. For details about how color
-   characterization data is stored in root window properties, see
-   the section on Device Color Characterization in the
-   Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual. The LINEAR_RGB
-   function set is provided by Xlib and will support most color
-   monitors. Function sets may require data that differs from
-   those needed for the LINEAR_RGB function set. In that case, its
-   corresponding data may be stored on different root window
-   properties.
-
-Adding Function Sets
-
-   To add a function set, use XcmsAddFunctionSet.
-
-   Status XcmsAddFunctionSet(XcmsFunctionSet *function_set);
-
-   function_set
-
-   Specifies the function set to add.
-
-   The XcmsAddFunctionSet function adds a function set to the
-   color management system. If the function set uses
-   device-dependent XcmsColorSpace structures not accessible in
-   the color management system, XcmsAddFunctionSet adds them. If
-   an added XcmsColorSpace structure is for a device-dependent
-   color space not registered with the X Consortium, they should
-   be treated as private to the client because format values for
-   unregistered color spaces are assigned at run time. If
-   references to an unregistered color space must be made outside
-   the client (for example, storing color specifications in a file
-   using the unregistered color space), then reference should be
-   made by color space prefix (see XcmsFormatOfPrefix and
-   XcmsPrefixOfFormat).
-
-   Additional function sets should be added before any calls to
-   other Xlib routines are made. If not, the XcmsPerScrnInfo
-   member of a previously created XcmsCCC does not have the
-   opportunity to initialize with the added function set.
-
-Creating Additional Function Sets
-
-   The creation of additional function sets should be required
-   only when an output device does not conform to existing
-   function sets or when additional device-dependent color spaces
-   are necessary. A function set consists primarily of a
-   collection of device-dependent XcmsColorSpace structures and a
-   means to read and store a screen's color characterization data.
-   This data is stored in an XcmsFunctionSet structure. A handle
-   to this structure (that is, by means of global variable) is
-   usually made accessible to the client program for use with
-   XcmsAddFunctionSet.
-
-   If a function set uses new device-dependent XcmsColorSpace
-   structures, they will be transparently processed into the color
-   management system. Function sets can share an XcmsColorSpace
-   structure for a device-dependent color space. In addition,
-   multiple XcmsColorSpace structures are allowed for a
-   device-dependent color space; however, a function set can
-   reference only one of them. These XcmsColorSpace structures
-   will differ in the functions to convert to and from CIE XYZ,
-   thus tailored for the specific function set.
-
-
-
-typedef struct _XcmsFunctionSet {
-        XcmsColorSpace **DDColorSpaces;
-        XcmsScreenInitProc screenInitProc;
-        XcmsScreenFreeProc screenFreeProc;
-} XcmsFunctionSet;
-
-   The DDColorSpaces member is a pointer to a NULL terminated list
-   of pointers to XcmsColorSpace structures for the
-   device-dependent color spaces that are supported by the
-   function set. The screenInitProc member is set to the callback
-   procedure (see the following interface specification) that
-   initializes the XcmsPerScrnInfo structure for a particular
-   screen.
-
-   The screen initialization callback must adhere to the following
-   software interface specification:
-
-   typedef Status (*XcmsScreenInitProc)(Display *display, int
-   screen_number, ScmsPerScrnInfo *screen_info);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   screen_number
-
-   Specifies the appropriate screen number on the host server.
-
-   screen_info
-
-   Specifies the XcmsPerScrnInfo structure, which contains the per
-   screen information.
-
-   The screen initialization callback in the XcmsFunctionSet
-   structure fetches the color characterization data (device
-   profile) for the specified screen, typically off properties on
-   the screen's root window. It then initializes the specified
-   XcmsPerScrnInfo structure. If successful, the procedure fills
-   in the XcmsPerScrnInfo structure as follows:
-     * It sets the screenData member to the address of the created
-       device profile data structure (contents known only by the
-       function set).
-     * It next sets the screenWhitePoint member.
-     * It next sets the functionSet member to the address of the
-       XcmsFunctionSet structure.
-     * It then sets the state member to XcmsInitSuccess and
-       finally returns XcmsSuccess.
-
-   If unsuccessful, the procedure sets the state member to
-   XcmsInitFailure and returns XcmsFailure.
-
-   The XcmsPerScrnInfo structure contains:
-
-
-
-typedef struct _XcmsPerScrnInfo {
-        XcmsColor screenWhitePoint;
-        XPointer functionSet;
-        XPointer screenData;
-        unsigned char state;
-        char pad[3];
-} XcmsPerScrnInfo;
-
-   The screenWhitePoint member specifies the white point inherent
-   to the screen. The functionSet member specifies the appropriate
-   function set. The screenData member specifies the device
-   profile. The state member is set to one of the following:
-     * XcmsInitNone indicates initialization has not been
-       previously attempted.
-     * XcmsInitFailure indicates initialization has been
-       previously attempted but failed.
-     * XcmsInitSuccess indicates initialization has been
-       previously attempted and succeeded.
-
-   The screen free callback must adhere to the following software
-   interface specification:
-
-   typedef void (*XcmsScreenFreeProc)(XPointer screenData);
-
-   screenData
-
-   Specifies the data to be freed.
-
-   This function is called to free the screenData stored in an
-   XcmsPerScrnInfo structure.
-
-Chapter 7. Graphics Context Functions
-
-   Table of Contents
-
-   Manipulating Graphics Context/State
-   Using Graphics Context Convenience Routines
-
-        Setting the Foreground, Background, Function, or Plane
-                Mask
-
-        Setting the Line Attributes and Dashes
-        Setting the Fill Style and Fill Rule
-        Setting the Fill Tile and Stipple
-        Setting the Current Font
-        Setting the Clip Region
-        Setting the Arc Mode, Subwindow Mode, and Graphics
-                Exposure
-
-   A number of resources are used when performing graphics
-   operations in X. Most information about performing graphics
-   (for example, foreground color, background color, line style,
-   and so on) is stored in resources called graphics contexts
-   (GCs). Most graphics operations (see chapter 8) take a GC as an
-   argument. Although in theory the X protocol permits sharing of
-   GCs between applications, it is expected that applications will
-   use their own GCs when performing operations. Sharing of GCs is
-   highly discouraged because the library may cache GC state.
-
-   Graphics operations can be performed to either windows or
-   pixmaps, which collectively are called drawables. Each drawable
-   exists on a single screen. A GC is created for a specific
-   screen and drawable depth and can only be used with drawables
-   of matching screen and depth.
-
-   This chapter discusses how to:
-     * Manipulate graphics context/state
-     * Use graphics context convenience functions
-
-Manipulating Graphics Context/State
-
-   Most attributes of graphics operations are stored in GCs. These
-   include line width, line style, plane mask, foreground,
-   background, tile, stipple, clipping region, end style, join
-   style, and so on. Graphics operations (for example, drawing
-   lines) use these values to determine the actual drawing
-   operation. Extensions to X may add additional components to
-   GCs. The contents of a GC are private to Xlib.
-
-   Xlib implements a write-back cache for all elements of a GC
-   that are not resource IDs to allow Xlib to implement the
-   transparent coalescing of changes to GCs. For example, a call
-   to XSetForeground of a GC followed by a call to
-   XSetLineAttributes results in only a single-change GC protocol
-   request to the server. GCs are neither expected nor encouraged
-   to be shared between client applications, so this write-back
-   caching should present no problems. Applications cannot share
-   GCs without external synchronization. Therefore, sharing GCs
-   between applications is highly discouraged.
-
-   To set an attribute of a GC, set the appropriate member of the
-   XGCValues structure and OR in the corresponding value bitmask
-   in your subsequent calls to XCreateGC. The symbols for the
-   value mask bits and the XGCValues structure are:
-/* GC attribute value mask bits */
-
-#define     GCFunction              (1L<<0)
-#define     GCPlaneMask             (1L<<1)
-#define     GCForeground            (1L<<2)
-#define     GCBackground            (1L<<3)
-#define     GCLineWidth             (1L<<4)
-#define     GCLineStyle             (1L<<5)
-#define     GCCapStyle              (1L<<6)
-#define     GCJoinStyle             (1L<<7)
-#define     GCFillStyle             (1L<<8)
-#define     GCFillRule              (1L<<9)
-#define     GCTile                  (1L<<10)
-#define     GCStipple               (1L<<11)
-#define     GCTileStipXOrigin       (1L<<12)
-#define     GCTileStipYOrigin       (1L<<13)
-#define     GCFont                  (1L<<14)
-#define     GCSubwindowMode         (1L<<15)
-#define     GCGraphicsExposures     (1L<<16)
-#define     GCClipXOrigin           (1L<<17)
-#define     GCClipYOrigin           (1L<<18)
-#define     GCClipMask              (1L<<19)
-#define     GCDashOffset            (1L<<20)
-#define     GCDashList              (1L<<21)
-#define     GCArcMode               (1L<<22)
-
-
-
-/* Values */
-
-typedef struct {
-     int function;                 /* logical operation */
-     unsigned long plane_mask;     /* plane mask */
-     unsigned long foreground;     /* foreground pixel */
-     unsigned long background;     /* background pixel */
-     int line_width;               /* line width (in pixels) */
-     int line_style;               /* LineSolid, LineOnOffDash, LineDoub
-leDash */
-     int cap_style;                /* CapNotLast, CapButt, CapRound, Cap
-Projecting */
-     int join_style;               /* JoinMiter, JoinRound, JoinBevel */
-     int fill_style;               /* FillSolid, FillTiled, FillStippled
- FillOpaqueStippled*/
-     int fill_rule;                /* EvenOddRule, WindingRule */
-     int arc_mode;                 /* ArcChord, ArcPieSlice */
-     Pixmap tile;                  /* tile pixmap for tiling operations
-*/
-     Pixmap stipple;               /* stipple 1 plane pixmap for stippli
-ng */
-     int ts_x_origin;              /* offset for tile or stipple operati
-ons */
-     int ts_y_origin
-     Font font;                    /* default text font for text operati
-ons */
-     int subwindow_mode;           /* ClipByChildren, IncludeInferiors *
-/
-     Bool graphics_exposures;      /* boolean, should exposures be gener
-ated */
-     int clip_x_origin;            /* origin for clipping */
-     int clip_y_origin;
-     Pixmap clip_mask;             /* bitmap clipping; other calls for r
-ects */
-     int dash_offset;              /* patterned/dashed line information
-*/
-     char dashes;
-} XGCValues;
-
-   The default GC values are:
-   Component          Default
-   function           GXcopy
-   plane_mask         All ones
-   foreground         0
-   background         1
-   line_width         0
-   line_style         LineSolid
-   cap_style          CapButt
-   join_style         JoinMiter
-   fill_style         FillSolid
-   fill_rule          EvenOddRule
-   arc_mode           ArcPieSlice
-   tile
-
-   Pixmap of unspecified size filled with foreground pixel
-
-   (that is, client specified pixel if any, else 0)
-
-   (subsequent changes to foreground do not affect this pixmap)
-   stipple            Pixmap of unspecified size filled with ones
-   ts_x_origin        0
-   ts_y_origin        0
-   font               <implementation dependent>
-   subwindow_mode     ClipByChildren
-   graphics_exposures True
-   clip_x_origin      0
-   clip_y_origin      0
-   clip_mask          None
-   dash_offset        0
-   dashes             4 (that is, the list [4, 4])
-
-   Note that foreground and background are not set to any values
-   likely to be useful in a window.
-
-   The function attributes of a GC are used when you update a
-   section of a drawable (the destination) with bits from
-   somewhere else (the source). The function in a GC defines how
-   the new destination bits are to be computed from the source
-   bits and the old destination bits. GXcopy is typically the most
-   useful because it will work on a color display, but special
-   applications may use other functions, particularly in concert
-   with particular planes of a color display. The 16 GC functions,
-   defined in <X11/X.h>, are:
-   Function Name  Value Operation
-   GXclear        0x0   0
-   GXand          0x1   src AND dst
-   GXandReverse   0x2   src AND NOT dst
-   GXcopy         0x3   src
-   GXandInverted  0x4   (NOT src) AND dst
-   GXnoop         0x5   dst
-   GXxor          0x6   src XOR dst
-   GXor           0x7   src OR dst
-   GXnor          0x8   (NOT src) AND (NOT dst)
-   GXequiv        0x9   (NOT src) XOR dst
-   GXinvert       0xa   NOT dst
-   GXorReverse    0xb   src OR (NOT dst)
-   GXcopyInverted 0xc   NOT src
-   GXorInverted   0xd   (NOT src) OR dst
-   GXnand         0xe   (NOT src) OR (NOT dst)
-   GXset          0xf   1
-
-   Many graphics operations depend on either pixel values or
-   planes in a GC. The planes attribute is of type long, and it
-   specifies which planes of the destination are to be modified,
-   one bit per plane. A monochrome display has only one plane and
-   will be the least significant bit of the word. As planes are
-   added to the display hardware, they will occupy more
-   significant bits in the plane mask.
-
-   In graphics operations, given a source and destination pixel,
-   the result is computed bitwise on corresponding bits of the
-   pixels. That is, a Boolean operation is performed in each bit
-   plane. The plane_mask restricts the operation to a subset of
-   planes. A macro constant AllPlanes can be used to refer to all
-   planes of the screen simultaneously. The result is computed by
-   the following:
-
-((src FUNC dst) AND plane-mask) OR (dst AND (NOT plane-mask))
-
-   Range checking is not performed on the values for foreground,
-   background, or plane_mask. They are simply truncated to the
-   appropriate number of bits. The line-width is measured in
-   pixels and either can be greater than or equal to one (wide
-   line) or can be the special value zero (thin line).
-
-   Wide lines are drawn centered on the path described by the
-   graphics request. Unless otherwise specified by the join-style
-   or cap-style, the bounding box of a wide line with endpoints
-   [x1, y1], [x2, y2] and width w is a rectangle with vertices at
-   the following real coordinates:
-
-
-
-[x1-(w*sn/2), y1+(w*cs/2)], [x1+(w*sn/2), y1-(w*cs/2)],
-[x2-(w*sn/2), y2+(w*cs/2)], [x2+(w*sn/2), y2-(w*cs/2)]
-
-   Here sn is the sine of the angle of the line, and cs is the
-   cosine of the angle of the line. A pixel is part of the line
-   and so is drawn if the center of the pixel is fully inside the
-   bounding box (which is viewed as having infinitely thin edges).
-   If the center of the pixel is exactly on the bounding box, it
-   is part of the line if and only if the interior is immediately
-   to its right (x increasing direction). Pixels with centers on a
-   horizontal edge are a special case and are part of the line if
-   and only if the interior or the boundary is immediately below
-   (y increasing direction) and the interior or the boundary is
-   immediately to the right (x increasing direction).
-
-   Thin lines (zero line-width) are one-pixel-wide lines drawn
-   using an unspecified, device-dependent algorithm. There are
-   only two constraints on this algorithm.
-     * If a line is drawn unclipped from [x1,y1] to [x2,y2] and if
-       another line is drawn unclipped from [x1+dx,y1+dy] to
-       [x2+dx,y2+dy], a point [x,y] is touched by drawing the
-       first line if and only if the point [x+dx,y+dy] is touched
-       by drawing the second line.
-     * The effective set of points comprising a line cannot be
-       affected by clipping. That is, a point is touched in a
-       clipped line if and only if the point lies inside the
-       clipping region and the point would be touched by the line
-       when drawn unclipped.
-
-   A wide line drawn from [x1,y1] to [x2,y2] always draws the same
-   pixels as a wide line drawn from [x2,y2] to [x1,y1], not
-   counting cap-style and join-style. It is recommended that this
-   property be true for thin lines, but this is not required. A
-   line-width of zero may differ from a line-width of one in which
-   pixels are drawn. This permits the use of many manufacturers'
-   line drawing hardware, which may run many times faster than the
-   more precisely specified wide lines.
-
-   In general, drawing a thin line will be faster than drawing a
-   wide line of width one. However, because of their different
-   drawing algorithms, thin lines may not mix well aesthetically
-   with wide lines. If it is desirable to obtain precise and
-   uniform results across all displays, a client should always use
-   a line-width of one rather than a line-width of zero.
-
-   The line-style defines which sections of a line are drawn:
-
-   LineSolid
-
-   The full path of the line is drawn.
-
-   LineDoubleDash
-
-   The full path of the line is drawn, but the even dashes are
-   filled differently from the odd dashes (see fill-style) with
-   CapButt style used where even and odd dashes meet.
-
-   LineOnOffDash
-
-   Only the even dashes are drawn, and cap-style applies to all
-   internal ends of the individual dashes, except CapNotLast is
-   treated as CapButt.
-
-   The cap-style defines how the endpoints of a path are drawn:
-
-   CapNotLast
-
-   This is equivalent to CapButt except that for a line-width of
-   zero the final endpoint is not drawn.
-
-   CapButt
-
-   The line is square at the endpoint (perpendicular to the slope
-   of the line) with no projection beyond.
-
-   CapRound
-
-   The line has a circular arc with the diameter equal to the
-   line-width, centered on the endpoint. (This is equivalent to
-   CapButt for line-width of zero).
-
-   CapProjecting
-
-   The line is square at the end, but the path continues beyond
-   the endpoint for a distance equal to half the line-width. (This
-   is equivalent to CapButt for line-width of zero).
-
-   The join-style defines how corners are drawn for wide lines:
-
-   JoinMiter
-
-   The outer edges of two lines extend to meet at an angle.
-   However, if the angle is less than 11 degrees, then a JoinBevel
-   join-style is used instead.
-
-   JoinRound
-
-   The corner is a circular arc with the diameter equal to the
-   line-width, centered on the joinpoint.
-
-   JoinBevel
-
-   The corner has CapButt endpoint styles with the triangular
-   notch filled.
-
-   For a line with coincident endpoints (x1=x2, y1=y2), when the
-   cap-style is applied to both endpoints, the semantics depends
-   on the line-width and the cap-style:
-   CapNotLast thin The results are device dependent, but the
-   desired effect is that nothing is drawn.
-   CapButt thin The results are device dependent, but the desired
-   effect is that a single pixel is drawn.
-   CapRound thin The results are the same as for CapButt /thin.
-   CapProjecting thin The results are the same as for CapButt
-   /thin.
-   CapButt wide Nothing is drawn.
-   CapRound wide The closed path is a circle, centered at the
-   endpoint, and with the diameter equal to the line-width.
-   CapProjecting wide The closed path is a square, aligned with
-   the coordinate axes, centered at the endpoint, and with the
-   sides equal to the line-width.
-
-   For a line with coincident endpoints (x1=x2, y1=y2), when the
-   join-style is applied at one or both endpoints, the effect is
-   as if the line was removed from the overall path. However, if
-   the total path consists of or is reduced to a single point
-   joined with itself, the effect is the same as when the
-   cap-style is applied at both endpoints.
-
-   The tile/stipple represents an infinite two-dimensional plane,
-   with the tile/stipple replicated in all dimensions. When that
-   plane is superimposed on the drawable for use in a graphics
-   operation, the upper-left corner of some instance of the
-   tile/stipple is at the coordinates within the drawable
-   specified by the tile/stipple origin. The tile/stipple and clip
-   origins are interpreted relative to the origin of whatever
-   destination drawable is specified in a graphics request. The
-   tile pixmap must have the same root and depth as the GC, or a
-   BadMatch error results. The stipple pixmap must have depth one
-   and must have the same root as the GC, or a BadMatch error
-   results. For stipple operations where the fill-style is
-   FillStippled but not FillOpaqueStippled, the stipple pattern is
-   tiled in a single plane and acts as an additional clip mask to
-   be ANDed with the clip-mask. Although some sizes may be faster
-   to use than others, any size pixmap can be used for tiling or
-   stippling.
-
-   The fill-style defines the contents of the source for line,
-   text, and fill requests. For all text and fill requests (for
-   example, XDrawText, XDrawText16, XFillRectangle, XFillPolygon,
-   and XFillArc); for line requests with line-style LineSolid (for
-   example, XDrawLine, XDrawSegments, XDrawRectangle, XDrawArc);
-   and for the even dashes for line requests with line-style
-   LineOnOffDash or LineDoubleDash, the following apply:
-   FillSolid Foreground
-   FillTiled Tile
-   FillOpaqueStippled A tile with the same width and height as
-   stipple, but with background everywhere stipple has a zero and
-   with foreground everywhere stipple has a one
-   FillStippled Foreground masked by stipple
-
-   When drawing lines with line-style LineDoubleDash, the odd
-   dashes are controlled by the fill-style in the following
-   manner:
-   FillSolid          Background
-   FillTiled          Same as for even dashes
-   FillOpaqueStippled Same as for even dashes
-   FillStippled       Background masked by stipple
-
-   Storing a pixmap in a GC might or might not result in a copy
-   being made. If the pixmap is later used as the destination for
-   a graphics request, the change might or might not be reflected
-   in the GC. If the pixmap is used simultaneously in a graphics
-   request both as a destination and as a tile or stipple, the
-   results are undefined.
-
-   For optimum performance, you should draw as much as possible
-   with the same GC (without changing its components). The costs
-   of changing GC components relative to using different GCs
-   depend on the display hardware and the server implementation.
-   It is quite likely that some amount of GC information will be
-   cached in display hardware and that such hardware can only
-   cache a small number of GCs.
-
-   The dashes value is actually a simplified form of the more
-   general patterns that can be set with XSetDashes. Specifying a
-   value of N is equivalent to specifying the two-element list [N,
-   N] in XSetDashes. The value must be nonzero, or a BadValue
-   error results.
-
-   The clip-mask restricts writes to the destination drawable. If
-   the clip-mask is set to a pixmap, it must have depth one and
-   have the same root as the GC, or a BadMatch error results. If
-   clip-mask is set to None, the pixels are always drawn
-   regardless of the clip origin. The clip-mask also can be set by
-   calling the XSetClipRectangles or XSetRegion functions. Only
-   pixels where the clip-mask has a bit set to 1 are drawn. Pixels
-   are not drawn outside the area covered by the clip-mask or
-   where the clip-mask has a bit set to 0. The clip-mask affects
-   all graphics requests. The clip-mask does not clip sources. The
-   clip-mask origin is interpreted relative to the origin of
-   whatever destination drawable is specified in a graphics
-   request.
-
-   You can set the subwindow-mode to ClipByChildren or
-   IncludeInferiors. For ClipByChildren, both source and
-   destination windows are additionally clipped by all viewable
-   InputOutput children. For IncludeInferiors, neither source nor
-   destination window is clipped by inferiors. This will result in
-   including subwindow contents in the source and drawing through
-   subwindow boundaries of the destination. The use of
-   IncludeInferiors on a window of one depth with mapped inferiors
-   of differing depth is not illegal, but the semantics are
-   undefined by the core protocol.
-
-   The fill-rule defines what pixels are inside (drawn) for paths
-   given in XFillPolygon requests and can be set to EvenOddRule or
-   WindingRule. For EvenOddRule, a point is inside if an infinite
-   ray with the point as origin crosses the path an odd number of
-   times. For WindingRule, a point is inside if an infinite ray
-   with the point as origin crosses an unequal number of clockwise
-   and counterclockwise directed path segments. A clockwise
-   directed path segment is one that crosses the ray from left to
-   right as observed from the point. A counterclockwise segment is
-   one that crosses the ray from right to left as observed from
-   the point. The case where a directed line segment is coincident
-   with the ray is uninteresting because you can simply choose a
-   different ray that is not coincident with a segment.
-
-   For both EvenOddRule and WindingRule, a point is infinitely
-   small, and the path is an infinitely thin line. A pixel is
-   inside if the center point of the pixel is inside and the
-   center point is not on the boundary. If the center point is on
-   the boundary, the pixel is inside if and only if the polygon
-   interior is immediately to its right (x increasing direction).
-   Pixels with centers on a horizontal edge are a special case and
-   are inside if and only if the polygon interior is immediately
-   below (y increasing direction).
-
-   The arc-mode controls filling in the XFillArcs function and can
-   be set to ArcPieSlice or ArcChord. For ArcPieSlice, the arcs
-   are pie-slice filled. For ArcChord, the arcs are chord filled.
-
-   The graphics-exposure flag controls GraphicsExpose event
-   generation for XCopyArea and XCopyPlane requests (and any
-   similar requests defined by extensions).
-
-   To create a new GC that is usable on a given screen with a
-   depth of drawable, use XCreateGC.
-
-   GC XCreateGC(Display *display, Drawable d, unsigned long
-   valuemask, XGCValues *values);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   d
-
-   Specifies the drawable.
-
-   valuemask
-
-   Specifies which components in the GC are to be set using the
-   information in the specified values structure. This argument is
-   the bitwise inclusive OR of zero or more of the valid GC
-   component mask bits.
-
-   values
-
-   Specifies any values as specified by the valuemask.
-
-   The XCreateGC function creates a graphics context and returns a
-   GC. The GC can be used with any destination drawable having the
-   same root and depth as the specified drawable. Use with other
-   drawables results in a BadMatch error.
-
-   XCreateGC can generate BadAlloc, BadDrawable, BadFont,
-   BadMatch, BadPixmap, and BadValue errors.
-
-   To copy components from a source GC to a destination GC, use
-   XCopyGC.
-
-   XCopyGC(Display *display, GC src, GC dest, unsigned long
-   valuemask);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   src
-
-   Specifies the components of the source GC.
-
-   valuemask
-
-   Specifies which components in the GC are to be copied to the
-   destination GC. This argument is the bitwise inclusive OR of
-   zero or more of the valid GC component mask bits.
-
-   dest
-
-   Specifies the destination GC.
-
-   The XCopyGC function copies the specified components from the
-   source GC to the destination GC. The source and destination GCs
-   must have the same root and depth, or a BadMatch error results.
-   The valuemask specifies which component to copy, as for
-   XCreateGC.
-
-   XCopyGC can generate BadAlloc, BadGC, and BadMatch errors.
-
-   To change the components in a given GC, use XChangeGC.
-
-   XChangeGC(Display *display, GC gc, unsigned long valuemask,
-   XGCValues *values);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   valuemask
-
-   Specifies which components in the GC are to be changed using
-   information in the specified values structure. This argument is
-   the bitwise inclusive OR of zero or more of the valid GC
-   component mask bits.
-
-   values
-
-   Specifies any values as specified by the valuemask.
-
-   The XChangeGC function changes the components specified by
-   valuemask for the specified GC. The values argument contains
-   the values to be set. The values and restrictions are the same
-   as for XCreateGC. Changing the clip-mask overrides any previous
-   XSetClipRectangles request on the context. Changing the
-   dash-offset or dash-list overrides any previous XSetDashes
-   request on the context. The order in which components are
-   verified and altered is server dependent. If an error is
-   generated, a subset of the components may have been altered.
-
-   XChangeGC can generate BadAlloc, BadFont, BadGC, BadMatch,
-   BadPixmap, and BadValue errors.
-
-   To obtain components of a given GC, use XGetGCValues.
-
-   Status XGetGCValues(Display *display, GC gc, unsigned long
-   valuemask, XGCValues *values_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   valuemask
-
-   Specifies which components in the GC are to be returned in the
-   values_return argument. This argument is the bitwise inclusive
-   OR of zero or more of the valid GC component mask bits.
-
-   values_return
-
-   Returns the GC values in the specified XGCValues structure.
-
-   The XGetGCValues function returns the components specified by
-   valuemask for the specified GC. If the valuemask contains a
-   valid set of GC mask bits (GCFunction, GCPlaneMask,
-   GCForeground, GCBackground, GCLineWidth, GCLineStyle,
-   GCCapStyle, GCJoinStyle, GCFillStyle, GCFillRule, GCTile,
-   GCStipple, GCTileStipXOrigin, GCTileStipYOrigin, GCFont,
-   GCSubwindowMode, GCGraphicsExposures, GCClipXOrigin,
-   GCClipYOrigin, GCDashOffset, or GCArcMode) and no error occurs,
-   XGetGCValues sets the requested components in values_return and
-   returns a nonzero status. Otherwise, it returns a zero status.
-   Note that the clip-mask and dash-list (represented by the
-   GCClipMask and GCDashList bits, respectively, in the valuemask)
-   cannot be requested. Also note that an invalid resource ID
-   (with one or more of the three most significant bits set to 1)
-   will be returned for GCFont, GCTile, and GCStipple if the
-   component has never been explicitly set by the client.
-
-   To free a given GC, use XFreeGC.
-
-   XFreeGC(Display *display, GC gc);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   The XFreeGC function destroys the specified GC as well as all
-   the associated storage.
-
-   XFreeGC can generate a BadGC error.
-
-   To obtain the GContext resource ID for a given GC, use
-   XGContextFromGC.
-
-   GContext XGContextFromGC(GC gc);
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC for which you want the resource ID.
-
-   Xlib usually defers sending changes to the components of a GC
-   to the server until a graphics function is actually called with
-   that GC. This permits batching of component changes into a
-   single server request. In some circumstances, however, it may
-   be necessary for the client to explicitly force sending the
-   changes to the server. An example might be when a protocol
-   extension uses the GC indirectly, in such a way that the
-   extension interface cannot know what GC will be used. To force
-   sending GC component changes, use XFlushGC.
-
-   void XFlushGC(Display *display, GC gc);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-Using Graphics Context Convenience Routines
-
-   This section discusses how to set the:
-     * Foreground, background, plane mask, or function components
-     * Line attributes and dashes components
-     * Fill style and fill rule components
-     * Fill tile and stipple components
-     * Font component
-     * Clip region component
-     * Arc mode, subwindow mode, and graphics exposure components
-
-Setting the Foreground, Background, Function, or Plane Mask
-
-   To set the foreground, background, plane mask, and function
-   components for a given GC, use XSetState.
-
-   XSetState(Display *display, GC gc, unsigned long foreground,
-   unsigned long background, int function, unsigned long
-   plane_mask);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   foreground
-
-   Specifies the foreground you want to set for the specified GC.
-
-   background
-
-   Specifies the background you want to set for the specified GC.
-
-   function
-
-   Specifies the function you want to set for the specified GC.
-
-   plane_mask
-
-   Specifies the plane mask.
-
-   XSetState can generate BadAlloc, BadGC, and BadValue errors.
-
-   To set the foreground of a given GC, use XSetForeground.
-
-   XSetForeground(Display *display, GC gc, unsigned long
-   foreground);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   foreground
-
-   Specifies the foreground you want to set for the specified GC.
-
-   XSetForeground can generate BadAlloc and BadGC errors.
-
-   To set the background of a given GC, use XSetBackground.
-
-   XSetBackground(Display *display, GC gc, unsigned long
-   background);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   background
-
-   Specifies the background you want to set for the specified GC.
-
-   XSetBackground can generate BadAlloc and BadGC errors.
-
-   To set the display function in a given GC, use XSetFunction.
-
-   XSetFunction(Display *display, GC gc, int function);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   function
-
-   Specifies the function you want to set for the specified GC.
-
-   XSetFunction can generate BadAlloc, BadGC, and BadValue errors.
-
-   To set the plane mask of a given GC, use XSetPlaneMask.
-
-   XSetPlaneMask(Display *display, GC gc, unsigned long
-   plane_mask);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   plane_mask
-
-   Specifies the plane mask.
-
-   XSetPlaneMask can generate BadAlloc and BadGC errors.
-
-Setting the Line Attributes and Dashes
-
-   To set the line drawing components of a given GC, use
-   XSetLineAttributes.
-
-   XSetLineAttributes(Display *display, GC gc, unsigned int
-   line_width, int line_style, int cap_style, int join_style);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   line_width
-
-   Specifies the line-width you want to set for the specified GC.
-
-   line_style
-
-   Specifies the line-style you want to set for the specified GC.
-   You can pass LineSolid, LineOnOffDash, or LineDoubleDash.
-
-   cap_style
-
-   Specifies the line-style and cap-style you want to set for the
-   specified GC. You can pass CapNotLast, CapButt, CapRound, or
-   CapProjecting.
-
-   join_style
-
-   Specifies the line join-style you want to set for the specified
-   GC. You can pass JoinMiter, JoinRound, or JoinBevel.
-
-   XSetLineAttributes can generate BadAlloc, BadGC, and BadValue
-   errors.
-
-   To set the dash-offset and dash-list for dashed line styles of
-   a given GC, use XSetDashes.
-
-   XSetDashes(Display *display, GC gc, int dash_offset, char
-   dash_list[], int n);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   dash_offset
-
-   Specifies the phase of the pattern for the dashed line-style
-   you want to set for the specified GC.
-
-   dash_list
-
-   Specifies the dash-list for the dashed line-style you want to
-   set for the specified GC.
-
-   n
-
-   Specifies the number of elements in dash_list.
-
-   The XSetDashes function sets the dash-offset and dash-list
-   attributes for dashed line styles in the specified GC. There
-   must be at least one element in the specified dash_list, or a
-   BadValue error results. The initial and alternating elements
-   (second, fourth, and so on) of the dash_list are the even
-   dashes, and the others are the odd dashes. Each element
-   specifies a dash length in pixels. All of the elements must be
-   nonzero, or a BadValue error results. Specifying an odd-length
-   list is equivalent to specifying the same list concatenated
-   with itself to produce an even-length list.
-
-   The dash-offset defines the phase of the pattern, specifying
-   how many pixels into the dash-list the pattern should actually
-   begin in any single graphics request. Dashing is continuous
-   through path elements combined with a join-style but is reset
-   to the dash-offset between each sequence of joined lines.
-
-   The unit of measure for dashes is the same for the ordinary
-   coordinate system. Ideally, a dash length is measured along the
-   slope of the line, but implementations are only required to
-   match this ideal for horizontal and vertical lines. Failing the
-   ideal semantics, it is suggested that the length be measured
-   along the major axis of the line. The major axis is defined as
-   the x axis for lines drawn at an angle of between -45 and +45
-   degrees or between 135 and 225 degrees from the x axis. For all
-   other lines, the major axis is the y axis.
-
-   XSetDashes can generate BadAlloc, BadGC, and BadValue errors.
-
-Setting the Fill Style and Fill Rule
-
-   To set the fill-style of a given GC, use XSetFillStyle.
-
-   XSetFillStyle(Display *display, GC gc, int fill_style);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   fill_style
-
-   Specifies the fill-style you want to set for the specified GC.
-   You can pass FillSolid, FillTiled, FillStippled, or
-   FillOpaqueStippled.
-
-   XSetFillStyle can generate BadAlloc, BadGC, and BadValue
-   errors.
-
-   To set the fill-rule of a given GC, use XSetFillRule.
-
-   XSetFillRule(Display *display, GC gc, int fill_rule);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   fill_rule
-
-   Specifies the fill-rule you want to set for the specified GC.
-   You can pass EvenOddRule or WindingRule.
-
-   XSetFillRule can generate BadAlloc, BadGC, and BadValue errors.
-
-Setting the Fill Tile and Stipple
-
-   Some displays have hardware support for tiling or stippling
-   with patterns of specific sizes. Tiling and stippling
-   operations that restrict themselves to those specific sizes run
-   much faster than such operations with arbitrary size patterns.
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to determine the best
-   size, tile, or stipple for the display as well as to set the
-   tile or stipple shape and the tile or stipple origin.
-
-   To obtain the best size of a tile, stipple, or cursor, use
-   XQueryBestSize.
-
-   Status XQueryBestSize(Display *display, int class, Drawable
-   which_screen, unsigned int width, unsigned int height, unsigned
-   int *width_return, unsigned int *height_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   class
-
-   Specifies the class that you are interested in. You can pass
-   TileShape, CursorShape, or StippleShape.
-
-   which_screen
-
-   Specifies any drawable on the screen.
-
-   width
-
-   height
-
-   Specify the width and height.
-
-   width_return
-
-   height_return
-
-   Return the width and height of the object best supported by the
-   display hardware.
-
-   The XQueryBestSize function returns the best or closest size to
-   the specified size. For CursorShape, this is the largest size
-   that can be fully displayed on the screen specified by
-   which_screen. For TileShape, this is the size that can be tiled
-   fastest. For StippleShape, this is the size that can be
-   stippled fastest. For CursorShape, the drawable indicates the
-   desired screen. For TileShape and StippleShape, the drawable
-   indicates the screen and possibly the window class and depth.
-   An InputOnly window cannot be used as the drawable for
-   TileShape or StippleShape, or a BadMatch error results.
-
-   XQueryBestSize can generate BadDrawable, BadMatch, and BadValue
-   errors.
-
-   To obtain the best fill tile shape, use XQueryBestTile.
-
-   Status XQueryBestTile(Display *display, Drawable which_screen,
-   unsigned int width, unsigned int height, unsigned int
-   *width_return, unsigned int *height_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   which_screen
-
-   Specifies any drawable on the screen.
-
-   width
-
-   height
-
-   Specify the width and height.
-
-   width_return
-
-   height_return
-
-   Return the width and height of the object best supported by the
-   display hardware.
-
-   The XQueryBestTile function returns the best or closest size,
-   that is, the size that can be tiled fastest on the screen
-   specified by which_screen. The drawable indicates the screen
-   and possibly the window class and depth. If an InputOnly window
-   is used as the drawable, a BadMatch error results.
-
-   XQueryBestTile can generate BadDrawable and BadMatch errors.
-
-   To obtain the best stipple shape, use XQueryBestStipple.
-
-   Status XQueryBestStipple(Display *display, Drawable
-   which_screen, unsigned int width, unsigned int height, unsigned
-   int *width_return, unsigned int *height_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   which_screen
-
-   Specifies any drawable on the screen.
-
-   width
-
-   height
-
-   Specify the width and height.
-
-   width_return
-
-   height_return
-
-   Return the width and height of the object best supported by the
-   display hardware.
-
-   The XQueryBestStipple function returns the best or closest
-   size, that is, the size that can be stippled fastest on the
-   screen specified by which_screen. The drawable indicates the
-   screen and possibly the window class and depth. If an InputOnly
-   window is used as the drawable, a BadMatch error results.
-
-   XQueryBestStipple can generate BadDrawable and BadMatch errors.
-
-   To set the fill tile of a given GC, use XSetTile.
-
-   XSetTile(Display *display, GC gc, Pixmap tile);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   tile
-
-   Specifies the fill tile you want to set for the specified GC.
-
-   The tile and GC must have the same depth, or a BadMatch error
-   results.
-
-   XSetTile can generate BadAlloc, BadGC, BadMatch, and BadPixmap
-   errors.
-
-   To set the stipple of a given GC, use XSetStipple.
-
-   XSetStipple(Display *display, GC gc, Pixmap stipple);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   stipple
-
-   Specifies the stipple you want to set for the specified GC.
-
-   The stipple must have a depth of one, or a BadMatch error
-   results.
-
-   XSetStipple can generate BadAlloc, BadGC, BadMatch, and
-   BadPixmap errors.
-
-   To set the tile or stipple origin of a given GC, use
-   XSetTSOrigin.
-
-   XSetTSOrigin(Display *display, GC gc, int ts_x_origin, int
-   ts_y_origin);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   ts_x_origin
-
-   ts_y_origin
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates of the tile and stipple origin.
-
-   When graphics requests call for tiling or stippling, the
-   parent's origin will be interpreted relative to whatever
-   destination drawable is specified in the graphics request.
-
-   XSetTSOrigin can generate BadAlloc and BadGC errors.
-
-Setting the Current Font
-
-   To set the current font of a given GC, use XSetFont.
-
-   XSetFont(Display *display, GC gc, Font font);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   font
-
-   Specifies the font.
-
-   XSetFont can generate BadAlloc, BadFont, and BadGC errors.
-
-Setting the Clip Region
-
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to set the clip-origin
-   and the clip-mask or set the clip-mask to a list of rectangles.
-
-   To set the clip-origin of a given GC, use XSetClipOrigin.
-
-   XSetClipOrigin(Display *display, GC gc, int clip_x_origin, int
-   clip_y_origin);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   clip_x_origin
-
-   clip_y_origin
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates of the clip-mask origin.
-
-   The clip-mask origin is interpreted relative to the origin of
-   whatever destination drawable is specified in the graphics
-   request.
-
-   XSetClipOrigin can generate BadAlloc and BadGC errors.
-
-   To set the clip-mask of a given GC to the specified pixmap, use
-   XSetClipMask.
-
-   XSetClipMask(Display *display, GC gc, Pixmap pixmap);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   pixmap
-
-   Specifies the pixmap or None.
-
-   If the clip-mask is set to None, the pixels are always drawn
-   (regardless of the clip-origin).
-
-   XSetClipMask can generate BadAlloc, BadGC, BadMatch, and
-   BadPixmap errors.
-
-   To set the clip-mask of a given GC to the specified list of
-   rectangles, use XSetClipRectangles.
-
-   XSetClipRectangles(Display *display, GC gc, int clip_x_origin,
-   int clip_y_origin, XRectangle rectangles[], int n, int
-   ordering);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   clip_x_origin
-
-   clip_y_origin
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates of the clip-mask origin.
-
-   rectangles
-
-   Specifies an array of rectangles that define the clip-mask.
-
-   n
-
-   Specifies the number of rectangles.
-
-   ordering
-
-   Specifies the ordering relations on the rectangles. You can
-   pass Unsorted, YSorted, YXSorted, or YXBanded.
-
-   The XSetClipRectangles function changes the clip-mask in the
-   specified GC to the specified list of rectangles and sets the
-   clip origin. The output is clipped to remain contained within
-   the rectangles. The clip-origin is interpreted relative to the
-   origin of whatever destination drawable is specified in a
-   graphics request. The rectangle coordinates are interpreted
-   relative to the clip-origin. The rectangles should be
-   nonintersecting, or the graphics results will be undefined.
-   Note that the list of rectangles can be empty, which
-   effectively disables output. This is the opposite of passing
-   None as the clip-mask in XCreateGC, XChangeGC, and
-   XSetClipMask.
-
-   If known by the client, ordering relations on the rectangles
-   can be specified with the ordering argument. This may provide
-   faster operation by the server. If an incorrect ordering is
-   specified, the X server may generate a BadMatch error, but it
-   is not required to do so. If no error is generated, the
-   graphics results are undefined. Unsorted means the rectangles
-   are in arbitrary order. YSorted means that the rectangles are
-   nondecreasing in their Y origin. YXSorted additionally
-   constrains YSorted order in that all rectangles with an equal Y
-   origin are nondecreasing in their X origin. YXBanded
-   additionally constrains YXSorted by requiring that, for every
-   possible Y scanline, all rectangles that include that scanline
-   have an identical Y origins and Y extents.
-
-   XSetClipRectangles can generate BadAlloc, BadGC, BadMatch, and
-   BadValue errors.
-
-   Xlib provides a set of basic functions for performing region
-   arithmetic. For information about these functions, see section
-   16.5.
-
-Setting the Arc Mode, Subwindow Mode, and Graphics Exposure
-
-   To set the arc mode of a given GC, use XSetArcMode.
-
-   XSetArcMode(Display *display, GC gc, int arc_mode);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   arc_mode
-
-   Specifies the arc mode. You can pass ArcChord or ArcPieSlice.
-
-   XSetArcMode can generate BadAlloc, BadGC, and BadValue errors.
-
-   To set the subwindow mode of a given GC, use XSetSubwindowMode.
-
-   XSetSubwindowMode(Display *display, GC gc, int subwindow_mode);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   subwindow_mode
-
-   Specifies the subwindow mode. You can pass ClipByChildren or
-   IncludeInferiors.
-
-   XSetSubwindowMode can generate BadAlloc, BadGC, and BadValue
-   errors.
-
-   To set the graphics-exposures flag of a given GC, use
-   XSetGraphicsExposures.
-
-   XSetGraphicsExposures(Display *display, GC gc, Bool
-   graphics_exposures);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   graphics_exposures
-
-   Specifies a Boolean value that indicates whether you want
-   GraphicsExpose and NoExpose events to be reported when calling
-   XCopyArea and XCopyPlane with this GC.
-
-   XSetGraphicsExposures can generate BadAlloc, BadGC, and
-   BadValue errors.
-
-Chapter 8. Graphics Functions
-
-   Table of Contents
-
-   Clearing Areas
-   Copying Areas
-   Drawing Points, Lines, Rectangles, and Arcs
-
-        Drawing Single and Multiple Points
-        Drawing Single and Multiple Lines
-        Drawing Single and Multiple Rectangles
-        Drawing Single and Multiple Arcs
-
-   Filling Areas
-
-        Filling Single and Multiple Rectangles
-        Filling a Single Polygon
-        Filling Single and Multiple Arcs
-
-   Font Metrics
-
-        Loading and Freeing Fonts
-        Obtaining and Freeing Font Names and Information
-        Computing Character String Sizes
-        Computing Logical Extents
-        Querying Character String Sizes
-
-   Drawing Text
-
-        Drawing Complex Text
-        Drawing Text Characters
-        Drawing Image Text Characters
-
-   Transferring Images between Client and Server
-
-   Once you have established a connection to a display, you can
-   use the Xlib graphics functions to:
-     * Clear and copy areas
-     * Draw points, lines, rectangles, and arcs
-     * Fill areas
-     * Manipulate fonts
-     * Draw text
-     * Transfer images between clients and the server
-
-   If the same drawable and GC is used for each call, Xlib batches
-   back-to-back calls to XDrawPoint, XDrawLine, XDrawRectangle,
-   XFillArc, and XFillRectangle. Note that this reduces the total
-   number of requests sent to the server.
-
-Clearing Areas
-
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to clear an area or
-   the entire window. Because pixmaps do not have defined
-   backgrounds, they cannot be filled by using the functions
-   described in this section. Instead, to accomplish an analogous
-   operation on a pixmap, you should use XFillRectangle, which
-   sets the pixmap to a known value.
-
-   To clear a rectangular area of a given window, use XClearArea.
-
-   XClearArea(Display *display, Window w, int x, int y, unsigned
-   int width, unsigned int height, Bool exposures);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   x
-
-   y
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the
-   origin of the window and specify the upper-left corner of the
-   rectangle.
-
-   width
-
-   height
-
-   Specify the width and height, which are the dimensions of the
-   rectangle.
-
-   exposures
-
-   Specifies a Boolean value that indicates if Expose events are
-   to be generated.
-
-   The XClearArea function paints a rectangular area in the
-   specified window according to the specified dimensions with the
-   window's background pixel or pixmap. The subwindow-mode
-   effectively is ClipByChildren. If width is zero, it is replaced
-   with the current width of the window minus x. If height is
-   zero, it is replaced with the current height of the window
-   minus y. If the window has a defined background tile, the
-   rectangle clipped by any children is filled with this tile. If
-   the window has background None, the contents of the window are
-   not changed. In either case, if exposures is True, one or more
-   Expose events are generated for regions of the rectangle that
-   are either visible or are being retained in a backing store. If
-   you specify a window whose class is InputOnly, a BadMatch error
-   results.
-
-   XClearArea can generate BadMatch, BadValue, and BadWindow
-   errors.
-
-   To clear the entire area in a given window, use XClearWindow.
-
-   XClearWindow(Display *display, Window w);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   The XClearWindow function clears the entire area in the
-   specified window and is equivalent to XClearArea (display, w,
-   0, 0, 0, 0, False). If the window has a defined background
-   tile, the rectangle is tiled with a plane-mask of all ones and
-   GXcopy function. If the window has background None, the
-   contents of the window are not changed. If you specify a window
-   whose class is InputOnly, a BadMatch error results.
-
-   XClearWindow can generate BadMatch and BadWindow errors.
-
-Copying Areas
-
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to copy an area or a
-   bit plane.
-
-   To copy an area between drawables of the same root and depth,
-   use XCopyArea.
-
-   XCopyArea(Display *display, Drawable src, Drawable dest, GC gc,
-   int src_x, int src_y, unsigned int width, unsigned int height,
-   int dest_x, int dest_y);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   src
-
-   dest
-
-   Specify the source and destination rectangles to be combined.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   src_x
-
-   src_y
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the
-   origin of the source rectangle and specify its upper-left
-   corner.
-
-   width
-
-   height
-
-   Specify the width and height, which are the dimensions of both
-   the source and destination rectangles.
-
-   dest_x
-
-   dest_y
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the
-   origin of the destination rectangle and specify its upper-left
-   corner.
-
-   The XCopyArea function combines the specified rectangle of src
-   with the specified rectangle of dest. The drawables must have
-   the same root and depth, or a BadMatch error results.
-
-   If regions of the source rectangle are obscured and have not
-   been retained in backing store or if regions outside the
-   boundaries of the source drawable are specified, those regions
-   are not copied. Instead, the following occurs on all
-   corresponding destination regions that are either visible or
-   are retained in backing store. If the destination is a window
-   with a background other than None, corresponding regions of the
-   destination are tiled with that background (with plane-mask of
-   all ones and GXcopy function). Regardless of tiling or whether
-   the destination is a window or a pixmap, if graphics-exposures
-   is True, then GraphicsExpose events for all corresponding
-   destination regions are generated. If graphics-exposures is
-   True but no GraphicsExpose events are generated, a NoExpose
-   event is generated. Note that by default graphics-exposures is
-   True in new GCs.
-
-   This function uses these GC components: function, plane-mask,
-   subwindow-mode, graphics-exposures, clip-x-origin,
-   clip-y-origin, and clip-mask.
-
-   XCopyArea can generate BadDrawable, BadGC, and BadMatch errors.
-
-   To copy a single bit plane of a given drawable, use XCopyPlane.
-
-   XCopyPlane(Display *display, Drawable src, Drawable dest, GC
-   gc, int src_x, int src_y, unsigned int width, unsigned int
-   height, int dest_x, int dest_y, unsigned long plane);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   src
-
-   dest
-
-   Specify the source and destination rectangles to be combined.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   src_x
-
-   src_y
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the
-   origin of the source rectangle and specify its upper-left
-   corner.
-
-   width
-
-   height
-
-   Specify the width and height, which are the dimensions of both
-   the source and destination rectangles.
-
-   dest_x
-
-   dest_y
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the
-   origin of the destination rectangle and specify its upper-left
-   corner.
-
-   plane
-
-   Specifies the bit plane. You must set exactly one bit to 1.
-
-   The XCopyPlane function uses a single bit plane of the
-   specified source rectangle combined with the specified GC to
-   modify the specified rectangle of dest. The drawables must have
-   the same root but need not have the same depth. If the
-   drawables do not have the same root, a BadMatch error results.
-   If plane does not have exactly one bit set to 1 and the value
-   of plane is not less than %2 sup n%, where n is the depth of
-   src, a BadValue error results.
-
-   Effectively, XCopyPlane forms a pixmap of the same depth as the
-   rectangle of dest and with a size specified by the source
-   region. It uses the foreground/background pixels in the GC
-   (foreground everywhere the bit plane in src contains a bit set
-   to 1, background everywhere the bit plane in src contains a bit
-   set to 0) and the equivalent of a CopyArea protocol request is
-   performed with all the same exposure semantics. This can also
-   be thought of as using the specified region of the source bit
-   plane as a stipple with a fill-style of FillOpaqueStippled for
-   filling a rectangular area of the destination.
-
-   This function uses these GC components: function, plane-mask,
-   foreground, background, subwindow-mode, graphics-exposures,
-   clip-x-origin, clip-y-origin, and clip-mask.
-
-   XCopyPlane can generate BadDrawable, BadGC, BadMatch, and
-   BadValue errors.
-
-Drawing Points, Lines, Rectangles, and Arcs
-
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to draw:
-     * A single point or multiple points
-     * A single line or multiple lines
-     * A single rectangle or multiple rectangles
-     * A single arc or multiple arcs
-
-   Some of the functions described in the following sections use
-   these structures:
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     short x1, y1, x2, y2;
-} XSegment;
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     short x, y;
-} XPoint;
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     short x, y;
-     unsigned short width, height;
-} XRectangle;
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     short x, y;
-     unsigned short width, height;
-     short angle1, angle2;             /* Degrees * 64 */
-} XArc;
-
-   All x and y members are signed integers. The width and height
-   members are 16-bit unsigned integers. You should be careful not
-   to generate coordinates and sizes out of the 16-bit ranges,
-   because the protocol only has 16-bit fields for these values.
-
-Drawing Single and Multiple Points
-
-   To draw a single point in a given drawable, use XDrawPoint.
-
-   XDrawPoint(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, int x, int y);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   d
-
-   Specifies the drawable.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   x
-
-   y
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates where you want the point drawn.
-
-   To draw multiple points in a given drawable, use XDrawPoints.
-
-   XDrawPoints(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, XPoint
-   *points, int npoints, int mode);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   d
-
-   Specifies the drawable.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   points
-
-   Specifies an array of points.
-
-   npoints
-
-   Specifies the number of points in the array.
-
-   mode
-
-   Specifies the coordinate mode. You can pass CoordModeOrigin or
-   CoordModePrevious.
-
-   The XDrawPoint function uses the foreground pixel and function
-   components of the GC to draw a single point into the specified
-   drawable; XDrawPoints draws multiple points this way.
-   CoordModeOrigin treats all coordinates as relative to the
-   origin, and CoordModePrevious treats all coordinates after the
-   first as relative to the previous point. XDrawPoints draws the
-   points in the order listed in the array.
-
-   Both functions use these GC components: function, plane-mask,
-   foreground, subwindow-mode, clip-x-origin, clip-y-origin, and
-   clip-mask.
-
-   XDrawPoint can generate BadDrawable, BadGC, and BadMatch
-   errors. XDrawPoints can generate BadDrawable, BadGC, BadMatch,
-   and BadValue errors.
-
-Drawing Single and Multiple Lines
-
-   To draw a single line between two points in a given drawable,
-   use XDrawLine.
-
-   XDrawLine(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, int x1, int y1,
-   int x2, int y2);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   d
-
-   Specifies the drawable.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   x1
-
-   y1
-
-   x2
-
-   y2
-
-   Specify the points (x1, y1) and (x2, y2) to be connected.
-
-   To draw multiple lines in a given drawable, use XDrawLines.
-
-   XDrawLines(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, XPoint *points,
-   int npoints, int mode);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   d
-
-   Specifies the drawable.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   points
-
-   Specifies an array of points.
-
-   npoints
-
-   Specifies the number of points in the array.
-
-   mode
-
-   Specifies the coordinate mode. You can pass CoordModeOrigin or
-   CoordModePrevious.
-
-   To draw multiple, unconnected lines in a given drawable, use
-   XDrawSegments.
-
-   XDrawSegments(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, XSegment
-   *segments, int nsegments);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   d
-
-   Specifies the drawable.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   segments
-
-   Specifies an array of segments.
-
-   nsegments
-
-   Specifies the number of segments in the array.
-
-   The XDrawLine function uses the components of the specified GC
-   to draw a line between the specified set of points (x1, y1) and
-   (x2, y2). It does not perform joining at coincident endpoints.
-   For any given line, XDrawLine does not draw a pixel more than
-   once. If lines intersect, the intersecting pixels are drawn
-   multiple times.
-
-   The XDrawLines function uses the components of the specified GC
-   to draw npoints-1 lines between each pair of points (point[i],
-   point[i+1]) in the array of XPoint structures. It draws the
-   lines in the order listed in the array. The lines join
-   correctly at all intermediate points, and if the first and last
-   points coincide, the first and last lines also join correctly.
-   For any given line, XDrawLines does not draw a pixel more than
-   once. If thin (zero line-width) lines intersect, the
-   intersecting pixels are drawn multiple times. If wide lines
-   intersect, the intersecting pixels are drawn only once, as
-   though the entire PolyLine protocol request were a single,
-   filled shape. CoordModeOrigin treats all coordinates as
-   relative to the origin, and CoordModePrevious treats all
-   coordinates after the first as relative to the previous point.
-
-   The XDrawSegments function draws multiple, unconnected lines.
-   For each segment, XDrawSegments draws a line between (x1, y1)
-   and (x2, y2). It draws the lines in the order listed in the
-   array of XSegment structures and does not perform joining at
-   coincident endpoints. For any given line, XDrawSegments does
-   not draw a pixel more than once. If lines intersect, the
-   intersecting pixels are drawn multiple times.
-
-   All three functions use these GC components: function,
-   plane-mask, line-width, line-style, cap-style, fill-style,
-   subwindow-mode, clip-x-origin, clip-y-origin, and clip-mask.
-   The XDrawLines function also uses the join-style GC component.
-   All three functions also use these GC mode-dependent
-   components: foreground, background, tile, stipple,
-   tile-stipple-x-origin, tile-stipple-y-origin, dash-offset, and
-   dash-list.
-
-   XDrawLine, XDrawLines, and XDrawSegments can generate
-   BadDrawable, BadGC, and BadMatch errors. XDrawLines also can
-   generate BadValue errors.
-
-Drawing Single and Multiple Rectangles
-
-   To draw the outline of a single rectangle in a given drawable,
-   use XDrawRectangle.
-
-   XDrawRectangle(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, int x, int
-   y, unsigned int width, unsigned int height);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   d
-
-   Specifies the drawable.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   x
-
-   y
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates, which specify the upper-left
-   corner of the rectangle.
-
-   width
-
-   height
-
-   Specify the width and height, which specify the dimensions of
-   the rectangle.
-
-   To draw the outline of multiple rectangles in a given drawable,
-   use XDrawRectangles.
-
-   XDrawRectangles(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, XRectangle
-   rectangles[], int nrectangles);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   d
-
-   Specifies the drawable.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   rectangles
-
-   Specifies an array of rectangles.
-
-   nrectangles
-
-   Specifies the number of rectangles in the array.
-
-   The XDrawRectangle and XDrawRectangles functions draw the
-   outlines of the specified rectangle or rectangles as if a
-   five-point PolyLine protocol request were specified for each
-   rectangle:
-     * [x,y] [x+width,y] [x+width,y+height] [x,y+height] [x,y]
-
-   For the specified rectangle or rectangles, these functions do
-   not draw a pixel more than once. XDrawRectangles draws the
-   rectangles in the order listed in the array. If rectangles
-   intersect, the intersecting pixels are drawn multiple times.
-
-   Both functions use these GC components: function, plane-mask,
-   line-width, line-style, cap-style, join-style, fill-style,
-   subwindow-mode, clip-x-origin, clip-y-origin, and clip-mask.
-   They also use these GC mode-dependent components: foreground,
-   background, tile, stipple, tile-stipple-x-origin,
-   tile-stipple-y-origin, dash-offset, and dash-list.
-
-   XDrawRectangle and XDrawRectangles can generate BadDrawable,
-   BadGC, and BadMatch errors.
-
-Drawing Single and Multiple Arcs
-
-   To draw a single arc in a given drawable, use XDrawArc.
-
-   XDrawArc(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, int x, int y,
-   unsigned int width, unsigned int height, int angle1, int
-   angle2);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   d
-
-   Specifies the drawable.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   x
-
-   y
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the
-   origin of the drawable and specify the upper-left corner of the
-   bounding rectangle.
-
-   width
-
-   height
-
-   Specify the width and height, which are the major and minor
-   axes of the arc.
-
-   angle1
-
-   Specifies the start of the arc relative to the three-o'clock
-   position from the center, in units of degrees * 64.
-
-   angle2
-
-   Specifies the path and extent of the arc relative to the start
-   of the arc, in units of degrees * 64.
-
-   To draw multiple arcs in a given drawable, use XDrawArcs.
-
-   XDrawArcs(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, XArc *arcs, int
-   narcs);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   d
-
-   Specifies the drawable.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   arcs
-
-   Specifies an array of arcs.
-
-   narcs
-
-   Specifies the number of arcs in the array.
-
-   delim %% XDrawArc draws a single circular or elliptical arc,
-   and XDrawArcs draws multiple circular or elliptical arcs. Each
-   arc is specified by a rectangle and two angles. The center of
-   the circle or ellipse is the center of the rectangle, and the
-   major and minor axes are specified by the width and height.
-   Positive angles indicate counterclockwise motion, and negative
-   angles indicate clockwise motion. If the magnitude of angle2 is
-   greater than 360 degrees, XDrawArc or XDrawArcs truncates it to
-   360 degrees.
-
-   For an arc specified as %[ ~x, ~y, ~width , ~height, ~angle1,
-   ~angle2 ]%, the origin of the major and minor axes is at % [ x
-   +^ {width over 2} , ~y +^ {height over 2} ]%, and the
-   infinitely thin path describing the entire circle or ellipse
-   intersects the horizontal axis at % [ x, ~y +^ {height over 2}
-   ]% and % [ x +^ width , ~y +^ { height over 2 }] % and
-   intersects the vertical axis at % [ x +^ { width over 2 } , ~y
-   ]% and % [ x +^ { width over 2 }, ~y +^ height ]%. These
-   coordinates can be fractional and so are not truncated to
-   discrete coordinates. The path should be defined by the ideal
-   mathematical path. For a wide line with line-width lw, the
-   bounding outlines for filling are given by the two infinitely
-   thin paths consisting of all points whose perpendicular
-   distance from the path of the circle/ellipse is equal to lw/2
-   (which may be a fractional value). The cap-style and join-style
-   are applied the same as for a line corresponding to the tangent
-   of the circle/ellipse at the endpoint.
-
-   For an arc specified as % [ ~x, ~y, ~width, ~height, ~angle1,
-   ~angle2 ]%, the angles must be specified in the effectively
-   skewed coordinate system of the ellipse (for a circle, the
-   angles and coordinate systems are identical). The relationship
-   between these angles and angles expressed in the normal
-   coordinate system of the screen (as measured with a protractor)
-   is as follows:
-
-% roman "skewed-angle" ~ = ~ atan left ( tan ( roman "normal-angle" )
- * width over height right ) +^ adjust%
-
-   The skewed-angle and normal-angle are expressed in radians
-   (rather than in degrees scaled by 64) in the range % [ 0 , ~2
-   pi ]% and where atan returns a value in the range % [ - pi over
-   2 , ~pi over 2 ] % and adjust is:
-
-
-
-%0%     for normal-angle in the range % [ 0 , ~pi over 2  ]%
-%pi%     for normal-angle in the range % [ pi over 2 , ~{3 pi} over 2  ]
-%
-%2 pi%     for normal-angle in the range % [ {3 pi} over 2 , ~2 pi  ]%
-
-   For any given arc, XDrawArc and XDrawArcs do not draw a pixel
-   more than once. If two arcs join correctly and if the
-   line-width is greater than zero and the arcs intersect,
-   XDrawArc and XDrawArcs do not draw a pixel more than once.
-   Otherwise, the intersecting pixels of intersecting arcs are
-   drawn multiple times. Specifying an arc with one endpoint and a
-   clockwise extent draws the same pixels as specifying the other
-   endpoint and an equivalent counterclockwise extent, except as
-   it affects joins.
-
-   If the last point in one arc coincides with the first point in
-   the following arc, the two arcs will join correctly. If the
-   first point in the first arc coincides with the last point in
-   the last arc, the two arcs will join correctly. By specifying
-   one axis to be zero, a horizontal or vertical line can be
-   drawn. Angles are computed based solely on the coordinate
-   system and ignore the aspect ratio.
-
-   Both functions use these GC components: function, plane-mask,
-   line-width, line-style, cap-style, join-style, fill-style,
-   subwindow-mode, clip-x-origin, clip-y-origin, and clip-mask.
-   They also use these GC mode-dependent components: foreground,
-   background, tile, stipple, tile-stipple-x-origin,
-   tile-stipple-y-origin, dash-offset, and dash-list.
-
-   XDrawArc and XDrawArcs can generate BadDrawable, BadGC, and
-   BadMatch errors.
-
-Filling Areas
-
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to fill:
-     * A single rectangle or multiple rectangles
-     * A single polygon
-     * A single arc or multiple arcs
-
-Filling Single and Multiple Rectangles
-
-   To fill a single rectangular area in a given drawable, use
-   XFillRectangle.
-
-   XFillRectangle(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, int x, int
-   y, unsigned int width, unsigned int height);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   d
-
-   Specifies the drawable.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   x
-
-   y
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the
-   origin of the drawable and specify the upper-left corner of the
-   rectangle.
-
-   width
-
-   height
-
-   Specify the width and height, which are the dimensions of the
-   rectangle to be filled.
-
-   To fill multiple rectangular areas in a given drawable, use
-   XFillRectangles.
-
-   XFillRectangles(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, XRectangle
-   *rectangles, int nrectangles);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   d
-
-   Specifies the drawable.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   rectangles
-
-   Specifies an array of rectangles.
-
-   nrectangles
-
-   Specifies the number of rectangles in the array.
-
-   The XFillRectangle and XFillRectangles functions fill the
-   specified rectangle or rectangles as if a four-point
-   FillPolygon protocol request were specified for each rectangle:
-
-[x,y] [x+width,y] [x+width,y+height] [x,y+height]
-
-   Each function uses the x and y coordinates, width and height
-   dimensions, and GC you specify.
-
-   XFillRectangles fills the rectangles in the order listed in the
-   array. For any given rectangle, XFillRectangle and
-   XFillRectangles do not draw a pixel more than once. If
-   rectangles intersect, the intersecting pixels are drawn
-   multiple times.
-
-   Both functions use these GC components: function, plane-mask,
-   fill-style, subwindow-mode, clip-x-origin, clip-y-origin, and
-   clip-mask. They also use these GC mode-dependent components:
-   foreground, background, tile, stipple, tile-stipple-x-origin,
-   and tile-stipple-y-origin.
-
-   XFillRectangle and XFillRectangles can generate BadDrawable,
-   BadGC, and BadMatch errors.
-
-Filling a Single Polygon
-
-   To fill a polygon area in a given drawable, use XFillPolygon.
-
-   XFillPolygon(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, XPoint
-   *points, int npoints, int shape, int mode);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   d
-
-   Specifies the drawable.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   points
-
-   Specifies an array of points.
-
-   npoints
-
-   Specifies the number of points in the array.
-
-   shape
-
-   Specifies a shape that helps the server to improve performance.
-   You can pass Complex, Convex, or Nonconvex.
-
-   mode
-
-   Specifies the coordinate mode. You can pass CoordModeOrigin or
-   CoordModePrevious.
-
-   XFillPolygon fills the region closed by the specified path. The
-   path is closed automatically if the last point in the list does
-   not coincide with the first point. XFillPolygon does not draw a
-   pixel of the region more than once. CoordModeOrigin treats all
-   coordinates as relative to the origin, and CoordModePrevious
-   treats all coordinates after the first as relative to the
-   previous point.
-
-   Depending on the specified shape, the following occurs:
-     * If shape is Complex, the path may self-intersect. Note that
-       contiguous coincident points in the path are not treated as
-       self-intersection.
-     * If shape is Convex, for every pair of points inside the
-       polygon, the line segment connecting them does not
-       intersect the path. If known by the client, specifying
-       Convex can improve performance. If you specify Convex for a
-       path that is not convex, the graphics results are
-       undefined.
-     * If shape is Nonconvex, the path does not self-intersect,
-       but the shape is not wholly convex. If known by the client,
-       specifying Nonconvex instead of Complex may improve
-       performance. If you specify Nonconvex for a
-       self-intersecting path, the graphics results are undefined.
-
-   The fill-rule of the GC controls the filling behavior of
-   self-intersecting polygons.
-
-   This function uses these GC components: function, plane-mask,
-   fill-style, fill-rule, subwindow-mode, clip-x-origin,
-   clip-y-origin, and clip-mask. It also uses these GC
-   mode-dependent components: foreground, background, tile,
-   stipple, tile-stipple-x-origin, and tile-stipple-y-origin.
-
-   XFillPolygon can generate BadDrawable, BadGC, BadMatch, and
-   BadValue errors.
-
-Filling Single and Multiple Arcs
-
-   To fill a single arc in a given drawable, use XFillArc.
-
-   XFillArc(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, int x, int y,
-   unsigned int width, unsigned int height, int angle1, int
-   angle2);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   d
-
-   Specifies the drawable.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   x
-
-   y
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the
-   origin of the drawable and specify the upper-left corner of the
-   bounding rectangle.
-
-   width
-
-   height
-
-   Specify the width and height, which are the major and minor
-   axes of the arc.
-
-   angle1
-
-   Specifies the start of the arc relative to the three-o'clock
-   position from the center, in units of degrees * 64.
-
-   angle2
-
-   Specifies the path and extent of the arc relative to the start
-   of the arc, in units of degrees * 64.
-
-   To fill multiple arcs in a given drawable, use XFillArcs.
-
-   XFillArcs(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, XArc *arcs, int
-   narcs);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   d
-
-   Specifies the drawable.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   arcs
-
-   Specifies an array of arcs.
-
-   narcs
-
-   Specifies the number of arcs in the array.
-
-   For each arc, XFillArc or XFillArcs fills the region closed by
-   the infinitely thin path described by the specified arc and,
-   depending on the arc-mode specified in the GC, one or two line
-   segments. For ArcChord, the single line segment joining the
-   endpoints of the arc is used. For ArcPieSlice, the two line
-   segments joining the endpoints of the arc with the center point
-   are used. XFillArcs fills the arcs in the order listed in the
-   array. For any given arc, XFillArc and XFillArcs do not draw a
-   pixel more than once. If regions intersect, the intersecting
-   pixels are drawn multiple times.
-
-   Both functions use these GC components: function, plane-mask,
-   fill-style, arc-mode, subwindow-mode, clip-x-origin,
-   clip-y-origin, and clip-mask. They also use these GC
-   mode-dependent components: foreground, background, tile,
-   stipple, tile-stipple-x-origin, and tile-stipple-y-origin.
-
-   XFillArc and XFillArcs can generate BadDrawable, BadGC, and
-   BadMatch errors.
-
-Font Metrics
-
-   A font is a graphical description of a set of characters that
-   are used to increase efficiency whenever a set of small,
-   similar sized patterns are repeatedly used.
-
-   This section discusses how to:
-     * Load and free fonts
-     * Obtain and free font names
-     * Compute character string sizes
-     * Compute logical extents
-     * Query character string sizes
-
-   The X server loads fonts whenever a program requests a new
-   font. The server can cache fonts for quick lookup. Fonts are
-   global across all screens in a server. Several levels are
-   possible when dealing with fonts. Most applications simply use
-   XLoadQueryFont to load a font and query the font metrics.
-
-   Characters in fonts are regarded as masks. Except for image
-   text requests, the only pixels modified are those in which bits
-   are set to 1 in the character. This means that it makes sense
-   to draw text using stipples or tiles (for example, many menus
-   gray-out unusable entries).
-
-   The XFontStruct structure contains all of the information for
-   the font and consists of the font-specific information as well
-   as a pointer to an array of XCharStruct structures for the
-   characters contained in the font. The XFontStruct, XFontProp,
-   and XCharStruct structures contain:
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     short lbearing;               /* origin to left edge of raster */
-     short rbearing;               /* origin to right edge of raster */
-     short width;                  /* advance to next char's origin */
-     short ascent;                 /* baseline to top edge of raster */
-     short descent;                /* baseline to bottom edge of raster
-*/
-     unsigned short attributes;    /* per char flags (not predefined) */
-} XCharStruct;
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     Atom     name;
-     unsigned long card32;
-} XFontProp;
-
-
-
-typedef struct {     /* normal 16 bit characters are two bytes */
-    unsigned char byte1;
-    unsigned char byte2;
-} XChar2b;
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     XExtData *ext_data;               /* hook for extension to hang dat
-a */
-     Font fid;                         /* Font id for this font */
-     unsigned direction;               /* hint about the direction font
-is painted */
-     unsigned min_char_or_byte2;       /* first character */
-     unsigned max_char_or_byte2;       /* last character */
-     unsigned min_byte1;               /* first row that exists */
-     unsigned max_byte1;               /* last row that exists */
-     Bool all_chars_exist;             /* flag if all characters have no
-nzero size */
-     unsigned default_char;            /* char to print for undefined ch
-aracter */
-     int n_properties;                 /* how many properties there are
-*/
-     XFontProp *properties;            /* pointer to array of additional
- properties */
-     XCharStruct min_bounds;           /* minimum bounds over all existi
-ng char */
-     XCharStruct max_bounds;           /* maximum bounds over all existi
-ng char */
-     XCharStruct *per_char;            /* first_char to last_char inform
-ation */
-     int ascent;                       /* logical extent above baseline
-for spacing */
-     int descent;                      /* logical descent below baseline
- for spacing */
-} XFontStruct;
-
-   X supports single byte/character, two bytes/character matrix,
-   and 16-bit character text operations. Note that any of these
-   forms can be used with a font, but a single byte/character text
-   request can only specify a single byte (that is, the first row
-   of a 2-byte font). You should view 2-byte fonts as a
-   two-dimensional matrix of defined characters: byte1 specifies
-   the range of defined rows and byte2 defines the range of
-   defined columns of the font. Single byte/character fonts have
-   one row defined, and the byte2 range specified in the structure
-   defines a range of characters.
-
-   The bounding box of a character is defined by the XCharStruct
-   of that character. When characters are absent from a font, the
-   default_char is used. When fonts have all characters of the
-   same size, only the information in the XFontStruct min and max
-   bounds are used.
-
-   The members of the XFontStruct have the following semantics:
-     * The direction member can be either FontLeftToRight or
-       FontRightToLeft. It is just a hint as to whether most
-       XCharStruct elements have a positive (FontLeftToRight) or a
-       negative (FontRightToLeft) character width metric. The core
-       protocol defines no support for vertical text.
-     * If the min_byte1 and max_byte1 members are both zero,
-       min_char_or_byte2 specifies the linear character index
-       corresponding to the first element of the per_char array,
-       and max_char_or_byte2 specifies the linear character index
-       of the last element.
-     * If either min_byte1 or max_byte1 are nonzero, both
-       min_char_or_byte2 and max_char_or_byte2 are less than 256,
-       and the 2-byte character index values corresponding to the
-       per_char array element N (counting from 0) are:
-     * byte1 = N/D + min_byte1 byte2 = N\\D + min_char_or_byte2
-     * where:
-     * D = max_char_or_byte2 - min_char_or_byte2 + 1 / = integer
-       division \\ = integer modulus
-     * If the per_char pointer is NULL, all glyphs between the
-       first and last character indexes inclusive have the same
-       information, as given by both min_bounds and max_bounds.
-     * If all_chars_exist is True, all characters in the per_char
-       array have nonzero bounding boxes.
-     * The default_char member specifies the character that will
-       be used when an undefined or nonexistent character is
-       printed. The default_char is a 16-bit character (not a
-       2-byte character). For a font using 2-byte matrix format,
-       the default_char has byte1 in the most-significant byte and
-       byte2 in the least significant byte. If the default_char
-       itself specifies an undefined or nonexistent character, no
-       printing is performed for an undefined or nonexistent
-       character.
-     * The min_bounds and max_bounds members contain the most
-       extreme values of each individual XCharStruct component
-       over all elements of this array (and ignore nonexistent
-       characters). The bounding box of the font (the smallest
-       rectangle enclosing the shape obtained by superimposing all
-       of the characters at the same origin [x,y]) has its
-       upper-left coordinate at:
-     [x + min_bounds.lbearing, y - max_bounds.ascent]
-
-     * Its width is:
-     max_bounds.rbearing - min_bounds.lbearing
-
-     * Its height is:
-     max_bounds.ascent + max_bounds.descent
-
-     * The ascent member is the logical extent of the font above
-       the baseline that is used for determining line spacing.
-       Specific characters may extend beyond this.
-     * The descent member is the logical extent of the font at or
-       below the baseline that is used for determining line
-       spacing. Specific characters may extend beyond this.
-     * If the baseline is at Y-coordinate y, the logical extent of
-       the font is inclusive between the Y-coordinate values (y -
-       font.ascent) and (y + font.descent - 1). Typically, the
-       minimum interline spacing between rows of text is given by
-       ascent + descent.
-
-   For a character origin at [x,y], the bounding box of a
-   character (that is, the smallest rectangle that encloses the
-   character's shape) described in terms of XCharStruct components
-   is a rectangle with its upper-left corner at:
-
-[x + lbearing, y - ascent]
-
-   Its width is:
-
-rbearing - lbearing
-
-   Its height is:
-
-ascent + descent
-
-   The origin for the next character is defined to be:
-
-[x + width, y]
-
-   The lbearing member defines the extent of the left edge of the
-   character ink from the origin. The rbearing member defines the
-   extent of the right edge of the character ink from the origin.
-   The ascent member defines the extent of the top edge of the
-   character ink from the origin. The descent member defines the
-   extent of the bottom edge of the character ink from the origin.
-   The width member defines the logical width of the character.
-
-   Note that the baseline (the y position of the character origin)
-   is logically viewed as being the scanline just below
-   nondescending characters. When descent is zero, only pixels
-   with Y-coordinates less than y are drawn, and the origin is
-   logically viewed as being coincident with the left edge of a
-   nonkerned character. When lbearing is zero, no pixels with
-   X-coordinate less than x are drawn. Any of the XCharStruct
-   metric members could be negative. If the width is negative, the
-   next character will be placed to the left of the current
-   origin.
-
-   The X protocol does not define the interpretation of the
-   attributes member in the XCharStruct structure. A nonexistent
-   character is represented with all members of its XCharStruct
-   set to zero.
-
-   A font is not guaranteed to have any properties. The
-   interpretation of the property value (for example, long or
-   unsigned long) must be derived from a priori knowledge of the
-   property. A basic set of font properties is specified in the X
-   Consortium standard X Logical Font Description Conventions.
-
-Loading and Freeing Fonts
-
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to load fonts, get
-   font information, unload fonts, and free font information. A
-   few font functions use a GContext resource ID or a font ID
-   interchangeably.
-
-   To load a given font, use XLoadFont.
-
-   Font XLoadFont(Display *display, char *name);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   name
-
-   Specifies the name of the font, which is a null-terminated
-   string.
-
-   The XLoadFont function loads the specified font and returns its
-   associated font ID. If the font name is not in the Host
-   Portable Character Encoding, the result is
-   implementation-dependent. Use of uppercase or lowercase does
-   not matter. When the characters ``?'' and ``*'' are used in a
-   font name, a pattern match is performed and any matching font
-   is used. In the pattern, the ``?'' character will match any
-   single character, and the ``*'' character will match any number
-   of characters. A structured format for font names is specified
-   in the X Consortium standard X Logical Font Description
-   Conventions. If XLoadFont was unsuccessful at loading the
-   specified font, a BadName error results. Fonts are not
-   associated with a particular screen and can be stored as a
-   component of any GC. When the font is no longer needed, call
-   XUnloadFont.
-
-   XLoadFont can generate BadAlloc and BadName errors.
-
-   To return information about an available font, use XQueryFont.
-
-   XFontStruct *XQueryFont(Display *display, XID font_ID);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   font_ID
-
-   Specifies the font ID or the GContext ID.
-
-   The XQueryFont function returns a pointer to the XFontStruct
-   structure, which contains information associated with the font.
-   You can query a font or the font stored in a GC. The font ID
-   stored in the XFontStruct structure will be the GContext ID,
-   and you need to be careful when using this ID in other
-   functions (see XGContextFromGC). If the font does not exist,
-   XQueryFont returns NULL. To free this data, use XFreeFontInfo.
-
-   To perform a XLoadFont and XQueryFont in a single operation,
-   use XLoadQueryFont.
-
-   XFontStruct *XLoadQueryFont(Display *display, char *name);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   name
-
-   Specifies the name of the font, which is a null-terminated
-   string.
-
-   The XLoadQueryFont function provides the most common way for
-   accessing a font. XLoadQueryFont both opens (loads) the
-   specified font and returns a pointer to the appropriate
-   XFontStruct structure. If the font name is not in the Host
-   Portable Character Encoding, the result is
-   implementation-dependent. If the font does not exist,
-   XLoadQueryFont returns NULL.
-
-   XLoadQueryFont can generate a BadAlloc error.
-
-   To unload the font and free the storage used by the font
-   structure that was allocated by XQueryFont or XLoadQueryFont,
-   use XFreeFont.
-
-   XFreeFont(Display *display, XFontStruct *font_struct);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   font_struct
-
-   Specifies the storage associated with the font.
-
-   The XFreeFont function deletes the association between the font
-   resource ID and the specified font and frees the XFontStruct
-   structure. The font itself will be freed when no other resource
-   references it. The data and the font should not be referenced
-   again.
-
-   XFreeFont can generate a BadFont error.
-
-   To return a given font property, use XGetFontProperty.
-
-   Bool XGetFontProperty(XFontStruct *font_struct, Atom atom,
-   unsigned long *value_return);
-
-   font_struct
-
-   Specifies the storage associated with the font.
-
-   atom
-
-   Specifies the atom for the property name you want returned.
-
-   value_return
-
-   Returns the value of the font property.
-
-   Given the atom for that property, the XGetFontProperty function
-   returns the value of the specified font property.
-   XGetFontProperty also returns False if the property was not
-   defined or True if it was defined. A set of predefined atoms
-   exists for font properties, which can be found in
-   <X11/Xatom.h>. This set contains the standard properties
-   associated with a font. Although it is not guaranteed, it is
-   likely that the predefined font properties will be present.
-
-   To unload a font that was loaded by XLoadFont, use XUnloadFont.
-
-   XUnloadFont(Display *display, Font font);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   font
-
-   Specifies the font.
-
-   The XUnloadFont function deletes the association between the
-   font resource ID and the specified font. The font itself will
-   be freed when no other resource references it. The font should
-   not be referenced again.
-
-   XUnloadFont can generate a BadFont error.
-
-Obtaining and Freeing Font Names and Information
-
-   You obtain font names and information by matching a wildcard
-   specification when querying a font type for a list of available
-   sizes and so on.
-
-   To return a list of the available font names, use XListFonts.
-
-   char **XListFonts(Display *display, char *pattern, int
-   maxnames, int *actual_count_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   pattern
-
-   Specifies the null-terminated pattern string that can contain
-   wildcard characters.
-
-   maxnames
-
-   Specifies the maximum number of names to be returned.
-
-   actual_count_return
-
-   Returns the actual number of font names.
-
-   The XListFonts function returns an array of available font
-   names (as controlled by the font search path; see XSetFontPath)
-   that match the string you passed to the pattern argument. The
-   pattern string can contain any characters, but each asterisk
-   (*) is a wildcard for any number of characters, and each
-   question mark (?) is a wildcard for a single character. If the
-   pattern string is not in the Host Portable Character Encoding,
-   the result is implementation-dependent. Use of uppercase or
-   lowercase does not matter. Each returned string is
-   null-terminated. If the data returned by the server is in the
-   Latin Portable Character Encoding, then the returned strings
-   are in the Host Portable Character Encoding. Otherwise, the
-   result is implementation-dependent. If there are no matching
-   font names, XListFonts returns NULL. The client should call
-   XFreeFontNames when finished with the result to free the
-   memory.
-
-   To free a font name array, use XFreeFontNames.
-
-   XFreeFontNames(char *list[]);
-
-   list
-
-   Specifies the array of strings you want to free.
-
-   The XFreeFontNames function frees the array and strings
-   returned by XListFonts or XListFontsWithInfo.
-
-   To obtain the names and information about available fonts, use
-   XListFontsWithInfo.
-
-   char **XListFontsWithInfo(Display *display, char *pattern, int
-   maxnames, int *count_return, XFontStruct **info_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   pattern
-
-   Specifies the null-terminated pattern string that can contain
-   wildcard characters.
-
-   maxnames
-
-   Specifies the maximum number of names to be returned.
-
-   count_return
-
-   Returns the actual number of matched font names.
-
-   info_return
-
-   Returns the font information.
-
-   The XListFontsWithInfo function returns a list of font names
-   that match the specified pattern and their associated font
-   information. The list of names is limited to size specified by
-   maxnames. The information returned for each font is identical
-   to what XLoadQueryFont would return except that the
-   per-character metrics are not returned. The pattern string can
-   contain any characters, but each asterisk (*) is a wildcard for
-   any number of characters, and each question mark (?) is a
-   wildcard for a single character. If the pattern string is not
-   in the Host Portable Character Encoding, the result is
-   implementation-dependent. Use of uppercase or lowercase does
-   not matter. Each returned string is null-terminated. If the
-   data returned by the server is in the Latin Portable Character
-   Encoding, then the returned strings are in the Host Portable
-   Character Encoding. Otherwise, the result is
-   implementation-dependent. If there are no matching font names,
-   XListFontsWithInfo returns NULL.
-
-   To free only the allocated name array, the client should call
-   XFreeFontNames. To free both the name array and the font
-   information array or to free just the font information array,
-   the client should call XFreeFontInfo.
-
-   To free font structures and font names, use XFreeFontInfo.
-
-   XFreeFontInfo(char **names, XFontStruct *free_info, int
-   actual_count);
-
-   names
-
-   Specifies the list of font names.
-
-   free_info
-
-   Specifies the font information.
-
-   actual_count
-
-   Specifies the actual number of font names.
-
-   The XFreeFontInfo function frees a font structure or an array
-   of font structures and optionally an array of font names. If
-   NULL is passed for names, no font names are freed. If a font
-   structure for an open font (returned by XLoadQueryFont) is
-   passed, the structure is freed, but the font is not closed; use
-   XUnloadFont to close the font.
-
-Computing Character String Sizes
-
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to compute the width,
-   the logical extents, and the server information about 8-bit and
-   2-byte text strings. The width is computed by adding the
-   character widths of all the characters. It does not matter if
-   the font is an 8-bit or 2-byte font. These functions return the
-   sum of the character metrics in pixels.
-
-   To determine the width of an 8-bit character string, use
-   XTextWidth.
-
-   int XTextWidth(XFontStruct *font_struct, char *string, int
-   count);
-
-   font_struct
-
-   Specifies the font used for the width computation.
-
-   string
-
-   Specifies the character string.
-
-   count
-
-   Specifies the character count in the specified string.
-
-   To determine the width of a 2-byte character string, use
-   XTextWidth16.
-
-   int XTextWidth16(XFontStruct *font_struct, XChar2b *string, int
-   count);
-
-   font_struct
-
-   Specifies the font used for the width computation.
-
-   string
-
-   Specifies the character string.
-
-   count
-
-   Specifies the character count in the specified string.
-
-Computing Logical Extents
-
-   To compute the bounding box of an 8-bit character string in a
-   given font, use XTextExtents.
-
-   XTextExtents(XFontStruct *font_struct, char *string, int
-   nchars, int *direction_return, int *font_ascent_return, int
-   *font_descent_return, XCharStruct *overall_return);
-
-   font_struct
-
-   Specifies the XFontStruct structure.
-
-   string
-
-   Specifies the character string.
-
-   nchars
-
-   Specifies the number of characters in the character string.
-
-   direction_return
-
-   Returns the value of the direction hint (FontLeftToRight or
-   FontRightToLeft).
-
-   font_ascent_return
-
-   Returns the font ascent.
-
-   font_descent_return
-
-   Returns the font descent.
-
-   overall_return
-
-   Returns the overall size in the specified XCharStruct
-   structure.
-
-   To compute the bounding box of a 2-byte character string in a
-   given font, use XTextExtents16.
-
-   XTextExtents16(XFontStruct *font_struct, XChar2b *string, int
-   nchars, int *direction_return, int *font_ascent_return, int
-   *font_descent_return, XCharStruct *overall_return);
-
-   font_struct
-
-   Specifies the XFontStruct structure.
-
-   string
-
-   Specifies the character string.
-
-   nchars
-
-   Specifies the number of characters in the character string.
-
-   direction_return
-
-   Returns the value of the direction hint (FontLeftToRight or
-   FontRightToLeft).
-
-   font_ascent_return
-
-   Returns the font ascent.
-
-   font_descent_return
-
-   Returns the font descent.
-
-   overall_return
-
-   Returns the overall size in the specified XCharStruct
-   structure.
-
-   The XTextExtents and XTextExtents16 functions perform the size
-   computation locally and, thereby, avoid the round-trip overhead
-   of XQueryTextExtents and XQueryTextExtents16. Both functions
-   return an XCharStruct structure, whose members are set to the
-   values as follows.
-
-   The ascent member is set to the maximum of the ascent metrics
-   of all characters in the string. The descent member is set to
-   the maximum of the descent metrics. The width member is set to
-   the sum of the character-width metrics of all characters in the
-   string. For each character in the string, let W be the sum of
-   the character-width metrics of all characters preceding it in
-   the string. Let L be the left-side-bearing metric of the
-   character plus W. Let R be the right-side-bearing metric of the
-   character plus W. The lbearing member is set to the minimum L
-   of all characters in the string. The rbearing member is set to
-   the maximum R.
-
-   For fonts defined with linear indexing rather than 2-byte
-   matrix indexing, each XChar2b structure is interpreted as a
-   16-bit number with byte1 as the most significant byte. If the
-   font has no defined default character, undefined characters in
-   the string are taken to have all zero metrics.
-
-Querying Character String Sizes
-
-   To query the server for the bounding box of an 8-bit character
-   string in a given font, use XQueryTextExtents.
-
-   XQueryTextExtents(Display *display, XID font_ID, char *string,
-   int nchars, int *direction_return, int *font_ascent_return, int
-   *font_descent_return, XCharStruct *overall_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   font_ID
-
-   Specifies either the font ID or the GContext ID that contains
-   the font.
-
-   string
-
-   Specifies the character string.
-
-   nchars
-
-   Specifies the number of characters in the character string.
-
-   direction_return
-
-   Returns the value of the direction hint (FontLeftToRight or
-   FontRightToLeft).
-
-   font_ascent_return
-
-   Returns the font ascent.
-
-   font_descent_return
-
-   Returns the font descent.
-
-   overall_return
-
-   Returns the overall size in the specified XCharStruct
-   structure.
-
-   To query the server for the bounding box of a 2-byte character
-   string in a given font, use XQueryTextExtents16.
-
-   XQueryTextExtents16(Display *display, XID font_ID, XChar2b
-   *string, int nchars, int *direction_return, int
-   *font_ascent_return, int *font_descent_return, XCharStruct
-   *overall_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   font_ID
-
-   Specifies either the font ID or the GContext ID that contains
-   the font.
-
-   string
-
-   Specifies the character string.
-
-   nchars
-
-   Specifies the number of characters in the character string.
-
-   direction_return
-
-   Returns the value of the direction hint (FontLeftToRight or
-   FontRightToLeft).
-
-   font_ascent_return
-
-   Returns the font ascent.
-
-   font_descent_return
-
-   Returns the font descent.
-
-   overall_return
-
-   Returns the overall size in the specified XCharStruct
-   structure.
-
-   The XQueryTextExtents and XQueryTextExtents16 functions return
-   the bounding box of the specified 8-bit and 16-bit character
-   string in the specified font or the font contained in the
-   specified GC. These functions query the X server and,
-   therefore, suffer the round-trip overhead that is avoided by
-   XTextExtents and XTextExtents16. Both functions return a
-   XCharStruct structure, whose members are set to the values as
-   follows.
-
-   The ascent member is set to the maximum of the ascent metrics
-   of all characters in the string. The descent member is set to
-   the maximum of the descent metrics. The width member is set to
-   the sum of the character-width metrics of all characters in the
-   string. For each character in the string, let W be the sum of
-   the character-width metrics of all characters preceding it in
-   the string. Let L be the left-side-bearing metric of the
-   character plus W. Let R be the right-side-bearing metric of the
-   character plus W. The lbearing member is set to the minimum L
-   of all characters in the string. The rbearing member is set to
-   the maximum R.
-
-   For fonts defined with linear indexing rather than 2-byte
-   matrix indexing, each XChar2b structure is interpreted as a
-   16-bit number with byte1 as the most significant byte. If the
-   font has no defined default character, undefined characters in
-   the string are taken to have all zero metrics.
-
-   Characters with all zero metrics are ignored. If the font has
-   no defined default_char, the undefined characters in the string
-   are also ignored.
-
-   XQueryTextExtents and XQueryTextExtents16 can generate BadFont
-   and BadGC errors.
-
-Drawing Text
-
-   This section discusses how to draw:
-     * Complex text
-     * Text characters
-     * Image text characters
-
-   The fundamental text functions XDrawText and XDrawText16 use
-   the following structures:
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     char *chars;     /* pointer to string */
-     int nchars;      /* number of characters */
-     int delta;       /* delta between strings */
-     Font font;       /* Font to print it in, None don't change */
-} XTextItem;
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     XChar2b *chars;     /* pointer to two-byte characters */
-     int nchars;         /* number of characters */
-     int delta;         /* delta between strings */
-     Font font;         /* font to print it in, None don't change */
-} XTextItem16;
-
-   If the font member is not None, the font is changed before
-   printing and also is stored in the GC. If an error was
-   generated during text drawing, the previous items may have been
-   drawn. The baseline of the characters are drawn starting at the
-   x and y coordinates that you pass in the text drawing
-   functions.
-
-   For example, consider the background rectangle drawn by
-   XDrawImageString. If you want the upper-left corner of the
-   background rectangle to be at pixel coordinate (x,y), pass the
-   (x,y + ascent) as the baseline origin coordinates to the text
-   functions. The ascent is the font ascent, as given in the
-   XFontStruct structure. If you want the lower-left corner of the
-   background rectangle to be at pixel coordinate (x,y), pass the
-   (x,y - descent + 1) as the baseline origin coordinates to the
-   text functions. The descent is the font descent, as given in
-   the XFontStruct structure.
-
-Drawing Complex Text
-
-   To draw 8-bit characters in a given drawable, use XDrawText.
-
-   XDrawText(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, int x, int y,
-   XTextItem *items, int nitems);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   d
-
-   Specifies the drawable.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   x
-
-   y
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the
-   origin of the specified drawable and define the origin of the
-   first character.
-
-   items
-
-   Specifies an array of text items.
-
-   nitems
-
-   Specifies the number of text items in the array.
-
-   To draw 2-byte characters in a given drawable, use XDrawText16.
-
-   XDrawText16(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, int x, int y,
-   XTextItem16 *items, int nitems);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   d
-
-   Specifies the drawable.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   x
-
-   y
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the
-   origin of the specified drawable and define the origin of the
-   first character.
-
-   items
-
-   Specifies an array of text items.
-
-   nitems
-
-   Specifies the number of text items in the array.
-
-   The XDrawText16 function is similar to XDrawText except that it
-   uses 2-byte or 16-bit characters. Both functions allow complex
-   spacing and font shifts between counted strings.
-
-   Each text item is processed in turn. A font member other than
-   None in an item causes the font to be stored in the GC and used
-   for subsequent text. A text element delta specifies an
-   additional change in the position along the x axis before the
-   string is drawn. The delta is always added to the character
-   origin and is not dependent on any characteristics of the font.
-   Each character image, as defined by the font in the GC, is
-   treated as an additional mask for a fill operation on the
-   drawable. The drawable is modified only where the font
-   character has a bit set to 1. If a text item generates a
-   BadFont error, the previous text items may have been drawn.
-
-   For fonts defined with linear indexing rather than 2-byte
-   matrix indexing, each XChar2b structure is interpreted as a
-   16-bit number with byte1 as the most significant byte.
-
-   Both functions use these GC components: function, plane-mask,
-   fill-style, font, subwindow-mode, clip-x-origin, clip-y-origin,
-   and clip-mask. They also use these GC mode-dependent
-   components: foreground, background, tile, stipple,
-   tile-stipple-x-origin, and tile-stipple-y-origin.
-
-   XDrawText and XDrawText16 can generate BadDrawable, BadFont,
-   BadGC, and BadMatch errors.
-
-Drawing Text Characters
-
-   To draw 8-bit characters in a given drawable, use XDrawString.
-
-   XDrawString(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, int x, int y,
-   char *string, int length);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   d
-
-   Specifies the drawable.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   x
-
-   y
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the
-   origin of the specified drawable and define the origin of the
-   first character.
-
-   string
-
-   Specifies the character string.
-
-   length
-
-   Specifies the number of characters in the string argument.
-
-   To draw 2-byte characters in a given drawable, use
-   XDrawString16.
-
-   XDrawString16(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, int x, int
-   y, XChar2b *string, int length);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   d
-
-   Specifies the drawable.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   x
-
-   y
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the
-   origin of the specified drawable and define the origin of the
-   first character.
-
-   string
-
-   Specifies the character string.
-
-   length
-
-   Specifies the number of characters in the string argument.
-
-   Each character image, as defined by the font in the GC, is
-   treated as an additional mask for a fill operation on the
-   drawable. The drawable is modified only where the font
-   character has a bit set to 1. For fonts defined with 2-byte
-   matrix indexing and used with XDrawString16, each byte is used
-   as a byte2 with a byte1 of zero.
-
-   Both functions use these GC components: function, plane-mask,
-   fill-style, font, subwindow-mode, clip-x-origin, clip-y-origin,
-   and clip-mask. They also use these GC mode-dependent
-   components: foreground, background, tile, stipple,
-   tile-stipple-x-origin, and tile-stipple-y-origin.
-
-   XDrawString and XDrawString16 can generate BadDrawable, BadGC,
-   and BadMatch errors.
-
-Drawing Image Text Characters
-
-   Some applications, in particular terminal emulators, need to
-   print image text in which both the foreground and background
-   bits of each character are painted. This prevents annoying
-   flicker on many displays.
-
-   To draw 8-bit image text characters in a given drawable, use
-   XDrawImageString.
-
-   XDrawImageString(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, int x,
-   int y, char *string, int length);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   d
-
-   Specifies the drawable.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   x
-
-   y
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the
-   origin of the specified drawable and define the origin of the
-   first character.
-
-   string
-
-   Specifies the character string.
-
-   length
-
-   Specifies the number of characters in the string argument.
-
-   To draw 2-byte image text characters in a given drawable, use
-   XDrawImageString16.
-
-   XDrawImageString16(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, int x,
-   int y, XChar2b *string, int length);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   d
-
-   Specifies the drawable.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   x
-
-   y
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the
-   origin of the specified drawable and define the origin of the
-   first character.
-
-   string
-
-   Specifies the character string.
-
-   length
-
-   Specifies the number of characters in the string argument.
-
-   The XDrawImageString16 function is similar to XDrawImageString
-   except that it uses 2-byte or 16-bit characters. Both functions
-   also use both the foreground and background pixels of the GC in
-   the destination.
-
-   The effect is first to fill a destination rectangle with the
-   background pixel defined in the GC and then to paint the text
-   with the foreground pixel. The upper-left corner of the filled
-   rectangle is at:
-
-[x, y - font-ascent]
-
-   The width is:
-
-overall-width
-
-   The height is:
-
-font-ascent + font-descent
-
-   The overall-width, font-ascent, and font-descent are as would
-   be returned by XQueryTextExtents using gc and string. The
-   function and fill-style defined in the GC are ignored for these
-   functions. The effective function is GXcopy, and the effective
-   fill-style is FillSolid.
-
-   For fonts defined with 2-byte matrix indexing and used with
-   XDrawImageString, each byte is used as a byte2 with a byte1 of
-   zero.
-
-   Both functions use these GC components: plane-mask, foreground,
-   background, font, subwindow-mode, clip-x-origin, clip-y-origin,
-   and clip-mask.
-
-   XDrawImageString and XDrawImageString16 can generate
-   BadDrawable, BadGC, and BadMatch errors.
-
-Transferring Images between Client and Server
-
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to transfer images
-   between a client and the server. Because the server may require
-   diverse data formats, Xlib provides an image object that fully
-   describes the data in memory and that provides for basic
-   operations on that data. You should reference the data through
-   the image object rather than referencing the data directly.
-   However, some implementations of the Xlib library may
-   efficiently deal with frequently used data formats by replacing
-   functions in the procedure vector with special case functions.
-   Supported operations include destroying the image, getting a
-   pixel, storing a pixel, extracting a subimage of an image, and
-   adding a constant to an image (see section 16.8).
-
-   All the image manipulation functions discussed in this section
-   make use of the XImage structure, which describes an image as
-   it exists in the client's memory.
-
-
-
-typedef struct _XImage {
-     int width, height;         /* size of image */
-     int xoffset;               /* number of pixels offset in X directio
-n */
-     int format;                /* XYBitmap, XYPixmap, ZPixmap */
-     char *data;                /* pointer to image data */
-     int byte_order;            /* data byte order, LSBFirst, MSBFirst *
-/
-     int bitmap_unit;           /* quant. of scanline 8, 16, 32 */
-     int bitmap_bit_order;      /* LSBFirst, MSBFirst */
-     int bitmap_pad;            /* 8, 16, 32 either XY or ZPixmap */
-     int depth;                 /* depth of image */
-     int bytes_per_line;        /* accelerator to next scanline */
-     int bits_per_pixel;        /* bits per pixel (ZPixmap) */
-     unsigned long red_mask;    /* bits in z arrangement */
-     unsigned long green_mask;
-     unsigned long blue_mask;
-     XPointer obdata;           /* hook for the object routines to hang
-on */
-     struct funcs {             /* image manipulation routines */
-          struct _XImage *(*create_image)();
-          int             (*destroy_image)();
-          unsigned long   (*get_pixel)();
-          int             (*put_pixel)();
-          struct _XImage  *(*sub_image)();
-          int            (*add_pixel)();
-     } f;
-} XImage;
-
-   To initialize the image manipulation routines of an image
-   structure, use XInitImage.
-
-   Status XInitImage(XImage *image);
-
-   ximage
-
-   Specifies the image.
-
-   The XInitImage function initializes the internal image
-   manipulation routines of an image structure, based on the
-   values of the various structure members. All fields other than
-   the manipulation routines must already be initialized. If the
-   bytes_per_line member is zero, XInitImage will assume the image
-   data is contiguous in memory and set the bytes_per_line member
-   to an appropriate value based on the other members; otherwise,
-   the value of bytes_per_line is not changed. All of the
-   manipulation routines are initialized to functions that other
-   Xlib image manipulation functions need to operate on the type
-   of image specified by the rest of the structure.
-
-   This function must be called for any image constructed by the
-   client before passing it to any other Xlib function. Image
-   structures created or returned by Xlib do not need to be
-   initialized in this fashion.
-
-   This function returns a nonzero status if initialization of the
-   structure is successful. It returns zero if it detected some
-   error or inconsistency in the structure, in which case the
-   image is not changed.
-
-   To combine an image with a rectangle of a drawable on the
-   display, use XPutImage.
-
-   XPutImage(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, XImage *image,
-   int src_x, int src_y, int dest_x, int dest_y, unsigned int
-   width, unsigned int height);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   d
-
-   Specifies the drawable.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   image
-
-   Specifies the image you want combined with the rectangle.
-
-   src_x
-
-   Specifies the offset in X from the left edge of the image
-   defined by the XImage structure.
-
-   src_y
-
-   Specifies the offset in Y from the top edge of the image
-   defined by the XImage structure.
-
-   dest_x
-
-   dest_y
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the
-   origin of the drawable and are the coordinates of the subimage.
-
-   width
-
-   height
-
-   Specify the width and height of the subimage, which define the
-   dimensions of the rectangle.
-
-   The XPutImage function combines an image with a rectangle of
-   the specified drawable. The section of the image defined by the
-   src_x, src_y, width, and height arguments is drawn on the
-   specified part of the drawable. If XYBitmap format is used, the
-   depth of the image must be one, or a BadMatch error results.
-   The foreground pixel in the GC defines the source for the one
-   bits in the image, and the background pixel defines the source
-   for the zero bits. For XYPixmap and ZPixmap, the depth of the
-   image must match the depth of the drawable, or a BadMatch error
-   results.
-
-   If the characteristics of the image (for example, byte_order
-   and bitmap_unit) differ from what the server requires,
-   XPutImage automatically makes the appropriate conversions.
-
-   This function uses these GC components: function, plane-mask,
-   subwindow-mode, clip-x-origin, clip-y-origin, and clip-mask. It
-   also uses these GC mode-dependent components: foreground and
-   background.
-
-   XPutImage can generate BadDrawable, BadGC, BadMatch, and
-   BadValue errors.
-
-   To return the contents of a rectangle in a given drawable on
-   the display, use XGetImage. This function specifically supports
-   rudimentary screen dumps.
-
-   XImage *XGetImage(Display *display, Drawable d, int x, int y,
-   unsigned int width, unsigned int height, unsigned long
-   plane_mask, int format);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   d
-
-   Specifies the drawable.
-
-   x
-
-   y
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the
-   origin of the drawable and define the upper-left corner of the
-   rectangle.
-
-   width
-
-   height
-
-   Specify the width and height of the subimage, which define the
-   dimensions of the rectangle.
-
-   plane_mask
-
-   Specifies the plane mask.
-
-   format
-
-   Specifies the format for the image. You can pass XYPixmap or
-   ZPixmap.
-
-   The XGetImage function returns a pointer to an XImage
-   structure. This structure provides you with the contents of the
-   specified rectangle of the drawable in the format you specify.
-   If the format argument is XYPixmap, the image contains only the
-   bit planes you passed to the plane_mask argument. If the
-   plane_mask argument only requests a subset of the planes of the
-   display, the depth of the returned image will be the number of
-   planes requested. If the format argument is ZPixmap, XGetImage
-   returns as zero the bits in all planes not specified in the
-   plane_mask argument. The function performs no range checking on
-   the values in plane_mask and ignores extraneous bits.
-
-   XGetImage returns the depth of the image to the depth member of
-   the XImage structure. The depth of the image is as specified
-   when the drawable was created, except when getting a subset of
-   the planes in XYPixmap format, when the depth is given by the
-   number of bits set to 1 in plane_mask.
-
-   If the drawable is a pixmap, the given rectangle must be wholly
-   contained within the pixmap, or a BadMatch error results. If
-   the drawable is a window, the window must be viewable, and it
-   must be the case that if there were no inferiors or overlapping
-   windows, the specified rectangle of the window would be fully
-   visible on the screen and wholly contained within the outside
-   edges of the window, or a BadMatch error results. Note that the
-   borders of the window can be included and read with this
-   request. If the window has backing-store, the backing-store
-   contents are returned for regions of the window that are
-   obscured by noninferior windows. If the window does not have
-   backing-store, the returned contents of such obscured regions
-   are undefined. The returned contents of visible regions of
-   inferiors of a different depth than the specified window's
-   depth are also undefined. The pointer cursor image is not
-   included in the returned contents. If a problem occurs,
-   XGetImage returns NULL.
-
-   XGetImage can generate BadDrawable, BadMatch, and BadValue
-   errors.
-
-   To copy the contents of a rectangle on the display to a
-   location within a preexisting image structure, use
-   XGetSubImage.
-
-   XImage *XGetSubImage(Display *display, Drawable d, int x, int
-   y, unsigned int width, unsigned int height, unsigned long
-   plane_mask, int format, XImage *dest_image, int dest_x, int
-   dest_y);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   d
-
-   Specifies the drawable.
-
-   x
-
-   y
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the
-   origin of the drawable and define the upper-left corner of the
-   rectangle.
-
-   width
-
-   height
-
-   Specify the width and height of the subimage, which define the
-   dimensions of the rectangle.
-
-   plane_mask
-
-   Specifies the plane mask.
-
-   format
-
-   Specifies the format for the image. You can pass XYPixmap or
-   ZPixmap.
-
-   dest_image
-
-   Specifies the destination image.
-
-   dest_x
-
-   dest_y
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the
-   origin of the destination rectangle, specify its upper-left
-   corner, and determine where the subimage is placed in the
-   destination image.
-
-   The XGetSubImage function updates dest_image with the specified
-   subimage in the same manner as XGetImage. If the format
-   argument is XYPixmap, the image contains only the bit planes
-   you passed to the plane_mask argument. If the format argument
-   is ZPixmap, XGetSubImage returns as zero the bits in all planes
-   not specified in the plane_mask argument. The function performs
-   no range checking on the values in plane_mask and ignores
-   extraneous bits. As a convenience, XGetSubImage returns a
-   pointer to the same XImage structure specified by dest_image.
-
-   The depth of the destination XImage structure must be the same
-   as that of the drawable. If the specified subimage does not fit
-   at the specified location on the destination image, the right
-   and bottom edges are clipped. If the drawable is a pixmap, the
-   given rectangle must be wholly contained within the pixmap, or
-   a BadMatch error results. If the drawable is a window, the
-   window must be viewable, and it must be the case that if there
-   were no inferiors or overlapping windows, the specified
-   rectangle of the window would be fully visible on the screen
-   and wholly contained within the outside edges of the window, or
-   a BadMatch error results. If the window has backing-store, then
-   the backing-store contents are returned for regions of the
-   window that are obscured by noninferior windows. If the window
-   does not have backing-store, the returned contents of such
-   obscured regions are undefined. The returned contents of
-   visible regions of inferiors of a different depth than the
-   specified window's depth are also undefined. If a problem
-   occurs, XGetSubImage returns NULL.
-
-   XGetSubImage can generate BadDrawable, BadGC, BadMatch, and
-   BadValue errors.
-
-Chapter 9. Window and Session Manager Functions
-
-   Table of Contents
-
-   Changing the Parent of a Window
-   Controlling the Lifetime of a Window
-   Managing Installed Colormaps
-   Setting and Retrieving the Font Search Path
-   Grabbing the Server
-   Killing Clients
-   Controlling the Screen Saver
-   Controlling Host Access
-
-        Adding, Getting, or Removing Hosts
-        Changing, Enabling, or Disabling Access Control
-
-   Although it is difficult to categorize functions as exclusively
-   for an application, a window manager, or a session manager, the
-   functions in this chapter are most often used by window
-   managers and session managers. It is not expected that these
-   functions will be used by most application programs. Xlib
-   provides management functions to:
-     * Change the parent of a window
-     * Control the lifetime of a window
-     * Manage installed colormaps
-     * Set and retrieve the font search path
-     * Grab the server
-     * Kill a client
-     * Control the screen saver
-     * Control host access
-
-Changing the Parent of a Window
-
-   To change a window's parent to another window on the same
-   screen, use XReparentWindow. There is no way to move a window
-   between screens.
-
-   XReparentWindow(Display *display, Window w, Window parent, int
-   x, int y);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   parent
-
-   Specifies the parent window.
-
-   x
-
-   y
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates of the position in the new
-   parent window.
-
-   If the specified window is mapped, XReparentWindow
-   automatically performs an UnmapWindow request on it, removes it
-   from its current position in the hierarchy, and inserts it as
-   the child of the specified parent. The window is placed in the
-   stacking order on top with respect to sibling windows.
-
-   After reparenting the specified window, XReparentWindow causes
-   the X server to generate a ReparentNotify event. The
-   override_redirect member returned in this event is set to the
-   window's corresponding attribute. Window manager clients
-   usually should ignore this window if this member is set to
-   True. Finally, if the specified window was originally mapped,
-   the X server automatically performs a MapWindow request on it.
-
-   The X server performs normal exposure processing on formerly
-   obscured windows. The X server might not generate Expose events
-   for regions from the initial UnmapWindow request that are
-   immediately obscured by the final MapWindow request. A BadMatch
-   error results if:
-     * The new parent window is not on the same screen as the old
-       parent window.
-     * The new parent window is the specified window or an
-       inferior of the specified window.
-     * The new parent is InputOnly, and the window is not.
-     * The specified window has a ParentRelative background, and
-       the new parent window is not the same depth as the
-       specified window.
-
-   XReparentWindow can generate BadMatch and BadWindow errors.
-
-Controlling the Lifetime of a Window
-
-   The save-set of a client is a list of other clients' windows
-   that, if they are inferiors of one of the client's windows at
-   connection close, should not be destroyed and should be
-   remapped if they are unmapped. For further information about
-   close-connection processing, see section 2.6. To allow an
-   application's window to survive when a window manager that has
-   reparented a window fails, Xlib provides the save-set functions
-   that you can use to control the longevity of subwindows that
-   are normally destroyed when the parent is destroyed. For
-   example, a window manager that wants to add decoration to a
-   window by adding a frame might reparent an application's
-   window. When the frame is destroyed, the application's window
-   should not be destroyed but be returned to its previous place
-   in the window hierarchy.
-
-   The X server automatically removes windows from the save-set
-   when they are destroyed.
-
-   To add or remove a window from the client's save-set, use
-   XChangeSaveSet.
-
-   XChangeSaveSet(Display *display, Window w, int change_mode);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window that you want to add to or delete from the
-   client's save-set.
-
-   change_mode
-
-   Specifies the mode. You can pass SetModeInsert or
-   SetModeDelete.
-
-   Depending on the specified mode, XChangeSaveSet either inserts
-   or deletes the specified window from the client's save-set. The
-   specified window must have been created by some other client,
-   or a BadMatch error results.
-
-   XChangeSaveSet can generate BadMatch, BadValue, and BadWindow
-   errors.
-
-   To add a window to the client's save-set, use XAddToSaveSet.
-
-   XAddToSaveSet(Display *display, Window w);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window that you want to add to the client's
-   save-set.
-
-   The XAddToSaveSet function adds the specified window to the
-   client's save-set. The specified window must have been created
-   by some other client, or a BadMatch error results.
-
-   XAddToSaveSet can generate BadMatch and BadWindow errors.
-
-   To remove a window from the client's save-set, use
-   XRemoveFromSaveSet.
-
-   XRemoveFromSaveSet(Display *display, Window w);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window that you want to delete from the client's
-   save-set.
-
-   The XRemoveFromSaveSet function removes the specified window
-   from the client's save-set. The specified window must have been
-   created by some other client, or a BadMatch error results.
-
-   XRemoveFromSaveSet can generate BadMatch and BadWindow errors.
-
-Managing Installed Colormaps
-
-   The X server maintains a list of installed colormaps. Windows
-   using these colormaps are guaranteed to display with correct
-   colors; windows using other colormaps may or may not display
-   with correct colors. Xlib provides functions that you can use
-   to install a colormap, uninstall a colormap, and obtain a list
-   of installed colormaps.
-
-   At any time, there is a subset of the installed maps that is
-   viewed as an ordered list and is called the required list. The
-   length of the required list is at most M, where M is the
-   minimum number of installed colormaps specified for the screen
-   in the connection setup. The required list is maintained as
-   follows. When a colormap is specified to XInstallColormap, it
-   is added to the head of the list; the list is truncated at the
-   tail, if necessary, to keep its length to at most M. When a
-   colormap is specified to XUninstallColormap and it is in the
-   required list, it is removed from the list. A colormap is not
-   added to the required list when it is implicitly installed by
-   the X server, and the X server cannot implicitly uninstall a
-   colormap that is in the required list.
-
-   To install a colormap, use XInstallColormap.
-
-   XInstallColormap(Display *display, Colormap colormap);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   colormap
-
-   Specifies the colormap.
-
-   The XInstallColormap function installs the specified colormap
-   for its associated screen. All windows associated with this
-   colormap immediately display with true colors. You associated
-   the windows with this colormap when you created them by calling
-   XCreateWindow, XCreateSimpleWindow, XChangeWindowAttributes, or
-   XSetWindowColormap.
-
-   If the specified colormap is not already an installed colormap,
-   the X server generates a ColormapNotify event on each window
-   that has that colormap. In addition, for every other colormap
-   that is installed as a result of a call to XInstallColormap,
-   the X server generates a ColormapNotify event on each window
-   that has that colormap.
-
-   XInstallColormap can generate a BadColor error.
-
-   To uninstall a colormap, use XUninstallColormap.
-
-   XUninstallColormap(Display *display, Colormap colormap);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   colormap
-
-   Specifies the colormap.
-
-   The XUninstallColormap function removes the specified colormap
-   from the required list for its screen. As a result, the
-   specified colormap might be uninstalled, and the X server might
-   implicitly install or uninstall additional colormaps. Which
-   colormaps get installed or uninstalled is server dependent
-   except that the required list must remain installed.
-
-   If the specified colormap becomes uninstalled, the X server
-   generates a ColormapNotify event on each window that has that
-   colormap. In addition, for every other colormap that is
-   installed or uninstalled as a result of a call to
-   XUninstallColormap, the X server generates a ColormapNotify
-   event on each window that has that colormap.
-
-   XUninstallColormap can generate a BadColor error.
-
-   To obtain a list of the currently installed colormaps for a
-   given screen, use XListInstalledColormaps.
-
-   Colormap *XListInstalledColormaps(Display *display, Window w,
-   int *num_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window that determines the screen.
-
-   num_return
-
-   Returns the number of currently installed colormaps.
-
-   The XListInstalledColormaps function returns a list of the
-   currently installed colormaps for the screen of the specified
-   window. The order of the colormaps in the list is not
-   significant and is no explicit indication of the required list.
-   When the allocated list is no longer needed, free it by using
-   XFree.
-
-   XListInstalledColormaps can generate a BadWindow error.
-
-Setting and Retrieving the Font Search Path
-
-   The set of fonts available from a server depends on a font
-   search path. Xlib provides functions to set and retrieve the
-   search path for a server.
-
-   To set the font search path, use XSetFontPath.
-
-   XSetFontPath(Display *display, char **directories, int ndirs);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   directories
-
-   Specifies the directory path used to look for a font. Setting
-   the path to the empty list restores the default path defined
-   for the X server.
-
-   ndirs
-
-   Specifies the number of directories in the path.
-
-   The XSetFontPath function defines the directory search path for
-   font lookup. There is only one search path per X server, not
-   one per client. The encoding and interpretation of the strings
-   are implementation-dependent, but typically they specify
-   directories or font servers to be searched in the order listed.
-   An X server is permitted to cache font information internally;
-   for example, it might cache an entire font from a file and not
-   check on subsequent opens of that font to see if the underlying
-   font file has changed. However, when the font path is changed,
-   the X server is guaranteed to flush all cached information
-   about fonts for which there currently are no explicit resource
-   IDs allocated. The meaning of an error from this request is
-   implementation-dependent.
-
-   XSetFontPath can generate a BadValue error.
-
-   To get the current font search path, use XGetFontPath.
-
-   char **XGetFontPath(Display *display, int *npaths_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   npaths_return
-
-   Returns the number of strings in the font path array.
-
-   The XGetFontPath function allocates and returns an array of
-   strings containing the search path. The contents of these
-   strings are implementation-dependent and are not intended to be
-   interpreted by client applications. When it is no longer
-   needed, the data in the font path should be freed by using
-   XFreeFontPath.
-
-   To free data returned by XGetFontPath, use XFreeFontPath.
-
-   XFreeFontPath(char **list);
-
-   list
-
-   Specifies the array of strings you want to free.
-
-   The XFreeFontPath function frees the data allocated by
-   XGetFontPath.
-
-Grabbing the Server
-
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to grab and ungrab the
-   server. These functions can be used to control processing of
-   output on other connections by the window system server. While
-   the server is grabbed, no processing of requests or close downs
-   on any other connection will occur. A client closing its
-   connection automatically ungrabs the server. Although grabbing
-   the server is highly discouraged, it is sometimes necessary.
-
-   To grab the server, use XGrabServer.
-
-   XGrabServer(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   The XGrabServer function disables processing of requests and
-   close downs on all other connections than the one this request
-   arrived on. You should not grab the X server any more than is
-   absolutely necessary.
-
-   To ungrab the server, use XUngrabServer.
-
-   XUngrabServer(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   The XUngrabServer function restarts processing of requests and
-   close downs on other connections. You should avoid grabbing the
-   X server as much as possible.
-
-Killing Clients
-
-   Xlib provides a function to cause the connection to a client to
-   be closed and its resources to be destroyed. To destroy a
-   client, use XKillClient.
-
-   XKillClient(Display *display, XID resource);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   resource
-
-   Specifies any resource associated with the client that you want
-   to destroy or AllTemporary.
-
-   The XKillClient function forces a close down of the client that
-   created the resource if a valid resource is specified. If the
-   client has already terminated in either RetainPermanent or
-   RetainTemporary mode, all of the client's resources are
-   destroyed. If AllTemporary is specified, the resources of all
-   clients that have terminated in RetainTemporary are destroyed
-   (see section 2.5). This permits implementation of window
-   manager facilities that aid debugging. A client can set its
-   close-down mode to RetainTemporary. If the client then crashes,
-   its windows would not be destroyed. The programmer can then
-   inspect the application's window tree and use the window
-   manager to destroy the zombie windows.
-
-   XKillClient can generate a BadValue error.
-
-Controlling the Screen Saver
-
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to set or reset the
-   mode of the screen saver, to force or activate the screen
-   saver, or to obtain the current screen saver values.
-
-   To set the screen saver mode, use XSetScreenSaver.
-
-   XSetScreenSaver(Display *display, int timeout, int interval,
-   int prefer_blanking, int allow_exposures);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   timeout
-
-   Specifies the timeout, in seconds, until the screen saver turns
-   on.
-
-   interval
-
-   Specifies the interval, in seconds, between screen saver
-   alterations.
-
-   prefer_blanking
-
-   Specifies how to enable screen blanking. You can pass
-   DontPreferBlanking, PreferBlanking, or DefaultBlanking.
-
-   allow_exposures
-
-   Specifies the screen save control values. You can pass
-   DontAllowExposures, AllowExposures, or DefaultExposures.
-
-   Timeout and interval are specified in seconds. A timeout of 0
-   disables the screen saver (but an activated screen saver is not
-   deactivated), and a timeout of -1 restores the default. Other
-   negative values generate a BadValue error. If the timeout value
-   is nonzero, XSetScreenSaver enables the screen saver. An
-   interval of 0 disables the random-pattern motion. If no input
-   from devices (keyboard, mouse, and so on) is generated for the
-   specified number of timeout seconds once the screen saver is
-   enabled, the screen saver is activated.
-
-   For each screen, if blanking is preferred and the hardware
-   supports video blanking, the screen simply goes blank.
-   Otherwise, if either exposures are allowed or the screen can be
-   regenerated without sending Expose events to clients, the
-   screen is tiled with the root window background tile randomly
-   re-origined each interval seconds. Otherwise, the screens'
-   state do not change, and the screen saver is not activated. The
-   screen saver is deactivated, and all screen states are restored
-   at the next keyboard or pointer input or at the next call to
-   XForceScreenSaver with mode ScreenSaverReset.
-
-   If the server-dependent screen saver method supports periodic
-   change, the interval argument serves as a hint about how long
-   the change period should be, and zero hints that no periodic
-   change should be made. Examples of ways to change the screen
-   include scrambling the colormap periodically, moving an icon
-   image around the screen periodically, or tiling the screen with
-   the root window background tile, randomly re-origined
-   periodically.
-
-   XSetScreenSaver can generate a BadValue error.
-
-   To force the screen saver on or off, use XForceScreenSaver.
-
-   XForceScreenSaver(Display *display, int mode);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   mode
-
-   Specifies the mode that is to be applied. You can pass
-   ScreenSaverActive or ScreenSaverReset.
-
-   If the specified mode is ScreenSaverActive and the screen saver
-   currently is deactivated, XForceScreenSaver activates the
-   screen saver even if the screen saver had been disabled with a
-   timeout of zero. If the specified mode is ScreenSaverReset and
-   the screen saver currently is enabled, XForceScreenSaver
-   deactivates the screen saver if it was activated, and the
-   activation timer is reset to its initial state (as if device
-   input had been received).
-
-   XForceScreenSaver can generate a BadValue error.
-
-   To activate the screen saver, use XActivateScreenSaver.
-
-   XActivateScreenSaver(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   To reset the screen saver, use XResetScreenSaver.
-
-   XResetScreenSaver(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   To get the current screen saver values, use XGetScreenSaver.
-
-   XGetScreenSaver(Display *display, int *timeout_return, int
-   *interval_return, int *prefer_blanking_return, int
-   *allow_exposures_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   timeout_return
-
-   Returns the timeout, in seconds, until the screen saver turns
-   on.
-
-   interval_return
-
-   Returns the interval between screen saver invocations.
-
-   prefer_blanking_return
-
-   Returns the current screen blanking preference
-   (DontPreferBlanking, PreferBlanking, or DefaultBlanking).
-
-   allow_exposures_return
-
-   Returns the current screen save control value
-   (DontAllowExposures, AllowExposures, or DefaultExposures).
-
-Controlling Host Access
-
-   This section discusses how to:
-     * Add, get, or remove hosts from the access control list
-     * Change, enable, or disable access
-
-   X does not provide any protection on a per-window basis. If you
-   find out the resource ID of a resource, you can manipulate it.
-   To provide some minimal level of protection, however,
-   connections are permitted only from machines you trust. This is
-   adequate on single-user workstations but obviously breaks down
-   on timesharing machines. Although provisions exist in the X
-   protocol for proper connection authentication, the lack of a
-   standard authentication server leaves host-level access control
-   as the only common mechanism.
-
-   The initial set of hosts allowed to open connections typically
-   consists of:
-     * The host the window system is running on.
-     * On POSIX-conformant systems, each host listed in the
-       /etc/X?.hosts file. The ? indicates the number of the
-       display. This file should consist of host names separated
-       by newlines. DECnet nodes must terminate in :: to
-       distinguish them from Internet hosts.
-
-   If a host is not in the access control list when the access
-   control mechanism is enabled and if the host attempts to
-   establish a connection, the server refuses the connection. To
-   change the access list, the client must reside on the same host
-   as the server and/or must have been granted permission in the
-   initial authorization at connection setup.
-
-   Servers also can implement other access control policies in
-   addition to or in place of this host access facility. For
-   further information about other access control implementations,
-   see X Window System Protocol.
-
-Adding, Getting, or Removing Hosts
-
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to add, get, or remove
-   hosts from the access control list. All the host access control
-   functions use the XHostAddress structure, which contains:
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     int family;        /* for example FamilyInternet */
-     int length;        /* length of address, in bytes */
-     char *address;     /* pointer to where to find the address */
-} XHostAddress;
-
-   The family member specifies which protocol address family to
-   use (for example, TCP/IP or DECnet) and can be FamilyInternet,
-   FamilyInternet6, FamilyServerInterpreted, FamilyDECnet, or
-   FamilyChaos. The length member specifies the length of the
-   address in bytes. The address member specifies a pointer to the
-   address.
-
-   For TCP/IP, the address should be in network byte order. For IP
-   version 4 addresses, the family should be FamilyInternet and
-   the length should be 4 bytes. For IP version 6 addresses, the
-   family should be FamilyInternet6 and the length should be 16
-   bytes.
-
-   For the DECnet family, the server performs no automatic
-   swapping on the address bytes. A Phase IV address is 2 bytes
-   long. The first byte contains the least significant 8 bits of
-   the node number. The second byte contains the most significant
-   2 bits of the node number in the least significant 2 bits of
-   the byte and the area in the most significant 6 bits of the
-   byte.
-
-   For the ServerInterpreted family, the length is ignored and the
-   address member is a pointer to a XServerInterpretedAddress
-   structure, which contains:
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     int typelength;     /* length of type string, in bytes */
-     int valuelength;    /* length of value string, in bytes */
-     char *type;         /* pointer to where to find the type string */
-     char *value;        /* pointer to where to find the address */
-} XServerInterpretedAddress;
-
-   The type and value members point to strings representing the
-   type and value of the server interpreted entry. These strings
-   may not be NULL-terminated so care should be used when
-   accessing them. The typelength and valuelength members specify
-   the length in byte of the type and value strings.
-
-   To add a single host, use XAddHost.
-
-   XAddHost(Display *display, XHostAddress *host);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   host
-
-   Specifies the host that is to be added.
-
-   The XAddHost function adds the specified host to the access
-   control list for that display. The server must be on the same
-   host as the client issuing the command, or a BadAccess error
-   results.
-
-   XAddHost can generate BadAccess and BadValue errors.
-
-   To add multiple hosts at one time, use XAddHosts.
-
-   XAddHosts(Display *display, XHostAddress *hosts, int
-   num_hosts);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   hosts
-
-   Specifies each host that is to be added.
-
-   num_hosts
-
-   Specifies the number of hosts.
-
-   The XAddHosts function adds each specified host to the access
-   control list for that display. The server must be on the same
-   host as the client issuing the command, or a BadAccess error
-   results.
-
-   XAddHosts can generate BadAccess and BadValue errors.
-
-   To obtain a host list, use XListHosts.
-
-   XHostAddress *XListHosts(Display *display, int *nhosts_return,
-   Bool *state_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   nhosts_return
-
-   Returns the number of hosts currently in the access control
-   list.
-
-   state_return
-
-   Returns the state of the access control.
-
-   The XListHosts function returns the current access control list
-   as well as whether the use of the list at connection setup was
-   enabled or disabled. XListHosts allows a program to find out
-   what machines can make connections. It also returns a pointer
-   to a list of host structures that were allocated by the
-   function. When no longer needed, this memory should be freed by
-   calling XFree.
-
-   To remove a single host, use XRemoveHost.
-
-   XRemoveHost(Display *display, XHostAddress *host);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   host
-
-   Specifies the host that is to be removed.
-
-   The XRemoveHost function removes the specified host from the
-   access control list for that display. The server must be on the
-   same host as the client process, or a BadAccess error results.
-   If you remove your machine from the access list, you can no
-   longer connect to that server, and this operation cannot be
-   reversed unless you reset the server.
-
-   XRemoveHost can generate BadAccess and BadValue errors.
-
-   To remove multiple hosts at one time, use XRemoveHosts.
-
-   XRemoveHosts(Display *display, XHostAddress *hosts, int
-   num_hosts);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   hosts
-
-   Specifies each host that is to be removed.
-
-   num_hosts
-
-   Specifies the number of hosts.
-
-   The XRemoveHosts function removes each specified host from the
-   access control list for that display. The X server must be on
-   the same host as the client process, or a BadAccess error
-   results. If you remove your machine from the access list, you
-   can no longer connect to that server, and this operation cannot
-   be reversed unless you reset the server.
-
-   XRemoveHosts can generate BadAccess and BadValue errors.
-
-Changing, Enabling, or Disabling Access Control
-
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to enable, disable, or
-   change access control.
-
-   For these functions to execute successfully, the client
-   application must reside on the same host as the X server and/or
-   have been given permission in the initial authorization at
-   connection setup.
-
-   To change access control, use XSetAccessControl.
-
-   XSetAccessControl(Display *display, int mode);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   mode
-
-   Specifies the mode. You can pass EnableAccess or DisableAccess.
-
-   The XSetAccessControl function either enables or disables the
-   use of the access control list at each connection setup.
-
-   XSetAccessControl can generate BadAccess and BadValue errors.
-
-   To enable access control, use XEnableAccessControl.
-
-   XEnableAccessControl(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   The XEnableAccessControl function enables the use of the access
-   control list at each connection setup.
-
-   XEnableAccessControl can generate a BadAccess error.
-
-   To disable access control, use XDisableAccessControl.
-
-   XDisableAccessControl(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   The XDisableAccessControl function disables the use of the
-   access control list at each connection setup.
-
-   XDisableAccessControl can generate a BadAccess error.
-
-Chapter 10. Events
-
-   Table of Contents
-
-   Event Types
-   Event Structures
-   Event Masks
-   Event Processing Overview
-   Keyboard and Pointer Events
-
-        Pointer Button Events
-        Keyboard and Pointer Events
-
-   Window Entry/Exit Events
-
-        Normal Entry/Exit Events
-        Grab and Ungrab Entry/Exit Events
-
-   Input Focus Events
-
-        Normal Focus Events and Focus Events While Grabbed
-        Focus Events Generated by Grabs
-
-   Key Map State Notification Events
-   Exposure Events
-
-        Expose Events
-        GraphicsExpose and NoExpose Events
-
-   Window State Change Events
-
-        CirculateNotify Events
-        ConfigureNotify Events
-        CreateNotify Events
-        DestroyNotify Events
-        GravityNotify Events
-        MapNotify Events
-        MappingNotify Events
-        ReparentNotify Events
-        UnmapNotify Events
-        VisibilityNotify Events
-
-   Structure Control Events
-
-        CirculateRequest Events
-        ConfigureRequest Events
-        MapRequest Events
-        ResizeRequest Events
-
-   Colormap State Change Events
-   Client Communication Events
-
-        ClientMessage Events
-        PropertyNotify Events
-        SelectionClear Events
-        SelectionRequest Events
-        SelectionNotify Events
-
-   A client application communicates with the X server through the
-   connection you establish with the XOpenDisplay function. A
-   client application sends requests to the X server over this
-   connection. These requests are made by the Xlib functions that
-   are called in the client application. Many Xlib functions cause
-   the X server to generate events, and the user's typing or
-   moving the pointer can generate events asynchronously. The X
-   server returns events to the client on the same connection.
-
-   This chapter discusses the following topics associated with
-   events:
-     * Event types
-     * Event structures
-     * Event masks
-     * Event processing
-
-   Functions for handling events are dealt with in the next
-   chapter.
-
-Event Types
-
-   An event is data generated asynchronously by the X server as a
-   result of some device activity or as side effects of a request
-   sent by an Xlib function. Device-related events propagate from
-   the source window to ancestor windows until some client
-   application has selected that event type or until the event is
-   explicitly discarded. The X server generally sends an event to
-   a client application only if the client has specifically asked
-   to be informed of that event type, typically by setting the
-   event-mask attribute of the window. The mask can also be set
-   when you create a window or by changing the window's
-   event-mask. You can also mask out events that would propagate
-   to ancestor windows by manipulating the do-not-propagate mask
-   of the window's attributes. However, MappingNotify events are
-   always sent to all clients.
-
-   An event type describes a specific event generated by the X
-   server. For each event type, a corresponding constant name is
-   defined in <X11/X.h>, which is used when referring to an event
-   type. The following table lists the event category and its
-   associated event type or types. The processing associated with
-   these events is discussed in section 10.5.
-
-   Event Category Event Type
-   Keyboard events KeyPress, KeyRelease
-   Pointer events ButtonPress, ButtonRelease, MotionNotify
-   Window crossing events EnterNotify, LeaveNotify
-   Input focus events FocusIn, FocusOut
-   Keymap state notification event KeymapNotify
-   Exposure events Expose, GraphicsExpose, NoExpose
-   Structure control events CirculateRequest, ConfigureRequest,
-   MapRequest, ResizeRequest
-   Window state notification events CirculateNotify,
-   ConfigureNotify, CreateNotify, DestroyNotify, GravityNotify,
-   MapNotify, MappingNotify, ReparentNotify, UnmapNotify,
-   VisibilityNotify
-   Colormap state notification event ColormapNotify
-   Client communication events ClientMessage, PropertyNotify,
-   SelectionClear, SelectionNotify, SelectionRequest
-
-Event Structures
-
-   For each event type, a corresponding structure is declared in
-   <X11/Xlib.h>. All the event structures have the following
-   common members:
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     int           type;
-     unsigned long serial;     /* # of last request processed by server
-*/
-     Bool          send_event; /* true if this came from a SendEvent req
-uest */
-     Display       *display;   /* Display the event was read from */
-     Window        window;
-} XAnyEvent;
-
-   The type member is set to the event type constant name that
-   uniquely identifies it. For example, when the X server reports
-   a GraphicsExpose event to a client application, it sends an
-   XGraphicsExposeEvent structure with the type member set to
-   GraphicsExpose. The display member is set to a pointer to the
-   display the event was read on. The send_event member is set to
-   True if the event came from a SendEvent protocol request. The
-   serial member is set from the serial number reported in the
-   protocol but expanded from the 16-bit least-significant bits to
-   a full 32-bit value. The window member is set to the window
-   that is most useful to toolkit dispatchers.
-
-   The X server can send events at any time in the input stream.
-   Xlib stores any events received while waiting for a reply in an
-   event queue for later use. Xlib also provides functions that
-   allow you to check events in the event queue (see section
-   11.3).
-
-   In addition to the individual structures declared for each
-   event type, the XEvent structure is a union of the individual
-   structures declared for each event type. Depending on the type,
-   you should access members of each event by using the XEvent
-   union.
-
-
-
-typedef union _XEvent {
-     int                            type;          /* must not be change
-d */
-     XAnyEvent                      xany;
-     XKeyEvent                      xkey;
-     XButtonEvent                   xbutton;
-     XMotionEvent                   xmotion;
-     XCrossingEvent                 xcrossing;
-     XFocusChangeEvent              xfocus;
-     XExposeEvent                   xexpose;
-     XGraphicsExposeEvent           xgraphicsexpose;
-     XNoExposeEvent                 xnoexpose;
-     XVisibilityEvent               xvisibility;
-     XCreateWindowEvent             xcreatewindow;
-     XDestroyWindowEvent            xdestroywindow;
-     XUnmapEvent                    xunmap;
-     XMapEvent                      xmap;
-     XMapRequestEvent               xmaprequest;
-     XReparentEvent                 xreparent;
-     XConfigureEvent                xconfigure;
-     XGravityEvent                  xgravity;
-     XResizeRequestEvent            xresizerequest;
-     XConfigureRequestEvent         xconfigurerequest;
-     XCirculateEvent                xcirculate;
-     XCirculateRequestEvent         xcirculaterequest;
-     XPropertyEvent                 xproperty;
-     XSelectionClearEvent           xselectionclear;
-     XSelectionRequestEvent         xselectionrequest;
-     XSelectionEvent                xselection;
-     XColormapEvent                 xcolormap;
-     XClientMessageEvent            xclient;
-     XMappingEvent                  xmapping;
-     XErrorEvent                    xerror;
-     XKeymapEvent                   xkeymap;
-     long                           pad[24];
-} XEvent;
-
-   An XEvent structure's first entry always is the type member,
-   which is set to the event type. The second member always is the
-   serial number of the protocol request that generated the event.
-   The third member always is send_event, which is a Bool that
-   indicates if the event was sent by a different client. The
-   fourth member always is a display, which is the display that
-   the event was read from. Except for keymap events, the fifth
-   member always is a window, which has been carefully selected to
-   be useful to toolkit dispatchers. To avoid breaking toolkits,
-   the order of these first five entries is not to change. Most
-   events also contain a time member, which is the time at which
-   an event occurred. In addition, a pointer to the generic event
-   must be cast before it is used to access any other information
-   in the structure.
-
-Event Masks
-
-   Clients select event reporting of most events relative to a
-   window. To do this, pass an event mask to an Xlib
-   event-handling function that takes an event_mask argument. The
-   bits of the event mask are defined in <X11/X.h>. Each bit in
-   the event mask maps to an event mask name, which describes the
-   event or events you want the X server to return to a client
-   application.
-
-   Unless the client has specifically asked for them, most events
-   are not reported to clients when they are generated. Unless the
-   client suppresses them by setting graphics-exposures in the GC
-   to False, GraphicsExpose and NoExpose are reported by default
-   as a result of XCopyPlane and XCopyArea. SelectionClear,
-   SelectionRequest, SelectionNotify, or ClientMessage cannot be
-   masked. Selection-related events are only sent to clients
-   cooperating with selections (see section 4.5). When the
-   keyboard or pointer mapping is changed, MappingNotify is always
-   sent to clients.
-
-   The following table lists the event mask constants you can pass
-   to the event_mask argument and the circumstances in which you
-   would want to specify the event mask:
-   Event Mask Circumstances
-   NoEventMask No events wanted
-   KeyPressMask Keyboard down events wanted
-   KeyReleaseMask Keyboard up events wanted
-   ButtonPressMask Pointer button down events wanted
-   ButtonReleaseMask Pointer button up events wanted
-   EnterWindowMask Pointer window entry events wanted
-   LeaveWindowMask Pointer window leave events wanted
-   PointerMotionMask Pointer motion events wanted
-   PointerMotionHintMask Pointer motion hints wanted
-   Button1MotionMask Pointer motion while button 1 down
-   Button2MotionMask Pointer motion while button 2 down
-   Button3MotionMask Pointer motion while button 3 down
-   Button4MotionMask Pointer motion while button 4 down
-   Button5MotionMask Pointer motion while button 5 down
-   ButtonMotionMask Pointer motion while any button down
-   KeymapStateMask Keyboard state wanted at window entry and focus
-   in
-   ExposureMask Any exposure wanted
-   VisibilityChangeMask Any change in visibility wanted
-   StructureNotifyMask Any change in window structure wanted
-   ResizeRedirectMask Redirect resize of this window
-   SubstructureNotifyMask Substructure notification wanted
-   SubstructureRedirectMask Redirect structure requests on
-   children
-   FocusChangeMask Any change in input focus wanted
-   PropertyChangeMask Any change in property wanted
-   ColormapChangeMask Any change in colormap wanted
-   OwnerGrabButtonMask Automatic grabs should activate with
-   owner_events set to True
-
-Event Processing Overview
-
-   The event reported to a client application during event
-   processing depends on which event masks you provide as the
-   event-mask attribute for a window. For some event masks, there
-   is a one-to-one correspondence between the event mask constant
-   and the event type constant. For example, if you pass the event
-   mask ButtonPressMask, the X server sends back only ButtonPress
-   events. Most events contain a time member, which is the time at
-   which an event occurred.
-
-   In other cases, one event mask constant can map to several
-   event type constants. For example, if you pass the event mask
-   SubstructureNotifyMask, the X server can send back
-   CirculateNotify, ConfigureNotify, CreateNotify, DestroyNotify,
-   GravityNotify, MapNotify, ReparentNotify, or UnmapNotify
-   events.
-
-   In another case, two event masks can map to one event type. For
-   example, if you pass either PointerMotionMask or
-   ButtonMotionMask, the X server sends back a MotionNotify event.
-
-   The following table lists the event mask, its associated event
-   type or types, and the structure name associated with the event
-   type. Some of these structures actually are typedefs to a
-   generic structure that is shared between two event types. Note
-   that N.A. appears in columns for which the information is not
-   applicable.
-   Event Mask Event Type Structure Generic Structure
-
-   ButtonMotionMask
-
-   Button1MotionMask
-
-   Button2MotionMask
-
-   Button3MotionMask
-
-   Button4MotionMask
-
-   Button5MotionMask
-   MotionNotify XPointerMovedEvent XMotionEvent
-   ButtonPressMask ButtonPress XButtonPressedEvent XButtonEvent
-   ButtonReleaseMask ButtonRelease XButtonReleasedEvent
-   XButtonEvent
-   ColormapChangeMask ColormapNotify XColormapEvent
-   EnterWindowMask EnterNotify XEnterWindowEvent XCrossingEvent
-   LeaveWindowMask LeaveNotify XLeaveWindowEvent XCrossingEvent
-   ExposureMask Expose XExposeEvent
-   GCGraphicsExposures in GC GraphicsExpose XGraphicsExposeEvent
-   NoExpose XNoExposeEvent
-   FocusChangeMask FocusIn XFocusInEvent XFocusChangeEvent
-   FocusOut XFocusOutEvent XFocusChangeEvent
-   KeymapStateMask KeymapNotify XKeymapEvent
-   KeyPressMask KeyPress XKeyPressedEvent XKeyEvent
-   KeyReleaseMask KeyRelease XKeyReleasedEvent XKeyEvent
-   OwnerGrabButtonMask N.A. N.A.
-   PointerMotionMask MotionNotify XPointerMovedEvent XMotionEvent
-   PointerMotionHintMask N.A. N.A.
-   PropertyChangeMask PropertyNotify XPropertyEvent
-   ResizeRedirectMask ResizeRequest XResizeRequestEvent
-   StructureNotifyMask CirculateNotify XCirculateEvent
-   ConfigureNotify XConfigureEvent
-   DestroyNotify XDestroyWindowEvent
-   GravityNotify XGravityEvent
-   MapNotify XMapEvent
-   ReparentNotify XReparentEvent
-   UnmapNotify XUnmapEvent
-   SubstructureNotifyMask CirculateNotify XCirculateEvent
-   ConfigureNotify XConfigureEvent
-   CreateNotify XCreateWindowEvent
-   DestroyNotify XDestroyWindowEvent
-   GravityNotify XGravityEvent
-   MapNotify XMapEvent
-   ReparentNotify XReparentEvent
-   UnmapNotify XUnmapEvent
-   SubstructureRedirectMask CirculateRequest
-   XCirculateRequestEvent
-   ConfigureRequest XConfigureRequestEvent
-   MapRequest XMapRequestEvent
-   N.A. ClientMessage XClientMessageEvent
-   N.A. MappingNotify XMappingEvent
-   N.A. SelectionClear XSelectionClearEvent
-   N.A. SelectionNotify XSelectionEvent
-   N.A. SelectionRequest XSelectionRequestEvent
-   VisibilityChangeMask VisibilityNotify XVisibilityEvent
-
-   The sections that follow describe the processing that occurs
-   when you select the different event masks. The sections are
-   organized according to these processing categories:
-     * Keyboard and pointer events
-     * Window crossing events
-     * Input focus events
-     * Keymap state notification events
-     * Exposure events
-     * Window state notification events
-     * Structure control events
-     * Colormap state notification events
-     * Client communication events
-
-Keyboard and Pointer Events
-
-   This section discusses:
-     * Pointer button events
-     * Keyboard and pointer events
-
-Pointer Button Events
-
-   The following describes the event processing that occurs when a
-   pointer button press is processed with the pointer in some
-   window w and when no active pointer grab is in progress.
-
-   The X server searches the ancestors of w from the root down,
-   looking for a passive grab to activate. If no matching passive
-   grab on the button exists, the X server automatically starts an
-   active grab for the client receiving the event and sets the
-   last-pointer-grab time to the current server time. The effect
-   is essentially equivalent to an XGrabButton with these client
-   passed arguments:
-   Argument Value
-   w The event window
-   event_mask The client's selected pointer events on the event
-   window
-   pointer_mode GrabModeAsync
-   keyboard_mode GrabModeAsync
-   owner_events True, if the client has selected
-   OwnerGrabButtonMask on the event window, otherwise False
-   confine_to None
-   cursor None
-
-   The active grab is automatically terminated when the logical
-   state of the pointer has all buttons released. Clients can
-   modify the active grab by calling XUngrabPointer and
-   XChangeActivePointerGrab.
-
-Keyboard and Pointer Events
-
-   This section discusses the processing that occurs for the
-   keyboard events KeyPress and KeyRelease and the pointer events
-   ButtonPress, ButtonRelease, and MotionNotify. For information
-   about the keyboard event-handling utilities, see chapter 11.
-
-   The X server reports KeyPress or KeyRelease events to clients
-   wanting information about keys that logically change state.
-   Note that these events are generated for all keys, even those
-   mapped to modifier bits. The X server reports ButtonPress or
-   ButtonRelease events to clients wanting information about
-   buttons that logically change state.
-
-   The X server reports MotionNotify events to clients wanting
-   information about when the pointer logically moves. The X
-   server generates this event whenever the pointer is moved and
-   the pointer motion begins and ends in the window. The
-   granularity of MotionNotify events is not guaranteed, but a
-   client that selects this event type is guaranteed to receive at
-   least one event when the pointer moves and then rests.
-
-   The generation of the logical changes lags the physical changes
-   if device event processing is frozen.
-
-   To receive KeyPress, KeyRelease, ButtonPress, and ButtonRelease
-   events, set KeyPressMask, KeyReleaseMask, ButtonPressMask, and
-   ButtonReleaseMask bits in the event-mask attribute of the
-   window.
-
-   To receive MotionNotify events, set one or more of the
-   following event masks bits in the event-mask attribute of the
-   window.
-     * Button1MotionMask - Button5MotionMask
-     * The client application receives MotionNotify events only
-       when one or more of the specified buttons is pressed.
-     * ButtonMotionMask
-     * The client application receives MotionNotify events only
-       when at least one button is pressed.
-     * PointerMotionMask
-     * The client application receives MotionNotify events
-       independent of the state of the pointer buttons.
-     * PointerMotionHintMask
-     * If PointerMotionHintMask is selected in combination with
-       one or more of the above masks, the X server is free to
-       send only one MotionNotify event (with the is_hint member
-       of the XPointerMovedEvent structure set to NotifyHint) to
-       the client for the event window, until either the key or
-       button state changes, the pointer leaves the event window,
-       or the client calls XQueryPointer or . The server still may
-       send MotionNotify events without is_hint set to NotifyHint.
-
-   The source of the event is the viewable window that the pointer
-   is in. The window used by the X server to report these events
-   depends on the window's position in the window hierarchy and
-   whether any intervening window prohibits the generation of
-   these events. Starting with the source window, the X server
-   searches up the window hierarchy until it locates the first
-   window specified by a client as having an interest in these
-   events. If one of the intervening windows has its
-   do-not-propagate-mask set to prohibit generation of the event
-   type, the events of those types will be suppressed. Clients can
-   modify the actual window used for reporting by performing
-   active grabs and, in the case of keyboard events, by using the
-   focus window.
-
-   The structures for these event types contain:
-typedef struct {
-     int            type;            /* ButtonPress or ButtonRelease */
-     unsigned long  serial;          /* # of last request processed by s
-erver */
-     Bool           send_event;      /* true if this came from a SendEve
-nt request */
-     Display        *display;        /* Display the event was read from
-*/
-     Window         window;          /* ``event'' window it is reported
-relative to */
-     Window         root;            /* root window that the event occur
-red on */
-     Window         subwindow;       /* child window */
-     Time           time;            /* milliseconds */
-     int            x, y;            /* pointer x, y coordinates in even
-t window */
-     int            x_root, y_root;  /* coordinates relative to root */
-     unsigned int   state;           /* key or button mask */
-     unsigned int   button;          /* detail */
-     Bool           same_screen;     /* same screen flag */
-} XButtonEvent;
-typedef XButtonEvent XButtonPressedEvent;
-typedef XButtonEvent XButtonReleasedEvent;
-
-typedef struct {
-     int            type;            /* KeyPress or KeyRelease */
-     unsigned long  serial;          /* # of last request processed by s
-erver */
-     Bool           send_event;      /* true if this came from a SendEve
-nt request */
-     Display        *display;        /* Display the event was read from
-*/
-     Window         window;          /* ``event'' window it is reported
-relative to */
-     Window         root;            /* root window that the event occur
-red on */
-     Window         subwindow;       /* child window */
-     Time           time;            /* milliseconds */
-     int            x, y;            /* pointer x, y coordinates in even
-t window */
-     int            x_root, y_root;  /* coordinates relative to root */
-     unsigned int   state;           /* key or button mask */
-     unsigned int   keycode;         /* detail */
-     Bool           same_screen;     /* same screen flag */
-} XKeyEvent;
-typedef XKeyEvent XKeyPressedEvent;
-typedef XKeyEvent XKeyReleasedEvent;
-
-typedef struct {
-     int            type;              /* MotionNotify */
-     unsigned long  serial;            /* # of last request processed by
- server */
-     Bool           send_event;        /* true if this came from a SendE
-vent request */
-     Display        *display;          /* Display the event was read fro
-m */
-     Window         window;            /* ``event'' window reported rela
-tive to */
-     Window         root;              /* root window that the event occ
-urred on */
-     Window         subwindow;         /* child window */
-     Time           time;              /* milliseconds */
-     int            x, y;              /* pointer x, y coordinates in ev
-ent window */
-     int            x_root, y_root;    /* coordinates relative to root *
-/
-     unsigned int   state;             /* key or button mask */
-     char           is_hint;           /* detail */
-     Bool           same_screen;       /* same screen flag */
-} XMotionEvent;
-typedef XMotionEvent XPointerMovedEvent;
-
-   These structures have the following common members: window,
-   root, subwindow, time, x, y, x_root, y_root, state, and
-   same_screen. The window member is set to the window on which
-   the event was generated and is referred to as the event window.
-   As long as the conditions previously discussed are met, this is
-   the window used by the X server to report the event. The root
-   member is set to the source window's root window. The x_root
-   and y_root members are set to the pointer's coordinates
-   relative to the root window's origin at the time of the event.
-
-   The same_screen member is set to indicate whether the event
-   window is on the same screen as the root window and can be
-   either True or False. If True, the event and root windows are
-   on the same screen. If False, the event and root windows are
-   not on the same screen.
-
-   If the source window is an inferior of the event window, the
-   subwindow member of the structure is set to the child of the
-   event window that is the source window or the child of the
-   event window that is an ancestor of the source window.
-   Otherwise, the X server sets the subwindow member to None. The
-   time member is set to the time when the event was generated and
-   is expressed in milliseconds.
-
-   If the event window is on the same screen as the root window,
-   the x and y members are set to the coordinates relative to the
-   event window's origin. Otherwise, these members are set to
-   zero.
-
-   The state member is set to indicate the logical state of the
-   pointer buttons and modifier keys just prior to the event,
-   which is the bitwise inclusive OR of one or more of the button
-   or modifier key masks: Button1Mask, Button2Mask, Button3Mask,
-   Button4Mask, Button5Mask, ShiftMask, LockMask, ControlMask,
-   Mod1Mask, Mod2Mask, Mod3Mask, Mod4Mask, and Mod5Mask.
-
-   Each of these structures also has a member that indicates the
-   detail. For the XKeyPressedEvent and XKeyReleasedEvent
-   structures, this member is called a keycode. It is set to a
-   number that represents a physical key on the keyboard. The
-   keycode is an arbitrary representation for any key on the
-   keyboard (see sections 12.7 and 16.1).
-
-   For the XButtonPressedEvent and XButtonReleasedEvent
-   structures, this member is called button. It represents the
-   pointer button that changed state and can be the Button1,
-   Button2, Button3, Button4, or Button5 value. For the
-   XPointerMovedEvent structure, this member is called is_hint. It
-   can be set to NotifyNormal or NotifyHint.
-
-   Some of the symbols mentioned in this section have fixed
-   values, as follows:
-   Symbol            Value
-   Button1MotionMask (1L<<8)
-   Button2MotionMask (1L<<9)
-   Button3MotionMask (1L<<10)
-   Button4MotionMask (1L<<11)
-   Button5MotionMask (1L<<12)
-   Button1Mask       (1<<8)
-   Button2Mask       (1<<9)
-   Button3Mask       (1<<10)
-   Button4Mask       (1<<11)
-   Button5Mask       (1<<12)
-   ShiftMask         (1<<0)
-   LockMask          (1<<1)
-   ControlMask       (1<<2)
-   Mod1Mask          (1<<3)
-   Mod2Mask          (1<<4)
-   Mod3Mask          (1<<5)
-   Mod4Mask          (1<<6)
-   Mod5Mask          (1<<7)
-   Button1           1
-   Button2           2
-   Button3           3
-   Button4           4
-   Button5           5
-
-Window Entry/Exit Events
-
-   This section describes the processing that occurs for the
-   window crossing events EnterNotify and LeaveNotify. If a
-   pointer motion or a window hierarchy change causes the pointer
-   to be in a different window than before, the X server reports
-   EnterNotify or LeaveNotify events to clients who have selected
-   for these events. All EnterNotify and LeaveNotify events caused
-   by a hierarchy change are generated after any hierarchy event
-   (UnmapNotify, MapNotify, ConfigureNotify, GravityNotify,
-   CirculateNotify) caused by that change; however, the X protocol
-   does not constrain the ordering of EnterNotify and LeaveNotify
-   events with respect to FocusOut, VisibilityNotify, and Expose
-   events.
-
-   This contrasts with MotionNotify events, which are also
-   generated when the pointer moves but only when the pointer
-   motion begins and ends in a single window. An EnterNotify or
-   LeaveNotify event also can be generated when some client
-   application calls XGrabPointer and XUngrabPointer.
-
-   To receive EnterNotify or LeaveNotify events, set the
-   EnterWindowMask or LeaveWindowMask bits of the event-mask
-   attribute of the window.
-
-   The structure for these event types contains:
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     int           type;           /* EnterNotify or LeaveNotify */
-     unsigned long serial;         /* # of last request processed by ser
-ver */
-     Bool          send_event;     /* true if this came from a SendEvent
- request */
-     Display       *display;       /* Display the event was read from */
-     Window        window;         /* ``event'' window reported relative
- to */
-     Window        root;           /* root window that the event occurre
-d on */
-     Window        subwindow;      /* child window */
-     Time          time;           /* milliseconds */
-     int           x, y;           /* pointer x, y coordinates in event
-window */
-     int           x_root, y_root; /* coordinates relative to root */
-     int           mode;           /* NotifyNormal, NotifyGrab, NotifyUn
-grab */
-     int           detail;
-                   /*
-                    * NotifyAncestor, NotifyVirtual, NotifyInferior,
-                    * NotifyNonlinear,NotifyNonlinearVirtual
-                    */
-     Bool          same_screen;    /* same screen flag */
-     Bool          focus;          /* boolean focus */
-     unsigned int  state;          /* key or button mask */
-} XCrossingEvent;
-typedef XCrossingEvent XEnterWindowEvent;
-typedef XCrossingEvent XLeaveWindowEvent;
-
-   The window member is set to the window on which the EnterNotify
-   or LeaveNotify event was generated and is referred to as the
-   event window. This is the window used by the X server to report
-   the event, and is relative to the root window on which the
-   event occurred. The root member is set to the root window of
-   the screen on which the event occurred.
-
-   For a LeaveNotify event, if a child of the event window
-   contains the initial position of the pointer, the subwindow
-   component is set to that child. Otherwise, the X server sets
-   the subwindow member to None. For an EnterNotify event, if a
-   child of the event window contains the final pointer position,
-   the subwindow component is set to that child or None.
-
-   The time member is set to the time when the event was generated
-   and is expressed in milliseconds. The x and y members are set
-   to the coordinates of the pointer position in the event window.
-   This position is always the pointer's final position, not its
-   initial position. If the event window is on the same screen as
-   the root window, x and y are the pointer coordinates relative
-   to the event window's origin. Otherwise, x and y are set to
-   zero. The x_root and y_root members are set to the pointer's
-   coordinates relative to the root window's origin at the time of
-   the event.
-
-   The same_screen member is set to indicate whether the event
-   window is on the same screen as the root window and can be
-   either True or False. If True, the event and root windows are
-   on the same screen. If False, the event and root windows are
-   not on the same screen.
-
-   The focus member is set to indicate whether the event window is
-   the focus window or an inferior of the focus window. The X
-   server can set this member to either True or False. If True,
-   the event window is the focus window or an inferior of the
-   focus window. If False, the event window is not the focus
-   window or an inferior of the focus window.
-
-   The state member is set to indicate the state of the pointer
-   buttons and modifier keys just prior to the event. The X server
-   can set this member to the bitwise inclusive OR of one or more
-   of the button or modifier key masks: Button1Mask, Button2Mask,
-   Button3Mask, Button4Mask, Button5Mask, ShiftMask, LockMask,
-   ControlMask, Mod1Mask, Mod2Mask, Mod3Mask, Mod4Mask, Mod5Mask.
-
-   The mode member is set to indicate whether the events are
-   normal events, pseudo-motion events when a grab activates, or
-   pseudo-motion events when a grab deactivates. The X server can
-   set this member to NotifyNormal, NotifyGrab, or NotifyUngrab.
-
-   The detail member is set to indicate the notify detail and can
-   be NotifyAncestor, NotifyVirtual, NotifyInferior,
-   NotifyNonlinear, or NotifyNonlinearVirtual.
-
-Normal Entry/Exit Events
-
-   EnterNotify and LeaveNotify events are generated when the
-   pointer moves from one window to another window. Normal events
-   are identified by XEnterWindowEvent or XLeaveWindowEvent
-   structures whose mode member is set to NotifyNormal.
-     * When the pointer moves from window A to window B and A is
-       an inferior of B, the X server does the following:
-     * It generates a LeaveNotify event on window A, with the
-       detail member of the XLeaveWindowEvent structure set to
-       NotifyAncestor.
-     * It generates a LeaveNotify event on each window between
-       window A and window B, exclusive, with the detail member of
-       each XLeaveWindowEvent structure set to NotifyVirtual.
-     * It generates an EnterNotify event on window B, with the
-       detail member of the XEnterWindowEvent structure set to
-       NotifyInferior.
-     * When the pointer moves from window A to window B and B is
-       an inferior of A, the X server does the following:
-     * It generates a LeaveNotify event on window A, with the
-       detail member of the XLeaveWindowEvent structure set to
-       NotifyInferior.
-     * It generates an EnterNotify event on each window between
-       window A and window B, exclusive, with the detail member of
-       each XEnterWindowEvent structure set to NotifyVirtual.
-     * It generates an EnterNotify event on window B, with the
-       detail member of the XEnterWindowEvent structure set to
-       NotifyAncestor.
-     * When the pointer moves from window A to window B and window
-       C is their least common ancestor, the X server does the
-       following:
-     * It generates a LeaveNotify event on window A, with the
-       detail member of the XLeaveWindowEvent structure set to
-       NotifyNonlinear.
-     * It generates a LeaveNotify event on each window between
-       window A and window C, exclusive, with the detail member of
-       each XLeaveWindowEvent structure set to
-       NotifyNonlinearVirtual.
-     * It generates an EnterNotify event on each window between
-       window C and window B, exclusive, with the detail member of
-       each XEnterWindowEvent structure set to
-       NotifyNonlinearVirtual.
-     * It generates an EnterNotify event on window B, with the
-       detail member of the XEnterWindowEvent structure set to
-       NotifyNonlinear.
-     * When the pointer moves from window A to window B on
-       different screens, the X server does the following:
-     * It generates a LeaveNotify event on window A, with the
-       detail member of the XLeaveWindowEvent structure set to
-       NotifyNonlinear.
-     * If window A is not a root window, it generates a
-       LeaveNotify event on each window above window A up to and
-       including its root, with the detail member of each
-       XLeaveWindowEvent structure set to NotifyNonlinearVirtual.
-     * If window B is not a root window, it generates an
-       EnterNotify event on each window from window B's root down
-       to but not including window B, with the detail member of
-       each XEnterWindowEvent structure set to
-       NotifyNonlinearVirtual.
-     * It generates an EnterNotify event on window B, with the
-       detail member of the XEnterWindowEvent structure set to
-       NotifyNonlinear.
-
-Grab and Ungrab Entry/Exit Events
-
-   Pseudo-motion mode EnterNotify and LeaveNotify events are
-   generated when a pointer grab activates or deactivates. Events
-   in which the pointer grab activates are identified by
-   XEnterWindowEvent or XLeaveWindowEvent structures whose mode
-   member is set to NotifyGrab. Events in which the pointer grab
-   deactivates are identified by XEnterWindowEvent or
-   XLeaveWindowEvent structures whose mode member is set to
-   NotifyUngrab (see XGrabPointer).
-     * When a pointer grab activates after any initial warp into a
-       confine_to window and before generating any actual
-       ButtonPress event that activates the grab, G is the
-       grab_window for the grab, and P is the window the pointer
-       is in, the X server does the following:
-     * It generates EnterNotify and LeaveNotify events (see
-       section 10.6.1) with the mode members of the
-       XEnterWindowEvent and XLeaveWindowEvent structures set to
-       NotifyGrab. These events are generated as if the pointer
-       were to suddenly warp from its current position in P to
-       some position in G. However, the pointer does not warp, and
-       the X server uses the pointer position as both the initial
-       and final positions for the events.
-     * When a pointer grab deactivates after generating any actual
-       ButtonRelease event that deactivates the grab, G is the
-       grab_window for the grab, and P is the window the pointer
-       is in, the X server does the following:
-     * It generates EnterNotify and LeaveNotify events (see
-       section 10.6.1) with the mode members of the
-       XEnterWindowEvent and XLeaveWindowEvent structures set to
-       NotifyUngrab. These events are generated as if the pointer
-       were to suddenly warp from some position in G to its
-       current position in P. However, the pointer does not warp,
-       and the X server uses the current pointer position as both
-       the initial and final positions for the events.
-
-Input Focus Events
-
-   This section describes the processing that occurs for the input
-   focus events FocusIn and FocusOut. The X server can report
-   FocusIn or FocusOut events to clients wanting information about
-   when the input focus changes. The keyboard is always attached
-   to some window (typically, the root window or a top-level
-   window), which is called the focus window. The focus window and
-   the position of the pointer determine the window that receives
-   keyboard input. Clients may need to know when the input focus
-   changes to control highlighting of areas on the screen.
-
-   To receive FocusIn or FocusOut events, set the FocusChangeMask
-   bit in the event-mask attribute of the window.
-
-   The structure for these event types contains:
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     int           type;       /* FocusIn or FocusOut */
-     unsigned long serial;     /* # of last request processed by server
-*/
-     Bool          send_event; /* true if this came from a SendEvent req
-uest */
-     Display       *display;   /* Display the event was read from */
-     Window        window;     /* window of event */
-     int           mode;       /* NotifyNormal, NotifyGrab, NotifyUngrab
- */
-     int           detail;
-                   /*
-                    * NotifyAncestor, NotifyVirtual, NotifyInferior,
-                    * NotifyNonlinear,NotifyNonlinearVirtual, NotifyPoin
-ter,
-                    * NotifyPointerRoot, NotifyDetailNone
-                    */
-} XFocusChangeEvent;
-typedef XFocusChangeEvent XFocusInEvent;
-typedef XFocusChangeEvent XFocusOutEvent;
-
-   The window member is set to the window on which the FocusIn or
-   FocusOut event was generated. This is the window used by the X
-   server to report the event. The mode member is set to indicate
-   whether the focus events are normal focus events, focus events
-   while grabbed, focus events when a grab activates, or focus
-   events when a grab deactivates. The X server can set the mode
-   member to NotifyNormal, NotifyWhileGrabbed, NotifyGrab, or
-   NotifyUngrab.
-
-   All FocusOut events caused by a window unmap are generated
-   after any UnmapNotify event; however, the X protocol does not
-   constrain the ordering of FocusOut events with respect to
-   generated EnterNotify, LeaveNotify, VisibilityNotify, and
-   Expose events.
-
-   Depending on the event mode, the detail member is set to
-   indicate the notify detail and can be NotifyAncestor,
-   NotifyVirtual, NotifyInferior, NotifyNonlinear,
-   NotifyNonlinearVirtual, NotifyPointer, NotifyPointerRoot, or
-   NotifyDetailNone.
-
-Normal Focus Events and Focus Events While Grabbed
-
-   Normal focus events are identified by XFocusInEvent or
-   XFocusOutEvent structures whose mode member is set to
-   NotifyNormal. Focus events while grabbed are identified by
-   XFocusInEvent or XFocusOutEvent structures whose mode member is
-   set to NotifyWhileGrabbed. The X server processes normal focus
-   and focus events while grabbed according to the following:
-     * When the focus moves from window A to window B, A is an
-       inferior of B, and the pointer is in window P, the X server
-       does the following:
-     * It generates a FocusOut event on window A, with the detail
-       member of the XFocusOutEvent structure set to
-       NotifyAncestor.
-     * It generates a FocusOut event on each window between window
-       A and window B, exclusive, with the detail member of each
-       XFocusOutEvent structure set to NotifyVirtual.
-     * It generates a FocusIn event on window B, with the detail
-       member of the XFocusOutEvent structure set to
-       NotifyInferior.
-     * If window P is an inferior of window B but window P is not
-       window A or an inferior or ancestor of window A, it
-       generates a FocusIn event on each window below window B,
-       down to and including window P, with the detail member of
-       each XFocusInEvent structure set to NotifyPointer.
-     * When the focus moves from window A to window B, B is an
-       inferior of A, and the pointer is in window P, the X server
-       does the following:
-     * If window P is an inferior of window A but P is not an
-       inferior of window B or an ancestor of B, it generates a
-       FocusOut event on each window from window P up to but not
-       including window A, with the detail member of each
-       XFocusOutEvent structure set to NotifyPointer.
-     * It generates a FocusOut event on window A, with the detail
-       member of the XFocusOutEvent structure set to
-       NotifyInferior.
-     * It generates a FocusIn event on each window between window
-       A and window B, exclusive, with the detail member of each
-       XFocusInEvent structure set to NotifyVirtual.
-     * It generates a FocusIn event on window B, with the detail
-       member of the XFocusInEvent structure set to
-       NotifyAncestor.
-     * When the focus moves from window A to window B, window C is
-       their least common ancestor, and the pointer is in window
-       P, the X server does the following:
-     * If window P is an inferior of window A, it generates a
-       FocusOut event on each window from window P up to but not
-       including window A, with the detail member of the
-       XFocusOutEvent structure set to NotifyPointer.
-     * It generates a FocusOut event on window A, with the detail
-       member of the XFocusOutEvent structure set to
-       NotifyNonlinear.
-     * It generates a FocusOut event on each window between window
-       A and window C, exclusive, with the detail member of each
-       XFocusOutEvent structure set to NotifyNonlinearVirtual.
-     * It generates a FocusIn event on each window between C and
-       B, exclusive, with the detail member of each XFocusInEvent
-       structure set to NotifyNonlinearVirtual.
-     * It generates a FocusIn event on window B, with the detail
-       member of the XFocusInEvent structure set to
-       NotifyNonlinear.
-     * If window P is an inferior of window B, it generates a
-       FocusIn event on each window below window B down to and
-       including window P, with the detail member of the
-       XFocusInEvent structure set to NotifyPointer.
-     * When the focus moves from window A to window B on different
-       screens and the pointer is in window P, the X server does
-       the following:
-     * If window P is an inferior of window A, it generates a
-       FocusOut event on each window from window P up to but not
-       including window A, with the detail member of each
-       XFocusOutEvent structure set to NotifyPointer.
-     * It generates a FocusOut event on window A, with the detail
-       member of the XFocusOutEvent structure set to
-       NotifyNonlinear.
-     * If window A is not a root window, it generates a FocusOut
-       event on each window above window A up to and including its
-       root, with the detail member of each XFocusOutEvent
-       structure set to NotifyNonlinearVirtual.
-     * If window B is not a root window, it generates a FocusIn
-       event on each window from window B's root down to but not
-       including window B, with the detail member of each
-       XFocusInEvent structure set to NotifyNonlinearVirtual.
-     * It generates a FocusIn event on window B, with the detail
-       member of each XFocusInEvent structure set to
-       NotifyNonlinear.
-     * If window P is an inferior of window B, it generates a
-       FocusIn event on each window below window B down to and
-       including window P, with the detail member of each
-       XFocusInEvent structure set to NotifyPointer.
-     * When the focus moves from window A to PointerRoot (events
-       sent to the window under the pointer) or None (discard),
-       and the pointer is in window P, the X server does the
-       following:
-     * If window P is an inferior of window A, it generates a
-       FocusOut event on each window from window P up to but not
-       including window A, with the detail member of each
-       XFocusOutEvent structure set to NotifyPointer.
-     * It generates a FocusOut event on window A, with the detail
-       member of the XFocusOutEvent structure set to
-       NotifyNonlinear.
-     * If window A is not a root window, it generates a FocusOut
-       event on each window above window A up to and including its
-       root, with the detail member of each XFocusOutEvent
-       structure set to NotifyNonlinearVirtual.
-     * It generates a FocusIn event on the root window of all
-       screens, with the detail member of each XFocusInEvent
-       structure set to NotifyPointerRoot (or NotifyDetailNone).
-     * If the new focus is PointerRoot, it generates a FocusIn
-       event on each window from window P's root down to and
-       including window P, with the detail member of each
-       XFocusInEvent structure set to NotifyPointer.
-     * When the focus moves from PointerRoot (events sent to the
-       window under the pointer) or None to window A, and the
-       pointer is in window P, the X server does the following:
-     * If the old focus is PointerRoot, it generates a FocusOut
-       event on each window from window P up to and including
-       window P's root, with the detail member of each
-       XFocusOutEvent structure set to NotifyPointer.
-     * It generates a FocusOut event on all root windows, with the
-       detail member of each XFocusOutEvent structure set to
-       NotifyPointerRoot (or NotifyDetailNone).
-     * If window A is not a root window, it generates a FocusIn
-       event on each window from window A's root down to but not
-       including window A, with the detail member of each
-       XFocusInEvent structure set to NotifyNonlinearVirtual.
-     * It generates a FocusIn event on window A, with the detail
-       member of the XFocusInEvent structure set to
-       NotifyNonlinear.
-     * If window P is an inferior of window A, it generates a
-       FocusIn event on each window below window A down to and
-       including window P, with the detail member of each
-       XFocusInEvent structure set to NotifyPointer.
-     * When the focus moves from PointerRoot (events sent to the
-       window under the pointer) to None (or vice versa), and the
-       pointer is in window P, the X server does the following:
-     * If the old focus is PointerRoot, it generates a FocusOut
-       event on each window from window P up to and including
-       window P's root, with the detail member of each
-       XFocusOutEvent structure set to NotifyPointer.
-     * It generates a FocusOut event on all root windows, with the
-       detail member of each XFocusOutEvent structure set to
-       either NotifyPointerRoot or NotifyDetailNone.
-     * It generates a FocusIn event on all root windows, with the
-       detail member of each XFocusInEvent structure set to
-       NotifyDetailNone or NotifyPointerRoot.
-     * If the new focus is PointerRoot, it generates a FocusIn
-       event on each window from window P's root down to and
-       including window P, with the detail member of each
-       XFocusInEvent structure set to NotifyPointer.
-
-Focus Events Generated by Grabs
-
-   Focus events in which the keyboard grab activates are
-   identified by XFocusInEvent or XFocusOutEvent structures whose
-   mode member is set to NotifyGrab. Focus events in which the
-   keyboard grab deactivates are identified by XFocusInEvent or
-   XFocusOutEvent structures whose mode member is set to
-   NotifyUngrab (see XGrabKeyboard).
-     * When a keyboard grab activates before generating any actual
-       KeyPress event that activates the grab, G is the
-       grab_window, and F is the current focus, the X server does
-       the following:
-     * It generates FocusIn and FocusOut events, with the mode
-       members of the XFocusInEvent and XFocusOutEvent structures
-       set to NotifyGrab. These events are generated as if the
-       focus were to change from F to G.
-     * When a keyboard grab deactivates after generating any
-       actual KeyRelease event that deactivates the grab, G is the
-       grab_window, and F is the current focus, the X server does
-       the following:
-     * It generates FocusIn and FocusOut events, with the mode
-       members of the XFocusInEvent and XFocusOutEvent structures
-       set to NotifyUngrab. These events are generated as if the
-       focus were to change from G to F.
-
-Key Map State Notification Events
-
-   The X server can report KeymapNotify events to clients that
-   want information about changes in their keyboard state.
-
-   To receive KeymapNotify events, set the KeymapStateMask bit in
-   the event-mask attribute of the window. The X server generates
-   this event immediately after every EnterNotify and FocusIn
-   event.
-
-   The structure for this event type contains:
-
-
-
-/* generated on EnterWindow and FocusIn when KeymapState selected */
-typedef struct {
-     int            type;           /* KeymapNotify */
-     unsigned long  serial;         /* # of last request processed by se
-rver */
-     Bool           send_event;     /* true if this came from a SendEven
-t request */
-     Display        *display;       /* Display the event was read from *
-/
-     Window         window;
-     char           key_vector[32];
-} XKeymapEvent;
-
-   The window member is not used but is present to aid some
-   toolkits. The key_vector member is set to the bit vector of the
-   keyboard. Each bit set to 1 indicates that the corresponding
-   key is currently pressed. The vector is represented as 32
-   bytes. Byte N (from 0) contains the bits for keys 8N to 8N + 7
-   with the least significant bit in the byte representing key 8N.
-
-Exposure Events
-
-   The X protocol does not guarantee to preserve the contents of
-   window regions when the windows are obscured or reconfigured.
-   Some implementations may preserve the contents of windows.
-   Other implementations are free to destroy the contents of
-   windows when exposed. X expects client applications to assume
-   the responsibility for restoring the contents of an exposed
-   window region. (An exposed window region describes a formerly
-   obscured window whose region becomes visible.) Therefore, the X
-   server sends Expose events describing the window and the region
-   of the window that has been exposed. A naive client application
-   usually redraws the entire window. A more sophisticated client
-   application redraws only the exposed region.
-
-Expose Events
-
-   The X server can report Expose events to clients wanting
-   information about when the contents of window regions have been
-   lost. The circumstances in which the X server generates Expose
-   events are not as definite as those for other events. However,
-   the X server never generates Expose events on windows whose
-   class you specified as InputOnly. The X server can generate
-   Expose events when no valid contents are available for regions
-   of a window and either the regions are visible, the regions are
-   viewable and the server is (perhaps newly) maintaining backing
-   store on the window, or the window is not viewable but the
-   server is (perhaps newly) honoring the window's backing-store
-   attribute of Always or WhenMapped. The regions decompose into
-   an (arbitrary) set of rectangles, and an Expose event is
-   generated for each rectangle. For any given window, the X
-   server guarantees to report contiguously all of the regions
-   exposed by some action that causes Expose events, such as
-   raising a window.
-
-   To receive Expose events, set the ExposureMask bit in the
-   event-mask attribute of the window.
-
-   The structure for this event type contains:
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     int           type;           /* Expose */
-     unsigned long serial;         /* # of last request processed by ser
-ver */
-     Bool          send_event;     /* true if this came from a SendEvent
- request */
-     Display       *display;       /* Display the event was read from */
-     Window        window;
-     int           x, y;
-     int           width, height;
-     int           count;          /* if nonzero, at least this many mor
-e */
-} XExposeEvent;
-
-   The window member is set to the exposed (damaged) window. The x
-   and y members are set to the coordinates relative to the
-   window's origin and indicate the upper-left corner of the
-   rectangle. The width and height members are set to the size
-   (extent) of the rectangle. The count member is set to the
-   number of Expose events that are to follow. If count is zero,
-   no more Expose events follow for this window. However, if count
-   is nonzero, at least that number of Expose events (and possibly
-   more) follow for this window. Simple applications that do not
-   want to optimize redisplay by distinguishing between subareas
-   of its window can just ignore all Expose events with nonzero
-   counts and perform full redisplays on events with zero counts.
-
-GraphicsExpose and NoExpose Events
-
-   The X server can report GraphicsExpose events to clients
-   wanting information about when a destination region could not
-   be computed during certain graphics requests: XCopyArea or
-   XCopyPlane. The X server generates this event whenever a
-   destination region could not be computed because of an obscured
-   or out-of-bounds source region. In addition, the X server
-   guarantees to report contiguously all of the regions exposed by
-   some graphics request (for example, copying an area of a
-   drawable to a destination drawable).
-
-   The X server generates a NoExpose event whenever a graphics
-   request that might produce a GraphicsExpose event does not
-   produce any. In other words, the client is really asking for a
-   GraphicsExpose event but instead receives a NoExpose event.
-
-   To receive GraphicsExpose or NoExpose events, you must first
-   set the graphics-exposure attribute of the graphics context to
-   True. You also can set the graphics-expose attribute when
-   creating a graphics context using XCreateGC or by calling
-   XSetGraphicsExposures.
-
-   The structures for these event types contain:
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     int            type;           /* GraphicsExpose */
-     unsigned long  serial;         /* # of last request processed by se
-rver */
-     Bool           send_event;     /* true if this came from a SendEven
-t request */
-     Display        *display;       /* Display the event was read from *
-/
-     Drawable       drawable;
-     int            x, y;
-     int            width, height;
-     int            count;          /* if nonzero, at least this many mo
-re */
-     int            major_code;     /* core is CopyArea or CopyPlane */
-     int            minor_code;     /* not defined in the core */
-} XGraphicsExposeEvent;
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     int           type;         /* NoExpose */
-     unsigned long serial;       /* # of last request processed by serve
-r */
-     Bool          send_event;   /* true if this came from a SendEvent r
-equest */
-     Display       *display;     /* Display the event was read from */
-     Drawable      drawable;
-     int           major_code;   /* core is CopyArea or CopyPlane */
-     int           minor_code;   /* not defined in the core */
-} XNoExposeEvent;
-
-   Both structures have these common members: drawable,
-   major_code, and minor_code. The drawable member is set to the
-   drawable of the destination region on which the graphics
-   request was to be performed. The major_code member is set to
-   the graphics request initiated by the client and can be either
-   X_CopyArea or X_CopyPlane. If it is X_CopyArea, a call to
-   XCopyArea initiated the request. If it is X_CopyPlane, a call
-   to XCopyPlane initiated the request. These constants are
-   defined in <X11/Xproto.h>. The minor_code member, like the
-   major_code member, indicates which graphics request was
-   initiated by the client. However, the minor_code member is not
-   defined by the core X protocol and will be zero in these cases,
-   although it may be used by an extension.
-
-   The XGraphicsExposeEvent structure has these additional
-   members: x, y, width, height, and count. The x and y members
-   are set to the coordinates relative to the drawable's origin
-   and indicate the upper-left corner of the rectangle. The width
-   and height members are set to the size (extent) of the
-   rectangle. The count member is set to the number of
-   GraphicsExpose events to follow. If count is zero, no more
-   GraphicsExpose events follow for this window. However, if count
-   is nonzero, at least that number of GraphicsExpose events (and
-   possibly more) are to follow for this window.
-
-Window State Change Events
-
-   The following sections discuss:
-     * CirculateNotify events
-     * ConfigureNotify events
-     * CreateNotify events
-     * DestroyNotify events
-     * GravityNotify events
-     * MapNotify events
-     * MappingNotify events
-     * ReparentNotify events
-     * UnmapNotify events
-     * VisibilityNotify events
-
-CirculateNotify Events
-
-   The X server can report CirculateNotify events to clients
-   wanting information about when a window changes its position in
-   the stack. The X server generates this event type whenever a
-   window is actually restacked as a result of a client
-   application calling XCirculateSubwindows,
-   XCirculateSubwindowsUp, or XCirculateSubwindowsDown.
-
-   To receive CirculateNotify events, set the StructureNotifyMask
-   bit in the event-mask attribute of the window or the
-   SubstructureNotifyMask bit in the event-mask attribute of the
-   parent window (in which case, circulating any child generates
-   an event).
-
-   The structure for this event type contains:
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     int type;     /* CirculateNotify */
-     unsigned long serial;     /* # of last request processed by server
-*/
-     Bool send_event;     /* true if this came from a SendEvent request
-*/
-     Display *display;     /* Display the event was read from */
-     Window event;
-     Window window;
-     int place;     /* PlaceOnTop, PlaceOnBottom */
-} XCirculateEvent;
-
-   The event member is set either to the restacked window or to
-   its parent, depending on whether StructureNotify or
-   SubstructureNotify was selected. The window member is set to
-   the window that was restacked. The place member is set to the
-   window's position after the restack occurs and is either
-   PlaceOnTop or PlaceOnBottom. If it is PlaceOnTop, the window is
-   now on top of all siblings. If it is PlaceOnBottom, the window
-   is now below all siblings.
-
-ConfigureNotify Events
-
-   The X server can report ConfigureNotify events to clients
-   wanting information about actual changes to a window's state,
-   such as size, position, border, and stacking order. The X
-   server generates this event type whenever one of the following
-   configure window requests made by a client application actually
-   completes:
-     * A window's size, position, border, and/or stacking order is
-       reconfigured by calling XConfigureWindow.
-     * The window's position in the stacking order is changed by
-       calling XLowerWindow, XRaiseWindow, or XRestackWindows.
-     * A window is moved by calling XMoveWindow.
-     * A window's size is changed by calling XResizeWindow.
-     * A window's size and location is changed by calling
-       XMoveResizeWindow.
-     * A window is mapped and its position in the stacking order
-       is changed by calling XMapRaised.
-     * A window's border width is changed by calling
-       XSetWindowBorderWidth.
-
-   To receive ConfigureNotify events, set the StructureNotifyMask
-   bit in the event-mask attribute of the window or the
-   SubstructureNotifyMask bit in the event-mask attribute of the
-   parent window (in which case, configuring any child generates
-   an event).
-
-   The structure for this event type contains:
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     int           type;       /* ConfigureNotify */
-     unsigned long serial;     /* # of last request processed by server
-*/
-     Bool          send_event; /* true if this came from a SendEvent req
-uest */
-     Display       *display;   /* Display the event was read from */
-     Window        event;
-     Window        window;
-     int           x, y;
-     int           width, height;
-     int           border_width;
-     Window        above;
-     Bool          override_redirect;
-} XConfigureEvent;
-
-   The event member is set either to the reconfigured window or to
-   its parent, depending on whether StructureNotify or
-   SubstructureNotify was selected. The window member is set to
-   the window whose size, position, border, and/or stacking order
-   was changed.
-
-   The x and y members are set to the coordinates relative to the
-   parent window's origin and indicate the position of the
-   upper-left outside corner of the window. The width and height
-   members are set to the inside size of the window, not including
-   the border. The border_width member is set to the width of the
-   window's border, in pixels.
-
-   The above member is set to the sibling window and is used for
-   stacking operations. If the X server sets this member to None,
-   the window whose state was changed is on the bottom of the
-   stack with respect to sibling windows. However, if this member
-   is set to a sibling window, the window whose state was changed
-   is placed on top of this sibling window.
-
-   The override_redirect member is set to the override-redirect
-   attribute of the window. Window manager clients normally should
-   ignore this window if the override_redirect member is True.
-
-CreateNotify Events
-
-   The X server can report CreateNotify events to clients wanting
-   information about creation of windows. The X server generates
-   this event whenever a client application creates a window by
-   calling XCreateWindow or XCreateSimpleWindow.
-
-   To receive CreateNotify events, set the SubstructureNotifyMask
-   bit in the event-mask attribute of the window. Creating any
-   children then generates an event.
-
-   The structure for the event type contains:
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     int           type;               /* CreateNotify */
-     unsigned long serial;             /* # of last request processed by
- server */
-     Bool          send_event;         /* true if this came from a SendE
-vent request */
-     Display       *display;           /* Display the event was read fro
-m */
-     Window        parent;             /* parent of the window */
-     Window        window;             /* window id of window created */
-     int           x, y;               /* window location */
-     int           width, height;      /* size of window */
-     int           border_width;       /* border width */
-     Bool          override_redirect;  /* creation should be overridden
-*/
-} XCreateWindowEvent;
-
-   The parent member is set to the created window's parent. The
-   window member specifies the created window. The x and y members
-   are set to the created window's coordinates relative to the
-   parent window's origin and indicate the position of the
-   upper-left outside corner of the created window. The width and
-   height members are set to the inside size of the created window
-   (not including the border) and are always nonzero. The
-   border_width member is set to the width of the created window's
-   border, in pixels. The override_redirect member is set to the
-   override-redirect attribute of the window. Window manager
-   clients normally should ignore this window if the
-   override_redirect member is True.
-
-DestroyNotify Events
-
-   The X server can report DestroyNotify events to clients wanting
-   information about which windows are destroyed. The X server
-   generates this event whenever a client application destroys a
-   window by calling XDestroyWindow or XDestroySubwindows.
-
-   The ordering of the DestroyNotify events is such that for any
-   given window, DestroyNotify is generated on all inferiors of
-   the window before being generated on the window itself. The X
-   protocol does not constrain the ordering among siblings and
-   across subhierarchies.
-
-   To receive DestroyNotify events, set the StructureNotifyMask
-   bit in the event-mask attribute of the window or the
-   SubstructureNotifyMask bit in the event-mask attribute of the
-   parent window (in which case, destroying any child generates an
-   event).
-
-   The structure for this event type contains:
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     int           type;       /* DestroyNotify */
-     unsigned long serial;     /* # of last request processed by server
-*/
-     Bool          send_event; /* true if this came from a SendEvent req
-uest */
-     Display       *display;   /* Display the event was read from */
-     Window        event;
-     Window        window;
-} XDestroyWindowEvent;
-
-   The event member is set either to the destroyed window or to
-   its parent, depending on whether StructureNotify or
-   SubstructureNotify was selected. The window member is set to
-   the window that is destroyed.
-
-GravityNotify Events
-
-   The X server can report GravityNotify events to clients wanting
-   information about when a window is moved because of a change in
-   the size of its parent. The X server generates this event
-   whenever a client application actually moves a child window as
-   a result of resizing its parent by calling XConfigureWindow,
-   XMoveResizeWindow, or XResizeWindow.
-
-   To receive GravityNotify events, set the StructureNotifyMask
-   bit in the event-mask attribute of the window or the
-   SubstructureNotifyMask bit in the event-mask attribute of the
-   parent window (in which case, any child that is moved because
-   its parent has been resized generates an event).
-
-   The structure for this event type contains:
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     int           type;       /* GravityNotify */
-     unsigned long serial;     /* # of last request processed by server
-*/
-     Bool          send_event; /* true if this came from a SendEvent req
-uest */
-     Display       *display;   /* Display the event was read from */
-     Window        event;
-     Window        window;
-     int           x, y;
-} XGravityEvent;
-
-   The event member is set either to the window that was moved or
-   to its parent, depending on whether StructureNotify or
-   SubstructureNotify was selected. The window member is set to
-   the child window that was moved. The x and y members are set to
-   the coordinates relative to the new parent window's origin and
-   indicate the position of the upper-left outside corner of the
-   window.
-
-MapNotify Events
-
-   The X server can report MapNotify events to clients wanting
-   information about which windows are mapped. The X server
-   generates this event type whenever a client application changes
-   the window's state from unmapped to mapped by calling
-   XMapWindow, XMapRaised, XMapSubwindows, XReparentWindow, or as
-   a result of save-set processing.
-
-   To receive MapNotify events, set the StructureNotifyMask bit in
-   the event-mask attribute of the window or the
-   SubstructureNotifyMask bit in the event-mask attribute of the
-   parent window (in which case, mapping any child generates an
-   event).
-
-   The structure for this event type contains:
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     int           type;                  /* MapNotify */
-     unsigned long serial;                /* # of last request processed
- by server */
-     Bool          send_event;            /* true if this came from a Se
-ndEvent request */
-     Display       *display;              /* Display the event was read
-from */
-     Window        event;
-     Window        window;
-     Bool          override_redirect;     /* boolean, is override set...
- */
-} XMapEvent;
-
-   The event member is set either to the window that was mapped or
-   to its parent, depending on whether StructureNotify or
-   SubstructureNotify was selected. The window member is set to
-   the window that was mapped. The override_redirect member is set
-   to the override-redirect attribute of the window. Window
-   manager clients normally should ignore this window if the
-   override-redirect attribute is True, because these events
-   usually are generated from pop-ups, which override structure
-   control.
-
-MappingNotify Events
-
-   The X server reports MappingNotify events to all clients. There
-   is no mechanism to express disinterest in this event. The X
-   server generates this event type whenever a client application
-   successfully calls:
-     * XSetModifierMapping to indicate which KeyCodes are to be
-       used as modifiers
-     * XChangeKeyboardMapping to change the keyboard mapping
-     * XSetPointerMapping to set the pointer mapping
-
-   The structure for this event type contains:
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     int           type;           /* MappingNotify */
-     unsigned long serial;         /* # of last request processed by ser
-ver */
-     Bool          send_event;     /* true if this came from a SendEvent
- request */
-     Display       *display;       /* Display the event was read from */
-     Window        window;         /* unused */
-     int           request;        /* one of MappingModifier, MappingKey
-board,
-                   MappingPointer  */
-     int           first_keycode;  /* first keycode */
-     int           count;          /* defines range of change w. first_k
-eycode*/
-} XMappingEvent;
-
-   The request member is set to indicate the kind of mapping
-   change that occurred and can be MappingModifier,
-   MappingKeyboard, or MappingPointer. If it is MappingModifier,
-   the modifier mapping was changed. If it is MappingKeyboard, the
-   keyboard mapping was changed. If it is MappingPointer, the
-   pointer button mapping was changed. The first_keycode and count
-   members are set only if the request member was set to
-   MappingKeyboard. The number in first_keycode represents the
-   first number in the range of the altered mapping, and count
-   represents the number of keycodes altered.
-
-   To update the client application's knowledge of the keyboard,
-   you should call XRefreshKeyboardMapping.
-
-ReparentNotify Events
-
-   The X server can report ReparentNotify events to clients
-   wanting information about changing a window's parent. The X
-   server generates this event whenever a client application calls
-   XReparentWindow and the window is actually reparented.
-
-   To receive ReparentNotify events, set the StructureNotifyMask
-   bit in the event-mask attribute of the window or the
-   SubstructureNotifyMask bit in the event-mask attribute of
-   either the old or the new parent window (in which case,
-   reparenting any child generates an event).
-
-   The structure for this event type contains:
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     int           type;       /* ReparentNotify */
-     unsigned long serial;     /* # of last request processed by server
-*/
-     Bool          send_event; /* true if this came from a SendEvent req
-uest */
-     Display       *display;   /* Display the event was read from */
-     Window        event;
-     Window        window;
-     Window        parent;
-     int           x, y;
-     Bool          override_redirect;
-} XReparentEvent;
-
-   The event member is set either to the reparented window or to
-   the old or the new parent, depending on whether StructureNotify
-   or SubstructureNotify was selected. The window member is set to
-   the window that was reparented. The parent member is set to the
-   new parent window. The x and y members are set to the
-   reparented window's coordinates relative to the new parent
-   window's origin and define the upper-left outer corner of the
-   reparented window. The override_redirect member is set to the
-   override-redirect attribute of the window specified by the
-   window member. Window manager clients normally should ignore
-   this window if the override_redirect member is True.
-
-UnmapNotify Events
-
-   The X server can report UnmapNotify events to clients wanting
-   information about which windows are unmapped. The X server
-   generates this event type whenever a client application changes
-   the window's state from mapped to unmapped.
-
-   To receive UnmapNotify events, set the StructureNotifyMask bit
-   in the event-mask attribute of the window or the
-   SubstructureNotifyMask bit in the event-mask attribute of the
-   parent window (in which case, unmapping any child window
-   generates an event).
-
-   The structure for this event type contains:
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     int           type;       /* UnmapNotify */
-     unsigned long serial;     /* # of last request processed by server
-*/
-     Bool          send_event; /* true if this came from a SendEvent req
-uest */
-     Display       *display;   /* Display the event was read from */
-     Window        event;
-     Window        window;
-     Bool          from_configure;
-} XUnmapEvent;
-
-   The event member is set either to the unmapped window or to its
-   parent, depending on whether StructureNotify or
-   SubstructureNotify was selected. This is the window used by the
-   X server to report the event. The window member is set to the
-   window that was unmapped. The from_configure member is set to
-   True if the event was generated as a result of a resizing of
-   the window's parent when the window itself had a win_gravity of
-   UnmapGravity.
-
-VisibilityNotify Events
-
-   The X server can report VisibilityNotify events to clients
-   wanting any change in the visibility of the specified window. A
-   region of a window is visible if someone looking at the screen
-   can actually see it. The X server generates this event whenever
-   the visibility changes state. However, this event is never
-   generated for windows whose class is InputOnly.
-
-   All VisibilityNotify events caused by a hierarchy change are
-   generated after any hierarchy event (UnmapNotify, MapNotify,
-   ConfigureNotify, GravityNotify, CirculateNotify) caused by that
-   change. Any VisibilityNotify event on a given window is
-   generated before any Expose events on that window, but it is
-   not required that all VisibilityNotify events on all windows be
-   generated before all Expose events on all windows. The X
-   protocol does not constrain the ordering of VisibilityNotify
-   events with respect to FocusOut, EnterNotify, and LeaveNotify
-   events.
-
-   To receive VisibilityNotify events, set the
-   VisibilityChangeMask bit in the event-mask attribute of the
-   window.
-
-   The structure for this event type contains:
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     int           type;       /* VisibilityNotify */
-     unsigned long serial;     /* # of last request processed by server
-*/
-     Bool          send_event; /* true if this came from a SendEvent req
-uest */
-     Display       *display;   /* Display the event was read from */
-     Window        window;
-     int           state;
-} XVisibilityEvent;
-
-   The window member is set to the window whose visibility state
-   changes. The state member is set to the state of the window's
-   visibility and can be VisibilityUnobscured,
-   VisibilityPartiallyObscured, or VisibilityFullyObscured. The X
-   server ignores all of a window's subwindows when determining
-   the visibility state of the window and processes
-   VisibilityNotify events according to the following:
-     * When the window changes state from partially obscured,
-       fully obscured, or not viewable to viewable and completely
-       unobscured, the X server generates the event with the state
-       member of the XVisibilityEvent structure set to
-       VisibilityUnobscured.
-     * When the window changes state from viewable and completely
-       unobscured or not viewable to viewable and partially
-       obscured, the X server generates the event with the state
-       member of the XVisibilityEvent structure set to
-       VisibilityPartiallyObscured.
-     * When the window changes state from viewable and completely
-       unobscured, viewable and partially obscured, or not
-       viewable to viewable and fully obscured, the X server
-       generates the event with the state member of the
-       XVisibilityEvent structure set to VisibilityFullyObscured.
-
-Structure Control Events
-
-   This section discusses:
-     * CirculateRequest events
-     * ConfigureRequest events
-     * MapRequest events
-     * ResizeRequest events
-
-CirculateRequest Events
-
-   The X server can report CirculateRequest events to clients
-   wanting information about when another client initiates a
-   circulate window request on a specified window. The X server
-   generates this event type whenever a client initiates a
-   circulate window request on a window and a subwindow actually
-   needs to be restacked. The client initiates a circulate window
-   request on the window by calling XCirculateSubwindows,
-   XCirculateSubwindowsUp, or XCirculateSubwindowsDown.
-
-   To receive CirculateRequest events, set the
-   SubstructureRedirectMask in the event-mask attribute of the
-   window. Then, in the future, the circulate window request for
-   the specified window is not executed, and thus, any subwindow's
-   position in the stack is not changed. For example, suppose a
-   client application calls XCirculateSubwindowsUp to raise a
-   subwindow to the top of the stack. If you had selected
-   SubstructureRedirectMask on the window, the X server reports to
-   you a CirculateRequest event and does not raise the subwindow
-   to the top of the stack.
-
-   The structure for this event type contains:
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     int           type;       /* CirculateRequest */
-     unsigned long serial;     /* # of last request processed by server
-*/
-     Bool          send_event; /* true if this came from a SendEvent req
-uest */
-     Display       *display;   /* Display the event was read from */
-     Window        parent;
-     Window        window;
-     int place;                /* PlaceOnTop, PlaceOnBottom */
-} XCirculateRequestEvent;
-
-   The parent member is set to the parent window. The window
-   member is set to the subwindow to be restacked. The place
-   member is set to what the new position in the stacking order
-   should be and is either PlaceOnTop or PlaceOnBottom. If it is
-   PlaceOnTop, the subwindow should be on top of all siblings. If
-   it is PlaceOnBottom, the subwindow should be below all
-   siblings.
-
-ConfigureRequest Events
-
-   The X server can report ConfigureRequest events to clients
-   wanting information about when a different client initiates a
-   configure window request on any child of a specified window.
-   The configure window request attempts to reconfigure a window's
-   size, position, border, and stacking order. The X server
-   generates this event whenever a different client initiates a
-   configure window request on a window by calling
-   XConfigureWindow, XLowerWindow, XRaiseWindow, XMapRaised,
-   XMoveResizeWindow, XMoveWindow, XResizeWindow, XRestackWindows,
-   or XSetWindowBorderWidth.
-
-   To receive ConfigureRequest events, set the
-   SubstructureRedirectMask bit in the event-mask attribute of the
-   window. ConfigureRequest events are generated when a
-   ConfigureWindow protocol request is issued on a child window by
-   another client. For example, suppose a client application calls
-   XLowerWindow to lower a window. If you had selected
-   SubstructureRedirectMask on the parent window and if the
-   override-redirect attribute of the window is set to False, the
-   X server reports a ConfigureRequest event to you and does not
-   lower the specified window.
-
-   The structure for this event type contains:
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     int           type;         /* ConfigureRequest */
-     unsigned long serial;       /* # of last request processed by serve
-r */
-     Bool          send_event;   /* true if this came from a SendEvent r
-equest */
-     Display       *display;     /* Display the event was read from */
-     Window        parent;
-     Window        window;
-     int           x, y;
-     int           width, height;
-     int           border_width;
-     Window        above;
-     int           detail;       /* Above, Below, TopIf, BottomIf, Oppos
-ite */
-     unsigned long value_mask;
-} XConfigureRequestEvent;
-
-   The parent member is set to the parent window. The window
-   member is set to the window whose size, position, border width,
-   and/or stacking order is to be reconfigured. The value_mask
-   member indicates which components were specified in the
-   ConfigureWindow protocol request. The corresponding values are
-   reported as given in the request. The remaining values are
-   filled in from the current geometry of the window, except in
-   the case of above (sibling) and detail (stack-mode), which are
-   reported as None and Above, respectively, if they are not given
-   in the request.
-
-MapRequest Events
-
-   The X server can report MapRequest events to clients wanting
-   information about a different client's desire to map windows. A
-   window is considered mapped when a map window request
-   completes. The X server generates this event whenever a
-   different client initiates a map window request on an unmapped
-   window whose override_redirect member is set to False. Clients
-   initiate map window requests by calling XMapWindow, XMapRaised,
-   or XMapSubwindows.
-
-   To receive MapRequest events, set the SubstructureRedirectMask
-   bit in the event-mask attribute of the window. This means
-   another client's attempts to map a child window by calling one
-   of the map window request functions is intercepted, and you are
-   sent a MapRequest instead. For example, suppose a client
-   application calls XMapWindow to map a window. If you (usually a
-   window manager) had selected SubstructureRedirectMask on the
-   parent window and if the override-redirect attribute of the
-   window is set to False, the X server reports a MapRequest event
-   to you and does not map the specified window. Thus, this event
-   gives your window manager client the ability to control the
-   placement of subwindows.
-
-   The structure for this event type contains:
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     int           type;       /* MapRequest */
-     unsigned long serial;     /* # of last request processed by server
-*/
-     Bool          send_event; /* true if this came from a SendEvent req
-uest */
-     Display       *display;   /* Display the event was read from */
-     Window        parent;
-     Window        window;
-} XMapRequestEvent;
-
-   The parent member is set to the parent window. The window
-   member is set to the window to be mapped.
-
-ResizeRequest Events
-
-   The X server can report ResizeRequest events to clients wanting
-   information about another client's attempts to change the size
-   of a window. The X server generates this event whenever some
-   other client attempts to change the size of the specified
-   window by calling XConfigureWindow, XResizeWindow, or
-   XMoveResizeWindow.
-
-   To receive ResizeRequest events, set the ResizeRedirect bit in
-   the event-mask attribute of the window. Any attempts to change
-   the size by other clients are then redirected.
-
-   The structure for this event type contains:
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     int           type;        /* ResizeRequest */
-     unsigned long serial;      /* # of last request processed by server
- */
-     Bool          send_event;  /* true if this came from a SendEvent re
-quest */
-     Display       *display;    /* Display the event was read from */
-     Window        window;
-     int           width, height;
-} XResizeRequestEvent;
-
-   The window member is set to the window whose size another
-   client attempted to change. The width and height members are
-   set to the inside size of the window, excluding the border.
-
-Colormap State Change Events
-
-   The X server can report ColormapNotify events to clients
-   wanting information about when the colormap changes and when a
-   colormap is installed or uninstalled. The X server generates
-   this event type whenever a client application:
-     * Changes the colormap member of the XSetWindowAttributes
-       structure by calling XChangeWindowAttributes,
-       XFreeColormap, or XSetWindowColormap
-     * Installs or uninstalls the colormap by calling
-       XInstallColormap or XUninstallColormap
-
-   To receive ColormapNotify events, set the ColormapChangeMask
-   bit in the event-mask attribute of the window.
-
-   The structure for this event type contains:
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     int           type;       /* ColormapNotify */
-     unsigned long serial;     /* # of last request processed by server
-*/
-     Bool          send_event; /* true if this came from a SendEvent req
-uest */
-     Display       *display;   /* Display the event was read from */
-     Window        window;
-     Colormap      colormap;   /* colormap or None */
-     Bool          new;
-     int           state;      /* ColormapInstalled, ColormapUninstalled
- */
-} XColormapEvent;
-
-   The window member is set to the window whose associated
-   colormap is changed, installed, or uninstalled. For a colormap
-   that is changed, installed, or uninstalled, the colormap member
-   is set to the colormap associated with the window. For a
-   colormap that is changed by a call to XFreeColormap, the
-   colormap member is set to None. The new member is set to
-   indicate whether the colormap for the specified window was
-   changed or installed or uninstalled and can be True or False.
-   If it is True, the colormap was changed. If it is False, the
-   colormap was installed or uninstalled. The state member is
-   always set to indicate whether the colormap is installed or
-   uninstalled and can be ColormapInstalled or
-   ColormapUninstalled.
-
-Client Communication Events
-
-   This section discusses:
-     * ClientMessage events
-     * PropertyNotify events
-     * SelectionClear events
-     * SelectionNotify events
-     * SelectionRequest events
-
-ClientMessage Events
-
-   The X server generates ClientMessage events only when a client
-   calls the function XSendEvent.
-
-   The structure for this event type contains:
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     int           type;           /* ClientMessage */
-     unsigned long serial;         /* # of last request processed by ser
-ver */
-     Bool          send_event;     /* true if this came from a SendEvent
- request */
-     Display       *display;       /* Display the event was read from */
-     Window        window;
-     Atom          message_type;
-     int           format;
-     union         {
-                     char  b[20];
-                     short s[10];
-                     long  l[5];
-                   } data;
-} XClientMessageEvent;
-
-   The message_type member is set to an atom that indicates how
-   the data should be interpreted by the receiving client. The
-   format member is set to 8, 16, or 32 and specifies whether the
-   data should be viewed as a list of bytes, shorts, or longs. The
-   data member is a union that contains the members b, s, and l.
-   The b, s, and l members represent data of twenty 8-bit values,
-   ten 16-bit values, and five 32-bit values. Particular message
-   types might not make use of all these values. The X server
-   places no interpretation on the values in the window,
-   message_type, or data members.
-
-PropertyNotify Events
-
-   The X server can report PropertyNotify events to clients
-   wanting information about property changes for a specified
-   window.
-
-   To receive PropertyNotify events, set the PropertyChangeMask
-   bit in the event-mask attribute of the window.
-
-   The structure for this event type contains:
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     int           type;       /* PropertyNotify */
-     unsigned long serial;     /* # of last request processed by server
-*/
-     Bool          send_event; /* true if this came from a SendEvent req
-uest */
-     Display       *display;   /* Display the event was read from */
-     Window        window;
-     Atom atom;
-     Time time;
-     int state;                /* PropertyNewValue or PropertyDelete */
-} XPropertyEvent;
-
-   The window member is set to the window whose associated
-   property was changed. The atom member is set to the property's
-   atom and indicates which property was changed or desired. The
-   time member is set to the server time when the property was
-   changed. The state member is set to indicate whether the
-   property was changed to a new value or deleted and can be
-   PropertyNewValue or PropertyDelete. The state member is set to
-   PropertyNewValue when a property of the window is changed using
-   XChangeProperty or XRotateWindowProperties (even when adding
-   zero-length data using XChangeProperty) and when replacing all
-   or part of a property with identical data using XChangeProperty
-   or XRotateWindowProperties. The state member is set to
-   PropertyDelete when a property of the window is deleted using
-   XDeleteProperty or, if the delete argument is True,
-   XGetWindowProperty.
-
-SelectionClear Events
-
-   The X server reports SelectionClear events to the client losing
-   ownership of a selection. The X server generates this event
-   type when another client asserts ownership of the selection by
-   calling XSetSelectionOwner.
-
-   The structure for this event type contains:
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     int           type;       /* SelectionClear */
-     unsigned long serial;     /* # of last request processed by server
-*/
-     Bool          send_event; /* true if this came from a SendEvent req
-uest */
-     Display       *display;   /* Display the event was read from */
-     Window        window;
-     Atom          selection;
-     Time          time;
-} XSelectionClearEvent;
-
-   The selection member is set to the selection atom. The time
-   member is set to the last change time recorded for the
-   selection. The window member is the window that was specified
-   by the current owner (the owner losing the selection) in its
-   XSetSelectionOwner call.
-
-SelectionRequest Events
-
-   The X server reports SelectionRequest events to the owner of a
-   selection. The X server generates this event whenever a client
-   requests a selection conversion by calling XConvertSelection
-   for the owned selection.
-
-   The structure for this event type contains:
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     int           type;       /* SelectionRequest */
-     unsigned long serial;     /* # of last request processed by server
-*/
-     Bool          send_event; /* true if this came from a SendEvent req
-uest */
-     Display       *display;   /* Display the event was read from */
-     Window        owner;
-     Window        requestor;
-     Atom          selection;
-     Atom          target;
-     Atom          property;
-     Time          time;
-} XSelectionRequestEvent;
-
-   The owner member is set to the window that was specified by the
-   current owner in its XSetSelectionOwner call. The requestor
-   member is set to the window requesting the selection. The
-   selection member is set to the atom that names the selection.
-   For example, PRIMARY is used to indicate the primary selection.
-   The target member is set to the atom that indicates the type
-   the selection is desired in. The property member can be a
-   property name or None. The time member is set to the timestamp
-   or CurrentTime value from the ConvertSelection request.
-
-   The owner should convert the selection based on the specified
-   target type and send a SelectionNotify event back to the
-   requestor. A complete specification for using selections is
-   given in the X Consortium standard Inter-Client Communication
-   Conventions Manual.
-
-SelectionNotify Events
-
-   This event is generated by the X server in response to a
-   ConvertSelection protocol request when there is no owner for
-   the selection. When there is an owner, it should be generated
-   by the owner of the selection by using XSendEvent. The owner of
-   a selection should send this event to a requestor when a
-   selection has been converted and stored as a property or when a
-   selection conversion could not be performed (which is indicated
-   by setting the property member to None).
-
-   If None is specified as the property in the ConvertSelection
-   protocol request, the owner should choose a property name,
-   store the result as that property on the requestor window, and
-   then send a SelectionNotify giving that actual property name.
-
-   The structure for this event type contains:
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     int           type;       /* SelectionNotify */
-     unsigned long serial;     /* # of last request processed by server
-*/
-     Bool          send_event; /* true if this came from a SendEvent req
-uest */
-     Display       *display;   /* Display the event was read from */
-     Window        requestor;
-     Atom          selection;
-     Atom          target;
-     Atom          property;   /* atom or None */
-     Time          time;
-} XSelectionEvent;
-
-   The requestor member is set to the window associated with the
-   requestor of the selection. The selection member is set to the
-   atom that indicates the selection. For example, PRIMARY is used
-   for the primary selection. The target member is set to the atom
-   that indicates the converted type. For example, PIXMAP is used
-   for a pixmap. The property member is set to the atom that
-   indicates which property the result was stored on. If the
-   conversion failed, the property member is set to None. The time
-   member is set to the time the conversion took place and can be
-   a timestamp or CurrentTime.
-
-Chapter 11. Event Handling Functions
-
-   Table of Contents
-
-   Selecting Events
-   Handling the Output Buffer
-   Event Queue Management
-   Manipulating the Event Queue
-
-        Returning the Next Event
-        Selecting Events Using a Predicate Procedure
-        Selecting Events Using a Window or Event Mask
-
-   Putting an Event Back into the Queue
-   Sending Events to Other Applications
-   Getting Pointer Motion History
-   Handling Protocol Errors
-
-        Enabling or Disabling Synchronization
-        Using the Default Error Handlers
-
-   This chapter discusses the Xlib functions you can use to:
-     * Select events
-     * Handle the output buffer and the event queue
-     * Select events from the event queue
-     * Send and get events
-     * Handle protocol errors
-
-Note
-
-   Some toolkits use their own event-handling functions and do not
-   allow you to interchange these event-handling functions with
-   those in Xlib. For further information, see the documentation
-   supplied with the toolkit.
-
-   Most applications simply are event loops: they wait for an
-   event, decide what to do with it, execute some amount of code
-   that results in changes to the display, and then wait for the
-   next event.
-
-Selecting Events
-
-   There are two ways to select the events you want reported to
-   your client application. One way is to set the event_mask
-   member of the XSetWindowAttributes structure when you call
-   XCreateWindow and XChangeWindowAttributes. Another way is to
-   use XSelectInput.
-
-   XSelectInput(Display *display, Window w, long event_mask);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window whose events you are interested in.
-
-   event_mask
-
-   Specifies the event mask.
-
-   The XSelectInput function requests that the X server report the
-   events associated with the specified event mask. Initially, X
-   will not report any of these events. Events are reported
-   relative to a window. If a window is not interested in a device
-   event, it usually propagates to the closest ancestor that is
-   interested, unless the do_not_propagate mask prohibits it.
-
-   Setting the event-mask attribute of a window overrides any
-   previous call for the same window but not for other clients.
-   Multiple clients can select for the same events on the same
-   window with the following restrictions:
-     * Multiple clients can select events on the same window
-       because their event masks are disjoint. When the X server
-       generates an event, it reports it to all interested
-       clients.
-     * Only one client at a time can select CirculateRequest,
-       ConfigureRequest, or MapRequest events, which are
-       associated with the event mask SubstructureRedirectMask.
-     * Only one client at a time can select a ResizeRequest event,
-       which is associated with the event mask ResizeRedirectMask.
-     * Only one client at a time can select a ButtonPress event,
-       which is associated with the event mask ButtonPressMask.
-
-   The server reports the event to all interested clients.
-
-   XSelectInput can generate a BadWindow error.
-
-Handling the Output Buffer
-
-   The output buffer is an area used by Xlib to store requests.
-   The functions described in this section flush the output buffer
-   if the function would block or not return an event. That is,
-   all requests residing in the output buffer that have not yet
-   been sent are transmitted to the X server. These functions
-   differ in the additional tasks they might perform.
-
-   To flush the output buffer, use XFlush.
-
-   XFlush(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   The XFlush function flushes the output buffer. Most client
-   applications need not use this function because the output
-   buffer is automatically flushed as needed by calls to XPending,
-   XNextEvent, and XWindowEvent. Events generated by the server
-   may be enqueued into the library's event queue.
-
-   To flush the output buffer and then wait until all requests
-   have been processed, use XSync.
-
-   XSync(Display *display, Bool discard);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   discard
-
-   Specifies a Boolean value that indicates whether XSync discards
-   all events on the event queue.
-
-   The XSync function flushes the output buffer and then waits
-   until all requests have been received and processed by the X
-   server. Any errors generated must be handled by the error
-   handler. For each protocol error received by Xlib, XSync calls
-   the client application's error handling routine (see section
-   11.8.2). Any events generated by the server are enqueued into
-   the library's event queue.
-
-   Finally, if you passed False, XSync does not discard the events
-   in the queue. If you passed True, XSync discards all events in
-   the queue, including those events that were on the queue before
-   XSync was called. Client applications seldom need to call
-   XSync.
-
-Event Queue Management
-
-   Xlib maintains an event queue. However, the operating system
-   also may be buffering data in its network connection that is
-   not yet read into the event queue.
-
-   To check the number of events in the event queue, use
-   XEventsQueued.
-
-   int XEventsQueued(Display *display, int mode);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   mode
-
-   Specifies the mode. You can pass QueuedAlready,
-   QueuedAfterFlush, or QueuedAfterReading.
-
-   If mode is QueuedAlready, XEventsQueued returns the number of
-   events already in the event queue (and never performs a system
-   call). If mode is QueuedAfterFlush, XEventsQueued returns the
-   number of events already in the queue if the number is nonzero.
-   If there are no events in the queue, XEventsQueued flushes the
-   output buffer, attempts to read more events out of the
-   application's connection, and returns the number read. If mode
-   is QueuedAfterReading, XEventsQueued returns the number of
-   events already in the queue if the number is nonzero. If there
-   are no events in the queue, XEventsQueued attempts to read more
-   events out of the application's connection without flushing the
-   output buffer and returns the number read.
-
-   XEventsQueued always returns immediately without I/O if there
-   are events already in the queue. XEventsQueued with mode
-   QueuedAfterFlush is identical in behavior to XPending.
-   XEventsQueued with mode QueuedAlready is identical to the
-   XQLength function.
-
-   To return the number of events that are pending, use XPending.
-
-   int XPending(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   The XPending function returns the number of events that have
-   been received from the X server but have not been removed from
-   the event queue. XPending is identical to XEventsQueued with
-   the mode QueuedAfterFlush specified.
-
-Manipulating the Event Queue
-
-   Xlib provides functions that let you manipulate the event
-   queue. This section discusses how to:
-     * Obtain events, in order, and remove them from the queue
-     * Peek at events in the queue without removing them
-     * Obtain events that match the event mask or the arbitrary
-       predicate procedures that you provide
-
-Returning the Next Event
-
-   To get the next event and remove it from the queue, use
-   XNextEvent.
-
-   XNextEvent(Display *display, XEvent *event_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   event_return
-
-   Returns the next event in the queue.
-
-   The XNextEvent function copies the first event from the event
-   queue into the specified XEvent structure and then removes it
-   from the queue. If the event queue is empty, XNextEvent flushes
-   the output buffer and blocks until an event is received.
-
-   To peek at the event queue, use XPeekEvent.
-
-   XPeekEvent(Display *display, XEvent *event_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   event_return
-
-   Returns a copy of the matched event's associated structure.
-
-   The XPeekEvent function returns the first event from the event
-   queue, but it does not remove the event from the queue. If the
-   queue is empty, XPeekEvent flushes the output buffer and blocks
-   until an event is received. It then copies the event into the
-   client-supplied XEvent structure without removing it from the
-   event queue.
-
-Selecting Events Using a Predicate Procedure
-
-   Each of the functions discussed in this section requires you to
-   pass a predicate procedure that determines if an event matches
-   what you want. Your predicate procedure must decide if the
-   event is useful without calling any Xlib functions. If the
-   predicate directly or indirectly causes the state of the event
-   queue to change, the result is not defined. If Xlib has been
-   initialized for threads, the predicate is called with the
-   display locked and the result of a call by the predicate to any
-   Xlib function that locks the display is not defined unless the
-   caller has first called XLockDisplay.
-
-   The predicate procedure and its associated arguments are:
-
-   Bool(Display *display, XEvent *event, XPointer arg);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   event
-
-   Specifies the XEvent structure.
-
-   arg
-
-   Specifies the argument passed in from the XIfEvent,
-   XCheckIfEvent, or XPeekIfEvent function.
-
-   The predicate procedure is called once for each event in the
-   queue until it finds a match. After finding a match, the
-   predicate procedure must return True. If it did not find a
-   match, it must return False.
-
-   To check the event queue for a matching event and, if found,
-   remove the event from the queue, use XIfEvent.
-
-   XIfEvent(Display *display, XEvent *event_return, Bool
-   (*predicate)(), XPointer arg);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   event_return
-
-   Returns the matched event's associated structure.
-
-   predicate
-
-   Specifies the procedure that is to be called to determine if
-   the next event in the queue matches what you want.
-
-   arg
-
-   Specifies the user-supplied argument that will be passed to the
-   predicate procedure.
-
-   The XIfEvent function completes only when the specified
-   predicate procedure returns True for an event, which indicates
-   an event in the queue matches. XIfEvent flushes the output
-   buffer if it blocks waiting for additional events. XIfEvent
-   removes the matching event from the queue and copies the
-   structure into the client-supplied XEvent structure.
-
-   To check the event queue for a matching event without blocking,
-   use XCheckIfEvent.
-
-   Bool XCheckIfEvent(Display *display, XEvent *event_return, Bool
-   (*predicate)(), XPointer arg);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   event_return
-
-   Returns a copy of the matched event's associated structure.
-
-   predicate
-
-   Specifies the procedure that is to be called to determine if
-   the next event in the queue matches what you want.
-
-   arg
-
-   Specifies the user-supplied argument that will be passed to the
-   predicate procedure.
-
-   When the predicate procedure finds a match, XCheckIfEvent
-   copies the matched event into the client-supplied XEvent
-   structure and returns True. (This event is removed from the
-   queue.) If the predicate procedure finds no match,
-   XCheckIfEvent returns False, and the output buffer will have
-   been flushed. All earlier events stored in the queue are not
-   discarded.
-
-   To check the event queue for a matching event without removing
-   the event from the queue, use XPeekIfEvent.
-
-   XPeekIfEvent(Display *display, XEvent *event_return, Bool
-   (*predicate)(), XPointer arg);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   event_return
-
-   Returns a copy of the matched event's associated structure.
-
-   predicate
-
-   Specifies the procedure that is to be called to determine if
-   the next event in the queue matches what you want.
-
-   arg
-
-   Specifies the user-supplied argument that will be passed to the
-   predicate procedure.
-
-   The XPeekIfEvent function returns only when the specified
-   predicate procedure returns True for an event. After the
-   predicate procedure finds a match, XPeekIfEvent copies the
-   matched event into the client-supplied XEvent structure without
-   removing the event from the queue. XPeekIfEvent flushes the
-   output buffer if it blocks waiting for additional events.
-
-Selecting Events Using a Window or Event Mask
-
-   The functions discussed in this section let you select events
-   by window or event types, allowing you to process events out of
-   order.
-
-   To remove the next event that matches both a window and an
-   event mask, use XWindowEvent.
-
-   XWindowEvent(Display *display, Window w, long event_mask,
-   XEvent *event_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window whose events you are interested in.
-
-   event_mask
-
-   Specifies the event mask.
-
-   event_return
-
-   Returns the matched event's associated structure.
-
-   The XWindowEvent function searches the event queue for an event
-   that matches both the specified window and event mask. When it
-   finds a match, XWindowEvent removes that event from the queue
-   and copies it into the specified XEvent structure. The other
-   events stored in the queue are not discarded. If a matching
-   event is not in the queue, XWindowEvent flushes the output
-   buffer and blocks until one is received.
-
-   To remove the next event that matches both a window and an
-   event mask (if any), use XCheckWindowEvent. This function is
-   similar to XWindowEvent except that it never blocks and it
-   returns a Bool indicating if the event was returned.
-
-   Bool XCheckWindowEvent(Display *display, Window w, long
-   event_mask, XEvent *event_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window whose events you are interested in.
-
-   event_mask
-
-   Specifies the event mask.
-
-   event_return
-
-   Returns the matched event's associated structure.
-
-   The XCheckWindowEvent function searches the event queue and
-   then the events available on the server connection for the
-   first event that matches the specified window and event mask.
-   If it finds a match, XCheckWindowEvent removes that event,
-   copies it into the specified XEvent structure, and returns
-   True. The other events stored in the queue are not discarded.
-   If the event you requested is not available, XCheckWindowEvent
-   returns False, and the output buffer will have been flushed.
-
-   To remove the next event that matches an event mask, use
-   XMaskEvent.
-
-   XMaskEvent(Display *display, long event_mask, XEvent
-   *event_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   event_mask
-
-   Specifies the event mask.
-
-   event_return
-
-   Returns the matched event's associated structure.
-
-   The XMaskEvent function searches the event queue for the events
-   associated with the specified mask. When it finds a match,
-   XMaskEvent removes that event and copies it into the specified
-   XEvent structure. The other events stored in the queue are not
-   discarded. If the event you requested is not in the queue,
-   XMaskEvent flushes the output buffer and blocks until one is
-   received.
-
-   To return and remove the next event that matches an event mask
-   (if any), use XCheckMaskEvent. This function is similar to
-   XMaskEvent except that it never blocks and it returns a Bool
-   indicating if the event was returned.
-
-   Bool XCheckMaskEvent(Display *display, long event_mask, XEvent
-   *event_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   event_mask
-
-   Specifies the event mask.
-
-   event_return
-
-   Returns the matched event's associated structure.
-
-   The XCheckMaskEvent function searches the event queue and then
-   any events available on the server connection for the first
-   event that matches the specified mask. If it finds a match,
-   XCheckMaskEvent removes that event, copies it into the
-   specified XEvent structure, and returns True. The other events
-   stored in the queue are not discarded. If the event you
-   requested is not available, XCheckMaskEvent returns False, and
-   the output buffer will have been flushed.
-
-   To return and remove the next event in the queue that matches
-   an event type, use XCheckTypedEvent.
-
-   Bool XCheckTypedEvent(Display *display, int event_type, XEvent
-   *event_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   event_type
-
-   Specifies the event type to be compared.
-
-   event_return
-
-   Returns the matched event's associated structure.
-
-   The XCheckTypedEvent function searches the event queue and then
-   any events available on the server connection for the first
-   event that matches the specified type. If it finds a match,
-   XCheckTypedEvent removes that event, copies it into the
-   specified XEvent structure, and returns True. The other events
-   in the queue are not discarded. If the event is not available,
-   XCheckTypedEvent returns False, and the output buffer will have
-   been flushed.
-
-   To return and remove the next event in the queue that matches
-   an event type and a window, use XCheckTypedWindowEvent.
-
-   Bool XCheckTypedWindowEvent(Display *display, Window w, int
-   event_type, XEvent *event_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   event_type
-
-   Specifies the event type to be compared.
-
-   event_return
-
-   Returns the matched event's associated structure.
-
-   The XCheckTypedWindowEvent function searches the event queue
-   and then any events available on the server connection for the
-   first event that matches the specified type and window. If it
-   finds a match, XCheckTypedWindowEvent removes the event from
-   the queue, copies it into the specified XEvent structure, and
-   returns True. The other events in the queue are not discarded.
-   If the event is not available, XCheckTypedWindowEvent returns
-   False, and the output buffer will have been flushed.
-
-Putting an Event Back into the Queue
-
-   To push an event back into the event queue, use XPutBackEvent.
-
-   XPutBackEvent(Display *display, XEvent *event);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   event
-
-   Specifies the event.
-
-   The XPutBackEvent function pushes an event back onto the head
-   of the display's event queue by copying the event into the
-   queue. This can be useful if you read an event and then decide
-   that you would rather deal with it later. There is no limit to
-   the number of times in succession that you can call
-   XPutBackEvent.
-
-Sending Events to Other Applications
-
-   To send an event to a specified window, use XSendEvent. This
-   function is often used in selection processing. For example,
-   the owner of a selection should use XSendEvent to send a
-   SelectionNotify event to a requestor when a selection has been
-   converted and stored as a property.
-
-   Status XSendEvent(Display *display, Window w, Bool propagate,
-   long event_mask, XEvent *event_send);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window the event is to be sent to, or
-   PointerWindow, or InputFocus.
-
-   propagate
-
-   Specifies a Boolean value.
-
-   event_mask
-
-   Specifies the event mask.
-
-   event_send
-
-   Specifies the event that is to be sent.
-
-   The XSendEvent function identifies the destination window,
-   determines which clients should receive the specified events,
-   and ignores any active grabs. This function requires you to
-   pass an event mask. For a discussion of the valid event mask
-   names, see section 10.3. This function uses the w argument to
-   identify the destination window as follows:
-     * If w is PointerWindow, the destination window is the window
-       that contains the pointer.
-     * If w is InputFocus and if the focus window contains the
-       pointer, the destination window is the window that contains
-       the pointer; otherwise, the destination window is the focus
-       window.
-
-   To determine which clients should receive the specified events,
-   XSendEvent uses the propagate argument as follows:
-     * If event_mask is the empty set, the event is sent to the
-       client that created the destination window. If that client
-       no longer exists, no event is sent.
-     * If propagate is False, the event is sent to every client
-       selecting on destination any of the event types in the
-       event_mask argument.
-     * If propagate is True and no clients have selected on
-       destination any of the event types in event-mask, the
-       destination is replaced with the closest ancestor of
-       destination for which some client has selected a type in
-       event-mask and for which no intervening window has that
-       type in its do-not-propagate-mask. If no such window exists
-       or if the window is an ancestor of the focus window and
-       InputFocus was originally specified as the destination, the
-       event is not sent to any clients. Otherwise, the event is
-       reported to every client selecting on the final destination
-       any of the types specified in event_mask.
-
-   The event in the XEvent structure must be one of the core
-   events or one of the events defined by an extension (or a
-   BadValue error results) so that the X server can correctly
-   byte-swap the contents as necessary. The contents of the event
-   are otherwise unaltered and unchecked by the X server except to
-   force send_event to True in the forwarded event and to set the
-   serial number in the event correctly; therefore these fields
-   and the display field are ignored by XSendEvent.
-
-   XSendEvent returns zero if the conversion to wire protocol
-   format failed and returns nonzero otherwise.
-
-   XSendEvent can generate BadValue and BadWindow errors.
-
-Getting Pointer Motion History
-
-   Some X server implementations will maintain a more complete
-   history of pointer motion than is reported by event
-   notification. The pointer position at each pointer hardware
-   interrupt may be stored in a buffer for later retrieval. This
-   buffer is called the motion history buffer. For example, a few
-   applications, such as paint programs, want to have a precise
-   history of where the pointer traveled. However, this historical
-   information is highly excessive for most applications.
-
-   To determine the approximate maximum number of elements in the
-   motion buffer, use XDisplayMotionBufferSize.
-
-   unsigned long(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   The server may retain the recent history of the pointer motion
-   and do so to a finer granularity than is reported by
-   MotionNotify events. The function makes this history available.
-
-   To get the motion history for a specified window and time, use
-   .
-
-   XTimeCoord *XGetMotionEvents(Display *display, Window w, Time
-   start, Time stop, int *nevents_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   start
-
-   stop
-
-   Specify the time interval in which the events are returned from
-   the motion history buffer. You can pass a timestamp or
-   CurrentTime.
-
-   nevents_return
-
-   Returns the number of events from the motion history buffer.
-
-   The function returns all events in the motion history buffer
-   that fall between the specified start and stop times,
-   inclusive, and that have coordinates that lie within the
-   specified window (including its borders) at its present
-   placement. If the server does not support motion history, if
-   the start time is later than the stop time, or if the start
-   time is in the future, no events are returned; returns NULL. If
-   the stop time is in the future, it is equivalent to specifying
-   CurrentTime. The return type for this function is a structure
-   defined as follows:
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-        Time time;
-        short x, y;
-} XTimeCoord;
-
-   The time member is set to the time, in milliseconds. The x and
-   y members are set to the coordinates of the pointer and are
-   reported relative to the origin of the specified window. To
-   free the data returned from this call, use XFree.
-
-   can generate a BadWindow error.
-
-Handling Protocol Errors
-
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to enable or disable
-   synchronization and to use the default error handlers.
-
-Enabling or Disabling Synchronization
-
-   When debugging X applications, it often is very convenient to
-   require Xlib to behave synchronously so that errors are
-   reported as they occur. The following function lets you disable
-   or enable synchronous behavior. Note that graphics may occur 30
-   or more times more slowly when synchronization is enabled. On
-   POSIX-conformant systems, there is also a global variable
-   _Xdebug that, if set to nonzero before starting a program under
-   a debugger, will force synchronous library behavior.
-
-   After completing their work, all Xlib functions that generate
-   protocol requests call what is known as an after function. sets
-   which function is to be called.
-
-   int(Display *display, int (*procedure)());
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   procedure
-
-   Specifies the procedure to be called.
-
-   The specified procedure is called with only a display pointer.
-   returns the previous after function.
-
-   To enable or disable synchronization, use XSynchronize.
-
-   int(Display *display, Bool onoff);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   onoff
-
-   Specifies a Boolean value that indicates whether to enable or
-   disable synchronization.
-
-   The XSynchronize function returns the previous after function.
-   If onoff is True, XSynchronize turns on synchronous behavior.
-   If onoff is False, XSynchronize turns off synchronous behavior.
-
-Using the Default Error Handlers
-
-   There are two default error handlers in Xlib: one to handle
-   typically fatal conditions (for example, the connection to a
-   display server dying because a machine crashed) and one to
-   handle protocol errors from the X server. These error handlers
-   can be changed to user-supplied routines if you prefer your own
-   error handling and can be changed as often as you like. If
-   either function is passed a NULL pointer, it will reinvoke the
-   default handler. The action of the default handlers is to print
-   an explanatory message and exit.
-
-   To set the error handler, use XSetErrorHandler.
-
-   int *XSetErrorHandler(int *handler);
-
-   handler
-
-   Specifies the program's supplied error handler.
-
-   Xlib generally calls the program's supplied error handler
-   whenever an error is received. It is not called on BadName
-   errors from OpenFont, LookupColor, or AllocNamedColor protocol
-   requests or on BadFont errors from a QueryFont protocol
-   request. These errors generally are reflected back to the
-   program through the procedural interface. Because this
-   condition is not assumed to be fatal, it is acceptable for your
-   error handler to return; the returned value is ignored.
-   However, the error handler should not call any functions
-   (directly or indirectly) on the display that will generate
-   protocol requests or that will look for input events. The
-   previous error handler is returned.
-
-   The XErrorEvent structure contains:
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-        int type;
-        Display *display;       /* Display the event was read from */
-        unsigned long serial;           /* serial number of failed reque
-st */
-        unsigned char error_code;       /* error code of failed request
-*/
-        unsigned char request_code;     /* Major op-code of failed reque
-st */
-        unsigned char minor_code;       /* Minor op-code of failed reque
-st */
-        XID resourceid;         /* resource id */
-} XErrorEvent;
-
-   The serial member is the number of requests, starting from one,
-   sent over the network connection since it was opened. It is the
-   number that was the value of NextRequest immediately before the
-   failing call was made. The request_code member is a protocol
-   request of the procedure that failed, as defined in
-   <X11/Xproto.h>. The following error codes can be returned by
-   the functions described in this chapter:
-   Error Code Description
-   BadAccess
-
-   A client attempts to grab a key/button combination already
-   grabbed by another client.
-
-   A client attempts to free a colormap entry that it had not
-   already allocated or to free an entry in a colormap that was
-   created with all entries writable.
-
-   A client attempts to store into a read-only or unallocated
-   colormap entry.
-
-   A client attempts to modify the access control list from other
-   than the local (or otherwise authorized) host.
-
-   A client attempts to select an event type that another client
-   has already selected.
-   BadAlloc The server fails to allocate the requested resource.
-   Note that the explicit listing of BadAlloc errors in requests
-   only covers allocation errors at a very coarse level and is not
-   intended to (nor can it in practice hope to) cover all cases of
-   a server running out of allocation space in the middle of
-   service. The semantics when a server runs out of allocation
-   space are left unspecified, but a server may generate a
-   BadAlloc error on any request for this reason, and clients
-   should be prepared to receive such errors and handle or discard
-   them.
-   BadAtom A value for an atom argument does not name a defined
-   atom.
-   BadColor A value for a colormap argument does not name a
-   defined colormap.
-   BadCursor A value for a cursor argument does not name a defined
-   cursor.
-   BadDrawable A value for a drawable argument does not name a
-   defined window or pixmap.
-   BadFont A value for a font argument does not name a defined
-   font (or, in some cases, GContext).
-   BadGC A value for a GContext argument does not name a defined
-   GContext.
-   BadIDChoice The value chosen for a resource identifier either
-   is not included in the range assigned to the client or is
-   already in use. Under normal circumstances, this cannot occur
-   and should be considered a server or Xlib error.
-   BadImplementation The server does not implement some aspect of
-   the request. A server that generates this error for a core
-   request is deficient. As such, this error is not listed for any
-   of the requests, but clients should be prepared to receive such
-   errors and handle or discard them.
-   BadLength
-
-   The length of a request is shorter or longer than that required
-   to contain the arguments. This is an internal Xlib or server
-   error.
-
-   The length of a request exceeds the maximum length accepted by
-   the server.
-   BadMatch
-
-   In a graphics request, the root and depth of the graphics
-   context do not match those of the drawable.
-
-   An InputOnly window is used as a drawable.
-
-   Some argument or pair of arguments has the correct type and
-   range, but it fails to match in some other way required by the
-   request.
-
-   An InputOnly window lacks this attribute.
-   BadName A font or color of the specified name does not exist.
-   BadPixmap A value for a pixmap argument does not name a defined
-   pixmap.
-   BadRequest The major or minor opcode does not specify a valid
-   request. This usually is an Xlib or server error.
-   BadValue Some numeric value falls outside of the range of
-   values accepted by the request. Unless a specific range is
-   specified for an argument, the full range defined by the
-   argument's type is accepted. Any argument defined as a set of
-   alternatives typically can generate this error (due to the
-   encoding).
-   BadWindow A value for a window argument does not name a defined
-   window.
-
-Note
-
-   The BadAtom, BadColor, BadCursor, BadDrawable, BadFont, BadGC,
-   BadPixmap, and BadWindow errors are also used when the argument
-   type is extended by a set of fixed alternatives.
-
-   To obtain textual descriptions of the specified error code, use
-   XGetErrorText.
-
-   XGetErrorText(Display *display, int code, char *buffer_return,
-   int length);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   code
-
-   Specifies the error code for which you want to obtain a
-   description.
-
-   buffer_return
-
-   Returns the error description.
-
-   length
-
-   Specifies the size of the buffer.
-
-   The XGetErrorText function copies a null-terminated string
-   describing the specified error code into the specified buffer.
-   The returned text is in the encoding of the current locale. It
-   is recommended that you use this function to obtain an error
-   description because extensions to Xlib may define their own
-   error codes and error strings.
-
-   To obtain error messages from the error database, use
-   XGetErrorDatabaseText.
-
-   XGetErrorDatabaseText(Display *display, char *name, char
-   *message, char *default_string, char *buffer_return, int
-   length);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   name
-
-   Specifies the name of the application.
-
-   message
-
-   Specifies the type of the error message.
-
-   default_string
-
-   Specifies the default error message if none is found in the
-   database.
-
-   buffer_return
-
-   Returns the error description.
-
-   length
-
-   Specifies the size of the buffer.
-
-   The XGetErrorDatabaseText function returns a null-terminated
-   message (or the default message) from the error message
-   database. Xlib uses this function internally to look up its
-   error messages. The text in the default_string argument is
-   assumed to be in the encoding of the current locale, and the
-   text stored in the buffer_return argument is in the encoding of
-   the current locale.
-
-   The name argument should generally be the name of your
-   application. The message argument should indicate which type of
-   error message you want. If the name and message are not in the
-   Host Portable Character Encoding, the result is
-   implementation-dependent. Xlib uses three predefined
-   ``application names'' to report errors. In these names,
-   uppercase and lowercase matter.
-
-   XProtoError
-
-   The protocol error number is used as a string for the message
-   argument.
-
-   XlibMessage
-
-   These are the message strings that are used internally by the
-   library.
-
-   XRequest
-
-   For a core protocol request, the major request protocol number
-   is used for the message argument. For an extension request, the
-   extension name (as given by InitExtension) followed by a period
-   (.) and the minor request protocol number is used for the
-   message argument. If no string is found in the error database,
-   the default_string is returned to the buffer argument.
-
-   To report an error to the user when the requested display does
-   not exist, use XDisplayName.
-
-   char *XDisplayName(char *string);
-
-   string
-
-   Specifies the character string.
-
-   The XDisplayName function returns the name of the display that
-   XOpenDisplay would attempt to use. If a NULL string is
-   specified, XDisplayName looks in the environment for the
-   display and returns the display name that XOpenDisplay would
-   attempt to use. This makes it easier to report to the user
-   precisely which display the program attempted to open when the
-   initial connection attempt failed.
-
-   To handle fatal I/O errors, use XSetIOErrorHandler.
-
-   int(int(*handler)(Display *));
-
-   handler
-
-   Specifies the program's supplied error handler.
-
-   The XSetIOErrorHandler sets the fatal I/O error handler. Xlib
-   calls the program's supplied error handler if any sort of
-   system call error occurs (for example, the connection to the
-   server was lost). This is assumed to be a fatal condition, and
-   the called routine should not return. If the I/O error handler
-   does return, the client process exits.
-
-   Note that the previous error handler is returned.
-
-Chapter 12. Input Device Functions
-
-   Table of Contents
-
-   Pointer Grabbing
-   Keyboard Grabbing
-   Resuming Event Processing
-   Moving the Pointer
-   Controlling Input Focus
-   Manipulating the Keyboard and Pointer Settings
-   Manipulating the Keyboard Encoding
-
-   You can use the Xlib input device functions to:
-     * Grab the pointer and individual buttons on the pointer
-     * Grab the keyboard and individual keys on the keyboard
-     * Resume event processing
-     * Move the pointer
-     * Set the input focus
-     * Manipulate the keyboard and pointer settings
-     * Manipulate the keyboard encoding
-
-Pointer Grabbing
-
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to control input from
-   the pointer, which usually is a mouse. Usually, as soon as
-   keyboard and mouse events occur, the X server delivers them to
-   the appropriate client, which is determined by the window and
-   input focus. The X server provides sufficient control over
-   event delivery to allow window managers to support mouse ahead
-   and various other styles of user interface. Many of these user
-   interfaces depend on synchronous delivery of events. The
-   delivery of pointer and keyboard events can be controlled
-   independently.
-
-   When mouse buttons or keyboard keys are grabbed, events will be
-   sent to the grabbing client rather than the normal client who
-   would have received the event. If the keyboard or pointer is in
-   asynchronous mode, further mouse and keyboard events will
-   continue to be processed. If the keyboard or pointer is in
-   synchronous mode, no further events are processed until the
-   grabbing client allows them (see XAllowEvents). The keyboard or
-   pointer is considered frozen during this interval. The event
-   that triggered the grab can also be replayed.
-
-   Note that the logical state of a device (as seen by client
-   applications) may lag the physical state if device event
-   processing is frozen.
-
-   There are two kinds of grabs: active and passive. An active
-   grab occurs when a single client grabs the keyboard and/or
-   pointer explicitly (see XGrabPointer and XGrabKeyboard). A
-   passive grab occurs when clients grab a particular keyboard key
-   or pointer button in a window, and the grab will activate when
-   the key or button is actually pressed. Passive grabs are
-   convenient for implementing reliable pop-up menus. For example,
-   you can guarantee that the pop-up is mapped before the up
-   pointer button event occurs by grabbing a button requesting
-   synchronous behavior. The down event will trigger the grab and
-   freeze further processing of pointer events until you have the
-   chance to map the pop-up window. You can then allow further
-   event processing. The up event will then be correctly processed
-   relative to the pop-up window.
-
-   For many operations, there are functions that take a time
-   argument. The X server includes a timestamp in various events.
-   One special time, called CurrentTime, represents the current
-   server time. The X server maintains the time when the input
-   focus was last changed, when the keyboard was last grabbed,
-   when the pointer was last grabbed, or when a selection was last
-   changed. Your application may be slow reacting to an event. You
-   often need some way to specify that your request should not
-   occur if another application has in the meanwhile taken control
-   of the keyboard, pointer, or selection. By providing the
-   timestamp from the event in the request, you can arrange that
-   the operation not take effect if someone else has performed an
-   operation in the meanwhile.
-
-   A timestamp is a time value, expressed in milliseconds. It
-   typically is the time since the last server reset. Timestamp
-   values wrap around (after about 49.7 days). The server, given
-   its current time is represented by timestamp T, always
-   interprets timestamps from clients by treating half of the
-   timestamp space as being later in time than T. One timestamp
-   value, named CurrentTime, is never generated by the server.
-   This value is reserved for use in requests to represent the
-   current server time.
-
-   For many functions in this section, you pass pointer event mask
-   bits. The valid pointer event mask bits are: ButtonPressMask,
-   ButtonReleaseMask, EnterWindowMask, LeaveWindowMask,
-   PointerMotionMask, PointerMotionHintMask, Button1MotionMask,
-   Button2MotionMask, Button3MotionMask, Button4MotionMask,
-   Button5MotionMask, ButtonMotionMask, and KeymapStateMask. For
-   other functions in this section, you pass keymask bits. The
-   valid keymask bits are: ShiftMask, LockMask, ControlMask,
-   Mod1Mask, Mod2Mask, Mod3Mask, Mod4Mask, and Mod5Mask.
-
-   To grab the pointer, use XGrabPointer.
-
-   int XGrabPointer(Display *display, Window grab_window, Bool
-   owner_events, unsigned int event_mask, int pointer_mode, int
-   keyboard_mode, Window confine_to, Cursor cursor, Time time);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   grab_window
-
-   Specifies the grab window.
-
-   owner_events
-
-   Specifies a Boolean value that indicates whether the pointer
-   events are to be reported as usual or reported with respect to
-   the grab window if selected by the event mask.
-
-   event_mask
-
-   Specifies which pointer events are reported to the client. The
-   mask is the bitwise inclusive OR of the valid pointer event
-   mask bits.
-
-   pointer_mode
-
-   Specifies further processing of pointer events. You can pass
-   GrabModeSync or GrabModeAsync.
-
-   keyboard_mode
-
-   Specifies further processing of keyboard events. You can pass
-   GrabModeSync or GrabModeAsync.
-
-   confine_to
-
-   Specifies the window to confine the pointer in or None.
-
-   cursor
-
-   Specifies the cursor that is to be displayed during the grab or
-   None.
-
-   time
-
-   Specifies the time. You can pass either a timestamp or
-   CurrentTime.
-
-   The XGrabPointer function actively grabs control of the pointer
-   and returns GrabSuccess if the grab was successful. Further
-   pointer events are reported only to the grabbing client.
-   XGrabPointer overrides any active pointer grab by this client.
-   If owner_events is False, all generated pointer events are
-   reported with respect to grab_window and are reported only if
-   selected by event_mask. If owner_events is True and if a
-   generated pointer event would normally be reported to this
-   client, it is reported as usual. Otherwise, the event is
-   reported with respect to the grab_window and is reported only
-   if selected by event_mask. For either value of owner_events,
-   unreported events are discarded.
-
-   If the pointer_mode is GrabModeAsync, pointer event processing
-   continues as usual. If the pointer is currently frozen by this
-   client, the processing of events for the pointer is resumed. If
-   the pointer_mode is GrabModeSync, the state of the pointer, as
-   seen by client applications, appears to freeze, and the X
-   server generates no further pointer events until the grabbing
-   client calls XAllowEvents or until the pointer grab is
-   released. Actual pointer changes are not lost while the pointer
-   is frozen; they are simply queued in the server for later
-   processing.
-
-   If the keyboard_mode is GrabModeAsync, keyboard event
-   processing is unaffected by activation of the grab. If the
-   keyboard_mode is GrabModeSync, the state of the keyboard, as
-   seen by client applications, appears to freeze, and the X
-   server generates no further keyboard events until the grabbing
-   client calls XAllowEvents or until the pointer grab is
-   released. Actual keyboard changes are not lost while the
-   pointer is frozen; they are simply queued in the server for
-   later processing.
-
-   If a cursor is specified, it is displayed regardless of what
-   window the pointer is in. If None is specified, the normal
-   cursor for that window is displayed when the pointer is in
-   grab_window or one of its subwindows; otherwise, the cursor for
-   grab_window is displayed.
-
-   If a confine_to window is specified, the pointer is restricted
-   to stay contained in that window. The confine_to window need
-   have no relationship to the grab_window. If the pointer is not
-   initially in the confine_to window, it is warped automatically
-   to the closest edge just before the grab activates and
-   enter/leave events are generated as usual. If the confine_to
-   window is subsequently reconfigured, the pointer is warped
-   automatically, as necessary, to keep it contained in the
-   window.
-
-   The time argument allows you to avoid certain circumstances
-   that come up if applications take a long time to respond or if
-   there are long network delays. Consider a situation where you
-   have two applications, both of which normally grab the pointer
-   when clicked on. If both applications specify the timestamp
-   from the event, the second application may wake up faster and
-   successfully grab the pointer before the first application. The
-   first application then will get an indication that the other
-   application grabbed the pointer before its request was
-   processed.
-
-   XGrabPointer generates EnterNotify and LeaveNotify events.
-
-   Either if grab_window or confine_to window is not viewable or
-   if the confine_to window lies completely outside the boundaries
-   of the root window, XGrabPointer fails and returns
-   GrabNotViewable. If the pointer is actively grabbed by some
-   other client, it fails and returns AlreadyGrabbed. If the
-   pointer is frozen by an active grab of another client, it fails
-   and returns GrabFrozen. If the specified time is earlier than
-   the last-pointer-grab time or later than the current X server
-   time, it fails and returns GrabInvalidTime. Otherwise, the
-   last-pointer-grab time is set to the specified time
-   (CurrentTime is replaced by the current X server time).
-
-   XGrabPointer can generate BadCursor, BadValue, and BadWindow
-   errors.
-
-   To ungrab the pointer, use XUngrabPointer.
-
-   XUngrabPointer(Display *display, Time time);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   time
-
-   Specifies the time. You can pass either a timestamp or
-   CurrentTime.
-
-   The XUngrabPointer function releases the pointer and any queued
-   events if this client has actively grabbed the pointer from
-   XGrabPointer, XGrabButton, or from a normal button press.
-   XUngrabPointer does not release the pointer if the specified
-   time is earlier than the last-pointer-grab time or is later
-   than the current X server time. It also generates EnterNotify
-   and LeaveNotify events. The X server performs an UngrabPointer
-   request automatically if the event window or confine_to window
-   for an active pointer grab becomes not viewable or if window
-   reconfiguration causes the confine_to window to lie completely
-   outside the boundaries of the root window.
-
-   To change an active pointer grab, use XChangeActivePointerGrab.
-
-   XChangeActivePointerGrab(Display *display, unsigned int
-   event_mask, Cursor cursor, Time time);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   event_mask
-
-   Specifies which pointer events are reported to the client. The
-   mask is the bitwise inclusive OR of the valid pointer event
-   mask bits.
-
-   cursor
-
-   Specifies the cursor that is to be displayed or None.
-
-   time
-
-   Specifies the time. You can pass either a timestamp or
-   CurrentTime.
-
-   The XChangeActivePointerGrab function changes the specified
-   dynamic parameters if the pointer is actively grabbed by the
-   client and if the specified time is no earlier than the
-   last-pointer-grab time and no later than the current X server
-   time. This function has no effect on the passive parameters of
-   an XGrabButton. The interpretation of event_mask and cursor is
-   the same as described in XGrabPointer.
-
-   XChangeActivePointerGrab can generate BadCursor and BadValue
-   errors.
-
-   To grab a pointer button, use XGrabButton.
-
-   XGrabButton(Display *display, unsigned int button, unsigned int
-   modifiers, Window grab_window, Bool owner_events, unsigned int
-   event_mask, int pointer_mode, int keyboard_mode, Window
-   confine_to, Cursor cursor);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   button
-
-   Specifies the pointer button that is to be grabbed or
-   AnyButton.
-
-   modifiers
-
-   Specifies the set of keymasks or AnyModifier. The mask is the
-   bitwise inclusive OR of the valid keymask bits.
-
-   grab_window
-
-   Specifies the grab window.
-
-   owner_events
-
-   Specifies a Boolean value that indicates whether the pointer
-   events are to be reported as usual or reported with respect to
-   the grab window if selected by the event mask.
-
-   event_mask
-
-   Specifies which pointer events are reported to the client. The
-   mask is the bitwise inclusive OR of the valid pointer event
-   mask bits.
-
-   pointer_mode
-
-   Specifies further processing of pointer events. You can pass
-   GrabModeSync or GrabModeAsync.
-
-   keyboard_mode
-
-   Specifies further processing of keyboard events. You can pass
-   GrabModeSync or GrabModeAsync.
-
-   confine_to
-
-   Specifies the window to confine the pointer in or None.
-
-   cursor
-
-   Specifies the cursor that is to be displayed or None.
-
-   The XGrabButton function establishes a passive grab. In the
-   future, the pointer is actively grabbed (as for XGrabPointer),
-   the last-pointer-grab time is set to the time at which the
-   button was pressed (as transmitted in the ButtonPress event),
-   and the ButtonPress event is reported if all of the following
-   conditions are true:
-     * The pointer is not grabbed, and the specified button is
-       logically pressed when the specified modifier keys are
-       logically down, and no other buttons or modifier keys are
-       logically down.
-     * The grab_window contains the pointer.
-     * The confine_to window (if any) is viewable.
-     * A passive grab on the same button/key combination does not
-       exist on any ancestor of grab_window.
-
-   The interpretation of the remaining arguments is as for
-   XGrabPointer. The active grab is terminated automatically when
-   the logical state of the pointer has all buttons released
-   (independent of the state of the logical modifier keys).
-
-   Note that the logical state of a device (as seen by client
-   applications) may lag the physical state if device event
-   processing is frozen.
-
-   This request overrides all previous grabs by the same client on
-   the same button/key combinations on the same window. A
-   modifiers of AnyModifier is equivalent to issuing the grab
-   request for all possible modifier combinations (including the
-   combination of no modifiers). It is not required that all
-   modifiers specified have currently assigned KeyCodes. A button
-   of AnyButton is equivalent to issuing the request for all
-   possible buttons. Otherwise, it is not required that the
-   specified button currently be assigned to a physical button.
-
-   If some other client has already issued an XGrabButton with the
-   same button/key combination on the same window, a BadAccess
-   error results. When using AnyModifier or AnyButton, the request
-   fails completely, and a BadAccess error results (no grabs are
-   established) if there is a conflicting grab for any
-   combination. XGrabButton has no effect on an active grab.
-
-   XGrabButton can generate BadCursor, BadValue, and BadWindow
-   errors.
-
-   To ungrab a pointer button, use XUngrabButton.
-
-   XUngrabButton(Display *display, unsigned int button, unsigned
-   int modifiers, Window grab_window);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   button
-
-   Specifies the pointer button that is to be released or
-   AnyButton.
-
-   modifiers
-
-   Specifies the set of keymasks or AnyModifier. The mask is the
-   bitwise inclusive OR of the valid keymask bits.
-
-   grab_window
-
-   Specifies the grab window.
-
-   The XUngrabButton function releases the passive button/key
-   combination on the specified window if it was grabbed by this
-   client. A modifiers of AnyModifier is equivalent to issuing the
-   ungrab request for all possible modifier combinations,
-   including the combination of no modifiers. A button of
-   AnyButton is equivalent to issuing the request for all possible
-   buttons. XUngrabButton has no effect on an active grab.
-
-   XUngrabButton can generate BadValue and BadWindow errors.
-
-Keyboard Grabbing
-
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to grab or ungrab the
-   keyboard as well as allow events.
-
-   For many functions in this section, you pass keymask bits. The
-   valid keymask bits are: ShiftMask, LockMask, ControlMask,
-   Mod1Mask, Mod2Mask, Mod3Mask, Mod4Mask, and Mod5Mask.
-
-   To grab the keyboard, use XGrabKeyboard.
-
-   int XGrabKeyboard(Display *display, Window grab_window, Bool
-   owner_events, int pointer_mode, int keyboard_mode, Time time);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   grab_window
-
-   Specifies the grab window.
-
-   owner_events
-
-   Specifies a Boolean value that indicates whether the keyboard
-   events are to be reported as usual.
-
-   pointer_mode
-
-   Specifies further processing of pointer events. You can pass
-   GrabModeSync or GrabModeAsync.
-
-   keyboard_mode
-
-   Specifies further processing of keyboard events. You can pass
-   GrabModeSync or GrabModeAsync.
-
-   time
-
-   Specifies the time. You can pass either a timestamp or
-   CurrentTime.
-
-   The XGrabKeyboard function actively grabs control of the
-   keyboard and generates FocusIn and FocusOut events. Further key
-   events are reported only to the grabbing client. XGrabKeyboard
-   overrides any active keyboard grab by this client. If
-   owner_events is False, all generated key events are reported
-   with respect to grab_window. If owner_events is True and if a
-   generated key event would normally be reported to this client,
-   it is reported normally; otherwise, the event is reported with
-   respect to the grab_window. Both KeyPress and KeyRelease events
-   are always reported, independent of any event selection made by
-   the client.
-
-   If the keyboard_mode argument is GrabModeAsync, keyboard event
-   processing continues as usual. If the keyboard is currently
-   frozen by this client, then processing of keyboard events is
-   resumed. If the keyboard_mode argument is GrabModeSync, the
-   state of the keyboard (as seen by client applications) appears
-   to freeze, and the X server generates no further keyboard
-   events until the grabbing client issues a releasing
-   XAllowEvents call or until the keyboard grab is released.
-   Actual keyboard changes are not lost while the keyboard is
-   frozen; they are simply queued in the server for later
-   processing.
-
-   If pointer_mode is GrabModeAsync, pointer event processing is
-   unaffected by activation of the grab. If pointer_mode is
-   GrabModeSync, the state of the pointer (as seen by client
-   applications) appears to freeze, and the X server generates no
-   further pointer events until the grabbing client issues a
-   releasing XAllowEvents call or until the keyboard grab is
-   released. Actual pointer changes are not lost while the pointer
-   is frozen; they are simply queued in the server for later
-   processing.
-
-   If the keyboard is actively grabbed by some other client,
-   XGrabKeyboard fails and returns AlreadyGrabbed. If grab_window
-   is not viewable, it fails and returns GrabNotViewable. If the
-   keyboard is frozen by an active grab of another client, it
-   fails and returns GrabFrozen. If the specified time is earlier
-   than the last-keyboard-grab time or later than the current X
-   server time, it fails and returns GrabInvalidTime. Otherwise,
-   the last-keyboard-grab time is set to the specified time
-   (CurrentTime is replaced by the current X server time).
-
-   XGrabKeyboard can generate BadValue and BadWindow errors.
-
-   To ungrab the keyboard, use XUngrabKeyboard.
-
-   XUngrabKeyboard(Display *display, Time time);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   time
-
-   Specifies the time. You can pass either a timestamp or
-   CurrentTime.
-
-   The XUngrabKeyboard function releases the keyboard and any
-   queued events if this client has it actively grabbed from
-   either XGrabKeyboard or XGrabKey. XUngrabKeyboard does not
-   release the keyboard and any queued events if the specified
-   time is earlier than the last-keyboard-grab time or is later
-   than the current X server time. It also generates FocusIn and
-   FocusOut events. The X server automatically performs an
-   UngrabKeyboard request if the event window for an active
-   keyboard grab becomes not viewable.
-
-   To passively grab a single key of the keyboard, use XGrabKey.
-
-   XGrabKey(Display *display, int keycode, unsigned int modifiers,
-   Window grab_window, Bool owner_events, int pointer_mode, int
-   keyboard_mode);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   keycode
-
-   Specifies the KeyCode or AnyKey.
-
-   modifiers
-
-   Specifies the set of keymasks or AnyModifier. The mask is the
-   bitwise inclusive OR of the valid keymask bits.
-
-   grab_window
-
-   Specifies the grab window.
-
-   owner_events
-
-   Specifies a Boolean value that indicates whether the keyboard
-   events are to be reported as usual.
-
-   pointer_mode
-
-   Specifies further processing of pointer events. You can pass
-   GrabModeSync or GrabModeAsync.
-
-   keyboard_mode
-
-   Specifies further processing of keyboard events. You can pass
-   GrabModeSync or GrabModeAsync.
-
-   The XGrabKey function establishes a passive grab on the
-   keyboard. In the future, the keyboard is actively grabbed (as
-   for XGrabKeyboard), the last-keyboard-grab time is set to the
-   time at which the key was pressed (as transmitted in the
-   KeyPress event), and the KeyPress event is reported if all of
-   the following conditions are true:
-     * The keyboard is not grabbed and the specified key (which
-       can itself be a modifier key) is logically pressed when the
-       specified modifier keys are logically down, and no other
-       modifier keys are logically down.
-     * Either the grab_window is an ancestor of (or is) the focus
-       window, or the grab_window is a descendant of the focus
-       window and contains the pointer.
-     * A passive grab on the same key combination does not exist
-       on any ancestor of grab_window.
-
-   The interpretation of the remaining arguments is as for
-   XGrabKeyboard. The active grab is terminated automatically when
-   the logical state of the keyboard has the specified key
-   released (independent of the logical state of the modifier
-   keys).
-
-   Note that the logical state of a device (as seen by client
-   applications) may lag the physical state if device event
-   processing is frozen.
-
-   A modifiers argument of AnyModifier is equivalent to issuing
-   the request for all possible modifier combinations (including
-   the combination of no modifiers). It is not required that all
-   modifiers specified have currently assigned KeyCodes. A keycode
-   argument of AnyKey is equivalent to issuing the request for all
-   possible KeyCodes. Otherwise, the specified keycode must be in
-   the range specified by min_keycode and max_keycode in the
-   connection setup, or a BadValue error results.
-
-   If some other client has issued a XGrabKey with the same key
-   combination on the same window, a BadAccess error results. When
-   using AnyModifier or AnyKey, the request fails completely, and
-   a BadAccess error results (no grabs are established) if there
-   is a conflicting grab for any combination.
-
-   XGrabKey can generate BadAccess, BadValue, and BadWindow
-   errors.
-
-   To ungrab a key, use XUngrabKey.
-
-   XUngrabKey(Display *display, int keycode, unsigned int
-   modifiers, Window grab_window);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   keycode
-
-   Specifies the KeyCode or AnyKey.
-
-   modifiers
-
-   Specifies the set of keymasks or AnyModifier. The mask is the
-   bitwise inclusive OR of the valid keymask bits.
-
-   grab_window
-
-   Specifies the grab window.
-
-   The XUngrabKey function releases the key combination on the
-   specified window if it was grabbed by this client. It has no
-   effect on an active grab. A modifiers of AnyModifier is
-   equivalent to issuing the request for all possible modifier
-   combinations (including the combination of no modifiers). A
-   keycode argument of AnyKey is equivalent to issuing the request
-   for all possible key codes.
-
-   XUngrabKey can generate BadValue and BadWindow errors.
-
-Resuming Event Processing
-
-   The previous sections discussed grab mechanisms with which
-   processing of events by the server can be temporarily
-   suspended. This section describes the mechanism for resuming
-   event processing.
-
-   To allow further events to be processed when the device has
-   been frozen, use XAllowEvents.
-
-   XAllowEvents(Display *display, int event_mode, Time time);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   event_mode
-
-   Specifies the event mode. You can pass AsyncPointer,
-   SyncPointer, AsyncKeyboard, SyncKeyboard, ReplayPointer,
-   ReplayKeyboard, AsyncBoth, or SyncBoth.
-
-   time
-
-   Specifies the time. You can pass either a timestamp or
-   CurrentTime.
-
-   The XAllowEvents function releases some queued events if the
-   client has caused a device to freeze. It has no effect if the
-   specified time is earlier than the last-grab time of the most
-   recent active grab for the client or if the specified time is
-   later than the current X server time. Depending on the
-   event_mode argument, the following occurs:
-   AsyncPointer If the pointer is frozen by the client, pointer
-   event processing continues as usual. If the pointer is frozen
-   twice by the client on behalf of two separate grabs,
-   AsyncPointer thaws for both. AsyncPointer has no effect if the
-   pointer is not frozen by the client, but the pointer need not
-   be grabbed by the client.
-   SyncPointer If the pointer is frozen and actively grabbed by
-   the client, pointer event processing continues as usual until
-   the next ButtonPress or ButtonRelease event is reported to the
-   client. At this time, the pointer again appears to freeze.
-   However, if the reported event causes the pointer grab to be
-   released, the pointer does not freeze. SyncPointer has no
-   effect if the pointer is not frozen by the client or if the
-   pointer is not grabbed by the client.
-   ReplayPointer If the pointer is actively grabbed by the client
-   and is frozen as the result of an event having been sent to the
-   client (either from the activation of an XGrabButton or from a
-   previous XAllowEvents with mode SyncPointer but not from an
-   XGrabPointer), the pointer grab is released and that event is
-   completely reprocessed. This time, however, the function
-   ignores any passive grabs at or above (toward the root of) the
-   grab_window of the grab just released. The request has no
-   effect if the pointer is not grabbed by the client or if the
-   pointer is not frozen as the result of an event.
-   AsyncKeyboard If the keyboard is frozen by the client, keyboard
-   event processing continues as usual. If the keyboard is frozen
-   twice by the client on behalf of two separate grabs,
-   AsyncKeyboard thaws for both. AsyncKeyboard has no effect if
-   the keyboard is not frozen by the client, but the keyboard need
-   not be grabbed by the client.
-   SyncKeyboard If the keyboard is frozen and actively grabbed by
-   the client, keyboard event processing continues as usual until
-   the next KeyPress or KeyRelease event is reported to the
-   client. At this time, the keyboard again appears to freeze.
-   However, if the reported event causes the keyboard grab to be
-   released, the keyboard does not freeze. SyncKeyboard has no
-   effect if the keyboard is not frozen by the client or if the
-   keyboard is not grabbed by the client.
-   ReplayKeyboard If the keyboard is actively grabbed by the
-   client and is frozen as the result of an event having been sent
-   to the client (either from the activation of an XGrabKey or
-   from a previous XAllowEvents with mode SyncKeyboard but not
-   from an XGrabKeyboard), the keyboard grab is released and that
-   event is completely reprocessed. This time, however, the
-   function ignores any passive grabs at or above (toward the root
-   of) the grab_window of the grab just released. The request has
-   no effect if the keyboard is not grabbed by the client or if
-   the keyboard is not frozen as the result of an event.
-   SyncBoth If both pointer and keyboard are frozen by the client,
-   event processing for both devices continues as usual until the
-   next ButtonPress, ButtonRelease, KeyPress, or KeyRelease event
-   is reported to the client for a grabbed device (button event
-   for the pointer, key event for the keyboard), at which time the
-   devices again appear to freeze. However, if the reported event
-   causes the grab to be released, then the devices do not freeze
-   (but if the other device is still grabbed, then a subsequent
-   event for it will still cause both devices to freeze). SyncBoth
-   has no effect unless both pointer and keyboard are frozen by
-   the client. If the pointer or keyboard is frozen twice by the
-   client on behalf of two separate grabs, SyncBoth thaws for both
-   (but a subsequent freeze for SyncBoth will only freeze each
-   device once).
-   AsyncBoth If the pointer and the keyboard are frozen by the
-   client, event processing for both devices continues as usual.
-   If a device is frozen twice by the client on behalf of two
-   separate grabs, AsyncBoth thaws for both. AsyncBoth has no
-   effect unless both pointer and keyboard are frozen by the
-   client.
-
-   AsyncPointer, SyncPointer, and ReplayPointer have no effect on
-   the processing of keyboard events. AsyncKeyboard, SyncKeyboard,
-   and ReplayKeyboard have no effect on the processing of pointer
-   events. It is possible for both a pointer grab and a keyboard
-   grab (by the same or different clients) to be active
-   simultaneously. If a device is frozen on behalf of either grab,
-   no event processing is performed for the device. It is possible
-   for a single device to be frozen because of both grabs. In this
-   case, the freeze must be released on behalf of both grabs
-   before events can again be processed. If a device is frozen
-   twice by a single client, then a single XAllowEvents releases
-   both.
-
-   XAllowEvents can generate a BadValue error.
-
-Moving the Pointer
-
-   Although movement of the pointer normally should be left to the
-   control of the end user, sometimes it is necessary to move the
-   pointer to a new position under program control.
-
-   To move the pointer to an arbitrary point in a window, use
-   XWarpPointer.
-
-   XWarpPointer(Display *display, Window src_w, Window dest_w, int
-   src_x, int src_y, unsigned int src_width, unsigned int
-   src_height, int dest_x, int dest_y);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   src_w
-
-   Specifies the source window or None.
-
-   dest_w
-
-   Specifies the destination window or None.
-
-   src_x
-
-   src_y
-
-   src_width
-
-   src_height
-
-   Specify a rectangle in the source window.
-
-   dest_x
-
-   dest_y
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates within the destination window.
-
-   If dest_w is None, XWarpPointer moves the pointer by the
-   offsets (dest_x, dest_y) relative to the current position of
-   the pointer. If dest_w is a window, XWarpPointer moves the
-   pointer to the offsets (dest_x, dest_y) relative to the origin
-   of dest_w. However, if src_w is a window, the move only takes
-   place if the window src_w contains the pointer and if the
-   specified rectangle of src_w contains the pointer.
-
-   The src_x and src_y coordinates are relative to the origin of
-   src_w. If src_height is zero, it is replaced with the current
-   height of src_w minus src_y. If src_width is zero, it is
-   replaced with the current width of src_w minus src_x.
-
-   There is seldom any reason for calling this function. The
-   pointer should normally be left to the user. If you do use this
-   function, however, it generates events just as if the user had
-   instantaneously moved the pointer from one position to another.
-   Note that you cannot use XWarpPointer to move the pointer
-   outside the confine_to window of an active pointer grab. An
-   attempt to do so will only move the pointer as far as the
-   closest edge of the confine_to window.
-
-   XWarpPointer can generate a BadWindow error.
-
-Controlling Input Focus
-
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to set and get the
-   input focus. The input focus is a shared resource, and
-   cooperation among clients is required for correct interaction.
-   See the Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual for input
-   focus policy.
-
-   To set the input focus, use XSetInputFocus.
-
-   XSetInputFocus(Display *display, Window focus, int revert_to,
-   Time time);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   focus
-
-   Specifies the window, PointerRoot, or None.
-
-   revert_to
-
-   Specifies where the input focus reverts to if the window
-   becomes not viewable. You can pass RevertToParent,
-   RevertToPointerRoot, or RevertToNone.
-
-   time
-
-   Specifies the time. You can pass either a timestamp or
-   CurrentTime.
-
-   The XSetInputFocus function changes the input focus and the
-   last-focus-change time. It has no effect if the specified time
-   is earlier than the current last-focus-change time or is later
-   than the current X server time. Otherwise, the
-   last-focus-change time is set to the specified time
-   (CurrentTime is replaced by the current X server time).
-   XSetInputFocus causes the X server to generate FocusIn and
-   FocusOut events.
-
-   Depending on the focus argument, the following occurs:
-     * If focus is None, all keyboard events are discarded until a
-       new focus window is set, and the revert_to argument is
-       ignored.
-     * If focus is a window, it becomes the keyboard's focus
-       window. If a generated keyboard event would normally be
-       reported to this window or one of its inferiors, the event
-       is reported as usual. Otherwise, the event is reported
-       relative to the focus window.
-     * If focus is PointerRoot, the focus window is dynamically
-       taken to be the root window of whatever screen the pointer
-       is on at each keyboard event. In this case, the revert_to
-       argument is ignored.
-
-   The specified focus window must be viewable at the time
-   XSetInputFocus is called, or a BadMatch error results. If the
-   focus window later becomes not viewable, the X server evaluates
-   the revert_to argument to determine the new focus window as
-   follows:
-     * If revert_to is RevertToParent, the focus reverts to the
-       parent (or the closest viewable ancestor), and the new
-       revert_to value is taken to be RevertToNone.
-     * If revert_to is RevertToPointerRoot or RevertToNone, the
-       focus reverts to PointerRoot or None, respectively. When
-       the focus reverts, the X server generates FocusIn and
-       FocusOut events, but the last-focus-change time is not
-       affected.
-
-   XSetInputFocus can generate BadMatch, BadValue, and BadWindow
-   errors.
-
-   To obtain the current input focus, use XGetInputFocus.
-
-   XGetInputFocus(Display *display, Window *focus_return, int
-   *revert_to_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   focus_return
-
-   Returns the focus window, PointerRoot, or None.
-
-   revert_to_return
-
-   Returns the current focus state (RevertToParent,
-   RevertToPointerRoot, or RevertToNone).
-
-   The XGetInputFocus function returns the focus window and the
-   current focus state.
-
-Manipulating the Keyboard and Pointer Settings
-
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to change the keyboard
-   control, obtain a list of the auto-repeat keys, turn keyboard
-   auto-repeat on or off, ring the bell, set or obtain the pointer
-   button or keyboard mapping, and obtain a bit vector for the
-   keyboard.
-
-   This section discusses the user-preference options of bell, key
-   click, pointer behavior, and so on. The default values for many
-   of these options are server dependent. Not all implementations
-   will actually be able to control all of these parameters.
-
-   The XChangeKeyboardControl function changes control of a
-   keyboard and operates on a XKeyboardControl structure:
-/* Mask bits for ChangeKeyboardControl */
-
-
-#define     KBBellPercent           (1L<<0)
-#define     KBBellPitch             (1L<<1)
-#define     KBBellDuration          (1L<<2)
-#define     KBLed                   (1L<<3)
-#define     KBLedMode               (1L<<4)
-#define     KBKey                   (1L<<5)
-#define     KBAutoRepeatMode        (1L<<6)
-
-
-/* Values */
-
-typedef struct {
-int key_click_percent;
-int bell_percent;
-int bell_pitch;
-int bell_duration;
-int led;
-int led_mode;                /* LedModeOn, LedModeOff */
-int key;
-int auto_repeat_mode;        /* AutoRepeatModeOff, AutoRepeatModeOn,
-                                AutoRepeatModeDefault */
-} XKeyboardControl;
-
-
-   The key_click_percent member sets the volume for key clicks
-   between 0 (off) and 100 (loud) inclusive, if possible. A
-   setting of -1 restores the default. Other negative values
-   generate a BadValue error.
-
-   The bell_percent sets the base volume for the bell between 0
-   (off) and 100 (loud) inclusive, if possible. A setting of -1
-   restores the default. Other negative values generate a BadValue
-   error. The bell_pitch member sets the pitch (specified in Hz)
-   of the bell, if possible. A setting of -1 restores the default.
-   Other negative values generate a BadValue error. The
-   bell_duration member sets the duration of the bell specified in
-   milliseconds, if possible. A setting of -1 restores the
-   default. Other negative values generate a BadValue error.
-
-   If both the led_mode and led members are specified, the state
-   of that LED is changed, if possible. The led_mode member can be
-   set to LedModeOn or LedModeOff. If only led_mode is specified,
-   the state of all LEDs are changed, if possible. At most 32 LEDs
-   numbered from one are supported. No standard interpretation of
-   LEDs is defined. If led is specified without led_mode, a
-   BadMatch error results.
-
-   If both the auto_repeat_mode and key members are specified, the
-   auto_repeat_mode of that key is changed (according to
-   AutoRepeatModeOn, AutoRepeatModeOff, or AutoRepeatModeDefault),
-   if possible. If only auto_repeat_mode is specified, the global
-   auto_repeat_mode for the entire keyboard is changed, if
-   possible, and does not affect the per-key settings. If a key is
-   specified without an auto_repeat_mode, a BadMatch error
-   results. Each key has an individual mode of whether or not it
-   should auto-repeat and a default setting for the mode. In
-   addition, there is a global mode of whether auto-repeat should
-   be enabled or not and a default setting for that mode. When
-   global mode is AutoRepeatModeOn, keys should obey their
-   individual auto-repeat modes. When global mode is
-   AutoRepeatModeOff, no keys should auto-repeat. An
-   auto-repeating key generates alternating KeyPress and
-   KeyRelease events. When a key is used as a modifier, it is
-   desirable for the key not to auto-repeat, regardless of its
-   auto-repeat setting.
-
-   A bell generator connected with the console but not directly on
-   a keyboard is treated as if it were part of the keyboard. The
-   order in which controls are verified and altered is
-   server-dependent. If an error is generated, a subset of the
-   controls may have been altered.
-
-   XChangeKeyboardControl(Display *display, unsigned long
-   value_mask, XKeyboardControl *values);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   value_mask
-
-   Specifies which controls to change. This mask is the bitwise
-   inclusive OR of the valid control mask bits.
-
-   values
-
-   Specifies one value for each bit set to 1 in the mask.
-
-   The XChangeKeyboardControl function controls the keyboard
-   characteristics defined by the XKeyboardControl structure. The
-   value_mask argument specifies which values are to be changed.
-
-   XChangeKeyboardControl can generate BadMatch and BadValue
-   errors.
-
-   To obtain the current control values for the keyboard, use
-   XGetKeyboardControl.
-
-   XGetKeyboardControl(Display *display, XKeyboardState
-   *values_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   values_return
-
-   Returns the current keyboard controls in the specified
-   XKeyboardState structure.
-
-   The XGetKeyboardControl function returns the current control
-   values for the keyboard to the XKeyboardState structure.
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-        int key_click_percent;
-        int bell_percent;
-        unsigned int bell_pitch, bell_duration;
-        unsigned long led_mask;
-        int global_auto_repeat;
-        char auto_repeats[32];
-} XKeyboardState;
-
-   For the LEDs, the least significant bit of led_mask corresponds
-   to LED one, and each bit set to 1 in led_mask indicates an LED
-   that is lit. The global_auto_repeat member can be set to
-   AutoRepeatModeOn or AutoRepeatModeOff. The auto_repeats member
-   is a bit vector. Each bit set to 1 indicates that auto-repeat
-   is enabled for the corresponding key. The vector is represented
-   as 32 bytes. Byte N (from 0) contains the bits for keys 8N to
-   8N + 7 with the least significant bit in the byte representing
-   key 8N.
-
-   To turn on keyboard auto-repeat, use XAutoRepeatOn.
-
-   XAutoRepeatOn(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   The XAutoRepeatOn function turns on auto-repeat for the
-   keyboard on the specified display.
-
-   To turn off keyboard auto-repeat, use XAutoRepeatOff.
-
-   XAutoRepeatOff(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   The XAutoRepeatOff function turns off auto-repeat for the
-   keyboard on the specified display.
-
-   To ring the bell, use XBell.
-
-   XBell(Display *display, int percent);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   percent
-
-   Specifies the volume for the bell, which can range from -100 to
-   100 inclusive.
-
-   The XBell function rings the bell on the keyboard on the
-   specified display, if possible. The specified volume is
-   relative to the base volume for the keyboard. If the value for
-   the percent argument is not in the range -100 to 100 inclusive,
-   a BadValue error results. The volume at which the bell rings
-   when the percent argument is nonnegative is:
-     * base - [(base * percent) / 100] + percent
-
-   The volume at which the bell rings when the percent argument is
-   negative is:
-     * base + [(base * percent) / 100]
-
-   To change the base volume of the bell, use
-   XChangeKeyboardControl.
-
-   XBell can generate a BadValue error.
-
-   To obtain a bit vector that describes the state of the
-   keyboard, use XQueryKeymap.
-
-   XQueryKeymap(Display *display, char keys_return[32]);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   keys_return
-
-   Returns an array of bytes that identifies which keys are
-   pressed down. Each bit represents one key of the keyboard.
-
-   The XQueryKeymap function returns a bit vector for the logical
-   state of the keyboard, where each bit set to 1 indicates that
-   the corresponding key is currently pressed down. The vector is
-   represented as 32 bytes. Byte N (from 0) contains the bits for
-   keys 8N to 8N + 7 with the least significant bit in the byte
-   representing key 8N.
-
-   Note that the logical state of a device (as seen by client
-   applications) may lag the physical state if device event
-   processing is frozen.
-
-   To set the mapping of the pointer buttons, use
-   XSetPointerMapping.
-
-   int XSetPointerMapping(Display *display, unsignedchar map[],
-   int nmap);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   map
-
-   Specifies the mapping list.
-
-   nmap
-
-   Specifies the number of items in the mapping list.
-
-   The XSetPointerMapping function sets the mapping of the
-   pointer. If it succeeds, the X server generates a MappingNotify
-   event, and XSetPointerMapping returns MappingSuccess. Element
-   map[i] defines the logical button number for the physical
-   button i+1. The length of the list must be the same as
-   XGetPointerMapping would return, or a BadValue error results. A
-   zero element disables a button, and elements are not restricted
-   in value by the number of physical buttons. However, no two
-   elements can have the same nonzero value, or a BadValue error
-   results. If any of the buttons to be altered are logically in
-   the down state, XSetPointerMapping returns MappingBusy, and the
-   mapping is not changed.
-
-   XSetPointerMapping can generate a BadValue error.
-
-   To get the pointer mapping, use XGetPointerMapping.
-
-   int XGetPointerMapping(Display *display, unsignedchar
-   map_return[], int nmap);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   map_return
-
-   Returns the mapping list.
-
-   nmap
-
-   Specifies the number of items in the mapping list.
-
-   The XGetPointerMapping function returns the current mapping of
-   the pointer. Pointer buttons are numbered starting from one.
-   XGetPointerMapping returns the number of physical buttons
-   actually on the pointer. The nominal mapping for a pointer is
-   map[i]=i+1. The nmap argument specifies the length of the array
-   where the pointer mapping is returned, and only the first nmap
-   elements are returned in map_return.
-
-   To control the pointer's interactive feel, use
-   XChangePointerControl.
-
-   XChangePointerControl(Display *display, Bool do_accel, Bool
-   do_threshold, int accel_numerator, int accel_denominator, int
-   threshold);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   do_accel
-
-   Specifies a Boolean value that controls whether the values for
-   the accel_numerator or accel_denominator are used.
-
-   do_threshold
-
-   Specifies a Boolean value that controls whether the value for
-   the threshold is used.
-
-   accel_numerator
-
-   Specifies the numerator for the acceleration multiplier.
-
-   accel_denominator
-
-   Specifies the denominator for the acceleration multiplier.
-
-   threshold
-
-   Specifies the acceleration threshold.
-
-   The XChangePointerControl function defines how the pointing
-   device moves. The acceleration, expressed as a fraction, is a
-   multiplier for movement. For example, specifying 3/1 means the
-   pointer moves three times as fast as normal. The fraction may
-   be rounded arbitrarily by the X server. Acceleration only takes
-   effect if the pointer moves more than threshold pixels at once
-   and only applies to the amount beyond the value in the
-   threshold argument. Setting a value to -1 restores the default.
-   The values of the do_accel and do_threshold arguments must be
-   True for the pointer values to be set, or the parameters are
-   unchanged. Negative values (other than -1) generate a BadValue
-   error, as does a zero value for the accel_denominator argument.
-
-   XChangePointerControl can generate a BadValue error.
-
-   To get the current pointer parameters, use XGetPointerControl.
-
-   XGetPointerControl(Display *display, int
-   *accel_numerator_return, int *accel_denominator_return, int
-   *threshold_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   accel_numerator_return
-
-   Returns the numerator for the acceleration multiplier.
-
-   accel_denominator_return
-
-   Returns the denominator for the acceleration multiplier.
-
-   threshold_return
-
-   Returns the acceleration threshold.
-
-   The XGetPointerControl function returns the pointer's current
-   acceleration multiplier and acceleration threshold.
-
-Manipulating the Keyboard Encoding
-
-   A KeyCode represents a physical (or logical) key. KeyCodes lie
-   in the inclusive range [8,255]. A KeyCode value carries no
-   intrinsic information, although server implementors may attempt
-   to encode geometry (for example, matrix) information in some
-   fashion so that it can be interpreted in a server-dependent
-   fashion. The mapping between keys and KeyCodes cannot be
-   changed.
-
-   A KeySym is an encoding of a symbol on the cap of a key. The
-   set of defined KeySyms includes the ISO Latin character sets
-   (1-4), Katakana, Arabic, Cyrillic, Greek, Technical, Special,
-   Publishing, APL, Hebrew, Thai, Korean and a miscellany of keys
-   found on keyboards (Return, Help, Tab, and so on). To the
-   extent possible, these sets are derived from international
-   standards. In areas where no standards exist, some of these
-   sets are derived from Digital Equipment Corporation standards.
-   The list of defined symbols can be found in <X11/keysymdef.h>.
-   Unfortunately, some C preprocessors have limits on the number
-   of defined symbols. If you must use KeySyms not in the Latin
-   1-4, Greek, and miscellaneous classes, you may have to define a
-   symbol for those sets. Most applications usually only include
-   <X11/keysym.h>, which defines symbols for ISO Latin 1-4, Greek,
-   and miscellaneous.
-
-   A list of KeySyms is associated with each KeyCode. The list is
-   intended to convey the set of symbols on the corresponding key.
-   If the list (ignoring trailing NoSymbol entries) is a single
-   KeySym ``K'', then the list is treated as if it were the list
-   ``K NoSymbol K NoSymbol''. If the list (ignoring trailing
-   NoSymbol entries) is a pair of KeySyms ``K1 K2'', then the list
-   is treated as if it were the list ``K1 K2 K1 K2''. If the list
-   (ignoring trailing NoSymbol entries) is a triple of KeySyms
-   ``K1 K2 K3'', then the list is treated as if it were the list
-   ``K1 K2 K3 NoSymbol''. When an explicit ``void'' element is
-   desired in the list, the value VoidSymbol can be used.
-
-   The first four elements of the list are split into two groups
-   of KeySyms. Group 1 contains the first and second KeySyms;
-   Group 2 contains the third and fourth KeySyms. Within each
-   group, if the second element of the group is NoSymbol, then the
-   group should be treated as if the second element were the same
-   as the first element, except when the first element is an
-   alphabetic KeySym ``K'' for which both lowercase and uppercase
-   forms are defined. In that case, the group should be treated as
-   if the first element were the lowercase form of ``K'' and the
-   second element were the uppercase form of ``K''.
-
-   The standard rules for obtaining a KeySym from a KeyPress event
-   make use of only the Group 1 and Group 2 KeySyms; no
-   interpretation of other KeySyms in the list is given. Which
-   group to use is determined by the modifier state. Switching
-   between groups is controlled by the KeySym named MODE SWITCH,
-   by attaching that KeySym to some KeyCode and attaching that
-   KeyCode to any one of the modifiers Mod1 through Mod5. This
-   modifier is called the group modifier. For any KeyCode, Group 1
-   is used when the group modifier is off, and Group 2 is used
-   when the group modifier is on.
-
-   The Lock modifier is interpreted as CapsLock when the KeySym
-   named XK_Caps_Lock is attached to some KeyCode and that KeyCode
-   is attached to the Lock modifier. The Lock modifier is
-   interpreted as ShiftLock when the KeySym named XK_Shift_Lock is
-   attached to some KeyCode and that KeyCode is attached to the
-   Lock modifier. If the Lock modifier could be interpreted as
-   both CapsLock and ShiftLock, the CapsLock interpretation is
-   used.
-
-   The operation of keypad keys is controlled by the KeySym named
-   XK_Num_Lock, by attaching that KeySym to some KeyCode and
-   attaching that KeyCode to any one of the modifiers Mod1 through
-   Mod5. This modifier is called the numlock modifier. The
-   standard KeySyms with the prefix ``XK_KP_'' in their name are
-   called keypad KeySyms; these are KeySyms with numeric value in
-   the hexadecimal range 0xFF80 to 0xFFBD inclusive. In addition,
-   vendor-specific KeySyms in the hexadecimal range 0x11000000 to
-   0x1100FFFF are also keypad KeySyms.
-
-   Within a group, the choice of KeySym is determined by applying
-   the first rule that is satisfied from the following list:
-     * The numlock modifier is on and the second KeySym is a
-       keypad KeySym. In this case, if the Shift modifier is on,
-       or if the Lock modifier is on and is interpreted as
-       ShiftLock, then the first KeySym is used, otherwise the
-       second KeySym is used.
-     * The Shift and Lock modifiers are both off. In this case,
-       the first KeySym is used.
-     * The Shift modifier is off, and the Lock modifier is on and
-       is interpreted as CapsLock. In this case, the first KeySym
-       is used, but if that KeySym is lowercase alphabetic, then
-       the corresponding uppercase KeySym is used instead.
-     * The Shift modifier is on, and the Lock modifier is on and
-       is interpreted as CapsLock. In this case, the second KeySym
-       is used, but if that KeySym is lowercase alphabetic, then
-       the corresponding uppercase KeySym is used instead.
-     * The Shift modifier is on, or the Lock modifier is on and is
-       interpreted as ShiftLock, or both. In this case, the second
-       KeySym is used.
-
-   No spatial geometry of the symbols on the key is defined by
-   their order in the KeySym list, although a geometry might be
-   defined on a server-specific basis. The X server does not use
-   the mapping between KeyCodes and KeySyms. Rather, it merely
-   stores it for reading and writing by clients.
-
-   To obtain the legal KeyCodes for a display, use
-   XDisplayKeycodes.
-
-   XDisplayKeycodes(Display *display, int *min_keycodes_return,
-   int *max_keycodes_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   min_keycodes_return
-
-   Returns the minimum number of KeyCodes.
-
-   max_keycodes_return
-
-   Returns the maximum number of KeyCodes.
-
-   The XDisplayKeycodes function returns the min-keycodes and
-   max-keycodes supported by the specified display. The minimum
-   number of KeyCodes returned is never less than 8, and the
-   maximum number of KeyCodes returned is never greater than 255.
-   Not all KeyCodes in this range are required to have
-   corresponding keys.
-
-   To obtain the symbols for the specified KeyCodes, use
-   XGetKeyboardMapping.
-
-   KeySym *XGetKeyboardMapping(Display *display, KeyCode
-   first_keycode, int keycode_count, int
-   *keysyms_per_keycode_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   first_keycode
-
-   Specifies the first KeyCode that is to be returned.
-
-   keycode_count
-
-   Specifies the number of KeyCodes that are to be returned.
-
-   keysyms_per_keycode_return
-
-   Returns the number of KeySyms per KeyCode.
-
-   The XGetKeyboardMapping function returns the symbols for the
-   specified number of KeyCodes starting with first_keycode. The
-   value specified in first_keycode must be greater than or equal
-   to min_keycode as returned by XDisplayKeycodes, or a BadValue
-   error results. In addition, the following expression must be
-   less than or equal to max_keycode as returned by
-   XDisplayKeycodes:
-
-first_keycode + keycode_count - 1
-
-   If this is not the case, a BadValue error results. The number
-   of elements in the KeySyms list is:
-
-keycode_count * keysyms_per_keycode_return
-
-   KeySym number N, counting from zero, for KeyCode K has the
-   following index in the list, counting from zero:
-(K - first_code) * keysyms_per_code_return + N
-
-   The X server arbitrarily chooses the keysyms_per_keycode_return
-   value to be large enough to report all requested symbols. A
-   special KeySym value of NoSymbol is used to fill in unused
-   elements for individual KeyCodes. To free the storage returned
-   by XGetKeyboardMapping, use XFree.
-
-   XGetKeyboardMapping can generate a BadValue error.
-
-   To change the keyboard mapping, use XChangeKeyboardMapping.
-
-   XChangeKeyboardMapping(Display *display, int first_keycode, int
-   keysyms_per_keycode, KeySym *keysyms, int num_codes);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   first_keycode
-
-   Specifies the first KeyCode that is to be changed.
-
-   keysyms_per_keycode
-
-   Specifies the number of KeySyms per KeyCode.
-
-   keysyms
-
-   Specifies an array of KeySyms.
-
-   num_codes
-
-   Specifies the number of KeyCodes that are to be changed.
-
-   The XChangeKeyboardMapping function defines the symbols for the
-   specified number of KeyCodes starting with first_keycode. The
-   symbols for KeyCodes outside this range remain unchanged. The
-   number of elements in keysyms must be:
-
-num_codes * keysyms_per_keycode
-
-   The specified first_keycode must be greater than or equal to
-   min_keycode returned by XDisplayKeycodes, or a BadValue error
-   results. In addition, the following expression must be less
-   than or equal to max_keycode as returned by XDisplayKeycodes,
-   or a BadValue error results:
-
-first_keycode + num_codes - 1
-
-   KeySym number N, counting from zero, for KeyCode K has the
-   following index in keysyms, counting from zero:
-
-(K - first_keycode) * keysyms_per_keycode + N
-
-   The specified keysyms_per_keycode can be chosen arbitrarily by
-   the client to be large enough to hold all desired symbols. A
-   special KeySym value of NoSymbol should be used to fill in
-   unused elements for individual KeyCodes. It is legal for
-   NoSymbol to appear in nontrailing positions of the effective
-   list for a KeyCode. XChangeKeyboardMapping generates a
-   MappingNotify event.
-
-   There is no requirement that the X server interpret this
-   mapping. It is merely stored for reading and writing by
-   clients.
-
-   XChangeKeyboardMapping can generate BadAlloc and BadValue
-   errors.
-
-   The next six functions make use of the XModifierKeymap data
-   structure, which contains:
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-        int max_keypermod;      /* This server's max number of keys per
-modifier */
-        KeyCode *modifiermap;   /* An 8 by max_keypermod array of the mo
-difiers */
-} XModifierKeymap;
-
-   To create an XModifierKeymap structure, use XNewModifiermap.
-
-   XModifierKeymap *XNewModifiermap(int max_keys_per_mod);
-
-   max_keys_per_mod
-
-   Specifies the number of KeyCode entries preallocated to the
-   modifiers in the map.
-
-   The XNewModifiermap function returns a pointer to
-   XModifierKeymap structure for later use.
-
-   To add a new entry to an XModifierKeymap structure, use
-   XInsertModifiermapEntry.
-
-   XModifierKeymap *XInsertModifiermapEntry(XModifierKeymap
-   *modmap, KeyCode keycode_entry, int modifier);
-
-   modmap
-
-   Specifies the XModifierKeymap structure.
-
-   keycode_entry
-
-   Specifies the KeyCode.
-
-   modifier
-
-   Specifies the modifier.
-
-   The XInsertModifiermapEntry function adds the specified KeyCode
-   to the set that controls the specified modifier and returns the
-   resulting XModifierKeymap structure (expanded as needed).
-
-   To delete an entry from an XModifierKeymap structure, use
-   XDeleteModifiermapEntry.
-
-   XModifierKeymap *XDeleteModifiermapEntry(XModifierKeymap
-   *modmap, KeyCode keycode_entry, int modifier);
-
-   modmap
-
-   Specifies the XModifierKeymap structure.
-
-   keycode_entry
-
-   Specifies the KeyCode.
-
-   modifier
-
-   Specifies the modifier.
-
-   The XDeleteModifiermapEntry function deletes the specified
-   KeyCode from the set that controls the specified modifier and
-   returns a pointer to the resulting XModifierKeymap structure.
-
-   To destroy an XModifierKeymap structure, use XFreeModifiermap.
-
-   XFreeModifiermap(XModifierKeymap *modmap);
-
-   modmap
-
-   Specifies the XModifierKeymap structure.
-
-   The XFreeModifiermap function frees the specified
-   XModifierKeymap structure.
-
-   To set the KeyCodes to be used as modifiers, use
-   XSetModifierMapping.
-
-   int XSetModifierMapping(Display *display, XModifierKeymap
-   *modmap);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   modmap
-
-   Specifies the XModifierKeymap structure.
-
-   The XSetModifierMapping function specifies the KeyCodes of the
-   keys (if any) that are to be used as modifiers. If it succeeds,
-   the X server generates a MappingNotify event, and
-   XSetModifierMapping returns MappingSuccess. X permits at most 8
-   modifier keys. If more than 8 are specified in the
-   XModifierKeymap structure, a BadLength error results.
-
-   The modifiermap member of the XModifierKeymap structure
-   contains 8 sets of max_keypermod KeyCodes, one for each
-   modifier in the order Shift, Lock, Control, Mod1, Mod2, Mod3,
-   Mod4, and Mod5. Only nonzero KeyCodes have meaning in each set,
-   and zero KeyCodes are ignored. In addition, all of the nonzero
-   KeyCodes must be in the range specified by min_keycode and
-   max_keycode in the Display structure, or a BadValue error
-   results.
-
-   An X server can impose restrictions on how modifiers can be
-   changed, for example, if certain keys do not generate up
-   transitions in hardware, if auto-repeat cannot be disabled on
-   certain keys, or if multiple modifier keys are not supported.
-   If some such restriction is violated, the status reply is
-   MappingFailed, and none of the modifiers are changed. If the
-   new KeyCodes specified for a modifier differ from those
-   currently defined and any (current or new) keys for that
-   modifier are in the logically down state, XSetModifierMapping
-   returns MappingBusy, and none of the modifiers is changed.
-
-   XSetModifierMapping can generate BadAlloc and BadValue errors.
-
-   To obtain the KeyCodes used as modifiers, use
-   XGetModifierMapping.
-
-   XModifierKeymap *XGetModifierMapping(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   The XGetModifierMapping function returns a pointer to a newly
-   created XModifierKeymap structure that contains the keys being
-   used as modifiers. The structure should be freed after use by
-   calling XFreeModifiermap. If only zero values appear in the set
-   for any modifier, that modifier is disabled.
-
-Chapter 13. Locales and Internationalized Text Functions
-
-   Table of Contents
-
-   X Locale Management
-   Locale and Modifier Dependencies
-   Variable Argument Lists
-   Output Methods
-
-        Output Method Overview
-        Output Method Functions
-        X Output Method Values
-        Output Context Functions
-        Output Context Values
-        Creating and Freeing a Font Set
-        Obtaining Font Set Metrics
-        Drawing Text Using Font Sets
-
-   Input Methods
-
-        Input Method Overview
-        Input Method Management
-        Input Method Functions
-        Input Method Values
-        Input Context Functions
-        Input Context Values
-        Input Method Callback Semantics
-        Event Filtering
-        Getting Keyboard Input
-        Input Method Conventions
-
-   String Constants
-
-   An internationalized application is one that is adaptable to
-   the requirements of different native languages, local customs,
-   and character string encodings. The process of adapting the
-   operation to a particular native language, local custom, or
-   string encoding is called localization. A goal of
-   internationalization is to permit localization without program
-   source modifications or recompilation.
-
-   As one of the localization mechanisms, Xlib provides an X Input
-   Method (XIM) functional interface for internationalized text
-   input and an X Output Method (XOM) functional interface for
-   internationalized text output.
-
-   Internationalization in X is based on the concept of a locale.
-   A locale defines the localized behavior of a program at run
-   time. Locales affect Xlib in its:
-     * Encoding and processing of input method text
-     * Encoding of resource files and values
-     * Encoding and imaging of text strings
-     * Encoding and decoding for inter-client text communication
-
-   o Encoding and decoding for inter-client text communication
-   Characters from various languages are represented in a computer
-   using an encoding. Different languages have different
-   encodings, and there are even different encodings for the same
-   characters in the same language.
-
-   This chapter defines support for localized text imaging and
-   text input and describes the locale mechanism that controls all
-   locale-dependent Xlib functions. Sets of functions are provided
-   for multibyte (char *) text as well as wide character (wchar_t)
-   text in the form supported by the host C language environment.
-   The multibyte and wide character functions are equivalent
-   except for the form of the text argument.
-
-   The Xlib internationalization functions are not meant to
-   provide support for multilingual applications (mixing multiple
-   languages within a single piece of text), but they make it
-   possible to implement applications that work in limited fashion
-   with more than one language in independent contexts.
-
-   The remainder of this chapter discusses:
-     * X locale management
-     * Locale and modifier dependencies
-     * Variable argument lists
-     * Output methods
-     * Input methods
-     * String constants
-
-X Locale Management
-
-   X supports one or more of the locales defined by the host
-   environment. On implementations that conform to the ANSI C
-   library, the locale announcement method is setlocale. This
-   function configures the locale operation of both the host C
-   library and Xlib. The operation of Xlib is governed by the
-   LC_CTYPE category; this is called the current locale. An
-   implementation is permitted to provide implementation-dependent
-   mechanisms for announcing the locale in addition to setlocale.
-
-   On implementations that do not conform to the ANSI C library,
-   the locale announcement method is Xlib
-   implementation-dependent.
-
-   The mechanism by which the semantic operation of Xlib is
-   defined for a specific locale is implementation-dependent.
-
-   X is not required to support all the locales supported by the
-   host. To determine if the current locale is supported by X, use
-   XSupportsLocale.
-
-   Bool XSupportsLocale(void);
-
-   The XSupportsLocale function returns True if Xlib functions are
-   capable of operating under the current locale. If it returns
-   False, Xlib locale-dependent functions for which the
-   XLocaleNotSupported return status is defined will return
-   XLocaleNotSupported. Other Xlib locale-dependent routines will
-   operate in the ``C'' locale.
-
-   The client is responsible for selecting its locale and X
-   modifiers. Clients should provide a means for the user to
-   override the clients' locale selection at client invocation.
-   Most single-display X clients operate in a single locale for
-   both X and the host processing environment. They will configure
-   the locale by calling three functions: the host locale
-   configuration function, XSupportsLocale, and
-   XSetLocaleModifiers.
-
-   The semantics of certain categories of X internationalization
-   capabilities can be configured by setting modifiers. Modifiers
-   are named by implementation-dependent and locale-specific
-   strings. The only standard use for this capability at present
-   is selecting one of several styles of keyboard input method.
-
-   To configure Xlib locale modifiers for the current locale, use
-   XSetLocaleModifiers.
-
-   char *XSetLocaleModifiers(char *modifier_list);
-
-   modifier_list
-
-   Specifies the modifiers.
-
-   The XSetLocaleModifiers function sets the X modifiers for the
-   current locale setting. The modifier_list argument is a
-   null-terminated string of the form ``{@category=value}'', that
-   is, having zero or more concatenated ``@category=value''
-   entries, where category is a category name and value is the
-   (possibly empty) setting for that category. The values are
-   encoded in the current locale. Category names are restricted to
-   the POSIX Portable Filename Character Set.
-
-   The local host X locale modifiers announcer (on POSIX-compliant
-   systems, the XMODIFIERS environment variable) is appended to
-   the modifier_list to provide default values on the local host.
-   If a given category appears more than once in the list, the
-   first setting in the list is used. If a given category is not
-   included in the full modifier list, the category is set to an
-   implementation-dependent default for the current locale. An
-   empty value for a category explicitly specifies the
-   implementation-dependent default.
-
-   If the function is successful, it returns a pointer to a
-   string. The contents of the string are such that a subsequent
-   call with that string (in the same locale) will restore the
-   modifiers to the same settings. If modifier_list is a NULL
-   pointer, XSetLocaleModifiers also returns a pointer to such a
-   string, and the current locale modifiers are not changed.
-
-   If invalid values are given for one or more modifier categories
-   supported by the locale, a NULL pointer is returned, and none
-   of the current modifiers are changed.
-
-   At program startup, the modifiers that are in effect are
-   unspecified until the first successful call to set them.
-   Whenever the locale is changed, the modifiers that are in
-   effect become unspecified until the next successful call to set
-   them. Clients should always call XSetLocaleModifiers with a
-   non-NULL modifier_list after setting the locale before they
-   call any locale-dependent Xlib routine.
-
-   The only standard modifier category currently defined is
-   ``im'', which identifies the desired input method. The values
-   for input method are not standardized. A single locale may use
-   multiple input methods, switching input method under user
-   control. The modifier may specify the initial input method in
-   effect or an ordered list of input methods. Multiple input
-   methods may be specified in a single im value string in an
-   implementation-dependent manner.
-
-   The returned modifiers string is owned by Xlib and should not
-   be modified or freed by the client. It may be freed by Xlib
-   after the current locale or modifiers are changed. Until freed,
-   it will not be modified by Xlib.
-
-   The recommended procedure for clients initializing their locale
-   and modifiers is to obtain locale and modifier announcers
-   separately from one of the following prioritized sources:
-     * A command line option
-     * A resource
-     * The empty string ("")
-
-   The first of these that is defined should be used. Note that
-   when a locale command line option or locale resource is
-   defined, the effect should be to set all categories to the
-   specified locale, overriding any category-specific settings in
-   the local host environment.
-
-Locale and Modifier Dependencies
-
-   The internationalized Xlib functions operate in the current
-   locale configured by the host environment and X locale
-   modifiers set by XSetLocaleModifiers or in the locale and
-   modifiers configured at the time some object supplied to the
-   function was created. For each locale-dependent function, the
-   following table describes the locale (and modifiers)
-   dependency:
-   Locale from Affects the Function In
-   Locale Query/Configuration:
-   setlocale XSupportsLocale Locale queried
-   XSetLocaleModifiers Locale modified
-   Resources:
-   setlocale
-
-   XrmGetFileDatabase
-
-   XrmGetStringDatabase
-   Locale of XrmDatabase
-   XrmDatabase
-
-   XrmPutFileDatabase
-
-   XrmLocaleOfDatabase
-   Locale of XrmDatabase
-   Setting Standard Properties:
-   setlocale XmbSetWMProperties Encoding of supplied/returned text
-   (some WM_ property text in environment locale)
-   setlocale
-
-   XmbTextPropertyToTextList
-
-   XwcTextPropertyToTextList
-
-   XmbTextListToTextProperty
-
-   XwcTextListToTextProperty
-   Encoding of supplied/returned text
-   Text Input:
-   setlocale XOpenIM XIM input method selection
-   XRegisterIMInstantiateCallback XIM selection
-   XUnregisterIMInstantiateCallback XIM selection
-   XIM XCreateIC XIC input method configuration
-   XLocaleOfIM, and so on Queried locale
-   XIC XmbLookupString Keyboard layout
-   XwcLookupString Encoding of returned text
-   Text Drawing:
-   setlocale XOpenOM XOM output method selection
-   XCreateFontSet Charsets of fonts in XFontSet
-   XOM XCreateOC XOC output method configuration
-   XLocaleOfOM, and so on Queried locale
-   XFontSet XmbDrawText, Locale of supplied text
-   XwcDrawText, and so on Locale of supplied text
-
-   XExtentsOfFontSet, and so on
-
-   XmbTextExtents,
-
-   XwcTextExtents, and so on
-   Locale-dependent metrics
-   Xlib Errors:
-   setlocale
-
-   XGetErrorDatabaseText,
-
-   XGetErrorText, and so on
-   Locale of error message
-
-   Clients may assume that a locale-encoded text string returned
-   by an X function can be passed to a C library routine, or vice
-   versa, if the locale is the same at the two calls.
-
-   All text strings processed by internationalized Xlib functions
-   are assumed to begin in the initial state of the encoding of
-   the locale, if the encoding is state-dependent.
-
-   All Xlib functions behave as if they do not change the current
-   locale or X modifier setting. (This means that if they do
-   change locale or call XSetLocaleModifiers with a non-NULL
-   argument, they must save and restore the current state on entry
-   and exit.) Also, Xlib functions on implementations that conform
-   to the ANSI C library do not alter the global state associated
-   with the ANSI C functions mblen, mbtowc, wctomb, and strtok.
-
-Variable Argument Lists
-
-   Various functions in this chapter have arguments that conform
-   to the ANSI C variable argument list calling convention. Each
-   function denoted with an argument of the form ``...'' takes a
-   variable-length list of name and value pairs, where each name
-   is a string and each value is of type XPointer. A name argument
-   that is NULL identifies the end of the list.
-
-   A variable-length argument list may contain a nested list. If
-   the name XNVaNestedList is specified in place of an argument
-   name, then the following value is interpreted as an
-   XVaNestedList value that specifies a list of values logically
-   inserted into the original list at the point of declaration. A
-   NULL identifies the end of a nested list.
-
-   To allocate a nested variable argument list dynamically, use
-   XVaCreateNestedList.
-
-   XVaNestedList XVaCreateNestedList(int dummy);
-
-   dummy
-
-   Specifies an unused argument (required by ANSI C).
-
-   ...
-
-   Specifies the variable length argument list(Al.
-
-   The XVaCreateNestedList function allocates memory and copies
-   its arguments into a single list pointer, which may be used as
-   a value for arguments requiring a list value. Any entries are
-   copied as specified. Data passed by reference is not copied;
-   the caller must ensure data remains valid for the lifetime of
-   the nested list. The list should be freed using XFree when it
-   is no longer needed.
-
-Output Methods
-
-   This section provides discussions of the following X Output
-   Method (XOM) topics:
-     * Output method overview
-     * Output method functions
-     * Output method values
-     * Output context functions
-     * Output context values
-     * Creating and freeing a font set
-     * Obtaining font set metrics
-     * Drawing text using font sets
-
-Output Method Overview
-
-   Locale-dependent text may include one or more text components,
-   each of which may require different fonts and character set
-   encodings. In some languages, each component might have a
-   different drawing direction, and some components might contain
-   context-dependent characters that change shape based on
-   relationships with neighboring characters.
-
-   When drawing such locale-dependent text, some locale-specific
-   knowledge is required; for example, what fonts are required to
-   draw the text, how the text can be separated into components,
-   and which fonts are selected to draw each component. Further,
-   when bidirectional text must be drawn, the internal
-   representation order of the text must be changed into the
-   visual representation order to be drawn.
-
-   An X Output Method provides a functional interface so that
-   clients do not have to deal directly with such locale-dependent
-   details. Output methods provide the following capabilities:
-     * Creating a set of fonts required to draw locale-dependent
-       text.
-     * Drawing locale-dependent text with a font set without the
-       caller needing to be aware of locale dependencies.
-     * Obtaining the escapement and extents in pixels of
-       locale-dependent text.
-     * Determining if bidirectional or context-dependent drawing
-       is required in a specific locale with a specific font set.
-
-   Two different abstractions are used in the representation of
-   the output method for clients.
-
-   The abstraction used to communicate with an output method is an
-   opaque data structure represented by the XOM data type. The
-   abstraction for representing the state of a particular output
-   thread is called an output context. The Xlib representation of
-   an output context is an XOC, which is compatible with XFontSet
-   in terms of its functional interface, but is a broader, more
-   generalized abstraction.
-
-Output Method Functions
-
-   To open an output method, use XOpenOM.
-
-   XOM XOpenOM(Display *display, XrmDatabase db, char *res_name,
-   char *res_class);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   db
-
-   Specifies a pointer to the resource database.
-
-   res_name
-
-   Specifies the full resource name of the application.
-
-   res_class
-
-   Specifies the full class name of the application.
-
-   The XOpenOM function opens an output method matching the
-   current locale and modifiers specification. The current locale
-   and modifiers are bound to the output method when XOpenOM is
-   called. The locale associated with an output method cannot be
-   changed.
-
-   The specific output method to which this call will be routed is
-   identified on the basis of the current locale and modifiers.
-   XOpenOM will identify a default output method corresponding to
-   the current locale. That default can be modified using
-   XSetLocaleModifiers to set the output method modifier.
-
-   The db argument is the resource database to be used by the
-   output method for looking up resources that are private to the
-   output method. It is not intended that this database be used to
-   look up values that can be set as OC values in an output
-   context. If db is NULL, no database is passed to the output
-   method.
-
-   The res_name and res_class arguments specify the resource name
-   and class of the application. They are intended to be used as
-   prefixes by the output method when looking up resources that
-   are common to all output contexts that may be created for this
-   output method. The characters used for resource names and
-   classes must be in the X Portable Character Set. The resources
-   looked up are not fully specified if res_name or res_class is
-   NULL.
-
-   The res_name and res_class arguments are not assumed to exist
-   beyond the call to XOpenOM. The specified resource database is
-   assumed to exist for the lifetime of the output method.
-
-   XOpenOM returns NULL if no output method could be opened.
-
-   To close an output method, use XCloseOM.
-
-   Status XCloseOM(XOM om);
-
-   om
-
-   Specifies the output method.
-
-   The XCloseOM function closes the specified output method.
-
-   To set output method attributes, use XSetOMValues.
-
-   char *XSetOMValues(XOM om);
-
-   om
-
-   Specifies the output method.
-
-   ...
-
-   Specifies the variable-length argument list to set XOM values.
-
-   The XSetOMValues function presents a variable argument list
-   programming interface for setting properties or features of the
-   specified output method. This function returns NULL if it
-   succeeds; otherwise, it returns the name of the first argument
-   that could not be obtained.
-
-   No standard arguments are currently defined by Xlib.
-
-   To query an output method, use XGetOMValues.
-
-   char *XGetOMValues(XOM om);
-
-   om
-
-   Specifies the output method.
-
-   ...
-
-   Specifies the variable-length argument list to get XOM values.
-
-   The XGetOMValues function presents a variable argument list
-   programming interface for querying properties or features of
-   the specified output method. This function returns NULL if it
-   succeeds; otherwise, it returns the name of the first argument
-   that could not be obtained.
-
-   To obtain the display associated with an output method, use
-   XDisplayOfOM.
-
-   Display *XDisplayOfOM(XOM om);
-
-   om
-
-   Specifies the output method.
-
-   The XDisplayOfOM function returns the display associated with
-   the specified output method.
-
-   To get the locale associated with an output method, use
-   XLocaleOfOM.
-
-   char *XLocaleOfOM(XOM om);
-
-   om
-
-   Specifies the output method.
-
-   The XLocaleOfOM returns the locale associated with the
-   specified output method.
-
-X Output Method Values
-
-   The following table describes how XOM values are interpreted by
-   an output method. The first column lists the XOM values. The
-   second column indicates how each of the XOM values are treated
-   by a particular output style.
-
-   The following key applies to this table.
-   Key Explanation
-   G   This value may be read using XGetOMValues.
-
-   XOM Value                     Key
-   XNRequiredCharSet             G
-   XNQueryOrientation            G
-   XNDirectionalDependentDrawing G
-   XNContextualDrawing           G
-
-Required Char Set
-
-   The XNRequiredCharSet argument returns the list of charsets
-   that are required for loading the fonts needed for the locale.
-   The value of the argument is a pointer to a structure of type
-   XOMCharSetList.
-
-   The XOMCharSetList structure is defined as follows:
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     int    charset_count;
-     char   **charset_list;
-} XOMCharSetList;
-
-   The charset_list member is a list of one or more
-   null-terminated charset names, and the charset_count member is
-   the number of charset names.
-
-   The required charset list is owned by Xlib and should not be
-   modified or freed by the client. It will be freed by a call to
-   XCloseOM with the associated XOM. Until freed, its contents
-   will not be modified by Xlib.
-
-Query Orientation
-
-   The XNQueryOrientation argument returns the global orientation
-   of text when drawn. Other than XOMOrientation_LTR_TTB, the set
-   of orientations supported is locale-dependent. The value of the
-   argument is a pointer to a structure of type XOMOrientation.
-   Clients are responsible for freeing the XOMOrientation
-   structure by using XFree; this also frees the contents of the
-   structure.
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     int          num_orientation;
-     XOrientation *orientation;     /* Input Text description */
-} XOMOrientation;
-
-typedef enum {
-     XOMOrientation_LTR_TTB,
-     XOMOrientation_RTL_TTB,
-     XOMOrientation_TTB_LTR,
-     XOMOrientation_TTB_RTL,
-     XOMOrientation_Context
-} XOrientation;
-
-   The possible value for XOrientation may be:
-     * XOMOrientation_LTR_TTB left-to-right, top-to-bottom global
-       orientation
-     * XOMOrientation_RTL_TTB right-to-left, top-to-bottom global
-       orientation
-     * XOMOrientation_TTB_LTR top-to-bottom, left-to-right global
-       orientation
-     * XOMOrientation_TTB_RTL top-to-bottom, right-to-left global
-       orientation
-     * XOMOrientation_Context contextual global orientation
-
-Directional Dependent Drawing
-
-   The XNDirectionalDependentDrawing argument indicates whether
-   the text rendering functions implement implicit handling of
-   directional text. If this value is True, the output method has
-   knowledge of directional dependencies and reorders text as
-   necessary when rendering text. If this value is False, the
-   output method does not implement any directional text handling,
-   and all character directions are assumed to be left-to-right.
-
-   Regardless of the rendering order of characters, the origins of
-   all characters are on the primary draw direction side of the
-   drawing origin.
-
-   This OM value presents functionality identical to the
-   XDirectionalDependentDrawing function.
-
-Context Dependent Drawing
-
-   The XNContextualDrawing argument indicates whether the text
-   rendering functions implement implicit context-dependent
-   drawing. If this value is True, the output method has knowledge
-   of context dependencies and performs character shape editing,
-   combining glyphs to present a single character as necessary.
-   The actual shape editing is dependent on the locale
-   implementation and the font set used.
-
-   This OM value presents functionality identical to the
-   XContextualDrawing function.
-
-Output Context Functions
-
-   An output context is an abstraction that contains both the data
-   required by an output method and the information required to
-   display that data. There can be multiple output contexts for
-   one output method. The programming interfaces for creating,
-   reading, or modifying an output context use a variable argument
-   list. The name elements of the argument lists are referred to
-   as XOC values. It is intended that output methods be controlled
-   by these XOC values. As new XOC values are created, they should
-   be registered with the X Consortium. An XOC can be used
-   anywhere an XFontSet can be used, and vice versa; XFontSet is
-   retained for compatibility with previous releases. The concepts
-   of output methods and output contexts include broader, more
-   generalized abstraction than font set, supporting complex and
-   more intelligent text display, and dealing not only with
-   multiple fonts but also with context dependencies. However,
-   XFontSet is widely used in several interfaces, so XOC is
-   defined as an upward compatible type of XFontSet.
-
-   To create an output context, use XCreateOC.
-
-   XOC XCreateOC(XOM om);
-
-   om
-
-   Specifies the output method.
-
-   ...
-
-   Specifies the variable-length argument list to set XOC values.
-
-   The XCreateOC function creates an output context within the
-   specified output method.
-
-   The base font names argument is mandatory at creation time, and
-   the output context will not be created unless it is provided.
-   All other output context values can be set later.
-
-   XCreateOC returns NULL if no output context could be created.
-   NULL can be returned for any of the following reasons:
-     * A required argument was not set.
-     * A read-only argument was set.
-     * An argument name is not recognized.
-     * The output method encountered an output method
-       implementation-dependent error.
-
-   XCreateOC can generate a BadAtom error.
-
-   To destroy an output context, use XDestroyOC.
-
-   void XDestroyOC(XOC oc);
-
-   oc
-
-   Specifies the output context.
-
-   The XDestroyOC function destroys the specified output context.
-
-   To get the output method associated with an output context, use
-   XOMOfOC.
-
-   XOM XOMOfOC(XOC oc);
-
-   oc
-
-   Specifies the output context.
-
-   The XOMOfOC function returns the output method associated with
-   the specified output context.
-
-   Xlib provides two functions for setting and reading output
-   context values, respectively, XSetOCValues and XGetOCValues.
-   Both functions have a variable-length argument list. In that
-   argument list, any XOC value's name must be denoted with a
-   character string using the X Portable Character Set.
-
-   To set XOC values, use XSetOCValues.
-
-   char *XSetOCValues(XOC oc);
-
-   oc
-
-   Specifies the output context.
-
-   ...
-
-   Specifies the variable-length argument list to set XOC values.
-
-   The XSetOCValues function returns NULL if no error occurred;
-   otherwise, it returns the name of the first argument that could
-   not be set. An argument might not be set for any of the
-   following reasons:
-     * The argument is read-only.
-     * The argument name is not recognized.
-     * An implementation-dependent error occurs.
-
-   Each value to be set must be an appropriate datum, matching the
-   data type imposed by the semantics of the argument.
-
-   XSetOCValues can generate a BadAtom error.
-
-   To obtain XOC values, use XGetOCValues.
-
-   char *XGetOCValues(XOC oc);
-
-   oc
-
-   Specifies the output context.
-
-   ...
-
-   Specifies the variable-length argument list to get XOC values.
-
-   The XGetOCValues function returns NULL if no error occurred;
-   otherwise, it returns the name of the first argument that could
-   not be obtained. An argument might not be obtained for any of
-   the following reasons:
-     * The argument name is not recognized.
-     * An implementation-dependent error occurs.
-
-   Each argument value following a name must point to a location
-   where the value is to be stored.
-
-Output Context Values
-
-   The following table describes how XOC values are interpreted by
-   an output method. The first column lists the XOC values. The
-   second column indicates the alternative interfaces that
-   function identically and are provided for compatibility with
-   previous releases. The third column indicates how each of the
-   XOC values is treated.
-
-   The following keys apply to this table.
-   Key Explanation
-   C This value must be set with XCreateOC.
-   D This value may be set using XCreateOC. If it is not set,a
-   default is provided.
-   G This value may be read using XGetOCValues.
-   S This value must be set using XSetOCValues.
-
-   XOC Value      Alternative Interface Key
-   BaseFontName   XCreateFontSet        C-G
-   MissingCharSet XCreateFontSet        G
-   DefaultString  XCreateFontSet        G
-   Orientation    -                     D-S-G
-   ResourceName   -                     S-G
-   ResourceClass  -                     S-G
-   FontInfo       XFontsOfFontSet       G
-   OMAutomatic    -                     G
-
-Base Font Name
-
-   The XNBaseFontName argument is a list of base font names that
-   Xlib uses to load the fonts needed for the locale. The base
-   font names are a comma-separated list. The string is
-   null-terminated and is assumed to be in the Host Portable
-   Character Encoding; otherwise, the result is
-   implementation-dependent. White space immediately on either
-   side of a separating comma is ignored.
-
-   Use of XLFD font names permits Xlib to obtain the fonts needed
-   for a variety of locales from a single locale-independent base
-   font name. The single base font name should name a family of
-   fonts whose members are encoded in the various charsets needed
-   by the locales of interest.
-
-   An XLFD base font name can explicitly name a charset needed for
-   the locale. This allows the user to specify an exact font for
-   use with a charset required by a locale, fully controlling the
-   font selection.
-
-   If a base font name is not an XLFD name, Xlib will attempt to
-   obtain an XLFD name from the font properties for the font. If
-   Xlib is successful, the XGetOCValues function will return this
-   XLFD name instead of the client-supplied name.
-
-   This argument must be set at creation time and cannot be
-   changed. If no fonts exist for any of the required charsets, or
-   if the locale definition in Xlib requires that a font exist for
-   a particular charset and a font is not found for that charset,
-   XCreateOC returns NULL.
-
-   When querying for the XNBaseFontName XOC value, XGetOCValues
-   returns a null-terminated string identifying the base font
-   names that Xlib used to load the fonts needed for the locale.
-   This string is owned by Xlib and should not be modified or
-   freed by the client. The string will be freed by a call to
-   XDestroyOC with the associated XOC. Until freed, the string
-   contents will not be modified by Xlib.
-
-Missing CharSet
-
-   The XNMissingCharSet argument returns the list of required
-   charsets that are missing from the font set. The value of the
-   argument is a pointer to a structure of type XOMCharSetList.
-
-   If fonts exist for all of the charsets required by the current
-   locale, charset_list is set to NULL and charset_count is set to
-   zero. If no fonts exist for one or more of the required
-   charsets, charset_list is set to a list of one or more
-   null-terminated charset names for which no fonts exist, and
-   charset_count is set to the number of missing charsets. The
-   charsets are from the list of the required charsets for the
-   encoding of the locale and do not include any charsets to which
-   Xlib may be able to remap a required charset.
-
-   The missing charset list is owned by Xlib and should not be
-   modified or freed by the client. It will be freed by a call to
-   XDestroyOC with the associated XOC. Until freed, its contents
-   will not be modified by Xlib.
-
-Default String
-
-   When a drawing or measuring function is called with an XOC that
-   has missing charsets, some characters in the locale will not be
-   drawable. The XNDefaultString argument returns a pointer to a
-   string that represents the glyphs that are drawn with this XOC
-   when the charsets of the available fonts do not include all
-   glyphs required to draw a character. The string does not
-   necessarily consist of valid characters in the current locale
-   and is not necessarily drawn with the fonts loaded for the font
-   set, but the client can draw or measure the default glyphs by
-   including this string in a string being drawn or measured with
-   the XOC.
-
-   If the XNDefaultString argument returned the empty string (""),
-   no glyphs are drawn and the escapement is zero. The returned
-   string is null-terminated. It is owned by Xlib and should not
-   be modified or freed by the client. It will be freed by a call
-   to XDestroyOC with the associated XOC. Until freed, its
-   contents will not be modified by Xlib.
-
-Orientation
-
-   The XNOrientation argument specifies the current orientation of
-   text when drawn. The value of this argument is one of the
-   values returned by the XGetOMValues function with the
-   XNQueryOrientation argument specified in the XOrientation list.
-   The value of the argument is of type XOrientation. When
-   XNOrientation is queried, the value specifies the current
-   orientation. When XNOrientation is set, a value is used to set
-   the current orientation.
-
-   When XOMOrientation_Context is set, the text orientation of the
-   text is determined according to an implementation-defined
-   method (for example, ISO 6429 control sequences), and the
-   initial text orientation for locale-dependent Xlib functions is
-   assumed to be XOMOrientation_LTR_TTB.
-
-   The XNOrientation value does not change the prime drawing
-   direction for Xlib drawing functions.
-
-Resource Name and Class
-
-   The XNResourceName and XNResourceClass arguments are strings
-   that specify the full name and class used by the client to
-   obtain resources for the display of the output context. These
-   values should be used as prefixes for name and class when
-   looking up resources that may vary according to the output
-   context. If these values are not set, the resources will not be
-   fully specified.
-
-   It is not intended that values that can be set as XOM values be
-   set as resources.
-
-   When querying for the XNResourceName or XNResourceClass XOC
-   value, XGetOCValues returns a null-terminated string. This
-   string is owned by Xlib and should not be modified or freed by
-   the client. The string will be freed by a call to XDestroyOC
-   with the associated XOC or when the associated value is changed
-   via XSetOCValues. Until freed, the string contents will not be
-   modified by Xlib.
-
-Font Info
-
-   The XNFontInfo argument specifies a list of one or more
-   XFontStruct structures and font names for the fonts used for
-   drawing by the given output context. The value of the argument
-   is a pointer to a structure of type XOMFontInfo.
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     int         num_font;
-     XFontStruct **font_struct_list;
-     char        **font_name_list;
-} XOMFontInfo;
-
-   A list of pointers to the XFontStruct structures is returned to
-   font_struct_list. A list of pointers to null-terminated,
-   fully-specified font name strings in the locale of the output
-   context is returned to font_name_list. The font_name_list order
-   corresponds to the font_struct_list order. The number of
-   XFontStruct structures and font names is returned to num_font.
-
-   Because it is not guaranteed that a given character will be
-   imaged using a single font glyph, there is no provision for
-   mapping a character or default string to the font properties,
-   font ID, or direction hint for the font for the character. The
-   client may access the XFontStruct list to obtain these values
-   for all the fonts currently in use.
-
-   Xlib does not guarantee that fonts are loaded from the server
-   at the creation of an XOC. Xlib may choose to cache font data,
-   loading it only as needed to draw text or compute text
-   dimensions. Therefore, existence of the per_char metrics in the
-   XFontStruct structures in the XFontStructSet is undefined.
-   Also, note that all properties in the XFontStruct structures
-   are in the STRING encoding.
-
-   The client must not free the XOMFontInfo struct itself; it will
-   be freed when the XOC is closed.
-
-OM Automatic
-
-   The XNOMAutomatic argument returns whether the associated
-   output context was created by XCreateFontSet or not. Because
-   the XFreeFontSet function not only destroys the output context
-   but also closes the implicit output method associated with it,
-   XFreeFontSet should be used with any output context created by
-   XCreateFontSet. However, it is possible that a client does not
-   know how the output context was created. Before a client
-   destroys the output context, it can query whether XNOMAutomatic
-   is set to determine whether XFreeFontSet or XDestroyOC should
-   be used to destroy the output context.
-
-Creating and Freeing a Font Set
-
-   Xlib international text drawing is done using a set of one or
-   more fonts, as needed for the locale of the text. Fonts are
-   loaded according to a list of base font names supplied by the
-   client and the charsets required by the locale. The XFontSet is
-   an opaque type representing the state of a particular output
-   thread and is equivalent to the type XOC.
-
-   The XCreateFontSet function is a convenience function for
-   creating an output context using only default values. The
-   returned XFontSet has an implicitly created XOM. This XOM has
-   an OM value XNOMAutomatic automatically set to True so that the
-   output context self indicates whether it was created by
-   XCreateOC or XCreateFontSet.
-
-   XFontSet XCreateFontSet(Display *display, char
-   *base_font_name_list, char ***missing_charset_list_return, int
-   *missing_charset_count_return, char **def_string_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   base_font_name_list
-
-   Specifies the base font names.
-
-   missing_charset_list_return
-
-   Returns the missing charsets.
-
-   missing_charset_count_return
-
-   Returns the number of missing charsets.
-
-   def_string_return
-
-   Returns the string drawn for missing charsets.
-
-   The XCreateFontSet function creates a font set for the
-   specified display. The font set is bound to the current locale
-   when XCreateFontSet is called. The font set may be used in
-   subsequent calls to obtain font and character information and
-   to image text in the locale of the font set.
-
-   The base_font_name_list argument is a list of base font names
-   that Xlib uses to load the fonts needed for the locale. The
-   base font names are a comma-separated list. The string is
-   null-terminated and is assumed to be in the Host Portable
-   Character Encoding; otherwise, the result is
-   implementation-dependent. White space immediately on either
-   side of a separating comma is ignored.
-
-   Use of XLFD font names permits Xlib to obtain the fonts needed
-   for a variety of locales from a single locale-independent base
-   font name. The single base font name should name a family of
-   fonts whose members are encoded in the various charsets needed
-   by the locales of interest.
-
-   An XLFD base font name can explicitly name a charset needed for
-   the locale. This allows the user to specify an exact font for
-   use with a charset required by a locale, fully controlling the
-   font selection.
-
-   If a base font name is not an XLFD name, Xlib will attempt to
-   obtain an XLFD name from the font properties for the font. If
-   this action is successful in obtaining an XLFD name, the
-   XBaseFontNameListOfFontSet function will return this XLFD name
-   instead of the client-supplied name.
-
-   Xlib uses the following algorithm to select the fonts that will
-   be used to display text with the XFontSet.
-
-   For each font charset required by the locale, the base font
-   name list is searched for the first appearance of one of the
-   following cases that names a set of fonts that exist at the
-   server:
-     * The first XLFD-conforming base font name that specifies the
-       required charset or a superset of the required charset in
-       its CharSetRegistry and CharSetEncoding fields. The
-       implementation may use a base font name whose specified
-       charset is a superset of the required charset, for example,
-       an ISO8859-1 font for an ASCII charset.
-     * The first set of one or more XLFD-conforming base font
-       names that specify one or more charsets that can be
-       remapped to support the required charset. The Xlib
-       implementation may recognize various mappings from a
-       required charset to one or more other charsets and use the
-       fonts for those charsets. For example, JIS Roman is ASCII
-       with tilde and backslash replaced by yen and overbar; Xlib
-       may load an ISO8859-1 font to support this character set if
-       a JIS Roman font is not available.
-     * The first XLFD-conforming font name or the first non-XLFD
-       font name for which an XLFD font name can be obtained,
-       combined with the required charset (replacing the
-       CharSetRegistry and CharSetEncoding fields in the XLFD font
-       name). As in case 1, the implementation may use a charset
-       that is a superset of the required charset.
-     * The first font name that can be mapped in some
-       implementation-dependent manner to one or more fonts that
-       support imaging text in the charset.
-
-   For example, assume that a locale required the charsets:
-
-ISO8859-1
-JISX0208.1983
-JISX0201.1976
-GB2312-1980.0
-
-   The user could supply a base_font_name_list that explicitly
-   specifies the charsets, ensuring that specific fonts are used
-   if they exist. For example:
-
-"-JIS-Fixed-Medium-R-Normal--26-180-100-100-C-240-JISX0208.1983-0,\\
--JIS-Fixed-Medium-R-Normal--26-180-100-100-C-120-JISX0201.1976-0,\\
--GB-Fixed-Medium-R-Normal--26-180-100-100-C-240-GB2312-1980.0,\\
--Adobe-Courier-Bold-R-Normal--25-180-75-75-M-150-ISO8859-1"
-
-   Alternatively, the user could supply a base_font_name_list that
-   omits the charsets, letting Xlib select font charsets required
-   for the locale. For example:
-
-"-JIS-Fixed-Medium-R-Normal--26-180-100-100-C-240,\\
--JIS-Fixed-Medium-R-Normal--26-180-100-100-C-120,\\
--GB-Fixed-Medium-R-Normal--26-180-100-100-C-240,\\
--Adobe-Courier-Bold-R-Normal--25-180-100-100-M-150"
-
-   Alternatively, the user could simply supply a single base font
-   name that allows Xlib to select from all available fonts that
-   meet certain minimum XLFD property requirements. For example:
-
-"-*-*-*-R-Normal--*-180-100-100-*-*"
-
-   If XCreateFontSet is unable to create the font set, either
-   because there is insufficient memory or because the current
-   locale is not supported, XCreateFontSet returns NULL,
-   missing_charset_list_return is set to NULL, and
-   missing_charset_count_return is set to zero. If fonts exist for
-   all of the charsets required by the current locale,
-   XCreateFontSet returns a valid XFontSet,
-   missing_charset_list_return is set to NULL, and
-   missing_charset_count_return is set to zero.
-
-   If no font exists for one or more of the required charsets,
-   XCreateFontSet sets missing_charset_list_return to a list of
-   one or more null-terminated charset names for which no font
-   exists and sets missing_charset_count_return to the number of
-   missing fonts. The charsets are from the list of the required
-   charsets for the encoding of the locale and do not include any
-   charsets to which Xlib may be able to remap a required charset.
-
-   If no font exists for any of the required charsets or if the
-   locale definition in Xlib requires that a font exist for a
-   particular charset and a font is not found for that charset,
-   XCreateFontSet returns NULL. Otherwise, XCreateFontSet returns
-   a valid XFontSet to font_set.
-
-   When an Xmb/wc drawing or measuring function is called with an
-   XFontSet that has missing charsets, some characters in the
-   locale will not be drawable. If def_string_return is non-NULL,
-   XCreateFontSet returns a pointer to a string that represents
-   the glyphs that are drawn with this XFontSet when the charsets
-   of the available fonts do not include all font glyphs required
-   to draw a codepoint. The string does not necessarily consist of
-   valid characters in the current locale and is not necessarily
-   drawn with the fonts loaded for the font set, but the client
-   can draw and measure the default glyphs by including this
-   string in a string being drawn or measured with the XFontSet.
-
-   If the string returned to def_string_return is the empty string
-   (""), no glyphs are drawn, and the escapement is zero. The
-   returned string is null-terminated. It is owned by Xlib and
-   should not be modified or freed by the client. It will be freed
-   by a call to XFreeFontSet with the associated XFontSet. Until
-   freed, its contents will not be modified by Xlib.
-
-   The client is responsible for constructing an error message
-   from the missing charset and default string information and may
-   choose to continue operation in the case that some fonts did
-   not exist.
-
-   The returned XFontSet and missing charset list should be freed
-   with XFreeFontSet and XFreeStringList, respectively. The
-   client-supplied base_font_name_list may be freed by the client
-   after calling XCreateFontSet.
-
-   To obtain a list of XFontStruct structures and full font names
-   given an XFontSet, use XFontsOfFontSet.
-
-   int XFontsOfFontSet(XFontSet font_set, XFontStruct
-   ***font_struct_list_return, char ***font_name_list_return);
-
-   font_set
-
-   Specifies the font set.
-
-   font_struct_list_return
-
-   Returns the list of font structs.
-
-   font_name_list_return
-
-   Returns the list of font names.
-
-   The XFontsOfFontSet function returns a list of one or more
-   XFontStructs and font names for the fonts used by the Xmb and
-   Xwc layers for the given font set. A list of pointers to the
-   XFontStruct structures is returned to font_struct_list_return.
-   A list of pointers to null-terminated, fully specified font
-   name strings in the locale of the font set is returned to
-   font_name_list_return. The font_name_list order corresponds to
-   the font_struct_list order. The number of XFontStruct
-   structures and font names is returned as the value of the
-   function.
-
-   Because it is not guaranteed that a given character will be
-   imaged using a single font glyph, there is no provision for
-   mapping a character or default string to the font properties,
-   font ID, or direction hint for the font for the character. The
-   client may access the XFontStruct list to obtain these values
-   for all the fonts currently in use.
-
-   Xlib does not guarantee that fonts are loaded from the server
-   at the creation of an XFontSet. Xlib may choose to cache font
-   data, loading it only as needed to draw text or compute text
-   dimensions. Therefore, existence of the per_char metrics in the
-   XFontStruct structures in the XFontStructSet is undefined.
-   Also, note that all properties in the XFontStruct structures
-   are in the STRING encoding.
-
-   The XFontStruct and font name lists are owned by Xlib and
-   should not be modified or freed by the client. They will be
-   freed by a call to XFreeFontSet with the associated XFontSet.
-   Until freed, their contents will not be modified by Xlib.
-
-   To obtain the base font name list and the selected font name
-   list given an XFontSet, use XBaseFontNameListOfFontSet.
-
-   char *XBaseFontNameListOfFontSet(XFontSet font_set);
-
-   font_set
-
-   Specifies the font set.
-
-   The XBaseFontNameListOfFontSet function returns the original
-   base font name list supplied by the client when the XFontSet
-   was created. A null-terminated string containing a list of
-   comma-separated font names is returned as the value of the
-   function. White space may appear immediately on either side of
-   separating commas.
-
-   If XCreateFontSet obtained an XLFD name from the font
-   properties for the font specified by a non-XLFD base name, the
-   XBaseFontNameListOfFontSet function will return the XLFD name
-   instead of the non-XLFD base name.
-
-   The base font name list is owned by Xlib and should not be
-   modified or freed by the client. It will be freed by a call to
-   XFreeFontSet with the associated XFontSet. Until freed, its
-   contents will not be modified by Xlib.
-
-   To obtain the locale name given an XFontSet, use
-   XLocaleOfFontSet.
-
-   char *XLocaleOfFontSet(XFontSet font_set);
-
-   font_set
-
-   Specifies the font set.
-
-   The XLocaleOfFontSet function returns the name of the locale
-   bound to the specified XFontSet, as a null-terminated string.
-
-   The returned locale name string is owned by Xlib and should not
-   be modified or freed by the client. It may be freed by a call
-   to XFreeFontSet with the associated XFontSet. Until freed, it
-   will not be modified by Xlib.
-
-   The XFreeFontSet function is a convenience function for freeing
-   an output context. XFreeFontSet also frees its associated XOM
-   if the output context was created by XCreateFontSet.
-
-   void XFreeFontSet(Display *display, XFontSet font_set);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   font_set
-
-   Specifies the font set.
-
-   The XFreeFontSet function frees the specified font set. The
-   associated base font name list, font name list, XFontStruct
-   list, and XFontSetExtents, if any, are freed.
-
-Obtaining Font Set Metrics
-
-   Metrics for the internationalized text drawing functions are
-   defined in terms of a primary draw direction, which is the
-   default direction in which the character origin advances for
-   each succeeding character in the string. The Xlib interface is
-   currently defined to support only a left-to-right primary draw
-   direction. The drawing origin is the position passed to the
-   drawing function when the text is drawn. The baseline is a line
-   drawn through the drawing origin parallel to the primary draw
-   direction. Character ink is the pixels painted in the
-   foreground color and does not include interline or
-   intercharacter spacing or image text background pixels.
-
-   The drawing functions are allowed to implement implicit text
-   directionality control, reversing the order in which characters
-   are rendered along the primary draw direction in response to
-   locale-specific lexical analysis of the string.
-
-   Regardless of the character rendering order, the origins of all
-   characters are on the primary draw direction side of the
-   drawing origin. The screen location of a particular character
-   image may be determined with XmbTextPerCharExtents or
-   XwcTextPerCharExtents.
-
-   The drawing functions are allowed to implement
-   context-dependent rendering, where the glyphs drawn for a
-   string are not simply a concatenation of the glyphs that
-   represent each individual character. A string of two characters
-   drawn with XmbDrawString may render differently than if the two
-   characters were drawn with separate calls to XmbDrawString. If
-   the client appends or inserts a character in a previously drawn
-   string, the client may need to redraw some adjacent characters
-   to obtain proper rendering.
-
-   To find out about direction-dependent rendering, use
-   XDirectionalDependentDrawing.
-
-   Bool XDirectionalDependentDrawing(XFontSet font_set);
-
-   font_set
-
-   Specifies the font set.
-
-   The XDirectionalDependentDrawing function returns True if the
-   drawing functions implement implicit text directionality;
-   otherwise, it returns False.
-
-   To find out about context-dependent rendering, use
-   XContextualDrawing.
-
-   Bool XContextualDrawing(XFontSet font_set);
-
-   font_set
-
-   Specifies the font set.
-
-   The XContextualDrawing function returns True if text drawn with
-   the font set might include context-dependent drawing;
-   otherwise, it returns False.
-
-   To find out about context-dependent or direction-dependent
-   rendering, use XContextDependentDrawing.
-
-   Bool XContextDependentDrawing(XFontSet font_set);
-
-   font_set
-
-   Specifies the font set.
-
-   The XContextDependentDrawing function returns True if the
-   drawing functions implement implicit text directionality or if
-   text drawn with the font_set might include context-dependent
-   drawing; otherwise, it returns False.
-
-   The drawing functions do not interpret newline, tab, or other
-   control characters. The behavior when nonprinting characters
-   other than space are drawn is implementation-dependent. It is
-   the client's responsibility to interpret control characters in
-   a text stream.
-
-   The maximum character extents for the fonts that are used by
-   the text drawing layers can be accessed by the XFontSetExtents
-   structure:
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     XRectangle max_ink_extent;     /* over all drawable characters */
-     XRectangle max_logical_extent; /* over all drawable characters */
-} XFontSetExtents;
-
-   The XRectangle structures used to return font set metrics are
-   the usual Xlib screen-oriented rectangles with x, y giving the
-   upper left corner, and width and height always positive.
-
-   The max_ink_extent member gives the maximum extent, over all
-   drawable characters, of the rectangles that bound the character
-   glyph image drawn in the foreground color, relative to a
-   constant origin. See XmbTextExtents and XwcTextExtents for
-   detailed semantics.
-
-   The max_logical_extent member gives the maximum extent, over
-   all drawable characters, of the rectangles that specify minimum
-   spacing to other graphical features, relative to a constant
-   origin. Other graphical features drawn by the client, for
-   example, a border surrounding the text, should not intersect
-   this rectangle. The max_logical_extent member should be used to
-   compute minimum interline spacing and the minimum area that
-   must be allowed in a text field to draw a given number of
-   arbitrary characters.
-
-   Due to context-dependent rendering, appending a given character
-   to a string may change the string's extent by an amount other
-   than that character's individual extent.
-
-   The rectangles for a given character in a string can be
-   obtained from XmbTextPerCharExtents or XwcTextPerCharExtents.
-
-   To obtain the maximum extents structure given an XFontSet, use
-   XExtentsOfFontSet.
-
-   XFontSetExtents *XExtentsOfFontSet(XFontSet font_set);
-
-   font_set
-
-   Specifies the font set.
-
-   The XExtentsOfFontSet function returns an XFontSetExtents
-   structure for the fonts used by the Xmb and Xwc layers for the
-   given font set.
-
-   The XFontSetExtents structure is owned by Xlib and should not
-   be modified or freed by the client. It will be freed by a call
-   to XFreeFontSet with the associated XFontSet. Until freed, its
-   contents will not be modified by Xlib.
-
-   To obtain the escapement in pixels of the specified text as a
-   value, use XmbTextEscapement or XwcTextEscapement.
-
-   int XmbTextEscapement(XFontSet font_set, char *string, int
-   num_bytes);
-
-   int XwcTextEscapement(XFontSet font_set, wchar_t *string, int
-   num_wchars);
-
-   font_set
-
-   Specifies the font set.
-
-   string
-
-   Specifies the character string.
-
-   num_bytes
-
-   Specifies the number of bytes in the string argument.
-
-   num_wchars
-
-   Specifies the number of characters in the string argument.
-
-   The XmbTextEscapement and XwcTextEscapement functions return
-   the escapement in pixels of the specified string as a value,
-   using the fonts loaded for the specified font set. The
-   escapement is the distance in pixels in the primary draw
-   direction from the drawing origin to the origin of the next
-   character to be drawn, assuming that the rendering of the next
-   character is not dependent on the supplied string.
-
-   Regardless of the character rendering order, the escapement is
-   always positive.
-
-   To obtain the overall_ink_return and overall_logical_return
-   arguments, the overall bounding box of the string's image, and
-   a logical bounding box, use XmbTextExtents or XwcTextExtents.
-
-   int XmbTextExtents(XFontSet font_set, char *string, int
-   num_bytes, XRectangle *overall_ink_return, XRectangle
-   *overall_logical_return);
-
-   int XwcTextExtents(XFontSet font_set, wchar_t *string, int
-   num_wchars, XRectangle *overall_ink_return, XRectangle
-   *overall_logical_return);
-
-   font_set
-
-   Specifies the font set.
-
-   string
-
-   Specifies the character string.
-
-   num_bytes
-
-   Specifies the number of bytes in the string argument.
-
-   num_wchars
-
-   Specifies the number of characters in the string argument.
-
-   overall_ink_return
-
-   Returns the overall ink dimensions.
-
-   overall_logical_return
-
-   Returns the overall logical dimensions.
-
-   The XmbTextExtents and XwcTextExtents functions set the
-   components of the specified overall_ink_return and
-   overall_logical_return arguments to the overall bounding box of
-   the string's image and a logical bounding box for spacing
-   purposes, respectively. They return the value returned by
-   XmbTextEscapement or XwcTextEscapement. These metrics are
-   relative to the drawing origin of the string, using the fonts
-   loaded for the specified font set.
-
-   If the overall_ink_return argument is non-NULL, it is set to
-   the bounding box of the string's character ink. The
-   overall_ink_return for a nondescending, horizontally drawn
-   Latin character is conventionally entirely above the baseline;
-   that is, overall_ink_return.height <= -overall_ink_return.y.
-   The overall_ink_return for a nonkerned character is entirely
-   at, and to the right of, the origin; that is,
-   overall_ink_return.x >= 0. A character consisting of a single
-   pixel at the origin would set overall_ink_return fields y = 0,
-   x = 0, width = 1, and height = 1.
-
-   If the overall_logical_return argument is non-NULL, it is set
-   to the bounding box that provides minimum spacing to other
-   graphical features for the string. Other graphical features,
-   for example, a border surrounding the text, should not
-   intersect this rectangle.
-
-   When the XFontSet has missing charsets, metrics for each
-   unavailable character are taken from the default string
-   returned by XCreateFontSet so that the metrics represent the
-   text as it will actually be drawn. The behavior for an invalid
-   codepoint is undefined.
-
-   To determine the effective drawing origin for a character in a
-   drawn string, the client should call XmbTextPerCharExtents on
-   the entire string, then on the character, and subtract the x
-   values of the returned rectangles for the character. This is
-   useful to redraw portions of a line of text or to justify
-   words, but for context-dependent rendering, the client should
-   not assume that it can redraw the character by itself and get
-   the same rendering.
-
-   To obtain per-character information for a text string, use
-   XmbTextPerCharExtents or XwcTextPerCharExtents.
-
-   Status XmbTextPerCharExtents(XFontSet font_set, char *string,
-   int num_bytes, XRectangle *ink_array_return, XRectangle
-   *logical_array_return, int array_size, int *num_chars_return,
-   XRectangle *overall_ink_return, XRectangle
-   *overall_logical_return);
-
-   Status XwcTextPerCharExtents(XFontSet font_set, wchar_t
-   *string, int num_wchars, XRectangle *ink_array_return,
-   XRectangle *logical_array_return, int array_size, int
-   *num_chars_return, XRectangle *overall_ink_return, XRectangle
-   *overall_logical_return);
-
-   font_set
-
-   Specifies the font set.
-
-   string
-
-   Specifies the character string.
-
-   num_bytes
-
-   Specifies the number of bytes in the string argument.
-
-   num_wchars
-
-   Specifies the number of characters in the string argument.
-
-   ink_array_return
-
-   Returns the ink dimensions for each character.
-
-   logical_array_return
-
-   Returns the logical dimensions for each character.
-
-   array_size
-
-   Specifies the size of ink_array_return and
-   logical_array_return. The caller must pass in arrays of this
-   size.
-
-   num_chars_return
-
-   Returns the number of characters in the string argument.
-
-   overall_ink_return
-
-   Returns the overall ink dimensions.
-
-   overall_logical_return
-
-   Returns the overall logical dimensions.
-
-   The XmbTextPerCharExtents and XwcTextPerCharExtents functions
-   return the text dimensions of each character of the specified
-   text, using the fonts loaded for the specified font set. Each
-   successive element of ink_array_return and logical_array_return
-   is set to the successive character's drawn metrics, relative to
-   the drawing origin of the string and one rectangle for each
-   character in the supplied text string. The number of elements
-   of ink_array_return and logical_array_return that have been set
-   is returned to num_chars_return.
-
-   Each element of ink_array_return is set to the bounding box of
-   the corresponding character's drawn foreground color. Each
-   element of logical_array_return is set to the bounding box that
-   provides minimum spacing to other graphical features for the
-   corresponding character. Other graphical features should not
-   intersect any of the logical_array_return rectangles.
-
-   Note that an XRectangle represents the effective drawing
-   dimensions of the character, regardless of the number of font
-   glyphs that are used to draw the character or the direction in
-   which the character is drawn. If multiple characters map to a
-   single character glyph, the dimensions of all the XRectangles
-   of those characters are the same.
-
-   When the XFontSet has missing charsets, metrics for each
-   unavailable character are taken from the default string
-   returned by XCreateFontSet so that the metrics represent the
-   text as it will actually be drawn. The behavior for an invalid
-   codepoint is undefined.
-
-   If the array_size is too small for the number of characters in
-   the supplied text, the functions return zero and
-   num_chars_return is set to the number of rectangles required.
-   Otherwise, the functions return a nonzero value.
-
-   If the overall_ink_return or overall_logical_return argument is
-   non-NULL, XmbTextPerCharExtents and XwcTextPerCharExtents
-   return the maximum extent of the string's metrics to
-   overall_ink_return or overall_logical_return, as returned by
-   XmbTextExtents or XwcTextExtents.
-
-Drawing Text Using Font Sets
-
-   The functions defined in this section draw text at a specified
-   location in a drawable. They are similar to the functions
-   XDrawText, XDrawString, and XDrawImageString except that they
-   work with font sets instead of single fonts and interpret the
-   text based on the locale of the font set instead of treating
-   the bytes of the string as direct font indexes. See section 8.6
-   for details of the use of Graphics Contexts (GCs) and possible
-   protocol errors. If a BadFont error is generated, characters
-   prior to the offending character may have been drawn.
-
-   The text is drawn using the fonts loaded for the specified font
-   set; the font in the GC is ignored and may be modified by the
-   functions. No validation that all fonts conform to some width
-   rule is performed.
-
-   The text functions XmbDrawText and XwcDrawText use the
-   following structures:
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     char     *chars;    /* pointer to string */
-     int      nchars;    /* number of bytes */
-     int      delta;     /* pixel delta between strings */
-     XFontSet font_set;  /* fonts, None means don't change */
-} XmbTextItem;
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     wchar_t *chars;     /* pointer to wide char string */
-     int nchars;     /* number of wide characters */
-     int delta;     /* pixel delta between strings */
-     XFontSet font_set;     /* fonts, None means don't change */
-} XwcTextItem;
-
-   To draw text using multiple font sets in a given drawable, use
-   XmbDrawText or XwcDrawText.
-
-   void XmbDrawText(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, int x,
-   int y, XmbTextItem *items, int nitems);
-
-   void XwcDrawText(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, int x,
-   int y, XwcTextItem *items, int nitems);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   d
-
-   Specifies the drawable.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   x
-
-   y
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates of the position in the new
-   parent window.
-
-   items
-
-   Specifies an array of text items.
-
-   nitems
-
-   Specifies the number of text items in the array.
-
-   The XmbDrawText and XwcDrawText functions allow complex spacing
-   and font set shifts between text strings. Each text item is
-   processed in turn, with the origin of a text element advanced
-   in the primary draw direction by the escapement of the previous
-   text item. A text item delta specifies an additional escapement
-   of the text item drawing origin in the primary draw direction.
-   A font_set member other than None in an item causes the font
-   set to be used for this and subsequent text items in the
-   text_items list. Leading text items with a font_set member set
-   to None will not be drawn.
-
-   XmbDrawText and XwcDrawText do not perform any
-   context-dependent rendering between text segments. Clients may
-   compute the drawing metrics by passing each text segment to
-   XmbTextExtents and XwcTextExtents or XmbTextPerCharExtents and
-   XwcTextPerCharExtents. When the XFontSet has missing charsets,
-   each unavailable character is drawn with the default string
-   returned by XCreateFontSet. The behavior for an invalid
-   codepoint is undefined.
-
-   To draw text using a single font set in a given drawable, use
-   XmbDrawString or XwcDrawString.
-
-   void XmbDrawString(Display *display, Drawable d, XFontSet
-   font_set, GC gc, int x, int y, char *string, int num_bytes);
-
-   void XwcDrawString(Display *display, Drawable d, XFontSet
-   font_set, GC gc, int x, int y, wchar_t *string, int
-   num_wchars);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   d
-
-   Specifies the drawable.
-
-   font_set
-
-   Specifies the font set.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   x
-
-   y
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates of the position in the new
-   parent window.
-
-   string
-
-   Specifies the character string.
-
-   num_bytes
-
-   Specifies the number of bytes in the string argument.
-
-   num_wchars
-
-   Specifies the number of characters in the string argument.
-
-   The XmbDrawString and XwcDrawString functions draw the
-   specified text with the foreground pixel. When the XFontSet has
-   missing charsets, each unavailable character is drawn with the
-   default string returned by XCreateFontSet. The behavior for an
-   invalid codepoint is undefined.
-
-   To draw image text using a single font set in a given drawable,
-   use XmbDrawImageString or XwcDrawImageString.
-
-   void XmbDrawImageString(Display *display, Drawable d, XFontSet
-   font_set, GC gc, int x, int y, char *string, int num_bytes);
-
-   void XwcDrawImageString(Display *display, Drawable d, XFontSet
-   font_set, GC gc, int x, int y, wchar_t *string, int
-   num_wchars);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   d
-
-   Specifies the drawable.
-
-   font_set
-
-   Specifies the font set.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   x
-
-   y
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates of the position in the new
-   parent window.
-
-   string
-
-   Specifies the character string.
-
-   num_bytes
-
-   Specifies the number of bytes in the string argument.
-
-   num_wchars
-
-   Specifies the number of characters in the string argument.
-
-   The XmbDrawImageString and XwcDrawImageString functions fill a
-   destination rectangle with the background pixel defined in the
-   GC and then paint the text with the foreground pixel. The
-   filled rectangle is the rectangle returned to
-   overall_logical_return by XmbTextExtents or XwcTextExtents for
-   the same text and XFontSet.
-
-   When the XFontSet has missing charsets, each unavailable
-   character is drawn with the default string returned by
-   XCreateFontSet. The behavior for an invalid codepoint is
-   undefined.
-
-Input Methods
-
-   This section provides discussions of the following X Input
-   Method (XIM) topics:
-     * Input method overview
-     * Input method management
-     * Input method functions
-     * Input method values
-     * Input context functions
-     * Input context values
-     * Input method callback semantics
-     * Event filtering
-     * Getting keyboard input
-     * Input method conventions
-
-Input Method Overview
-
-   This section provides definitions for terms and concepts used
-   for internationalized text input and a brief overview of the
-   intended use of the mechanisms provided by Xlib.
-
-   A large number of languages in the world use alphabets
-   consisting of a small set of symbols (letters) to form words.
-   To enter text into a computer in an alphabetic language, a user
-   usually has a keyboard on which there exist key symbols
-   corresponding to the alphabet. Sometimes, a few characters of
-   an alphabetic language are missing on the keyboard. Many
-   computer users who speak a Latin-alphabet-based language only
-   have an English-based keyboard. They need to hit a combination
-   of keystrokes to enter a character that does not exist directly
-   on the keyboard. A number of algorithms have been developed for
-   entering such characters. These are known as European input
-   methods, compose input methods, or dead-key input methods.
-
-   Japanese is an example of a language with a phonetic symbol
-   set, where each symbol represents a specific sound. There are
-   two phonetic symbol sets in Japanese: Katakana and Hiragana. In
-   general, Katakana is used for words that are of foreign origin,
-   and Hiragana is used for writing native Japanese words.
-   Collectively, the two systems are called Kana. Each set
-   consists of 48 characters.
-
-   Korean also has a phonetic symbol set, called Hangul. Each of
-   the 24 basic phonetic symbols (14 consonants and 10 vowels)
-   represents a specific sound. A syllable is composed of two or
-   three parts: the initial consonants, the vowels, and the
-   optional last consonants. With Hangul, syllables can be treated
-   as the basic units on which text processing is done. For
-   example, a delete operation may work on a phonetic symbol or a
-   syllable. Korean code sets include several thousands of these
-   syllables. A user types the phonetic symbols that make up the
-   syllables of the words to be entered. The display may change as
-   each phonetic symbol is entered. For example, when the second
-   phonetic symbol of a syllable is entered, the first phonetic
-   symbol may change its shape and size. Likewise, when the third
-   phonetic symbol is entered, the first two phonetic symbols may
-   change their shape and size.
-
-   Not all languages rely solely on alphabetic or phonetic
-   systems. Some languages, including Japanese and Korean, employ
-   an ideographic writing system. In an ideographic system, rather
-   than taking a small set of symbols and combining them in
-   different ways to create words, each word consists of one
-   unique symbol (or, occasionally, several symbols). The number
-   of symbols can be very large: approximately 50,000 have been
-   identified in Hanzi, the Chinese ideographic system.
-
-   Two major aspects of ideographic systems impact their use with
-   computers. First, the standard computer character sets in
-   Japan, China, and Korea include roughly 8,000 characters, while
-   sets in Taiwan have between 15,000 and 30,000 characters. This
-   makes it necessary to use more than one byte to represent a
-   character. Second, it obviously is impractical to have a
-   keyboard that includes all of a given language's ideographic
-   symbols. Therefore, a mechanism is required for entering
-   characters so that a keyboard with a reasonable number of keys
-   can be used. Those input methods are usually based on
-   phonetics, but there also exist methods based on the graphical
-   properties of characters.
-
-   In Japan, both Kana and the ideographic system Kanji are used.
-   In Korea, Hangul and sometimes the ideographic system Hanja are
-   used. Now consider entering ideographs in Japan, Korea, China,
-   and Taiwan.
-
-   In Japan, either Kana or English characters are typed and then
-   a region is selected (sometimes automatically) for conversion
-   to Kanji. Several Kanji characters may have the same phonetic
-   representation. If that is the case with the string entered, a
-   menu of characters is presented and the user must choose the
-   appropriate one. If no choice is necessary or a preference has
-   been established, the input method does the substitution
-   directly. When Latin characters are converted to Kana or Kanji,
-   it is called a romaji conversion.
-
-   In Korea, it is usually acceptable to keep Korean text in
-   Hangul form, but some people may choose to write
-   Hanja-originated words in Hanja rather than in Hangul. To
-   change Hangul to Hanja, the user selects a region for
-   conversion and then follows the same basic method as that
-   described for Japanese.
-
-   Probably because there are well-accepted phonetic writing
-   systems for Japanese and Korean, computer input methods in
-   these countries for entering ideographs are fairly standard.
-   Keyboard keys have both English characters and phonetic symbols
-   engraved on them, and the user can switch between the two sets.
-
-   The situation is different for Chinese. While there is a
-   phonetic system called Pinyin promoted by authorities, there is
-   no consensus for entering Chinese text. Some vendors use a
-   phonetic decomposition (Pinyin or another), others use
-   ideographic decomposition of Chinese words, with various
-   implementations and keyboard layouts. There are about 16 known
-   methods, none of which is a clear standard.
-
-   Also, there are actually two ideographic sets used: Traditional
-   Chinese (the original written Chinese) and Simplified Chinese.
-   Several years ago, the People's Republic of China launched a
-   campaign to simplify some ideographic characters and eliminate
-   redundancies altogether. Under the plan, characters would be
-   streamlined every five years. Characters have been revised
-   several times now, resulting in the smaller, simpler set that
-   makes up Simplified Chinese.
-
-Input Method Architecture
-
-   As shown in the previous section, there are many different
-   input methods in use today, each varying with language,
-   culture, and history. A common feature of many input methods is
-   that the user may type multiple keystrokes to compose a single
-   character (or set of characters). The process of composing
-   characters from keystrokes is called preediting. It may require
-   complex algorithms and large dictionaries involving substantial
-   computer resources.
-
-   Input methods may require one or more areas in which to show
-   the feedback of the actual keystrokes, to propose
-   disambiguation to the user, to list dictionaries, and so on.
-   The input method areas of concern are as follows:
-     * The status area is a logical extension of the LEDs that
-       exist on the physical keyboard. It is a window that is
-       intended to present the internal state of the input method
-       that is critical to the user. The status area may consist
-       of text data and bitmaps or some combination.
-     * The preedit area displays the intermediate text for those
-       languages that are composing prior to the client handling
-       the data.
-     * The auxiliary area is used for pop-up menus and customizing
-       dialogs that may be required for an input method. There may
-       be multiple auxiliary areas for an input method. Auxiliary
-       areas are managed by the input method independent of the
-       client. Auxiliary areas are assumed to be separate dialogs,
-       which are maintained by the input method.
-
-   There are various user interaction styles used for preediting.
-   The ones supported by Xlib are as follows:
-     * For on-the-spot input methods, preediting data will be
-       displayed directly in the application window. Application
-       data is moved to allow preedit data to appear at the point
-       of insertion.
-     * Over-the-spot preediting means that the data is displayed
-       in a preedit window that is placed over the point of
-       insertion.
-     * Off-the-spot preediting means that the preedit window is
-       inside the application window but not at the point of
-       insertion. Often, this type of window is placed at the
-       bottom of the application window.
-     * Root-window preediting refers to input methods that use a
-       preedit window that is the child of RootWindow.
-
-   It would require a lot of computing resources if portable
-   applications had to include input methods for all the languages
-   in the world. To avoid this, a goal of the Xlib design is to
-   allow an application to communicate with an input method placed
-   in a separate process. Such a process is called an input
-   server. The server to which the application should connect is
-   dependent on the environment when the application is started
-   up, that is, the user language and the actual encoding to be
-   used for it. The input method connection is said to be
-   locale-dependent. It is also user-dependent. For a given
-   language, the user can choose, to some extent, the user
-   interface style of input method (if choice is possible among
-   several).
-
-   Using an input server implies communication overhead, but
-   applications can be migrated without relinking. Input methods
-   can be implemented either as a stub communicating to an input
-   server or as a local library.
-
-   An input method may be based on a front-end or a back-end
-   architecture. In a front-end architecture, there are two
-   separate connections to the X server: keystrokes go directly
-   from the X server to the input method on one connection and
-   other events to the regular client connection. The input method
-   is then acting as a filter and sends composed strings to the
-   client. A front-end architecture requires synchronization
-   between the two connections to avoid lost key events or locking
-   issues.
-
-   In a back-end architecture, a single X server connection is
-   used. A dispatching mechanism must decide on this channel to
-   delegate appropriate keystrokes to the input method. For
-   instance, it may retain a Help keystroke for its own purpose.
-   In the case where the input method is a separate process (that
-   is, a server), there must be a special communication protocol
-   between the back-end client and the input server.
-
-   A front-end architecture introduces synchronization issues and
-   a filtering mechanism for noncharacter keystrokes (Function
-   keys, Help, and so on). A back-end architecture sometimes
-   implies more communication overhead and more process switching.
-   If all three processes (X server, input server, client) are
-   running on a single workstation, there are two process switches
-   for each keystroke in a back-end architecture, but there is
-   only one in a front-end architecture.
-
-   The abstraction used by a client to communicate with an input
-   method is an opaque data structure represented by the XIM data
-   type. This data structure is returned by the XOpenIM function,
-   which opens an input method on a given display. Subsequent
-   operations on this data structure encapsulate all communication
-   between client and input method. There is no need for an X
-   client to use any networking library or natural language
-   package to use an input method.
-
-   A single input server may be used for one or more languages,
-   supporting one or more encoding schemes. But the strings
-   returned from an input method will always be encoded in the
-   (single) locale associated with the XIM object.
-
-Input Contexts
-
-   Xlib provides the ability to manage a multi-threaded state for
-   text input. A client may be using multiple windows, each window
-   with multiple text entry areas, and the user possibly switching
-   among them at any time. The abstraction for representing the
-   state of a particular input thread is called an input context.
-   The Xlib representation of an input context is an XIC.
-
-   An input context is the abstraction retaining the state,
-   properties, and semantics of communication between a client and
-   an input method. An input context is a combination of an input
-   method, a locale specifying the encoding of the character
-   strings to be returned, a client window, internal state
-   information, and various layout or appearance characteristics.
-   The input context concept somewhat matches for input the
-   graphics context abstraction defined for graphics output.
-
-   One input context belongs to exactly one input method.
-   Different input contexts may be associated with the same input
-   method, possibly with the same client window. An XIC is created
-   with the XCreateIC function, providing an XIM argument and
-   affiliating the input context to the input method for its
-   lifetime. When an input method is closed with XCloseIM, all of
-   its affiliated input contexts should not be used any more (and
-   should preferably be destroyed before closing the input
-   method).
-
-   Considering the example of a client window with multiple text
-   entry areas, the application programmer could, for example,
-   choose to implement as follows:
-     * As many input contexts are created as text entry areas, and
-       the client will get the input accumulated on each context
-       each time it looks up in that context.
-     * A single context is created for a top-level window in the
-       application. If such a window contains several text entry
-       areas, each time the user moves to another text entry area,
-       the client has to indicate changes in the context.
-
-   A range of choices can be made by application designers to use
-   either a single or multiple input contexts, according to the
-   needs of their application.
-
-Getting Keyboard Input
-
-   To obtain characters from an input method, a client must call
-   the function XmbLookupString or XwcLookupString with an input
-   context created from that input method. Both a locale and
-   display are bound to an input method when it is opened, and an
-   input context inherits this locale and display. Any strings
-   returned by XmbLookupString or XwcLookupString will be encoded
-   in that locale.
-
-Focus Management
-
-   For each text entry area in which the XmbLookupString or
-   XwcLookupString functions are used, there will be an associated
-   input context.
-
-   When the application focus moves to a text entry area, the
-   application must set the input context focus to the input
-   context associated with that area. The input context focus is
-   set by calling XSetICFocus with the appropriate input context.
-
-   Also, when the application focus moves out of a text entry
-   area, the application should unset the focus for the associated
-   input context by calling XUnsetICFocus. As an optimization, if
-   XSetICFocus is called successively on two different input
-   contexts, setting the focus on the second will automatically
-   unset the focus on the first.
-
-   To set and unset the input context focus correctly, it is
-   necessary to track application-level focus changes. Such focus
-   changes do not necessarily correspond to X server focus
-   changes.
-
-   If a single input context is being used to do input for
-   multiple text entry areas, it will also be necessary to set the
-   focus window of the input context whenever the focus window
-   changes (see section 13.5.6.3).
-
-Geometry Management
-
-   In most input method architectures (on-the-spot being the
-   notable exception), the input method will perform the display
-   of its own data. To provide better visual locality, it is often
-   desirable to have the input method areas embedded within a
-   client. To do this, the client may need to allocate space for
-   an input method. Xlib provides support that allows the size and
-   position of input method areas to be provided by a client. The
-   input method areas that are supported for geometry management
-   are the status area and the preedit area.
-
-   The fundamental concept on which geometry management for input
-   method windows is based is the proper division of
-   responsibilities between the client (or toolkit) and the input
-   method. The division of responsibilities is as follows:
-     * The client is responsible for the geometry of the input
-       method window.
-     * The input method is responsible for the contents of the
-       input method window.
-
-   An input method is able to suggest a size to the client, but it
-   cannot suggest a placement. Also the input method can only
-   suggest a size. It does not determine the size, and it must
-   accept the size it is given.
-
-   Before a client provides geometry management for an input
-   method, it must determine if geometry management is needed. The
-   input method indicates the need for geometry management by
-   setting XIMPreeditArea or XIMStatusArea in its XIMStyles value
-   returned by XGetIMValues. When a client has decided that it
-   will provide geometry management for an input method, it
-   indicates that decision by setting the XNInputStyle value in
-   the XIC.
-
-   After a client has established with the input method that it
-   will do geometry management, the client must negotiate the
-   geometry with the input method. The geometry is negotiated by
-   the following steps:
-     * The client suggests an area to the input method by setting
-       the XNAreaNeeded value for that area. If the client has no
-       constraints for the input method, it either will not
-       suggest an area or will set the width and height to zero.
-       Otherwise, it will set one of the values.
-     * The client will get the XIC value XNAreaNeeded. The input
-       method will return its suggested size in this value. The
-       input method should pay attention to any constraints
-       suggested by the client.
-     * The client sets the XIC value XNArea to inform the input
-       method of the geometry of its window. The client should try
-       to honor the geometry requested by the input method. The
-       input method must accept this geometry.
-
-   Clients doing geometry management must be aware that setting
-   other XIC values may affect the geometry desired by an input
-   method. For example, XNFontSet and XNLineSpace may change the
-   geometry desired by the input method.
-
-   The table of XIC values (see section 13.5.6) indicates the
-   values that can cause the desired geometry to change when they
-   are set. It is the responsibility of the client to renegotiate
-   the geometry of the input method window when it is needed.
-
-   In addition, a geometry management callback is provided by
-   which an input method can initiate a geometry change.
-
-Event Filtering
-
-   A filtering mechanism is provided to allow input methods to
-   capture X events transparently to clients. It is expected that
-   toolkits (or clients) using XmbLookupString or XwcLookupString
-   will call this filter at some point in the event processing
-   mechanism to make sure that events needed by an input method
-   can be filtered by that input method.
-
-   If there were no filter, a client could receive and discard
-   events that are necessary for the proper functioning of an
-   input method. The following provides a few examples of such
-   events:
-     * Expose events on preedit window in local mode.
-     * Events may be used by an input method to communicate with
-       an input server. Such input server protocol-related events
-       have to be intercepted if one does not want to disturb
-       client code.
-     * Key events can be sent to a filter before they are bound to
-       translations such as those the X Toolkit Intrinsics library
-       provides.
-
-   Clients are expected to get the XIC value XNFilterEvents and
-   augment the event mask for the client window with that event
-   mask. This mask may be zero.
-
-Callbacks
-
-   When an on-the-spot input method is implemented, only the
-   client can insert or delete preedit data in place and possibly
-   scroll existing text. This means that the echo of the
-   keystrokes has to be achieved by the client itself, tightly
-   coupled with the input method logic.
-
-   When the user enters a keystroke, the client calls
-   XmbLookupString or XwcLookupString. At this point, in the
-   on-the-spot case, the echo of the keystroke in the preedit has
-   not yet been done. Before returning to the client logic that
-   handles the input characters, the look-up function must call
-   the echoing logic to insert the new keystroke. If the
-   keystrokes entered so far make up a character, the keystrokes
-   entered need to be deleted, and the composed character will be
-   returned. Hence, what happens is that, while being called by
-   client code, the input method logic has to call back to the
-   client before it returns. The client code, that is, a callback
-   procedure, is called from the input method logic.
-
-   There are a number of cases where the input method logic has to
-   call back the client. Each of those cases is associated with a
-   well-defined callback action. It is possible for the client to
-   specify, for each input context, what callback is to be called
-   for each action.
-
-   There are also callbacks provided for feedback of status
-   information and a callback to initiate a geometry request for
-   an input method.
-
-Visible Position Feedback Masks
-
-   In the on-the-spot input style, there is a problem when
-   attempting to draw preedit strings that are longer than the
-   available space. Once the display area is exceeded, it is not
-   clear how best to display the preedit string. The visible
-   position feedback masks of XIMText help resolve this problem by
-   allowing the input method to specify hints that indicate the
-   essential portions of the preedit string. For example, such
-   hints can help developers implement scrolling of a long preedit
-   string within a short preedit display area.
-
-Preedit String Management
-
-   As highlighted before, the input method architecture provides
-   preediting, which supports a type of preprocessor input
-   composition. In this case, composition consists of interpreting
-   a sequence of key events and returning a committed string via
-   XmbLookupString or XwcLookupString. This provides the basics
-   for input methods.
-
-   In addition to preediting based on key events, a general
-   framework is provided to give a client that desires it more
-   advanced preediting based on the text within the client. This
-   framework is called string conversion and is provided using XIC
-   values. The fundamental concept of string conversion is to
-   allow the input method to manipulate the client's text
-   independent of any user preediting operation.
-
-   The need for string conversion is based on language needs and
-   input method capabilities. The following are some examples of
-   string conversion:
-     * Transliteration conversion provides language-specific
-       conversions within the input method. In the case of Korean
-       input, users wish to convert a Hangul string into a Hanja
-       string while in preediting, after preediting, or in other
-       situations (for example, on a selected string). The
-       conversion is triggered when the user presses a
-       Hangul-to-Hanja key sequence (which may be input method
-       specific). Sometimes the user may want to invoke the
-       conversion after finishing preediting or on a user-selected
-       string. Thus, the string to be converted is in an
-       application buffer, not in the preedit area of the input
-       method. The string conversion services allow the client to
-       request this transliteration conversion from the input
-       method. There are many other transliteration conversions
-       defined for various languages, for example, Kana-to-Kanji
-       conversion in Japanese. The key to remember is that
-       transliteration conversions are triggered at the request of
-       the user and returned to the client immediately without
-       affecting the preedit area of the input method.
-     * Reconversion of a previously committed string or a selected
-       string is supported by many input methods as a convenience
-       to the user. For example, a user tends to mistype the
-       commit key while preediting. In that case, some input
-       methods provide a special key sequence to request a
-       ``reconvert'' operation on the committed string, similiar
-       to the undo facility provided by most text editors. Another
-       example is where the user is proofreading a document that
-       has some misconversions from preediting and wants to
-       correct the misconverted text. Such reconversion is again
-       triggered by the user invoking some special action, but
-       reconversions should not affect the state of the preedit
-       area.
-     * Context-sensitive conversion is required for some languages
-       and input methods that need to retrieve text that surrounds
-       the current spot location (cursor position) of the client's
-       buffer. Such text is needed when the preediting operation
-       depends on some surrounding characters (usually preceding
-       the spot location). For example, in Thai language input,
-       certain character sequences may be invalid and the input
-       method may want to check whether characters constitute a
-       valid word. Input methods that do such context-dependent
-       checking need to retrieve the characters surrounding the
-       current cursor position to obtain complete words. Unlike
-       other conversions, this conversion is not explicitly
-       requested by the user. Input methods that provide such
-       context-sensitive conversion continuously need to request
-       context from the client, and any change in the context of
-       the spot location may affect such conversions. The client's
-       context would be needed if the user moves the cursor and
-       starts editing again. For this reason, an input method
-       supporting this type of conversion should take notice of
-       when the client calls XmbResetIC or XwcResetIC, which is
-       usually an indication of a context change.
-
-   Context-sensitive conversions just need a copy of the client's
-   text, while other conversions replace the client's text with
-   new text to achieve the reconversion or transliteration. Yet in
-   all cases the result of a conversion, either immediately or via
-   preediting, is returned by the XmbLookupString and
-   XwcLookupString functions.
-
-   String conversion support is dependent on the availability of
-   the XNStringConversion or XNStringConversionCallback XIC
-   values. Because the input method may not support string
-   conversions, clients have to query the availability of string
-   conversion operations by checking the supported XIC values list
-   by calling XGetIMValues with the XNQueryICValuesList IM value.
-
-   The difference between these two values is whether the
-   conversion is invoked by the client or the input method. The
-   XNStringConversion XIC value is used by clients to request a
-   string conversion from the input method. The client is
-   responsible for determining which events are used to trigger
-   the string conversion and whether the string to be converted
-   should be copied or deleted. The type of conversion is
-   determined by the input method; the client can only pass the
-   string to be converted. The client is guaranteed that no
-   XNStringConversionCallback will be issued when this value is
-   set; thus, the client need only set one of these values.
-
-   The XNStringConversionCallback XIC value is used by the client
-   to notify the input method that it will accept requests from
-   the input method for string conversion. If this value is set,
-   it is the input method's responsibility to determine which
-   events are used to trigger the string conversion. When such
-   events occur, the input method issues a call to the
-   client-supplied procedure to retrieve the string to be
-   converted. The client's callback procedure is notified whether
-   to copy or delete the string and is provided with hints as to
-   the amount of text needed. The
-   XIMStringConversionCallbackStruct specifies which text should
-   be passed back to the input method.
-
-   Finally, the input method may call the client's
-   XNStringConversionCallback procedure multiple times if the
-   string returned from the callback is not sufficient to perform
-   a successful conversion. The arguments to the client's
-   procedure allow the input method to define a position (in
-   character units) relative to the client's cursor position and
-   the size of the text needed. By varying the position and size
-   of the desired text in subsequent callbacks, the input method
-   can retrieve additional text.
-
-Input Method Management
-
-   The interface to input methods might appear to be simply
-   creating an input method (XOpenIM) and freeing an input method
-   (XCloseIM). However, input methods may require complex
-   communication with input method servers (IM servers), for
-   example:
-     * If the X server, IM server, and X clients are started
-       asynchronously, some clients may attempt to connect to the
-       IM server before it is fully operational, and fail.
-       Therefore, some mechanism is needed to allow clients to
-       detect when an IM server has started.
-
-   It is up to clients to decide what should be done when an IM
-   server is not available (for example, wait, or use some other
-   IM server).
-
-     * Some input methods may allow the underlying IM server to be
-       switched. Such customization may be desired without
-       restarting the entire client.
-
-   To support management of input methods in these cases, the
-   following functions are provided:
-   XRegisterIMInstantiateCallback This function allows clients to
-   register a callback procedure to be called when Xlib detects
-   that an IM server is up and available.
-   XOpenIM A client calls this function as a result of the
-   callback procedure being called.
-   XSetIMValues, XSetICValues These functions use the XIM and XIC
-   values, XNDestroyCallback, to allow a client to register a
-   callback procedure to be called when Xlib detects that an IM
-   server that was associated with an opened input method is no
-   longer available. In addition, this function can be used to
-   switch IM servers for those input methods that support such
-   functionality. The IM value for switching IM servers is
-   implementation-dependent; see the description below about
-   switching IM servers.
-   XUnregisterIMInstantiateCallback This function removes a
-   callback procedure registered by the client.
-
-   Input methods that support switching of IM servers may exhibit
-   some side-effects:
-     * The input method will ensure that any new IM server
-       supports any of the input styles being used by input
-       contexts already associated with the input method. However,
-       the list of supported input styles may be different.
-
-     * Geometry management requests on previously created input
-       contexts may be initiated by the new IM server.
-
-Hot Keys
-
-   Some clients need to guarantee which keys can be used to escape
-   from the input method, regardless of the input method state;
-   for example, the client-specific Help key or the keys to move
-   the input focus. The HotKey mechanism allows clients to specify
-   a set of keys for this purpose. However, the input method might
-   not allow clients to specify hot keys. Therefore, clients have
-   to query support of hot keys by checking the supported XIC
-   values list by calling XGetIMValues with the
-   XNQueryICValuesList IM value. When the hot keys specified
-   conflict with the key bindings of the input method, hot keys
-   take precedence over the key bindings of the input method.
-
-Preedit State Operation
-
-   An input method may have several internal states, depending on
-   its implementation and the locale. However, one state that is
-   independent of locale and implementation is whether the input
-   method is currently performing a preediting operation. Xlib
-   provides the ability for an application to manage the preedit
-   state programmatically. Two methods are provided for retrieving
-   the preedit state of an input context. One method is to query
-   the state by calling XGetICValues with the XNPreeditState XIC
-   value. Another method is to receive notification whenever the
-   preedit state is changed. To receive such notification, an
-   application needs to register a callback by calling
-   XSetICValues with the XNPreeditStateNotifyCallback XIC value.
-   In order to change the preedit state programmatically, an
-   application needs to call XSetICValues with XNPreeditState.
-
-   Availability of the preedit state is input method dependent.
-   The input method may not provide the ability to set the state
-   or to retrieve the state programmatically. Therefore, clients
-   have to query availability of preedit state operations by
-   checking the supported XIC values list by calling XGetIMValues
-   with the XNQueryICValuesList IM value.
-
-Input Method Functions
-
-   To open a connection, use XOpenIM.
-
-   XIM XOpenIM(Display *display, XrmDatabase db, char *res_name,
-   char *res_class);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   db
-
-   Specifies a pointer to the resource database.
-
-   res_name
-
-   Specifies the full resource name of the application.
-
-   res_class
-
-   Specifies the full class name of the application.
-
-   The XOpenIM function opens an input method, matching the
-   current locale and modifiers specification. Current locale and
-   modifiers are bound to the input method at opening time. The
-   locale associated with an input method cannot be changed
-   dynamically. This implies that the strings returned by
-   XmbLookupString or XwcLookupString, for any input context
-   affiliated with a given input method, will be encoded in the
-   locale current at the time the input method is opened.
-
-   The specific input method to which this call will be routed is
-   identified on the basis of the current locale. XOpenIM will
-   identify a default input method corresponding to the current
-   locale. That default can be modified using XSetLocaleModifiers
-   for the input method modifier.
-
-   The db argument is the resource database to be used by the
-   input method for looking up resources that are private to the
-   input method. It is not intended that this database be used to
-   look up values that can be set as IC values in an input
-   context. If db is NULL, no database is passed to the input
-   method.
-
-   The res_name and res_class arguments specify the resource name
-   and class of the application. They are intended to be used as
-   prefixes by the input method when looking up resources that are
-   common to all input contexts that may be created for this input
-   method. The characters used for resource names and classes must
-   be in the X Portable Character Set. The resources looked up are
-   not fully specified if res_name or res_class is NULL.
-
-   The res_name and res_class arguments are not assumed to exist
-   beyond the call to XOpenIM. The specified resource database is
-   assumed to exist for the lifetime of the input method.
-
-   XOpenIM returns NULL if no input method could be opened.
-
-   To close a connection, use XCloseIM.
-
-   Status XCloseIM(XIM im);
-
-   im
-
-   Specifies the input method.
-
-   The XCloseIM function closes the specified input method.
-
-   To set input method attributes, use XSetIMValues.
-
-   char *XSetIMValues(XIM im);
-
-   im
-
-   Specifies the input method.
-
-   ...
-
-   Specifies the variable-length argument list to set XIM values.
-
-   The XSetIMValues function presents a variable argument list
-   programming interface for setting attributes of the specified
-   input method. It returns NULL if it succeeds; otherwise, it
-   returns the name of the first argument that could not be set.
-   Xlib does not attempt to set arguments from the supplied list
-   that follow the failed argument; all arguments in the list
-   preceding the failed argument have been set correctly.
-
-   To query an input method, use XGetIMValues.
-
-   char *XGetIMValues(XIM im);
-
-   im
-
-   Specifies the input method.
-
-   ...
-
-   Specifies the variable length argument list to get XIM values.
-
-   The XGetIMValues function presents a variable argument list
-   programming interface for querying properties or features of
-   the specified input method. This function returns NULL if it
-   succeeds; otherwise, it returns the name of the first argument
-   that could not be obtained.
-
-   Each XIM value argument (following a name) must point to a
-   location where the XIM value is to be stored. That is, if the
-   XIM value is of type T, the argument must be of type T*. If T
-   itself is a pointer type, then XGetIMValues allocates memory to
-   store the actual data, and the client is responsible for
-   freeing this data by calling XFree with the returned pointer.
-
-   To obtain the display associated with an input method, use
-   XDisplayOfIM.
-
-   Display *XDisplayOfIM(XIM im);
-
-   im
-
-   Specifies the input method.
-
-   The XDisplayOfIM function returns the display associated with
-   the specified input method.
-
-   To get the locale associated with an input method, use
-   XLocaleOfIM.
-
-   char *XLocaleOfIM(XIM im);
-
-   im
-
-   Specifies the input method.
-
-   The XLocaleOfIM function returns the locale associated with the
-   specified input method.
-
-   To register an input method instantiate callback, use
-   XRegisterIMInstantiateCallback.
-
-   Bool XRegisterIMInstantiateCallback(Display *display,
-   XrmDatabase db, char *res_name, char *res_class, XIMProc
-   callback, XPointer *client_data);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   db
-
-   Specifies a pointer to the resource database.
-
-   res_name
-
-   Specifies the full resource name of the application.
-
-   res_class
-
-   Specifies the full class name of the application.
-
-   callback
-
-   Specifies a pointer to the input method instantiate callback.
-
-   client_data
-
-   Specifies the additional client data.
-
-   The XRegisterIMInstantiateCallback function registers a
-   callback to be invoked whenever a new input method becomes
-   available for the specified display that matches the current
-   locale and modifiers.
-
-   The function returns True if it succeeds; otherwise, it returns
-   False.
-
-   The generic prototype is as follows:
-
-   void IMInstantiateCallback(Display *display, XPointer
-   client_data, XPointer call_data);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   client_data
-
-   Specifies the additional client data.
-
-   call_data
-
-   Not used for this callback and always passed as NULL.
-
-   To unregister an input method instantiation callback, use
-   XUnregisterIMInstantiateCallback.
-
-   Bool XUnregisterIMInstantiateCallback(Display *display,
-   XrmDatabase db, char *res_name, char *res_class, XIMProc
-   callback, XPointer *client_data);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   db
-
-   Specifies a pointer to the resource database.
-
-   res_name
-
-   Specifies the full resource name of the application.
-
-   res_class
-
-   Specifies the full class name of the application.
-
-   callback
-
-   Specifies a pointer to the input method instantiate callback.
-
-   client_data
-
-   Specifies the additional client data.
-
-   The XUnregisterIMInstantiateCallback function removes an input
-   method instantiation callback previously registered. The
-   function returns True if it succeeds; otherwise, it returns
-   False.
-
-Input Method Values
-
-   The following table describes how XIM values are interpreted by
-   an input method. The first column lists the XIM values. The
-   second column indicates how each of the XIM values are treated
-   by that input style.
-
-   The following keys apply to this table.
-   Key Explanation
-   D This value may be set using XSetIMValues. If it is not set, a
-   default is provided.
-   S This value may be set using XSetIMValues.
-   G This value may be read using XGetIMValues.
-
-   XIM Value           Key
-   XNQueryInputStyle   G
-   XNResourceName      D-S-G
-   XNResourceClass     D-S-G
-   XNDestroyCallback   D-S-G
-   XNQueryIMValuesList G
-   XNQueryICValuesList G
-   XNVisiblePosition   G
-   XNR6PreeditCallback D-S-G
-
-   XNR6PreeditCallback is obsolete and its use is not recommended
-   (see section 13.5.4.6).
-
-Query Input Style
-
-   A client should always query the input method to determine
-   which input styles are supported. The client should then find
-   an input style it is capable of supporting.
-
-   If the client cannot find an input style that it can support,
-   it should negotiate with the user the continuation of the
-   program (exit, choose another input method, and so on).
-
-   The argument value must be a pointer to a location where the
-   returned value will be stored. The returned value is a pointer
-   to a structure of type XIMStyles. Clients are responsible for
-   freeing the XIMStyles structure. To do so, use XFree.
-
-   The XIMStyles structure is defined as follows:
-typedef unsigned long XIMStyle;
-
-
-#define     XIMPreeditArea             0x0001L
-#define     XIMPreeditCallbacks        0x0002L
-#define     XIMPreeditPosition         0x0004L
-#define     XIMPreeditNothing          0x0008L
-#define     XIMPreeditNone             0x0010L
-
-#define     XIMStatusArea              0x0100L
-#define     XIMStatusCallbacks         0x0200L
-#define     XIMStatusNothing           0x0400L
-#define     XIMStatusNone              0x0800L
-
-typedef struct {
-      unsigned short count_styles;
-      XIMStyle * supported_styles;
-} XIMStyles;
-
-
-   An XIMStyles structure contains the number of input styles
-   supported in its count_styles field. This is also the size of
-   the supported_styles array.
-
-   The supported styles is a list of bitmask combinations, which
-   indicate the combination of styles for each of the areas
-   supported. These areas are described later. Each element in the
-   list should select one of the bitmask values for each area. The
-   list describes the complete set of combinations supported. Only
-   these combinations are supported by the input method.
-
-   The preedit category defines what type of support is provided
-   by the input method for preedit information.
-   XIMPreeditArea If chosen, the input method would require the
-   client to provide some area values for it to do its preediting.
-   Refer to XIC values XNArea and XNAreaNeeded.
-   XIMPreeditPosition If chosen, the input method would require
-   the client to provide positional values. Refer to XIC values
-   XNSpotLocation and XNFocusWindow.
-   XIMPreeditCallbacks If chosen, the input method would require
-   the client to define the set of preedit callbacks. Refer to XIC
-   values XNPreeditStartCallback, XNPreeditDoneCallback,
-   XNPreeditDrawCallback, and XNPreeditCaretCallback.
-   XIMPreeditNothing If chosen, the input method can function
-   without any preedit values.
-   XIMPreeditNone The input method does not provide any preedit
-   feedback. Any preedit value is ignored. This style is mutually
-   exclusive with the other preedit styles.
-
-   The status category defines what type of support is provided by
-   the input method for status information.
-   XIMStatusArea The input method requires the client to provide
-   some area values for it to do its status feedback. See XNArea
-   and XNAreaNeeded.
-   XIMStatusCallbacks The input method requires the client to
-   define the set of status callbacks, XNStatusStartCallback,
-   XNStatusDoneCallback, and XNStatusDrawCallback.
-   XIMStatusNothing The input method can function without any
-   status values.
-   XIMStatusNone The input method does not provide any status
-   feedback. If chosen, any status value is ignored. This style is
-   mutually exclusive with the other status styles.
-
-Resource Name and Class
-
-   The XNResourceName and XNResourceClass arguments are strings
-   that specify the full name and class used by the input method.
-   These values should be used as prefixes for the name and class
-   when looking up resources that may vary according to the input
-   method. If these values are not set, the resources will not be
-   fully specified.
-
-   It is not intended that values that can be set as XIM values be
-   set as resources.
-
-Destroy Callback
-
-   The XNDestroyCallback argument is a pointer to a structure of
-   type XIMCallback. XNDestroyCallback is triggered when an input
-   method stops its service for any reason. After the callback is
-   invoked, the input method is closed and the associated input
-   context(s) are destroyed by Xlib. Therefore, the client should
-   not call XCloseIM or XDestroyIC.
-
-   The generic prototype of this callback function is as follows:
-
-   void DestroyCallback(XIM im, XPointer client_data, XPointer
-   call_data);
-
-   im
-
-   Specifies the input method.
-
-   client_data
-
-   Specifies the additional client data.
-
-   call_data
-
-   Not used for this callback and always passed as NULL.
-
-   A DestroyCallback is always called with a NULL call_data
-   argument.
-
-Query IM/IC Values List
-
-   XNQueryIMValuesList and XNQueryICValuesList are used to query
-   about XIM and XIC values supported by the input method.
-
-   The argument value must be a pointer to a location where the
-   returned value will be stored. The returned value is a pointer
-   to a structure of type XIMValuesList. Clients are responsible
-   for freeing the XIMValuesList structure. To do so, use XFree.
-
-   The XIMValuesList structure is defined as follows:
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     unsigned short count_values;
-     char **supported_values;
-} XIMValuesList;
-
-Visible Position
-
-   The XNVisiblePosition argument indicates whether the visible
-   position masks of XIMFeedback in XIMText are available.
-
-   The argument value must be a pointer to a location where the
-   returned value will be stored. The returned value is of type
-   Bool. If the returned value is True, the input method uses the
-   visible position masks of XIMFeedback in XIMText; otherwise,
-   the input method does not use the masks.
-
-   Because this XIM value is optional, a client should call
-   XGetIMValues with argument XNQueryIMValuesList before using
-   this argument. If the XNVisiblePosition does not exist in the
-   IM values list returned from XNQueryIMValuesList, the visible
-   position masks of XIMFeedback in XIMText are not used to
-   indicate the visible position.
-
-Preedit Callback Behavior
-
-   The XNR6PreeditCallback argument originally included in the
-   X11R6 specification has been deprecated.\(dg During formulation
-   of the X11R6 specification, the behavior of the R6
-   PreeditDrawCallbacks was going to differ significantly from
-   that of the R5 callbacks. Late changes to the specification
-   converged the R5 and R6 behaviors, eliminating the need for
-   XNR6PreeditCallback. Unfortunately, this argument was not
-   removed from the R6 specification before it was published.
-
-   The XNR6PreeditCallback argument indicates whether the behavior
-   of preedit callbacks regarding XIMPreeditDrawCallbackStruct
-   values follows Release 5 or Release 6 semantics.
-
-   The value is of type Bool. When querying for
-   XNR6PreeditCallback, if the returned value is True, the input
-   method uses the Release 6 behavior; otherwise, it uses the
-   Release 5 behavior. The default value is False. In order to use
-   Release 6 semantics, the value of XNR6PreeditCallback must be
-   set to True.
-
-   Because this XIM value is optional, a client should call
-   XGetIMValues with argument XNQueryIMValuesList before using
-   this argument. If the XNR6PreeditCallback does not exist in the
-   IM values list returned from XNQueryIMValuesList, the
-   PreeditCallback behavior is Release 5 semantics.
-
-Input Context Functions
-
-   An input context is an abstraction that is used to contain both
-   the data required (if any) by an input method and the
-   information required to display that data. There may be
-   multiple input contexts for one input method. The programming
-   interfaces for creating, reading, or modifying an input context
-   use a variable argument list. The name elements of the argument
-   lists are referred to as XIC values. It is intended that input
-   methods be controlled by these XIC values. As new XIC values
-   are created, they should be registered with the X Consortium.
-
-   To create an input context, use XCreateIC.
-
-   XIC XCreateIC(XIM im);
-
-   im
-
-   Specifies the input method.
-
-   ...
-
-   Specifies the variable length argument list to set XIC values.
-
-   The XCreateIC function creates a context within the specified
-   input method.
-
-   Some of the arguments are mandatory at creation time, and the
-   input context will not be created if those arguments are not
-   provided. The mandatory arguments are the input style and the
-   set of text callbacks (if the input style selected requires
-   callbacks). All other input context values can be set later.
-
-   XCreateIC returns a NULL value if no input context could be
-   created. A NULL value could be returned for any of the
-   following reasons:
-     * A required argument was not set.
-     * A read-only argument was set (for example, XNFilterEvents).
-     * The argument name is not recognized.
-     * The input method encountered an input method
-       implementation-dependent error.
-
-   XCreateIC can generate BadAtom, BadColor, BadPixmap, and
-   BadWindow errors.
-
-   To destroy an input context, use XDestroyIC.
-
-   void XDestroyIC(XIC ic);
-
-   ic
-
-   Specifies the input context.
-
-   XDestroyIC destroys the specified input context.
-
-   To communicate to and synchronize with input method for any
-   changes in keyboard focus from the client side, use XSetICFocus
-   and XUnsetICFocus.
-
-   void XSetICFocus(XIC ic);
-
-   ic
-
-   Specifies the input context.
-
-   The XSetICFocus function allows a client to notify an input
-   method that the focus window attached to the specified input
-   context has received keyboard focus. The input method should
-   take action to provide appropriate feedback. Complete feedback
-   specification is a matter of user interface policy.
-
-   Calling XSetICFocus does not affect the focus window value.
-
-   void XUnsetICFocus(XIC ic);
-
-   ic
-
-   Specifies the input context.
-
-   The XUnsetICFocus function allows a client to notify an input
-   method that the specified input context has lost the keyboard
-   focus and that no more input is expected on the focus window
-   attached to that input context. The input method should take
-   action to provide appropriate feedback. Complete feedback
-   specification is a matter of user interface policy.
-
-   Calling XUnsetICFocus does not affect the focus window value;
-   the client may still receive events from the input method that
-   are directed to the focus window.
-
-   To reset the state of an input context to its initial state,
-   use XmbResetIC or XwcResetIC.
-
-   char *XmbResetIC(XIC ic);
-
-   wchar_t *XwcResetIC(XIC ic);
-
-   ic
-
-   Specifies the input context.
-
-   When XNResetState is set to XIMInitialState, XmbResetIC and
-   XwcResetIC reset an input context to its initial state; when
-   XNResetState is set to XIMPreserveState, the current input
-   context state is preserved. In both cases, any input pending on
-   that context is deleted. The input method is required to clear
-   the preedit area, if any, and update the status accordingly.
-   Calling XmbResetIC or XwcResetIC does not change the focus.
-
-   The return value of XmbResetIC is its current preedit string as
-   a multibyte string. If there is any preedit text drawn or
-   visible to the user, then these procedures must return a
-   non-NULL string. If there is no visible preedit text, then it
-   is input method implementation-dependent whether these
-   procedures return a non-NULL string or NULL.
-
-   The client should free the returned string by calling XFree.
-
-   To get the input method associated with an input context, use
-   XIMOfIC.
-
-   XIM XIMOfIC(XIC ic);
-
-   ic
-
-   Specifies the input context.
-
-   The XIMOfIC function returns the input method associated with
-   the specified input context.
-
-   Xlib provides two functions for setting and reading XIC values,
-   respectively, XSetICValues and XGetICValues. Both functions
-   have a variable-length argument list. In that argument list,
-   any XIC value's name must be denoted with a character string
-   using the X Portable Character Set.
-
-   To set XIC values, use XSetICValues.
-
-   char *XSetICValues(XIC ic);
-
-   ic
-
-   Specifies the input context.
-
-   ...
-
-   Specifies the variable length argument list to set XIC values.
-
-   The XSetICValues function returns NULL if no error occurred;
-   otherwise, it returns the name of the first argument that could
-   not be set. An argument might not be set for any of the
-   following reasons:
-     * The argument is read-only (for example, XNFilterEvents).
-     * The argument name is not recognized.
-     * An implementation-dependent error occurs.
-
-   Each value to be set must be an appropriate datum, matching the
-   data type imposed by the semantics of the argument.
-
-   XSetICValues can generate BadAtom, BadColor, BadCursor,
-   BadPixmap, and BadWindow errors.
-
-   To obtain XIC values, use XGetICValues.
-
-   char *XGetICValues(XIC ic);
-
-   ic
-
-   Specifies the input context.
-
-   ...
-
-   Specifies the variable length argument list to get XIC values.
-
-   The XGetICValues function returns NULL if no error occurred;
-   otherwise, it returns the name of the first argument that could
-   not be obtained. An argument could not be obtained for any of
-   the following reasons:
-     * The argument name is not recognized.
-     * The input method encountered an implementation-dependent
-       error.
-
-   Each IC attribute value argument (following a name) must point
-   to a location where the IC value is to be stored. That is, if
-   the IC value is of type T, the argument must be of type T*. If
-   T itself is a pointer type, then XGetICValues allocates memory
-   to store the actual data, and the client is responsible for
-   freeing this data by calling XFree with the returned pointer.
-   The exception to this rule is for an IC value of type
-   XVaNestedList (for preedit and status attributes). In this
-   case, the argument must also be of type XVaNestedList. Then,
-   the rule of changing type T to T* and freeing the allocated
-   data applies to each element of the nested list.
-
-Input Context Values
-
-   The following tables describe how XIC values are interpreted by
-   an input method depending on the input style chosen by the
-   user.
-
-   The first column lists the XIC values. The second column
-   indicates which values are involved in affecting, negotiating,
-   and setting the geometry of the input method windows. The
-   subentries under the third column indicate the different input
-   styles that are supported. Each of these columns indicates how
-   each of the XIC values are treated by that input style.
-
-   The following keys apply to these tables.
-   Key Explanation
-   C This value must be set with XCreateIC.
-   D This value may be set using XCreateIC.> If it is not set,> a
-   default is provided.
-   G This value may be read using XGetICValues.
-   GN This value may cause geometry negotiation when its value is
-   set by means of XCreateIC or XSetICValues.
-   GR This value will be the response of the input method when any
-   GN value is changed.
-   GS This value will cause the geometry of the input method
-   window to be set.
-   O This value must be set once and only once. It need not be set
-   at create time.
-   S This value may be set with XSetICValues.
-   Ignored This value is ignored by the input method for the given
-   input style.
-
-   XIC Value Geometry Mangement Preedit Callback Preedit Position
-   Input Style Preedit Area Preedit Nothing Preedit None
-   Input Style   C-G C-G C-G C-G C-G
-   Client Window   O-G O-G O-G O-G Ignored
-   Focus Window GN D-S-G D-S-G D-S-G D-S-G Ignored
-   Resource Name   Ignored D-S-G D-S-G D-S-G Ignored
-   Resource Class   Ignored D-S-G D-S-G D-S-G Ignored
-   Geometry Callback   Ignored Ignored D-S-G Ignored Ignored
-   Filter Events   G G G G Ignored
-   Destroy Callback   D-S-G D-S-G D-S-G D-S-G D-S-G
-   String Conversion Callback   S-G S-G S-G S-G S-G
-   String Conversion   D-S-G D-S-G D-S-G D-S-G D-S-G
-   Reset State   D-S-G D-S-G D-S-G D-S-G Ignored
-   HotKey   S-G S-G S-G S-G Ignored
-   HotKeyState   D-S-G D-S-G D-S-G D-S-G Ignored
-   Preedit
-   Area GS Ignored D-S-G D-S-G Ignored Ignored
-   Area Needed GN-GR Ignored Ignored S-G Ignored Ignored
-   Spot Location   Ignored D-S-G Ignored Ignored Ignored
-   Colormap   Ignored D-S-G D-S-G D-S-G Ignored
-   Foreground   Ignored D-S-G D-S-G D-S-G Ignored
-   Background   Ignored D-S-G D-S-G D-S-G Ignored
-   Background Pixmap   Ignored D-S-G D-S-G D-S-G Ignored
-   Font Set GN Ignored D-S-G D-S-G D-S-G Ignored
-   Line Spacing GN Ignored D-S-G D-S-G D-S-G Ignored
-   Cursor   Ignored D-S-G D-S-G D-S-G Ignored
-   Preedit State   D-S-G D-S-G D-S-G D-S-G Ignored
-   Preedit State Notify Callback   S-G S-G S-G S-G Ignored
-   Preedit Callbacks   C-S-G Ignored Ignored Ignored Ignored
-
-   XIC Value Geomentry Management Status Callback Status Area
-   Status Nothing Status None
-   Input Style   C-G C-G C-G C-G
-   Client Window   O-G O-G O-G Ignored
-   Focus Window GN D-S-G D-S-G D-S-G Ignored
-   Resource Name   Ignored D-S-G D-S-G Ignored
-   Resource Class   Ignored D-S-G D-S-G Ignored
-   Geometry Callback   Ignored D-S-G Ignored Ignored
-   Filter Events   G G G G
-   Status
-   Area GS Ignored D-S-G Ignored Ignored
-   Area Needed GN-GR Ignored S-G Ignored Ignored
-   Colormap   Ignored D-S-G D-S-G Ignored
-   Foreground   Ignored D-S-G D-S-G Ignored
-   Background   Ignored D-S-G D-S-G Ignored
-   Background Pixmap   Ignored D-S-G D-S-G Ignored
-   Font Set GN Ignored D-S-G D-S-G Ignored
-   Line Spacing GN Ignored D-S-G D-S-G Ignored
-   Cursor   Ignored D-S-G D-S-G Ignored
-   Status Callbacks   C-S-G Ignored Ignored Ignored
-
-Input Style
-
-   The XNInputStyle argument specifies the input style to be used.
-   The value of this argument must be one of the values returned
-   by the XGetIMValues function with the XNQueryInputStyle
-   argument specified in the supported_styles list.
-
-   Note that this argument must be set at creation time and cannot
-   be changed.
-
-Client Window
-
-   The XNClientWindow argument specifies to the input method the
-   client window in which the input method can display data or
-   create subwindows. Geometry values for input method areas are
-   given with respect to the client window. Dynamic change of
-   client window is not supported. This argument may be set only
-   once and should be set before any input is done using this
-   input context. If it is not set, the input method may not
-   operate correctly.
-
-   If an attempt is made to set this value a second time with
-   XSetICValues, the string XNClientWindow will be returned by
-   XSetICValues, and the client window will not be changed.
-
-   If the client window is not a valid window ID on the display
-   attached to the input method, a BadWindow error can be
-   generated when this value is used by the input method.
-
-Focus Window
-
-   The XNFocusWindow argument specifies the focus window. The
-   primary purpose of the XNFocusWindow is to identify the window
-   that will receive the key event when input is composed. In
-   addition, the input method may possibly affect the focus window
-   as follows:
-     * Select events on it
-     * Send events to it
-     * Modify its properties
-     * Grab the keyboard within that window
-
-   The associated value must be of type Window. If the focus
-   window is not a valid window ID on the display attached to the
-   input method, a BadWindow error can be generated when this
-   value is used by the input method.
-
-   When this XIC value is left unspecified, the input method will
-   use the client window as the default focus window.
-
-Resource Name and Class
-
-   The XNResourceName and XNResourceClass arguments are strings
-   that specify the full name and class used by the client to
-   obtain resources for the client window. These values should be
-   used as prefixes for name and class when looking up resources
-   that may vary according to the input context. If these values
-   are not set, the resources will not be fully specified.
-
-   It is not intended that values that can be set as XIC values be
-   set as resources.
-
-Geometry Callback
-
-   The XNGeometryCallback argument is a structure of type
-   XIMCallback (see section 13.5.6.13.12).
-
-   The XNGeometryCallback argument specifies the geometry callback
-   that a client can set. This callback is not required for
-   correct operation of either an input method or a client. It can
-   be set for a client whose user interface policy permits an
-   input method to request the dynamic change of that input
-   method's window. An input method that does dynamic change will
-   need to filter any events that it uses to initiate the change.
-
-Filter Events
-
-   The XNFilterEvents argument returns the event mask that an
-   input method needs to have selected for. The client is expected
-   to augment its own event mask for the client window with this
-   one.
-
-   This argument is read-only, is set by the input method at
-   create time, and is never changed.
-
-   The type of this argument is unsigned long. Setting this value
-   will cause an error.
-
-Destroy Callback
-
-   The XNDestroyCallback argument is a pointer to a structure of
-   type XIMCallback (see section 13.5.6.13.12). This callback is
-   triggered when the input method stops its service for any
-   reason; for example, when a connection to an IM server is
-   broken. After the destroy callback is called, the input context
-   is destroyed and the input method is closed. Therefore, the
-   client should not call XDestroyIC and XCloseIM.
-
-String Conversion Callback
-
-   The XNStringConversionCallback argument is a structure of type
-   XIMCallback (see section 13.5.6.13.12).
-
-   The XNStringConversionCallback argument specifies a string
-   conversion callback. This callback is not required for correct
-   operation of either the input method or the client. It can be
-   set by a client to support string conversions that may be
-   requested by the input method. An input method that does string
-   conversions will filter any events that it uses to initiate the
-   conversion.
-
-   Because this XIC value is optional, a client should call
-   XGetIMValues with argument XNQueryICValuesList before using
-   this argument.
-
-String Conversion
-
-   The XNStringConversion argument is a structure of type
-   XIMStringConversionText.
-
-   The XNStringConversion argument specifies the string to be
-   converted by an input method. This argument is not required for
-   correct operation of either the input method or the client.
-
-   String conversion facilitates the manipulation of text
-   independent of preediting. It is essential for some input
-   methods and clients to manipulate text by performing
-   context-sensitive conversion, reconversion, or transliteration
-   conversion on it.
-
-   Because this XIC value is optional, a client should call
-   XGetIMValues with argument XNQueryICValuesList before using
-   this argument.
-
-   The XIMStringConversionText structure is defined as follows:
-
-
-typedef struct _XIMStringConversionText {
-     unsigned short              length;
-     XIMStringConversionFeedback *feedback;
-     Bool                        encoding_is_wchar;
-     union {
-          char     *mbs;
-          wchar_t  *wcs;
-     } string;
-} XIMStringConversionText;
-
-typedef unsigned long XIMStringConversionFeedback;
-
-   The feedback member is reserved for future use. The text to be
-   converted is defined by the string and length members. The
-   length is indicated in characters. To prevent the library from
-   freeing memory pointed to by an uninitialized pointer, the
-   client should set the feedback element to NULL.
-
-Reset State
-
-   The XNResetState argument specifies the state the input context
-   will return to after calling XmbResetIC or XwcResetIC.
-
-   The XIC state may be set to its initial state, as specified by
-   the XNPreeditState value when XCreateIC was called, or it may
-   be set to preserve the current state.
-
-   The valid masks for XIMResetState are as follows:
-
-typedef unsigned long XIMResetState;
-
-#define XIMInitialState  (1L)
-#define XIMPreserveState (1L<<1)
-
-
-   If XIMInitialState is set, then XmbResetIC and XwcResetIC will
-   return to the initial XNPreeditState state of the XIC.
-
-   If XIMPreserveState is set, then XmbResetIC and XwcResetIC will
-   preserve the current state of the XIC.
-
-   If XNResetState is left unspecified, the default is
-   XIMInitialState.
-
-   XIMResetState values other than those specified above will
-   default to XIMInitialState.
-
-   Because this XIC value is optional, a client should call
-   XGetIMValues with argument XNQueryICValuesList before using
-   this argument.
-
-Hot Keys
-
-   The XNHotKey argument specifies the hot key list to the XIC.
-   The hot key list is a pointer to the structure of type
-   XIMHotKeyTriggers, which specifies the key events that must be
-   received without any interruption of the input method. For the
-   hot key list set with this argument to be utilized, the client
-   must also set XNHotKeyState to XIMHotKeyStateON.
-
-   Because this XIC value is optional, a client should call
-   XGetIMValues with argument XNQueryICValuesList before using
-   this functionality.
-
-   The value of the argument is a pointer to a structure of type
-   XIMHotKeyTriggers.
-
-   If an event for a key in the hot key list is found, then the
-   process will receive the event and it will be processed inside
-   the client.
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     KeySym keysym;
-     unsigned int modifier;
-     unsigned int modifier_mask;
-} XIMHotKeyTrigger;
-
-typedef struct {
-     int num_hot_key;
-     XIMHotKeyTrigger *key;
-} XIMHotKeyTriggers;
-
-   The combination of modifier and modifier_mask are used to
-   represent one of three states for each modifier: either the
-   modifier must be on, or the modifier must be off, or the
-   modifier is a ``don't care'' - it may be on or off. When a
-   modifier_mask bit is set to 0, the state of the associated
-   modifier is ignored when evaluating whether the key is hot or
-   not.
-   Modifier Bit Mask Bit Meaning
-   0            1        The modifier must be off.
-   1            1        The modifier must be on.
-   n/a          0        Do not care if the modifier is on or off.
-
-Hot Key State
-
-   The XNHotKeyState argument specifies the hot key state of the
-   input method. This is usually used to switch the input method
-   between hot key operation and normal input processing.
-
-   The value of the argument is a pointer to a structure of type
-   XIMHotKeyState .
-typedef unsigned long XIMHotKeyState;
-
-#define XIMHotKeyStateON            (0x0001L)
-#define XIMHotKeyStateOFF           (0x0002L)
-
-
-   If not specified, the default is XIMHotKeyStateOFF.
-
-Preedit and Status Attributes
-
-   The XNPreeditAttributes and XNStatusAttributes arguments
-   specify to an input method the attributes to be used for the
-   preedit and status areas, if any. Those attributes are passed
-   to XSetICValues or XGetICValues as a nested variable-length
-   list. The names to be used in these lists are described in the
-   following sections.
-
-Area
-
-   The value of the XNArea argument must be a pointer to a
-   structure of type XRectangle. The interpretation of the XNArea
-   argument is dependent on the input method style that has been
-   set.
-
-   If the input method style is XIMPreeditPosition, XNArea
-   specifies the clipping region within which preediting will take
-   place. If the focus window has been set, the coordinates are
-   assumed to be relative to the focus window. Otherwise, the
-   coordinates are assumed to be relative to the client window. If
-   neither has been set, the results are undefined.
-
-   If XNArea is not specified, is set to NULL, or is invalid, the
-   input method will default the clipping region to the geometry
-   of the XNFocusWindow. If the area specified is NULL or invalid,
-   the results are undefined.
-
-   If the input style is XIMPreeditArea or XIMStatusArea, XNArea
-   specifies the geometry provided by the client to the input
-   method. The input method may use this area to display its data,
-   either preedit or status depending on the area designated. The
-   input method may create a window as a child of the client
-   window with dimensions that fit the XNArea. The coordinates are
-   relative to the client window. If the client window has not
-   been set yet, the input method should save these values and
-   apply them when the client window is set. If XNArea is not
-   specified, is set to NULL, or is invalid, the results are
-   undefined.
-
-Area Needed
-
-   When set, the XNAreaNeeded argument specifies the geometry
-   suggested by the client for this area (preedit or status). The
-   value associated with the argument must be a pointer to a
-   structure of type XRectangle. Note that the x, y values are not
-   used and that nonzero values for width or height are the
-   constraints that the client wishes the input method to respect.
-
-   When read, the XNAreaNeeded argument specifies the preferred
-   geometry desired by the input method for the area.
-
-   This argument is only valid if the input style is
-   XIMPreeditArea or XIMStatusArea. It is used for geometry
-   negotiation between the client and the input method and has no
-   other effect on the input method (see section 13.5.1.5).
-
-Spot Location
-
-   The XNSpotLocation argument specifies to the input method the
-   coordinates of the spot to be used by an input method executing
-   with XNInputStyle set to XIMPreeditPosition. When specified to
-   any input method other than XIMPreeditPosition, this XIC value
-   is ignored.
-
-   The x coordinate specifies the position where the next
-   character would be inserted. The y coordinate is the position
-   of the baseline used by the current text line in the focus
-   window. The x and y coordinates are relative to the focus
-   window, if it has been set; otherwise, they are relative to the
-   client window. If neither the focus window nor the client
-   window has been set, the results are undefined.
-
-   The value of the argument is a pointer to a structure of type
-   XPoint.
-
-Colormap
-
-   Two different arguments can be used to indicate what colormap
-   the input method should use to allocate colors, a colormap ID,
-   or a standard colormap name.
-
-   The XNColormap argument is used to specify a colormap ID. The
-   argument value is of type Colormap. An invalid argument may
-   generate a BadColor error when it is used by the input method.
-
-   The XNStdColormap argument is used to indicate the name of the
-   standard colormap in which the input method should allocate
-   colors. The argument value is an Atom that should be a valid
-   atom for calling XGetRGBColormaps. An invalid argument may
-   generate a BadAtom error when it is used by the input method.
-
-   If the colormap is left unspecified, the client window colormap
-   becomes the default.
-
-Foreground and Background
-
-   The XNForeground and XNBackground arguments specify the
-   foreground and background pixel, respectively. The argument
-   value is of type unsigned long. It must be a valid pixel in the
-   input method colormap.
-
-   If these values are left unspecified, the default is determined
-   by the input method.
-
-Background Pixmap
-
-   The XNBackgroundPixmap argument specifies a background pixmap
-   to be used as the background of the window. The value must be
-   of type Pixmap. An invalid argument may generate a BadPixmap
-   error when it is used by the input method.
-
-   If this value is left unspecified, the default is determined by
-   the input method.
-
-Font Set
-
-   The XNFontSet argument specifies to the input method what font
-   set is to be used. The argument value is of type XFontSet.
-
-   If this value is left unspecified, the default is determined by
-   the input method.
-
-Line Spacing
-
-   The XNLineSpace argument specifies to the input method what
-   line spacing is to be used in the preedit window if more than
-   one line is to be used. This argument is of type int.
-
-   If this value is left unspecified, the default is determined by
-   the input method.
-
-Cursor
-
-   The XNCursor argument specifies to the input method what cursor
-   is to be used in the specified window. This argument is of type
-   Cursor.
-
-   An invalid argument may generate a BadCursor error when it is
-   used by the input method. If this value is left unspecified,
-   the default is determined by the input method.
-
-Preedit State
-
-   The XNPreeditState argument specifies the state of input
-   preediting for the input method. Input preediting can be on or
-   off.
-
-   The valid mask names for XNPreeditState are as follows:
-
-typedef unsigned long XIMPreeditState;
-
-#define XIMPreeditUnknown    0L
-#define XIMPreeditEnable     1L
-#define XIMPreeditDisable    (1L<<1)
-
-
-   If a value of XIMPreeditEnable is set, then input preediting is
-   turned on by the input method.
-
-   If a value of XIMPreeditDisable is set, then input preediting
-   is turned off by the input method.
-
-   If XNPreeditState is left unspecified, then the state will be
-   implementation-dependent.
-
-   When XNResetState is set to XIMInitialState, the XNPreeditState
-   value specified at the creation time will be reflected as the
-   initial state for XmbResetIC and XwcResetIC.
-
-   Because this XIC value is optional, a client should call
-   XGetIMValues with argument XNQueryICValuesList before using
-   this argument.
-
-Preedit State Notify Callback
-
-   The preedit state notify callback is triggered by the input
-   method when the preediting state has changed. The value of the
-   XNPreeditStateNotifyCallback argument is a pointer to a
-   structure of type XIMCallback. The generic prototype is as
-   follows:
-
-   void PreeditStateNotifyCallback(XIC ic, XPointer client_data,
-   XIMPreeditStateNotifyCallbackStruct *call_data);
-
-   ic
-
-   Specifies the input context.
-
-   client_data
-
-   Specifies the additional client data.
-
-   call_data
-
-   Specifies the current preedit state.
-
-   The XIMPreeditStateNotifyCallbackStruct structure is defined as
-   follows:
-
-
-
-typedef struct _XIMPreeditStateNotifyCallbackStruct {
-     XIMPreeditState state;
-} XIMPreeditStateNotifyCallbackStruct;
-
-   Because this XIC value is optional, a client should call
-   XGetIMValues with argument XNQueryICValuesList before using
-   this argument.
-
-Preedit and Status Callbacks
-
-   A client that wants to support the input style
-   XIMPreeditCallbacks must provide a set of preedit callbacks to
-   the input method. The set of preedit callbacks is as follows:
-   XNPreeditStartCallback This is called when the input method
-   starts preedit.
-   XNPreeditDoneCallback This is called when the input method
-   stops preedit.
-   XNPreeditDrawCallback This is called when a number of preedit
-   keystrokes should be echoed.
-   XNPreeditCaretCallback This is called to move the text
-   insertion point within the preedit string.
-
-   A client that wants to support the input style
-   XIMStatusCallbacks must provide a set of status callbacks to
-   the input method. The set of status callbacks is as follows:
-   XNStatusStartCallback This is called when the input method
-   initializes the status area.
-   XNStatusDoneCallback This is called when the input method no
-   longer needs the status area.
-   XNStatusDrawCallback This is called when updating of the status
-   area is required.
-
-   The value of any status or preedit argument is a pointer to a
-   structure of type XIMCallback.
-
-
-
-typedef void (*XIMProc)();
-
-typedef struct {
-     XPointer client_data;
-     XIMProc callback;
-} XIMCallback;
-
-   Each callback has some particular semantics and will carry the
-   data that expresses the environment necessary to the client
-   into a specific data structure. This paragraph only describes
-   the arguments to be used to set the callback.
-
-   Setting any of these values while doing preedit may cause
-   unexpected results.
-
-Input Method Callback Semantics
-
-   XIM callbacks are procedures defined by clients or text drawing
-   packages that are to be called from the input method when
-   selected events occur. Most clients will use a text editing
-   package or a toolkit and, hence, will not need to define such
-   callbacks. This section defines the callback semantics, when
-   they are triggered, and what their arguments are. This
-   information is mostly useful for X toolkit implementors.
-
-   Callbacks are mostly provided so that clients (or text editing
-   packages) can implement on-the-spot preediting in their own
-   window. In that case, the input method needs to communicate and
-   synchronize with the client. The input method needs to
-   communicate changes in the preedit window when it is under
-   control of the client. Those callbacks allow the client to
-   initialize the preedit area, display a new preedit string, move
-   the text insertion point during preedit, terminate preedit, or
-   update the status area.
-
-   All callback procedures follow the generic prototype:
-
-   void CallbackPrototype(XIC ic, XPointer client_data, SomeType
-   call_data);
-
-   ic
-
-   Specifies the input context.
-
-   client_data
-
-   Specifies the additional client data.
-
-   call_data
-
-   Specifies data specific to the callback.
-
-   The call_data argument is a structure that expresses the
-   arguments needed to achieve the semantics; that is, it is a
-   specific data structure appropriate to the callback. In cases
-   where no data is needed in the callback, this call_data
-   argument is NULL. The client_data argument is a closure that
-   has been initially specified by the client when specifying the
-   callback and passed back. It may serve, for example, to inherit
-   application context in the callback.
-
-   The following paragraphs describe the programming semantics and
-   specific data structure associated with the different reasons.
-
-Geometry Callback
-
-   The geometry callback is triggered by the input method to
-   indicate that it wants the client to negotiate geometry. The
-   generic prototype is as follows:
-
-   void GeometryCallback(XIC ic, XPointer client_data, XPointer
-   call_data);
-
-   ic
-
-   Specifies the input context.
-
-   client_data
-
-   Specifies the additional client data.
-
-   call_data
-
-   Not used for this callback and always passed as NULL.
-
-   The callback is called with a NULL call_data argument.
-
-Destroy Callback
-
-   The destroy callback is triggered by the input method when it
-   stops service for any reason. After the callback is invoked,
-   the input context will be freed by Xlib. The generic prototype
-   is as follows:
-
-   void DestroyCallback(XIC ic, XPointer client_data, XPointer
-   call_data);
-
-   ic
-
-   Specifies the input context.
-
-   client_data
-
-   Specifies the additional client data.
-
-   call_data
-
-   Not used for this callback and always passed as NULL.
-
-   The callback is called with a NULL call_data argument.
-
-String Conversion Callback
-
-   The string conversion callback is triggered by the input method
-   to request the client to return the string to be converted. The
-   returned string may be either a multibyte or wide character
-   string, with an encoding matching the locale bound to the input
-   context. The callback prototype is as follows:
-
-   void StringConversionCallback(XIC ic, XPointer client_data,
-   XIMStringConversionCallbackStruct *call_data);
-
-   ic
-
-   Specifies the input method.
-
-   client_data
-
-   Specifies the additional client data.
-
-   call_data
-
-   Specifies the amount of the string to be converted.
-
-   The callback is passed an XIMStringConversionCallbackStruct
-   structure in the call_data argument. The text member is an
-   XIMStringConversionText structure (see section 13.5.6.9) to be
-   filled in by the client and describes the text to be sent to
-   the input method. The data pointed to by the string and
-   feedback elements of the XIMStringConversionText structure will
-   be freed using XFree by the input method after the callback
-   returns. So the client should not point to internal buffers
-   that are critical to the client. Similarly, because the
-   feedback element is currently reserved for future use, the
-   client should set feedback to NULL to prevent the library from
-   freeing memory at some random location due to an uninitialized
-   pointer.
-
-   The XIMStringConversionCallbackStruct structure is defined as
-   follows:
-
-typedef struct _XIMStringConversionCallbackStruct {
-     XIMStringConversionPosition position;
-     XIMCaretDirection direction;
-     short factor;
-     XIMStringConversionOperation operation;
-     XIMStringConversionText *text;
-} XIMStringConversionCallbackStruct;
-
-typedef short XIMStringConversionPosition;
-
-typedef unsigned short XIMStringConversionOperation;
-
-#define XIMStringConversionSubstitution       (0x0001)
-#define XIMStringConversionRetrieval          (0x0001)
-
-
-   XIMStringConversionPosition specifies the starting position of
-   the string to be returned in the XIMStringConversionText
-   structure. The value identifies a position, in units of
-   characters, relative to the client's cursor position in the
-   client's buffer.
-
-   The ending position of the text buffer is determined by the
-   direction and factor members. Specifically, it is the character
-   position relative to the starting point as defined by the
-   XIMCaretDirection. The factor member of
-   XIMStringConversionCallbackStruct specifies the number of
-   XIMCaretDirection positions to be applied. For example, if the
-   direction specifies XIMLineEnd and factor is 1, then all
-   characters from the starting position to the end of the current
-   display line are returned. If the direction specifies
-   XIMForwardChar or XIMBackwardChar, then the factor specifies a
-   relative position, indicated in characters, from the starting
-   position.
-
-   XIMStringConversionOperation specifies whether the string to be
-   converted should be deleted (substitution) or copied
-   (retrieval) from the client's buffer. When the
-   XIMStringConversionOperation is
-   XIMStringConversionSubstitution, the client must delete the
-   string to be converted from its own buffer. When the
-   XIMStringConversionOperation is XIMStringConversionRetrieval,
-   the client must not delete the string to be converted from its
-   buffer. The substitute operation is typically used for
-   reconversion and transliteration conversion, while the
-   retrieval operation is typically used for context-sensitive
-   conversion.
-
-Preedit State Callbacks
-
-   When the input method turns preediting on or off, a
-   PreeditStartCallback or PreeditDoneCallback callback is
-   triggered to let the toolkit do the setup or the cleanup for
-   the preedit region.
-
-   int PreeditStartCallback(XIC ic, XPointer client_data, XPointer
-   call_data);
-
-   ic
-
-   Specifies the input context.
-
-   client_data
-
-   Specifies the additional client data.
-
-   call_data
-
-   Not used for this callback and always passed as NULL.
-
-   When preedit starts on the specified input context, the
-   callback is called with a NULL call_data argument.
-   PreeditStartCallback will return the maximum size of the
-   preedit string. A positive number indicates the maximum number
-   of bytes allowed in the preedit string, and a value of -1
-   indicates there is no limit.
-
-   void PreeditDoneCallback(XIC ic, XPointer client_data, XPointer
-   call_data);
-
-   ic
-
-   Specifies the input context.
-
-   client_data
-
-   Specifies the additional client data.
-
-   call_data
-
-   Not used for this callback and always passed as NULL.
-
-   When preedit stops on the specified input context, the callback
-   is called with a NULL call_data argument. The client can
-   release the data allocated by PreeditStartCallback.
-
-   PreeditStartCallback should initialize appropriate data needed
-   for displaying preedit information and for handling further
-   PreeditDrawCallback calls. Once PreeditStartCallback is called,
-   it will not be called again before PreeditDoneCallback has been
-   called.
-
-Preedit Draw Callback
-
-   This callback is triggered to draw and insert, delete or
-   replace, preedit text in the preedit region. The preedit text
-   may include unconverted input text such as Japanese Kana,
-   converted text such as Japanese Kanji characters, or characters
-   of both kinds. That string is either a multibyte or wide
-   character string, whose encoding matches the locale bound to
-   the input context. The callback prototype is as follows:
-
-   void PreeditDrawCallback(XIC ic, XPointer client_data,
-   XIMPreeditDrawCallbackStruct *call_data);
-
-   ic
-
-   Specifies the input context.
-
-   client_data
-
-   Specifies the additional client data.
-
-   call_data
-
-   Specifies the preedit drawing information.
-
-   The callback is passed an XIMPreeditDrawCallbackStruct
-   structure in the call_data argument. The text member of this
-   structure contains the text to be drawn. After the string has
-   been drawn, the caret should be moved to the specified
-   location.
-
-   The XIMPreeditDrawCallbackStruct structure is defined as
-   follows:
-
-
-
-typedef struct _XIMPreeditDrawCallbackStruct {
-     int caret;     /* Cursor offset within preedit string */
-     int chg_first;     /* Starting change position */
-     int chg_length;     /* Length of the change in character count */
-     XIMText *text;
-} XIMPreeditDrawCallbackStruct;
-
-   The client must keep updating a buffer of the preedit text and
-   the callback arguments referring to indexes in that buffer. The
-   call_data fields have specific meanings according to the
-   operation, as follows:
-     * To indicate text deletion, the call_data member specifies a
-       NULL text field. The text to be deleted is then the current
-       text in the buffer from position chg_first (starting at
-       zero) on a character length of chg_length.
-     * When text is non-NULL, it indicates insertion or
-       replacement of text in the buffer.
-     * The chg_length member identifies the number of characters
-       in the current preedit buffer that are affected by this
-       call. A positive chg_length indicates that chg_length
-       number of characters, starting at chg_first, must be
-       deleted or must be replaced by text, whose length is
-       specified in the XIMText structure.
-     * A chg_length value of zero indicates that text must be
-       inserted right at the position specified by chg_first. A
-       value of zero for chg_first specifies the first character
-       in the buffer.
-     * chg_length and chg_first combine to identify the
-       modification required to the preedit buffer; beginning at
-       chg_first, replace chg_length number of characters with the
-       text in the supplied XIMText structure. For example,
-       suppose the preedit buffer contains the string "ABCDE".
-     *
-
-Text:      A B C D E
-          ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^
-CharPos:  0 1 2 3 4 5
-
-
-
-       The CharPos in the diagram shows the location of the
-       character position relative to the character.
-     * If the value of chg_first is 1 and the value of chg_length
-       is 3, this says to replace 3 characters beginning at
-       character position 1 with the string in the XIMText
-       structure. Hence, BCD would be replaced by the value in the
-       structure.
-     * Though chg_length and chg_first are both signed integers
-       they will never have a negative value.
-     * The caret member identifies the character position before
-       which the cursor should be placed - after modification to
-       the preedit buffer has been completed. For example, if
-       caret is zero, the cursor is at the beginning of the
-       buffer. If the caret is one, the cursor is between the
-       first and second character.
-
-
-typedef struct _XIMText {
-     unsigned short length;
-     XIMFeedback * feedback;
-     Bool encoding_is_wchar;
-     union {
-          char * multi_byte;
-          wchar_t * wide_char;
-     } string;
-} XIMText;
-
-   The text string passed is actually a structure specifying as
-   follows:
-     * The length member is the text length in characters.
-     * The encoding_is_wchar member is a value that indicates if
-       the text string is encoded in wide character or multibyte
-       format. The text string may be passed either as multibyte
-       or as wide character; the input method controls in which
-       form data is passed. The client's callback routine must be
-       able to handle data passed in either form.
-     * The string member is the text string.
-     * The feedback member indicates rendering type for each
-       character in the string member. If string is NULL
-       (indicating that only highlighting of the existing preedit
-       buffer should be updated), feedback points to length
-       highlight elements that should be applied to the existing
-       preedit buffer, beginning at chg_first.
-
-   The feedback member expresses the types of rendering feedback
-   the callback should apply when drawing text. Rendering of the
-   text to be drawn is specified either in generic ways (for
-   example, primary, secondary) or in specific ways (reverse,
-   underline). When generic indications are given, the client is
-   free to choose the rendering style. It is necessary, however,
-   that primary and secondary be mapped to two distinct rendering
-   styles.
-
-   If an input method wants to control display of the preedit
-   string, an input method can indicate the visibility hints using
-   feedbacks in a specific way. The XIMVisibleToForward,
-   XIMVisibleToBackword, and XIMVisibleToCenter masks are
-   exclusively used for these visibility hints. The
-   XIMVisibleToForward mask indicates that the preedit text is
-   preferably displayed in the primary draw direction from the
-   caret position in the preedit area forward. The
-   XIMVisibleToBackword mask indicates that the preedit text is
-   preferably displayed from the caret position in the preedit
-   area backward, relative to the primary draw direction. The
-   XIMVisibleToCenter mask indicates that the preedit text is
-   preferably displayed with the caret position in the preedit
-   area centered.
-
-   The insertion point of the preedit string could exist outside
-   of the visible area when visibility hints are used. Only one of
-   the masks is valid for the entire preedit string, and only one
-   character can hold one of these feedbacks for a given input
-   context at one time. This feedback may be OR'ed together with
-   another highlight (such as XIMReverse). Only the most recently
-   set feedback is valid, and any previous feedback is
-   automatically canceled. This is a hint to the client, and the
-   client is free to choose how to display the preedit string.
-
-   The feedback member also specifies how rendering of the text
-   argument should be performed. If the feedback is NULL, the
-   callback should apply the same feedback as is used for the
-   surrounding characters in the preedit buffer; if chg_first is
-   at a highlight boundary, the client can choose which of the two
-   highlights to use. If feedback is not NULL, feedback specifies
-   an array defining the rendering for each character of the
-   string, and the length of the array is thus length.
-
-   If an input method wants to indicate that it is only updating
-   the feedback of the preedit text without changing the content
-   of it, the XIMText structure will contain a NULL value for the
-   string field, the number of characters affected (relative to
-   chg_first) will be in the length field, and the feedback field
-   will point to an array of XIMFeedback.
-
-   Each element in the feedback array is a bitmask represented by
-   a value of type XIMFeedback. The valid mask names are as
-   follows:
-
-typedef unsigned long XIMFeedback;
-
-#define     XIMReverse                     1L
-#define     XIMUnderline                   (1L<<1)
-#define     XIMHighlight                   (1L<<2)
-#define     XIMPrimary                     (1L<<5)*
-#define     XIMSecondary                   (1L<<6)*
-#define     XIMTertiary                    (1L<<7)*
-#define     XIMVisibleToForward            (1L<<8)
-#define     XIMVisibleToBackward           (1L<<9)
-#define     XIMVisibleToCenter               (1L<<10)
-
-*/- The values for XIMPrimary, XIMSecondary, and XIMTertiary were incorr
-ectly defined in
-the R5 specification. The X Consortium's X11R5 implementation correctly
-implemented the values for these highlights. The value of these highligh
-ts has
-been corrected in this specification to agree with the values in the
-Consortium's X11R5 and X11R6 implementations.
-
-
-   Characters drawn with the XIMReverse highlight should be drawn
-   by swapping the foreground and background colors used to draw
-   normal, unhighlighted characters. Characters drawn with the
-   XIMUnderline highlight should be underlined. Characters drawn
-   with the XIMHighlight, XIMPrimary, XIMSecondary, and
-   XIMTertiary highlights should be drawn in some unique manner
-   that must be different from XIMReverse and XIMUnderline. The
-   values for XIMPrimary, XIMSecondary, and XIMTertiary were
-   incorrectly defined in the R5 specification. The X Consortium's
-   X11R5 implementation correctly implemented the values for these
-   highlights. The value of these highlights has been corrected in
-   this specification to agree with the values in the Consortium's
-   X11R5 and X11R6 implementations.
-
-Preedit Caret Callback
-
-   An input method may have its own navigation keys to allow the
-   user to move the text insertion point in the preedit area (for
-   example, to move backward or forward). Consequently, input
-   method needs to indicate to the client that it should move the
-   text insertion point. It then calls the PreeditCaretCallback.
-
-   void PreeditCaretCallback(XIC ic, XPointer client_data,
-   XIMPreeditCaretCallbackStruct *call_data);
-
-   ic
-
-   Specifies the input context.
-
-   client_data
-
-   Specifies the additional client data.
-
-   call_data
-
-   Specifies the preedit caret information.
-
-   The input method will trigger PreeditCaretCallback to move the
-   text insertion point during preedit. The call_data argument
-   contains a pointer to an XIMPreeditCaretCallbackStruct
-   structure, which indicates where the caret should be moved. The
-   callback must move the insertion point to its new location and
-   return, in field position, the new offset value from the
-   initial position.
-
-   The XIMPreeditCaretCallbackStruct structure is defined as
-   follows:
-
-
-
-typedef struct _XIMPreeditCaretCallbackStruct {
-     int position;     /* Caret offset within preedit string */
-     XIMCaretDirection direction;     /* Caret moves direction */
-     XIMCaretStyle style;     /* Feedback of the caret */
-} XIMPreeditCaretCallbackStruct;
-
-   The XIMCaretStyle structure is defined as follows:
-
-
-
-typedef enum {
-     XIMIsInvisible,     /* Disable caret feedback */
-     XIMIsPrimary,     /* UI defined caret feedback */
-     XIMIsSecondary,     /* UI defined caret feedback */
-} XIMCaretStyle;
-
-   The XIMCaretDirection structure is defined as follows:
-
-
-
-typedef enum {
-     XIMForwardChar, XIMBackwardChar,
-     XIMForwardWord, XIMBackwardWord,
-     XIMCaretUp, XIMCaretDown,
-     XIMNextLine, XIMPreviousLine,
-     XIMLineStart, XIMLineEnd,
-     XIMAbsolutePosition,
-     XIMDontChange,
- } XIMCaretDirection;
-
-   These values are defined as follows:
-   XIMForwardChar Move the caret forward one character position.
-   XIMBackwardChar Move the caret backward one character position.
-   XIMForwardWord Move the caret forward one word.
-   XIMBackwardWord Move the caret backward one word.
-   XIMCaretUp Move the caret up one line keeping the current
-   horizontal offset.
-   XIMCaretDown Move the caret down one line keeping the current
-   horizontal offset.
-   XIMPreviousLine Move the caret to the beginning of the previous
-   line.
-   XIMNextLine Move the caret to the beginning of the next line.
-   XIMLineStart Move the caret to the beginning of the current
-   display line that contains the caret.
-   XIMLineEnd Move the caret to the end of the current display
-   line that contains the caret.
-   XIMAbsolutePosition The callback must move to the location
-   specified by the position field of the callback data, indicated
-   in characters, starting from the beginning of the preedit text.
-   Hence, a value of zero means move back to the beginning of the
-   preedit text.
-   XIMDontChange The caret position does not change.
-
-Status Callbacks
-
-   An input method may communicate changes in the status of an
-   input context (for example, created, destroyed, or focus
-   changes) with three status callbacks: StatusStartCallback,
-   StatusDoneCallback, and StatusDrawCallback.
-
-   When the input context is created or gains focus, the input
-   method calls the StatusStartCallback callback.
-
-   void StatusStartCallback(XIC ic, XPointer client_data, XPointer
-   call_data);
-
-   ic
-
-   Specifies the input context.
-
-   client_data
-
-   Specifies the additional client data.
-
-   call_data
-
-   Not used for this callback and always passed as NULL.
-
-   The callback should initialize appropriate data for displaying
-   status and for responding to StatusDrawCallback calls. Once
-   StatusStartCallback is called, it will not be called again
-   before StatusDoneCallback has been called.
-
-   When an input context is destroyed or when it loses focus, the
-   input method calls StatusDoneCallback.
-
-   void StatusDoneCallback(XIC ic, XPointer client_data, XPointer
-   call_data);
-
-   ic
-
-   Specifies the input context.
-
-   client_data
-
-   Specifies the additional client data.
-
-   call_data
-
-   Not used for this callback and always passed as NULL.
-
-   The callback may release any data allocated on StatusStart.
-
-   When an input context status has to be updated, the input
-   method calls StatusDrawCallback.
-
-   void StatusDrawCallback(XIC ic, XPointer client_data,
-   XIMStatusDrawCallbackStruct *call_data);
-
-   ic
-
-   Specifies the input context.
-
-   client_data
-
-   Specifies the additional client data.
-
-   call_data
-
-   Specifies the status drawing information.
-
-   The callback should update the status area by either drawing a
-   string or imaging a bitmap in the status area.
-
-   The XIMStatusDataType and XIMStatusDrawCallbackStruct
-   structures are defined as follows:
-
-
-
-typedef enum {
-     XIMTextType,
-     XIMBitmapType,
-} XIMStatusDataType;
-
-typedef struct _XIMStatusDrawCallbackStruct {
-     XIMStatusDataType type;
-     union {
-          XIMText *text;
-          Pixmap  bitmap;
-     } data;
-} XIMStatusDrawCallbackStruct;
-
-   The feedback styles XIMVisibleToForward, XIMVisibleToBackword,
-   and XIMVisibleToCenter are not relevant and will not appear in
-   the XIMFeedback element of the XIMText structure.
-
-Event Filtering
-
-   Xlib provides the ability for an input method to register a
-   filter internal to Xlib. This filter is called by a client (or
-   toolkit) by calling XFilterEvent after calling XNextEvent. Any
-   client that uses the XIM interface should call XFilterEvent to
-   allow input methods to process their events without knowledge
-   of the client's dispatching mechanism. A client's user
-   interface policy may determine the priority of event filters
-   with respect to other event-handling mechanisms (for example,
-   modal grabs).
-
-   Clients may not know how many filters there are, if any, and
-   what they do. They may only know if an event has been filtered
-   on return of XFilterEvent. Clients should discard filtered
-   events.
-
-   To filter an event, use XFilterEvent.
-
-   Bool XFilterEvent(XEvent *event, Window w);
-
-   event
-
-   Specifies the event to filter.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window for which the filter is to be applied.
-
-   If the window argument is None, XFilterEvent applies the filter
-   to the window specified in the XEvent structure. The window
-   argument is provided so that layers above Xlib that do event
-   redirection can indicate to which window an event has been
-   redirected.
-
-   If XFilterEvent returns True, then some input method has
-   filtered the event, and the client should discard the event. If
-   XFilterEvent returns False, then the client should continue
-   processing the event.
-
-   If a grab has occurred in the client and XFilterEvent returns
-   True, the client should ungrab the keyboard.
-
-Getting Keyboard Input
-
-   To get composed input from an input method, use XmbLookupString
-   or XwcLookupString.
-
-   int XmbLookupString(XIC ic, XKeyPressedEvent *event, char
-   *buffer_return, int bytes_buffer, KeySym *keysym_return, Status
-   *status_return);
-
-   int XwcLookupString(XIC ic, XKeyPressedEvent *event, wchar_t
-   *buffer_return, int wchars_buffer, KeySym *keysym_return,
-   Status *status_return);
-
-   ic
-
-   Specifies the input context.
-
-   event
-
-   Specifies the key event to be used.
-
-   buffer_return
-
-   Returns a multibyte string or wide character string (if any)
-   from the input method.
-
-   bytes_buffer
-
-   wchars_buffer
-
-   Specifies space available in the return buffer.
-
-   keysym_return
-
-   Returns the KeySym computed from the event if this argument is
-   not NULL.
-
-   status_return
-
-   Returns a value indicating what kind of data is returned.
-
-   The XmbLookupString and XwcLookupString functions return the
-   string from the input method specified in the buffer_return
-   argument. If no string is returned, the buffer_return argument
-   is unchanged.
-
-   The KeySym into which the KeyCode from the event was mapped is
-   returned in the keysym_return argument if it is non-NULL and
-   the status_return argument indicates that a KeySym was
-   returned. If both a string and a KeySym are returned, the
-   KeySym value does not necessarily correspond to the string
-   returned.
-
-   XmbLookupString returns the length of the string in bytes, and
-   XwcLookupString returns the length of the string in characters.
-   Both XmbLookupString and XwcLookupString return text in the
-   encoding of the locale bound to the input method of the
-   specified input context.
-
-   Each string returned by XmbLookupString and XwcLookupString
-   begins in the initial state of the encoding of the locale (if
-   the encoding of the locale is state-dependent).
-
-Note
-
-   To insure proper input processing, it is essential that the
-   client pass only KeyPress events to XmbLookupString and
-   XwcLookupString. Their behavior when a client passes a
-   KeyRelease event is undefined.
-
-   Clients should check the status_return argument before using
-   the other returned values. These two functions both return a
-   value to status_return that indicates what has been returned in
-   the other arguments. The possible values returned are:
-   XBufferOverflow The input string to be returned is too large
-   for the supplied buffer_return. The required size
-   (XmbLookupString in bytes; XwcLookupString in characters) is
-   returned as the value of the function, and the contents of
-   buffer_return and keysym_return are not modified. The client
-   should recall the function with the same event and a buffer of
-   adequate size to obtain the string.
-   XLookupNone No consistent input has been composed so far. The
-   contents of buffer_return and keysym_return are not modified,
-   and the function returns zero.
-   XLookupChars Some input characters have been composed. They are
-   placed in the buffer_return argument, and the string length is
-   returned as the value of the function. The string is encoded in
-   the locale bound to the input context. The content of the
-   keysym_return argument is not modified.
-   XLookupKeySym A KeySym has been returned instead of a string
-   and is returned in keysym_return. The content of the
-   buffer_return argument is not modified, and the function
-   returns zero.
-   XLookupBoth Both a KeySym and a string are returned;
-   XLookupChars and XLookupKeySym occur simultaneously.
-
-   It does not make any difference if the input context passed as
-   an argument to XmbLookupString and XwcLookupString is the one
-   currently in possession of the focus or not. Input may have
-   been composed within an input context before it lost the focus,
-   and that input may be returned on subsequent calls to
-   XmbLookupString or XwcLookupString even though it does not have
-   any more keyboard focus.
-
-Input Method Conventions
-
-   The input method architecture is transparent to the client.
-   However, clients should respect a number of conventions in
-   order to work properly. Clients must also be aware of possible
-   effects of synchronization between input method and library in
-   the case of a remote input server.
-
-Client Conventions
-
-   A well-behaved client (or toolkit) should first query the input
-   method style. If the client cannot satisfy the requirements of
-   the supported styles (in terms of geometry management or
-   callbacks), it should negotiate with the user continuation of
-   the program or raise an exception or error of some sort.
-
-Synchronization Conventions
-
-   A KeyPress event with a KeyCode of zero is used exclusively as
-   a signal that an input method has composed input that can be
-   returned by XmbLookupString or XwcLookupString. No other use is
-   made of a KeyPress event with KeyCode of zero.
-
-   Such an event may be generated by either a front-end or a
-   back-end input method in an implementation-dependent manner.
-   Some possible ways to generate this event include:
-     * A synthetic event sent by an input method server
-     * An artificial event created by a input method filter and
-       pushed onto a client's event queue
-     * A KeyPress event whose KeyCode value is modified by an
-       input method filter
-
-   When callback support is specified by the client, input methods
-   will not take action unless they explicitly called back the
-   client and obtained no response (the callback is not specified
-   or returned invalid data).
-
-String Constants
-
-   The following symbols for string constants are defined in
-   <X11/Xlib.h>. Although they are shown here with particular
-   macro definitions, they may be implemented as macros, as global
-   symbols, or as a mixture of the two. The string pointer value
-   itself is not significant; clients must not assume that
-   inequality of two values implies inequality of the actual
-   string data.
-#define XNVaNestedList                       "XNVaNestedList"
-#define XNSeparatorofNestedList              "separatorofNestedList"
-#define XNQueryInputStyle                    "queryInputStyle"
-#define XNClientWindow                       "clientWindow"
-#define XNInputStyle                         "inputStyle"
-#define XNFocusWindow                        "focusWindow"
-#define XNResourceName                       "resourceName"
-#define XNResourceClass                      "resourceClass"
-#define XNGeometryCallback                   "geometryCallback"
-#define XNDestroyCallback                    "destroyCallback"
-#define XNFilterEvents                       "filterEvents"
-#define XNPreeditStartCallback               "preeditStartCallback"
-#define XNPreeditDoneCallback                "preeditDoneCallback"
-#define XNPreeditDrawCallback                "preeditDrawCallback"
-#define XNPreeditCaretCallback               "preeditCaretCallback"
-#define XNPreeditStateNotifyCallback         "preeditStateNotifyCallback
-"
-#define XNPreeditAttributes                  "preeditAttributes"
-#define XNStatusStartCallback                "statusStartCallback"
-#define XNStatusDoneCallback                 "statusDoneCallback"
-#define XNStatusDrawCallback                 "statusDrawCallback"
-#define XNStatusAttributes                   "statusAttributes"
-#define XNArea                               "area"
-#define XNAreaNeeded                         "areaNeeded"
-#define XNSpotLocation                       "spotLocation"
-#define XNColormap                           "colorMap"
-#define XNStdColormap                        "stdColorMap"
-#define XNForeground                         "foreground"
-#define XNBackground                         "background"
-#define XNBackgroundPixmap                   "backgroundPixmap"
-#define XNFontSet                            "fontSet"
-#define XNLineSpace                          "lineSpace"
-#define XNCursor                             "cursor"
-#define XNQueryIMValuesList                  "queryIMValuesList"
-#define XNQueryICValuesList                  "queryICValuesList"
-#define XNStringConversionCallback           "stringConversionCallback"
-#define XNStringConversion                   "stringConversion"
-#define XNResetState                         "resetState"
-#define XNHotKey                             "hotkey"
-#define XNHotKeyState                        "hotkeyState"
-#define XNPreeditState                       "preeditState"
-#define XNVisiblePosition                    "visiblePosition"
-#define XNR6PreeditCallbackBehavior          "r6PreeditCallback"
-#define XNRequiredCharSet                    "requiredCharSet"
-#define XNQueryOrientation                   "queryOrientation"
-#define XNDirectionalDependentDrawing        "directionalDependentDrawin
-g"
-#define XNContextualDrawing                  "contextualDrawing"
-#define XNBaseFontName                       "baseFontName"
-#define XNMissingCharSet                     "missingCharSet"
-#define XNDefaultString                      "defaultString"
-#define XNOrientation                        "orientation"
-#define XNFontInfo                           "fontInfo"
-#define XNOMAutomatic                        "omAutomatic"
-
-
-Chapter 14. Inter-Client Communication Functions
-
-   Table of Contents
-
-   Client to Window Manager Communication
-
-        Manipulating Top-Level Windows
-        Converting String Lists
-        Setting and Reading Text Properties
-        Setting and Reading the WM_NAME Property
-        Setting and Reading the WM_ICON_NAME Property
-        Setting and Reading the WM_HINTS Property
-        Setting and Reading the WM_NORMAL_HINTS Property
-        Setting and Reading the WM_CLASS Property
-        Setting and Reading the WM_TRANSIENT_FOR Property
-        Setting and Reading the WM_PROTOCOLS Property
-        Setting and Reading the WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS Property
-        Setting and Reading the WM_ICON_SIZE Property
-        Using Window Manager Convenience Functions
-
-   Client to Session Manager Communication
-
-        Setting and Reading the WM_COMMAND Property
-        Setting and Reading the WM_CLIENT_MACHINE Property
-
-   Standard Colormaps
-
-        Standard Colormap Properties and Atoms
-        Setting and Obtaining Standard Colormaps
-
-   The Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual, hereafter
-   referred to as the ICCCM, details the X Consortium approved
-   conventions that govern inter-client communications. These
-   conventions ensure peer-to-peer client cooperation in the use
-   of selections, cut buffers, and shared resources as well as
-   client cooperation with window and session managers. For
-   further information, see the Inter-Client Communication
-   Conventions Manual.
-
-   Xlib provides a number of standard properties and programming
-   interfaces that are ICCCM compliant. The predefined atoms for
-   some of these properties are defined in the <X11/Xatom.h>
-   header file, where to avoid name conflicts with user symbols
-   their #define name has an XA_ prefix. For further information
-   about atoms and properties, see section 4.3.
-
-   Xlib's selection and cut buffer mechanisms provide the primary
-   programming interfaces by which peer client applications
-   communicate with each other (see sections 4.5 and 16.6). The
-   functions discussed in this chapter provide the primary
-   programming interfaces by which client applications communicate
-   with their window and session managers as well as share
-   standard colormaps.
-
-   The standard properties that are of special interest for
-   communicating with window and session managers are:
-   Name Type Format Description
-   WM_CLASS STRING 8 Set by application programs to allow window
-   and session managers to obtain the application's resources from
-   the resource database.
-   WM_CLIENT_MACHINE TEXT   The string name of the machine on
-   which the client application is running.
-   WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS WINDOWS 32 The list of window IDs that may
-   need a different colormap from that of their top-level window.
-   WM_COMMAND TEXT   The command and arguments, null separated,
-   used to invoke the application.
-   WM_HINTS WM_HINTS 32 Additional hints set by the client for use
-   by the window manager. The C type of this property is XWMHints.
-   WM_ICON_NAME TEXT   The name to be used in an icon.
-   WM_ICON_SIZE WM_ICON_SIZE 32 The window manager may set this
-   property on the root window to specify the icon sizes it
-   supports. The C type of this property is XIconSize.
-   WM_NAME TEXT   The name of the application.
-   WM_NORMAL_HINTS WM_NORMAL_HINTS 32 Size hints for a window in
-   its normal state. The C type of this property is XSizeHints.
-   WM_PROTOCOLS ATOM 32 List of atoms that identify the
-   communications protocols between the client and window manager
-   in which the client is willing to participate.
-   WM_STATE WM_STATE 32 Intended for communication between window
-   and session managers only.
-   WM_TRANSIENT_FOR WINDOW 32 Set by application programs to
-   indicate to the window manager that a transient top-level
-   window, such as a dialog box.
-
-   The remainder of this chapter discusses:
-     * Client to window manager communication
-     * Client to session manager communication
-     * Standard colormaps
-
-Client to Window Manager Communication
-
-   This section discusses how to:
-     * Manipulate top-level windows
-     * Convert string lists
-     * Set and read text properties
-     * Set and read the WM_NAME property
-     * Set and read the WM_ICON_NAME property
-     * Set and read the WM_HINTS property
-     * Set and read the WM_NORMAL_HINTS property
-     * Set and read the WM_CLASS property
-     * Set and read the WM_TRANSIENT_FOR property
-     * Set and read the WM_PROTOCOLS property
-     * Set and read the WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS property
-     * Set and read the WM_ICON_SIZE property
-     * Use window manager convenience functions
-
-Manipulating Top-Level Windows
-
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to change the
-   visibility or size of top-level windows (that is, those that
-   were created as children of the root window). Note that the
-   subwindows that you create are ignored by window managers.
-   Therefore, you should use the basic window functions described
-   in chapter 3 to manipulate your application's subwindows.
-
-   To request that a top-level window be iconified, use
-   XIconifyWindow.
-
-   Status XIconifyWindow(Display *display, Window w, int
-   screen_number);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   screen_number
-
-   Specifies the appropriate screen number on the host server.
-
-   The XIconifyWindow function sends a WM_CHANGE_STATE
-   ClientMessage event with a format of 32 and a first data
-   element of IconicState (as described in section 4.1.4 of the
-   Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual) and a window of
-   w to the root window of the specified screen with an event mask
-   set to SubstructureNotifyMask | SubstructureRedirectMask.
-   Window managers may elect to receive this message and if the
-   window is in its normal state, may treat it as a request to
-   change the window's state from normal to iconic. If the
-   WM_CHANGE_STATE property cannot be interned, XIconifyWindow
-   does not send a message and returns a zero status. It returns a
-   nonzero status if the client message is sent successfully;
-   otherwise, it returns a zero status.
-
-   To request that a top-level window be withdrawn, use
-   XWithdrawWindow.
-
-   Status XWithdrawWindow(Display *display, Window w, int
-   screen_number);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   screen_number
-
-   Specifies the appropriate screen number on the host server.
-
-   The XWithdrawWindow function unmaps the specified window and
-   sends a synthetic UnmapNotify event to the root window of the
-   specified screen. Window managers may elect to receive this
-   message and may treat it as a request to change the window's
-   state to withdrawn. When a window is in the withdrawn state,
-   neither its normal nor its iconic representations is visible.
-   It returns a nonzero status if the UnmapNotify event is
-   successfully sent; otherwise, it returns a zero status.
-
-   XWithdrawWindow can generate a BadWindow error.
-
-   To request that a top-level window be reconfigured, use
-   XReconfigureWMWindow.
-
-   Status XReconfigureWMWindow(Display *display, Window w, int
-   screen_number, unsigned int value_mask, XWindowChanges
-   *values);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   screen_number
-
-   Specifies the appropriate screen number on the host server.
-
-   value_mask
-
-   Specifies which values are to be set using information in the
-   values structure. This mask is the bitwise inclusive OR of the
-   valid configure window values bits.
-
-   values
-
-   Specifies the XWindowChanges structure.
-
-   The XReconfigureWMWindow function issues a ConfigureWindow
-   request on the specified top-level window. If the stacking mode
-   is changed and the request fails with a BadMatch error, the
-   error is trapped by Xlib and a synthetic ConfigureRequestEvent
-   containing the same configuration parameters is sent to the
-   root of the specified window. Window managers may elect to
-   receive this event and treat it as a request to reconfigure the
-   indicated window. It returns a nonzero status if the request or
-   event is successfully sent; otherwise, it returns a zero
-   status.
-
-   XReconfigureWMWindow can generate BadValue and BadWindow
-   errors.
-
-Converting String Lists
-
-   Many of the text properties allow a variety of types and
-   formats. Because the data stored in these properties are not
-   simple null-terminated strings, an XTextProperty structure is
-   used to describe the encoding, type, and length of the text as
-   well as its value. The XTextProperty structure contains:
-
-
-typedef struct {
-        unsigned char *value;   /* property data */
-        Atom encoding;  /* type of property */
-        int format;     /* 8, 16, or 32 */
-        unsigned long nitems;   /* number of items in value */
-} XTextProperty;
-
-   Xlib provides functions to convert localized text to or from
-   encodings that support the inter-client communication
-   conventions for text. In addition, functions are provided for
-   converting between lists of pointers to character strings and
-   text properties in the STRING encoding.
-
-   The functions for localized text return a signed integer error
-   status that encodes Success as zero, specific error conditions
-   as negative numbers, and partial conversion as a count of
-   unconvertible characters.
-
-#define #XNoMemory           -1
-#define #XLocaleNotSupported -2
-#define #XConverterNotFound  -3
-
-typedef enum {
-        XStringStyle,           /* STRING */
-        XCompoundTextStyle,     /* COMPOUND_TEXT */
-        XTextStyle,             /* text in owner's encoding (current loc
-ale) */
-        XStdICCTextStyle        /* STRING, else COMPOUND_TEXT */
-} XICCEncodingStyle;
-
-   To convert a list of text strings to an XTextProperty
-   structure, use XmbTextListToTextProperty or
-   XwcTextListToTextProperty.
-
-   int XmbTextListToTextProperty(Display *display, char **list,
-   int count, XICCEncodingStyle style, XTextProperty
-   *text_prop_return);
-
-   int XwcTextListToTextProperty(Display *display, wchar_t **list,
-   int count, XICCEncodingStyle style, XTextProperty
-   *text_prop_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   list
-
-   Specifies a list of null-terminated character strings.
-
-   count
-
-   Specifies the number of strings specified.
-
-   style
-
-   Specifies the manner in which the property is encoded.
-
-   text_prop_return
-
-   Returns the XTextProperty structure.
-
-   The XmbTextListToTextProperty and XwcTextListToTextProperty
-   functions set the specified XTextProperty value to a set of
-   null-separated elements representing the concatenation of the
-   specified list of null-terminated text strings. A final
-   terminating null is stored at the end of the value field of
-   text_prop_return but is not included in the nitems member.
-
-   The functions set the encoding field of text_prop_return to an
-   Atom for the specified display naming the encoding determined
-   by the specified style and convert the specified text list to
-   this encoding for storage in the text_prop_return value field.
-   If the style XStringStyle or XCompoundTextStyle is specified,
-   this encoding is ``STRING'' or ``COMPOUND_TEXT'', respectively.
-   If the style XTextStyle is specified, this encoding is the
-   encoding of the current locale. If the style XStdICCTextStyle
-   is specified, this encoding is ``STRING'' if the text is fully
-   convertible to STRING, else ``COMPOUND_TEXT''.
-
-   If insufficient memory is available for the new value string,
-   the functions return XNoMemory. If the current locale is not
-   supported, the functions return XLocaleNotSupported. In both of
-   these error cases, the functions do not set text_prop_return.
-
-   To determine if the functions are guaranteed not to return
-   XLocaleNotSupported, use XSupportsLocale.
-
-   If the supplied text is not fully convertible to the specified
-   encoding, the functions return the number of unconvertible
-   characters. Each unconvertible character is converted to an
-   implementation-defined and encoding-specific default string.
-   Otherwise, the functions return Success. Note that full
-   convertibility to all styles except XStringStyle is guaranteed.
-
-   To free the storage for the value field, use XFree.
-
-   To obtain a list of text strings from an XTextProperty
-   structure, use XmbTextPropertyToTextList or
-   XwcTextPropertyToTextList.
-
-   int XmbTextPropertyToTextList(Display *display, XTextProperty
-   *text_prop, char ***list_return, int *count_return);
-
-   int XwcTextPropertyToTextList(Display *display, XTextProperty
-   *text_prop, wchar_t ***list_return, int *count_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   text_prop
-
-   Specifies the XTextProperty structure to be used.
-
-   list_return
-
-   Returns a list of null-terminated character strings.
-
-   count_return
-
-   Returns the number of strings.
-
-   The XmbTextPropertyToTextList and XwcTextPropertyToTextList
-   functions return a list of text strings in the current locale
-   representing the null-separated elements of the specified
-   XTextProperty structure. The data in text_prop must be format
-   8.
-
-   Multiple elements of the property (for example, the strings in
-   a disjoint text selection) are separated by a null byte. The
-   contents of the property are not required to be
-   null-terminated; any terminating null should not be included in
-   text_prop.nitems.
-
-   If insufficient memory is available for the list and its
-   elements, XmbTextPropertyToTextList and
-   XwcTextPropertyToTextList return XNoMemory. If the current
-   locale is not supported, the functions return
-   XLocaleNotSupported. Otherwise, if the encoding field of
-   text_prop is not convertible to the encoding of the current
-   locale, the functions return XConverterNotFound. For supported
-   locales, existence of a converter from COMPOUND_TEXT, STRING or
-   the encoding of the current locale is guaranteed if
-   XSupportsLocale returns True for the current locale (but the
-   actual text may contain unconvertible characters). Conversion
-   of other encodings is implementation-dependent. In all of these
-   error cases, the functions do not set any return values.
-
-   Otherwise, XmbTextPropertyToTextList and
-   XwcTextPropertyToTextList return the list of null-terminated
-   text strings to list_return and the number of text strings to
-   count_return.
-
-   If the value field of text_prop is not fully convertible to the
-   encoding of the current locale, the functions return the number
-   of unconvertible characters. Each unconvertible character is
-   converted to a string in the current locale that is specific to
-   the current locale. To obtain the value of this string, use
-   XDefaultString. Otherwise, XmbTextPropertyToTextList and
-   XwcTextPropertyToTextList return Success.
-
-   To free the storage for the list and its contents returned by
-   XmbTextPropertyToTextList, use XFreeStringList. To free the
-   storage for the list and its contents returned by
-   XwcTextPropertyToTextList, use XwcFreeStringList.
-
-   To free the in-memory data associated with the specified wide
-   character string list, use XwcFreeStringList.
-
-   void XwcFreeStringList(wchar_t **list);
-
-   list
-
-   Specifies the list of strings to be freed.
-
-   The XwcFreeStringList function frees memory allocated by
-   XwcTextPropertyToTextList.
-
-   To obtain the default string for text conversion in the current
-   locale, use
-
-   char *XDefaultString(void);
-
-   The XDefaultString function returns the default string used by
-   Xlib for text conversion (for example, in
-   XmbTextPropertyToTextList). The default string is the string in
-   the current locale that is output when an unconvertible
-   character is found during text conversion. If the string
-   returned by XDefaultString is the empty string (""), no
-   character is output in the converted text. XDefaultString does
-   not return NULL.
-
-   The string returned by XDefaultString is independent of the
-   default string for text drawing; see XCreateFontSet to obtain
-   the default string for an XFontSet.
-
-   The behavior when an invalid codepoint is supplied to any Xlib
-   function is undefined.
-
-   The returned string is null-terminated. It is owned by Xlib and
-   should not be modified or freed by the client. It may be freed
-   after the current locale is changed. Until freed, it will not
-   be modified by Xlib.
-
-   To set the specified list of strings in the STRING encoding to
-   a XTextProperty structure, use XStringListToTextProperty.
-
-   Status XStringListToTextProperty(char **list, int count,
-   XTextProperty *text_prop_return);
-
-   list
-
-   Specifies a list of null-terminated character strings.
-
-   count
-
-   Specifies the number of strings.
-
-   text_prop_return
-
-   Returns the XTextProperty structure.
-
-   The XStringListToTextProperty function sets the specified
-   XTextProperty to be of type STRING (format 8) with a value
-   representing the concatenation of the specified list of
-   null-separated character strings. An extra null byte (which is
-   not included in the nitems member) is stored at the end of the
-   value field of text_prop_return. The strings are assumed
-   (without verification) to be in the STRING encoding. If
-   insufficient memory is available for the new value string,
-   XStringListToTextProperty does not set any fields in the
-   XTextProperty structure and returns a zero status. Otherwise,
-   it returns a nonzero status. To free the storage for the value
-   field, use XFree.
-
-   To obtain a list of strings from a specified XTextProperty
-   structure in the STRING encoding, use
-   XTextPropertyToStringList.
-
-   Status XTextPropertyToStringList(XTextProperty *text_prop, char
-   ***list_return, int *count_return);
-
-   text_prop
-
-   Specifies the XTextProperty structure to be used.
-
-   list_return
-
-   Returns a list of null-terminated character strings.
-
-   count_return
-
-   Returns the number of strings.
-
-   The XTextPropertyToStringList function returns a list of
-   strings representing the null-separated elements of the
-   specified XTextProperty structure. The data in text_prop must
-   be of type STRING and format 8. Multiple elements of the
-   property (for example, the strings in a disjoint text
-   selection) are separated by NULL (encoding 0). The contents of
-   the property are not null-terminated. If insufficient memory is
-   available for the list and its elements,
-   XTextPropertyToStringList sets no return values and returns a
-   zero status. Otherwise, it returns a nonzero status. To free
-   the storage for the list and its contents, use XFreeStringList.
-
-   To free the in-memory data associated with the specified string
-   list, use XFreeStringList.
-
-   void XFreeStringList(char **list);
-
-   list
-
-   Specifies the list of strings to be freed.
-
-   The XFreeStringList function releases memory allocated by
-   XmbTextPropertyToTextList and XTextPropertyToStringList and the
-   missing charset list allocated by XCreateFontSet.
-
-Setting and Reading Text Properties
-
-   Xlib provides two functions that you can use to set and read
-   the text properties for a given window. You can use these
-   functions to set and read those properties of type TEXT
-   (WM_NAME, WM_ICON_NAME, WM_COMMAND, and WM_CLIENT_MACHINE). In
-   addition, Xlib provides separate convenience functions that you
-   can use to set each of these properties. For further
-   information about these convenience functions, see sections
-   14.1.4, 14.1.5, 14.2.1, and 14.2.2, respectively.
-
-   To set one of a window's text properties, use XSetTextProperty.
-
-   void XSetTextProperty(Display *display, Window w, XTextProperty
-   *text_prop, Atom property);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   text_prop
-
-   Specifies the XTextProperty structure to be used.
-
-   property
-
-   Specifies the property name.
-
-   The XSetTextProperty function replaces the existing specified
-   property for the named window with the data, type, format, and
-   number of items determined by the value field, the encoding
-   field, the format field, and the nitems field, respectively, of
-   the specified XTextProperty structure. If the property does not
-   already exist, XSetTextProperty sets it for the specified
-   window.
-
-   XSetTextProperty can generate BadAlloc, BadAtom, BadValue, and
-   BadWindow errors.
-
-   To read one of a window's text properties, use
-   XGetTextProperty.
-
-   Status XGetTextProperty(Display *display, Window w,
-   XTextProperty *text_prop_return, Atom property);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   text_prop_return
-
-   Returns the XTextProperty structure.
-
-   property
-
-   Specifies the property name.
-
-   The XGetTextProperty function reads the specified property from
-   the window and stores the data in the returned XTextProperty
-   structure. It stores the data in the value field, the type of
-   the data in the encoding field, the format of the data in the
-   format field, and the number of items of data in the nitems
-   field. An extra byte containing null (which is not included in
-   the nitems member) is stored at the end of the value field of
-   text_prop_return. The particular interpretation of the
-   property's encoding and data as text is left to the calling
-   application. If the specified property does not exist on the
-   window, XGetTextProperty sets the value field to NULL, the
-   encoding field to None, the format field to zero, and the
-   nitems field to zero.
-
-   If it was able to read and store the data in the XTextProperty
-   structure, XGetTextProperty returns a nonzero status;
-   otherwise, it returns a zero status.
-
-   XGetTextProperty can generate BadAtom and BadWindow errors.
-
-Setting and Reading the WM_NAME Property
-
-   Xlib provides convenience functions that you can use to set and
-   read the WM_NAME property for a given window.
-
-   To set a window's WM_NAME property with the supplied
-   convenience function, use XSetWMName.
-
-   void XSetWMName(Display *display, Window w, XTextProperty
-   *text_prop);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   text_prop
-
-   Specifies the XTextProperty structure to be used.
-
-   The XSetWMName convenience function calls XSetTextProperty to
-   set the WM_NAME property.
-
-   To read a window's WM_NAME property with the supplied
-   convenience function, use XGetWMName.
-
-   Status XGetWMName(Display *display, Window w, XTextProperty
-   *text_prop_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   text_prop_return
-
-   Returns the XTextProperty structure.
-
-   The XGetWMName convenience function calls XGetTextProperty to
-   obtain the WM_NAME property. It returns a nonzero status on
-   success; otherwise, it returns a zero status.
-
-   The following two functions have been superseded by XSetWMName
-   and XGetWMName, respectively. You can use these additional
-   convenience functions for window names that are encoded as
-   STRING properties.
-
-   To assign a name to a window, use XStoreName.
-
-   XStoreName(Display *display, Window w, char *window_name);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   window_name
-
-   Specifies the window name, which should be a null-terminated
-   string.
-
-   The XStoreName function assigns the name passed to window_name
-   to the specified window. A window manager can display the
-   window name in some prominent place, such as the title bar, to
-   allow users to identify windows easily. Some window managers
-   may display a window's name in the window's icon, although they
-   are encouraged to use the window's icon name if one is provided
-   by the application. If the string is not in the Host Portable
-   Character Encoding, the result is implementation-dependent.
-
-   XStoreName can generate BadAlloc and BadWindow errors.
-
-   To get the name of a window, use XFetchName.
-
-   Status XFetchName(Display *display, Window w, char
-   **window_name_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   window_name_return
-
-   Returns the window name, which is a null-terminated string.
-
-   The XFetchName function returns the name of the specified
-   window. If it succeeds, it returns a nonzero status; otherwise,
-   no name has been set for the window, and it returns zero. If
-   the WM_NAME property has not been set for this window,
-   XFetchName sets window_name_return to NULL. If the data
-   returned by the server is in the Latin Portable Character
-   Encoding, then the returned string is in the Host Portable
-   Character Encoding. Otherwise, the result is
-   implementation-dependent. When finished with it, a client must
-   free the window name string using XFree.
-
-   XFetchName can generate a BadWindow error.
-
-Setting and Reading the WM_ICON_NAME Property
-
-   Xlib provides convenience functions that you can use to set and
-   read the WM_ICON_NAME property for a given window.
-
-   To set a window's WM_ICON_NAME property, use XSetWMIconName.
-
-   void XSetWMIconName(Display *display, Window w, XTextProperty
-   *text_prop);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   text_prop
-
-   Specifies the XTextProperty structure to be used.
-
-   The XSetWMIconName convenience function calls XSetTextProperty
-   to set the WM_ICON_NAME property.
-
-   To read a window's WM_ICON_NAME property, use XGetWMIconName.
-
-   Status XGetWMIconName(Display *display, Window w, XTextProperty
-   *text_prop_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   text_prop_return
-
-   Returns the XTextProperty structure.
-
-   The XGetWMIconName convenience function calls XGetTextProperty
-   to obtain the WM_ICON_NAME property. It returns a nonzero
-   status on success; otherwise, it returns a zero status.
-
-   The next two functions have been superseded by XSetWMIconName
-   and XGetWMIconName, respectively. You can use these additional
-   convenience functions for window names that are encoded as
-   STRING properties.
-
-   To set the name to be displayed in a window's icon, use
-   XSetIconName.
-
-   XSetIconName(Display *display, Window w, char *icon_name);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   icon_name
-
-   Specifies the icon name, which should be a null-terminated
-   string.
-
-   If the string is not in the Host Portable Character Encoding,
-   the result is implementation-dependent. XSetIconName can
-   generate BadAlloc and BadWindow errors.
-
-   To get the name a window wants displayed in its icon, use
-   XGetIconName.
-
-   Status XGetIconName(Display *display, Window w, char
-   **icon_name_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   icon_name_return
-
-   Returns the window's icon name, which is a null-terminated
-   string.
-
-   The XGetIconName function returns the name to be displayed in
-   the specified window's icon. If it succeeds, it returns a
-   nonzero status; otherwise, if no icon name has been set for the
-   window, it returns zero. If you never assigned a name to the
-   window, XGetIconName sets icon_name_return to NULL. If the data
-   returned by the server is in the Latin Portable Character
-   Encoding, then the returned string is in the Host Portable
-   Character Encoding. Otherwise, the result is
-   implementation-dependent. When finished with it, a client must
-   free the icon name string using XFree.
-
-   XGetIconName can generate a BadWindow error.
-
-Setting and Reading the WM_HINTS Property
-
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to set and read the
-   WM_HINTS property for a given window. These functions use the
-   flags and the XWMHints structure, as defined in the
-   <X11/Xutil.h> header file.
-
-   To allocate an XWMHints structure, use XAllocWMHints.
-
-   XWMHints *XAllocWMHints(void);
-
-   The XAllocWMHints function allocates and returns a pointer to
-   an XWMHints structure. Note that all fields in the XWMHints
-   structure are initially set to zero. If insufficient memory is
-   available, XAllocWMHints returns NULL. To free the memory
-   allocated to this structure, use XFree.
-
-   The XWMHints structure contains:
-/* Window manager hints mask bits */
-
-#define         InputHint             (1L<<0)
-#define         StateHint             (1L<<1)
-#define         IconPixmapHint        (1L<<2)
-#define         IconWindowHint        (1L<<3)
-#define         IconPositionHint      (1L<<4)
-#define         IconMaskHint          (1L<<5)
-#define         WindowGroupHint       (1L<<6)
-#define         UrgencyHint           (1L<<8)
-#define         AllHints              (InputHint|StateHint|IconPixmapHin
-t|
-                                       IconWIndowHint|IconPositionHint|
-                                       IconMaskHint|WindowGroupHint)
-
-
-/* Values */
-
-typedef struct {
-        long flags;             /* marks which fields in this structure
-are defined */
-        Bool input;             /* does this application rely on the win
-dow manager to
-                                   get keyboard input? */
-        int initial_state;      /* see below */
-        Pixmap icon_pixmap;     /* pixmap to be used as icon */
-        Window icon_window;     /* window to be used as icon */
-        int icon_x, icon_y;     /* initial position of icon */
-        Pixmap icon_mask;       /* pixmap to be used as mask for icon_pi
-xmap */
-        XID window_group;       /* id of related window group */
-        /* this structure may be extended in the future */
-} XWMHints;
-
-   The input member is used to communicate to the window manager
-   the input focus model used by the application. Applications
-   that expect input but never explicitly set focus to any of
-   their subwindows (that is, use the push model of focus
-   management), such as X Version 10 style applications that use
-   real-estate driven focus, should set this member to True.
-   Similarly, applications that set input focus to their
-   subwindows only when it is given to their top-level window by a
-   window manager should also set this member to True.
-   Applications that manage their own input focus by explicitly
-   setting focus to one of their subwindows whenever they want
-   keyboard input (that is, use the pull model of focus
-   management) should set this member to False. Applications that
-   never expect any keyboard input also should set this member to
-   False.
-
-   Pull model window managers should make it possible for push
-   model applications to get input by setting input focus to the
-   top-level windows of applications whose input member is True.
-   Push model window managers should make sure that pull model
-   applications do not break them by resetting input focus to
-   PointerRoot when it is appropriate (for example, whenever an
-   application whose input member is False sets input focus to one
-   of its subwindows).
-
-   The definitions for the initial_state flag are:
-#define      WithdrawnState 0
-#define      NormalState    1   /* most applications start this way */
-#define      IconicState    3   /* application wants to start as an icon
- */
-
-
-   The icon_mask specifies which pixels of the icon_pixmap should
-   be used as the icon. This allows for nonrectangular icons. Both
-   icon_pixmap and icon_mask must be bitmaps. The icon_window lets
-   an application provide a window for use as an icon for window
-   managers that support such use. The window_group lets you
-   specify that this window belongs to a group of other windows.
-   For example, if a single application manipulates multiple
-   top-level windows, this allows you to provide enough
-   information that a window manager can iconify all of the
-   windows rather than just the one window.
-
-   The UrgencyHint flag, if set in the flags field, indicates that
-   the client deems the window contents to be urgent, requiring
-   the timely response of the user. The window manager will make
-   some effort to draw the user's attention to this window while
-   this flag is set. The client must provide some means by which
-   the user can cause the urgency flag to be cleared (either
-   mitigating the condition that made the window urgent or merely
-   shutting off the alarm) or the window to be withdrawn.
-
-   To set a window's WM_HINTS property, use XSetWMHints.
-
-   XSetWMHints(Display *display, Window w, XWMHints *wmhints);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   wmhints
-
-   Specifies the XWMHints structure to be used.
-
-   The XSetWMHints function sets the window manager hints that
-   include icon information and location, the initial state of the
-   window, and whether the application relies on the window
-   manager to get keyboard input.
-
-   XSetWMHints can generate BadAlloc and BadWindow errors.
-
-   To read a window's WM_HINTS property, use XGetWMHints.
-
-   XWMHints *XGetWMHints(Display *display, Window w);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   The XGetWMHints function reads the window manager hints and
-   returns NULL if no WM_HINTS property was set on the window or
-   returns a pointer to an XWMHints structure if it succeeds. When
-   finished with the data, free the space used for it by calling
-   XFree.
-
-   XGetWMHints can generate a BadWindow error.
-
-Setting and Reading the WM_NORMAL_HINTS Property
-
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to set or read the
-   WM_NORMAL_HINTS property for a given window. The functions use
-   the flags and the XSizeHints structure, as defined in the
-   <X11/Xutil.h> header file.
-
-   The size of the XSizeHints structure may grow in future
-   releases, as new components are added to support new ICCCM
-   features. Passing statically allocated instances of this
-   structure into Xlib may result in memory corruption when
-   running against a future release of the library. As such, it is
-   recommended that only dynamically allocated instances of the
-   structure be used.
-
-   To allocate an XSizeHints structure, use XAllocSizeHints.
-
-   XSizeHints *XAllocSizeHints(void);
-
-   The XAllocSizeHints function allocates and returns a pointer to
-   an XSizeHints structure. Note that all fields in the XSizeHints
-   structure are initially set to zero. If insufficient memory is
-   available, XAllocSizeHints returns NULL. To free the memory
-   allocated to this structure, use XFree.
-
-   The XSizeHints structure contains:
-/* Size hints mask bits */
-
-#define           USPosition         (1L<<0)  /* user specified x,y */
-#define           USSize             (1L<<1)  /* user specified width,he
-ight */
-#define           PPosition          (1L<<2)  /* program specified posis
-tion */
-#define           PSize              (1L<<3)  /* program specified size
-*/
-#define           PMinSize           (1L<<4)  /* program specified minim
-um size */
-#define           PMaxSize           (1L<<5)  /* program specified maxim
-um size */
-#define           PResizeInc         (1L<<5)  /* program specified resiz
-e increments */
-#define           PAspect            (1L<<6)  /* program specified min a
-nd max aspect ratios */
-#define           PBaseSize          (1L<<8)
-#define           PWinGravity        (1L<<9)
-#define           PAllHints          (PPosition|Psize|
-                                      PMinSize|PMaxSize|
-                                      PResizeInc|PAspect)
-
-
-/* Values */
-
-typedef struct {
-        long flags;             /* marks which fields in this structure
-are defined */
-        int x, y;               /* Obsolete */
-        int width, height;      /* Obsolete */
-        int min_width, min_height;
-        int max_width, max_height;
-        int width_inc, height_inc;
-        struct {
-               int x;           /* numerator */
-               int y;           /* denominator */
-        } min_aspect, max_aspect;
-        int base_width, base_height;
-        int win_gravity;
-        /* this structure may be extended in the future */
-} XSizeHints;
-
-   The x, y, width, and height members are now obsolete and are
-   left solely for compatibility reasons. The min_width and
-   min_height members specify the minimum window size that still
-   allows the application to be useful. The max_width and
-   max_height members specify the maximum window size. The
-   width_inc and height_inc members define an arithmetic
-   progression of sizes (minimum to maximum) into which the window
-   prefers to be resized. The min_aspect and max_aspect members
-   are expressed as ratios of x and y, and they allow an
-   application to specify the range of aspect ratios it prefers.
-   The base_width and base_height members define the desired size
-   of the window. The window manager will interpret the position
-   of the window and its border width to position the point of the
-   outer rectangle of the overall window specified by the
-   win_gravity member. The outer rectangle of the window includes
-   any borders or decorations supplied by the window manager. In
-   other words, if the window manager decides to place the window
-   where the client asked, the position on the parent window's
-   border named by the win_gravity will be placed where the client
-   window would have been placed in the absence of a window
-   manager.
-
-   Note that use of the PAllHints macro is highly discouraged.
-
-   To set a window's WM_NORMAL_HINTS property, use
-   XSetWMNormalHints.
-
-   void XSetWMNormalHints(Display *display, Window w, XSizeHints
-   *hints);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   hints
-
-   Specifies the size hints for the window in its normal state.
-
-   The XSetWMNormalHints function replaces the size hints for the
-   WM_NORMAL_HINTS property on the specified window. If the
-   property does not already exist, XSetWMNormalHints sets the
-   size hints for the WM_NORMAL_HINTS property on the specified
-   window. The property is stored with a type of WM_SIZE_HINTS and
-   a format of 32.
-
-   XSetWMNormalHints can generate BadAlloc and BadWindow errors.
-
-   To read a window's WM_NORMAL_HINTS property, use
-   XGetWMNormalHints.
-
-   Status XGetWMNormalHints(Display *display, Window w, XSizeHints
-   *hints_return, long *supplied_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   hints_return
-
-   Returns the size hints for the window in its normal state.
-
-   supplied_return
-
-   Returns the hints that were supplied by the user.
-
-   The XGetWMNormalHints function returns the size hints stored in
-   the WM_NORMAL_HINTS property on the specified window. If the
-   property is of type WM_SIZE_HINTS, is of format 32, and is long
-   enough to contain either an old (pre-ICCCM) or new size hints
-   structure, XGetWMNormalHints sets the various fields of the
-   XSizeHints structure, sets the supplied_return argument to the
-   list of fields that were supplied by the user (whether or not
-   they contained defined values), and returns a nonzero status.
-   Otherwise, it returns a zero status.
-
-   If XGetWMNormalHints returns successfully and a pre-ICCCM size
-   hints property is read, the supplied_return argument will
-   contain the following bits:
-
-(USPosition|USSize|PPosition|PSize|PMinSize|
- PMaxSize|PResizeInc|PAspect)
-
-   If the property is large enough to contain the base size and
-   window gravity fields as well, the supplied_return argument
-   will also contain the following bits:
-
-PBaseSize|PWinGravity
-
-   XGetWMNormalHints can generate a BadWindow error.
-
-   To set a window's WM_SIZE_HINTS property, use XSetWMSizeHints.
-
-   void XSetWMSizeHints(Display *display, Window w, XSizeHints
-   *hints, Atom property);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   hints
-
-   Specifies the XSizeHints structure to be used.
-
-   property
-
-   Specifies the property name.
-
-   The XSetWMSizeHints function replaces the size hints for the
-   specified property on the named window. If the specified
-   property does not already exist, XSetWMSizeHints sets the size
-   hints for the specified property on the named window. The
-   property is stored with a type of WM_SIZE_HINTS and a format of
-   32. To set a window's normal size hints, you can use the
-   XSetWMNormalHints function.
-
-   XSetWMSizeHints can generate BadAlloc, BadAtom, and BadWindow
-   errors.
-
-   To read a window's WM_SIZE_HINTS property, use XGetWMSizeHints.
-
-   Status XGetWMSizeHints(Display *display, Window w, XSizeHints
-   *hints_return, long *supplied_return, Atom property);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   hints_return
-
-   Returns the XSizeHints structure.
-
-   supplied_return
-
-   Returns the hints that were supplied by the user.
-
-   property
-
-   Specifies the property name.
-
-   The XGetWMSizeHints function returns the size hints stored in
-   the specified property on the named window. If the property is
-   of type WM_SIZE_HINTS, is of format 32, and is long enough to
-   contain either an old (pre-ICCCM) or new size hints structure,
-   XGetWMSizeHints sets the various fields of the XSizeHints
-   structure, sets the supplied_return argument to the list of
-   fields that were supplied by the user (whether or not they
-   contained defined values), and returns a nonzero status.
-   Otherwise, it returns a zero status. To get a window's normal
-   size hints, you can use the XGetWMNormalHints function.
-
-   If XGetWMSizeHints returns successfully and a pre-ICCCM size
-   hints property is read, the supplied_return argument will
-   contain the following bits:
-
-(USPosition|USSize|PPosition|PSize|PMinSize|
- PMaxSize|PResizeInc|PAspect)
-
-   If the property is large enough to contain the base size and
-   window gravity fields as well, the supplied_return argument
-   will also contain the following bits:
-
-PBaseSize|PWinGravity
-
-   XGetWMSizeHints can generate BadAtom and BadWindow errors.
-
-Setting and Reading the WM_CLASS Property
-
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to set and get the
-   WM_CLASS property for a given window. These functions use the
-   XClassHint structure, which is defined in the <X11/Xutil.h>
-   header file.
-
-   To allocate an XClassHint structure, use XAllocClassHint.
-
-   XClassHint *XAllocClassHint(void);
-
-   The XAllocClassHint function allocates and returns a pointer to
-   an XClassHint structure. Note that the pointer fields in the
-   XClassHint structure are initially set to NULL. If insufficient
-   memory is available, XAllocClassHint returns NULL. To free the
-   memory allocated to this structure, use XFree.
-
-   The XClassHint contains:
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-        char *res_name;
-        char *res_class;
-} XClassHint;
-
-   The res_name member contains the application name, and the
-   res_class member contains the application class. Note that the
-   name set in this property may differ from the name set as
-   WM_NAME. That is, WM_NAME specifies what should be displayed in
-   the title bar and, therefore, can contain temporal information
-   (for example, the name of a file currently in an editor's
-   buffer). On the other hand, the name specified as part of
-   WM_CLASS is the formal name of the application that should be
-   used when retrieving the application's resources from the
-   resource database.
-
-   To set a window's WM_CLASS property, use XSetClassHint.
-
-   XSetClassHint(Display *display, Window w, XClassHint
-   *class_hints);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   class_hints
-
-   Specifies the XClassHint structure that is to be used.
-
-   The XSetClassHint function sets the class hint for the
-   specified window. If the strings are not in the Host Portable
-   Character Encoding, the result is implementation-dependent.
-
-   XSetClassHint can generate BadAlloc and BadWindow errors.
-
-   To read a window's WM_CLASS property, use XGetClassHint.
-
-   Status XGetClassHint(Display *display, Window w, XClassHint
-   *class_hints_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   class_hints_return
-
-   Returns the XClassHint structure.
-
-   The XGetClassHint function returns the class hint of the
-   specified window to the members of the supplied structure. If
-   the data returned by the server is in the Latin Portable
-   Character Encoding, then the returned strings are in the Host
-   Portable Character Encoding. Otherwise, the result is
-   implementation-dependent. It returns a nonzero status on
-   success; otherwise, it returns a zero status. To free res_name
-   and res_class when finished with the strings, use XFree on each
-   individually.
-
-   XGetClassHint can generate a BadWindow error.
-
-Setting and Reading the WM_TRANSIENT_FOR Property
-
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to set and read the
-   WM_TRANSIENT_FOR property for a given window.
-
-   To set a window's WM_TRANSIENT_FOR property, use
-   XSetTransientForHint.
-
-   XSetTransientForHint(Display *display, Window w, Window
-   prop_window);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   prop_window
-
-   Specifies the window that the WM_TRANSIENT_FOR property is to
-   be set to.
-
-   The XSetTransientForHint function sets the WM_TRANSIENT_FOR
-   property of the specified window to the specified prop_window.
-
-   XSetTransientForHint can generate BadAlloc and BadWindow
-   errors.
-
-   To read a window's WM_TRANSIENT_FOR property, use
-   XGetTransientForHint.
-
-   Status XGetTransientForHint(Display *display, Window w, Window
-   *prop_window_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   prop_window_return
-
-   Returns the WM_TRANSIENT_FOR property of the specified window.
-
-   The XGetTransientForHint function returns the WM_TRANSIENT_FOR
-   property for the specified window. It returns a nonzero status
-   on success; otherwise, it returns a zero status.
-
-   XGetTransientForHint can generate a BadWindow error.
-
-Setting and Reading the WM_PROTOCOLS Property
-
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to set and read the
-   WM_PROTOCOLS property for a given window.
-
-   To set a window's WM_PROTOCOLS property, use XSetWMProtocols.
-
-   Status XSetWMProtocols(Display *display, Window w, Atom
-   *protocols, int count);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   protocols
-
-   Specifies the list of protocols.
-
-   count
-
-   Specifies the number of protocols in the list.
-
-   The XSetWMProtocols function replaces the WM_PROTOCOLS property
-   on the specified window with the list of atoms specified by the
-   protocols argument. If the property does not already exist,
-   XSetWMProtocols sets the WM_PROTOCOLS property on the specified
-   window to the list of atoms specified by the protocols
-   argument. The property is stored with a type of ATOM and a
-   format of 32. If it cannot intern the WM_PROTOCOLS atom,
-   XSetWMProtocols returns a zero status. Otherwise, it returns a
-   nonzero status.
-
-   XSetWMProtocols can generate BadAlloc and BadWindow errors.
-
-   To read a window's WM_PROTOCOLS property, use XGetWMProtocols.
-
-   Status XGetWMProtocols(Display *display, Window w, Atom
-   **protocols_return, int *count_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   protocols_return
-
-   Returns the list of protocols.
-
-   count_return
-
-   Returns the number of protocols in the list.
-
-   The XGetWMProtocols function returns the list of atoms stored
-   in the WM_PROTOCOLS property on the specified window. These
-   atoms describe window manager protocols in which the owner of
-   this window is willing to participate. If the property exists,
-   is of type ATOM, is of format 32, and the atom WM_PROTOCOLS can
-   be interned, XGetWMProtocols sets the protocols_return argument
-   to a list of atoms, sets the count_return argument to the
-   number of elements in the list, and returns a nonzero status.
-   Otherwise, it sets neither of the return arguments and returns
-   a zero status. To release the list of atoms, use XFree.
-
-   XGetWMProtocols can generate a BadWindow error.
-
-Setting and Reading the WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS Property
-
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to set and read the
-   WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS property for a given window.
-
-   To set a window's WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS property, use
-   XSetWMColormapWindows.
-
-   Status XSetWMColormapWindows(Display *display, Window w, Window
-   *colormap_windows, int count);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   colormap_windows
-
-   Specifies the list of windows.
-
-   count
-
-   Specifies the number of windows in the list.
-
-   The XSetWMColormapWindows function replaces the
-   WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS property on the specified window with the
-   list of windows specified by the colormap_windows argument. If
-   the property does not already exist, XSetWMColormapWindows sets
-   the WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS property on the specified window to the
-   list of windows specified by the colormap_windows argument. The
-   property is stored with a type of WINDOW and a format of 32. If
-   it cannot intern the WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS atom,
-   XSetWMColormapWindows returns a zero status. Otherwise, it
-   returns a nonzero status.
-
-   XSetWMColormapWindows can generate BadAlloc and BadWindow
-   errors.
-
-   To read a window's WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS property, use
-   XGetWMColormapWindows.
-
-   Status XGetWMColormapWindows(Display *display, Window w, Window
-   **colormap_windows_return, int *count_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   colormap_windows_return
-
-   Returns the list of windows.
-
-   count_return
-
-   Returns the number of windows in the list.
-
-   The XGetWMColormapWindows function returns the list of window
-   identifiers stored in the WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS property on the
-   specified window. These identifiers indicate the colormaps that
-   the window manager may need to install for this window. If the
-   property exists, is of type WINDOW, is of format 32, and the
-   atom WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS can be interned, XGetWMColormapWindows
-   sets the windows_return argument to a list of window
-   identifiers, sets the count_return argument to the number of
-   elements in the list, and returns a nonzero status. Otherwise,
-   it sets neither of the return arguments and returns a zero
-   status. To release the list of window identifiers, use XFree.
-
-   XGetWMColormapWindows can generate a BadWindow error.
-
-Setting and Reading the WM_ICON_SIZE Property
-
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to set and read the
-   WM_ICON_SIZE property for a given window. These functions use
-   the XIconSize structure, which is defined in the <X11/Xutil.h>
-   header file.
-
-   To allocate an XIconSize structure, use XAllocIconSize.
-
-   XIconSize *XAllocIconSize(void);
-
-   The XAllocIconSize function allocates and returns a pointer to
-   an XIconSize structure. Note that all fields in the XIconSize
-   structure are initially set to zero. If insufficient memory is
-   available, XAllocIconSize returns NULL. To free the memory
-   allocated to this structure, use XFree.
-
-   The XIconSize structure contains:
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-        int min_width, min_height;
-        int max_width, max_height;
-        int width_inc, height_inc;
-} XIconSize;
-
-   The width_inc and height_inc members define an arithmetic
-   progression of sizes (minimum to maximum) that represent the
-   supported icon sizes.
-
-   To set a window's WM_ICON_SIZE property, use XSetIconSizes.
-
-   XSetIconSizes(Display *display, Window w, XIconSize *size_list,
-   int count);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   size_list
-
-   Specifies the size list.
-
-   count
-
-   Specifies the number of items in the size list.
-
-   The XSetIconSizes function is used only by window managers to
-   set the supported icon sizes.
-
-   XSetIconSizes can generate BadAlloc and BadWindow errors.
-
-   To read a window's WM_ICON_SIZE property, use XGetIconSizes.
-
-   Status XGetIconSizes(Display *display, Window w, XIconSize
-   **size_list_return, int *count_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   size_list_return
-
-   Returns the size list.
-
-   count_return
-
-   Returns the number of items in the size list.
-
-   The XGetIconSizes function returns zero if a window manager has
-   not set icon sizes; otherwise, it returns nonzero.
-   XGetIconSizes should be called by an application that wants to
-   find out what icon sizes would be most appreciated by the
-   window manager under which the application is running. The
-   application should then use XSetWMHints to supply the window
-   manager with an icon pixmap or window in one of the supported
-   sizes. To free the data allocated in size_list_return, use
-   XFree.
-
-   XGetIconSizes can generate a BadWindow error.
-
-Using Window Manager Convenience Functions
-
-   The XmbSetWMProperties function stores the standard set of
-   window manager properties, with text properties in standard
-   encodings for internationalized text communication. The
-   standard window manager properties for a given window are
-   WM_NAME, WM_ICON_NAME, WM_HINTS, WM_NORMAL_HINTS, WM_CLASS,
-   WM_COMMAND, WM_CLIENT_MACHINE, and WM_LOCALE_NAME.
-
-   void XmbSetWMProperties(Display *display, Window w, char
-   *window_name, char *icon_name, char *argv[], int argc,
-   XSizeHints *normal_hints, XWMHints *wm_hints, XClassHint
-   *class_hints);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   window_name
-
-   Specifies the window name, which should be a null-terminated
-   string.
-
-   icon_name
-
-   Specifies the icon name, which should be a null-terminated
-   string.
-
-   argv
-
-   Specifies the application's argument list.
-
-   argc
-
-   Specifies the number of arguments.
-
-   hints
-
-   Specifies the size hints for the window in its normal state.
-
-   wm_hints
-
-   Specifies the XWMHints structure to be used.
-
-   class_hints
-
-   Specifies the XClassHint structure to be used.
-
-   The XmbSetWMProperties convenience function provides a simple
-   programming interface for setting those essential window
-   properties that are used for communicating with other clients
-   (particularly window and session managers).
-
-   If the window_name argument is non-NULL, XmbSetWMProperties
-   sets the WM_NAME property. If the icon_name argument is
-   non-NULL, XmbSetWMProperties sets the WM_ICON_NAME property.
-   The window_name and icon_name arguments are null-terminated
-   strings in the encoding of the current locale. If the arguments
-   can be fully converted to the STRING encoding, the properties
-   are created with type ``STRING''; otherwise, the arguments are
-   converted to Compound Text, and the properties are created with
-   type ``COMPOUND_TEXT''.
-
-   If the normal_hints argument is non-NULL, XmbSetWMProperties
-   calls XSetWMNormalHints, which sets the WM_NORMAL_HINTS
-   property (see section 14.1.7). If the wm_hints argument is
-   non-NULL, XmbSetWMProperties calls XSetWMHints, which sets the
-   WM_HINTS property (see section 14.1.6).
-
-   If the argv argument is non-NULL, XmbSetWMProperties sets the
-   WM_COMMAND property from argv and argc. An argc of zero
-   indicates a zero-length command.
-
-   The hostname of the machine is stored using XSetWMClientMachine
-   (see section 14.2.2).
-
-   If the class_hints argument is non-NULL, XmbSetWMProperties
-   sets the WM_CLASS property. If the res_name member in the
-   XClassHint structure is set to the NULL pointer and the
-   RESOURCE_NAME environment variable is set, the value of the
-   environment variable is substituted for res_name. If the
-   res_name member is NULL, the environment variable is not set,
-   and argv and argv[0] are set, then the value of argv[0],
-   stripped of any directory prefixes, is substituted for
-   res_name.
-
-   It is assumed that the supplied class_hints.res_name and argv,
-   the RESOURCE_NAME environment variable, and the hostname of the
-   machine are in the encoding of the locale announced for the
-   LC_CTYPE category (on POSIX-compliant systems, the LC_CTYPE,
-   else LANG environment variable). The corresponding WM_CLASS,
-   WM_COMMAND, and WM_CLIENT_MACHINE properties are typed
-   according to the local host locale announcer. No encoding
-   conversion is performed prior to storage in the properties.
-
-   For clients that need to process the property text in a locale,
-   XmbSetWMProperties sets the WM_LOCALE_NAME property to be the
-   name of the current locale. The name is assumed to be in the
-   Host Portable Character Encoding and is converted to STRING for
-   storage in the property.
-
-   XmbSetWMProperties can generate BadAlloc and BadWindow errors.
-
-   To set a window's standard window manager properties with
-   strings in client-specified encodings, use XSetWMProperties.
-   The standard window manager properties for a given window are
-   WM_NAME, WM_ICON_NAME, WM_HINTS, WM_NORMAL_HINTS, WM_CLASS,
-   WM_COMMAND, and WM_CLIENT_MACHINE.
-
-   void XSetWMProperties(Display *display, Window w, XTextProperty
-   *window_name, XTextProperty *icon_name, char **argv, int argc,
-   XSizeHints *normal_hints, XWMHints *wm_hints, XClassHint
-   *class_hints);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   window_name
-
-   Specifies the window name, which should be a null-terminated
-   string.
-
-   icon_name
-
-   Specifies the icon name, which should be a null-terminated
-   string.
-
-   argv
-
-   Specifies the application's argument list.
-
-   argc
-
-   Specifies the number of arguments.
-
-   normal_hints
-
-   Specifies the size hints for the window in its normal state.
-
-   wm_hints
-
-   Specifies the XWMHints structure to be used.
-
-   class_hints
-
-   Specifies the XClassHint structure to be used.
-
-   The XSetWMProperties convenience function provides a single
-   programming interface for setting those essential window
-   properties that are used for communicating with other clients
-   (particularly window and session managers).
-
-   If the window_name argument is non-NULL, XSetWMProperties calls
-   XSetWMName, which, in turn, sets the WM_NAME property (see
-   section 14.1.4). If the icon_name argument is non-NULL,
-   XSetWMProperties calls XSetWMIconName, which sets the
-   WM_ICON_NAME property (see section 14.1.5). If the argv
-   argument is non-NULL, XSetWMProperties calls XSetCommand, which
-   sets the WM_COMMAND property (see section 14.2.1). Note that an
-   argc of zero is allowed to indicate a zero-length command. Note
-   also that the hostname of this machine is stored using
-   XSetWMClientMachine (see section 14.2.2).
-
-   If the normal_hints argument is non-NULL, XSetWMProperties
-   calls XSetWMNormalHints, which sets the WM_NORMAL_HINTS
-   property (see section 14.1.7). If the wm_hints argument is
-   non-NULL, XSetWMProperties calls XSetWMHints, which sets the
-   WM_HINTS property (see section 14.1.6).
-
-   If the class_hints argument is non-NULL, XSetWMProperties calls
-   XSetClassHint, which sets the WM_CLASS property (see section
-   14.1.8). If the res_name member in the XClassHint structure is
-   set to the NULL pointer and the RESOURCE_NAME environment
-   variable is set, then the value of the environment variable is
-   substituted for res_name. If the res_name member is NULL, the
-   environment variable is not set, and argv and argv[0] are set,
-   then the value of argv[0], stripped of any directory prefixes,
-   is substituted for res_name.
-
-   XSetWMProperties can generate BadAlloc and BadWindow errors.
-
-Client to Session Manager Communication
-
-   This section discusses how to:
-     * Set and read the WM_COMMAND property
-     * Set and read the WM_CLIENT_MACHINE property
-
-Setting and Reading the WM_COMMAND Property
-
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to set and read the
-   WM_COMMAND property for a given window.
-
-   To set a window's WM_COMMAND property, use XSetCommand.
-
-   XSetCommand(Display *display, Window w, char **argv, int argc);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   argv
-
-   Specifies the application's argument list.
-
-   argc
-
-   Specifies the number of arguments.
-
-   The XSetCommand function sets the command and arguments used to
-   invoke the application. (Typically, argv is the argv array of
-   your main program.) If the strings are not in the Host Portable
-   Character Encoding, the result is implementation-dependent.
-
-   XSetCommand can generate BadAlloc and BadWindow errors.
-
-   To read a window's WM_COMMAND property, use XGetCommand.
-
-   Status XGetCommand(Display *display, Window w, char
-   ***argv_return, int *argc_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   argv_return
-
-   Returns the application's argument list.
-
-   argc_return
-
-   Returns the number of arguments returned.
-
-   The XGetCommand function reads the WM_COMMAND property from the
-   specified window and returns a string list. If the WM_COMMAND
-   property exists, it is of type STRING and format 8. If
-   sufficient memory can be allocated to contain the string list,
-   XGetCommand fills in the argv_return and argc_return arguments
-   and returns a nonzero status. Otherwise, it returns a zero
-   status. If the data returned by the server is in the Latin
-   Portable Character Encoding, then the returned strings are in
-   the Host Portable Character Encoding. Otherwise, the result is
-   implementation-dependent. To free the memory allocated to the
-   string list, use XFreeStringList.
-
-Setting and Reading the WM_CLIENT_MACHINE Property
-
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to set and read the
-   WM_CLIENT_MACHINE property for a given window.
-
-   To set a window's WM_CLIENT_MACHINE property, use
-   XSetWMClientMachine.
-
-   void XSetWMClientMachine(Display *display, Window w,
-   XTextProperty *text_prop);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   text_prop
-
-   Specifies the XTextProperty structure to be used.
-
-   The XSetWMClientMachine convenience function calls
-   XSetTextProperty to set the WM_CLIENT_MACHINE property.
-
-   To read a window's WM_CLIENT_MACHINE property, use
-   XGetWMClientMachine.
-
-   Status XGetWMClientMachine(Display *display, Window w,
-   XTextProperty *text_prop_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   text_prop_return
-
-   Returns the XTextProperty structure.
-
-   The XGetWMClientMachine convenience function performs an
-   XGetTextProperty on the WM_CLIENT_MACHINE property. It returns
-   a nonzero status on success; otherwise, it returns a zero
-   status.
-
-Standard Colormaps
-
-   Applications with color palettes, smooth-shaded drawings, or
-   digitized images demand large numbers of colors. In addition,
-   these applications often require an efficient mapping from
-   color triples to pixel values that display the appropriate
-   colors.
-
-   As an example, consider a three-dimensional display program
-   that wants to draw a smoothly shaded sphere. At each pixel in
-   the image of the sphere, the program computes the intensity and
-   color of light reflected back to the viewer. The result of each
-   computation is a triple of red, green, and blue (RGB)
-   coefficients in the range 0.0 to 1.0. To draw the sphere, the
-   program needs a colormap that provides a large range of
-   uniformly distributed colors. The colormap should be arranged
-   so that the program can convert its RGB triples into pixel
-   values very quickly, because drawing the entire sphere requires
-   many such conversions.
-
-   On many current workstations, the display is limited to 256 or
-   fewer colors. Applications must allocate colors carefully, not
-   only to make sure they cover the entire range they need but
-   also to make use of as many of the available colors as
-   possible. On a typical X display, many applications are active
-   at once. Most workstations have only one hardware look-up table
-   for colors, so only one application colormap can be installed
-   at a given time. The application using the installed colormap
-   is displayed correctly, and the other applications go
-   technicolor and are displayed with false colors.
-
-   As another example, consider a user who is running an image
-   processing program to display earth-resources data. The image
-   processing program needs a colormap set up with 8 reds, 8
-   greens, and 4 blues, for a total of 256 colors. Because some
-   colors are already in use in the default colormap, the image
-   processing program allocates and installs a new colormap.
-
-   The user decides to alter some of the colors in the image by
-   invoking a color palette program to mix and choose colors. The
-   color palette program also needs a colormap with eight reds,
-   eight greens, and four blues, so just like the image processing
-   program, it must allocate and install a new colormap.
-
-   Because only one colormap can be installed at a time, the color
-   palette may be displayed incorrectly whenever the image
-   processing program is active. Conversely, whenever the palette
-   program is active, the image may be displayed incorrectly. The
-   user can never match or compare colors in the palette and
-   image. Contention for colormap resources can be reduced if
-   applications with similar color needs share colormaps.
-
-   The image processing program and the color palette program
-   could share the same colormap if there existed a convention
-   that described how the colormap was set up. Whenever either
-   program was active, both would be displayed correctly.
-
-   The standard colormap properties define a set of commonly used
-   colormaps. Applications that share these colormaps and
-   conventions display true colors more often and provide a better
-   interface to the user.
-
-   Standard colormaps allow applications to share commonly used
-   color resources. This allows many applications to be displayed
-   in true colors simultaneously, even when each application needs
-   an entirely filled colormap.
-
-   Several standard colormaps are described in this section.
-   Usually, a window manager creates these colormaps. Applications
-   should use the standard colormaps if they already exist.
-
-   To allocate an XStandardColormap structure, use
-   XAllocStandardColormap.
-
-   XStandardColormap *XAllocStandardColormap(void);
-
-   The XAllocStandardColormap function allocates and returns a
-   pointer to an XStandardColormap structure. Note that all fields
-   in the XStandardColormap structure are initially set to zero.
-   If insufficient memory is available, XAllocStandardColormap
-   returns NULL. To free the memory allocated to this structure,
-   use XFree.
-
-   The XStandardColormap structure contains:
-/* Hints */
-
-#define       ReeaseByFreeingColormap  ((XID)1L)
-
-/* Values */
-
-typedef struct {
-        Colormap colormap;
-        unsigned long red_max;
-        unsigned long red_mult;
-        unsigned long green_max;
-        unsigned long green_mult;
-        unsigned long blue_max;
-        unsigned long blue_mult;
-        unsigned long base_pixel;
-        VisualID visualid;
-        XID killid;
-} XStandardColormap;
-
-   The colormap member is the colormap created by the
-   XCreateColormap function. The red_max, green_max, and blue_max
-   members give the maximum red, green, and blue values,
-   respectively. Each color coefficient ranges from zero to its
-   max, inclusive. For example, a common colormap allocation is
-   3/3/2 (3 planes for red, 3 planes for green, and 2 planes for
-   blue). This colormap would have red_max = 7, green_max = 7, and
-   blue_max = 3. An alternate allocation that uses only 216 colors
-   is red_max = 5, green_max = 5, and blue_max = 5.
-
-   The red_mult, green_mult, and blue_mult members give the scale
-   factors used to compose a full pixel value. (See the discussion
-   of the base_pixel members for further information.) For a 3/3/2
-   allocation, red_mult might be 32, green_mult might be 4, and
-   blue_mult might be 1. For a 6-colors-each allocation, red_mult
-   might be 36, green_mult might be 6, and blue_mult might be 1.
-
-   The base_pixel member gives the base pixel value used to
-   compose a full pixel value. Usually, the base_pixel is obtained
-   from a call to the XAllocColorPlanes function. Given integer
-   red, green, and blue coefficients in their appropriate ranges,
-   one then can compute a corresponding pixel value by using the
-   following expression:
-
-
-
-(r * red_mult + g * green_mult + b * blue_mult + base_pixel) & 0xFFFFFFF
-F
-
-   For GrayScale colormaps, only the colormap, red_max, red_mult,
-   and base_pixel members are defined. The other members are
-   ignored. To compute a GrayScale pixel value, use the following
-   expression:
-
-
-
-(gray * red_mult + base_pixel) & 0xFFFFFFFF
-
-   Negative multipliers can be represented by converting the 2's
-   complement representation of the multiplier into an unsigned
-   long and storing the result in the appropriate _mult field. The
-   step of masking by 0xFFFFFFFF effectively converts the
-   resulting positive multiplier into a negative one. The masking
-   step will take place automatically on many machine
-   architectures, depending on the size of the integer type used
-   to do the computation.
-
-   The visualid member gives the ID number of the visual from
-   which the colormap was created. The killid member gives a
-   resource ID that indicates whether the cells held by this
-   standard colormap are to be released by freeing the colormap ID
-   or by calling the XKillClient function on the indicated
-   resource. (Note that this method is necessary for allocating
-   out of an existing colormap.)
-
-   The properties containing the XStandardColormap information
-   have the type RGB_COLOR_MAP.
-
-   The remainder of this section discusses standard colormap
-   properties and atoms as well as how to manipulate standard
-   colormaps.
-
-Standard Colormap Properties and Atoms
-
-   Several standard colormaps are available. Each standard
-   colormap is defined by a property, and each such property is
-   identified by an atom. The following list names the atoms and
-   describes the colormap associated with each one. The
-   <X11/Xatom.h> header file contains the definitions for each of
-   the following atoms, which are prefixed with XA_.
-
-   RGB_DEFAULT_MAP
-
-   This atom names a property. The value of the property is an
-   array of XStandardColormap structures. Each entry in the array
-   describes an RGB subset of the default color map for the Visual
-   specified by visual_id.
-
-   Some applications only need a few RGB colors and may be able to
-   allocate them from the system default colormap. This is the
-   ideal situation because the fewer colormaps that are active in
-   the system the more applications are displayed with correct
-   colors at all times.
-
-   A typical allocation for the RGB_DEFAULT_MAP on 8-plane
-   displays is 6 reds, 6 greens, and 6 blues. This gives 216
-   uniformly distributed colors (6 intensities of 36 different
-   hues) and still leaves 40 elements of a 256-element colormap
-   available for special-purpose colors for text, borders, and so
-   on.
-
-   RGB_BEST_MAP
-
-   This atom names a property. The value of the property is an
-   XStandardColormap.
-
-   The property defines the best RGB colormap available on the
-   screen. (Of course, this is a subjective evaluation.) Many
-   image processing and three-dimensional applications need to use
-   all available colormap cells and to distribute as many
-   perceptually distinct colors as possible over those cells. This
-   implies that there may be more green values available than red,
-   as well as more green or red than blue.
-
-   For an 8-plane PseudoColor visual, RGB_BEST_MAP is likely to be
-   a 3/3/2 allocation. For a 24-plane DirectColor visual,
-   RGB_BEST_MAP is normally an 8/8/8 allocation.
-
-   RGB_RED_MAP,RGB_GREEN_MAP,RGB_BLUE_MAP
-
-   These atoms name properties. The value of each property is an
-   XStandardColormap.
-
-   The properties define all-red, all-green, and all-blue
-   colormaps, respectively. These maps are used by applications
-   that want to make color-separated images. For example, a user
-   might generate a full-color image on an 8-plane display both by
-   rendering an image three times (once with high color resolution
-   in red, once with green, and once with blue) and by multiply
-   exposing a single frame in a camera.
-
-   RGB_GRAY_MAP
-
-   This atom names a property. The value of the property is an
-   XStandardColormap.
-
-   The property describes the best GrayScale colormap available on
-   the screen. As previously mentioned, only the colormap,
-   red_max, red_mult, and base_pixel members of the
-   XStandardColormap structure are used for GrayScale colormaps.
-
-Setting and Obtaining Standard Colormaps
-
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to set and obtain an
-   XStandardColormap structure.
-
-   To set an XStandardColormap structure, use XSetRGBColormaps.
-
-   void XSetRGBColormaps(Display *display, Window w,
-   XStandardColormap *std_colormap, int count, Atom property);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   std_colormap
-
-   Specifies the XStandardColormap structure to be used.
-
-   count
-
-   Specifies the number of colormaps.
-
-   property
-
-   Specifies the property name.
-
-   The XSetRGBColormaps function replaces the RGB colormap
-   definition in the specified property on the named window. If
-   the property does not already exist, XSetRGBColormaps sets the
-   RGB colormap definition in the specified property on the named
-   window. The property is stored with a type of RGB_COLOR_MAP and
-   a format of 32. Note that it is the caller's responsibility to
-   honor the ICCCM restriction that only RGB_DEFAULT_MAP contain
-   more than one definition.
-
-   The XSetRGBColormaps function usually is only used by window or
-   session managers. To create a standard colormap, follow this
-   procedure:
-     * Open a new connection to the same server.
-     * Grab the server.
-     * See if the property is on the property list of the root
-       window for the screen.
-     * If the desired property is not present:
-     * Create a colormap (unless you are using the default
-       colormap of the screen).
-     * Determine the color characteristics of the visual.
-     * Allocate cells in the colormap (or create it with
-       AllocAll).
-     * Call XStoreColors to store appropriate color values in the
-       colormap.
-     * Fill in the descriptive members in the XStandardColormap
-       structure.
-     * Attach the property to the root window.
-     * Use XSetCloseDownMode to make the resource permanent.
-     * Ungrab the server.
-
-   XSetRGBColormaps can generate BadAlloc, BadAtom, and BadWindow
-   errors.
-
-   To obtain the XStandardColormap structure associated with the
-   specified property, use XGetRGBColormaps.
-
-   Status XGetRGBColormaps(Display *display, Window w,
-   XStandardColormap **std_colormap_return, int *count_return,
-   Atom property);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   std_colormap_return
-
-   Returns the XStandardColormap structure.
-
-   count_return
-
-   Returns the number of colormaps.
-
-   property
-
-   Specifies the property name.
-
-   The XGetRGBColormaps function returns the RGB colormap
-   definitions stored in the specified property on the named
-   window. If the property exists, is of type RGB_COLOR_MAP, is of
-   format 32, and is long enough to contain a colormap definition,
-   XGetRGBColormaps allocates and fills in space for the returned
-   colormaps and returns a nonzero status. If the visualid is not
-   present, XGetRGBColormaps assumes the default visual for the
-   screen on which the window is located; if the killid is not
-   present, None is assumed, which indicates that the resources
-   cannot be released. Otherwise, none of the fields are set, and
-   XGetRGBColormaps returns a zero status. Note that it is the
-   caller's responsibility to honor the ICCCM restriction that
-   only RGB_DEFAULT_MAP contain more than one definition.
-
-   XGetRGBColormaps can generate BadAtom and BadWindow errors.
-
-Chapter 15. Resource Manager Functions
-
-   Table of Contents
-
-   Resource File Syntax
-   Resource Manager Matching Rules
-   Quarks
-   Creating and Storing Databases
-   Merging Resource Databases
-   Looking Up Resources
-   Storing into a Resource Database
-   Enumerating Database Entries
-   Parsing Command Line Options
-
-   A program often needs a variety of options in the X environment
-   (for example, fonts, colors, icons, and cursors). Specifying
-   all of these options on the command line is awkward because
-   users may want to customize many aspects of the program and
-   need a convenient way to establish these customizations as the
-   default settings. The resource manager is provided for this
-   purpose. Resource specifications are usually stored in
-   human-readable files and in server properties.
-
-   The resource manager is a database manager with a twist. In
-   most database systems, you perform a query using an imprecise
-   specification, and you get back a set of records. The resource
-   manager, however, allows you to specify a large set of values
-   with an imprecise specification, to query the database with a
-   precise specification, and to get back only a single value.
-   This should be used by applications that need to know what the
-   user prefers for colors, fonts, and other resources. It is this
-   use as a database for dealing with X resources that inspired
-   the name "Resource Manager," although the resource manager can
-   be and is used in other ways.
-
-   For example, a user of your application may want to specify
-   that all windows should have a blue background but that all
-   mail-reading windows should have a red background. With
-   well-engineered and coordinated applications, a user can define
-   this information using only two lines of specifications.
-
-   As an example of how the resource manager works, consider a
-   mail-reading application called xmh. Assume that it is designed
-   so that it uses a complex window hierarchy all the way down to
-   individual command buttons, which may be actual small
-   subwindows in some toolkits. These are often called objects or
-   widgets. In such toolkit systems, each user interface object
-   can be composed of other objects and can be assigned a name and
-   a class. Fully qualified names or classes can have arbitrary
-   numbers of component names, but a fully qualified name always
-   has the same number of component names as a fully qualified
-   class. This generally reflects the structure of the application
-   as composed of these objects, starting with the application
-   itself.
-
-   For example, the xmh mail program has a name "xmh" and is one
-   of a class of "Mail" programs. By convention, the first
-   character of class components is capitalized, and the first
-   letter of name components is in lowercase. Each name and class
-   finally has an attribute (for example, "foreground" or "font").
-   If each window is properly assigned a name and class, it is
-   easy for the user to specify attributes of any portion of the
-   application.
-
-   At the top level, the application might consist of a paned
-   window (that is, a window divided into several sections) named
-   "toc". One pane of the paned window is a button box window
-   named "buttons" and is filled with command buttons. One of
-   these command buttons is used to incorporate new mail and has
-   the name "incorporate". This window has a fully qualified name,
-   "xmh.toc.buttons.incorporate", and a fully qualified class,
-   "Xmh.Paned.Box.Command". Its fully qualified name is the name
-   of its parent, "xmh.toc.buttons", followed by its name,
-   "incorporate". Its class is the class of its parent,
-   "Xmh.Paned.Box", followed by its particular class, "Command".
-   The fully qualified name of a resource is the attribute's name
-   appended to the object's fully qualified name, and the fully
-   qualified class is its class appended to the object's class.
-
-   The incorporate button might need the following resources:
-   Title string, Font, Foreground color for its inactive state,
-   Background color for its inactive state, Foreground color for
-   its active state, and Background color for its active state.
-   Each resource is considered to be an attribute of the button
-   and, as such, has a name and a class. For example, the
-   foreground color for the button in its active state might be
-   named "activeForeground", and its class might be "Foreground".
-
-   When an application looks up a resource (for example, a color),
-   it passes the complete name and complete class of the resource
-   to a look-up routine. The resource manager compares this
-   complete specification against the incomplete specifications of
-   entries in the resource database, finds the best match, and
-   returns the corresponding value for that entry.
-
-   The definitions for the resource manager are contained in
-   <X11/Xresource.h>.
-
-Resource File Syntax
-
-   The syntax of a resource file is a sequence of resource lines
-   terminated by newline characters or the end of the file. The
-   syntax of an individual resource line is:
-
-
-
-ResourceLine     =     Comment | IncludeFile | ResourceSpec | <empty lin
-e>
-Comment     =     "!" {<any character except null or newline>}
-IncludeFile     =     "#" WhiteSpace "include" WhiteSpace FileName White
-Space
-FileName     =     <valid filename for operating system>
-ResourceSpec     =     WhiteSpace ResourceName WhiteSpace ":" WhiteSpace
- Value
-ResourceName     =     [Binding] {Component Binding} ComponentName
-Binding     =     "." | "*"
-WhiteSpace     =     {<space> | <horizontal tab>}
-Component     =     "?" | ComponentName
-ComponentName     =     NameChar {NameChar}
-NameChar     =     "a"-"z" | "A"-"Z" | "0"-"9" | "_" | "-"
-Value     =     {<any character except null or unescaped newline>}
-
-   Elements separated by vertical bar (|) are alternatives. Curly
-   braces ({......}) indicate zero or more repetitions of the
-   enclosed elements. Square brackets ([......]) indicate that the
-   enclosed element is optional. Quotes ("......") are used around
-   literal characters.
-
-   IncludeFile lines are interpreted by replacing the line with
-   the contents of the specified file. The word "include" must be
-   in lowercase. The file name is interpreted relative to the
-   directory of the file in which the line occurs (for example, if
-   the file name contains no directory or contains a relative
-   directory specification).
-
-   If a ResourceName contains a contiguous sequence of two or more
-   Binding characters, the sequence will be replaced with a single
-   ".." character if the sequence contains only ".." characters;
-   otherwise, the sequence will be replaced with a single "*"
-   character.
-
-   A resource database never contains more than one entry for a
-   given ResourceName. If a resource file contains multiple lines
-   with the same ResourceName, the last line in the file is used.
-
-   Any white space characters before or after the name or colon in
-   a ResourceSpec are ignored. To allow a Value to begin with
-   white space, the two-character sequence "\\space" (backslash
-   followed by space) is recognized and replaced by a space
-   character, and the two-character sequence "\\tab" (backslash
-   followed by horizontal tab) is recognized and replaced by a
-   horizontal tab character. To allow a Value to contain embedded
-   newline characters, the two-character sequence "\\n" is
-   recognized and replaced by a newline character. To allow a
-   Value to be broken across multiple lines in a text file, the
-   two-character sequence "\\newline" (backslash followed by
-   newline) is recognized and removed from the value. To allow a
-   Value to contain arbitrary character codes, the four-character
-   sequence "\\nnn", where each n is a digit character in the
-   range of "0"-"7", is recognized and replaced with a single byte
-   that contains the octal value specified by the sequence.
-   Finally, the two-character sequence "\newline" is recognized
-   and replaced with a single backslash.
-
-   As an example of these sequences, the following resource line
-   contains a value consisting of four characters: a backslash, a
-   null, a "z", and a newline:
-magic.values: \\000\
-z\n
-
-Resource Manager Matching Rules
-
-   The algorithm for determining which resource database entry
-   matches a given query is the heart of the resource manager. All
-   queries must fully specify the name and class of the desired
-   resource (use of the characters "*" and "?" is not permitted).
-   The library supports up to 100 components in a full name or
-   class. Resources are stored in the database with only partially
-   specified names and classes, using pattern matching constructs.
-   An asterisk (*) is a loose binding and is used to represent any
-   number of intervening components, including none. A period (.)
-   is a tight binding and is used to separate immediately adjacent
-   components. A question mark (?) is used to match any single
-   component name or class. A database entry cannot end in a loose
-   binding; the final component (which cannot be the character
-   "?") must be specified. The lookup algorithm searches the
-   database for the entry that most closely matches (is most
-   specific for) the full name and class being queried. When more
-   than one database entry matches the full name and class,
-   precedence rules are used to select just one.
-
-   The full name and class are scanned from left to right (from
-   highest level in the hierarchy to lowest), one component at a
-   time. At each level, the corresponding component and/or binding
-   of each matching entry is determined, and these matching
-   components and bindings are compared according to precedence
-   rules. Each of the rules is applied at each level before moving
-   to the next level, until a rule selects a single entry over all
-   others. The rules, in order of precedence, are:
-     * An entry that contains a matching component (whether name,
-       class, or the character "?") takes precedence over entries
-       that elide the level (that is, entries that match the level
-       in a loose binding).
-     * An entry with a matching name takes precedence over both
-       entries with a matching class and entries that match using
-       the character "?". An entry with a matching class takes
-       precedence over entries that match using the character "?".
-     * An entry preceded by a tight binding takes precedence over
-       entries preceded by a loose binding.
-
-   To illustrate these rules, consider the following resource
-   database entries:
-
-
-xmh*Paned*activeForeground:     red     (entry A)
-*incorporate.Foreground:     blue     (entry B)
-xmh.toc*Command*activeForeground:     green     (entry C)
-xmh.toc*?.Foreground:     white     (entry D)
-xmh.toc*Command.activeForeground:     black     (entry E)
-
-   Consider a query for the resource:
-
-
-
-xmh.toc.messagefunctions.incorporate.activeForeground     (name)
-Xmh.Paned.Box.Command.Foreground     (class)
-
-   At the first level (xmh, Xmh), rule 1 eliminates entry B. At
-   the second level (toc, Paned), rule 2 eliminates entry A. At
-   the third level (messagefunctions, Box), no entries are
-   eliminated. At the fourth level (incorporate, Command), rule 2
-   eliminates entry D. At the fifth level (activeForeground,
-   Foreground), rule 3 eliminates entry C.
-
-Quarks
-
-   Most uses of the resource manager involve defining names,
-   classes, and representation types as string constants. However,
-   always referring to strings in the resource manager can be
-   slow, because it is so heavily used in some toolkits. To solve
-   this problem, a shorthand for a string is used in place of the
-   string in many of the resource manager functions. Simple
-   comparisons can be performed rather than string comparisons.
-   The shorthand name for a string is called a quark and is the
-   type XrmQuark. On some occasions, you may want to allocate a
-   quark that has no string equivalent.
-
-   A quark is to a string what an atom is to a string in the
-   server, but its use is entirely local to your application.
-
-   To allocate a new quark, use XrmUniqueQuark.
-
-   XrmQuark XrmUniqueQuark(void);
-
-   The XrmUniqueQuark function allocates a quark that is
-   guaranteed not to represent any string that is known to the
-   resource manager.
-
-   Each name, class, and representation type is typedef'd as an
-   XrmQuark.
-
-typedef int XrmQuark, *XrmQuarkList;
-typedef XrmQuark XrmName;
-typedef XrmQuark XrmClass;
-typedef XrmQuark XrmRepresentation;
-#define NULLQUARK ((XrmQuark) 0)
-
-   Lists are represented as null-terminated arrays of quarks. The
-   size of the array must be large enough for the number of
-   components used.
-
-typedef XrmQuarkList XrmNameList;
-typedef XrmQuarkList XrmClassList;
-
-   To convert a string to a quark, use XrmStringToQuark or
-   XrmPermStringToQuark.
-#define XrmStringToName(string) XrmStringToQuark(string)
-#define XrmStringToClass(string) XrmStringToQuark(string)
-#define XrmStringToRepresentation(string) XrmStringToQuark(string)
-
-   XrmQuark XrmStringToQuark(char *string);
-
-   string
-
-   Specifies the string for which a quark(Ql is to be allocated.
-
-   These functions can be used to convert from string to quark
-   representation. If the string is not in the Host Portable
-   Character Encoding, the conversion is implementation-dependent.
-   The string argument to XrmStringToQuark need not be permanently
-   allocated storage. XrmPermStringToQuark is just like
-   XrmStringToQuark, except that Xlib is permitted to assume the
-   string argument is permanently allocated, and, hence, that it
-   can be used as the value to be returned by XrmQuarkToString.
-
-   For any given quark, if XrmStringToQuark returns a non-NULL
-   value, all future calls will return the same value (identical
-   address).
-
-   To convert a quark to a string, use XrmQuarkToString.
-#define XrmNameToString(name)  XrmQuarkToString(name)
-#define XrmClassToString(class)  XrmQuarkToString(name)
-#define XrmRepresentationToString(type)  XrmQuarkToString(type)
-
-   char *XrmQuarkToString(XrmQuark quark);
-
-   quark
-
-   Specifies the quark for which the equivalent string is desired.
-
-   These functions can be used to convert from quark
-   representation to string. The string pointed to by the return
-   value must not be modified or freed. The returned string is
-   byte-for-byte equal to the original string passed to one of the
-   string-to-quark routines. If no string exists for that quark,
-   XrmQuarkToString returns NULL. For any given quark, if
-   XrmQuarkToString returns a non-NULL value, all future calls
-   will return the same value (identical address).
-
-   To convert a string with one or more components to a quark
-   list, use XrmStringToQuarkList.
-#define XrmStringToNameList(str,name)  XrmStringToQuarkList((str), (name
-))
-#define XrmStringToClassList(str,class)  XrmStringToQuarkList((str), (cl
-ass))
-
-   void XrmStringToQuarkList(char *string, XrmQuarkList
-   quarks_return);
-
-   string
-
-   Specifies the string for which a quark list is to be allocated.
-
-   quarks_return
-
-   Returns the list of quarks. The caller must allocate sufficient
-   space for the quarks list before calling XrmStringToQuarkList.
-
-   The XrmStringToQuarkList function converts the null-terminated
-   string (generally a fully qualified name) to a list of quarks.
-   Note that the string must be in the valid ResourceName format
-   (see section 15.1). If the string is not in the Host Portable
-   Character Encoding, the conversion is implementation-dependent.
-
-   A binding list is a list of type XrmBindingList and indicates
-   if components of name or class lists are bound tightly or
-   loosely (that is, if wildcarding of intermediate components is
-   specified).
-
-typedef enum {XrmBindTightly, XrmBindLoosely} XrmBinding, *XrmBindingLis
-t;
-
-   XrmBindTightly indicates that a period separates the
-   components, and XrmBindLoosely indicates that an asterisk
-   separates the components.
-
-   To convert a string with one or more components to a binding
-   list and a quark list, use XrmStringToBindingQuarkList.
-
-   XrmStringToBindingQuarkList(char *string, XrmBindingList
-   bindings_return, XrmQuarkList quarks_return);
-
-   string
-
-   Specifies the string for which a quark list is to be allocated.
-
-   bindings_return
-
-   Returns the binding list. The caller must allocate sufficient
-   space for the binding list before calling
-   XrmStringToBindingQuarkList.
-
-   quarks_return
-
-   Returns the list of quarks. The caller must allocate sufficient
-   space for the quarks list before calling
-   XrmStringToBindingQuarkList.
-
-   Component names in the list are separated by a period or an
-   asterisk character. The string must be in the format of a valid
-   ResourceName (see section 15.1). If the string does not start
-   with a period or an asterisk, a tight binding is assumed. For
-   example, the string ``*a.b*c'' becomes:
-
-
-
-quarks:       a         b         c
-bindings:     loose     tight     loose
-
-Creating and Storing Databases
-
-   A resource database is an opaque type, XrmDatabase. Each
-   database value is stored in an XrmValue structure. This
-   structure consists of a size, an address, and a representation
-   type. The size is specified in bytes. The representation type
-   is a way for you to store data tagged by some
-   application-defined type (for example, the strings ``font'' or
-   ``color''). It has nothing to do with the C data type or with
-   its class. The XrmValue structure is defined as:
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     unsigned int size;
-     XPointer addr;
-} XrmValue, *XrmValuePtr;
-
-   To initialize the resource manager, use XrmInitialize.
-
-   void XrmInitialize(void XrmInitialize(\|));
-
-   To retrieve a database from disk, use XrmGetFileDatabase.
-
-   XrmDatabase XrmGetFileDatabase(char *filename);
-
-   filename
-
-   Specifies the resource database file name.
-
-   The XrmGetFileDatabase function opens the specified file,
-   creates a new resource database, and loads it with the
-   specifications read in from the specified file. The specified
-   file should contain a sequence of entries in valid ResourceLine
-   format (see section 15.1); the database that results from
-   reading a file with incorrect syntax is
-   implementation-dependent. The file is parsed in the current
-   locale, and the database is created in the current locale. If
-   it cannot open the specified file, XrmGetFileDatabase returns
-   NULL.
-
-   To store a copy of a database to disk, use XrmPutFileDatabase.
-
-   void XrmPutFileDatabase(XrmDatabase database, char *stored_db);
-
-   database
-
-   Specifies the database that is to be used.
-
-   stored_db
-
-   Specifies the file name for the stored database.
-
-   The XrmPutFileDatabase function stores a copy of the specified
-   database in the specified file. Text is written to the file as
-   a sequence of entries in valid ResourceLine format (see section
-   15.1). The file is written in the locale of the database.
-   Entries containing resource names that are not in the Host
-   Portable Character Encoding or containing values that are not
-   in the encoding of the database locale, are written in an
-   implementation-dependent manner. The order in which entries are
-   written is implementation-dependent. Entries with
-   representation types other than ``String'' are ignored.
-
-   To obtain a pointer to the screen-independent resources of a
-   display, use XResourceManagerString.
-
-   char *XResourceManagerString(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   The XResourceManagerString function returns the
-   RESOURCE_MANAGER property from the server's root window of
-   screen zero, which was returned when the connection was opened
-   using XOpenDisplay. The property is converted from type STRING
-   to the current locale. The conversion is identical to that
-   produced by XmbTextPropertyToTextList for a single element
-   STRING property. The returned string is owned by Xlib and
-   should not be freed by the client. The property value must be
-   in a format that is acceptable to XrmGetStringDatabase. If no
-   property exists, NULL is returned.
-
-   To obtain a pointer to the screen-specific resources of a
-   screen, use XScreenResourceString.
-
-   char *XScreenResourceString(Screen *screen);
-
-   screen
-
-   Specifies the screen.
-
-   The XScreenResourceString function returns the SCREEN_RESOURCES
-   property from the root window of the specified screen. The
-   property is converted from type STRING to the current locale.
-   The conversion is identical to that produced by
-   XmbTextPropertyToTextList for a single element STRING property.
-   The property value must be in a format that is acceptable to
-   XrmGetStringDatabase. If no property exists, NULL is returned.
-   The caller is responsible for freeing the returned string by
-   using XFree.
-
-   To create a database from a string, use XrmGetStringDatabase.
-
-   XrmDatabase XrmGetStringDatabase(char *data);
-
-   data
-
-   Specifies the database contents using a string.
-
-   The XrmGetStringDatabase function creates a new database and
-   stores the resources specified in the specified null-terminated
-   string. XrmGetStringDatabase is similar to XrmGetFileDatabase
-   except that it reads the information out of a string instead of
-   out of a file. The string should contain a sequence of entries
-   in valid ResourceLine format (see section 15.1) terminated by a
-   null character; the database that results from using a string
-   with incorrect syntax is implementation-dependent. The string
-   is parsed in the current locale, and the database is created in
-   the current locale.
-
-   To obtain the locale name of a database, use
-   XrmLocaleOfDatabase.
-
-   char *XrmLocaleOfDatabase(XrmDatabase database);
-
-   database
-
-   Specifies the resource database.
-
-   The XrmLocaleOfDatabase function returns the name of the locale
-   bound to the specified database, as a null-terminated string.
-   The returned locale name string is owned by Xlib and should not
-   be modified or freed by the client. Xlib is not permitted to
-   free the string until the database is destroyed. Until the
-   string is freed, it will not be modified by Xlib.
-
-   To destroy a resource database and free its allocated memory,
-   use XrmDestroyDatabase.
-
-   void XrmDestroyDatabase(XrmDatabase database);
-
-   database
-
-   Specifies the resource database.
-
-   If database is NULL, XrmDestroyDatabase returns immediately.
-
-   To associate a resource database with a display, use
-   XrmSetDatabase.
-
-   void XrmSetDatabase(Display *display, XrmDatabase database);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   database
-
-   Specifies the resource database.
-
-   The XrmSetDatabase function associates the specified resource
-   database (or NULL) with the specified display. The database
-   previously associated with the display (if any) is not
-   destroyed. A client or toolkit may find this function
-   convenient for retaining a database once it is constructed.
-
-   To get the resource database associated with a display, use
-   XrmGetDatabase.
-
-   XrmDatabase XrmGetDatabase(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   The XrmGetDatabase function returns the database associated
-   with the specified display. It returns NULL if a database has
-   not yet been set.
-
-Merging Resource Databases
-
-   To merge the contents of a resource file into a database, use
-   XrmCombineFileDatabase.
-
-   Status XrmCombineFileDatabase(char *filename, XrmDatabase
-   *target_db, Bool override);
-
-   filename
-
-   Specifies the resource database file name.
-
-   target_db
-
-   Specifies the resource database into which the source database
-   is to be merged.
-
-   override
-
-   Specifies whether source entries override target ones.
-
-   The XrmCombineFileDatabase function merges the contents of a
-   resource file into a database. If the same specifier is used
-   for an entry in both the file and the database, the entry in
-   the file will replace the entry in the database if override is
-   True; otherwise, the entry in the file is discarded. The file
-   is parsed in the current locale. If the file cannot be read, a
-   zero status is returned; otherwise, a nonzero status is
-   returned. If target_db contains NULL, XrmCombineFileDatabase
-   creates and returns a new database to it. Otherwise, the
-   database pointed to by target_db is not destroyed by the merge.
-   The database entries are merged without changing values or
-   types, regardless of the locale of the database. The locale of
-   the target database is not modified.
-
-   To merge the contents of one database into another database,
-   use XrmCombineDatabase.
-
-   void XrmCombineDatabase(XrmDatabase source_db, XrmDatabase
-   *target_db, Bool override);
-
-   source_db
-
-   Specifies the resource database that is to be merged into the
-   target database.
-
-   target_db
-
-   Specifies the resource database into which the source database
-   is to be merged.
-
-   override
-
-   Specifies whether source entries override target ones.
-
-   The XrmCombineDatabase function merges the contents of one
-   database into another. If the same specifier is used for an
-   entry in both databases, the entry in the source_db will
-   replace the entry in the target_db if override is True;
-   otherwise, the entry in source_db is discarded. If target_db
-   contains NULL, XrmCombineDatabase simply stores source_db in
-   it. Otherwise, source_db is destroyed by the merge, but the
-   database pointed to by target_db is not destroyed. The database
-   entries are merged without changing values or types, regardless
-   of the locales of the databases. The locale of the target
-   database is not modified.
-
-   To merge the contents of one database into another database
-   with override semantics, use XrmMergeDatabases.
-
-   void XrmMergeDatabases(XrmDatabase source_db, XrmDatabase
-   *target_db);
-
-   source_db
-
-   Specifies the resource database that is to be merged into the
-   target database.
-
-   target_db
-
-   Specifies the resource database into which the source database
-   is to be merged.
-
-   Calling the XrmMergeDatabases function is equivalent to calling
-   the XrmCombineDatabase function with an override argument of
-   True.
-
-Looking Up Resources
-
-   To retrieve a resource from a resource database, use
-   XrmGetResource, XrmQGetResource, or XrmQGetSearchResource.
-
-   Bool XrmGetResource(XrmDatabase database, char *str_name, char
-   *str_class, char **str_type_return, XrmValue *value_return);
-
-   database
-
-   Specifies the database that is to be used.
-
-   str_name
-
-   Specifies the fully qualified name of the value being retrieved
-   (as a string).
-
-   str_class
-
-   Specifies the fully qualified class of the value being
-   retrieved (as a string).
-
-   str_type_return
-
-   Returns the representation type of the destination (as a
-   string).
-
-   value_return
-
-   Returns the value in the database.
-
-   Bool XrmQGetResource(XrmDatabase database, XrmNameList
-   quark_name, XrmClassList quark_class, XrmRepresentation
-   *quark_type_return, XrmValue *value_return);
-
-   database
-
-   Specifies the database that is to be used.
-
-   quark_name
-
-   Specifies the fully qualified name of the value being retrieved
-   (as a quark).
-
-   quark_class
-
-   Specifies the fully qualified class of the value being
-   retrieved (as a quark).
-
-   quark_type_return
-
-   Returns the representation type of the destination (as a
-   quark).
-
-   value_return
-
-   Returns the value in the database.
-
-   The XrmGetResource and XrmQGetResource functions retrieve a
-   resource from the specified database. Both take a fully
-   qualified name/class pair, a destination resource
-   representation, and the address of a value (size/address pair).
-   The value and returned type point into database memory;
-   therefore, you must not modify the data.
-
-   The database only frees or overwrites entries on
-   XrmPutResource, XrmQPutResource, or XrmMergeDatabases. A client
-   that is not storing new values into the database or is not
-   merging the database should be safe using the address passed
-   back at any time until it exits. If a resource was found, both
-   XrmGetResource and XrmQGetResource return True; otherwise, they
-   return False.
-
-   Most applications and toolkits do not make random probes into a
-   resource database to fetch resources. The X toolkit access
-   pattern for a resource database is quite stylized. A series of
-   from 1 to 20 probes is made with only the last name/class
-   differing in each probe. The XrmGetResource function is at
-   worst a 2^n algorithm, where n is the length of the name/class
-   list. This can be improved upon by the application programmer
-   by prefetching a list of database levels that might match the
-   first part of a name/class list.
-
-   To obtain a list of database levels, use XrmQGetSearchList.
-
-   Bool XrmQGetSearchResource(XrmDatabase database, XrmNameList
-   names, XrmClassList classes, XrmSearchList list_return, int
-   list_length);
-
-   database
-
-   Specifies the database that is to be used.
-
-   names
-
-   Specifies a list of resource names.
-
-   classes
-
-   Specifies a list of resource classes.
-
-   list_return
-
-   Returns a search list for further use. The caller must allocate
-   sufficient space for the list before calling XrmQGetSearchList.
-
-   list_length
-
-   Specifies the number of entries (not the byte size) allocated
-   for list_return.
-
-   The XrmQGetSearchList function takes a list of names and
-   classes and returns a list of database levels where a match
-   might occur. The returned list is in best-to-worst order and
-   uses the same algorithm as XrmGetResource for determining
-   precedence. If list_return was large enough for the search
-   list, XrmQGetSearchList returns True; otherwise, it returns
-   False.
-
-   The size of the search list that the caller must allocate is
-   dependent upon the number of levels and wildcards in the
-   resource specifiers that are stored in the database. The worst
-   case length is 3^n, where n is the number of name or class
-   components in names or classes.
-
-   When using XrmQGetSearchList followed by multiple probes for
-   resources with a common name and class prefix, only the common
-   prefix should be specified in the name and class list to
-   XrmQGetSearchList.
-
-   To search resource database levels for a given resource, use
-   XrmQGetSearchResource.
-
-   Bool XrmQGetSearchResource(XrmSearchList list, XrmName name,
-   XrmClass class, XrmRepresentation *type_return, XrmValue
-   *value_return);
-
-   list
-
-   Specifies the search list returned by XrmQGetSearchList.
-
-   name
-
-   Specifies the resource name.
-
-   class
-
-   Specifies the resource class.
-
-   type_return
-
-   Returns data representation type.
-
-   value_return
-
-   Returns the value in the database.
-
-   The XrmQGetSearchResource function searches the specified
-   database levels for the resource that is fully identified by
-   the specified name and class. The search stops with the first
-   match. XrmQGetSearchResource returns True if the resource was
-   found; otherwise, it returns False.
-
-   A call to XrmQGetSearchList with a name and class list
-   containing all but the last component of a resource name
-   followed by a call to XrmQGetSearchResource with the last
-   component name and class returns the same database entry as
-   XrmGetResource and XrmQGetResource with the fully qualified
-   name and class.
-
-Storing into a Resource Database
-
-   To store resources into the database, use XrmPutResource or
-   XrmQPutResource. Both functions take a partial resource
-   specification, a representation type, and a value. This value
-   is copied into the specified database.
-
-   void XrmPutResource(XrmDatabase *database, char *specifier,
-   char *type, XrmValue *value);
-
-   database
-
-   Specifies the resource database.
-
-   specifier
-
-   Specifies a complete or partial specification of the resource.
-
-   type
-
-   Specifies the type of the resource.
-
-   value
-
-   Specifies the value of the resource, which is specified as a
-   string.
-
-   If database contains NULL, XrmPutResource creates a new
-   database and returns a pointer to it. XrmPutResource is a
-   convenience function that calls XrmStringToBindingQuarkList
-   followed by:
-
-XrmQPutResource(database, bindings, quarks, XrmStringToQuark(type), valu
-e)
-
-   If the specifier and type are not in the Host Portable
-   Character Encoding, the result is implementation-dependent. The
-   value is stored in the database without modification.
-
-   void XrmQPutResource(XrmDatabase *database, XrmBindingList
-   bindings, XrmQuarkList quarks, XrmRepresentation type, XrmValue
-   *value);
-
-   database
-
-   Specifies the resource database.
-
-   bindings
-
-   Specifies a list of bindings.
-
-   quarks
-
-   Specifies the complete or partial name or the class list of the
-   resource.
-
-   type
-
-   Specifies the type of the resource.
-
-   value
-
-   Specifies the value of the resource, which is specified as a
-   string.
-
-   If database contains NULL, XrmQPutResource creates a new
-   database and returns a pointer to it. If a resource entry with
-   the identical bindings and quarks already exists in the
-   database, the previous type and value are replaced by the new
-   specified type and value. The value is stored in the database
-   without modification.
-
-   To add a resource that is specified as a string, use
-   XrmPutStringResource.
-
-   void XrmPutStringResource(XrmDatabase *database, char
-   *specifier, char *value);
-
-   database
-
-   Specifies the resource database.
-
-   specifier
-
-   Specifies a complete or partial specification of the resource.
-
-   value
-
-   Specifies the value of the resource, which is specified as a
-   string.
-
-   If database contains NULL, XrmPutStringResource creates a new
-   database and returns a pointer to it. XrmPutStringResource adds
-   a resource with the specified value to the specified database.
-   XrmPutStringResource is a convenience function that first calls
-   XrmStringToBindingQuarkList on the specifier and then calls
-   XrmQPutResource, using a ``String'' representation type. If the
-   specifier is not in the Host Portable Character Encoding, the
-   result is implementation-dependent. The value is stored in the
-   database without modification.
-
-   To add a string resource using quarks as a specification, use
-   XrmQPutStringResource.
-
-   void XrmQPutStringResource(XrmDatabase *database,
-   XrmBindingList bindings, XrmQuarkList quarks, char *value);
-
-   database
-
-   Specifies the resource database.
-
-   bindings
-
-   Specifies a list of bindings.
-
-   quarks
-
-   Specifies the complete or partial name or the class list of the
-   resource.
-
-   value
-
-   Specifies the value of the resource, which is specified as a
-   string.
-
-   If database contains NULL, XrmQPutStringResource creates a new
-   database and returns a pointer to it. XrmQPutStringResource is
-   a convenience routine that constructs an XrmValue for the value
-   string (by calling strlen to compute the size) and then calls
-   XrmQPutResource, using a ``String'' representation type. The
-   value is stored in the database without modification.
-
-   To add a single resource entry that is specified as a string
-   that contains both a name and a value, use XrmPutLineResource.
-
-   void XrmPutLineResource(XrmDatabase *database, char *line);
-
-   database
-
-   Specifies the resource database.
-
-   line
-
-   Specifies the resource name and value pair as a single string.
-
-   If database contains NULL, XrmPutLineResource creates a new
-   database and returns a pointer to it. XrmPutLineResource adds a
-   single resource entry to the specified database. The line
-   should be in valid ResourceLine format (see section 15.1)
-   terminated by a newline or null character; the database that
-   results from using a string with incorrect syntax is
-   implementation-dependent. The string is parsed in the locale of
-   the database. If the ResourceName is not in the Host Portable
-   Character Encoding, the result is implementation-dependent.
-   Note that comment lines are not stored.
-
-Enumerating Database Entries
-
-   To enumerate the entries of a database, use
-   XrmEnumerateDatabase.
-#define       XrmEnumAllLevels       0
-#define       XrmEnumOneLevel        0
-
-   Bool XrmEnumerateDatabase(XrmDatabase database, XrmNameList
-   name_prefix, XrmClassList class_prefix, int mode, Bool
-   (*proc)(), XPointer arg);
-
-   database
-
-   Specifies the resource database.
-
-   name_prefix
-
-   Specifies the resource name prefix.
-
-   class_prefix
-
-   Specifies the resource class prefix.
-
-   mode
-
-   Specifies the number of levels to enumerate.
-
-   proc
-
-   Specifies the procedure that is to be called for each matching
-   entry.
-
-   arg
-
-   Specifies the user-supplied argument that will be passed to the
-   procedure.
-
-   The XrmEnumerateDatabase function calls the specified procedure
-   for each resource in the database that would match some
-   completion of the given name/class resource prefix. The order
-   in which resources are found is implementation-dependent. If
-   mode is XrmEnumOneLevel, a resource must match the given
-   name/class prefix with just a single name and class appended.
-   If mode is XrmEnumAllLevels, the resource must match the given
-   name/class prefix with one or more names and classes appended.
-   If the procedure returns True, the enumeration terminates and
-   the function returns True. If the procedure always returns
-   False, all matching resources are enumerated and the function
-   returns False.
-
-   The procedure is called with the following arguments:
-
-
-
-(*proc)(database, bindings, quarks, type, value, arg)
-     XrmDatabase *database;
-     XrmBindingList bindings;
-     XrmQuarkList quarks;
-     XrmRepresentation *type;
-     XrmValue *value;
-     XPointer arg;
-
-   The bindings and quarks lists are terminated by NULLQUARK. Note
-   that pointers to the database and type are passed, but these
-   values should not be modified.
-
-   The procedure must not modify the database. If Xlib has been
-   initialized for threads, the procedure is called with the
-   database locked and the result of a call by the procedure to
-   any Xlib function using the same database is not defined.
-
-Parsing Command Line Options
-
-   The XrmParseCommand function can be used to parse the command
-   line arguments to a program and modify a resource database with
-   selected entries from the command line.
-
-
-
-typedef enum {
-     XrmoptionNoArg,     /* Value is specified in XrmOptionDescRec.value
- */
-     XrmoptionIsArg,     /* Value is the option string itself */
-     XrmoptionStickyArg,     /* Value is characters immediately followin
-g option */
-     XrmoptionSepArg,     /* Value is next argument in argv */
-     XrmoptionResArg,     /* Resource and value in next argument in argv
- */
-     XrmoptionSkipArg,     /* Ignore this option and the next argument i
-n argv */
-     XrmoptionSkipLine,     /* Ignore this option and the rest of argv *
-/
-     XrmoptionSkipNArgs     /* Ignore this option and the next
-          \ \ \ XrmOptionDescRec.value arguments in argv */
-} XrmOptionKind;
-
-   Note that XrmoptionSkipArg is equivalent to XrmoptionSkipNArgs
-   with the XrmOptionDescRec.value field containing the value one.
-   Note also that the value zero for XrmoptionSkipNArgs indicates
-   that only the option itself is to be skipped.
-
-
-
-typedef struct {
-     char *option;     /* Option specification string in argv
-   */
-     char *specifier;     /* Binding and resource name (sans application
- name)    */
-     XrmOptionKind argKind;     /* Which style of option it is         *
-/
-     XPointer value;     /* Value to provide if XrmoptionNoArg or
-          \ \ \ XrmoptionSkipNArgs   */
-} XrmOptionDescRec, *XrmOptionDescList;
-
-   To load a resource database from a C command line, use
-   XrmParseCommand.
-
-   void XrmParseCommand(XrmDatabase *database, XrmOptionDescList
-   table, int table_count, char *name, int *argc_in_out, char
-   **argv_in_out);
-
-   database
-
-   Specifies the resource database.
-
-   table
-
-   Specifies the table of command line arguments to be parsed.
-
-   table_count
-
-   Specifies the number of entries in the table.
-
-   name
-
-   Specifies the application name.
-
-   argc_in_out
-
-   Specifies the number of arguments and returns the number of
-   remaining arguments.
-
-   argv_in_out
-
-   Specifies the command line arguments and returns the remaining
-   arguments.
-
-   The XrmParseCommand function parses an (argc, argv) pair
-   according to the specified option table, loads recognized
-   options into the specified database with type ``String,'' and
-   modifies the (argc, argv) pair to remove all recognized
-   options. If database contains NULL, XrmParseCommand creates a
-   new database and returns a pointer to it. Otherwise, entries
-   are added to the database specified. If a database is created,
-   it is created in the current locale.
-
-   The specified table is used to parse the command line.
-   Recognized options in the table are removed from argv, and
-   entries are added to the specified resource database in the
-   order they occur in argv. The table entries contain information
-   on the option string, the option name, the style of option, and
-   a value to provide if the option kind is XrmoptionNoArg. The
-   option names are compared byte-for-byte to arguments in argv,
-   independent of any locale. The resource values given in the
-   table are stored in the resource database without modification.
-   All resource database entries are created using a ``String''
-   representation type. The argc argument specifies the number of
-   arguments in argv and is set on return to the remaining number
-   of arguments that were not parsed. The name argument should be
-   the name of your application for use in building the database
-   entry. The name argument is prefixed to the resourceName in the
-   option table before storing a database entry. The name argument
-   is treated as a single component, even if it has embedded
-   periods. No separating (binding) character is inserted, so the
-   table must contain either a period (.) or an asterisk (*) as
-   the first character in each resourceName entry. To specify a
-   more completely qualified resource name, the resourceName entry
-   can contain multiple components. If the name argument and the
-   resourceNames are not in the Host Portable Character Encoding,
-   the result is implementation-dependent.
-
-   The following provides a sample option table:
-
-
-
-static XrmOptionDescRec opTable[] = {
-{"-background",     "*background",                 XrmoptionSepArg,    (
-XPointer) NULL},
-{"-bd",             "*borderColor",                XrmoptionSepArg,    (
-XPointer) NULL},
-{"-bg",             "*background",                 XrmoptionSepArg,    (
-XPointer) NULL},
-{"-borderwidth",    "*TopLevelShell.borderWidth",  XrmoptionSepArg,    (
-XPointer) NULL},
-{"-bordercolor",    "*borderColor",                XrmoptionSepArg,    (
-XPointer) NULL},
-{"-bw",             "*TopLevelShell.borderWidth",  XrmoptionSepArg,    (
-XPointer) NULL},
-{"-display",        ".display",                    XrmoptionSepArg,    (
-XPointer) NULL},
-{"-fg",             "*foreground",                 XrmoptionSepArg,    (
-XPointer) NULL},
-{"-fn",             "*font",                       XrmoptionSepArg,    (
-XPointer) NULL},
-{"-font",           "*font",                       XrmoptionSepArg,    (
-XPointer) NULL},
-{"-foreground",     "*foreground",                 XrmoptionSepArg,    (
-XPointer) NULL},
-{"-geometry",       ".TopLevelShell.geometry",     XrmoptionSepArg,    (
-XPointer) NULL},
-{"-iconic",         ".TopLevelShell.iconic",       XrmoptionNoArg,     (
-XPointer) "on"},
-{"-name",           ".name",                       XrmoptionSepArg,    (
-XPointer) NULL},
-{"-reverse",        "*reverseVideo",               XrmoptionNoArg,     (
-XPointer) "on"},
-{"-rv",             "*reverseVideo",               XrmoptionNoArg,     (
-XPointer) "on"},
-{"-synchronous",    "*synchronous",                XrmoptionNoArg,     (
-XPointer) "on"},
-{"-title",          ".TopLevelShell.title",        XrmoptionSepArg,    (
-XPointer) NULL},
-{"-xrm",            NULL,                          XrmoptionResArg,    (
-XPointer) NULL},
-};
-
-   In this table, if the -background (or -bg) option is used to
-   set background colors, the stored resource specifier matches
-   all resources of attribute background. If the -borderwidth
-   option is used, the stored resource specifier applies only to
-   border width attributes of class TopLevelShell (that is,
-   outer-most windows, including pop-up windows). If the -title
-   option is used to set a window name, only the topmost
-   application windows receive the resource.
-
-   When parsing the command line, any unique unambiguous
-   abbreviation for an option name in the table is considered a
-   match for the option. Note that uppercase and lowercase matter.
-
-Chapter 16. Application Utility Functions
-
-   Table of Contents
-
-   Using Keyboard Utility Functions
-
-        KeySym Classification Macros
-
-   Using Latin-1 Keyboard Event Functions
-   Allocating Permanent Storage
-   Parsing the Window Geometry
-   Manipulating Regions
-
-        Creating, Copying, or Destroying Regions
-        Moving or Shrinking Regions
-        Computing with Regions
-        Determining if Regions Are Empty or Equal
-        Locating a Point or a Rectangle in a Region
-
-   Using Cut Buffers
-   Determining the Appropriate Visual Type
-   Manipulating Images
-   Manipulating Bitmaps
-   Using the Context Manager
-
-   Once you have initialized the X system, you can use the Xlib
-   utility functions to:
-     * Use keyboard utility functions
-     * Use Latin-1 keyboard event functions
-     * Allocate permanent storage
-     * Parse the window geometry
-     * Manipulate regions
-     * Use cut buffers
-     * Determine the appropriate visual type
-     * Manipulate images
-     * Manipulate bitmaps
-     * Use the context manager
-
-   As a group, the functions discussed in this chapter provide the
-   functionality that is frequently needed and that spans
-   toolkits. Many of these functions do not generate actual
-   protocol requests to the server.
-
-Using Keyboard Utility Functions
-
-   This section discusses mapping between KeyCodes and KeySyms,
-   classifying KeySyms, and mapping between KeySyms and string
-   names. The first three functions in this section operate on a
-   cached copy of the server keyboard mapping. The first four
-   KeySyms for each KeyCode are modified according to the rules
-   given in section 12.7. To obtain the untransformed KeySyms
-   defined for a key, use the functions described in section 12.7.
-
-   To obtain a KeySym for the KeyCode of an event, use
-   XLookupKeysym.
-
-   KeySym XLookupKeysym(XKeyEvent *key_event, int index);
-
-   key_event
-
-   Specifies the KeyPress or KeyRelease event.
-
-   index
-
-   Specifies the index into the KeySyms list for the event's
-   KeyCode.
-
-   The XLookupKeysym function uses a given keyboard event and the
-   index you specified to return the KeySym from the list that
-   corresponds to the KeyCode member in the XKeyPressedEvent or
-   XKeyReleasedEvent structure. If no KeySym is defined for the
-   KeyCode of the event, XLookupKeysym returns NoSymbol.
-
-   To obtain a KeySym for a specific KeyCode, use
-   XKeycodeToKeysym.
-
-   KeySym XKeycodeToKeysym(Display *display, KeyCode keycode, int
-   index);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   keycode
-
-   Specifies the KeyCode.
-
-   index
-
-   Specifies the element of KeyCode vector.
-
-   The XKeycodeToKeysym function uses internal Xlib tables and
-   returns the KeySym defined for the specified KeyCode and the
-   element of the KeyCode vector. If no symbol is defined,
-   XKeycodeToKeysym returns NoSymbol.
-
-   To obtain a KeyCode for a key having a specific KeySym, use
-   XKeysymToKeycode.
-
-   KeyCode XKeysymToKeycode(Display *display, KeySym keysym);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   keysym
-
-   Specifies the KeySym that is to be searched for.
-
-   If the specified KeySym is not defined for any KeyCode,
-   XKeysymToKeycode returns zero.
-
-   The mapping between KeyCodes and KeySyms is cached internal to
-   Xlib. When this information is changed at the server, an Xlib
-   function must be called to refresh the cache. To refresh the
-   stored modifier and keymap information, use
-   XRefreshKeyboardMapping.
-
-   XRefreshKeyboardMapping(XMappingEvent *event_map);
-
-   event_map
-
-   Specifies the mapping event that is to be used.
-
-   The XRefreshKeyboardMapping function refreshes the stored
-   modifier and keymap information. You usually call this function
-   when a MappingNotify event with a request member of
-   MappingKeyboard or MappingModifier occurs. The result is to
-   update Xlib's knowledge of the keyboard.
-
-   To obtain the uppercase and lowercase forms of a KeySym, use
-   XConvertCase.
-
-   void XConvertCase(KeySym keysym, KeySym *lower_return, KeySym
-   *upper_return);
-
-   keysym
-
-   Specifies the KeySym that is to be converted.
-
-   lower_return
-
-   Returns the lowercase form of keysym, or keysym.
-
-   upper_return
-
-   Returns the uppercase form of keysym, or keysym.
-
-   The XConvertCase function returns the uppercase and lowercase
-   forms of the specified Keysym, if the KeySym is subject to case
-   conversion; otherwise, the specified KeySym is returned to both
-   lower_return and upper_return. Support for conversion of other
-   than Latin and Cyrillic KeySyms is implementation-dependent.
-
-   KeySyms have string names as well as numeric codes. To convert
-   the name of the KeySym to the KeySym code, use XStringToKeysym.
-
-   KeySym XStringToKeysym(char *string);
-
-   string
-
-   Specifies the name of the KeySym that is to be converted.
-
-   Standard KeySym names are obtained from <X11/keysymdef.h> by
-   removing the XK_ prefix from each name. KeySyms that are not
-   part of the Xlib standard also may be obtained with this
-   function. The set of KeySyms that are available in this manner
-   and the mechanisms by which Xlib obtains them is
-   implementation-dependent.
-
-   If the KeySym name is not in the Host Portable Character
-   Encoding, the result is implementation-dependent. If the
-   specified string does not match a valid KeySym, XStringToKeysym
-   returns NoSymbol.
-
-   To convert a KeySym code to the name of the KeySym, use
-   XKeysymToString.
-
-   char *XKeysymToString(KeySym keysym);
-
-   keysym
-
-   Specifies the KeySym that is to be converted.
-
-   The returned string is in a static area and must not be
-   modified. The returned string is in the Host Portable Character
-   Encoding. If the specified KeySym is not defined,
-   XKeysymToString returns a NULL.
-
-KeySym Classification Macros
-
-   You may want to test if a KeySym is, for example, on the keypad
-   or on one of the function keys. You can use KeySym macros to
-   perform the following tests.
-
-   IsCursorKey(keysym)
-
-   keysym
-
-   Specifies the KeySym that is to be tested.
-
-   Returns True if the specified KeySym is a cursor key.
-
-   IsFunctionKey(keysym)
-
-   keysym
-
-   Specifies the KeySym that is to be tested.
-
-   Returns True if the specified KeySym is a function key.
-
-   IsKeypadKey(keysym)
-
-   keysym
-
-   Specifies the KeySym that is to be tested.
-
-   Returns True if the specified KeySym is a standard keypad key.
-
-   IsPrivateKeypadKey(keysym)
-
-   keysym
-
-   Specifies the KeySym that is to be tested.
-
-   Returns True if the specified KeySym is a vendor-private keypad
-   key.
-
-   IsMiscFunctionKey(keysym)
-
-   keysym
-
-   Specifies the KeySym that is to be tested.
-
-   Returns True if the specified KeySym is a miscellaneous
-   function key.
-
-   IsModifierKey(keysym)
-
-   keysym
-
-   Specifies the KeySym that is to be tested.
-
-   Returns True if the specified KeySym is a modifier key.
-
-   IsPFKey(keysym)
-
-   keysym
-
-   Specifies the KeySym that is to be tested.
-
-   Returns True if the specified KeySym is a PF key.
-
-Using Latin-1 Keyboard Event Functions
-
-   Chapter 13 describes internationalized text input facilities,
-   but sometimes it is expedient to write an application that only
-   deals with Latin-1 characters and ASCII controls, so Xlib
-   provides a simple function for that purpose. XLookupString
-   handles the standard modifier semantics described in section
-   12.7. This function does not use any of the input method
-   facilities described in chapter 13 and does not depend on the
-   current locale.
-
-   To map a key event to an ISO Latin-1 string, use XLookupString.
-
-   int XLookupString(XKeyEvent *event_struct, char *buffer_return,
-   int bytes_buffer, KeySym *keysym_return, XComposeStatus
-   *status_in_out);
-
-   event_struct
-
-   Specifies the key event structure to be used. You can pass
-   XKeyPressedEvent or XKeyReleasedEvent.
-
-   buffer_return
-
-   Returns the translated characters.
-
-   bytes_buffer
-
-   Specifies the length of the buffer. No more than bytes_buffer
-   of translation are returned.
-
-   keysym_return
-
-   Returns the KeySym computed from the event if this argument is
-   not NULL.
-
-   status_in_out
-
-   Specifies or returns the XComposeStatus structure or NULL.
-
-   The XLookupString function translates a key event to a KeySym
-   and a string. The KeySym is obtained by using the standard
-   interpretation of the Shift, Lock, group, and numlock modifiers
-   as defined in the X Protocol specification. If the KeySym has
-   been rebound (see XRebindKeysym), the bound string will be
-   stored in the buffer. Otherwise, the KeySym is mapped, if
-   possible, to an ISO Latin-1 character or (if the Control
-   modifier is on) to an ASCII control character, and that
-   character is stored in the buffer. XLookupString returns the
-   number of characters that are stored in the buffer.
-
-   If present (non-NULL), the XComposeStatus structure records the
-   state, which is private to Xlib, that needs preservation across
-   calls to XLookupString to implement compose processing. The
-   creation of XComposeStatus structures is
-   implementation-dependent; a portable program must pass NULL for
-   this argument.
-
-   XLookupString depends on the cached keyboard information
-   mentioned in the previous section, so it is necessary to use
-   XRefreshKeyboardMapping to keep this information up-to-date.
-
-   To rebind the meaning of a KeySym for XLookupString, use
-   XRebindKeysym.
-
-   XRebindKeysym(Display *display, KeySym keysym, KeySym list[],
-   int mod_count, unsignedchar *string, int num_bytes);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   keysym
-
-   Specifies the KeySym that is to be rebound.
-
-   list
-
-   Specifies the KeySyms to be used as modifiers.
-
-   mod_count
-
-   Specifies the number of modifiers in the modifier list.
-
-   string
-
-   Specifies the string that is copied and will be returned by
-   XLookupString.
-
-   num_bytes
-
-   Specifies the number of bytes in the string argument.
-
-   The XRebindKeysym function can be used to rebind the meaning of
-   a KeySym for the client. It does not redefine any key in the X
-   server but merely provides an easy way for long strings to be
-   attached to keys. XLookupString returns this string when the
-   appropriate set of modifier keys are pressed and when the
-   KeySym would have been used for the translation. No text
-   conversions are performed; the client is responsible for
-   supplying appropriately encoded strings. Note that you can
-   rebind a KeySym that may not exist.
-
-Allocating Permanent Storage
-
-   To allocate some memory you will never give back, use
-   Xpermalloc.
-
-   char *Xpermalloc(unsigned int size);
-
-   The Xpermalloc function allocates storage that can never be
-   freed for the life of the program. The memory is allocated with
-   alignment for the C type double. This function may provide some
-   performance and space savings over the standard operating
-   system memory allocator.
-
-Parsing the Window Geometry
-
-   To parse standard window geometry strings, use XParseGeometry.
-
-   int XParseGeometry(char *parsestring, int *x_return, int
-   *y_return, unsigned int *width_return, unsigned int
-   *height_return);
-
-   parsestring
-
-   Specifies the string you want to parse.
-
-   x_return
-
-   y_return
-
-   Return the x and y offsets.
-
-   width_return
-
-   height_return
-
-   Return the width and height determined.
-
-   By convention, X applications use a standard string to indicate
-   window size and placement. XParseGeometry makes it easier to
-   conform to this standard because it allows you to parse the
-   standard window geometry. Specifically, this function lets you
-   parse strings of the form:
-
-[=][<width>{xX}<height>][{+-}<xoffset>{+-}<yoffset>]
-
-   The fields map into the arguments associated with this
-   function. (Items enclosed in <> are integers, items in [] are
-   optional, and items enclosed in {} indicate ``choose one of.''
-   Note that the brackets should not appear in the actual string.)
-   If the string is not in the Host Portable Character Encoding,
-   the result is implementation-dependent.
-
-   The XParseGeometry function returns a bitmask that indicates
-   which of the four values (width, height, xoffset, and yoffset)
-   were actually found in the string and whether the x and y
-   values are negative. By convention, -0 is not equal to +0,
-   because the user needs to be able to say ``position the window
-   relative to the right or bottom edge.'' For each value found,
-   the corresponding argument is updated. For each value not
-   found, the argument is left unchanged. The bits are represented
-   by XValue, YValue, WidthValue, HeightValue, XNegative, or
-   YNegative and are defined in <X11/Xutil.h>. They will be set
-   whenever one of the values is defined or one of the signs is
-   set.
-
-   If the function returns either the XValue or YValue flag, you
-   should place the window at the requested position.
-
-   To construct a window's geometry information, use XWMGeometry.
-
-   int XWMGeometry(Display *display, int screen, char *user_geom,
-   char *def_geom, unsigned int bwidth, XSizeHints *hints, int
-   *x_return, int *y_return, int *width_return, int
-   *height_return, int *gravity_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   screen
-
-   Specifies the screen.
-
-   user_geom
-
-   Specifies the user-specified geometry or NULL.
-
-   def_geom
-
-   Specifies the application's default geometry or NULL.
-
-   bwidth
-
-   Specifies the border width.
-
-   hints
-
-   Specifies the size hints for the window in its normal state.
-
-   x_return
-
-   y_return
-
-   Return the x and y offsets.
-
-   width_return
-
-   height_return
-
-   Return the width and height determined.
-
-   gravity_return
-
-   Returns the window gravity.
-
-   The XWMGeometry function combines any geometry information
-   (given in the format used by XParseGeometry) specified by the
-   user and by the calling program with size hints (usually the
-   ones to be stored in WM_NORMAL_HINTS) and returns the position,
-   size, and gravity (NorthWestGravity, NorthEastGravity,
-   SouthEastGravity, or SouthWestGravity) that describe the
-   window. If the base size is not set in the XSizeHints
-   structure, the minimum size is used if set. Otherwise, a base
-   size of zero is assumed. If no minimum size is set in the hints
-   structure, the base size is used. A mask (in the form returned
-   by XParseGeometry) that describes which values came from the
-   user specification and whether or not the position coordinates
-   are relative to the right and bottom edges is returned. Note
-   that these coordinates will have already been accounted for in
-   the x_return and y_return values.
-
-   Note that invalid geometry specifications can cause a width or
-   height of zero to be returned. The caller may pass the address
-   of the hints win_gravity field as gravity_return to update the
-   hints directly.
-
-Manipulating Regions
-
-   Regions are arbitrary sets of pixel locations. Xlib provides
-   functions for manipulating regions. The opaque type Region is
-   defined in <X11/Xutil.h>. Xlib provides functions that you can
-   use to manipulate regions. This section discusses how to:
-     * Create, copy, or destroy regions
-     * Move or shrink regions
-     * Compute with regions
-     * Determine if regions are empty or equal
-     * Locate a point or rectangle in a region
-
-Creating, Copying, or Destroying Regions
-
-   To create a new empty region, use XCreateRegion.
-
-   Region XCreateRegion(void);
-
-   To generate a region from a polygon, use XPolygonRegion.
-
-   Region XPolygonRegion(XPoint points[], int n, int fill_rule);
-
-   points
-
-   Specifies an array of points.
-
-   n
-
-   Specifies the number of points in the polygon.
-
-   fill_rule
-
-   Specifies the fill-rule you want to set for the specified GC.
-   You can pass EvenOddRule or WindingRule.
-
-   The XPolygonRegion function returns a region for the polygon
-   defined by the points array. For an explanation of fill_rule,
-   see XCreateGC.
-
-   To set the clip-mask of a GC to a region, use XSetRegion.
-
-   XSetRegion(Display *display, GC gc, Region r);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   r
-
-   Specifies the region.
-
-   The XSetRegion function sets the clip-mask in the GC to the
-   specified region. The region is specified relative to the
-   drawable's origin. The resulting GC clip origin is
-   implementation-dependent. Once it is set in the GC, the region
-   can be destroyed.
-
-   To deallocate the storage associated with a specified region,
-   use XDestroyRegion.
-
-   XDestroyRegion(Region r);
-
-   r
-
-   Specifies the region.
-
-Moving or Shrinking Regions
-
-   To move a region by a specified amount, use XOffsetRegion.
-
-   XOffsetRegion(Region r, int dx, int dy);
-
-   r
-
-   Specifies the region.
-
-   dx
-
-   dy
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates, which define the amount you
-   want to move the specified region.
-
-   To reduce a region by a specified amount, use XShrinkRegion.
-
-   XShrinkRegion(Region r, int dx, int dy);
-
-   r
-
-   Specifies the region.
-
-   dx
-
-   dy
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates, which define the amount you
-   want to shrink the specified region.
-
-   Positive values shrink the size of the region, and negative
-   values expand the region.
-
-Computing with Regions
-
-   To generate the smallest rectangle enclosing a region, use
-   XClipBox.
-
-   XClipBox(Region r, XRectangle *rect_return);
-
-   r
-
-   Specifies the region.
-
-   rect_return
-
-   Returns the smallest enclosing rectangle.
-
-   The XClipBox function returns the smallest rectangle enclosing
-   the specified region.
-
-   To compute the intersection of two regions, use
-   XIntersectRegion.
-
-   XIntersectRegion(Region sra, Region srb, Region dr_return);
-
-   sra
-
-   srb
-
-   Specify the two regions with which you want to perform the
-   computation.
-
-   dr_return
-
-   Returns the result of the computation.
-
-   To compute the union of two regions, use XUnionRegion.
-
-   XUnionRegion(Region sra, Region srb, Region dr_return);
-
-   sra
-
-   srb
-
-   Specify the two regions with which you want to perform the
-   computation.
-
-   dr_return
-
-   Returns the result of the computation.
-
-   To create a union of a source region and a rectangle, use
-   XUnionRectWithRegion.
-
-   XUnionRectWithRegion(XRectangle *rectangle, Region src_region,
-   Region dest_region_return);
-
-   rectangle
-
-   Specifies the rectangle.
-
-   src_region
-
-   Specifies the source region to be used.
-
-   dest_region_return
-
-   Returns the destination region.
-
-   The XUnionRectWithRegion function updates the destination
-   region from a union of the specified rectangle and the
-   specified source region.
-
-   To subtract two regions, use XSubtractRegion.
-
-   XSubtractRegion(Region sra, Region srb, Region dr_return);
-
-   sra
-
-   srb
-
-   Specify the two regions with which you want to perform the
-   computation.
-
-   dr_return
-
-   Returns the result of the computation.
-
-   The XSubtractRegion function subtracts srb from sra and stores
-   the results in dr_return.
-
-   To calculate the difference between the union and intersection
-   of two regions, use XXorRegion.
-
-   XXorRegion(Region sra, Region srb, Region dr_return);
-
-   sra
-
-   srb
-
-   Specify the two regions with which you want to perform the
-   computation.
-
-   dr_return
-
-   Returns the result of the computation.
-
-Determining if Regions Are Empty or Equal
-
-   To determine if the specified region is empty, use
-   XEmptyRegion.
-
-   Bool XEmptyRegion(Region r);
-
-   r
-
-   Specifies the region.
-
-   The XEmptyRegion function returns True if the region is empty.
-
-   To determine if two regions have the same offset, size, and
-   shape, use XEqualRegion.
-
-   Bool XEqualRegion(Region r1, Region r2);
-
-   r1
-
-   r2
-
-   Specify the two regions.
-
-   The XEqualRegion function returns True if the two regions have
-   the same offset, size, and shape.
-
-Locating a Point or a Rectangle in a Region
-
-   To determine if a specified point resides in a specified
-   region, use XPointInRegion.
-
-   Bool XPointInRegion(Region r, int x, int y);
-
-   r
-
-   Specifies the region.
-
-   x
-
-   y
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates, which define the point.
-
-   The XPointInRegion function returns True if the point (x, y) is
-   contained in the region r.
-
-   To determine if a specified rectangle is inside a region, use
-   XRectInRegion.
-
-   int XRectInRegion(Region r, int x, int y, unsigned int width,
-   unsigned int height);
-
-   r
-
-   Specifies the region.
-
-   x
-
-   y
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates, which define the coordinates
-   of the upper-left corner of the rectangle.
-
-   width
-
-   height
-
-   Specify the width and height, which define the rectangle.
-
-   The XRectInRegion function returns RectangleIn if the rectangle
-   is entirely in the specified region, RectangleOut if the
-   rectangle is entirely out of the specified region, and
-   RectanglePart if the rectangle is partially in the specified
-   region.
-
-Using Cut Buffers
-
-   Xlib provides functions to manipulate cut buffers, a very
-   simple form of cut-and-paste inter-client communication.
-   Selections are a much more powerful and useful mechanism for
-   interchanging data between client (see section 4.5) and
-   generally should be used instead of cut buffers.
-
-   Cut buffers are implemented as properties on the first root
-   window of the display. The buffers can only contain text, in
-   the STRING encoding. The text encoding is not changed by Xlib
-   when fetching or storing. Eight buffers are provided and can be
-   accessed as a ring or as explicit buffers (numbered 0 through
-   7).
-
-   To store data in cut buffer 0, use XStoreBytes.
-
-   XStoreBytes(Display *display, char *bytes, int nbytes);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   bytes
-
-   Specifies the bytes, which are not necessarily ASCII or
-   null-terminated.
-
-   nbytes
-
-   Specifies the number of bytes to be stored.
-
-   The data can have embedded null characters and need not be
-   null-terminated. The cut buffer's contents can be retrieved
-   later by any client calling XFetchBytes.
-
-   XStoreBytes can generate a BadAlloc error.
-
-   To store data in a specified cut buffer, use XStoreBuffer.
-
-   XStoreBuffer(Display *display, char *bytes, int nbytes, int
-   buffer);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   bytes
-
-   Specifies the bytes, which are not necessarily ASCII or
-   null-terminated.
-
-   nbytes
-
-   Specifies the number of bytes to be stored.
-
-   buffer
-
-   Specifies the buffer in which you want to store the bytes.
-
-   If an invalid buffer is specified, the call has no effect. The
-   data can have embedded null characters and need not be
-   null-terminated.
-
-   XStoreBuffer can generate a BadAlloc error.
-
-   To return data from cut buffer 0, use XFetchBytes.
-
-   char *XFetchBytes(Display *display, int *nbytes_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   nbytes_return
-
-   Returns the number of bytes in the buffer.
-
-   The XFetchBytes function returns the number of bytes in the
-   nbytes_return argument, if the buffer contains data. Otherwise,
-   the function returns NULL and sets nbytes to 0. The appropriate
-   amount of storage is allocated and the pointer returned. The
-   client must free this storage when finished with it by calling
-   XFree.
-
-   To return data from a specified cut buffer, use XFetchBuffer.
-
-   char *XFetchBuffer(Display *display, int *nbytes_return, int
-   buffer);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   nbytes_return
-
-   Returns the number of bytes in the buffer.
-
-   buffer
-
-   Specifies the buffer from which you want the stored data
-   returned.
-
-   The XFetchBuffer function returns zero to the nbytes_return
-   argument if there is no data in the buffer or if an invalid
-   buffer is specified.
-
-   To rotate the cut buffers, use XRotateBuffers.
-
-   XRotateBuffers(Display *display, int rotate);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   rotate
-
-   Specifies how much to rotate the cut buffers.
-
-   The XRotateBuffers function rotates the cut buffers, such that
-   buffer 0 becomes buffer n, buffer 1 becomes n + 1 mod 8, and so
-   on. This cut buffer numbering is global to the display. Note
-   that XRotateBuffers generates BadMatch errors if any of the
-   eight buffers have not been created.
-
-Determining the Appropriate Visual Type
-
-   A single display can support multiple screens. Each screen can
-   have several different visual types supported at different
-   depths. You can use the functions described in this section to
-   determine which visual to use for your application.
-
-   The functions in this section use the visual information masks
-   and the XVisualInfo structure, which is defined in
-   <X11/Xutil.h> and contains:
-
-/* Visual information mask bits */
-
-
-#define   VisualNoMask                 0x0
-#define   VisualIDMask                 0x1
-#define   VisualScreenMask             0x2
-#define   VisualDepthMask              0x4
-#define   VisualClassMask              0x8
-#define   VisualRedMaskMask            0x10
-#define   VisualGreenMaskMask          0x20
-#define   VisualBlueMaskMask           0x40
-#define   VisualColormapSizeMask       0x80
-#define   VisualBitsPerRGBMask         0x100
-#define   VisualAllMask                0x1FF
-
-
-
-
-/* Values */
-
-typedef struct {
-     Visual *visual;
-     VisualID visualid;
-     int screen;
-     unsigned int depth;
-     int class;
-     unsigned long red_mask;
-     unsigned long green_mask;
-     unsigned long blue_mask;
-     int colormap_size;
-     int bits_per_rgb;
-} XVisualInfo;
-
-   To obtain a list of visual information structures that match a
-   specified template, use XGetVisualInfo.
-
-   XVisualInfo *XGetVisualInfo(Display *display, long vinfo_mask,
-   XVisualInfo *vinfo_template, int *nitems_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   vinfo_mask
-
-   Specifies the visual mask value.
-
-   vinfo_template
-
-   Specifies the visual attributes that are to be used in matching
-   the visual structures.
-
-   nitems_return
-
-   Returns the number of matching visual structures.
-
-   The XGetVisualInfo function returns a list of visual structures
-   that have attributes equal to the attributes specified by
-   vinfo_template. If no visual structures match the template
-   using the specified vinfo_mask, XGetVisualInfo returns a NULL.
-   To free the data returned by this function, use XFree.
-
-   To obtain the visual information that matches the specified
-   depth and class of the screen, use XMatchVisualInfo.
-
-   Status XMatchVisualInfo(Display *display, int screen, int
-   depth, int class, XVisualInfo *vinfo_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   screen
-
-   Specifies the screen.
-
-   depth
-
-   Specifies the depth of the screen.
-
-   class
-
-   Specifies the class of the screen.
-
-   vinfo_return
-
-   Returns the matched visual information.
-
-   The XMatchVisualInfo function returns the visual information
-   for a visual that matches the specified depth and class for a
-   screen. Because multiple visuals that match the specified depth
-   and class can exist, the exact visual chosen is undefined. If a
-   visual is found, XMatchVisualInfo returns nonzero and the
-   information on the visual to vinfo_return. Otherwise, when a
-   visual is not found, XMatchVisualInfo returns zero.
-
-Manipulating Images
-
-   Xlib provides several functions that perform basic operations
-   on images. All operations on images are defined using an XImage
-   structure, as defined in <X11/Xlib.h>. Because the number of
-   different types of image formats can be very large, this hides
-   details of image storage properly from applications.
-
-   This section describes the functions for generic operations on
-   images. Manufacturers can provide very fast implementations of
-   these for the formats frequently encountered on their hardware.
-   These functions are neither sufficient nor desirable to use for
-   general image processing. Rather, they are here to provide
-   minimal functions on screen format images. The basic operations
-   for getting and putting images are XGetImage and XPutImage.
-
-   Note that no functions have been defined, as yet, to read and
-   write images to and from disk files.
-
-   The XImage structure describes an image as it exists in the
-   client's memory. The user can request that some of the members
-   such as height, width, and xoffset be changed when the image is
-   sent to the server. Note that bytes_per_line in concert with
-   offset can be used to extract a subset of the image. Other
-   members (for example, byte order, bitmap_unit, and so forth)
-   are characteristics of both the image and the server. If these
-   members differ between the image and the server, XPutImage
-   makes the appropriate conversions. The first byte of the first
-   line of plane n must be located at the address (data + (n *
-   height * bytes_per_line)). For a description of the XImage
-   structure, see section 8.7.
-
-   To allocate an XImage structure and initialize it with image
-   format values from a display, use XCreateImage.
-
-   XImage *XCreateImage(Display *display, Visual *visual, unsigned
-   int depth, int format, int offset, char *data, unsigned int
-   width, unsigned int height, int bitmap_pad, int
-   bytes_per_line);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   visual
-
-   Specifies the Visual structure.
-
-   depth
-
-   Specifies the depth of the image.
-
-   format
-
-   Specifies the format for the image. You can pass XYBitmap,
-   XYPixmap, or ZPixmap.
-
-   offset
-
-   Specifies the number of pixels to ignore at the beginning of
-   the scanline.
-
-   data
-
-   Specifies the image data.
-
-   width
-
-   Specifies the width of the image, in pixels.
-
-   height
-
-   Specifies the height of the image, in pixels.
-
-   bitmap_pad
-
-   Specifies the quantum of a scanline (8, 16, or 32). In other
-   words, the start of one scanline is separated in client memory
-   from the start of the next scanline by an integer multiple of
-   this many bits.
-
-   bytes_per_line
-
-   Specifies the number of bytes in the client image between the
-   start of one scanline and the start of the next.
-
-   The XCreateImage function allocates the memory needed for an
-   XImage structure for the specified display but does not
-   allocate space for the image itself. Rather, it initializes the
-   structure byte-order, bit-order, and bitmap-unit values from
-   the display and returns a pointer to the XImage structure. The
-   red, green, and blue mask values are defined for Z format
-   images only and are derived from the Visual structure passed
-   in. Other values also are passed in. The offset permits the
-   rapid displaying of the image without requiring each scanline
-   to be shifted into position. If you pass a zero value in
-   bytes_per_line, Xlib assumes that the scanlines are contiguous
-   in memory and calculates the value of bytes_per_line itself.
-
-   Note that when the image is created using XCreateImage,
-   XGetImage, or XSubImage, the destroy procedure that the
-   XDestroyImage function calls frees both the image structure and
-   the data pointed to by the image structure.
-
-   The basic functions used to get a pixel, set a pixel, create a
-   subimage, and add a constant value to an image are defined in
-   the image object. The functions in this section are really
-   macro invocations of the functions in the image object and are
-   defined in <X11/Xutil.h>.
-
-   To obtain a pixel value in an image, use XGetPixel.
-
-   unsigned long XGetPixel(XImage *ximage, int x, int y);
-
-   ximage
-
-   Specifies the image.
-
-   x
-
-   y
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates.
-
-   The XGetPixel function returns the specified pixel from the
-   named image. The pixel value is returned in normalized format
-   (that is, the least significant byte of the long is the least
-   significant byte of the pixel). The image must contain the x
-   and y coordinates.
-
-   To set a pixel value in an image, use XPutPixel.
-
-   XPutPixel(XImage *ximage, int x, int y, unsigned long pixel);
-
-   ximage
-
-   Specifies the image.
-
-   x
-
-   y
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates.
-
-   pixel
-
-   Specifies the new pixel value.
-
-   The XPutPixel function overwrites the pixel in the named image
-   with the specified pixel value. The input pixel value must be
-   in normalized format (that is, the least significant byte of
-   the long is the least significant byte of the pixel). The image
-   must contain the x and y coordinates.
-
-   To create a subimage, use XSubImage.
-
-   XImage *XSubImage(XImage *ximage, int x, int y, unsigned int
-   subimage_width, unsigned int subimage_height);
-
-   ximage
-
-   Specifies the image.
-
-   x
-
-   y
-
-   Specify the x and y coordinates.
-
-   subimage_width
-
-   Specifies the width of the new subimage, in pixels.
-
-   subimage_height
-
-   Specifies the height of the new subimage, in pixels.
-
-   The XSubImage function creates a new image that is a subsection
-   of an existing one. It allocates the memory necessary for the
-   new XImage structure and returns a pointer to the new image.
-   The data is copied from the source image, and the image must
-   contain the rectangle defined by x, y, subimage_width, and
-   subimage_height.
-
-   To increment each pixel in an image by a constant value, use
-   XAddPixel.
-
-   XAddPixel(XImage *ximage, long value);
-
-   ximage
-
-   Specifies the image.
-
-   value
-
-   Specifies the constant value that is to be added.
-
-   The XAddPixel function adds a constant value to every pixel in
-   an image. It is useful when you have a base pixel value from
-   allocating color resources and need to manipulate the image to
-   that form.
-
-   To deallocate the memory allocated in a previous call to
-   XCreateImage, use XDestroyImage.
-
-   XDestroyImage(XImage *ximage);
-
-   ximage
-
-   Specifies the image.
-
-   The XDestroyImage function deallocates the memory associated
-   with the XImage structure.
-
-   Note that when the image is created using XCreateImage,
-   XGetImage, or XSubImage, the destroy procedure that this macro
-   calls frees both the image structure and the data pointed to by
-   the image structure.
-
-Manipulating Bitmaps
-
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to read a bitmap from
-   a file, save a bitmap to a file, or create a bitmap. This
-   section describes those functions that transfer bitmaps to and
-   from the client's file system, thus allowing their reuse in a
-   later connection (for example, from an entirely different
-   client or to a different display or server).
-
-   The X version 11 bitmap file format is:
-
-#define name_width width
-#define name_height height
-#define name_x_hot x
-#define name_y_hot y
-static unsigned char name_bits[] = { 0xNN,... }
-
-   The lines for the variables ending with _x_hot and _y_hot
-   suffixes are optional because they are present only if a
-   hotspot has been defined for this bitmap. The lines for the
-   other variables are required. The word ``unsigned'' is
-   optional; that is, the type of the _bits array can be ``char''
-   or ``unsigned char''. The _bits array must be large enough to
-   contain the size bitmap. The bitmap unit is 8.
-
-   To read a bitmap from a file and store it in a pixmap, use
-   XReadBitmapFile.
-
-   int XReadBitmapFile(Display *display, Drawable d, char
-   *filename, unsigned int *width_return, unsigned int
-   *height_return, Pixmap *bitmap_return, int *x_hot_return, int
-   *y_hot_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   d
-
-   Specifies the drawable that indicates the screen.
-
-   filename
-
-   Specifies the file name to use. The format of the file name is
-   operating-system dependent.
-
-   width_return
-
-   height_return
-
-   Return the width and height values of the read in bitmap file.
-
-   bitmap_return
-
-   Returns the bitmap that is created.
-
-   x_hot_return
-
-   y_hot_return
-
-   Return the hotspot coordinates.
-
-   The XReadBitmapFile function reads in a file containing a
-   bitmap. The file is parsed in the encoding of the current
-   locale. The ability to read other than the standard format is
-   implementation-dependent. If the file cannot be opened,
-   XReadBitmapFile returns BitmapOpenFailed. If the file can be
-   opened but does not contain valid bitmap data, it returns
-   BitmapFileInvalid. If insufficient working storage is
-   allocated, it returns BitmapNoMemory. If the file is readable
-   and valid, it returns BitmapSuccess.
-
-   XReadBitmapFile returns the bitmap's height and width, as read
-   from the file, to width_return and height_return. It then
-   creates a pixmap of the appropriate size, reads the bitmap data
-   from the file into the pixmap, and assigns the pixmap to the
-   caller's variable bitmap. The caller must free the bitmap using
-   XFreePixmap when finished. If name_x_hot and name_y_hot exist,
-   XReadBitmapFile returns them to x_hot_return and y_hot_return;
-   otherwise, it returns -1,-1.
-
-   XReadBitmapFile can generate BadAlloc, BadDrawable, and BadGC
-   errors.
-
-   To read a bitmap from a file and return it as data, use
-   XReadBitmapFileData.
-
-   int XReadBitmapFileData(char *filename, unsigned int
-   *width_return, unsigned int *height_return, unsignedchar
-   *data_return, int *x_hot_return, int *y_hot_return);
-
-   filename
-
-   Specifies the file name to use. The format of the file name is
-   operating-system dependent.
-
-   width_return
-
-   height_return
-
-   Return the width and height values of the read in bitmap file.
-
-   data_return
-
-   Returns the bitmap data.
-
-   x_hot_return
-
-   y_hot_return
-
-   Return the hotspot coordinates.
-
-   The XReadBitmapFileData function reads in a file containing a
-   bitmap, in the same manner as XReadBitmapFile, but returns the
-   data directly rather than creating a pixmap in the server. The
-   bitmap data is returned in data_return; the client must free
-   this storage when finished with it by calling XFree. The status
-   and other return values are the same as for XReadBitmapFile.
-
-   To write out a bitmap from a pixmap to a file, use
-   XWriteBitmapFile.
-
-   int XWriteBitmapFile(Display *display, char *filename, Pixmap
-   bitmap, unsigned int width, unsigned int height, int x_hot, int
-   y_hot);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   filename
-
-   Specifies the file name to use. The format of the file name is
-   operating-system dependent.
-
-   bitmap
-
-   Specifies the bitmap.
-
-   width
-
-   height
-
-   Specify the width and height.
-
-   x_hot
-
-   y_hot
-
-   Specify where to place the hotspot coordinates (or -1,-1 if
-   none are present) in the file.
-
-   The XWriteBitmapFile function writes a bitmap out to a file in
-   the X Version 11 format. The name used in the output file is
-   derived from the file name by deleting the directory prefix.
-   The file is written in the encoding of the current locale. If
-   the file cannot be opened for writing, it returns
-   BitmapOpenFailed. If insufficient memory is allocated,
-   XWriteBitmapFile returns BitmapNoMemory; otherwise, on no
-   error, it returns BitmapSuccess. If x_hot and y_hot are not -1,
-   -1, XWriteBitmapFile writes them out as the hotspot coordinates
-   for the bitmap.
-
-   XWriteBitmapFile can generate BadDrawable and BadMatch errors.
-
-   To create a pixmap and then store bitmap-format data into it,
-   use XCreatePixmapFromBitmapData.
-
-   Pixmap XCreatePixmapFromBitmapData(Display *display, Drawable
-   d, char *data, unsigned int width, unsigned int height,
-   unsigned long fg, unsigned long bg, unsigned int depth);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   d
-
-   Specifies the drawable that indicates the screen.
-
-   data
-
-   Specifies the data in bitmap format.
-
-   width
-
-   height
-
-   Specify the width and height.
-
-   fg
-
-   bg
-
-   Specify the foreground and background pixel values to use.
-
-   depth
-
-   Specifies the depth of the pixmap.
-
-   The XCreatePixmapFromBitmapData function creates a pixmap of
-   the given depth and then does a bitmap-format XPutImage of the
-   data into it. The depth must be supported by the screen of the
-   specified drawable, or a BadMatch error results.
-
-   XCreatePixmapFromBitmapData can generate BadAlloc, BadDrawable,
-   BadGC, and BadValue errors.
-
-   To include a bitmap written out by XWriteBitmapFile in a
-   program directly, as opposed to reading it in every time at run
-   time, use XCreateBitmapFromData.
-
-   Pixmap XCreateBitmapFromData(Display *display, Drawable d, char
-   *data, unsigned int width, unsigned int height);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   d
-
-   Specifies the drawable that indicates the screen.
-
-   data
-
-   Specifies the location of the bitmap data.
-
-   width
-
-   height
-
-   Specify the width and height.
-
-   The XCreateBitmapFromData function allows you to include in
-   your C program (using #include) a bitmap file that was written
-   out by XWriteBitmapFile (X version 11 format only) without
-   reading in the bitmap file. The following example creates a
-   gray bitmap:
-
-#include "gray.bitmap"
-
-Pixmap bitmap;
-bitmap = XCreateBitmapFromData(display, window, gray_bits, gray_width, g
-ray_height);
-
-   If insufficient working storage was allocated,
-   XCreateBitmapFromData returns None. It is your responsibility
-   to free the bitmap using XFreePixmap when finished.
-
-   XCreateBitmapFromData can generate BadAlloc and BadGC errors.
-
-Using the Context Manager
-
-   The context manager provides a way of associating data with an
-   X resource ID (mostly typically a window) in your program. Note
-   that this is local to your program; the data is not stored in
-   the server on a property list. Any amount of data in any number
-   of pieces can be associated with a resource ID, and each piece
-   of data has a type associated with it. The context manager
-   requires knowledge of the resource ID and type to store or
-   retrieve data.
-
-   Essentially, the context manager can be viewed as a
-   two-dimensional, sparse array: one dimension is subscripted by
-   the X resource ID and the other by a context type field. Each
-   entry in the array contains a pointer to the data. Xlib
-   provides context management functions with which you can save
-   data values, get data values, delete entries, and create a
-   unique context type. The symbols used are in <X11/Xutil.h>.
-
-   To save a data value that corresponds to a resource ID and
-   context type, use XSaveContext.
-
-   int XSaveContext(Display *display, XID rid, XContext context,
-   XPointer data);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   rid
-
-   Specifies the resource ID with which the data is associated.
-
-   context
-
-   Specifies the context type to which the data belongs.
-
-   data
-
-   Specifies the data to be associated with the window and type.
-
-   If an entry with the specified resource ID and type already
-   exists, XSaveContext overrides it with the specified context.
-   The XSaveContext function returns a nonzero error code if an
-   error has occurred and zero otherwise. Possible errors are
-   XCNOMEM (out of memory).
-
-   To get the data associated with a resource ID and type, use
-   XFindContext.
-
-   int XFindContext(Display *display, XID rid, XContext context,
-   XPointer *data_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   rid
-
-   Specifies the resource ID with which the data is associated.
-
-   context
-
-   Specifies the context type to which the data belongs.
-
-   data_return
-
-   Returns the data.
-
-   Because it is a return value, the data is a pointer. The
-   XFindContext function returns a nonzero error code if an error
-   has occurred and zero otherwise. Possible errors are XCNOENT
-   (context-not-found).
-
-   To delete an entry for a given resource ID and type, use
-   XDeleteContext.
-
-   int XDeleteContext(Display *display, XID rid, XContext
-   context);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   rid
-
-   Specifies the resource ID with which the data is associated.
-
-   context
-
-   Specifies the context type to which the data belongs.
-
-   The XDeleteContext function deletes the entry for the given
-   resource ID and type from the data structure. This function
-   returns the same error codes that XFindContext returns if
-   called with the same arguments. XDeleteContext does not free
-   the data whose address was saved.
-
-   To create a unique context type that may be used in subsequent
-   calls to XSaveContext and XFindContext, use XUniqueContext.
-
-   XContext XUniqueContext(void);
-
-Appendix A. Xlib Functions and Protocol Requests
-
-   This appendix provides two tables that relate to Xlib functions
-   and the X protocol. The following table lists each Xlib
-   function (in alphabetical order) and the corresponding protocol
-   request that it generates.
-
-   Table A.1. Protocol requests made by each Xlib function
-   Xlib Function              Protocol Request
-   XActivateScreenSaver       ForceScreenSaver
-   XAddHost                   ChangeHosts
-   XAddHosts                  ChangeHosts
-   XAddToSaveSet              ChangeSaveSet
-   XAllocColor                AllocColor
-   XAllocColorCells           AllocColorCells
-   XAllocColorPlanes          AllocColorPlanes
-   XAllocNamedColor           AllocNamedColor
-   XAllowEvents               AllowEvents
-   XAutoRepeatOff             ChangeKeyboardControl
-   XAutoRepeatOn              ChangeKeyboardControl
-   XBell                      Bell
-   XChangeActivePointerGrab   ChangeActivePointerGrab
-   XChangeGC                  ChangeGC
-   XChangeKeyboardControl     ChangeKeyboardControl
-   XChangeKeyboardMapping     ChangeKeyboardMapping
-   XChangePointerControl      ChangePointerControl
-   XChangeProperty            ChangeProperty
-   XChangeSaveSet             ChangeSaveSet
-   XChangeWindowAttributes    ChangeWindowAttributes
-   XCirculateSubwindows       CirculateWindow
-   XCirculateSubwindowsDown   CirculateWindow
-   XCirculateSubwindowsUp     CirculateWindow
-   XClearArea                 ClearArea
-   XClearWindow               ClearArea
-   XConfigureWindow           ConfigureWindow
-   XConvertSelection          ConvertSelection
-   XCopyArea                  CopyArea
-   XCopyColormapAndFree       CopyColormapAndFree
-   XCopyGC                    CopyGC
-   XCopyPlane                 CopyPlane
-   XCreateBitmapFromData      CreateGC
-                              CreatePixmap
-                              FreeGC
-                              PutImage
-   XCreateColormap            CreateColormap
-   XCreateFontCursor          CreateGlyphCursor
-   XCreateGC                  CreateGC
-   XCreateGlyphCursor         CreateGlyphCursor
-   XCreatePixmap              CreatePixmap
-   XCreatePixmapCursor        CreateCursor
-   XCreatePixmapFromData      CreateGC
-                              CreatePixmap
-                              FreeGC
-                              PutImage
-   XCreateSimpleWindow        CreateWindow
-   XCreateWindow              CreateWindow
-   XDefineCursor              ChangeWindowAttributes
-   XDeleteProperty            DeleteProperty
-   XDestroySubwindows         DestroySubwindows
-   XDestroyWindow             DestroyWindow
-   XDisableAccessControl      SetAccessControl
-   XDrawArc                   PolyArc
-   XDrawArcs                  PolyArc
-   XDrawImageString           ImageText8
-   XDrawImageString16         ImageText16
-   XDrawLine                  PolySegment
-   XDrawLines                 PolyLine
-   XDrawPoint                 PolyPoint
-   XDrawPoints                PolyPoint
-   XDrawRectangle             PolyRectangle
-   XDrawRectangles            PolyRectangle
-   XDrawSegments              PolySegment
-   XDrawString                PolyText8
-   XDrawString16              PolyText16
-   XDrawText                  PolyText8
-   XDrawText16                PolyText16
-   XEnableAccessControl       SetAccessControl
-   XFetchBytes                GetProperty
-   XFetchName                 GetProperty
-   XFillArc                   PolyFillArc
-   XFillArcs                  PolyFillArc
-   XFillPolygon               FillPoly
-   XFillRectangle             PolyFillRectangle
-   XFillRectangles            PolyFillRectangle
-   XForceScreenSaver          ForceScreenSaver
-   XFreeColormap              FreeColormap
-   XFreeColors                FreeColors
-   XFreeCursor                FreeCursor
-   XFreeFont                  CloseFont
-   XFreeGC                    FreeGC
-   XFreePixmap                FreePixmap
-   XGetAtomName               GetAtomName
-   XGetClassHint              GetProperty
-   XGetFontPath               GetFontPath
-   XGetGeometry               GetGeometry
-   XGetIconName               GetProperty
-   XGetIconSizes              GetProperty
-   XGetImage                  GetImage
-   XGetInputFocus             GetInputFocus
-   XGetKeyboardControl        GetKeyboardControl
-   XGetKeyboardMapping        GetKeyboardMapping
-   XGetModifierMapping        GetModifierMapping
-                              GetMotionEvents
-   XGetNormalHints            GetProperty
-   XGetPointerControl         GetPointerControl
-   XGetPointerMapping         GetPointerMapping
-   XGetRGBColormaps           GetProperty
-   XGetScreenSaver            GetScreenSaver
-   XGetSelectionOwner         GetSelectionOwner
-   XGetSizeHints              GetProperty
-   XGetTextProperty           GetProperty
-   XGetTransientForHint       GetProperty
-   XGetWMClientMachine        GetProperty
-   XGetWMColormapWindows      GetProperty
-                              InternAtom
-   XGetWMHints                GetProperty
-   XGetWMIconName             GetProperty
-   XGetWMName                 GetProperty
-   XGetWMNormalHints          GetProperty
-   XGetWMProtocols            GetProperty
-                              InternAtom
-   XGetWMSizeHints            GetProperty
-   XGetWindowAttributes       GetWindowAttributes
-                              GetGeometry
-   XGetWindowProperty         GetProperty
-   XGetZoomHints              GetProperty
-   XGrabButton                GrabButton
-   XGrabKey                   GrabKey
-   XGrabKeyboard              GrabKeyboard
-   XGrabPointer               GrabPointer
-   XGrabServer                GrabServer
-   XIconifyWindow             InternAtom
-                              SendEvent
-   XInitExtension             QueryExtension
-   XInstallColormap           InstallColormap
-   XInternAtom                InternAtom
-   XKillClient                KillClient
-   XListExtensions            ListExtensions
-   XListFonts                 ListFonts
-   XListFontsWithInfo         ListFontsWithInfo
-   XListHosts                 ListHosts
-   XListInstalledColormaps    ListInstalledColormaps
-   XListProperties            ListProperties
-   XLoadFont                  OpenFont
-   XLoadQueryFont             OpenFont
-                              QueryFont
-   XLookupColor               LookupColor
-   XLowerWindow               ConfigureWindow
-   XMapRaised                 ConfigureWindow
-                              MapWindow
-   XMapSubwindows             MapSubwindows
-   XMapWindow                 MapWindow
-   XMoveResizeWindow          ConfigureWindow
-   XMoveWindow                ConfigureWindow
-   XNoOp                      NoOperation
-   XOpenDisplay               CreateGC
-   XParseColor                LookupColor
-   XPutImage                  PutImage
-   XQueryBestCursor           QueryBestSize
-   XQueryBestSize             QueryBestSize
-   XQueryBestStipple          QueryBestSize
-   XQueryBestTile             QueryBestSize
-   XQueryColor                QueryColors
-   XQueryColors               QueryColors
-   XQueryExtension            QueryExtension
-   XQueryFont                 QueryFont
-   XQueryKeymap               QueryKeymap
-   XQueryPointer              QueryPointer
-   XQueryTextExtents          QueryTextExtents
-   XQueryTextExtents16        QueryTextExtents
-   XQueryTree                 QueryTree
-   XRaiseWindow               ConfigureWindow
-   XReadBitmapFile            CreateGC
-                              CreatePixmap
-                              FreeGC
-                              PutImage
-   XRecolorCursor             RecolorCursor
-   XReconfigureWMWindow       ConfigureWindow
-                              SendEvent
-   XRemoveFromSaveSet         ChangeSaveSet
-   XRemoveHost                ChangeHosts
-   XRemoveHosts               ChangeHosts
-   XReparentWindow            ReparentWindow
-   XResetScreenSaver          ForceScreenSaver
-   XResizeWindow              ConfigureWindow
-   XRestackWindows            ConfigureWindow
-   XRotateBuffers             RotateProperties
-   XRotateWindowProperties    RotateProperties
-   XSelectInput               ChangeWindowAttributes
-   XSendEvent                 SendEvent
-   XSetAccessControl          SetAccessControl
-   XSetArcMode                ChangeGC
-   XSetBackground             ChangeGC
-   XSetClassHint              ChangeProperty
-   XSetClipMask               ChangeGC
-   XSetClipOrigin             ChangeGC
-   XSetClipRectangles         SetClipRectangles
-   XSetCloseDownMode          SetCloseDownMode
-   XSetCommand                ChangeProperty
-   XSetDashes                 SetDashes
-   XSetFillRule               ChangeGC
-   XSetFillStyle              ChangeGC
-   XSetFont                   ChangeGC
-   XSetFontPath               SetFontPath
-   XSetForeground             ChangeGC
-   XSetFunction               ChangeGC
-   XSetGraphicsExposures      ChangeGC
-   XSetIconName               ChangeProperty
-   XSetIconSizes              ChangeProperty
-   XSetInputFocus             SetInputFocus
-   XSetLineAttributes         ChangeGC
-   XSetModifierMapping        SetModifierMapping
-   XSetNormalHints            ChangeProperty
-   XSetPlaneMask              ChangeGC
-   XSetPointerMapping         SetPointerMapping
-   XSetRGBColormaps           ChangeProperty
-   XSetScreenSaver            SetScreenSaver
-   XSetSelectionOwner         SetSelectionOwner
-   XSetSizeHints              ChangeProperty
-   XSetStandardProperties     ChangeProperty
-   XSetState                  ChangeGC
-   XSetStipple                ChangeGC
-   XSetSubwindowMode          ChangeGC
-   XSetTextProperty           ChangeProperty
-   XSetTile                   ChangeGC
-   XSetTransientForHint       ChangeProperty
-   XSetTSOrigin               ChangeGC
-   XSetWMClientMachine        ChangeProperty
-   XSetWMColormapWindows      ChangeProperty
-                              InternAtom
-   XSetWMHints                ChangeProperty
-   XSetWMIconName             ChangeProperty
-   XSetWMName                 ChangeProperty
-   XSetWMNormalHints          ChangeProperty
-   XSetWMProperties           ChangeProperty
-   XSetWMProtocols            ChangeProperty
-                              InternAtom
-   XSetWMSizeHints            ChangeProperty
-   XSetWindowBackground       ChangeWindowAttributes
-   XSetWindowBackgroundPixmap ChangeWindowAttributes
-   XSetWindowBorder           ChangeWindowAttributes
-   XSetWindowBorderPixmap     ChangeWindowAttributes
-   XSetWindowBorderWidth      ConfigureWindow
-   XSetWindowColormap         ChangeWindowAttributes
-   XSetZoomHints              ChangeProperty
-   XStoreBuffer               ChangeProperty
-   XStoreBytes                ChangeProperty
-   XStoreColor                StoreColors
-   XStoreColors               StoreColors
-   XStoreName                 ChangeProperty
-   XStoreNamedColor           StoreNamedColor
-   XSync                      GetInputFocus
-   XSynchronize               GetInputFocus
-   XTranslateCoordinates      TranslateCoordinates
-   XUndefineCursor            ChangeWindowAttributes
-   XUngrabButton              UngrabButton
-   XUngrabKey                 UngrabKey
-   XUngrabKeyboard            UngrabKeyboard
-   XUngrabPointer             UngrabPointer
-   XUngrabServer              UngrabServer
-   XUninstallColormap         UninstallColormap
-   XUnloadFont                CloseFont
-   XUnmapSubwindows           UnmapSubwindows
-   XUnmapWindow               UnmapWindow
-   XWarpPointer               WarpPointer
-   XWithdrawWindow            SendEvent
-                              UnmapWindow
-
-   The following table lists each X protocol request (in
-   alphabetical order) and the Xlib functions that reference it.
-
-   Table A.2. Xlib functions which use each Protocol Request
-   Protocol Request        Xlib Function
-   AllocColor              XAllocColor
-   AllocColorCells         XAllocColorCells
-   AllocColorPlanes        XAllocColorPlanes
-   AllocNamedColor         XAllocNamedColor
-   AllowEvents             XAllowEvents
-   Bell                    XBell
-   ChangeActivePointerGrab XChangeActivePointerGrab
-   ChangeGC                XChangeGC
-                           XSetArcMode
-                           XSetBackground
-                           XSetClipMask
-                           XSetClipOrigin
-                           XSetFillRule
-                           XSetFillStyle
-                           XSetFont
-                           XSetForeground
-                           XSetFunction
-                           XSetGraphicsExposures
-                           XSetLineAttributes
-                           XSetPlaneMask
-                           XSetState
-                           XSetStipple
-                           XSetSubwindowMode
-                           XSetTile
-                           XSetTSOrigin
-   ChangeHosts             XAddHost
-                           XAddHosts
-                           XRemoveHost
-                           XRemoveHosts
-   ChangeKeyboardControl   XAutoRepeatOff
-                           XAutoRepeatOn
-                           XChangeKeyboardControl
-   ChangeKeyboardMapping   XChangeKeyboardMapping
-   ChangePointerControl    XChangePointerControl
-   ChangeProperty          XChangeProperty
-                           XSetClassHint
-                           XSetCommand
-                           XSetIconName
-                           XSetIconSizes
-                           XSetNormalHints
-                           XSetRGBColormaps
-                           XSetSizeHints
-                           XSetStandardProperties
-                           XSetTextProperty
-                           XSetTransientForHint
-                           XSetWMClientMachine
-                           XSetWMColormapWindows
-                           XSetWMHints
-                           XSetWMIconName
-                           XSetWMName
-                           XSetWMNormalHints
-                           XSetWMProperties
-                           XSetWMProtocols
-                           XSetWMSizeHints
-                           XSetZoomHints
-                           XStoreBuffer
-                           XStoreBytes
-                           XStoreName
-   ChangeSaveSet           XAddToSaveSet
-                           XChangeSaveSet
-                           XRemoveFromSaveSet
-   ChangeWindowAttributes  XChangeWindowAttributes
-                           XDefineCursor
-                           XSelectInput
-                           XSetWindowBackground
-                           XSetWindowBackgroundPixmap
-                           XSetWindowBorder
-                           XSetWindowBorderPixmap
-                           XSetWindowColormap
-                           XUndefineCursor
-   CirculateWindow         XCirculateSubwindowsDown
-                           XCirculateSubwindowsUp
-                           XCirculateSubwindows
-   ClearArea               XClearArea
-                           XClearWindow
-   CloseFont               XFreeFont
-                           XUnloadFont
-   ConfigureWindow         XConfigureWindow
-                           XLowerWindow
-                           XMapRaised
-                           XMoveResizeWindow
-                           XMoveWindow
-                           XRaiseWindow
-                           XReconfigureWMWindow
-                           XResizeWindow
-                           XRestackWindows
-                           XSetWindowBorderWidth
-   ConvertSelection        XConvertSelection
-   CopyArea                XCopyArea
-   CopyColormapAndFree     XCopyColormapAndFree
-   CopyGC                  XCopyGC
-   CopyPlane               XCopyPlane
-   CreateColormap          XCreateColormap
-   CreateCursor            XCreatePixmapCursor
-   CreateGC                XCreateGC
-                           XCreateBitmapFromData
-                           XCreatePixmapFromData
-                           XOpenDisplay
-                           XReadBitmapFile
-   CreateGlyphCursor       XCreateFontCursor
-                           XCreateGlyphCursor
-   CreatePixmap            XCreatePixmap
-                           XCreateBitmapFromData
-                           XCreatePixmapFromData
-                           XReadBitmapFile
-   CreateWindow            XCreateSimpleWindow
-                           XCreateWindow
-   DeleteProperty          XDeleteProperty
-   DestroySubwindows       XDestroySubwindows
-   DestroyWindow           XDestroyWindow
-   FillPoly                XFillPolygon
-   ForceScreenSaver        XActivateScreenSaver
-                           XForceScreenSaver
-                           XResetScreenSaver
-   FreeColormap            XFreeColormap
-   FreeColors              XFreeColors
-   FreeCursor              XFreeCursor
-   FreeGC                  XFreeGC
-                           XCreateBitmapFromData
-                           XCreatePixmapFromData
-                           XReadBitmapFile
-   FreePixmap              XFreePixmap
-   GetAtomName             XGetAtomName
-   GetFontPath             XGetFontPath
-   GetGeometry             XGetGeometry
-                           XGetWindowAttributes
-   GetImage                XGetImage
-   GetInputFocus           XGetInputFocus
-                           XSync
-                           XSynchronize
-   GetKeyboardControl      XGetKeyboardControl
-   GetKeyboardMapping      XGetKeyboardMapping
-   GetModifierMapping      XGetModifierMapping
-   GetMotionEvents
-   GetPointerControl       XGetPointerControl
-   GetPointerMapping       XGetPointerMapping
-   GetProperty             XFetchBytes
-                           XFetchName
-                           XGetClassHint
-                           XGetIconName
-                           XGetIconSizes
-                           XGetNormalHints
-                           XGetRGBColormaps
-                           XGetSizeHints
-                           XGetTextProperty
-                           XGetTransientForHint
-                           XGetWMClientMachine
-                           XGetWMColormapWindows
-                           XGetWMHints
-                           XGetWMIconName
-                           XGetWMName
-                           XGetWMNormalHints
-                           XGetWMProtocols
-                           XGetWMSizeHints
-                           XGetWindowProperty
-                           XGetZoomHints
-   GetSelectionOwner       XGetSelectionOwner
-   GetWindowAttributes     XGetWindowAttributes
-   GrabButton              XGrabButton
-   GrabKey                 XGrabKey
-   GrabKeyboard            XGrabKeyboard
-   GrabPointer             XGrabPointer
-   GrabServer              XGrabServer
-   ImageText8              XDrawImageString
-   ImageText16             XDrawImageString16
-   InstallColormap         XInstallColormap
-   InternAtom              XGetWMColormapWindows
-                           XGetWMProtocols
-                           XIconifyWindow
-                           XInternAtom
-                           XSetWMColormapWindows
-                           XSetWMProtocols
-   KillClient              XKillClient
-   ListExtensions          XListExtensions
-   ListFonts               XListFonts
-   ListFontsWithInfo       XListFontsWithInfo
-   ListHosts               XListHosts
-   ListInstalledColormaps  XListInstalledColormaps
-   ListProperties          XListProperties
-   LookupColor             XLookupColor
-                           XParseColor
-   MapSubwindows           XMapSubwindows
-   MapWindow               XMapRaised
-                           XMapWindow
-   NoOperation             XNoOp
-   OpenFont                XLoadFont
-                           XLoadQueryFont
-   PolyArc                 XDrawArc
-                           XDrawArcs
-   PolyFillArc             XFillArc
-                           XFillArcs
-   PolyFillRectangle       XFillRectangle
-                           XFillRectangles
-   PolyLine                XDrawLines
-   PolyPoint               XDrawPoint
-                           XDrawPoints
-   PolyRectangle           XDrawRectangle
-                           XDrawRectangles
-   PolySegment             XDrawLine
-                           XDrawSegments
-   PolyText8               XDrawString
-                           XDrawText
-   PolyText16              XDrawString16
-                           XDrawText16
-   PutImage                XPutImage
-                           XCreateBitmapFromData
-                           XCreatePixmapFromData
-                           XReadBitmapFile
-   QueryBestSize           XQueryBestCursor
-                           XQueryBestSize
-                           XQueryBestStipple
-                           XQueryBestTile
-   QueryColors             XQueryColor
-                           XQueryColors
-   QueryExtension          XInitExtension
-                           XQueryExtension
-   QueryFont               XLoadQueryFont
-                           XQueryFont
-   QueryKeymap             XQueryKeymap
-   QueryPointer            XQueryPointer
-   QueryTextExtents        XQueryTextExtents
-                           XQueryTextExtents16
-   QueryTree               XQueryTree
-   RecolorCursor           XRecolorCursor
-   ReparentWindow          XReparentWindow
-   RotateProperties        XRotateBuffers
-                           XRotateWindowProperties
-   SendEvent               XIconifyWindow
-                           XReconfigureWMWindow
-                           XSendEvent
-                           XWithdrawWindow
-   SetAccessControl        XDisableAccessControl
-                           XEnableAccessControl
-                           XSetAccessControl
-   SetClipRectangles       XSetClipRectangles
-   SetCloseDownMode        XSetCloseDownMode
-   SetDashes               XSetDashes
-   SetFontPath             XSetFontPath
-   SetInputFocus           XSetInputFocus
-   SetModifierMapping      XSetModifierMapping
-   SetPointerMapping       XSetPointerMapping
-   SetScreenSaver          XGetScreenSaver
-                           XSetScreenSaver
-   SetSelectionOwner       XSetSelectionOwner
-   StoreColors             XStoreColor
-                           XStoreColors
-   StoreNamedColor         XStoreNamedColor
-   TranslateCoordinates    XTranslateCoordinates
-   UngrabButton            XUngrabButton
-   UngrabKey               XUngrabKey
-   UngrabKeyboard          XUngrabKeyboard
-   UngrabPointer           XUngrabPointer
-   UngrabServer            XUngrabServer
-   UninstallColormap       XUninstallColormap
-   UnmapSubwindows         XUnmapSubWindows
-   UnmapWindow             XUnmapWindow
-                           XWithdrawWindow
-   WarpPointer             XWarpPointer
-
-Appendix B. X Font Cursors
-
-   The following are the available cursors that can be used with
-   XCreateFontCursor.
-#define XC_X_cursor 0                     #define XC_ll_angle 76
-#define XC_arrow 2                        #define XC_lr_angle 78
-#define XC_based_arrow_down 4             #define XC_man 80
-#define XC_based_arrow_up 6               #define XC_middlebutton 82
-#define XC_boat 8                         #define XC_mouse 84
-#define XC_bogosity 10                    #define XC_pencil 86
-#define XC_bottom_left_corner 12          #define XC_pirate 88
-#define XC_bottom_right_corner 14         #define XC_plus 90
-#define XC_bottom_side 16                 #define XC_question_arrow 92
-#define XC_bottom_tee 18                  #define XC_right_ptr 94
-#define XC_box_spiral 20                  #define XC_right_side 96
-#define XC_center_ptr 22                  #define XC_right_tee 98
-#define XC_circle 24                      #define XC_rightbutton 100
-#define XC_clock 26                       #define XC_rtl_logo 102
-#define XC_coffee_mug 28                  #define XC_sailboat 104
-#define XC_cross 30                       #define XC_sb_down_arrow 106
-#define XC_cross_reverse 32               #define XC_sb_h_double_arrow 1
-08
-#define XC_crosshair 34                   #define XC_sb_left_arrow 110
-#define XC_diamond_cross 36               #define XC_sb_right_arrow 112
-#define XC_dot 38                         #define XC_sb_up_arrow 114
-#define XC_dot_box_mask 40                #define XC_sb_v_double_arrow 1
-16
-#define XC_double_arrow 42                #define XC_shuttle 118
-#define XC_draft_large 44                 #define XC_sizing 120
-#define XC_draft_small 46                 #define XC_spider 122
-#define XC_draped_box 48                  #define XC_spraycan 124
-#define XC_exchange 50                    #define XC_star 126
-#define XC_fleur 52                       #define XC_target 128
-#define XC_gobbler 54                     #define XC_tcross 130
-#define XC_gumby 56                       #define XC_top_left_arrow 132
-#define XC_hand1 58                       #define XC_top_left_corner 134
-#define XC_hand2 60                       #define XC_top_right_corner 13
-6
-#define XC_heart 62                       #define XC_top_side 138
-#define XC_icon 64                        #define XC_top_tee 140
-#define XC_iron_cross 66                  #define XC_trek 142
-#define XC_left_ptr 68                    #define XC_ul_angle 144
-#define XC_left_side 70                   #define XC_umbrella 146
-#define XC_left_tee 72                    #define XC_ur_angle 148
-#define XC_leftbutton 74                  #define XC_watch 150
-                                          #define XC_xterm 152
-
-Appendix C. Extensions
-
-   Table of Contents
-
-   Basic Protocol Support Routines
-   Hooking into Xlib
-
-        Hooks into the Library
-        Hooks onto Xlib Data Structures
-
-   GC Caching
-   Graphics Batching
-   Writing Extension Stubs
-
-        Requests, Replies, and Xproto.h
-        Request Format
-        Starting to Write a Stub Procedure
-        Locking Data Structures
-        Sending the Protocol Request and Arguments
-        Variable Length Arguments
-        Replies
-        Synchronous Calling
-        Allocating and Deallocating Memory
-        Portability Considerations
-        Deriving the Correct Extension Opcode
-
-   Because X can evolve by extensions to the core protocol, it is
-   important that extensions not be perceived as second-class
-   citizens. At some point, your favorite extensions may be
-   adopted as additional parts of the X Standard.
-
-   Therefore, there should be little to distinguish the use of an
-   extension from that of the core protocol. To avoid having to
-   initialize extensions explicitly in application programs, it is
-   also important that extensions perform lazy evaluations,
-   automatically initializing themselves when called for the first
-   time.
-
-   This appendix describes techniques for writing extensions to
-   Xlib that will run at essentially the same performance as the
-   core protocol requests.
-
-Note
-
-   It is expected that a given extension to X consists of multiple
-   requests. Defining 10 new features as 10 separate extensions is
-   a bad practice. Rather, they should be packaged into a single
-   extension and should use minor opcodes to distinguish the
-   requests.
-
-   The symbols and macros used for writing stubs to Xlib are
-   listed in <X11/Xlibint.h>.
-
-Basic Protocol Support Routines
-
-   The basic protocol requests for extensions are XQueryExtension
-   and XListExtensions.
-
-   Bool XQueryExtension(Display *display, char *name, int
-   *major_opcode_return, int *first_event_return, int
-   *first_error_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   name
-
-   Specifies the extension name.
-
-   major_opcode_return
-
-   Returns the major opcode.
-
-   first_event_return
-
-   Returns the first event code, if any.
-
-   first_error_return
-
-   Returns the first error code, if any.
-
-   The XQueryExtension function determines if the named extension
-   is present. If the extension is not present, XQueryExtension
-   returns False; otherwise, it returns True. If the extension is
-   present, XQueryExtension returns the major opcode for the
-   extension to major_opcode_return; otherwise, it returns zero.
-   Any minor opcode and the request formats are specific to the
-   extension. If the extension involves additional event types,
-   XQueryExtension returns the base event type code to
-   first_event_return; otherwise, it returns zero. The format of
-   the events is specific to the extension. If the extension
-   involves additional error codes, XQueryExtension returns the
-   base error code to first_error_return; otherwise, it returns
-   zero. The format of additional data in the errors is specific
-   to the extension.
-
-   If the extension name is not in the Host Portable Character
-   Encoding the result is implementation-dependent. Uppercase and
-   lowercase matter; the strings ``thing'', ``Thing'', and
-   ``thinG'' are all considered different names.
-
-   char **XListExtensions(Display *display, int
-   *nextensions_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   nextensions_return
-
-   Returns the number of extensions listed.
-
-   The XListExtensions function returns a list of all extensions
-   supported by the server. If the data returned by the server is
-   in the Latin Portable Character Encoding, then the returned
-   strings are in the Host Portable Character Encoding. Otherwise,
-   the result is implementation-dependent.
-
-   XFreeExtensionList(char **list);
-
-   list
-
-   Specifies the list of extension names.
-
-   The XFreeExtensionList function frees the memory allocated by
-   XListExtensions.
-
-Hooking into Xlib
-
-   These functions allow you to hook into the library. They are
-   not normally used by application programmers but are used by
-   people who need to extend the core X protocol and the X library
-   interface. The functions, which generate protocol requests for
-   X, are typically called stubs.
-
-   In extensions, stubs first should check to see if they have
-   initialized themselves on a connection. If they have not, they
-   then should call XInitExtension to attempt to initialize
-   themselves on the connection.
-
-   If the extension needs to be informed of GC/font allocation or
-   deallocation or if the extension defines new event types, the
-   functions described here allow the extension to be called when
-   these events occur.
-
-   The XExtCodes structure returns the information from
-   XInitExtension and is defined in <X11/Xlib.h>:
-
-typedef struct _XExtCodes {     /* public to extension, cannot be change
-d */
-        int extension;          /* extension number */
-        int major_opcode;       /* major op-code assigned by server */
-        int first_event;        /* first event number for the extension
-*/
-        int first_error;        /* first error number for the extension
-*/
-} XExtCodes;
-
-   XExtCodes *XInitExtension(Display *display, char *name);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   name
-
-   Specifies the extension name.
-
-   The XInitExtension function determines if the named extension
-   exists. Then, it allocates storage for maintaining the
-   information about the extension on the connection, chains this
-   onto the extension list for the connection, and returns the
-   information the stub implementor will need to access the
-   extension. If the extension does not exist, XInitExtension
-   returns NULL.
-
-   If the extension name is not in the Host Portable Character
-   Encoding, the result is implementation-dependent. Uppercase and
-   lowercase matter; the strings ``thing'', ``Thing'', and
-   ``thinG'' are all considered different names.
-
-   The extension number in the XExtCodes structure is needed in
-   the other calls that follow. This extension number is unique
-   only to a single connection.
-
-   XExtCodes *XAddExtension(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   For local Xlib extensions, the XAddExtension function allocates
-   the XExtCodes structure, bumps the extension number count, and
-   chains the extension onto the extension list. (This permits
-   extensions to Xlib without requiring server extensions.)
-
-Hooks into the Library
-
-   These functions allow you to define procedures that are to be
-   called when various circumstances occur. The procedures include
-   the creation of a new GC for a connection, the copying of a GC,
-   the freeing of a GC, the creating and freeing of fonts, the
-   conversion of events defined by extensions to and from wire
-   format, and the handling of errors.
-
-   All of these functions return the previous procedure defined
-   for this extension.
-
-   int XESetCloseDisplay(Display *display, int extension, int
-   (*proc)());
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   extension
-
-   Specifies the extension number.
-
-   proc
-
-   Specifies the procedure to call when the display is closed.
-
-   The XESetCloseDisplay function defines a procedure to be called
-   whenever XCloseDisplay is called. It returns any previously
-   defined procedure, usually NULL.
-
-   When XCloseDisplay is called, your procedure is called with
-   these arguments:
-
-   int (*proc)(Display *display, XExtCodes *codes);
-
-   int *XESetCreateGC(Display *display, int extension, int
-   (*proc)());
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   extension
-
-   Specifies the extension number.
-
-   proc
-
-   Specifies the procedure to call when a GC is closed.
-
-   The XESetCreateGC function defines a procedure to be called
-   whenever a new GC is created. It returns any previously defined
-   procedure, usually NULL.
-
-   When a GC is created, your procedure is called with these
-   arguments:
-
-   int (*proc)(Display *display, GC gc, XExtCodes *codes);
-
-   int *XESetCopyGC(Display *display, int extension, int
-   (*proc)());
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   extension
-
-   Specifies the extension number.
-
-   proc
-
-   Specifies the procedure to call when GC components are copied.
-
-   The XESetCopyGC function defines a procedure to be called
-   whenever a GC is copied. It returns any previously defined
-   procedure, usually NULL.
-
-   When a GC is copied, your procedure is called with these
-   arguments:
-
-   int (*proc)(Display *display, GC gc, XExtCodes *codes);
-
-   int *XESetFreeGC(Display *display, int extension, int
-   (*proc)());
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   extension
-
-   Specifies the extension number.
-
-   proc
-
-   Specifies the procedure to call when a GC is freed.
-
-   The XESetFreeGC function defines a procedure to be called
-   whenever a GC is freed. It returns any previously defined
-   procedure, usually NULL.
-
-   When a GC is freed, your procedure is called with these
-   arguments:
-
-   int (*proc)(Display *display, GC gc, XExtCodes *codes);
-
-   int *XESetCreateFont(Display *display, int extension, int
-   (*proc)());
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   extension
-
-   Specifies the extension number.
-
-   proc
-
-   Specifies the procedure to call when a font is created.
-
-   The XESetCreateFont function defines a procedure to be called
-   whenever XLoadQueryFont and XQueryFont are called. It returns
-   any previously defined procedure, usually NULL.
-
-   When XLoadQueryFont or XQueryFont is called, your procedure is
-   called with these arguments:
-
-   int (*proc)(Display *display, XFontStruct *fs, XExtCodes
-   *codes);
-
-   int *XESetFreeFont(Display *display, int extension, int
-   (*proc)());
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   extension
-
-   Specifies the extension number.
-
-   proc
-
-   Specifies the procedure to call when a font is freed.
-
-   The XESetFreeFont function defines a procedure to be called
-   whenever XFreeFont is called. It returns any previously defined
-   procedure, usually NULL.
-
-   When XFreeFont is called, your procedure is called with these
-   arguments:
-
-   int (*proc)(Display *display, XFontStruct *fs, XExtCodes
-   *codes);
-
-   The XESetWireToEvent and XESetEventToWire functions allow you
-   to define new events to the library. An XEvent structure always
-   has a type code (type int) as the first component. This
-   uniquely identifies what kind of event it is. The second
-   component is always the serial number (type unsigned long) of
-   the last request processed by the server. The third component
-   is always a Boolean (type Bool) indicating whether the event
-   came from a SendEvent protocol request. The fourth component is
-   always a pointer to the display the event was read from. The
-   fifth component is always a resource ID of one kind or another,
-   usually a window, carefully selected to be useful to toolkit
-   dispatchers. The fifth component should always exist, even if
-   the event does not have a natural destination; if there is no
-   value from the protocol to put in this component, initialize it
-   to zero. There is an implementation limit such that your host
-   event structure size cannot be bigger than the size of the
-   XEvent union of structures. There also is no way to guarantee
-   that more than 24 elements or 96 characters in the structure
-   will be fully portable between machines.
-
-   int *XESetWireToEvent(Display *display, int event_number,
-   Status (*proc)());
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   event_number
-
-   Specifies the event code.
-
-   proc
-
-   Specifies the procedure to call when converting an event.
-
-   The XESetWireToEvent function defines a procedure to be called
-   when an event needs to be converted from wire format (xEvent)
-   to host format (XEvent). The event number defines which
-   protocol event number to install a conversion procedure for.
-   XESetWireToEvent returns any previously defined procedure. You
-   can replace a core event conversion function with one of your
-   own, although this is not encouraged. It would, however, allow
-   you to intercept a core event and modify it before being placed
-   in the queue or otherwise examined. When Xlib needs to convert
-   an event from wire format to host format, your procedure is
-   called with these arguments:
-
-   int (*proc)(Display *display, XEvent *re, xEvent *event);
-
-   Your procedure must return status to indicate if the conversion
-   succeeded. The re argument is a pointer to where the host
-   format event should be stored, and the event argument is the
-   32-byte wire event structure. In the XEvent structure you are
-   creating, you must fill in the five required members of the
-   event structure. You should fill in the type member with the
-   type specified for the xEvent structure. You should copy all
-   other members from the xEvent structure (wire format) to the
-   XEvent structure (host format). Your conversion procedure
-   should return True if the event should be placed in the queue
-   or False if it should not be placed in the queue.
-
-   To initialize the serial number component of the event, call
-   _XSetLastRequestRead with the event and use the return value.
-
-   unsigned long_XSetLastRequestRead(Display *display,
-   xGenericReply *rep);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   rep
-
-   Specifies the wire event structure.
-
-   The _XSetLastRequestRead function computes and returns a
-   complete serial number from the partial serial number in the
-   event.
-
-   Status *XESetEventToWire(Display *display, int event_number,
-   int (*proc)());
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   event_number
-
-   Specifies the event code.
-
-   proc
-
-   Specifies the procedure to call when converting an event.
-
-   The XESetEventToWire function defines a procedure to be called
-   when an event needs to be converted from host format (XEvent)
-   to wire format (xEvent) form. The event number defines which
-   protocol event number to install a conversion procedure for.
-   XESetEventToWire returns any previously defined procedure. It
-   returns zero if the conversion fails or nonzero otherwise. You
-   can replace a core event conversion function with one of your
-   own, although this is not encouraged. It would, however, allow
-   you to intercept a core event and modify it before being sent
-   to another client. When Xlib needs to convert an event from
-   host format to wire format, your procedure is called with these
-   arguments:
-
-   int (*proc)(Display *display, XEvent *re, xEvent *event);
-
-   The re argument is a pointer to the host format event, and the
-   event argument is a pointer to where the 32-byte wire event
-   structure should be stored. You should fill in the type with
-   the type from the XEvent structure. All other members then
-   should be copied from the host format to the xEvent structure.
-
-   Bool *XESetWireToError(Display *display, int error_number, Bool
-   (*proc)());
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   error_number
-
-   Specifies the error code.
-
-   proc
-
-   Specifies the procedure to call when an error is received.
-
-   The XESetWireToError function defines a procedure to be called
-   when an extension error needs to be converted from wire format
-   to host format. The error number defines which protocol error
-   code to install the conversion procedure for. XESetWireToError
-   returns any previously defined procedure.
-
-   Use this function for extension errors that contain additional
-   error values beyond those in a core X error, when multiple wire
-   errors must be combined into a single Xlib error, or when it is
-   necessary to intercept an X error before it is otherwise
-   examined.
-
-   When Xlib needs to convert an error from wire format to host
-   format, the procedure is called with these arguments:
-
-   int (*proc)(Display *display, XErrorEvent *he, xError *we);
-
-   The he argument is a pointer to where the host format error
-   should be stored. The structure pointed at by he is guaranteed
-   to be as large as an XEvent structure and so can be cast to a
-   type larger than an XErrorEvent to store additional values. If
-   the error is to be completely ignored by Xlib (for example,
-   several protocol error structures will be combined into one
-   Xlib error), then the function should return False; otherwise,
-   it should return True.
-
-   int *XESetError(Display *display, int extension, int
-   (*proc)());
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   extension
-
-   Specifies the extension number.
-
-   proc
-
-   Specifies the procedure to call when an error is received.
-
-   Inside Xlib, there are times that you may want to suppress the
-   calling of the external error handling when an error occurs.
-   This allows status to be returned on a call at the cost of the
-   call being synchronous (though most such functions are query
-   operations, in any case, and are typically programmed to be
-   synchronous).
-
-   When Xlib detects a protocol error in _XReply, it calls your
-   procedure with these arguments:
-
-   int (*proc)(Display *display, xError *err, XExtCodes *codes,
-   int *ret_code);
-
-   The err argument is a pointer to the 32-byte wire format error.
-   The codes argument is a pointer to the extension codes
-   structure. The ret_code argument is the return code you may
-   want _XReply returned to.
-
-   If your procedure returns a zero value, the error is not
-   suppressed, and the client's error handler is called. (For
-   further information, see section 11.8.2.) If your procedure
-   returns nonzero, the error is suppressed, and _XReply returns
-   the value of ret_code.
-
-   char *XESetErrorString(Display *display, int extension, char
-   *(*proc)());
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   extension
-
-   Specifies the extension number.
-
-   proc
-
-   Specifies the procedure to call to obtain an error string.
-
-   The XGetErrorText function returns a string to the user for an
-   error. XESetErrorString allows you to define a procedure to be
-   called that should return a pointer to the error message. The
-   following is an example.
-
-   int (*proc)(Display *display, int code, XExtCodes *codes, char
-   *buffer, int nbytes);
-
-   Your procedure is called with the error code for every error
-   detected. You should copy nbytes of a null-terminated string
-   containing the error message into buffer.
-
-   void *XESetPrintErrorValues(Display *display, int extension,
-   void (*proc)());
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   extension
-
-   Specifies the extension number.
-
-   proc
-
-   Specifies the procedure to call when an error is printed.
-
-   The XESetPrintErrorValues function defines a procedure to be
-   called when an extension error is printed, to print the error
-   values. Use this function for extension errors that contain
-   additional error values beyond those in a core X error. It
-   returns any previously defined procedure.
-
-   When Xlib needs to print an error, the procedure is called with
-   these arguments:
-
-   void (*proc)(Display *display, XErrorEvent *ev, void *fp);
-
-   The structure pointed at by ev is guaranteed to be as large as
-   an XEvent structure and so can be cast to a type larger than an
-   XErrorEvent to obtain additional values set by using
-   XESetWireToError. The underlying type of the fp argument is
-   system dependent; on a POSIX-compliant system, fp should be
-   cast to type FILE*.
-
-   int *XESetFlushGC(Display *display, int extension, int
-   *(*proc)());
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   extension
-
-   Specifies the extension number.
-
-   proc
-
-   Specifies the procedure to call when a GC is flushed.
-
-   The procedure set by the XESetFlushGC function has the same
-   interface as the procedure set by the XESetCopyGC function, but
-   is called when a GC cache needs to be updated in the server.
-
-   int *XESetCopyGC(Display *display, int extension, int
-   *(*proc)());
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   extension
-
-   Specifies the extension number.
-
-   proc
-
-   Specifies the procedure to call when a buffer is flushed.
-
-   The XESetBeforeFlush function defines a procedure to be called
-   when data is about to be sent to the server. When data is about
-   to be sent, your procedure is called one or more times with
-   these arguments:
-
-   void (*proc)(Display *display, XExtCodes *codes, char *data,
-   long len);
-
-   The data argument specifies a portion of the outgoing data
-   buffer, and its length in bytes is specified by the len
-   argument. Your procedure must not alter the contents of the
-   data and must not do additional protocol requests to the same
-   display.
-
-Hooks onto Xlib Data Structures
-
-   Various Xlib data structures have provisions for extension
-   procedures to chain extension supplied data onto a list. These
-   structures are GC, Visual, Screen, ScreenFormat, Display, and
-   XFontStruct. Because the list pointer is always the first
-   member in the structure, a single set of procedures can be used
-   to manipulate the data on these lists.
-
-   The following structure is used in the functions in this
-   section and is defined in <X11/Xlib.h>
-
-typedef struct _XExtData {
-        int number;     /* number returned by XInitExtension */
-        struct _XExtData *next; /* next item on list of data for structu
-re */
-        int (*free_private)();  /* if defined,  called to free private *
-/
-        XPointer private_data;  /* data private to this extension. */
-} XExtData;
-
-   When any of the data structures listed above are freed, the
-   list is walked, and the structure's free procedure (if any) is
-   called. If free is NULL, then the library frees both the data
-   pointed to by the private_data member and the structure itself.
-
-union { Display *display;
-        GC gc;
-        Visual *visual;
-        Screen *screen;
-        ScreenFormat *pixmap_format;
-        XFontStruct *font } XEDataObject;
-
-   XExtData **XEHeadOfExtensionList(XEDataObject object);
-
-   object
-
-   Specifies the object.
-
-   The XEHeadOfExtensionList function returns a pointer to the
-   list of extension structures attached to the specified object.
-   In concert with XAddToExtensionList, XEHeadOfExtensionList
-   allows an extension to attach arbitrary data to any of the
-   structures of types contained in XEDataObject.
-
-   XAddToExtensionList(XExtData **structure, XExtData *ext_data);
-
-   structure
-
-   Specifies the extension list.
-
-   ext_data
-
-   Specifies the extension data structure to add.
-
-   The structure argument is a pointer to one of the data
-   structures enumerated above. You must initialize
-   ext_data->number with the extension number before calling this
-   function.
-
-   XExtData *XFindOnExtensionList(struct_XExtData **structure, int
-   number);
-
-   structure
-
-   Specifies the extension list.
-
-   number
-
-   Specifies the extension number from XInitExtension.
-
-   The XFindOnExtensionList function returns the first extension
-   data structure for the extension numbered number. It is
-   expected that an extension will add at most one extension data
-   structure to any single data structure's extension data list.
-   There is no way to find additional structures.
-
-   The XAllocID macro, which allocates and returns a resource ID,
-   is defined in <X11/Xlib.h>.
-
-   XAllocID(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   This macro is a call through the Display structure to an
-   internal resource ID allocator. It returns a resource ID that
-   you can use when creating new resources.
-
-   The XAllocIDs macro allocates and returns an array of resource
-   ID.
-
-   XAllocIDs(Display *display, XID *ids_return, int count);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   ids_return
-
-   Returns the resource IDs.
-
-   rep
-
-   Specifies the number of resource IDs requested.
-
-   This macro is a call through the Display structure to an
-   internal resource ID allocator. It returns resource IDs to the
-   array supplied by the caller. To correctly handle automatic
-   reuse of resource IDs, you must call XAllocIDs when requesting
-   multiple resource IDs. This call might generate protocol
-   requests.
-
-GC Caching
-
-   GCs are cached by the library to allow merging of independent
-   change requests to the same GC into single protocol requests.
-   This is typically called a write-back cache. Any extension
-   procedure whose behavior depends on the contents of a GC must
-   flush the GC cache to make sure the server has up-to-date
-   contents in its GC.
-
-   The FlushGC macro checks the dirty bits in the library's GC
-   structure and calls _XFlushGCCache if any elements have
-   changed. The FlushGC macro is defined as follows:
-
-   FlushGC(Display *display, GC gc);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   Note that if you extend the GC to add additional resource ID
-   components, you should ensure that the library stub sends the
-   change request immediately. This is because a client can free a
-   resource immediately after using it, so if you only stored the
-   value in the cache without forcing a protocol request, the
-   resource might be destroyed before being set into the GC. You
-   can use the _XFlushGCCache procedure to force the cache to be
-   flushed. The _XFlushGCCache procedure is defined as follows:
-
-   _XFlushGCCache(Display *display, GC gc);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-Graphics Batching
-
-   If you extend X to add more poly graphics primitives, you may
-   be able to take advantage of facilities in the library to allow
-   back-to-back single calls to be transformed into poly requests.
-   This may dramatically improve performance of programs that are
-   not written using poly requests. A pointer to an xReq, called
-   last_req in the display structure, is the last request being
-   processed. By checking that the last request type, drawable,
-   gc, and other options are the same as the new one and that
-   there is enough space left in the buffer, you may be able to
-   just extend the previous graphics request by extending the
-   length field of the request and appending the data to the
-   buffer. This can improve performance by five times or more in
-   naive programs. For example, here is the source for the
-   XDrawPoint stub. (Writing extension stubs is discussed in the
-   next section.)
-#include <X11/Xlibint.h>
-
-/* precompute the maximum size of batching request allowed */
-
-static int size = sizeof(xPolyPointReq) + EPERBATCH * sizeof(xPoint);
-
-XDrawPoint(dpy, d, gc, x, y)
-    register Display *dpy;
-    Drawable d;
-    GC gc;
-    int x, y; /* INT16 */
-{
-    xPoint *point;
-    LockDisplay(dpy);
-    FlushGC(dpy, gc);
-    {
-    register xPolyPointReq *req = (xPolyPointReq *) dpy->last_req;
-    /* if same as previous request, with same drawable, batch requests *
-/
-    if (
-          (req->reqType == X_PolyPoint)
-       && (req->drawable == d)
-       && (req->gc == gc->gid)
-       && (req->coordMode == CoordModeOrigin)
-       && ((dpy->bufptr + sizeof (xPoint)) <= dpy->bufmax)
-       && (((char *)dpy->bufptr - (char *)req) < size) ) {
-         point = (xPoint *) dpy->bufptr;
-         req->length += sizeof (xPoint) >> 2;
-         dpy->bufptr += sizeof (xPoint);
-         }
-
-    else {
-        GetReqExtra(PolyPoint, 4, req); /* 1 point = 4 bytes */
-        req->drawable = d;
-        req->gc = gc->gid;
-        req->coordMode = CoordModeOrigin;
-        point = (xPoint *) (req + 1);
-        }
-    point->x = x;
-    point->y = y;
-    }
-    UnlockDisplay(dpy);
-    SyncHandle();
-}
-
-   To keep clients from generating very long requests that may
-   monopolize the server, there is a symbol defined in
-   <X11/Xlibint.h> of EPERBATCH on the number of requests batched.
-   Most of the performance benefit occurs in the first few merged
-   requests. Note that FlushGC is called before picking up the
-   value of last_req, because it may modify this field.
-
-Writing Extension Stubs
-
-   All X requests always contain the length of the request,
-   expressed as a 16-bit quantity of 32 bit words. This means that
-   a single request can be no more than 256K bytes in length. Some
-   servers may not support single requests of such a length. The
-   value of dpy->max_request_size contains the maximum length as
-   defined by the server implementation. For further information,
-   see X Window System Protocol.
-
-Requests, Replies, and Xproto.h
-
-   The <X11/Xproto.h> file contains three sets of definitions that
-   are of interest to the stub implementor: request names, request
-   structures, and reply structures.
-
-   You need to generate a file equivalent to <X11/Xproto.h> for
-   your extension and need to include it in your stub procedure.
-   Each stub procedure also must include <X11/Xlibint.h>.
-
-   The identifiers are deliberately chosen in such a way that, if
-   the request is called X_DoSomething, then its request structure
-   is xDoSomethingReq, and its reply is xDoSomethingReply. The
-   GetReq family of macros, defined in <X11/Xlibint.h>, takes
-   advantage of this naming scheme.
-
-   For each X request, there is a definition in <X11/Xproto.h>
-   that looks similar to this:
-
-#define X_DoSomething   42
-
-   In your extension header file, this will be a minor opcode,
-   instead of a major opcode.
-
-Request Format
-
-   Every request contains an 8-bit major opcode and a 16-bit
-   length field expressed in units of 4 bytes. Every request
-   consists of 4 bytes of header (containing the major opcode, the
-   length field, and a data byte) followed by zero or more
-   additional bytes of data. The length field defines the total
-   length of the request, including the header. The length field
-   in a request must equal the minimum length required to contain
-   the request. If the specified length is smaller or larger than
-   the required length, the server should generate a BadLength
-   error. Unused bytes in a request are not required to be zero.
-   Extensions should be designed in such a way that long protocol
-   requests can be split up into smaller requests, if it is
-   possible to exceed the maximum request size of the server. The
-   protocol guarantees the maximum request size to be no smaller
-   than 4096 units (16384 bytes).
-
-   Major opcodes 128 through 255 are reserved for extensions.
-   Extensions are intended to contain multiple requests, so
-   extension requests typically have an additional minor opcode
-   encoded in the second data byte in the request header, but the
-   placement and interpretation of this minor opcode as well as
-   all other fields in extension requests are not defined by the
-   core protocol. Every request is implicitly assigned a sequence
-   number (starting with one) used in replies, errors, and events.
-
-   Most protocol requests have a corresponding structure typedef
-   in <X11/Xproto.h>, which looks like:
-
-typedef struct _DoSomethingReq {
-        CARD8 reqType;          /* X_DoSomething */
-        CARD8 someDatum;        /* used differently in different request
-s */
-        CARD16 length;          /* total # of bytes in request, divided
-by 4 */
-        ...
-        /* request-specific data */
-        ...
-} xDoSomethingReq;
-
-   If a core protocol request has a single 32-bit argument, you
-   need not declare a request structure in your extension header
-   file. Instead, such requests use the xResourceReq structure in
-   <X11/Xproto.h>. This structure is used for any request whose
-   single argument is a Window, Pixmap, Drawable, GContext, Font,
-   Cursor, Colormap, Atom, or VisualID.
-
-typedef struct _ResourceReq {
-        CARD8 reqType;  /* the request type, e.g. X_DoSomething */
-        BYTE pad;       /* not used */
-        CARD16 length;  /* 2 (= total # of bytes in request, divided by
-4) */
-        CARD32 id;      /* the Window, Drawable, Font, GContext, etc. */
-} xResourceReq;
-
-   If convenient, you can do something similar in your extension
-   header file.
-
-   In both of these structures, the reqType field identifies the
-   type of the request (for example, X_MapWindow or
-   X_CreatePixmap). The length field tells how long the request is
-   in units of 4-byte longwords. This length includes both the
-   request structure itself and any variable-length data, such as
-   strings or lists, that follow the request structure. Request
-   structures come in different sizes, but all requests are padded
-   to be multiples of four bytes long.
-
-   A few protocol requests take no arguments at all. Instead, they
-   use the xReq structure in <X11/Xproto.h>, which contains only a
-   reqType and a length (and a pad byte).
-
-   If the protocol request requires a reply, then <X11/Xproto.h>
-   also contains a reply structure typedef:
-
-typedef struct _DoSomethingReply {
-        BYTE type;      /* always X_Reply */
-        BYTE someDatum; /* used differently in different requests */
-        CARD16 sequenceNumber;  /* # of requests sent so far */
-        CARD32 length;  /* # of additional bytes, divided by 4 */
-        ...
-        /* request-specific data */
-        ...
-} xDoSomethingReply;
-
-   Most of these reply structures are 32 bytes long. If there are
-   not that many reply values, then they contain a sufficient
-   number of pad fields to bring them up to 32 bytes. The length
-   field is the total number of bytes in the request minus 32,
-   divided by 4. This length will be nonzero only if:
-     * The reply structure is followed by variable-length data,
-       such as a list or string.
-     * The reply structure is longer than 32 bytes.
-
-   Only GetWindowAttributesl, QueryFont, QueryKeymap, and
-   GetKeyboardControl have reply structures longer than 32 bytes
-   in the core protocol.
-
-   A few protocol requests return replies that contain no data.
-   <X11/Xproto.h> does not define reply structures for these.
-   Instead, they use the xGenericReply structure, which contains
-   only a type, length, and sequence number (and sufficient
-   padding to make it 32 bytes long).
-
-Starting to Write a Stub Procedure
-
-   An Xlib stub procedure should start like this:
-
-#include "<X11/Xlibint.h>
-
-XDoSomething (arguments, ... )
-/* argument declarations */
-{
-
-register XDoSomethingReq *req;
-...
-
-   If the protocol request has a reply, then the variable
-   declarations should include the reply structure for the
-   request. The following is an example:
-
-xDoSomethingReply rep;
-
-Locking Data Structures
-
-   To lock the display structure for systems that want to support
-   multithreaded access to a single display connection, each stub
-   will need to lock its critical section. Generally, this section
-   is the point from just before the appropriate GetReq call until
-   all arguments to the call have been stored into the buffer. The
-   precise instructions needed for this locking depend upon the
-   machine architecture. Two calls, which are generally
-   implemented as macros, have been provided.
-
-   LockDisplay(Display *display);
-
-   UnlockDisplay(Display *display);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-Sending the Protocol Request and Arguments
-
-   After the variable declarations, a stub procedure should call
-   one of four macros defined in <X11/Xlibint.h>: GetReq,
-   GetReqExtra, GetResReq, or GetEmptyReq. All of these macros
-   take, as their first argument, the name of the protocol request
-   as declared in <X11/Xproto.h> except with X_ removed. Each one
-   declares a Display structure pointer, called dpy, and a pointer
-   to a request structure, called req, which is of the appropriate
-   type. The macro then appends the request structure to the
-   output buffer, fills in its type and length field, and sets req
-   to point to it.
-
-   If the protocol request has no arguments (for instance,
-   X_GrabServer), then use GetEmptyReq.
-
-GetEmptyReq (DoSomething, req);
-
-   If the protocol request has a single 32-bit argument (such as a
-   Pixmap, Window, Drawable, Atom, and so on), then use GetResReq.
-   The second argument to the macro is the 32-bit object.
-   X_MapWindow is a good example.
-
-GetResReq (DoSomething, rid, req);
-
-   The rid argument is the Pixmap, Window, or other resource ID.
-
-   If the protocol request takes any other argument list, then
-   call GetReq. After the GetReq, you need to set all the other
-   fields in the request structure, usually from arguments to the
-   stub procedure.
-
-GetReq (DoSomething, req);
-/* fill in arguments here */
-req->arg1 = arg1;
-req->arg2 = arg2;
-...
-
-   A few stub procedures (such as XCreateGC and XCreatePixmap)
-   return a resource ID to the caller but pass a resource ID as an
-   argument to the protocol request. Such procedures use the macro
-   XAllocID to allocate a resource ID from the range of IDs that
-   were assigned to this client when it opened the connection.
-
-rid = req->rid = XAllocID();
-...
-return (rid);
-
-   Finally, some stub procedures transmit a fixed amount of
-   variable-length data after the request. Typically, these
-   procedures (such as XMoveWindow and XSetBackground) are special
-   cases of more general functions like XMoveResizeWindow and
-   XChangeGC. These procedures use GetReqExtra, which is the same
-   as GetReq except that it takes an additional argument (the
-   number of extra bytes to allocate in the output buffer after
-   the request structure). This number should always be a multiple
-   of four. Note that it is possible for req to be set to NULL as
-   a defensive measure if the requested length exceeds the Xlib's
-   buffer size (normally 16K).
-
-Variable Length Arguments
-
-   Some protocol requests take additional variable-length data
-   that follow the xDoSomethingReq structure. The format of this
-   data varies from request to request. Some requests require a
-   sequence of 8-bit bytes, others a sequence of 16-bit or 32-bit
-   entities, and still others a sequence of structures.
-
-   It is necessary to add the length of any variable-length data
-   to the length field of the request structure. That length field
-   is in units of 32-bit longwords. If the data is a string or
-   other sequence of 8-bit bytes, then you must round the length
-   up and shift it before adding:
-
-req->length += (nbytes+3)>>2;
-
-   To transmit variable-length data, use the Data macros. If the
-   data fits into the output buffer, then this macro copies it to
-   the buffer. If it does not fit, however, the Data macro calls
-   _XSend, which transmits first the contents of the buffer and
-   then your data. The Data macros take three arguments: the
-   display, a pointer to the beginning of the data, and the number
-   of bytes to be sent.
-
-   Data(display, (char *) data, nbytes);
-
-   Data16(display, (short *) data, nbytes);
-
-   Data32(display, (long *) data, nbytes);
-
-   Data, Data16, and Data32 are macros that may use their last
-   argument more than once, so that argument should be a variable
-   rather than an expression such as ``nitems*sizeof(item)''. You
-   should do that kind of computation in a separate statement
-   before calling them. Use the appropriate macro when sending
-   byte, short, or long data.
-
-   If the protocol request requires a reply, then call the
-   procedure _XSend instead of the Data macro. _XSend takes the
-   same arguments, but because it sends your data immediately
-   instead of copying it into the output buffer (which would later
-   be flushed anyway by the following call on _XReply), it is
-   faster.
-
-Replies
-
-   If the protocol request has a reply, then call _XReply after
-   you have finished dealing with all the fixed-length and
-   variable-length arguments. _XReply flushes the output buffer
-   and waits for an xReply packet to arrive. If any events arrive
-   in the meantime, _XReply places them in the queue for later
-   use.
-
-   Status _XReply(Display *display, xReply *rep, int extra, Bool
-   discard);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   rep
-
-   Specifies the reply structure.
-
-   extra
-
-   Specifies the number of 32-bit words expected after the replay.
-
-   discard
-
-   Specifies if any data beyond that specified in the extra
-   argument should be discarded.
-
-   The _XReply function waits for a reply packet and copies its
-   contents into the specified rep. _XReply handles error and
-   event packets that occur before the reply is received. _XReply
-   takes four arguments:
-     * A Display * structure
-     * A pointer to a reply structure (which must be cast to an
-       xReply *)
-     * The number of additional 32-bit words (beyond sizeof(
-       xReply) = 32 bytes) in the reply structure
-     * A Boolean that indicates whether _XReply is to discard any
-       additional bytes beyond those it was told to read
-
-   Because most reply structures are 32 bytes long, the third
-   argument is usually 0. The only core protocol exceptions are
-   the replies to GetWindowAttributesl, QueryFont, QueryKeymap,
-   and GetKeyboardControl, which have longer replies.
-
-   The last argument should be False if the reply structure is
-   followed by additional variable-length data (such as a list or
-   string). It should be True if there is not any variable-length
-   data. This last argument is provided for upward-compatibility
-   reasons to allow a client to communicate properly with a
-   hypothetical later version of the server that sends more data
-   than the client expected. For example, some later version of
-   GetWindowAttributesl might use a larger, but compatible,
-   xGetWindowAttributesReply that contains additional attribute
-   data at the end. _XReply returns True if it received a reply
-   successfully or False if it received any sort of error.
-
-   For a request with a reply that is not followed by
-   variable-length data, you write something like:
-
-_XReply(display, (xReply *)&rep, 0, True);
-*ret1 = rep.ret1;
-*ret2 = rep.ret2;
-*ret3 = rep.ret3;
-...
-UnlockDisplay(dpy);
-SyncHandle();
-return (rep.ret4);
-}
-
-   If there is variable-length data after the reply, change the
-   True to False, and use the appropriate _XRead function to read
-   the variable-length data.
-
-   _XRead(Display *display, char *data_return, long nbytes);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   data_return
-
-   Specifies the buffer.
-
-   nbytes
-
-   Specifies the number of bytes required.
-
-   The _XRead function reads the specified number of bytes into
-   data_return.
-
-   _XRead16(Display *display, short *data_return, long nbytes);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   data_return
-
-   Specifies the buffer.
-
-   nbytes
-
-   Specifies the number of bytes required.
-
-   The _XRead16 function reads the specified number of bytes,
-   unpacking them as 16-bit quantities, into the specified array
-   as shorts.
-
-   _XRead32(Display *display, long *data_return, long nbytes);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   data_return
-
-   Specifies the buffer.
-
-   nbytes
-
-   Specifies the number of bytes required.
-
-   The _XRead32 function reads the specified number of bytes,
-   unpacking them as 32-bit quantities, into the specified array
-   as longs.
-
-   _XRead16Pad(Display *display, short *data_return, long nbytes);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   data_return
-
-   Specifies the buffer.
-
-   nbytes
-
-   Specifies the number of bytes required.
-
-   The _XRead16Pad function reads the specified number of bytes,
-   unpacking them as 16-bit quantities, into the specified array
-   as shorts. If the number of bytes is not a multiple of four,
-   _XRead16Pad reads and discards up to two additional pad bytes.
-
-   _XReadPad(Display *display, char *data_return, long nbytes);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   data_return
-
-   Specifies the buffer.
-
-   nbytes
-
-   Specifies the number of bytes required.
-
-   The _XReadPad function reads the specified number of bytes into
-   data_return. If the number of bytes is not a multiple of four,
-   _XReadPad reads and discards up to three additional pad bytes.
-
-   Each protocol request is a little different. For further
-   information, see the Xlib sources for examples.
-
-Synchronous Calling
-
-   Each procedure should have a call, just before returning to the
-   user, to a macro called SyncHandle. If synchronous mode is
-   enabled (see XSynchronize), the request is sent immediately.
-   The library, however, waits until any error the procedure could
-   generate at the server has been handled.
-
-Allocating and Deallocating Memory
-
-   To support the possible reentry of these procedures, you must
-   observe several conventions when allocating and deallocating
-   memory, most often done when returning data to the user from
-   the window system of a size the caller could not know in
-   advance (for example, a list of fonts or a list of extensions).
-   The standard C library functions on many systems are not
-   protected against signals or other multithreaded uses. The
-   following analogies to standard I/O library functions have been
-   defined:
-
-   These should be used in place of any calls you would make to
-   the normal C library functions.
-
-   If you need a single scratch buffer inside a critical section
-   (for example, to pack and unpack data to and from the wire
-   protocol), the general memory allocators may be too expensive
-   to use (particularly in output functions, which are performance
-   critical). The following function returns a scratch buffer for
-   use within a critical section:
-
-   char *_XAllocScratch(Display *display, unsigned long nbytes);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   nbytes
-
-   Specifies the number of bytes required.
-
-   This storage must only be used inside of a critical section of
-   your stub. The returned pointer cannot be assumed valid after
-   any call that might permit another thread to execute inside
-   Xlib. For example, the pointer cannot be assumed valid after
-   any use of the GetReq or Data families of macros, after any use
-   of _XReply, or after any use of the _XSend or _XRead families
-   of functions.
-
-   The following function returns a scratch buffer for use across
-   critical sections:
-
-   char *_XAllocTemp(Display *display, unsigned long nbytes);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   nbytes
-
-   Specifies the number of bytes required.
-
-   This storage can be used across calls that might permit another
-   thread to execute inside Xlib. The storage must be explicitly
-   returned to Xlib. The following function returns the storage:
-
-   void _XFreeTemp(Display *display, char *buf, unsigned long
-   nbytes);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   buf
-
-   Specifies the buffer to return.
-
-   nbytes
-
-   Specifies the size of the buffer.
-
-   You must pass back the same pointer and size that were returned
-   by _XAllocTemp.
-
-Portability Considerations
-
-   Many machine architectures do not correctly or efficiently
-   access data at unaligned locations; their compilers pad out
-   structures to preserve this characteristic. Many other machines
-   capable of unaligned references pad inside of structures as
-   well to preserve alignment, because accessing aligned data is
-   usually much faster. Because the library and the server use
-   structures to access data at arbitrary points in a byte stream,
-   all data in request and reply packets must be naturally
-   aligned; that is, 16-bit data starts on 16-bit boundaries in
-   the request and 32-bit data on 32-bit boundaries. All requests
-   must be a multiple of 32 bits in length to preserve the natural
-   alignment in the data stream. You must pad structures out to
-   32-bit boundaries. Pad information does not have to be zeroed
-   unless you want to preserve such fields for future use in your
-   protocol requests, but it is recommended to zero it to avoid
-   inadvertant data leakage and improve compressability. Floating
-   point varies radically between machines and should be avoided
-   completely if at all possible.
-
-   This code may run on machines with 16-bit ints. So, if any
-   integer argument, variable, or return value either can take
-   only nonnegative values or is declared as a CARD16 in the
-   protocol, be sure to declare it as unsigned int and not as int.
-   (This, of course, does not apply to Booleans or enumerations.)
-
-   Similarly, if any integer argument or return value is declared
-   CARD32 in the protocol, declare it as an unsigned long and not
-   as int or long. This also goes for any internal variables that
-   may take on values larger than the maximum 16-bit unsigned int.
-
-   The library has always assumed that a char is 8 bits, a short
-   is 16 bits, an int is 16 or 32 bits, and a long is 32 bits.
-   Unfortunately, this assumption remains on machines where a long
-   can hold 64-bits, and many functions and structures require
-   unnecessarily large fields to avoid breaking compatibility with
-   existing code. Special care must be taken with arrays of values
-   that are transmitted in the protocol as CARD32 or INT32 but
-   have to be converted to arrays of 64-bit long when passed to or
-   from client applications.
-
-   The PackData macro is a half-hearted attempt to deal with the
-   possibility of 32 bit shorts. However, much more work is needed
-   to make this work properly.
-
-Deriving the Correct Extension Opcode
-
-   The remaining problem a writer of an extension stub procedure
-   faces that the core protocol does not face is to map from the
-   call to the proper major and minor opcodes. While there are a
-   number of strategies, the simplest and fastest is outlined
-   below.
-     * Declare an array of pointers, _NFILE long (this is normally
-       found in <stdio.h> and is the number of file descriptors
-       supported on the system) of type XExtCodes. Make sure these
-       are all initialized to NULL.
-     * When your stub is entered, your initialization test is just
-       to use the display pointer passed in to access the file
-       descriptor and an index into the array. If the entry is
-       NULL, then this is the first time you are entering the
-       procedure for this display. Call your initialization
-       procedure and pass to it the display pointer.
-     * Once in your initialization procedure, call XInitExtension;
-       if it succeeds, store the pointer returned into this array.
-       Make sure to establish a close display handler to allow you
-       to zero the entry. Do whatever other initialization your
-       extension requires. (For example, install event handlers
-       and so on.) Your initialization procedure would normally
-       return a pointer to the XExtCodes structure for this
-       extension, which is what would normally be found in your
-       array of pointers.
-     * After returning from your initialization procedure, the
-       stub can now continue normally, because it has its major
-       opcode safely in its hand in the XExtCodes structure.
-
-Appendix D. Compatibility Functions
-
-   Table of Contents
-
-   X Version 11 Compatibility Functions
-
-        Setting Standard Properties
-        Setting and Getting Window Sizing Hints
-        Getting and Setting an XStandardColormap Structure
-        Parsing Window Geometry
-        Getting the X Environment Defaults
-
-   X Version 10 Compatibility Functions
-
-        Drawing and Filling Polygons and Curves
-        Associating User Data with a Value
-
-   The X Version 11 and X Version 10 functions discussed in this
-   appendix are obsolete, have been superseded by newer X Version
-   11 functions, and are maintained for compatibility reasons
-   only.
-
-X Version 11 Compatibility Functions
-
-   You can use the X Version 11 compatibility functions to:
-     * Set standard properties
-     * Set and get window sizing hints
-     * Set and get an XStandardColormap structure
-     * Parse window geometry
-     * Get X environment defaults
-
-Setting Standard Properties
-
-   To specify a minimum set of properties describing the simplest
-   application, use XSetStandardProperties. This function has been
-   superseded by XSetWMProperties and sets all or portions of the
-   WM_NAME, WM_ICON_NAME, WM_HINTS, WM_COMMAND, and
-   WM_NORMAL_HINTS properties.
-
-   XSetStandardProperties(Display *display, Window w, char
-   *window_name, char *icon_name, Pixmap icon_pixmap, char **argv,
-   int argc, XSizeHints *hints);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   window_name
-
-   Specifies the window name, which should be a null-terminated
-   string.
-
-   icon_name
-
-   Specifies the icon name, which should be a null-terminated
-   string.
-
-   icon_pixmap
-
-   Specifies the bitmap that is to be used for the icon or None.
-
-   argv
-
-   Specifies the application's argument list.
-
-   argc
-
-   Specifies the number of arguments.
-
-   hints
-
-   Specifies a pointer to the size hints for the window in its
-   normal state.
-
-   The XSetStandardProperties function provides a means by which
-   simple applications set the most essential properties with a
-   single call. XSetStandardProperties should be used to give a
-   window manager some information about your program's
-   preferences. It should not be used by applications that need to
-   communicate more information than is possible with
-   XSetStandardProperties. (Typically, argv is the argv array of
-   your main program.) If the strings are not in the Host Portable
-   Character Encoding, the result is implementation-dependent.
-
-   XSetStandardProperties can generate BadAlloc and BadWindow
-   errors.
-
-Setting and Getting Window Sizing Hints
-
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to set or get window
-   sizing hints. The functions discussed in this section use the
-   flags and the XSizeHints structure, as defined in the
-   <X11/Xutil.h> header file and use the WM_NORMAL_HINTS property.
-
-   To set the size hints for a given window in its normal state,
-   use XSetNormalHints. This function has been superseded by
-   XSetWMNormalHints.
-
-   XSetNormalHints(Display *display, Window w, XSizeHints *hints);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   hints
-
-   Specifies a pointer to the size hints for the window in its
-   normal state.
-
-   The XSetNormalHints function sets the size hints structure for
-   the specified window. Applications use XSetNormalHints to
-   inform the window manager of the size or position desirable for
-   that window. In addition, an application that wants to move or
-   resize itself should call XSetNormalHints and specify its new
-   desired location and size as well as making direct Xlib calls
-   to move or resize. This is because window managers may ignore
-   redirected configure requests, but they pay attention to
-   property changes.
-
-   To set size hints, an application not only must assign values
-   to the appropriate members in the hints structure but also must
-   set the flags member of the structure to indicate which
-   information is present and where it came from. A call to
-   XSetNormalHints is meaningless, unless the flags member is set
-   to indicate which members of the structure have been assigned
-   values.
-
-   XSetNormalHints can generate BadAlloc and BadWindow errors.
-
-   To return the size hints for a window in its normal state, use
-   XGetNormalHints. This function has been superseded by
-   XGetWMNormalHints.
-
-   Status XGetNormalHints(Display *display, Window w, XSizeHints
-   *hints_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   hints_return
-
-   Returns the size hints for the window in its normal state.
-
-   The XGetNormalHints function returns the size hints for a
-   window in its normal state. It returns a nonzero status if it
-   succeeds or zero if the application specified no normal size
-   hints for this window.
-
-   XGetNormalHints can generate a BadWindow error.
-
-   The next two functions set and read the WM_ZOOM_HINTS property.
-
-   To set the zoom hints for a window, use XSetZoomHints. This
-   function is no longer supported by the Inter-Client
-   Communication Conventions Manual.
-
-   XSetZoomHints(Display *display, Window w, XSizeHints *zhints);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   zhints
-
-   Specifies a pointer to the zoom hints.
-
-   Many window managers think of windows in one of three states:
-   iconic, normal, or zoomed. The XSetZoomHints function provides
-   the window manager with information for the window in the
-   zoomed state.
-
-   XSetZoomHints can generate BadAlloc and BadWindow errors.
-
-   To read the zoom hints for a window, use XGetZoomHints. This
-   function is no longer supported by the Inter-Client
-   Communication Conventions Manual.
-
-   Status XGetZoomHints(Display *display, Window w, XSizeHints
-   *zhints_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   zhints_return
-
-   Returns the zoom hints.
-
-   The XGetZoomHints function returns the size hints for a window
-   in its zoomed state. It returns a nonzero status if it succeeds
-   or zero if the application specified no zoom size hints for
-   this window.
-
-   XGetZoomHints can generate a BadWindow error.
-
-   To set the value of any property of type WM_SIZE_HINTS, use
-   XSetSizeHints. This function has been superseded by
-   XSetWMSizeHints.
-
-   XSetSizeHints(Display *display, Window w, XSizeHints *hints,
-   Atom property);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   hints
-
-   Specifies a pointer to the size hints.
-
-   property
-
-   Specifies the property name.
-
-   The XSetSizeHints function sets the XSizeHints structure for
-   the named property and the specified window. This is used by
-   XSetNormalHints and XSetZoomHints and can be used to set the
-   value of any property of type WM_SIZE_HINTS. Thus, it may be
-   useful if other properties of that type get defined.
-
-   XSetSizeHints can generate BadAlloc, BadAtom, and BadWindow
-   errors.
-
-   To read the value of any property of type WM_SIZE_HINTS, use
-   XGetSizeHints. This function has been superseded by
-   XGetWMSizeHints.
-
-   Status XGetSizeHints(Display *display, Window w, XSizeHints
-   *hints_return, Atom property);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   hints_return
-
-   Returns the size hints.
-
-   property
-
-   Specifies the property name.
-
-   The XGetSizeHints function returns the XSizeHints structure for
-   the named property and the specified window. This is used by
-   XGetNormalHints and XGetZoomHints. It also can be used to
-   retrieve the value of any property of type WM_SIZE_HINTS. Thus,
-   it may be useful if other properties of that type get defined.
-   XGetSizeHints returns a nonzero status if a size hint was
-   defined or zero otherwise.
-
-   XGetSizeHints can generate BadAtom and BadWindow errors.
-
-Getting and Setting an XStandardColormap Structure
-
-   To get the XStandardColormap structure associated with one of
-   the described atoms, use XGetStandardColormap. This function
-   has been superseded by XGetRGBColormaps.
-
-   Status XGetStandardColormap(Display *display, Window w,
-   XStandardColormap *colormap_return, Atom property);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   colormap_return
-
-   Returns the colormap associated with the specified atom.
-
-   property
-
-   Specifies the property name.
-
-   The XGetStandardColormap function returns the colormap
-   definition associated with the atom supplied as the property
-   argument. XGetStandardColormap returns a nonzero status if
-   successful and zero otherwise. For example, to fetch the
-   standard GrayScale colormap for a display, you use
-   XGetStandardColormap with the following syntax:
-XGetStandardColormap(dpy, DefaultRootWindow(dpy), &cmap, XA_RGB_GRAY_MAP
-);
-
-   See section 14.3 for the semantics of standard colormaps.
-
-   XGetStandardColormap can generate BadAtom and BadWindow errors.
-
-   To set a standard colormap, use XSetStandardColormap. This
-   function has been superseded by XSetRGBColormaps.
-
-   XSetStandardColormap(Display *display, Window w,
-   XStandardColormap *colormap, Atom property);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   w
-
-   Specifies the window.
-
-   colormap
-
-   Specifies the colormap.
-
-   property
-
-   Specifies the property name.
-
-   The XSetStandardColormap function usually is only used by
-   window or session managers.
-
-   XSetStandardColormap can generate BadAlloc, BadAtom,
-   BadDrawable, and BadWindow errors.
-
-Parsing Window Geometry
-
-   To parse window geometry given a user-specified position and a
-   default position, use XGeometry. This function has been
-   superseded by XWMGeometry.
-
-   int XGeometry(Display *display, int screen, char *position,
-   char *default_position, unsigned int bwidth, unsigned int
-   fwidth, unsigned int fheight, int xadder, int yadder, int
-   *x_return, int *y_return, int *width_return, int
-   *height_return);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   screen
-
-   Specifies the screen.
-
-   position
-
-   default_position
-
-   Specify the geometry specifications.
-
-   bwidth
-
-   Specifies the border width.
-
-   fheight
-
-   fwidth
-
-   Specify the font height and width in pixels (increment size).
-
-   xadder
-
-   yadder
-
-   Specify additional interior padding needed in the window.
-
-   x_return
-
-   y_return
-
-   Return the x and y offsets.
-
-   width_return
-
-   height_return
-
-   Return the width and height determined.
-
-   You pass in the border width (bwidth), size of the increments
-   fwidth and fheight (typically font width and height), and any
-   additional interior space (xadder and yadder) to make it easy
-   to compute the resulting size. The XGeometry function returns
-   the position the window should be placed given a position and a
-   default position. XGeometry determines the placement of a
-   window using a geometry specification as specified by
-   XParseGeometry and the additional information about the window.
-   Given a fully qualified default geometry specification and an
-   incomplete geometry specification, XParseGeometry returns a
-   bitmask value as defined above in the XParseGeometry call, by
-   using the position argument.
-
-   The returned width and height will be the width and height
-   specified by default_position as overridden by any
-   user-specified position. They are not affected by fwidth,
-   fheight, xadder, or yadder. The x and y coordinates are
-   computed by using the border width, the screen width and
-   height, padding as specified by xadder and yadder, and the
-   fheight and fwidth times the width and height from the geometry
-   specifications.
-
-Getting the X Environment Defaults
-
-   The XGetDefault function provides a primitive interface to the
-   resource manager facilities discussed in chapter 15. It is only
-   useful in very simple applications.
-
-   char *XGetDefault(Display *display, char *program, char
-   *option);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   program
-
-   Specifies the program name for the Xlib defaults (usually
-   argv[0] of the main program).
-
-   option
-
-   Specifies the option name.
-
-   The XGetDefault function returns the value of the resource
-   prog.option, where prog is the program argument with the
-   directory prefix removed and option must be a single component.
-   Note that multilevel resources cannot be used with XGetDefault.
-   The class "Program.Name" is always used for the resource
-   lookup. If the specified option name does not exist for this
-   program, XGetDefault returns NULL. The strings returned by
-   XGetDefault are owned by Xlib and should not be modified or
-   freed by the client.
-
-   If a database has been set with XrmSetDatabase, that database
-   is used for the lookup. Otherwise, a database is created and is
-   set in the display (as if by calling XrmSetDatabase). The
-   database is created in the current locale. To create a
-   database, XGetDefault uses resources from the RESOURCE_MANAGER
-   property on the root window of screen zero. If no such property
-   exists, a resource file in the user's home directory is used.
-   On a POSIX-conformant system, this file is "$HOME/.Xdefaults".
-   After loading these defaults, XGetDefault merges additional
-   defaults specified by the XENVIRONMENT environment variable. If
-   XENVIRONMENT is defined, it contains a full path name for the
-   additional resource file. If XENVIRONMENT is not defined,
-   XGetDefault looks for "$HOME/.Xdefaults-name" , where name
-   specifies the name of the machine on which the application is
-   running.
-
-X Version 10 Compatibility Functions
-
-   You can use the X Version 10 compatibility functions to:
-     * Draw and fill polygons and curves
-     * Associate user data with a value
-
-Drawing and Filling Polygons and Curves
-
-   Xlib provides functions that you can use to draw or fill
-   arbitrary polygons or curves. These functions are provided
-   mainly for compatibility with X Version 10 and have no server
-   support. That is, they call other Xlib functions, not the
-   server directly. Thus, if you just have straight lines to draw,
-   using XDrawLines or XDrawSegments is much faster.
-
-   The functions discussed here provide all the functionality of
-   the X Version 10 functions XDraw, XDrawFilled, XDrawPatterned,
-   XDrawDashed, and XDrawTiled. They are as compatible as possible
-   given X Version 11's new line-drawing functions. One thing to
-   note, however, is that VertexDrawLastPoint is no longer
-   supported. Also, the error status returned is the opposite of
-   what it was under X Version 10 (this is the X Version 11
-   standard error status). XAppendVertex and XClearVertexFlag from
-   X Version 10 also are not supported.
-
-   Just how the graphics context you use is set up actually
-   determines whether you get dashes or not, and so on. Lines are
-   properly joined if they connect and include the closing of a
-   closed figure (see XDrawLines). The functions discussed here
-   fail (return zero) only if they run out of memory or are passed
-   a Vertex list that has a Vertex with VertexStartClosed set that
-   is not followed by a Vertex with VertexEndClosed set.
-
-   To achieve the effects of the X Version 10 XDraw, XDrawDashed,
-   and XDrawPatterned, use XDraw.
-
-   #include <X11/X10.h>
-
-   Status XDraw(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, Vertex
-   *vlist, int vcount);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   d
-
-   Specifies the drawable.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   vlist
-
-   Specifies a pointer to the list of vertices that indicate what
-   to draw.
-
-   vcount
-
-   Specifies how many vertices are in vlist.
-
-   The XDraw function draws an arbitrary polygon or curve. The
-   figure drawn is defined by the specified list of vertices
-   (vlist). The points are connected by lines as specified in the
-   flags in the vertex structure.
-
-   Each Vertex, as defined in <X11/X10.h>, is a structure with the
-   following members:
-typedef struct _Vertex {
-        short x,y;
-        unsigned short flags;
-} Vertex;
-
-   The x and y members are the coordinates of the vertex that are
-   relative to either the upper left inside corner of the drawable
-   (if VertexRelative is zero) or the previous vertex (if
-   VertexRelative is one).
-
-   The flags, as defined in <X11/X10.h>, are as follows:
-VertexRelative     0x0001     /* else absolute */
-VertexDontDraw     0x0002     /* else draw */
-VertexCurved       0x0004     /* else straight */
-VertexStartClosed  0x0008     /* else not */
-VertexEndClosed    0x0010     /* else not */
-
-     * If VertexRelative is not set, the coordinates are absolute
-       (that is, relative to the drawable's origin). The first
-       vertex must be an absolute vertex.
-     * If VertexDontDraw is one, no line or curve is drawn from
-       the previous vertex to this one. This is analogous to
-       picking up the pen and moving to another place before
-       drawing another line.
-     * If VertexCurved is one, a spline algorithm is used to draw
-       a smooth curve from the previous vertex through this one to
-       the next vertex. Otherwise, a straight line is drawn from
-       the previous vertex to this one. It makes sense to set
-       VertexCurved to one only if a previous and next vertex are
-       both defined (either explicitly in the array or through the
-       definition of a closed curve).
-     * It is permissible for VertexDontDraw bits and VertexCurved
-       bits both to be one. This is useful if you want to define
-       the previous point for the smooth curve but do not want an
-       actual curve drawing to start until this point.
-     * If VertexStartClosed is one, then this point marks the
-       beginning of a closed curve. This vertex must be followed
-       later in the array by another vertex whose effective
-       coordinates are identical and that has a VertexEndClosed
-       bit of one. The points in between form a cycle to determine
-       predecessor and successor vertices for the spline
-       algorithm.
-
-   This function uses these GC components: function, plane-mask,
-   line-width, line-style, cap-style, join-style, fill-style,
-   subwindow-mode, clip-x-origin, clip-y-origin, and clip-mask. It
-   also uses these GC mode-dependent components: foreground,
-   background, tile, stipple, tile-stipple-x-origin,
-   tile-stipple-y-origin, dash-offset, and dash-list.
-
-   To achieve the effects of the X Version 10 XDrawTiled and
-   XDrawFilled, use XDrawFilled.
-
-   #include <X11/X10.h>
-
-   Status XDrawFilled(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc, Vertex
-   *vlist, int vcount);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   d
-
-   Specifies the drawable.
-
-   gc
-
-   Specifies the GC.
-
-   vlist
-
-   Specifies a pointer to the list of vertices that indicate what
-   to draw.
-
-   vcount
-
-   Specifies how many vertices are in vlist.
-
-   The XDrawFilled function draws arbitrary polygons or curves and
-   then fills them.
-
-   This function uses these GC components: function, plane-mask,
-   line-width, line-style, cap-style, join-style, fill-style,
-   subwindow-mode, clip-x-origin, clip-y-origin, and clip-mask. It
-   also uses these GC mode-dependent components: foreground,
-   background, tile, stipple, tile-stipple-x-origin,
-   tile-stipple-y-origin, dash-offset, dash-list, fill-style, and
-   fill-rule.
-
-Associating User Data with a Value
-
-   These functions have been superseded by the context management
-   functions (see section 16.10). It is often necessary to
-   associate arbitrary information with resource IDs. Xlib
-   provides the XAssocTable functions that you can use to make
-   such an association. Application programs often need to be able
-   to easily refer to their own data structures when an event
-   arrives. The XAssocTable system provides users of the X library
-   with a method for associating their own data structures with X
-   resources (Pixmaps, Fonts, Windows, and so on).
-
-   An XAssocTable can be used to type X resources. For example,
-   the user may want to have three or four types of windows, each
-   with different properties. This can be accomplished by
-   associating each X window ID with a pointer to a window
-   property data structure defined by the user. A generic type has
-   been defined in the X library for resource IDs. It is called an
-   XID.
-
-   There are a few guidelines that should be observed when using
-   an XAssocTable :
-     * All XIDs are relative to the specified display.
-     * Because of the hashing scheme used by the association
-       mechanism, the following rules for determining the size of
-       a XAssocTable should be followed. Associations will be made
-       and looked up more efficiently if the table size (number of
-       buckets in the hashing system) is a power of two and if
-       there are not more than 8 XIDs per bucket.
-
-   To return a pointer to a new XAssocTable, use
-   XCreateAssocTable.
-
-   XAssocTable *XCreateAssocTable(int size);
-
-   size
-
-   Specifies the number of buckets in the hash system of
-   XAssocTable.
-
-   The size argument specifies the number of buckets in the hash
-   system of XAssocTable. For reasons of efficiency the number of
-   buckets should be a power of two. Some size suggestions might
-   be: use 32 buckets per 100 objects, and a reasonable maximum
-   number of objects per buckets is 8. If an error allocating
-   memory for the XAssocTable occurs, a NULL pointer is returned.
-
-   To create an entry in a given XAssocTable, use XMakeAssoc.
-
-   XMakeAssoc(Display *display, XAssocTable *table, XID x_id, char
-   *data);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   table
-
-   Specifies the assoc table.
-
-   x_id
-
-   Specifies the X resource ID.
-
-   data
-
-   Specifies the data to be associated with the X resource ID.
-
-   The XMakeAssoc function inserts data into an XAssocTable keyed
-   on an XID. Data is inserted into the table only once. Redundant
-   inserts are ignored. The queue in each association bucket is
-   sorted from the lowest XID to the highest XID.
-
-   To obtain data from a given XAssocTable, use XLookUpAssoc.
-
-   char *XLookUpAssoc(Display *display, XAssocTable *table, XID
-   x_id);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   table
-
-   Specifies the assoc table.
-
-   x_id
-
-   Specifies the X resource ID.
-
-   The XLookUpAssoc function retrieves the data stored in an
-   XAssocTable by its XID. If an appropriately matching XID can be
-   found in the table, XLookUpAssoc returns the data associated
-   with it. If the x_id cannot be found in the table, it returns
-   NULL.
-
-   To delete an entry from a given XAssocTable, use XDeleteAssoc.
-
-   XDeleteAssoc(Display *display, XAssocTable *table, XID x_id);
-
-   display
-
-   Specifies the connection to the X server.
-
-   table
-
-   Specifies the assoc table.
-
-   x_id
-
-   Specifies the X resource ID.
-
-   The XDeleteAssoc function deletes an association in an
-   XAssocTable keyed on its XID. Redundant deletes (and deletes of
-   nonexistent XIDs) are ignored. Deleting associations in no way
-   impairs the performance of an XAssocTable.
-
-   To free the memory associated with a given XAssocTable, use
-   XDestroyAssocTable.
-
-   XDestroyAssocTable(XAssocTable *table);
-
-   table
-
-   Specifies the assoc table.
-
-Glossary
-
-   Access control list
-          X maintains a list of hosts from which client programs
-          can be run. By default, only programs on the local host
-          and hosts specified in an initial list read by the
-          server can use the display. This access control list can
-          be changed by clients on the local host. Some server
-          implementations can also implement other authorization
-          mechanisms in addition to or in place of this mechanism.
-          The action of this mechanism can be conditional based on
-          the authorization protocol name and data received by the
-          server at connection setup.
-
-   Active grab
-          A grab is active when the pointer or keyboard is
-          actually owned by the single grabbing client.
-
-   Ancestors
-          If W is an inferior of A, then A is an ancestor of W.
-
-   Atom
-          An atom is a unique ID corresponding to a string name.
-          Atoms are used to identify properties, types, and
-          selections.
-
-   Background
-          An InputOutput window can have a background, which is
-          defined as a pixmap. When regions of the window have
-          their contents lost or invalidated, the server
-          automatically tiles those regions with the background.
-
-   Backing store
-          When a server maintains the contents of a window, the
-          pixels saved off-screen are known as a backing store.
-
-   Base font name
-          A font name used to select a family of fonts whose
-          members may be encoded in various charsets. The
-          CharSetRegistry and CharSetEncoding fields of an XLFD
-          name identify the charset of the font. A base font name
-          may be a full XLFD name, with all fourteen '-'
-          delimiters, or an abbreviated XLFD name containing only
-          the first 12 fields of an XLFD name, up to but not
-          including CharSetRegistry, with or without the
-          thirteenth '-', or a non-XLFD name. Any XLFD fields may
-          contain wild cards.
-
-          When creating an XFontSet, Xlib accepts from the client
-          a list of one or more base font names which select one
-          or more font families. They are combined with charset
-          names obtained from the encoding of the locale to load
-          the fonts required to render text.
-
-   Bit gravity
-          When a window is resized, the contents of the window are
-          not necessarily discarded. It is possible to request
-          that the server relocate the previous contents to some
-          region of the window (though no guarantees are made).
-          This attraction of window contents for some location of
-          a window is known as bit gravity.
-
-   Bit plane
-          When a pixmap or window is thought of as a stack of
-          bitmaps, each bitmap is called a bit plane or plane.
-
-   Bitmap
-          A bitmap is a pixmap of depth one.
-
-   Border
-          An InputOutput window can have a border of equal
-          thickness on all four sides of the window. The contents
-          of the border are defined by a pixmap, and the server
-          automatically maintains the contents of the border.
-          Exposure events are never generated for border regions.
-
-   Button grabbing
-          Buttons on the pointer can be passively grabbed by a
-          client. When the button is pressed, the pointer is then
-          actively grabbed by the client.
-
-   Byte order
-          For image (pixmap/bitmap) data, the server defines the
-          byte order, and clients with different native byte
-          ordering must swap bytes as necessary. For all other
-          parts of the protocol, the client defines the byte
-          order, and the server swaps bytes as necessary.
-
-   Character
-          A member of a set of elements used for the organization,
-          control, or representation of text (ISO2022, as adapted
-          by XPG3). Note that in ISO2022 terms, a character is not
-          bound to a coded value until it is identified as part of
-          a coded character set.
-
-   Character glyph
-          The abstract graphical symbol for a character. Character
-          glyphs may or may not map one-to-one to font glyphs, and
-          may be context-dependent, varying with the adjacent
-          characters. Multiple characters may map to a single
-          character glyph.
-
-   Character set
-          A collection of characters.
-
-   Charset
-          An encoding with a uniform, state-independent mapping
-          from characters to codepoints. A coded character set.
-
-          For display in X, there can be a direct mapping from a
-          charset to one font, if the width of all characters in
-          the charset is either one or two bytes. A text string
-          encoded in an encoding such as Shift-JIS cannot be
-          passed directly to the X server, because the text
-          imaging requests accept only single-width charsets
-          (either 8 or 16 bits). Charsets which meet these
-          restrictions can serve as ``font charsets''. Font
-          charsets strictly speaking map font indices to font
-          glyphs, not characters to character glyphs.
-
-          Note that a single font charset is sometimes used as the
-          encoding of a locale, for example, ISO8859-1.
-
-   Children
-          The children of a window are its first-level subwindows.
-
-   Class
-          Windows can be of different classes or types. See the
-          entries for InputOnly and InputOutput windows for
-          further information about valid window types.
-
-   Client
-          An application program connects to the window system
-          server by some interprocess communication (IPC) path,
-          such as a TCP connection or a shared memory buffer. This
-          program is referred to as a client of the window system
-          server. More precisely, the client is the IPC path
-          itself. A program with multiple paths open to the server
-          is viewed as multiple clients by the protocol. Resource
-          lifetimes are controlled by connection lifetimes, not by
-          program lifetimes.
-
-   Clipping region
-          In a graphics context, a bitmap or list of rectangles
-          can be specified to restrict output to a particular
-          region of the window. The image defined by the bitmap or
-          rectangles is called a clipping region.
-
-   Coded character
-          A character bound to a codepoint.
-
-   Coded character set
-          A set of unambiguous rules that establishes a character
-          set and the one-to-one relationship between each
-          character of the set and its bit representation.
-          (ISO2022, as adapted by XPG3) A definition of a
-          one-to-one mapping of a set of characters to a set of
-          codepoints.
-
-   Codepoint
-          The coded representation of a single character in a
-          coded character set.
-
-   Colormap
-          A colormap consists of a set of entries defining color
-          values. The colormap associated with a window is used to
-          display the contents of the window; each pixel value
-          indexes the colormap to produce an RGB value that drives
-          the guns of a monitor. Depending on hardware
-          limitations, one or more colormaps can be installed at
-          one time so that windows associated with those maps
-          display with true colors.
-
-   Connection
-          The IPC path between the server and client program is
-          known as a connection. A client program typically (but
-          not necessarily) has one connection to the server over
-          which requests and events are sent.
-
-   Containment
-          A window contains the pointer if the window is viewable
-          and the hotspot of the cursor is within a visible region
-          of the window or a visible region of one of its
-          inferiors. The border of the window is included as part
-          of the window for containment. The pointer is in a
-          window if the window contains the pointer but no
-          inferior contains the pointer.
-
-   Coordinate system
-          The coordinate system has X horizontal and Y vertical,
-          with the origin [0, 0] at the upper left. Coordinates
-          are integral and coincide with pixel centers. Each
-          window and pixmap has its own coordinate system. For a
-          window, the origin is inside the border at the inside
-          upper-left corner.
-
-   Cursor
-          A cursor is the visible shape of the pointer on a
-          screen. It consists of a hotspot, a source bitmap, a
-          shape bitmap, and a pair of colors. The cursor defined
-          for a window controls the visible appearance when the
-          pointer is in that window.
-
-   Depth
-          The depth of a window or pixmap is the number of bits
-          per pixel it has. The depth of a graphics context is the
-          depth of the drawables it can be used in conjunction
-          with graphics output.
-
-   Device
-          Keyboards, mice, tablets, track-balls, button boxes, and
-          so on are all collectively known as input devices.
-          Pointers can have one or more buttons (the most common
-          number is three). The core protocol only deals with two
-          devices: the keyboard and the pointer.
-
-   DirectColor
-          DirectColor is a class of colormap in which a pixel
-          value is decomposed into three separate subfields for
-          indexing. The first subfield indexes an array to produce
-          red intensity values. The second subfield indexes a
-          second array to produce blue intensity values. The third
-          subfield indexes a third array to produce green
-          intensity values. The RGB (red, green, and blue) values
-          in the colormap entry can be changed dynamically.
-
-   Display
-          A server, together with its screens and input devices,
-          is called a display. The Xlib Display structure contains
-          all information about the particular display and its
-          screens as well as the state that Xlib needs to
-          communicate with the display over a particular
-          connection.
-
-   Drawable
-          Both windows and pixmaps can be used as sources and
-          destinations in graphics operations. These windows and
-          pixmaps are collectively known as drawables. However, an
-          InputOnly window cannot be used as a source or
-          destination in a graphics operation.
-
-   Encoding
-          A set of unambiguous rules that establishes a character
-          set and a relationship between the characters and their
-          representations. The character set does not have to be
-          fixed to a finite pre-defined set of characters. The
-          representations do not have to be of uniform length.
-          Examples are an ISO2022 graphic set, a state-independent
-          or state-dependent combination of graphic sets, possibly
-          including control sets, and the X Compound Text
-          encoding.
-
-          In X, encodings are identified by a string which appears
-          as: the CharSetRegistry and CharSetEncoding components
-          of an XLFD name; the name of a charset of the locale for
-          which a font could not be found; or an atom which
-          identifies the encoding of a text property or which
-          names an encoding for a text selection target type.
-          Encoding names should be composed of characters from the
-          X Portable Character Set.
-
-   Escapement
-          The escapement of a string is the distance in pixels in
-          the primary draw direction from the drawing origin to
-          the origin of the next character (that is, the one
-          following the given string) to be drawn.
-
-   Event
-          Clients are informed of information asynchronously by
-          means of events. These events can be either
-          asynchronously generated from devices or generated as
-          side effects of client requests. Events are grouped into
-          types. The server never sends an event to a client
-          unless the client has specifically asked to be informed
-          of that type of event. However, clients can force events
-          to be sent to other clients. Events are typically
-          reported relative to a window.
-
-   Event mask
-          Events are requested relative to a window. The set of
-          event types a client requests relative to a window is
-          described by using an event mask.
-
-   Event propagation
-          Device-related events propagate from the source window
-          to ancestor windows until some client has expressed
-          interest in handling that type of event or until the
-          event is discarded explicitly.
-
-   Event source
-          The deepest viewable window that the pointer is in is
-          called the source of a device-related event.
-
-   Event synchronization
-          There are certain race conditions possible when
-          demultiplexing device events to clients (in particular,
-          deciding where pointer and keyboard events should be
-          sent when in the middle of window management
-          operations). The event synchronization mechanism allows
-          synchronous processing of device events.
-
-   Exposure event
-          Servers do not guarantee to preserve the contents of
-          windows when windows are obscured or reconfigured.
-          Exposure events are sent to clients to inform them when
-          contents of regions of windows have been lost.
-
-   Extension
-          Named extensions to the core protocol can be defined to
-          extend the system. Extensions to output requests,
-          resources, and event types are all possible and
-          expected.
-
-   Font
-          A font is an array of glyphs (typically characters). The
-          protocol does no translation or interpretation of
-          character sets. The client simply indicates values used
-          to index the glyph array. A font contains additional
-          metric information to determine interglyph and interline
-          spacing.
-
-   Font glyph
-          The abstract graphical symbol for an index into a font.
-
-   Frozen events
-          Clients can freeze event processing during keyboard and
-          pointer grabs.
-
-   GC
-          GC is an abbreviation for graphics context. See Graphics
-          context.
-
-   Glyph
-          An identified abstract graphical symbol independent of
-          any actual image. (ISO/IEC/DIS 9541-1) An abstract
-          visual representation of a graphic character, not bound
-          to a codepoint.
-
-   Glyph image
-          An image of a glyph, as obtained from a glyph
-          representation displayed on a presentation surface.
-          (ISO/IEC/DIS 9541-1)
-
-   Grab
-          Keyboard keys, the keyboard, pointer buttons, the
-          pointer, and the server can be grabbed for exclusive use
-          by a client. In general, these facilities are not
-          intended to be used by normal applications but are
-          intended for various input and window managers to
-          implement various styles of user interfaces.
-
-   Graphics context
-          Various information for graphics output is stored in a
-          graphics context (GC), such as foreground pixel,
-          background pixel, line width, clipping region, and so
-          on. A graphics context can only be used with drawables
-          that have the same root and the same depth as the
-          graphics context.
-
-   Gravity
-          The contents of windows and windows themselves have a
-          gravity, which determines how the contents move when a
-          window is resized. See Bit gravity and Window gravity.
-
-   GrayScale
-          GrayScale can be viewed as a degenerate case of
-          PseudoColor, in which the red, green, and blue values in
-          any given colormap entry are equal and thus, produce
-          shades of gray. The gray values can be changed
-          dynamically.
-
-   Host Portable Character Encoding
-          The encoding of the X Portable Character Set on the
-          host. The encoding itself is not defined by this
-          standard, but the encoding must be the same in all
-          locales supported by Xlib on the host. If a string is
-          said to be in the Host Portable Character Encoding, then
-          it only contains characters from the X Portable
-          Character Set, in the host encoding.
-
-   Hotspot
-          A cursor has an associated hotspot, which defines the
-          point in the cursor corresponding to the coordinates
-          reported for the pointer.
-
-   Identifier
-          An identifier is a unique value associated with a
-          resource that clients use to name that resource. The
-          identifier can be used over any connection to name the
-          resource.
-
-   Inferiors
-          The inferiors of a window are all of the subwindows
-          nested below it: the children, the children's children,
-          and so on.
-
-   Input focus
-          The input focus is usually a window defining the scope
-          for processing of keyboard input. If a generated
-          keyboard event usually would be reported to this window
-          or one of its inferiors, the event is reported as usual.
-          Otherwise, the event is reported with respect to the
-          focus window. The input focus also can be set such that
-          all keyboard events are discarded and such that the
-          focus window is dynamically taken to be the root window
-          of whatever screen the pointer is on at each keyboard
-          event.
-
-   Input manager
-          Control over keyboard input is typically provided by an
-          input manager client, which usually is part of a window
-          manager.
-
-   InputOnly window
-          An InputOnly window is a window that cannot be used for
-          graphics requests. InputOnly windows are invisible and
-          are used to control such things as cursors, input event
-          generation, and grabbing. InputOnly windows cannot have
-          InputOutput windows as inferiors.
-
-   InputOutput window
-          An InputOutput window is the normal kind of window that
-          is used for both input and output. InputOutput windows
-          can have both InputOutput and InputOnly windows as
-          inferiors.
-
-   Internationalization
-          The process of making software adaptable to the
-          requirements of different native languages, local
-          customs, and character string encodings. Making a
-          computer program adaptable to different locales without
-          program source modifications or recompilation.
-
-   ISO2022
-          ISO standard for code extension techniques for 7-bit and
-          8-bit coded character sets.
-
-   Key grabbing
-          Keys on the keyboard can be passively grabbed by a
-          client. When the key is pressed, the keyboard is then
-          actively grabbed by the client.
-
-   Keyboard grabbing
-          A client can actively grab control of the keyboard, and
-          key events will be sent to that client rather than the
-          client the events would normally have been sent to.
-
-   Keysym
-          An encoding of a symbol on a keycap on a keyboard.
-
-   Latin-1
-          The coded character set defined by the ISO8859-1
-          standard.
-
-   Latin Portable Character Encoding
-          The encoding of the X Portable Character Set using the
-          Latin-1 codepoints plus ASCII control characters. If a
-          string is said to be in the Latin Portable Character
-          Encoding, then it only contains characters from the X
-          Portable Character Set, not all of Latin-1.
-
-   Locale
-          The international environment of a computer program
-          defining the ``localized'' behavior of that program at
-          run-time. This information can be established from one
-          or more sets of localization data. ANSI C defines
-          locale-specific processing by C system library calls.
-          See ANSI C and the X/Open Portability Guide
-          specifications for more details. In this specification,
-          on implementations that conform to the ANSI C library,
-          the ``current locale'' is the current setting of the
-          LC_CTYPE setlocale category. Associated with each locale
-          is a text encoding. When text is processed in the
-          context of a locale, the text must be in the encoding of
-          the locale. The current locale affects Xlib in its:
-
-          + Encoding and processing of input method text
-          + Encoding of resource files and values
-          + Encoding and imaging of text strings
-          + Encoding and decoding for inter-client text
-            communication
-
-   Locale name
-          The identifier used to select the desired locale for the
-          host C library and X library functions. On ANSI C
-          library compliant systems, the locale argument to the
-          setlocale function.
-
-   Localization
-          The process of establishing information within a
-          computer system specific to the operation of particular
-          native languages, local customs and coded character
-          sets. (XPG3)
-
-   Mapped
-          A window is said to be mapped if a map call has been
-          performed on it. Unmapped windows and their inferiors
-          are never viewable or visible.
-
-   Modifier keys
-          Shift, Control, Meta, Super, Hyper, Alt, Compose, Apple,
-          CapsLock, ShiftLock, and similar keys are called
-          modifier keys.
-
-   Monochrome
-          Monochrome is a special case of StaticGray in which
-          there are only two colormap entries.
-
-   Multibyte
-          A character whose codepoint is stored in more than one
-          byte; any encoding which can contain multibyte
-          characters; text in a multibyte encoding. The ``char *''
-          null-terminated string datatype in ANSI C. Note that
-          references in this document to multibyte strings imply
-          only that the strings may contain multibyte characters.
-
-   Obscure
-          A window is obscured if some other window obscures it. A
-          window can be partially obscured and so still have
-          visible regions. Window A obscures window B if both are
-          viewable InputOutput windows, if A is higher in the
-          global stacking order, and if the rectangle defined by
-          the outside edges of A intersects the rectangle defined
-          by the outside edges of B. Note the distinction between
-          obscures and occludes. Also note that window borders are
-          included in the calculation.
-
-   Occlude
-          A window is occluded if some other window occludes it.
-          Window A occludes window B if both are mapped, if A is
-          higher in the global stacking order, and if the
-          rectangle defined by the outside edges of A intersects
-          the rectangle defined by the outside edges of B. Note
-          the distinction between occludes and obscures. Also note
-          that window borders are included in the calculation and
-          that InputOnly windows never obscure other windows but
-          can occlude other windows.
-
-   Padding
-          Some padding bytes are inserted in the data stream to
-          maintain alignment of the protocol requests on natural
-          boundaries. This increases ease of portability to some
-          machine architectures.
-
-   Parent window
-          If C is a child of P, then P is the parent of C.
-
-   Passive grab
-          Grabbing a key or button is a passive grab. The grab
-          activates when the key or button is actually pressed.
-
-   Pixel value
-          A pixel is an N-bit value, where N is the number of bit
-          planes used in a particular window or pixmap (that is,
-          is the depth of the window or pixmap). A pixel in a
-          window indexes a colormap to derive an actual color to
-          be displayed.
-
-   Pixmap
-          A pixmap is a three-dimensional array of bits. A pixmap
-          is normally thought of as a two-dimensional array of
-          pixels, where each pixel can be a value from 0 to 2^N-1,
-          and where N is the depth (z axis) of the pixmap. A
-          pixmap can also be thought of as a stack of N bitmaps. A
-          pixmap can only be used on the screen that it was
-          created in.
-
-   Plane
-          When a pixmap or window is thought of as a stack of
-          bitmaps, each bitmap is called a plane or bit plane.
-
-   Plane mask
-          Graphics operations can be restricted to only affect a
-          subset of bit planes of a destination. A plane mask is a
-          bit mask describing which planes are to be modified. The
-          plane mask is stored in a graphics context.
-
-   Pointer
-          The pointer is the pointing device currently attached to
-          the cursor and tracked on the screens.
-
-   Pointer grabbing
-          A client can actively grab control of the pointer. Then
-          button and motion events will be sent to that client
-          rather than the client the events would normally have
-          been sent to.
-
-   Pointing device
-          A pointing device is typically a mouse, tablet, or some
-          other device with effective dimensional motion. The core
-          protocol defines only one visible cursor, which tracks
-          whatever pointing device is attached as the pointer.
-
-   POSIX
-          Portable Operating System Interface, ISO/IEC 9945-1
-          (IEEE Std 1003.1).
-
-   POSIX Portable Filename Character Set
-          The set of 65 characters which can be used in naming
-          files on a POSIX-compliant host that are correctly
-          processed in all locales. The set is:
-
-          a..z A..Z 0..9 ._-
-
-   Property
-          Windows can have associated properties that consist of a
-          name, a type, a data format, and some data. The protocol
-          places no interpretation on properties. They are
-          intended as a general-purpose naming mechanism for
-          clients. For example, clients might use properties to
-          share information such as resize hints, program names,
-          and icon formats with a window manager.
-
-   Property list
-          The property list of a window is the list of properties
-          that have been defined for the window.
-
-   PseudoColor
-          PseudoColor is a class of colormap in which a pixel
-          value indexes the colormap entry to produce an
-          independent RGB value; that is, the colormap is viewed
-          as an array of triples (RGB values). The RGB values can
-          be changed dynamically.
-
-   Rectangle
-          A rectangle specified by [x,y,w,h] has an infinitely
-          thin outline path with corners at [x,y], [x+w,y],
-          [x+w,y+h], and [x, y+h]. When a rectangle is filled, the
-          lower-right edges are not drawn. For example, if w=h=0,
-          nothing would be drawn. For w=h=1, a single pixel would
-          be drawn.
-
-   Redirecting control
-          Window managers (or client programs) may enforce window
-          layout policy in various ways. When a client attempts to
-          change the size or position of a window, the operation
-          may be redirected to a specified client rather than the
-          operation actually being performed.
-
-   Reply
-          Information requested by a client program using the X
-          protocol is sent back to the client with a reply. Both
-          events and replies are multiplexed on the same
-          connection. Most requests do not generate replies, but
-          some requests generate multiple replies.
-
-   Request
-          A command to the server is called a request. It is a
-          single block of data sent over a connection.
-
-   Resource
-          Windows, pixmaps, cursors, fonts, graphics contexts, and
-          colormaps are known as resources. They all have unique
-          identifiers associated with them for naming purposes.
-          The lifetime of a resource usually is bounded by the
-          lifetime of the connection over which the resource was
-          created.
-
-   RGB values
-          RGB values are the red, green, and blue intensity values
-          that are used to define a color. These values are always
-          represented as 16-bit, unsigned numbers, with 0 the
-          minimum intensity and 65535 the maximum intensity. The X
-          server scales these values to match the display
-          hardware.
-
-   Root
-          The root of a pixmap or graphics context is the same as
-          the root of whatever drawable was used when the pixmap
-          or GC was created. The root of a window is the root
-          window under which the window was created.
-
-   Root window
-          Each screen has a root window covering it. The root
-          window cannot be reconfigured or unmapped, but otherwise
-          it acts as a full-fledged window. A root window has no
-          parent.
-
-   Save set
-          The save set of a client is a list of other clients'
-          windows that, if they are inferiors of one of the
-          client's windows at connection close, should not be
-          destroyed and that should be remapped if currently
-          unmapped. Save sets are typically used by window
-          managers to avoid lost windows if the manager should
-          terminate abnormally.
-
-   Scanline
-          A scanline is a list of pixel or bit values viewed as a
-          horizontal row (all values having the same y coordinate)
-          of an image, with the values ordered by increasing the x
-          coordinate.
-
-   Scanline order
-          An image represented in scanline order contains
-          scanlines ordered by increasing the y coordinate.
-
-   Screen
-          A server can provide several independent screens, which
-          typically have physically independent monitors. This
-          would be the expected configuration when there is only a
-          single keyboard and pointer shared among the screens. A
-          Screen structure contains the information about that
-          screen and is linked to the Display structure.
-
-   Selection
-          A selection can be thought of as an indirect property
-          with dynamic type. That is, rather than having the
-          property stored in the X server, it is maintained by
-          some client (the owner). A selection is global and is
-          thought of as belonging to the user and being maintained
-          by clients, rather than being private to a particular
-          window subhierarchy or a particular set of clients. When
-          a client asks for the contents of a selection, it
-          specifies a selection target type, which can be used to
-          control the transmitted representation of the contents.
-          For example, if the selection is ``the last thing the
-          user clicked on,'' and that is currently an image, then
-          the target type might specify whether the contents of
-          the image should be sent in XY format or Z format.
-
-          The target type can also be used to control the class of
-          contents transmitted; for example, asking for the
-          ``looks'' (fonts, line spacing, indentation, and so
-          forth) of a paragraph selection, rather than the text of
-          the paragraph. The target type can also be used for
-          other purposes. The protocol does not constrain the
-          semantics.
-
-   Server
-          The server, which is also referred to as the X server,
-          provides the basic windowing mechanism. It handles IPC
-          connections from clients, multiplexes graphics requests
-          onto the screens, and demultiplexes input back to the
-          appropriate clients.
-
-   Server grabbing
-          The server can be grabbed by a single client for
-          exclusive use. This prevents processing of any requests
-          from other client connections until the grab is
-          completed. This is typically only a transient state for
-          such things as rubber-banding, pop-up menus, or
-          executing requests indivisibly.
-
-   Shift sequence
-          ISO2022 defines control characters and escape sequences
-          which temporarily (single shift) or permanently (locking
-          shift) cause a different character set to be in effect
-          (``invoking'' a character set).
-
-   Sibling
-          Children of the same parent window are known as sibling
-          windows.
-
-   Stacking order
-          Sibling windows, similar to sheets of paper on a desk,
-          can stack on top of each other. Windows above both
-          obscure and occlude lower windows. The relationship
-          between sibling windows is known as the stacking order.
-
-   State-dependent encoding
-          An encoding in which an invocation of a charset can
-          apply to multiple characters in sequence. A
-          state-dependent encoding begins in an ``initial state''
-          and enters other ``shift states'' when specific ``shift
-          sequences'' are encountered in the byte sequence. In
-          ISO2022 terms, this means use of locking shifts, not
-          single shifts.
-
-   State-independent encoding
-          Any encoding in which the invocations of the charsets
-          are fixed, or span only a single character. In ISO2022
-          terms, this means use of at most single shifts, not
-          locking shifts.
-
-   StaticColor
-          StaticColor can be viewed as a degenerate case of
-          PseudoColor in which the RGB values are predefined and
-          read-only.
-
-   StaticGray
-          StaticGray can be viewed as a degenerate case of
-          GrayScale in which the gray values are predefined and
-          read-only. The values are typically linear or
-          near-linear increasing ramps.
-
-   Status
-          Many Xlib functions return a success status. If the
-          function does not succeed, however, its arguments are
-          not disturbed.
-
-   Stipple
-          A stipple pattern is a bitmap that is used to tile a
-          region to serve as an additional clip mask for a fill
-          operation with the foreground color.
-
-   STRING encoding
-          Latin-1, plus tab and newline.
-
-   String Equivalence
-          Two ISO Latin-1 STRING8 values are considered equal if
-          they are the same length and if corresponding bytes are
-          either equal or are equivalent as follows: decimal
-          values 65 to 90 inclusive (characters ``A'' to ``Z'')
-          are pairwise equivalent to decimal values 97 to 122
-          inclusive (characters ``a'' to ``z''), decimal values
-          192 to 214 inclusive (characters ``A grave'' to ``O
-          diaeresis'') are pairwise equivalent to decimal values
-          224 to 246 inclusive (characters ``a grave'' to ``o
-          diaeresis''), and decimal values 216 to 222 inclusive
-          (characters ``O oblique'' to ``THORN'') are pairwise
-          equivalent to decimal values 246 to 254 inclusive
-          (characters ``o oblique'' to ``thorn'').
-
-   Tile
-          A pixmap can be replicated in two dimensions to tile a
-          region. The pixmap itself is also known as a tile.
-
-   Timestamp
-          A timestamp is a time value expressed in milliseconds.
-          It is typically the time since the last server reset.
-          Timestamp values wrap around (after about 49.7 days).
-          The server, given its current time is represented by
-          timestamp T, always interprets timestamps from clients
-          by treating half of the timestamp space as being earlier
-          in time than T and half of the timestamp space as being
-          later in time than T. One timestamp value, represented
-          by the constant CurrentTime, is never generated by the
-          server. This value is reserved for use in requests to
-          represent the current server time.
-
-   TrueColor
-          TrueColor can be viewed as a degenerate case of
-          DirectColor in which the subfields in the pixel value
-          directly encode the corresponding RGB values. That is,
-          the colormap has predefined read-only RGB values. The
-          values are typically linear or near-linear increasing
-          ramps.
-
-   Type
-          A type is an arbitrary atom used to identify the
-          interpretation of property data. Types are completely
-          uninterpreted by the server. They are solely for the
-          benefit of clients. X predefines type atoms for many
-          frequently used types, and clients also can define new
-          types.
-
-   Viewable
-          A window is viewable if it and all of its ancestors are
-          mapped. This does not imply that any portion of the
-          window is actually visible. Graphics requests can be
-          performed on a window when it is not viewable, but
-          output will not be retained unless the server is
-          maintaining backing store.
-
-   Visible
-          A region of a window is visible if someone looking at
-          the screen can actually see it; that is, the window is
-          viewable and the region is not occluded by any other
-          window.
-
-   Whitespace
-          Any spacing character. On implementations that conform
-          to the ANSI C library, whitespace is any character for
-          which isspace returns true.
-
-   Window gravity
-          When windows are resized, subwindows may be repositioned
-          automatically relative to some position in the window.
-          This attraction of a subwindow to some part of its
-          parent is known as window gravity.
-
-   Window manager
-          Manipulation of windows on the screen and much of the
-          user interface (policy) is typically provided by a
-          window manager client.
-
-   X Portable Character Set
-          A basic set of 97 characters which are assumed to exist
-          in all locales supported by Xlib. This set contains the
-          following characters:
-
-          a..z A..Z 0..9
-          !"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\\]^_`{|}~
-          <space>, <tab>, and <newline>
-
-
-          This is the left/lower half (also called the G0 set) of
-          the graphic character set of ISO8859-1 plus <space>,
-          <tab>, and <newline>. It is also the set of graphic
-          characters in 7-bit ASCII plus the same three control
-          characters. The actual encoding of these characters on
-          the host is system dependent; see the Host Portable
-          Character Encoding.
-
-   XLFD
-          The X Logical Font Description Conventions that define a
-          standard syntax for structured font names.
-
-   XY format
-          The data for a pixmap is said to be in XY format if it
-          is organized as a set of bitmaps representing individual
-          bit planes with the planes appearing from
-          most-significant to least-significant bit order.
-
-   Z format
-          The data for a pixmap is said to be in Z format if it is
-          organized as a set of pixel values in scanline order.
-
-Index
-
-Symbols
-
-   _XAllocScratch, Allocating and Deallocating Memory
-   _XAllocTemp, Allocating and Deallocating Memory
-   _Xdebug, Enabling or Disabling Synchronization
-   _XFlushGCCache, GC Caching
-   _XFreeTemp, Allocating and Deallocating Memory
-   _XReply, Replies
-   _XSetLastRequestRead, Hooks into the Library
-
-A
-
-   Access control list, Controlling Host Access, Glossary
-   Active grab, Pointer Grabbing, Glossary
-   Allocation, Allocating and Freeing Color Cells, Allocating and
-          Freeing Color Cells, Allocating and Freeing Color Cells,
-          Allocating and Freeing Color Cells, Allocating and
-          Freeing Color Cells, Allocating and Freeing Color Cells,
-          Allocating and Freeing Color Cells
-
-        colormap, Allocating and Freeing Color Cells
-        read-only colormap cells, Allocating and Freeing Color
-                Cells, Allocating and Freeing Color Cells,
-                Allocating and Freeing Color Cells, Allocating and
-                Freeing Color Cells
-
-        read/write colormap cells, Allocating and Freeing Color
-                Cells
-
-        read/write colormap planes, Allocating and Freeing Color
-                Cells
-
-   AllPlanes, Display Macros
-   Ancestors, Glossary
-   Arcs, Drawing Single and Multiple Arcs, Filling Single and
-          Multiple Arcs
-
-        drawing, Drawing Single and Multiple Arcs
-        filling, Filling Single and Multiple Arcs
-
-   Areas, Clearing Areas, Copying Areas
-
-        clearing, Clearing Areas
-        copying, Copying Areas
-
-   Atom, Properties and Atoms, Properties and Atoms, Properties
-          and Atoms, Properties and Atoms, Properties and Atoms,
-          Properties and Atoms, Properties and Atoms, Glossary
-
-        getting name, Properties and Atoms, Properties and Atoms
-        interning, Properties and Atoms, Properties and Atoms
-        predefined, Properties and Atoms
-
-   Authentication, Controlling Host Access
-
-B
-
-   Background, Glossary
-   Backing store, Glossary
-   BadAccess, Using the Default Error Handlers
-   BadAlloc, Using the Default Error Handlers
-   BadAtom, Using the Default Error Handlers
-   BadColor, Using the Default Error Handlers
-   BadCursor, Using the Default Error Handlers
-   BadDrawable, Using the Default Error Handlers
-   BadFont, Using the Default Error Handlers
-   BadGC, Using the Default Error Handlers
-   BadIDChoice, Using the Default Error Handlers
-   BadImplementation, Using the Default Error Handlers
-   BadLength, Using the Default Error Handlers
-   BadMatch, Using the Default Error Handlers
-   BadName, Using the Default Error Handlers
-   BadPixmap, Using the Default Error Handlers
-   BadRequest, Using the Default Error Handlers
-   BadValue, Using the Default Error Handlers
-   BadWindow, Using the Default Error Handlers
-   Base font name, Glossary
-   Bit, Glossary, Glossary
-
-        gravity, Glossary
-        plane, Glossary
-
-   Bitmap, Overview of the X Window System, Glossary
-   BitmapBitOrder, Image Format Functions and Macros
-   BitmapPad, Image Format Functions and Macros
-   BitmapUnit, Image Format Functions and Macros
-   BlackPixel, Display Macros
-   BlackPixelOfScreen, Screen Information Macros
-   Bool, Generic Values and Types
-   Border, Glossary
-   Button, Pointer Grabbing, Pointer Grabbing, Glossary
-
-        grabbing, Pointer Grabbing, Glossary
-        ungrabbing, Pointer Grabbing
-
-   ButtonPress, Keyboard and Pointer Events
-   ButtonRelease, Keyboard and Pointer Events
-   Byte, Glossary
-
-        order, Glossary
-
-C
-
-   CallbackPrototype, Input Method Callback Semantics
-   CCC, Color Conversion Contexts and Gamut Mapping, Color
-          Conversion Contexts and Gamut Mapping, Color Conversion
-          Contexts and Gamut Mapping, Color Conversion Context
-          Functions, Color Conversion Context Functions, Getting
-          and Setting the Color Conversion Context of a Colormap,
-          Getting and Setting the Color Conversion Context of a
-          Colormap, Obtaining the Default Color Conversion
-          Context, Obtaining the Default Color Conversion Context,
-          Creating and Freeing a Color Conversion Context,
-          Creating and Freeing a Color Conversion Context
-
-        creation, Creating and Freeing a Color Conversion Context
-        default, Color Conversion Contexts and Gamut Mapping,
-                Color Conversion Context Functions, Obtaining the
-                Default Color Conversion Context, Obtaining the
-                Default Color Conversion Context
-
-        freeing, Creating and Freeing a Color Conversion Context
-        of colormap, Color Conversion Contexts and Gamut Mapping,
-                Color Conversion Context Functions, Getting and
-                Setting the Color Conversion Context of a
-                Colormap, Getting and Setting the Color Conversion
-                Context of a Colormap
-
-   CellsOfScreen, Screen Information Macros
-   Changing, Pointer Grabbing
-
-        pointer grab, Pointer Grabbing
-
-   Character, Glossary
-   Character glyph, Glossary
-   Character set, Glossary
-   Charset, Glossary
-   Child window, Overview of the X Window System
-   Child Window, Obtaining Window Information
-   Children, Glossary
-   Chroma, TekHVC Queries, TekHVC Queries, TekHVC Queries, TekHVC
-          Queries, TekHVC Queries, TekHVC Queries
-
-        maximum, TekHVC Queries, TekHVC Queries, TekHVC Queries
-
-   CIE metric lightness, CIELab Queries, CIELab Queries, CIELab
-          Queries, CIELab Queries, CIELab Queries, CIELab Queries,
-          CIELab Queries, CIELuv Queries, CIELuv Queries, CIELuv
-          Queries, CIELuv Queries, CIELuv Queries, CIELuv Queries,
-          CIELuv Queries
-
-        maximum, CIELab Queries, CIELab Queries, CIELuv Queries,
-                CIELuv Queries
-
-        minimum, CIELab Queries, CIELuv Queries
-
-   CirculateNotify, CirculateNotify Events
-   CirculateRequest, CirculateRequest Events
-   Class, Glossary
-   Clearing, Clearing Areas, Clearing Areas
-
-        areas, Clearing Areas
-        windows, Clearing Areas
-
-   Client, Glossary
-   Client White Point, Color Conversion Contexts and Gamut
-          Mapping, Modifying Attributes of a Color Conversion
-          Context
-
-        of Color Conversion Context, Modifying Attributes of a
-                Color Conversion Context
-
-   ClientMessage, ClientMessage Events
-   ClientWhitePointOfCCC, Color Conversion Context Macros
-   Clipping region, Glossary
-   Coded character, Glossary
-   Coded character set, Glossary
-   Codepoint, Glossary
-   Color, Color Structures, Mapping Color Names to Values, Mapping
-          Color Names to Values, Mapping Color Names to Values,
-          Allocating and Freeing Color Cells, Allocating and
-          Freeing Color Cells, Allocating and Freeing Color Cells,
-          Allocating and Freeing Color Cells, Allocating and
-          Freeing Color Cells, Allocating and Freeing Color Cells,
-          Allocating and Freeing Color Cells, Allocating and
-          Freeing Color Cells, Allocating and Freeing Color Cells,
-          Allocating and Freeing Color Cells, Modifying and
-          Querying Colormap Cells, Modifying and Querying Colormap
-          Cells, Modifying and Querying Colormap Cells, Modifying
-          and Querying Colormap Cells, Modifying and Querying
-          Colormap Cells, Modifying and Querying Colormap Cells,
-          Modifying and Querying Colormap Cells, Modifying and
-          Querying Colormap Cells, Modifying and Querying Colormap
-          Cells, Modifying and Querying Colormap Cells, Converting
-          between Color Spaces
-
-        allocation, Allocating and Freeing Color Cells, Allocating
-                and Freeing Color Cells, Allocating and Freeing
-                Color Cells, Allocating and Freeing Color Cells,
-                Allocating and Freeing Color Cells, Allocating and
-                Freeing Color Cells, Allocating and Freeing Color
-                Cells
-
-        conversion, Converting between Color Spaces
-        deallocation, Allocating and Freeing Color Cells
-        naming, Mapping Color Names to Values, Mapping Color Names
-                to Values, Mapping Color Names to Values,
-                Allocating and Freeing Color Cells, Allocating and
-                Freeing Color Cells, Modifying and Querying
-                Colormap Cells
-
-        querying, Modifying and Querying Colormap Cells, Modifying
-                and Querying Colormap Cells, Modifying and
-                Querying Colormap Cells, Modifying and Querying
-                Colormap Cells
-
-        storing, Modifying and Querying Colormap Cells, Modifying
-                and Querying Colormap Cells, Modifying and
-                Querying Colormap Cells, Modifying and Querying
-                Colormap Cells, Modifying and Querying Colormap
-                Cells
-
-   Color Characterization Data, Creating Additional Function Sets
-   Color conversion, Converting between Color Spaces
-   Color Conversion Context, Color Conversion Contexts and Gamut
-          Mapping, Color Conversion Contexts and Gamut Mapping,
-          Color Conversion Contexts and Gamut Mapping, Color
-          Conversion Contexts and Gamut Mapping, Color Conversion
-          Context Functions, Color Conversion Context Functions,
-          Color Conversion Context Functions, Getting and Setting
-          the Color Conversion Context of a Colormap, Getting and
-          Setting the Color Conversion Context of a Colormap,
-          Obtaining the Default Color Conversion Context,
-          Obtaining the Default Color Conversion Context, Creating
-          and Freeing a Color Conversion Context, Creating and
-          Freeing a Color Conversion Context
-
-        creation, Color Conversion Contexts and Gamut Mapping,
-                Color Conversion Context Functions, Creating and
-                Freeing a Color Conversion Context
-
-        default, Color Conversion Contexts and Gamut Mapping,
-                Color Conversion Context Functions, Obtaining the
-                Default Color Conversion Context, Obtaining the
-                Default Color Conversion Context
-
-        freeing, Creating and Freeing a Color Conversion Context
-        of colormap, Color Conversion Contexts and Gamut Mapping,
-                Color Conversion Context Functions, Getting and
-                Setting the Color Conversion Context of a
-                Colormap, Getting and Setting the Color Conversion
-                Context of a Colormap
-
-   Color map, Color Management Functions, Allocating and Freeing
-          Color Cells
-
-   Colormap, Getting and Setting the Color Conversion Context of a
-          Colormap, Getting and Setting the Color Conversion
-          Context of a Colormap, Glossary
-
-        CCC of, Getting and Setting the Color Conversion Context
-                of a Colormap, Getting and Setting the Color
-                Conversion Context of a Colormap
-
-   ColormapNotify, Colormap State Change Events
-   Colormaps, Standard Colormap Properties and Atoms
-
-        standard, Standard Colormap Properties and Atoms
-
-   ConfigureNotify, ConfigureNotify Events
-   ConfigureRequest, ConfigureRequest Events
-   Connection, Glossary
-   ConnectionNumber, Display Macros
-   Containment, Glossary
-   Coordinate system, Glossary
-   Copying, Copying Areas, Copying Areas
-
-        areas, Copying Areas
-        planes, Copying Areas
-
-   CreateNotify, CreateNotify Events
-   CurrentTime, Event Processing Overview, Pointer Grabbing
-   Cursor, Creating Windows, Creating, Recoloring, and Freeing
-          Cursors, Glossary
-
-        Initial State, Creating Windows
-        limitations, Creating, Recoloring, and Freeing Cursors
-
-   Cut Buffers, Using Cut Buffers
-
-D
-
-   Debugging, Enabling or Disabling Synchronization, Using the
-          Default Error Handlers, Using the Default Error
-          Handlers, Using the Default Error Handlers, Using the
-          Default Error Handlers
-
-        error event, Using the Default Error Handlers
-        error handlers, Using the Default Error Handlers
-        error message strings, Using the Default Error Handlers
-        error numbers, Using the Default Error Handlers
-        synchronous mode, Enabling or Disabling Synchronization
-
-   Default Protection, Controlling Host Access
-   DefaultColormap, Display Macros
-   DefaultColormapOfScreen, Screen Information Macros
-   DefaultDepth, Display Macros
-   DefaultDepthOfScreen, Screen Information Macros
-   DefaultGC, Display Macros
-   DefaultGCOfScreen, Screen Information Macros
-   DefaultRootWindow, Display Macros
-   DefaultScreen, Display Macros
-   DefaultScreenOfDisplay, Display Macros
-   DefaultVisual, Display Macros
-   DefaultVisualOfScreen, Screen Information Macros
-   Depth, Glossary
-   Destination, Manipulating Graphics Context/State
-   DestroyCallback, Destroy Callback, Destroy Callback
-   DestroyNotify, DestroyNotify Events
-   Device, Glossary
-   Device Color Characterization, Function Sets
-   Device profile, Color Conversion Contexts and Gamut Mapping,
-          Creating Additional Function Sets
-
-   DirectColor, Glossary
-   Display, Opening the Display, Obtaining Information about the
-          Display, Image Formats, or Screens, Glossary, Glossary,
-          Glossary
-
-        data structure, Obtaining Information about the Display,
-                Image Formats, or Screens
-
-        structure, Glossary, Glossary
-
-   Display Functions, Manipulating Graphics Context/State
-   DisplayCells, Display Macros
-   DisplayHeight, Image Format Functions and Macros
-   DisplayHeightMM, Image Format Functions and Macros
-   DisplayOfCCC, Color Conversion Context Macros
-   DisplayOfScreen, Screen Information Macros
-   DisplayPlanes, Display Macros
-   DisplayString, Display Macros
-   DisplayWidth, Image Format Functions and Macros
-   DisplayWidthMM, Image Format Functions and Macros
-   DoesBackingStore, Screen Information Macros
-   DoesSaveUnders, Screen Information Macros
-   Drawable, Overview of the X Window System, Glossary
-   Drawing, Drawing Single and Multiple Points, Drawing Single and
-          Multiple Lines, Drawing Single and Multiple Lines,
-          Drawing Single and Multiple Rectangles, Drawing Single
-          and Multiple Arcs, Drawing Complex Text, Drawing Text
-          Characters, Drawing Image Text Characters
-
-        arcs, Drawing Single and Multiple Arcs
-        image text, Drawing Image Text Characters
-        lines, Drawing Single and Multiple Lines
-        points, Drawing Single and Multiple Points
-        polygons, Drawing Single and Multiple Lines
-        rectangles, Drawing Single and Multiple Rectangles
-        strings, Drawing Text Characters
-        text items, Drawing Complex Text
-
-E
-
-   Encoding, Glossary
-   EnterNotify, Window Entry/Exit Events
-   Environment, Opening the Display
-
-        DISPLAY, Opening the Display
-
-   Error, Errors, Using the Default Error Handlers, Using the
-          Default Error Handlers
-
-        codes, Using the Default Error Handlers
-        handlers, Using the Default Error Handlers
-        handling, Errors
-
-   Escapement, Glossary
-   Event, Overview of the X Window System, Event Types, Event
-          Types, Event Types, Selecting Events, Glossary,
-          Glossary, Glossary, Glossary, Glossary, Glossary
-
-        categories, Event Types
-        Exposure, Glossary
-        mask, Glossary
-        propagation, Selecting Events, Glossary
-        source, Glossary
-        synchronization, Glossary
-        types, Event Types
-
-   Event mask, Event Masks
-   EventMaskOfScreen, Screen Information Macros
-   Events, Keyboard and Pointer Events, Keyboard and Pointer
-          Events, Keyboard and Pointer Events, Keyboard and
-          Pointer Events, Keyboard and Pointer Events, Window
-          Entry/Exit Events, Window Entry/Exit Events, Input Focus
-          Events, Input Focus Events, Key Map State Notification
-          Events, Expose Events, GraphicsExpose and NoExpose
-          Events, GraphicsExpose and NoExpose Events,
-          CirculateNotify Events, ConfigureNotify Events,
-          CreateNotify Events, DestroyNotify Events, GravityNotify
-          Events, MapNotify Events, MappingNotify Events,
-          ReparentNotify Events, UnmapNotify Events,
-          VisibilityNotify Events, CirculateRequest Events,
-          ConfigureRequest Events, MapRequest Events,
-          ResizeRequest Events, Colormap State Change Events,
-          ClientMessage Events, PropertyNotify Events,
-          SelectionClear Events, SelectionRequest Events,
-          SelectionNotify Events
-
-        ButtonPress, Keyboard and Pointer Events
-        ButtonRelease, Keyboard and Pointer Events
-        CirculateNotify, CirculateNotify Events
-        CirculateRequest, CirculateRequest Events
-        ClientMessage, ClientMessage Events
-        ColormapNotify, Colormap State Change Events
-        ConfigureNotify, ConfigureNotify Events
-        ConfigureRequest, ConfigureRequest Events
-        CreateNotify, CreateNotify Events
-        DestroyNotify, DestroyNotify Events
-        EnterNotify, Window Entry/Exit Events
-        Expose, Expose Events
-        FocusIn, Input Focus Events
-        FocusOut, Input Focus Events
-        GraphicsExpose, GraphicsExpose and NoExpose Events
-        GravityNotify, GravityNotify Events
-        KeymapNotify, Key Map State Notification Events
-        KeyPress, Keyboard and Pointer Events
-        KeyRelease, Keyboard and Pointer Events
-        LeaveNotify, Window Entry/Exit Events
-        MapNotify, MapNotify Events
-        MappingNotify, MappingNotify Events
-        MapRequest, MapRequest Events
-        MotionNotify, Keyboard and Pointer Events
-        NoExpose, GraphicsExpose and NoExpose Events
-        PropertyNotify, PropertyNotify Events
-        ReparentNotify, ReparentNotify Events
-        ResizeRequest, ResizeRequest Events
-        SelectionClear, SelectionClear Events
-        SelectionNotify, SelectionNotify Events
-        SelectionRequest, SelectionRequest Events
-        UnmapNotify, UnmapNotify Events
-        VisibilityNotify, VisibilityNotify Events
-
-   Expose, Expose Events
-   Extension, Glossary
-
-F
-
-   False, Generic Values and Types
-   Files, Overview of the X Window System, Standard Header Files,
-          Standard Header Files, Standard Header Files, Standard
-          Header Files, Standard Header Files, Standard Header
-          Files, Standard Header Files, Standard Header Files,
-          Standard Header Files, Standard Header Files, Standard
-          Header Files, Standard Header Files, Standard Header
-          Files, Opening the Display, Properties and Atoms, Color
-          Management Functions, Color Management Functions,
-          Manipulating Graphics Context/State, Loading and Freeing
-          Fonts, Controlling Host Access, Event Types, Event
-          Structures, Event Masks, GraphicsExpose and NoExpose
-          Events, Manipulating the Keyboard Encoding, Manipulating
-          the Keyboard Encoding, Setting and Reading the WM_HINTS
-          Property, Setting and Reading the WM_NORMAL_HINTS
-          Property, Setting and Reading the WM_CLASS Property,
-          Setting and Reading the WM_ICON_SIZE Property, Standard
-          Colormap Properties and Atoms, Resource Manager
-          Functions, Using Keyboard Utility Functions, Parsing the
-          Window Geometry, Manipulating Regions, Determining the
-          Appropriate Visual Type, Manipulating Images,
-          Manipulating Images, Using the Context Manager, Setting
-          and Getting Window Sizing Hints, Getting the X
-          Environment Defaults, Drawing and Filling Polygons and
-          Curves, Drawing and Filling Polygons and Curves
-
-        $HOME/.Xdefaults, Getting the X Environment Defaults
-        /etc/X?.hosts, Controlling Host Access
-        <X11/cursorfont.h>, Standard Header Files
-        <X11/keysym.h>, Standard Header Files, Manipulating the
-                Keyboard Encoding
-
-        <X11/keysymdef.h>, Standard Header Files, Manipulating the
-                Keyboard Encoding, Using Keyboard Utility
-                Functions
-
-        <X11/X.h>, Overview of the X Window System, Standard
-                Header Files, Manipulating Graphics Context/State,
-                Event Types, Event Masks
-
-        <X11/X10.h>, Standard Header Files, Drawing and Filling
-                Polygons and Curves, Drawing and Filling Polygons
-                and Curves
-
-        <X11/Xatom.h>, Standard Header Files, Properties and
-                Atoms, Loading and Freeing Fonts, Standard
-                Colormap Properties and Atoms
-
-        <X11/Xcms.h>, Standard Header Files, Color Management
-                Functions
-
-        <X11/Xlib.h>, Standard Header Files, Opening the Display,
-                Color Management Functions, Event Structures,
-                Manipulating Images
-
-        <X11/Xlibint.h>, Standard Header Files
-        <X11/Xproto.h>, Standard Header Files, GraphicsExpose and
-                NoExpose Events
-
-        <X11/Xprotostr.h>, Standard Header Files
-        <X11/Xresource.h>, Standard Header Files, Resource Manager
-                Functions
-
-        <X11/Xutil.h>, Standard Header Files, Setting and Reading
-                the WM_HINTS Property, Setting and Reading the
-                WM_NORMAL_HINTS Property, Setting and Reading the
-                WM_CLASS Property, Setting and Reading the
-                WM_ICON_SIZE Property, Parsing the Window
-                Geometry, Manipulating Regions, Determining the
-                Appropriate Visual Type, Manipulating Images,
-                Using the Context Manager, Setting and Getting
-                Window Sizing Hints
-
-   Filling, Filling Single and Multiple Rectangles, Filling a
-          Single Polygon, Filling Single and Multiple Arcs
-
-        arcs, Filling Single and Multiple Arcs
-        polygon, Filling a Single Polygon
-        rectangles, Filling Single and Multiple Rectangles
-
-   FlushGC, GC Caching
-   FocusIn, Input Focus Events
-   FocusOut, Input Focus Events
-   Font, Font Metrics, Glossary
-   Font glyph, Glossary
-   Fonts, Loading and Freeing Fonts, Loading and Freeing Fonts,
-          Loading and Freeing Fonts
-
-        freeing font information, Loading and Freeing Fonts
-        getting information, Loading and Freeing Fonts
-        unloading, Loading and Freeing Fonts
-
-   Freeing, Window Attributes, Changing Window Attributes,
-          Changing Window Attributes, Allocating and Freeing Color
-          Cells
-
-        colors, Allocating and Freeing Color Cells
-        resources, Window Attributes, Changing Window Attributes,
-                Changing Window Attributes
-
-   Frozen events, Glossary
-   Function set, Function Sets, Function Sets
-
-        LINEAR_RGB, Function Sets
-
-G
-
-   Gamut compression, Color Conversion Contexts and Gamut Mapping,
-          Modifying Attributes of a Color Conversion Context,
-          Modifying Attributes of a Color Conversion Context,
-          Modifying Attributes of a Color Conversion Context
-
-        client data, Modifying Attributes of a Color Conversion
-                Context
-
-        procedure, Modifying Attributes of a Color Conversion
-                Context
-
-        setting in Color Conversion Context, Modifying Attributes
-                of a Color Conversion Context
-
-   Gamut handling, Color Conversion Contexts and Gamut Mapping
-   Gamut querying, Gamut Querying Functions
-   GC, Glossary
-   GeometryCallback, Geometry Callback
-   Glyph, Glossary
-   Glyph image, Glossary
-   Grab, Glossary
-   Grabbing, Grabbing the Server, Pointer Grabbing, Pointer
-          Grabbing, Keyboard Grabbing, Keyboard Grabbing
-
-        buttons, Pointer Grabbing
-        keyboard, Keyboard Grabbing
-        keys, Keyboard Grabbing
-        pointer, Pointer Grabbing
-        server, Grabbing the Server
-
-   Graphics context, Manipulating Graphics Context/State, Glossary
-
-        initializing, Manipulating Graphics Context/State
-
-   GraphicsExpose, GraphicsExpose and NoExpose Events
-   Gravity, Glossary
-   GravityNotify, GravityNotify Events
-   GrayScale, Glossary
-
-H
-
-   Hash Lookup, Associating User Data with a Value
-   Headers, Overview of the X Window System, Standard Header
-          Files, Standard Header Files, Standard Header Files,
-          Standard Header Files, Standard Header Files, Standard
-          Header Files, Standard Header Files, Standard Header
-          Files, Standard Header Files, Standard Header Files,
-          Standard Header Files, Standard Header Files, Standard
-          Header Files, Standard Header Files, Opening the
-          Display, Properties and Atoms, Color Management
-          Functions, Color Management Functions, Manipulating
-          Graphics Context/State, Loading and Freeing Fonts, Event
-          Types, Event Structures, Event Masks, GraphicsExpose and
-          NoExpose Events, Manipulating the Keyboard Encoding,
-          Manipulating the Keyboard Encoding, Setting and Reading
-          the WM_HINTS Property, Setting and Reading the
-          WM_NORMAL_HINTS Property, Setting and Reading the
-          WM_CLASS Property, Setting and Reading the WM_ICON_SIZE
-          Property, Standard Colormap Properties and Atoms,
-          Resource Manager Functions, Using Keyboard Utility
-          Functions, Parsing the Window Geometry, Manipulating
-          Regions, Determining the Appropriate Visual Type,
-          Manipulating Images, Manipulating Images, Using the
-          Context Manager, Setting and Getting Window Sizing
-          Hints, Drawing and Filling Polygons and Curves, Drawing
-          and Filling Polygons and Curves
-
-        <X11/cursorfont.h>, Standard Header Files
-        <X11/keysym.h>, Standard Header Files, Manipulating the
-                Keyboard Encoding
-
-        <X11/keysymdef.h>, Standard Header Files, Manipulating the
-                Keyboard Encoding, Using Keyboard Utility
-                Functions
-
-        <X11/X.h>, Overview of the X Window System, Standard
-                Header Files, Manipulating Graphics Context/State,
-                Event Types, Event Masks
-
-        <X11/X10.h>, Standard Header Files, Drawing and Filling
-                Polygons and Curves, Drawing and Filling Polygons
-                and Curves
-
-        <X11/Xatom.h>, Standard Header Files, Properties and
-                Atoms, Loading and Freeing Fonts, Standard
-                Colormap Properties and Atoms
-
-        <X11/Xcms.h>, Standard Header Files, Color Management
-                Functions
-
-        <X11/Xlib.h>, Standard Header Files, Opening the Display,
-                Color Management Functions, Event Structures,
-                Manipulating Images
-
-        <X11/Xlibint.h>, Standard Header Files
-        <X11/Xproto.h>, Standard Header Files, GraphicsExpose and
-                NoExpose Events
-
-        <X11/Xprotostr.h>, Standard Header Files
-        <X11/Xresource.h>, Standard Header Files, Resource Manager
-                Functions
-
-        <X11/Xutil.h>, Standard Header Files, Setting and Reading
-                the WM_HINTS Property, Setting and Reading the
-                WM_NORMAL_HINTS Property, Setting and Reading the
-                WM_CLASS Property, Setting and Reading the
-                WM_ICON_SIZE Property, Parsing the Window
-                Geometry, Manipulating Regions, Determining the
-                Appropriate Visual Type, Manipulating Images,
-                Using the Context Manager, Setting and Getting
-                Window Sizing Hints
-
-   HeightMMOfScreen, Screen Information Macros
-   HeightOfScreen, Screen Information Macros
-   Host Portable Character Encoding, Glossary
-   Hotspot, Glossary
-
-I
-
-   Identifier, Glossary
-   Image text, Drawing Image Text Characters
-
-        drawing, Drawing Image Text Characters
-
-   ImageByteOrder, Image Format Functions and Macros
-   IMInstantiateCallback, Input Method Functions
-   Inferiors, Glossary
-   Input, Glossary, Glossary
-
-        focus, Glossary
-        manager, Glossary
-
-   Input Control, Event Types
-   Internationalization, Glossary
-   IsCursorKey, KeySym Classification Macros
-   IsFunctionKey, KeySym Classification Macros
-   IsKeypadKey, KeySym Classification Macros
-   IsMiscFunctionKey, KeySym Classification Macros
-   IsModifierKey, KeySym Classification Macros
-   ISO2022, Glossary
-   IsPFKey, KeySym Classification Macros
-   IsPrivateKeypadKey, KeySym Classification Macros
-
-K
-
-   Key, Keyboard Grabbing, Keyboard Grabbing, Glossary
-
-        grabbing, Keyboard Grabbing, Glossary
-        ungrabbing, Keyboard Grabbing
-
-   Keyboard, Keyboard Grabbing, Keyboard Grabbing, Manipulating
-          the Keyboard and Pointer Settings, Manipulating the
-          Keyboard and Pointer Settings, Manipulating the Keyboard
-          and Pointer Settings, Glossary
-
-        bell volume, Manipulating the Keyboard and Pointer
-                Settings
-
-        bit vector, Manipulating the Keyboard and Pointer Settings
-        grabbing, Keyboard Grabbing, Glossary
-        keyclick volume, Manipulating the Keyboard and Pointer
-                Settings
-
-        ungrabbing, Keyboard Grabbing
-
-   KeymapNotify, Key Map State Notification Events
-   KeyPress, Keyboard and Pointer Events
-   KeyRelease, Keyboard and Pointer Events
-   Keysym, Glossary
-
-L
-
-   LastKnownRequestProcessed, Display Macros
-   Latin Portable Character Encoding, Glossary
-   Latin-1, Glossary
-   LeaveNotify, Window Entry/Exit Events
-   Lines, Drawing Single and Multiple Lines
-
-        drawing, Drawing Single and Multiple Lines
-
-   Locale, Glossary
-   Locale name, Glossary
-   Localization, Glossary
-   LockDisplay, Locking Data Structures
-
-M
-
-   MapNotify, MapNotify Events
-   Mapped window, Glossary
-   MappingNotify, MappingNotify Events
-   MapRequest, MapRequest Events
-   MaxCmapsOfScreen, Screen Information Macros
-   Menus, Grabbing the Server
-   MinCmapsOfScreen, Screen Information Macros
-   Modifier keys, Glossary
-   Monochrome, Glossary
-   MotionNotify, Keyboard and Pointer Events
-   Mouse, Manipulating the Keyboard and Pointer Settings
-
-        programming, Manipulating the Keyboard and Pointer
-                Settings
-
-   Multibyte, Glossary
-
-N
-
-   NextRequest, Display Macros
-   NoExpose, GraphicsExpose and NoExpose Events
-   None, Generic Values and Types
-
-O
-
-   Obscure, Glossary
-   Occlude, Glossary
-   Output Control, Event Types
-
-P
-
-   Padding, Glossary
-   Parent Window, Overview of the X Window System, Obtaining
-          Window Information
-
-   Passive grab, Pointer Grabbing, Glossary
-   Pixel value, Manipulating Graphics Context/State, Glossary
-   Pixmap, Overview of the X Window System, Glossary
-   Plane, Manipulating Graphics Context/State, Copying Areas,
-          Glossary, Glossary
-
-        copying, Copying Areas
-        mask, Manipulating Graphics Context/State, Glossary
-
-   PlanesOfScreen, Screen Information Macros
-   Pointer, Pointer Grabbing, Pointer Grabbing, Pointer Grabbing,
-          Glossary, Glossary
-
-        grabbing, Pointer Grabbing, Pointer Grabbing, Glossary
-        ungrabbing, Pointer Grabbing
-
-   Pointing device, Glossary
-   Points, Drawing Single and Multiple Points
-
-        drawing, Drawing Single and Multiple Points
-
-   Polygons, Drawing Single and Multiple Lines, Filling a Single
-          Polygon
-
-        drawing, Drawing Single and Multiple Lines
-        filling, Filling a Single Polygon
-
-   POSIX, Glossary
-   POSIX Portable Filename Character Set, Glossary
-   POSIX System Call, Display Macros
-
-        fork, Display Macros
-
-   PreeditCaretCallback, Preedit Caret Callback
-   PreeditDoneCallback, Preedit State Callbacks
-   PreeditDrawCallback, Preedit Draw Callback
-   PreeditStartCallback, Preedit State Callbacks
-   PreeditStateNotifyCallback, Preedit State Notify Callback
-   Property, Obtaining and Changing Window Properties, Obtaining
-          and Changing Window Properties, Obtaining and Changing
-          Window Properties, Obtaining and Changing Window
-          Properties, Obtaining and Changing Window Properties,
-          Obtaining and Changing Window Properties, Obtaining and
-          Changing Window Properties, Obtaining and Changing
-          Window Properties, Obtaining and Changing Window
-          Properties, Glossary
-
-        appending, Obtaining and Changing Window Properties
-        changing, Obtaining and Changing Window Properties
-        deleting, Obtaining and Changing Window Properties
-        format, Obtaining and Changing Window Properties
-        getting, Obtaining and Changing Window Properties
-        listing, Obtaining and Changing Window Properties
-        prepending, Obtaining and Changing Window Properties
-        replacing, Obtaining and Changing Window Properties
-        type, Obtaining and Changing Window Properties
-
-   Property list, Glossary
-   PropertyNotify, PropertyNotify Events
-   Protocol, Opening the Display, Opening the Display
-
-        DECnet, Opening the Display
-        TCP, Opening the Display
-
-   ProtocolRevision, Display Macros
-   ProtocolVersion, Display Macros
-   PseudoColor, Glossary
-   Psychometric Chroma, CIELab Queries, CIELab Queries, CIELab
-          Queries, CIELab Queries, CIELuv Queries, CIELuv Queries,
-          CIELuv Queries, CIELuv Queries
-
-        maximum, CIELab Queries, CIELab Queries, CIELuv Queries,
-                CIELuv Queries
-
-   Psychometric Hue Angle, CIELab Queries, CIELab Queries, CIELab
-          Queries, CIELab Queries, CIELuv Queries, CIELuv Queries,
-          CIELuv Queries, CIELuv Queries
-
-Q
-
-   QLength, Display Macros
-
-R
-
-   Read-only colormap cells, Allocating and Freeing Color Cells,
-          Allocating and Freeing Color Cells, Allocating and
-          Freeing Color Cells, Allocating and Freeing Color Cells,
-          Allocating and Freeing Color Cells
-
-        allocating, Allocating and Freeing Color Cells, Allocating
-                and Freeing Color Cells, Allocating and Freeing
-                Color Cells, Allocating and Freeing Color Cells
-
-   read-only colormap cells, Allocating and Freeing Color Cells
-   Read/write colormap cells, Allocating and Freeing Color Cells,
-          Allocating and Freeing Color Cells
-
-        allocating, Allocating and Freeing Color Cells
-
-   Read/write colormap planes, Allocating and Freeing Color Cells
-
-        allocating, Allocating and Freeing Color Cells
-
-   Rectangle, Filling Single and Multiple Rectangles, Glossary
-
-        filling, Filling Single and Multiple Rectangles
-
-   Rectangles, Drawing Single and Multiple Rectangles
-
-        drawing, Drawing Single and Multiple Rectangles
-
-   Redirecting control, Glossary
-   ReparentNotify, ReparentNotify Events
-   Reply, Glossary
-   Request, Glossary
-   ResizeRequest, ResizeRequest Events
-   Resource, Glossary
-   Resource IDs, Overview of the X Window System, Overview of the
-          X Window System, Overview of the X Window System,
-          Overview of the X Window System, Overview of the X
-          Window System, Overview of the X Window System, Overview
-          of the X Window System, Closing the Display, Window
-          Attributes, Changing Window Attributes, Changing Window
-          Attributes, Associating User Data with a Value
-
-        Colormap, Overview of the X Window System
-        Cursor, Overview of the X Window System
-        Font, Overview of the X Window System
-        freeing, Window Attributes, Changing Window Attributes,
-                Changing Window Attributes
-
-        GContext, Overview of the X Window System
-        Pixmap, Overview of the X Window System
-        Window, Overview of the X Window System
-
-   RGB values, Glossary
-   Root, Glossary
-   RootWindow, Display Macros
-   RootWindowOfScreen, Screen Information Macros
-
-S
-
-   Save set, Glossary
-   Save Unders, Save Under Flag
-   Scanline, Glossary, Glossary
-
-        order, Glossary
-
-   Screen, Overview of the X Window System, Opening the Display,
-          Glossary, Glossary
-
-        structure, Glossary
-
-   Screen White Point, Gamut Querying Functions
-   ScreenCount, Display Macros
-   ScreenNumberOfCCC, Color Conversion Context Macros
-   ScreenOfDisplay, Display Macros
-   ScreenWhitePointOfCCC, Color Conversion Context Macros
-   Selection, Selections, Selections, Selections, Selections,
-          Glossary
-
-        converting, Selections
-        getting the owner, Selections
-        setting the owner, Selections
-
-   SelectionClear, SelectionClear Events
-   SelectionNotify, SelectionNotify Events
-   SelectionRequest, SelectionRequest Events
-   Serial Number, Using the Default Error Handlers
-   Server, Grabbing the Server, Glossary, Glossary
-
-        grabbing, Grabbing the Server, Glossary
-
-   ServerVendor, Display Macros
-   Shift sequence, Glossary
-   Sibling, Glossary
-   Source, Manipulating Graphics Context/State
-   Stacking order, Overview of the X Window System, Glossary
-   Standard Colormaps, Standard Colormap Properties and Atoms
-   State-dependent encoding, Glossary
-   State-independent encoding, Glossary
-   StaticColor, Glossary
-   StaticGray, Glossary
-   Status, Errors, Glossary
-   StatusDoneCallback, Status Callbacks
-   StatusDrawCallback, Status Callbacks
-   StatusStartCallback, Status Callbacks
-   Stipple, Glossary
-   String Equivalence, Glossary
-   StringConversionCallback, String Conversion Callback
-   Strings, Drawing Text Characters
-
-        drawing, Drawing Text Characters
-
-T
-
-   Text, Drawing Complex Text
-
-        drawing, Drawing Complex Text
-
-   Tile, Overview of the X Window System, Window Attributes,
-          Window Attributes, Glossary
-
-        mode, Window Attributes
-        pixmaps, Window Attributes
-
-   Time, Pointer Grabbing
-   Timestamp, Glossary
-   True, Generic Values and Types
-   TrueColor, Glossary
-   Type, Glossary
-
-U
-
-   Ungrabbing, Pointer Grabbing, Pointer Grabbing, Keyboard
-          Grabbing, Keyboard Grabbing
-
-        buttons, Pointer Grabbing
-        keyboard, Keyboard Grabbing
-        keys, Keyboard Grabbing
-        pointer, Pointer Grabbing
-
-   UnlockDisplay, Locking Data Structures
-   UnmapNotify, UnmapNotify Events
-   UnmapNotify Event, Unmapping Windows, Unmapping Windows
-
-V
-
-   Value, TekHVC Queries, TekHVC Queries, TekHVC Queries, TekHVC
-          Queries, TekHVC Queries, TekHVC Queries, TekHVC Queries,
-          TekHVC Queries
-
-        maximum, TekHVC Queries, TekHVC Queries, TekHVC Queries
-        minimum, TekHVC Queries
-
-   VendorRelease, Display Macros
-   Vertex, Drawing and Filling Polygons and Curves
-   VertexCurved, Drawing and Filling Polygons and Curves
-   VertexDontDraw, Drawing and Filling Polygons and Curves
-   VertexEndClosed, Drawing and Filling Polygons and Curves
-   VertexRelative, Drawing and Filling Polygons and Curves
-   VertexStartClosed, Drawing and Filling Polygons and Curves
-   Viewable, Glossary
-   VisibilityNotify, VisibilityNotify Events
-   Visible, Glossary
-   Visual, Visual Types
-   Visual Classes, Visual Types, Visual Types, Visual Types,
-          Visual Types, Visual Types, Visual Types
-
-        GrayScale, Visual Types
-        PseudoColor, Visual Types
-        StaticColor, Visual Types, Visual Types
-        StaticGray, Visual Types
-        TrueColor, Visual Types
-
-   Visual Type, Visual Types
-   VisualOfCCC, Color Conversion Context Macros
-
-W
-
-   White point, Color Conversion Contexts and Gamut Mapping
-   White point adjustment, Color Conversion Contexts and Gamut
-          Mapping, Modifying Attributes of a Color Conversion
-          Context, Modifying Attributes of a Color Conversion
-          Context, Modifying Attributes of a Color Conversion
-          Context
-
-        client data, Modifying Attributes of a Color Conversion
-                Context
-
-        procedure, Modifying Attributes of a Color Conversion
-                Context
-
-        setting in Color Conversion Context, Modifying Attributes
-                of a Color Conversion Context
-
-   WhitePixel, Display Macros
-   WhitePixelOfScreen, Screen Information Macros
-   Whitespace, Glossary
-   WidthMMOfScreen, Screen Information Macros
-   WidthOfScreen, Screen Information Macros
-   Window, Overview of the X Window System, Display Macros,
-          Display Macros, Window Attributes, Window Attributes,
-          Window Attributes, Creating Windows, Changing Window
-          Attributes, Changing Window Attributes, Changing Window
-          Attributes, Clearing Areas, Grabbing the Server, Setting
-          and Reading the WM_NAME Property, Setting and Reading
-          the WM_ICON_NAME Property, Parsing the Window Geometry,
-          Parsing Window Geometry, Associating User Data with a
-          Value, Glossary, Glossary, Glossary, Glossary, Glossary,
-          Glossary
-
-        attributes, Window Attributes
-        background, Changing Window Attributes
-        clearing, Clearing Areas
-        defining the cursor, Changing Window Attributes
-        determining location, Parsing the Window Geometry, Parsing
-                Window Geometry
-
-        gravity, Glossary
-        icon name, Setting and Reading the WM_ICON_NAME Property
-        IDs, Associating User Data with a Value
-        InputOnly, Creating Windows, Glossary
-        InputOutput, Glossary
-        manager, Glossary
-        managers, Grabbing the Server
-        mapping, Window Attributes
-        name, Setting and Reading the WM_NAME Property
-        parent, Glossary
-        root, Glossary
-        RootWindow, Display Macros
-        undefining the cursor, Changing Window Attributes
-        XRootWindow, Display Macros
-
-X
-
-   X Portable Character Set, Glossary
-   X10 compatibility, Drawing and Filling Polygons and Curves,
-          Drawing and Filling Polygons and Curves, Drawing and
-          Filling Polygons and Curves, Drawing and Filling
-          Polygons and Curves, Drawing and Filling Polygons and
-          Curves, Drawing and Filling Polygons and Curves, Drawing
-          and Filling Polygons and Curves, Drawing and Filling
-          Polygons and Curves, Drawing and Filling Polygons and
-          Curves, Drawing and Filling Polygons and Curves
-
-        XDraw, Drawing and Filling Polygons and Curves, Drawing
-                and Filling Polygons and Curves
-
-        XDrawDashed, Drawing and Filling Polygons and Curves,
-                Drawing and Filling Polygons and Curves
-
-        XDrawFilled, Drawing and Filling Polygons and Curves,
-                Drawing and Filling Polygons and Curves
-
-        XDrawPatterned, Drawing and Filling Polygons and Curves,
-                Drawing and Filling Polygons and Curves
-
-        XDrawTiled, Drawing and Filling Polygons and Curves,
-                Drawing and Filling Polygons and Curves
-
-   X11/cursorfont.h, Standard Header Files
-   X11/keysym.h, Standard Header Files, Manipulating the Keyboard
-          Encoding
-
-   X11/keysymdef.h, Standard Header Files, Manipulating the
-          Keyboard Encoding, Using Keyboard Utility Functions
-
-   X11/X.h, Overview of the X Window System, Standard Header
-          Files, Manipulating Graphics Context/State, Event Types,
-          Event Masks
-
-   X11/X10.h, Standard Header Files, Drawing and Filling Polygons
-          and Curves, Drawing and Filling Polygons and Curves
-
-   X11/Xatom.h, Standard Header Files, Properties and Atoms,
-          Loading and Freeing Fonts, Standard Colormap Properties
-          and Atoms
-
-   X11/Xcms.h, Standard Header Files, Color Management Functions
-   X11/Xlib.h, Standard Header Files, Opening the Display, Color
-          Management Functions, Event Structures, Manipulating
-          Images
-
-   X11/Xlibint.h, Standard Header Files
-   X11/Xproto.h, Standard Header Files, GraphicsExpose and
-          NoExpose Events
-
-   X11/Xprotostr.h, Standard Header Files
-   X11/Xresource.h, Standard Header Files, Resource Manager
-          Functions
-
-   X11/Xutil.h, Standard Header Files, Setting and Reading the
-          WM_HINTS Property, Setting and Reading the
-          WM_NORMAL_HINTS Property, Setting and Reading the
-          WM_CLASS Property, Setting and Reading the WM_ICON_SIZE
-          Property, Parsing the Window Geometry, Manipulating
-          Regions, Determining the Appropriate Visual Type,
-          Manipulating Images, Using the Context Manager, Setting
-          and Getting Window Sizing Hints
-
-   XActivateScreenSaver, Controlling the Screen Saver
-   XAddExtension, Hooking into Xlib
-   XAddHost, Adding, Getting, or Removing Hosts
-   XAddHosts, Adding, Getting, or Removing Hosts
-   XAddPixel, Manipulating Images
-   XAddToExtensionList, Hooks onto Xlib Data Structures
-   XAddToSaveSet, Controlling the Lifetime of a Window
-   XAllocClassHint, Setting and Reading the WM_CLASS Property
-   XAllocColor, Allocating and Freeing Color Cells, Allocating and
-          Freeing Color Cells
-
-   XAllocColorCells, Allocating and Freeing Color Cells,
-          Allocating and Freeing Color Cells
-
-   XAllocColorPlanes, Allocating and Freeing Color Cells,
-          Allocating and Freeing Color Cells
-
-   XAllocID, Hooks onto Xlib Data Structures
-   XAllocIDs, Hooks onto Xlib Data Structures
-   XAllocNamedColor, Allocating and Freeing Color Cells,
-          Allocating and Freeing Color Cells
-
-   XAllowEvents, Resuming Event Processing
-   XAllPlanes, Display Macros
-   XAnyEvent, Event Structures
-   XArc, Drawing Points, Lines, Rectangles, and Arcs
-   XAutoRepeatOff, Manipulating the Keyboard and Pointer Settings
-   XAutoRepeatOn, Manipulating the Keyboard and Pointer Settings
-   XBaseFontNameListOfFontSet, Creating and Freeing a Font Set
-   XBell, Manipulating the Keyboard and Pointer Settings
-   XBitmapBitOrder, Image Format Functions and Macros
-   XBitmapPad, Image Format Functions and Macros
-   XBitmapUnit, Image Format Functions and Macros
-   XBlackPixel, Display Macros
-   XBlackPixelOfScreen, Screen Information Macros
-   XCellsOfScreen, Screen Information Macros
-   XChangeActivePointerGrab, Pointer Grabbing
-   XChangeGC, Manipulating Graphics Context/State
-   XChangeKeyboardControl, Manipulating the Keyboard and Pointer
-          Settings
-
-   XChangeKeyboardMapping, Manipulating the Keyboard Encoding
-   XChangePointerControl, Manipulating the Keyboard and Pointer
-          Settings
-
-   XChangeProperty, Obtaining and Changing Window Properties
-   XChangeSaveSet, Controlling the Lifetime of a Window
-   XChangeWindowAttributes, Changing Window Attributes
-   XChar2b, Font Metrics
-   XCharStruct, Font Metrics
-   XCheckIfEvent, Selecting Events Using a Predicate Procedure
-   XCheckMaskEvent, Selecting Events Using a Window or Event Mask
-   XCheckTypedEvent, Selecting Events Using a Window or Event Mask
-   XCheckTypedWindowEvent, Selecting Events Using a Window or
-          Event Mask
-
-   XCheckWindowEvent, Selecting Events Using a Window or Event
-          Mask, Selecting Events Using a Window or Event Mask
-
-   XCirculateEvent, CirculateNotify Events
-   XCirculateRequestEvent, CirculateRequest Events
-   XCirculateSubwindows, Changing Window Stacking Order
-   XCirculateSubwindowsDown, Changing Window Stacking Order
-   XCirculateSubwindowsUp, Changing Window Stacking Order
-   XClassHint, Setting and Reading the WM_CLASS Property
-   XClearArea, Clearing Areas
-   XClearWindow, Clearing Areas
-   XClientMessageEvent, ClientMessage Events
-   XClipBox, Computing with Regions
-   XCloseDisplay, Closing the Display, Closing the Display
-   XCloseIM, Input Method Functions
-   XCloseOM, Output Method Functions
-   XcmsAddColorSpace, Adding Device-Independent Color Spaces
-   XcmsAddFunctionSet, Adding Function Sets
-   XcmsAllocColor, Allocating and Freeing Color Cells
-   XcmsAllocNamedColor, Allocating and Freeing Color Cells
-   XcmsCCCOfColormap, Getting and Setting the Color Conversion
-          Context of a Colormap
-
-   XcmsCIELab, Color Structures
-   XcmsCIELabQueryMaxC, CIELab Queries
-   XcmsCIELabQueryMaxL, CIELab Queries
-   XcmsCIELabQueryMaxLC, CIELab Queries
-   XcmsCIELabQueryMinL, CIELab Queries
-   XcmsCIELuv, Color Structures
-   XcmsCIELuvQueryMaxC, CIELuv Queries
-   XcmsCIELuvQueryMaxL, CIELuv Queries
-   XcmsCIELuvQueryMaxLC, CIELuv Queries
-   XcmsCIELuvQueryMinL, CIELuv Queries
-   XcmsCIEuvY, Color Structures
-   XcmsCIExyY, Color Structures
-   XcmsCIEXYZ, Color Structures
-   XcmsClientWhitePointOfCCC, Color Conversion Context Macros
-   XcmsColor, Color Structures
-   XcmsCompressionProc, Prototype Gamut Compression Procedure
-   XcmsConvertColors, Converting between Color Spaces
-   XcmsCreateCCC, Creating and Freeing a Color Conversion Context
-   XcmsDefaultCCC, Obtaining the Default Color Conversion Context
-   XcmsDisplayOfCCC, Color Conversion Context Macros
-   XcmsFormatOfPrefix, Querying Color Space Format and Prefix
-   XcmsFreeCCC, Creating and Freeing a Color Conversion Context
-   XcmsLookupColor, Mapping Color Names to Values
-   XcmsPad, Color Structures
-   XcmsParseStringProc, Parse String Callback
-   XcmsPrefixOfFormat, Querying Color Space Format and Prefix
-   XcmsQueryBlack, Red, Green, and Blue Queries
-   XcmsQueryBlue, Red, Green, and Blue Queries
-   XcmsQueryColor, Modifying and Querying Colormap Cells
-   XcmsQueryColors, Modifying and Querying Colormap Cells
-   XcmsQueryGreen, Red, Green, and Blue Queries
-   XcmsQueryRed, Red, Green, and Blue Queries
-   XcmsQueryWhite, Red, Green, and Blue Queries
-   XcmsRGB, Color Structures
-   XcmsRGBi, Color Structures
-   XcmsScreenInitProc, Creating Additional Function Sets
-   XcmsScreenNumberOfCCC, Color Conversion Context Macros
-   XcmsScreenWhitePointOfCCC, Color Conversion Context Macros
-   XcmsSetCCCOfColormap, Getting and Setting the Color Conversion
-          Context of a Colormap
-
-   XcmsSetCompressionProc, Modifying Attributes of a Color
-          Conversion Context
-
-   XcmsSetWhiteAdjustProc, Modifying Attributes of a Color
-          Conversion Context
-
-   XcmsSetWhitePoint, Modifying Attributes of a Color Conversion
-          Context
-
-   XcmsStoreColor, Modifying and Querying Colormap Cells
-   XcmsStoreColors, Modifying and Querying Colormap Cells
-   XcmsTekHVC, Color Structures
-   XcmsTekHVCQueryMaxC, TekHVC Queries
-   XcmsTekHVCQueryMaxV, TekHVC Queries
-   XcmsTekHVCQueryMaxVC, TekHVC Queries
-   XcmsTekHVCQueryMaxVSamples, TekHVC Queries
-   XcmsTekHVCQueryMinV, TekHVC Queries
-   XcmsVisualOfCCC, Color Conversion Context Macros
-   XcmsWhiteAdjustProc, Prototype White Point Adjustment Procedure
-   XColor, Color Structures
-   XColormapEvent, Colormap State Change Events
-   XConfigureEvent, ConfigureNotify Events
-   XConfigureRequestEvent, ConfigureRequest Events
-   XConfigureWindow, Configuring Windows
-   XConnectionNumber, Display Macros
-   XContextDependentDrawing, Obtaining Font Set Metrics
-   XContextualDrawing, Obtaining Font Set Metrics
-   XConvertCase, Using Keyboard Utility Functions
-   XConvertSelection, Selections
-   XCopyArea, Copying Areas
-   XCopyColormapAndFree, Creating, Copying, and Destroying
-          Colormaps
-
-   XCopyGC, Manipulating Graphics Context/State
-   XCopyPlane, Copying Areas
-   XCreateAssocTable, Associating User Data with a Value
-   XCreateBitmapFromData, Manipulating Bitmaps
-   XCreateColormap, Creating, Copying, and Destroying Colormaps
-   XCreateFontCursor, Creating, Recoloring, and Freeing Cursors
-   XCreateFontSet, Creating and Freeing a Font Set
-   XCreateGC, Manipulating Graphics Context/State
-   XCreateGlyphCursor, Creating, Recoloring, and Freeing Cursors
-   XCreateIC, Input Context Functions
-   XCreateImage, Manipulating Images
-   XCreateOC, Output Context Functions
-   XCreatePixmap, Creating and Freeing Pixmaps
-   XCreatePixmapCursor, Creating, Recoloring, and Freeing Cursors
-   XCreatePixmapFromBitmapData, Manipulating Bitmaps
-   XCreateSimpleWindow, Creating Windows
-   XCreateWindow, Creating Windows
-   XCreateWindowEvent, CreateNotify Events
-   XCrossingEvent, Window Entry/Exit Events
-   XDefaultColormap, Display Macros
-   XDefaultColormapOfScreen, Screen Information Macros
-   XDefaultDepth, Display Macros
-   XDefaultDepthOfScreen, Screen Information Macros
-   XDefaultGC, Display Macros
-   XDefaultGCOfScreen, Screen Information Macros
-   XDefaultRootWindow, Display Macros
-   XDefaultScreen, Display Macros
-   XDefaultScreenOfDisplay, Display Macros
-   XDefaultVisual, Display Macros
-   XDefaultVisualOfScreen, Screen Information Macros
-   XDefineCursor, Creating Windows, Changing Window Attributes
-   XDeleteAssoc, Associating User Data with a Value
-   XDeleteContext, Using the Context Manager
-   XDeleteModifiermapEntry, Manipulating the Keyboard Encoding
-   XDeleteProperty, Obtaining and Changing Window Properties
-   XDestroyAssocTable, Associating User Data with a Value
-   XDestroyIC, Input Context Functions
-   XDestroyImage, Manipulating Images
-   XDestroyOC, Output Context Functions
-   XDestroyRegion, Creating, Copying, or Destroying Regions
-   XDestroySubwindows, Destroying Windows
-   XDestroyWindow, Destroying Windows
-   XDestroyWindowEvent, DestroyNotify Events
-   XDirectionalDependentDrawing, Obtaining Font Set Metrics
-   XDisableAccessControl, Changing, Enabling, or Disabling Access
-          Control
-
-   XDisplayCells, Display Macros
-   XDisplayHeight, Image Format Functions and Macros
-   XDisplayHeightMM, Image Format Functions and Macros
-   XDisplayKeycodes, Manipulating the Keyboard Encoding
-   XDisplayMotionBufferSize, Getting Pointer Motion History
-   XDisplayName, Using the Default Error Handlers
-   XDisplayOfIM, Input Method Functions
-   XDisplayOfOM, Output Method Functions
-   XDisplayOfScreen, Screen Information Macros
-   XDisplayPlanes, Display Macros
-   XDisplayString, Display Macros
-   XDisplayWidth, Image Format Functions and Macros
-   XDisplayWidthMM, Image Format Functions and Macros
-   XDoesBackingStore, Screen Information Macros
-   XDoesSaveUnders, Screen Information Macros
-   xDoSomethingReply, Request Format
-   xDoSomethingReq, Request Format
-   XDrawArc, Drawing Single and Multiple Arcs, Drawing Single and
-          Multiple Arcs
-
-   XDrawArcs, Drawing Single and Multiple Arcs, Drawing Single and
-          Multiple Arcs
-
-   XDrawImageString, Drawing Image Text Characters, Drawing Image
-          Text Characters
-
-   XDrawImageString16, Drawing Image Text Characters, Drawing
-          Image Text Characters
-
-   XDrawLine, Drawing Single and Multiple Lines, Drawing Single
-          and Multiple Lines
-
-   XDrawLines, Drawing Single and Multiple Lines, Drawing Single
-          and Multiple Lines, Drawing and Filling Polygons and
-          Curves
-
-   XDrawPoint, Drawing Single and Multiple Points, Drawing Single
-          and Multiple Points
-
-   XDrawPoints, Drawing Single and Multiple Points, Drawing Single
-          and Multiple Points
-
-   XDrawRectangle, Drawing Single and Multiple Rectangles, Drawing
-          Single and Multiple Rectangles
-
-   XDrawRectangles, Drawing Single and Multiple Rectangles,
-          Drawing Single and Multiple Rectangles
-
-   XDrawSegments, Drawing Single and Multiple Lines, Drawing
-          Single and Multiple Lines, Drawing and Filling Polygons
-          and Curves
-
-   XDrawString, Drawing Text Characters
-   XDrawString16, Drawing Text Characters
-   XDrawText, Drawing Complex Text
-   XDrawText16, Drawing Complex Text
-   XEHeadOfExtensionList, Hooks onto Xlib Data Structures
-   XEmptyRegion, Determining if Regions Are Empty or Equal
-   XEnableAccessControl, Changing, Enabling, or Disabling Access
-          Control
-
-   XEnterWindowEvent, Window Entry/Exit Events
-   XEqualRegion, Determining if Regions Are Empty or Equal
-   XErrorEvent, Using the Default Error Handlers
-   XESetBeforeFlush, Hooks into the Library
-   XESetCloseDisplay, Hooks into the Library
-   XESetCopyGC, Hooks into the Library
-   XESetCreateFont, Hooks into the Library
-   XESetCreateGC, Hooks into the Library
-   XESetError, Hooks into the Library
-   XESetErrorString, Hooks into the Library
-   XESetEventToWire, Hooks into the Library
-   XESetFlushGC, Hooks into the Library
-   XESetFreeFont, Hooks into the Library
-   XESetPrintErrorValues, Hooks into the Library
-   XESetWireToError, Hooks into the Library
-   XESetWireToEvent, Hooks into the Library
-   XEvent, Event Structures
-   XEventMaskOfScreen, Screen Information Macros
-   XEventsQueued, Event Queue Management
-   XExposeEvent, Expose Events
-   XExtCodes, Hooking into Xlib
-   XExtData, Hooks onto Xlib Data Structures
-   XExtendedMaxRequestSize, Display Macros
-   XExtentsOfFontSet, Obtaining Font Set Metrics
-   XFetchBuffer, Using Cut Buffers
-   XFetchBytes, Using Cut Buffers
-   XFetchName, Setting and Reading the WM_NAME Property
-   XFillArc, Filling Single and Multiple Arcs, Filling Single and
-          Multiple Arcs
-
-   XFillArcs, Filling Single and Multiple Arcs
-   XFillPolygon, Filling a Single Polygon
-   XFillRectangle, Filling Single and Multiple Rectangles, Filling
-          Single and Multiple Rectangles
-
-   XFillRectangles, Filling Single and Multiple Rectangles,
-          Filling Single and Multiple Rectangles
-
-   XFilterEvent, Event Filtering
-   XFindContext, Using the Context Manager
-   XFindOnExtensionList, Hooks onto Xlib Data Structures
-   XFlush, Handling the Output Buffer
-   XFlushGC, Manipulating Graphics Context/State
-   XFocusChangeEvent, Input Focus Events
-   XFocusInEvent, Input Focus Events
-   XFocusOutEvent, Input Focus Events
-   XFontProp, Font Metrics
-   XFontSetExtents, Obtaining Font Set Metrics
-   XFontsOfFontSet, Creating and Freeing a Font Set
-   XFontStruct, Font Metrics
-   XForceScreenSaver, Controlling the Screen Saver
-   XFree, Freeing Client-Created Data
-   XFreeColormap, Creating, Copying, and Destroying Colormaps
-   XFreeColors, Allocating and Freeing Color Cells
-   XFreeCursor, Creating, Recoloring, and Freeing Cursors
-   XFreeExtensionList, Basic Protocol Support Routines
-   XFreeFont, Loading and Freeing Fonts
-   XFreeFontInfo, Obtaining and Freeing Font Names and Information
-   XFreeFontNames, Obtaining and Freeing Font Names and
-          Information
-
-   XFreeFontPath, Setting and Retrieving the Font Search Path
-   XFreeFontSet, Creating and Freeing a Font Set
-   XFreeGC, Manipulating Graphics Context/State
-   XFreeModifiermap, Manipulating the Keyboard Encoding
-   XFreePixmap, Creating and Freeing Pixmaps
-   XFreeStringList, Converting String Lists
-   XGContextFromGC, Manipulating Graphics Context/State
-   XGeometry, Parsing Window Geometry
-   XGetAtomName, Properties and Atoms
-   XGetAtomNames, Properties and Atoms
-   XGetClassHint, Setting and Reading the WM_CLASS Property
-   XGetCommand, Setting and Reading the WM_COMMAND Property
-   XGetDefault, Getting the X Environment Defaults
-   XGetErrorDatabaseText, Using the Default Error Handlers
-   XGetErrorText, Using the Default Error Handlers
-   XGetFontPath, Setting and Retrieving the Font Search Path
-   XGetFontProperty, Loading and Freeing Fonts
-   XGetGCValues, Manipulating Graphics Context/State
-   XGetGeometry, Obtaining Window Information
-   XGetIconName, Setting and Reading the WM_ICON_NAME Property
-   XGetIconSizes, Setting and Reading the WM_ICON_SIZE Property
-   XGetICValues, Input Context Functions
-   XGetImage, Transferring Images between Client and Server
-   XGetIMValues, Input Method Functions
-   XGetInputFocus, Controlling Input Focus
-   XGetKeyboardControl, Manipulating the Keyboard and Pointer
-          Settings, Manipulating the Keyboard and Pointer Settings
-
-   XGetKeyboardMapping, Manipulating the Keyboard Encoding
-   XGetModifierMapping, Manipulating the Keyboard Encoding
-   XGetMotionEvents, Getting Pointer Motion History
-   XGetNormalHints, Setting and Getting Window Sizing Hints
-   XGetOCValues, Output Context Functions
-   XGetOMValues, Output Method Functions
-   XGetPixel, Manipulating Images
-   XGetPointerControl, Manipulating the Keyboard and Pointer
-          Settings
-
-   XGetPointerMapping, Manipulating the Keyboard and Pointer
-          Settings
-
-   XGetRGBColormaps, Setting and Obtaining Standard Colormaps
-   XGetScreenSaver, Controlling the Screen Saver
-   XGetSelectionOwner, Selections
-   XGetSizeHints, Setting and Getting Window Sizing Hints
-   XGetStandardColormap, Getting and Setting an XStandardColormap
-          Structure
-
-   XGetSubImage, Transferring Images between Client and Server
-   XGetTextProperty, Setting and Reading Text Properties
-   XGetTransientForHint, Setting and Reading the WM_TRANSIENT_FOR
-          Property
-
-   XGetVisualInfo, Determining the Appropriate Visual Type
-   XGetWindowAttributes, Obtaining Window Information
-   XGetWindowProperty, Obtaining and Changing Window Properties
-   XGetWMClientMachine, Setting and Reading the WM_CLIENT_MACHINE
-          Property
-
-   XGetWMColormapWindows, Setting and Reading the
-          WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS Property
-
-   XGetWMHints, Setting and Reading the WM_HINTS Property
-   XGetWMIconName, Setting and Reading the WM_ICON_NAME Property
-   XGetWMName, Setting and Reading the WM_NAME Property
-   XGetWMNormalHints, Setting and Reading the WM_NORMAL_HINTS
-          Property
-
-   XGetWMProtocols, Setting and Reading the WM_PROTOCOLS Property
-   XGetWMSizeHints, Setting and Reading the WM_NORMAL_HINTS
-          Property
-
-   XGetZoomHints, Setting and Getting Window Sizing Hints
-   XGrabButton, Pointer Grabbing
-   XGrabKey, Keyboard Grabbing
-   XGrabKeyboard, Keyboard Grabbing
-   XGrabPointer, Pointer Grabbing
-   XGrabServer, Grabbing the Server
-   XGraphicsExposeEvent, GraphicsExpose and NoExpose Events
-   XGravityEvent, GravityNotify Events
-   XHeightMMOfScreen, Screen Information Macros
-   XHeightOfScreen, Screen Information Macros
-   XHostAddress, Adding, Getting, or Removing Hosts
-   XIconifyWindow, Manipulating Top-Level Windows
-   XIconSize, Setting and Reading the WM_ICON_SIZE Property,
-          Setting and Reading the WM_ICON_SIZE Property
-
-   XID, Generic Values and Types
-   XIfEvent, Selecting Events Using a Predicate Procedure
-   XIMAbsolutePosition, Preedit Caret Callback
-   XImage, Transferring Images between Client and Server
-   XImageByteOrder, Image Format Functions and Macros
-   XIMBackwardChar, Preedit Caret Callback
-   XIMBackwardWord, Preedit Caret Callback
-   XIMCallback, Preedit and Status Callbacks
-   XIMCaretDirection, Preedit Caret Callback
-   XIMCaretDown, Preedit Caret Callback
-   XIMCaretStyle, Preedit Caret Callback
-   XIMCaretUp, Preedit Caret Callback
-   XIMDontChange, Preedit Caret Callback
-   XIMForwardChar, Preedit Caret Callback
-   XIMForwardWord, Preedit Caret Callback
-   XIMHighlight, Preedit Draw Callback
-   XIMInitialState, Reset State
-   XIMLineEnd, Preedit Caret Callback
-   XIMLineStart, Preedit Caret Callback
-   XIMNextLine, Preedit Caret Callback
-   XIMOfIC, Input Context Functions
-   XIMPreeditArea, Query Input Style, Query Input Style
-   XIMPreeditCallbacks, Query Input Style, Query Input Style
-   XIMPreeditCaretCallbackStruct, Preedit Caret Callback
-   XIMPreeditDisable, Preedit State
-   XIMPreeditDrawCallbackStruct, Preedit Draw Callback
-   XIMPreeditEnable, Preedit State
-   XIMPreeditNone, Query Input Style, Query Input Style
-   XIMPreeditNothing, Query Input Style, Query Input Style
-   XIMPreeditPosition, Query Input Style, Query Input Style
-   XIMPreeditStateNotifyCallbackStruct, Preedit State Notify
-          Callback
-
-   XIMPreeditUnknown, Preedit State
-   XIMPreviousLine, Preedit Caret Callback
-   XIMPrimary, Preedit Draw Callback
-   XIMProc, Preedit and Status Callbacks
-   XIMReverse, Preedit Draw Callback
-   XIMSecondary, Preedit Draw Callback
-   XIMStatusArea, Query Input Style, Query Input Style
-   XIMStatusCallbacks, Query Input Style, Query Input Style
-   XIMStatusDataType, Status Callbacks
-   XIMStatusDrawCallbackStruct, Status Callbacks
-   XIMStatusNone, Query Input Style, Query Input Style
-   XIMStatusNothing, Query Input Style, Query Input Style
-   XIMStringConversionCallbackStruct, String Conversion Callback
-   XIMStyle, Query Input Style
-   XIMStyles, Query Input Style
-   XIMTertiary, Preedit Draw Callback
-   XIMText, Preedit Draw Callback
-   XIMUnderline, Preedit Draw Callback
-   XIMVisibleToBackward, Preedit Draw Callback
-   XIMVisibleToCenter, Preedit Draw Callback
-   XIMVisibleToForward, Preedit Draw Callback
-   XInitExtension, Hooking into Xlib
-   XInitImage, Transferring Images between Client and Server
-   XInitThreads, Using Xlib with Threads
-   XINPreserveState, Reset State
-   XInsertModifiermapEntry, Manipulating the Keyboard Encoding
-   XInstallColormap, Managing Installed Colormaps
-   XInternalConnectionNumbers, Using Internal Connections
-   XInternAtom, Properties and Atoms
-   XInternAtoms, Properties and Atoms
-   XIntersectRegion, Computing with Regions
-   XKeyboardState, Manipulating the Keyboard and Pointer Settings
-   XKeycodeToKeysym, Using Keyboard Utility Functions
-   XKeymapEvent, Key Map State Notification Events
-   XKeysymToKeycode, Using Keyboard Utility Functions
-   XKeysymToString, Using Keyboard Utility Functions
-   XKillClient, Killing Clients
-   XLastKnownRequestProcessed, Display Macros
-   XLeaveWindowEvent, Window Entry/Exit Events
-   XLFD, Glossary
-   XlibSpecificationRelease, Standard Header Files
-   XListDepths, Display Macros
-   XListExtensions, Basic Protocol Support Routines
-   XListFonts, Obtaining and Freeing Font Names and Information
-   XListFontsWithInfo, Obtaining and Freeing Font Names and
-          Information
-
-   XListHosts, Adding, Getting, or Removing Hosts
-   XListInstalledColormaps, Managing Installed Colormaps
-   XListPixmapFormats, Image Format Functions and Macros
-   XListProperties, Obtaining and Changing Window Properties
-   XLoadFont, Loading and Freeing Fonts
-   XLoadQueryFont, Loading and Freeing Fonts
-   XLocaleOfFontSet, Creating and Freeing a Font Set
-   XLocaleOfIM, Input Method Functions
-   XLocaleOfOM, Output Method Functions
-   XLockDisplay, Using Xlib with Threads
-   XLookUpAssoc, Associating User Data with a Value
-   XLookupColor, Mapping Color Names to Values
-   XLookupKeysym, Using Keyboard Utility Functions
-   XLookupString, Using Latin-1 Keyboard Event Functions
-   XLowerWindow, Changing Window Stacking Order
-   XMakeAssoc, Associating User Data with a Value
-   XMapEvent, MapNotify Events
-   XMappingEvent, MappingNotify Events
-   XMapRaised, Mapping Windows
-   XMapRequestEvent, MapRequest Events
-   XMapSubwindows, Mapping Windows, Mapping Windows
-   XMapWindow, Window Attributes, Mapping Windows, Mapping Windows
-   XMaskEvent, Selecting Events Using a Window or Event Mask
-   XMatchVisualInfo, Determining the Appropriate Visual Type
-   XMaxCmapsOfScreen, Screen Information Macros
-   XMaxRequestSize, Display Macros
-   XmbDrawImageString, Drawing Text Using Font Sets
-   XmbDrawString, Drawing Text Using Font Sets
-   XmbDrawText, Drawing Text Using Font Sets
-   XmbLookupString, Getting Keyboard Input
-   XmbResetIC, Input Context Functions
-   XmbSetWMProperties, Using Window Manager Convenience Functions
-   XmbTextEscapement, Obtaining Font Set Metrics
-   XmbTextExtents, Obtaining Font Set Metrics
-   XmbTextItem, Drawing Text Using Font Sets
-   XmbTextListToTextProperty, Converting String Lists
-   XmbTextPerCharExtents, Obtaining Font Set Metrics
-   XmbTextPropertyToTextList, Converting String Lists
-   XMinCmapsOfScreen, Screen Information Macros
-   XModifierKeymap, Manipulating the Keyboard Encoding
-   XMoveResizeWindow, Configuring Windows
-   XMoveWindow, Configuring Windows
-   XNArea, Area
-   XNAreaNeeded, Area Needed
-   XNBackground, Foreground and Background
-   XNClientWindow, Client Window
-   XNColormap, Colormap
-   XNCursor, Cursor
-   XNewModifiermap, Manipulating the Keyboard Encoding
-   XNextEvent, Handling the Output Buffer, Returning the Next
-          Event
-
-   XNextRequest, Display Macros
-   XNFilterEvents, Filter Events
-   XNFocusWindow, Focus Window
-   XNFontSet, Font Set
-   XNForeground, Foreground and Background
-   XNGeometryCallback, Geometry Callback
-   XNoExposeEvent, GraphicsExpose and NoExpose Events
-   XNoOp, Generating a NoOperation Protocol Request
-   XNPreeditAttributes, Preedit and Status Attributes
-   XNPreeditCaretCallback, Preedit and Status Callbacks
-   XNPreeditDoneCallback, Preedit and Status Callbacks
-   XNPreeditDrawCallback, Preedit and Status Callbacks
-   XNPreeditStartCallback, Preedit and Status Callbacks
-   XNResourceClass, Resource Name and Class
-   XNResourceName, Resource Name and Class
-   XNSpotLocation, Spot Location
-   XNStatusAttributes, Preedit and Status Attributes
-   XNStatusDoneCallback, Preedit and Status Callbacks
-   XNStatusDrawCallback, Preedit and Status Callbacks
-   XNStatusStartCallback, Preedit and Status Callbacks
-   XNStdColormap, Colormap
-   XOffsetRegion, Moving or Shrinking Regions
-   XOMCharSetList, Required Char Set
-   XOMOfOC, Output Context Functions
-   XOpenDisplay, Opening the Display
-   XOpenIM, Input Method Functions
-   XOpenOM, Output Method Functions
-   XParseColor, Mapping Color Names to Values
-   XParseGeometry, Parsing the Window Geometry
-   XPeekEvent, Returning the Next Event
-   XPeekIfEvent, Selecting Events Using a Predicate Procedure
-   XPending, Handling the Output Buffer, Event Queue Management
-   Xpermalloc, Allocating Permanent Storage
-   XPixmapFormatValues, Image Format Functions and Macros
-   XPlanesOfScreen, Screen Information Macros
-   XPoint, Drawing Points, Lines, Rectangles, and Arcs
-   XPointer, Generic Values and Types
-   XPointInRegion, Locating a Point or a Rectangle in a Region
-   XPolygonRegion, Creating, Copying, or Destroying Regions
-   XProcessInternalConnection, Using Internal Connections
-   XPropertyEvent, PropertyNotify Events
-   XProtocolRevision, Display Macros
-   XProtocolVersion, Display Macros
-   XPutBackEvent, Putting an Event Back into the Queue
-   XPutImage, Transferring Images between Client and Server
-   XPutPixel, Manipulating Images
-   XQLength, Display Macros
-   XQueryBestCursor, Creating, Recoloring, and Freeing Cursors,
-          Creating, Recoloring, and Freeing Cursors
-
-   XQueryBestSize, Setting the Fill Tile and Stipple
-   XQueryBestStipple, Setting the Fill Tile and Stipple
-   XQueryBestTile, Setting the Fill Tile and Stipple
-   XQueryColor, Modifying and Querying Colormap Cells
-   XQueryColors, Modifying and Querying Colormap Cells
-   XQueryExtension, Basic Protocol Support Routines
-   XQueryFont, Loading and Freeing Fonts
-   XQueryKeymap, Manipulating the Keyboard and Pointer Settings
-   XQueryPointer, Translating Screen Coordinates
-   XQueryTextExtents, Querying Character String Sizes
-   XQueryTextExtents16, Querying Character String Sizes
-   XQueryTree, Obtaining Window Information
-   XRaiseWindow, Changing Window Stacking Order
-   XReadBitmapFile, Manipulating Bitmaps
-   XReadBitmapFileData, Manipulating Bitmaps
-   XRebindKeysym, Using Latin-1 Keyboard Event Functions
-   XRecolorCursor, Creating, Recoloring, and Freeing Cursors
-   XReconfigureWMWindow, Manipulating Top-Level Windows
-   XRectangle, Drawing Points, Lines, Rectangles, and Arcs
-   XRectInRegion, Locating a Point or a Rectangle in a Region
-   XRefreshKeyboardMapping, Using Keyboard Utility Functions
-   XRegisterIMInstantiateCallback, Input Method Functions
-   XRemoveConnectionWatch, Using Internal Connections
-   XRemoveFromSaveSet, Controlling the Lifetime of a Window
-   XRemoveHost, Adding, Getting, or Removing Hosts
-   XRemoveHosts, Adding, Getting, or Removing Hosts
-   XReparentEvent, ReparentNotify Events
-   XReparentWindow, Changing the Parent of a Window
-   XResetScreenSaver, Controlling the Screen Saver
-   XResizeRequestEvent, ResizeRequest Events
-   XResizeWindow, Configuring Windows
-   XResourceManagerString, Creating and Storing Databases
-   xResourceReq, Request Format
-   XRestackWindows, Changing Window Stacking Order
-   XrmCombineDatabase, Merging Resource Databases
-   XrmCombineFileDatabase, Merging Resource Databases
-   XrmDatabase, Creating and Storing Databases
-   XrmDestroyDatabase, Creating and Storing Databases
-   XrmEnumerateDatabase, Enumerating Database Entries
-   XrmGetDatabase, Creating and Storing Databases
-   XrmGetFileDatabase, Creating and Storing Databases
-   XrmGetResource, Looking Up Resources
-   XrmGetStringDatabase, Creating and Storing Databases
-   XrmInitialize, Creating and Storing Databases
-   XrmLocaleOfDatabase, Creating and Storing Databases
-   XrmMergeDatabases, Merging Resource Databases
-   XrmOptionDescRec, Parsing Command Line Options
-   XrmOptionKind, Parsing Command Line Options
-   XrmParseCommand, Parsing Command Line Options
-   XrmPermStringToQuark, Quarks
-   XrmPutFileDatabase, Creating and Storing Databases
-   XrmPutLineResource, Storing into a Resource Database
-   XrmPutResource, Storing into a Resource Database
-   XrmPutStringResource, Storing into a Resource Database
-   XrmQGetResource, Looking Up Resources
-   XrmQGetSearchList, Looking Up Resources
-   XrmQGetSearchResource, Looking Up Resources
-   XrmQPutResource, Storing into a Resource Database
-   XrmQPutStringResource, Storing into a Resource Database
-   XrmQuarkToString, Quarks
-   XrmSetDatabase, Creating and Storing Databases
-   XrmStringToBindingQuarkList, Quarks
-   XrmStringToQuark, Quarks
-   XrmStringToQuarkList, Quarks
-   XrmUniqueQuark, Quarks
-   XrmValue, Creating and Storing Databases
-   XRootWindow, Display Macros
-   XRootWindowOfScreen, Screen Information Macros
-   XRotateBuffers, Using Cut Buffers
-   XRotateWindowProperties, Obtaining and Changing Window
-          Properties
-
-   XSaveContext, Using the Context Manager
-   XScreenCount, Display Macros
-   XScreenNumberOfScreen, Screen Information Macros
-   XScreenOfDisplay, Display Macros
-   XScreenResourceString, Creating and Storing Databases
-   XSegment, Drawing Points, Lines, Rectangles, and Arcs
-   XSelectInput, Selecting Events
-   XSelectionClearEvent, SelectionClear Events
-   XSelectionEvent, SelectionNotify Events
-   XSelectionRequestEvent, SelectionRequest Events
-   XSendEvent, Sending Events to Other Applications, Sending
-          Events to Other Applications
-
-   XServerInterpretedAddress, Adding, Getting, or Removing Hosts
-   XServerVendor, Display Macros
-   XSetAccessControl, Changing, Enabling, or Disabling Access
-          Control
-
-   XSetAfterFunction, Enabling or Disabling Synchronization
-   XSetArcMode, Setting the Arc Mode, Subwindow Mode, and Graphics
-          Exposure
-
-   XSetBackground, Setting the Foreground, Background, Function,
-          or Plane Mask
-
-   XSetClassHint, Setting and Reading the WM_CLASS Property
-   XSetClipMask, Setting the Clip Region
-   XSetClipOrigin, Setting the Clip Region
-   XSetClipRectangles, Setting the Clip Region
-   XSetCloseDownMode, Closing the Display
-   XSetCommand, Setting and Reading the WM_COMMAND Property
-   XSetDashes, Setting the Line Attributes and Dashes
-   XSetErrorHandler, Using the Default Error Handlers
-   XSetFillRule, Setting the Fill Style and Fill Rule
-   XSetFillStyle, Setting the Fill Style and Fill Rule
-   XSetFont, Setting the Current Font
-   XSetFontPath, Setting and Retrieving the Font Search Path
-   XSetForeground, Setting the Foreground, Background, Function,
-          or Plane Mask
-
-   XSetFunction, Setting the Foreground, Background, Function, or
-          Plane Mask
-
-   XSetGraphicsExposures, Setting the Arc Mode, Subwindow Mode,
-          and Graphics Exposure
-
-   XSetICFocus, Input Context Functions
-   XSetIconName, Setting and Reading the WM_ICON_NAME Property
-   XSetIconSizes, Setting and Reading the WM_ICON_SIZE Property
-   XSetICValues, Input Context Functions
-   XSetIMValues, Input Method Functions
-   XSetInputFocus, Controlling Input Focus
-   XSetIOErrorHandler, Using the Default Error Handlers
-   XSetLineAttributes, Setting the Line Attributes and Dashes
-   XSetLocaleModifiers, X Locale Management
-   XSetModifierMapping, Manipulating the Keyboard Encoding
-   XSetNormalHints, Setting and Getting Window Sizing Hints
-   XSetOCValues, Output Context Functions
-   XSetOMValues, Output Method Functions
-   XSetPlaneMask, Setting the Foreground, Background, Function, or
-          Plane Mask
-
-   XSetPointerMapping, Manipulating the Keyboard and Pointer
-          Settings
-
-   XSetRegion, Creating, Copying, or Destroying Regions
-   XSetRGBColormaps, Setting and Obtaining Standard Colormaps
-   XSetScreenSaver, Controlling the Screen Saver
-   XSetSelectionOwner, Selections
-   XSetSizeHints, Setting and Getting Window Sizing Hints
-   XSetStandardColormap, Getting and Setting an XStandardColormap
-          Structure
-
-   XSetStandardProperties, Setting Standard Properties
-   XSetState, Setting the Foreground, Background, Function, or
-          Plane Mask
-
-   XSetStipple, Setting the Fill Tile and Stipple
-   XSetSubwindowMode, Setting the Arc Mode, Subwindow Mode, and
-          Graphics Exposure
-
-   XSetTextProperty, Setting and Reading Text Properties
-   XSetTile, Setting the Fill Tile and Stipple
-   XSetTransientForHint, Setting and Reading the WM_TRANSIENT_FOR
-          Property
-
-   XSetTSOrigin, Setting the Fill Tile and Stipple
-   XSetWindowAttributes, Window Attributes
-   XSetWindowBackground, Changing Window Attributes
-   XSetWindowBackgroundPixmap, Changing Window Attributes
-   XSetWindowBorder, Changing Window Attributes
-   XSetWindowBorderPixmap, Changing Window Attributes
-   XSetWindowBorderWidth, Configuring Windows
-   XSetWindowColormap, Changing Window Attributes
-   XSetWMClientMachine, Setting and Reading the WM_CLIENT_MACHINE
-          Property
-
-   XSetWMColormapWindows, Setting and Reading the
-          WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS Property
-
-   XSetWMHints, Setting and Reading the WM_HINTS Property
-   XSetWMIconName, Setting and Reading the WM_ICON_NAME Property
-   XSetWMName, Setting and Reading the WM_NAME Property
-   XSetWMNormalHints, Setting and Reading the WM_NORMAL_HINTS
-          Property
-
-   XSetWMProperties, Using Window Manager Convenience Functions
-   XSetWMProtocols, Setting and Reading the WM_PROTOCOLS Property
-   XSetWMSizeHints, Setting and Reading the WM_NORMAL_HINTS
-          Property
-
-   XSetZoomHints, Setting and Getting Window Sizing Hints
-   XShrinkRegion, Moving or Shrinking Regions
-   XStoreBuffer, Using Cut Buffers
-   XStoreBytes, Using Cut Buffers
-   XStoreColor, Modifying and Querying Colormap Cells
-   XStoreColors, Modifying and Querying Colormap Cells
-   XStoreName, Setting and Reading the WM_NAME Property
-   XStoreNamedColor, Modifying and Querying Colormap Cells
-   XStringListToTextProperty, Converting String Lists
-   XStringToKeysym, Using Keyboard Utility Functions
-   XSubImage, Manipulating Images
-   XSubtractRegion, Computing with Regions
-   XSync, Overview of the X Window System, Overview of the X
-          Window System, Handling the Output Buffer
-
-   XSynchronize, Enabling or Disabling Synchronization
-   XTextExtents, Computing Logical Extents
-   XTextExtents16, Computing Logical Extents
-   XTextItem, Drawing Text
-   XTextItem16, Drawing Text
-   XTextProperty, Converting String Lists
-   XTextPropertyToStringList, Converting String Lists
-   XTextWidth, Computing Character String Sizes, Computing
-          Character String Sizes
-
-   XTextWidth16, Computing Character String Sizes, Computing
-          Character String Sizes
-
-   XTimeCoord, Getting Pointer Motion History
-   XTranslateCoordinates, Translating Screen Coordinates
-   XUndefineCursor, Changing Window Attributes
-   XUngrabButton, Pointer Grabbing
-   XUngrabKey, Keyboard Grabbing
-   XUngrabKeyboard, Keyboard Grabbing
-   XUngrabPointer, Pointer Grabbing
-   XUngrabServer, Grabbing the Server
-   XUninstallColormap, Managing Installed Colormaps
-   XUnionRectWithRegion, Computing with Regions
-   XUnionRegion, Computing with Regions
-   XUnloadFont, Loading and Freeing Fonts
-   XUnlockDisplay, Using Xlib with Threads
-   XUnmapEvent, UnmapNotify Events
-   XUnmapSubwindows, Unmapping Windows
-   XUnmapWindow, Unmapping Windows, Unmapping Windows
-   XUnregisterIMInstantiateCallback, Input Method Functions
-   XUnsetICFocus, Input Context Functions
-   XVaCreateNestedList, Variable Argument Lists
-   XVendorRelease, Display Macros
-   XVisibilityEvent, VisibilityNotify Events
-   XVisualIDFromVisual, Visual Types
-   XWarpPointer, Moving the Pointer
-   XwcDrawImageString, Drawing Text Using Font Sets
-   XwcDrawString, Drawing Text Using Font Sets
-   XwcDrawText, Drawing Text Using Font Sets
-   XwcFreeStringList, Converting String Lists
-   XwcLookupString, Getting Keyboard Input
-   XwcResetIC, Input Context Functions
-   XwcTextEscapement, Obtaining Font Set Metrics
-   XwcTextExtents, Obtaining Font Set Metrics
-   XwcTextItem, Drawing Text Using Font Sets
-   XwcTextListToTextProperty, Converting String Lists
-   XwcTextPerCharExtents, Obtaining Font Set Metrics
-   XwcTextPropertyToTextList, Converting String Lists
-   XWhitePixel, Display Macros
-   XWhitePixelOfScreen, Screen Information Macros
-   XWidthMMOfScreen, Screen Information Macros
-   XWidthOfScreen, Screen Information Macros
-   XWindowAttributes, Obtaining Window Information
-   XWindowChanges, Configuring Windows
-   XWindowEvent, Handling the Output Buffer, Selecting Events
-          Using a Window or Event Mask
-
-   XWithdrawWindow, Manipulating Top-Level Windows
-   XWMGeometry, Parsing the Window Geometry
-   XWriteBitmapFile, Manipulating Bitmaps, Manipulating Bitmaps
-   XXorRegion, Computing with Regions
-   XY format, Glossary
-
-Z
-
-   Z format, Glossary